JP2018068501A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine capable of suppressing properly, an amount of game media which are given in an advantageous section in which a pressing order (and/or operation timing) of a stop switch can be notified.SOLUTION: Main control means shifts a section from a normal section (game state number 0) to an advantageous section (game state number 1-10), and when a game number executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, shifts the section to the normal section even during a bonus game. The main control means basically makes a state a freeze state when the game number executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, however, if the bonus game has been performed, does not make the state the freeze state. The main control means makes the state the freeze state when the bonus game is finished.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine.

  Conventionally, slot machines are widely known as one of gaming machines. In this type of slot machine, when a player inserts a prescribed number of game media such as medals and game balls, the start switch operation becomes effective, and when the player operates the start switch in this state, a lottery drawing is performed. A plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols drawn thereon start to rotate. When the rotation speed of the reel reaches a certain speed, the operation of the stop switch provided for each reel becomes effective, and when the player operates the stop switch, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. The stop control is performed.

  In the reel stop control described above, when any winning combination is won in the winning lottery, within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch is operated so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are aligned on the active line as much as possible. Pull-in control is performed in the range of. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is lost, kicking control is performed so that the symbol combinations corresponding to some combinations are not aligned on the effective line. If all the reels stop and a symbol combination corresponding to any combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, it means that the combination has won a prize, and a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. The

  Also, among the conventional slot machines, for example, as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, when the middle stage cherries are won, the main control board is in a notification-permitted state, and an advantageous notification effect for the player is executed. Some sub-control boards allow it. In this “advantageous notification effect”, when a “bell group” composed of a plurality of roles is won in the role lottery, the player is notified of the pushing order in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts is won by the sub-control board. .

JP 2014-161344 A

  In the conventional slot machine, there is no restriction on the continuation (for example, addition) of the AT game that can notify the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch. There was an opinion that an excessive number of medals may be paid out to AT games, and that the player's gambling feelings are being greatly revered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and appropriately suppresses the amount of game media provided during an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified. It aims to provide a slot machine that can.

In order to solve the problems described above, the present invention provides:
A normal section in which the operation mode (push order and / or operation timing) of the stop switch is not notified,
An advantageous section in which the operation mode (push order and / or operation timing) of the stop switch can be notified,
A counter that counts the number of games played during the advantageous section;
A game section control means for making a transition from the advantageous section to the normal section when the count value reaches a predetermined value during the advantageous section,
The game section control means includes
When the count value reaches a predetermined value while the special game is being performed in the advantageous section, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed while continuing the special game.

  Here, the “special game” corresponds to a so-called bonus game.

  According to the above-described invention, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, so the amount of game media provided in one advantageous section Can be suppressed to an appropriate value, and it can be avoided that the player's gambling spirit is remarkably beaten. Further, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value during the execution of the special game, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, but the special game is continuously performed. For this reason, the special game can be played to the end even after the transition to the normal section, so there is no possibility of giving the player a sense of unnecessary loss.

Further, the present invention provides the above-described invention,
When the special game has not been performed when the count value reaches a predetermined value in the advantageous section, the game enters a freeze state that delays the progress of the game, and the count value reaches the predetermined value in the advantageous section In addition, it is characterized by comprising a freeze control means for not making the freeze state when the special game is being performed.

  According to the above-described invention, when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the frozen state is entered. For this reason, for example, the number of games played during the advantageous section and the amount of game media granted during the advantageous section (for example, the number of medals, etc.) during the freezing state Information relating to the game can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information. On the other hand, when the special game is being performed when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the frozen state is not entered. As a result, the special game is not interrupted in the middle due to the freeze state, and there is no possibility of deteriorating the refreshing feeling when the player is playing the special game.

Further, the present invention provides the above-described invention,
The freeze control means sets the freeze state when the special game ends.

  According to the above-described invention, when the special game is finished, it is in a freeze state. For example, when this special state is in the freeze state, the number of games executed during the special game or given during the special game Information relating to the game played during the special game, such as the amount of game media, can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information.

  In the middle of a special game, if the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, information related to the game performed in the advantageous section described above in the freeze state when the special game ends. It may be presented to the player. In addition, as information presented at this time, a value obtained by adding the number of games executed in the special game in the normal section to the number of games played in the advantageous section, or the amount of game media provided in the advantageous section In addition, a value obtained by adding the amount of game media provided in the special game during the normal section may be presented to the player.

  As described above, according to the slot machine of the present invention, it is possible to moderately suppress the amount of game media provided during an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified.

It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external appearance of the front panel of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the internal structure of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the credit number indicator and ART lamp of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a three-sided view showing an appearance of a hopper of the slot machine. FIG. 44D is an exterior diagram showing an exterior of the main control board case of the slot machine. It is a board | substrate mounting figure which shows the various components mounted in the main control board of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external appearance and display content of the ratio monitor mounted in the main control board of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel with which the slot machine is provided. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is a functional block diagram which shows the functional structure of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of winning combination used as the object of the lottery in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of winning combination used as the object of the lottery in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is a lottery state transition diagram showing the transition of the lottery state in the role lottery of the slot machine and the transition conditions. It is a game section transition diagram showing the transition of the same slot machine gaming section (game state number) and the transition conditions. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect (display aspect) of the operation sequence of the stop switch controlled by the main control means of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of an abnormality (error) that is a detection target in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the LED segment table referred when performing display with the 8-segment display of the slot machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows a part of wiring on the main control board of the slot machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring on the center display board | substrate of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the signal output from each output port of the slot machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating correspondence with the number (digit) corresponding to each 8-segment display and each display LED of the slot machine, and each segment and each display LED of the 8-segment display, and a signal (data) bit It is. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game progress main process for controlling the progress of the game performed by the main control means of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the ratio calculation process performed within the game progress main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the ratio calculation execution process performed within the ratio calculation process of FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control means of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the blink flag production | generation process performed by the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the blink display process performed by the timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a route (route) from a normal section to an advantageous section (in ART) in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; It is a flowchart which shows the content of the sign effect lottery process performed by the sub-control means of the slot machine. In the slot machine, it is explanatory drawing in order to explain the flow of the production until after winning the bonus combination during the normal section until winning. In the slot machine, it is explanatory drawing in order to explain the flow of the production until after winning the bonus combination in the advantageous section until winning. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect performed in the state where the bonus is not elected in the advantageous area of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect performed in the state where the bonus was elected in the advantageous area of the slot machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 shows an external perspective view of a slot machine 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a main body 12 that houses various devices, and a front door 14 that can be opened and closed on the front side (player side) of the main body 12. A front panel 20 is provided substantially at the center of the front door 14, and a display window 21 is formed at the approximate center thereof as shown in FIG. Three reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are rotatably provided inside the main body 12 so that the design of each reel can be visually recognized from the display window 21.

  The reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are installed such that the rotation axes are aligned on the same straight line in the horizontal direction. Each reel has a ring shape, and a strip-shaped reel tape on which one symbol is printed is attached to each of 20 symbol areas equally divided on the outer peripheral surface thereof. When the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, three symbols that are continuous along the rotation direction of each reel among the twenty symbols printed on each reel can be visually recognized from the display window 21. ing. As a result, a total of 9 symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 21. Here, among the three consecutive symbols that are stopped and displayed when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the position at which the uppermost symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as the stop display position) is the upper U, center. The position where the symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the middle M, and the position where the lowermost symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the lower D.

  Whether or not any winning combination is won when the three reels are stopped depends on a combination of symbols stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop display position (hereinafter referred to as “design combination”) among the nine symbols described above. A line connecting these stop display positions is called a winning line. In the present embodiment, when the game is performed in a state where the prescribed number is “3” and three medals are betted (three medals are bet), the upper stage U and the middle reel 40C of the left reel 40L. It is determined whether or not a winning combination is made according to the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the middle M and the lower D (winning line La) of the right reel 40R. However, during a bonus game (also referred to as a bonus game) started by winning 1BB-A among a plurality of bonus combinations described later, the prescribed number is “2” and two medals are bet ( When a game is played in a state where two medals have been betted), the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper stage U of the left reel 40L, the lower stage D of the middle reel 40C, and the upper stage U (winning line Lb) of the right reel 40R. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. Thus, the winning line can be changed to a predetermined line according to the number of betted game media.

  In the following, when it is simply described that “the symbol combination is stopped and displayed” or “the symbol combination is complete”, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line (that is, the winning combination is won). ) Means. The stop display position that is a winning line is also referred to as a “winning stop position”.

  In addition to the display window 21, the front panel 20 is provided with various lamps and a display for notifying the player of various information regarding the game. First, the left side of the display window 21 is provided with an ART lamp ARTLP (also referred to as an AT lamp ATLP) that is turned on during ART described later. The light source of the ART lamp ARTLP is two LEDs 29a and 29b (described later) provided on the rear surface of the front panel 20, and the light of these LEDs transmits through the light-transmitting region indicated by the broken line in FIGS. It emits light.

  In FIG. 2, on the lower side of the display window 21, in order from the left, a game start display lamp 25 (hereinafter referred to as “game start display LED 25”), insertion display lamps 26a, 26b, and 26c (hereinafter referred to as “input display LED 26a”). , 26b, 26c "), credit number display 27 (hereinafter also referred to as" credit number display 27 "and" stored number display 27 "), and acquired number display 28 (hereinafter referred to as" payout number display "). 28 ”), a rechargeable display lamp 24 (hereinafter referred to as“ releasable display LED24 ”), a replay display lamp 23 (hereinafter referred to as“ replay display LED23 ”), and a clearing display lamp 22 ( Hereinafter, “clearing display LED 22”) is provided. The game start display LED 25 is turned on when the operation of the start switch 36 shown in FIG. 1 can be accepted, and is turned off when it is in any other state. The insertion display LEDs 26a, 26b and 26c display the number of medals bet. Here, when one medal is bet, the one-insertion display LED 26a is turned on. When two medals are bet, the one-insertion display LED 26a and the two-insertion display LED 26b are turned on, and three medals are displayed. When a bet is placed, the 1-sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 26c are lit.

  A medal to bet to play a game in the slot machine 10 is a kind of game medium. The game medium is not limited to a medal, but may be a game ball (so-called pachinko ball), or information indicating the value recorded on a recording medium such as a magnetic card, a non-contact IC card, or a coin incorporating an IC chip. It may be. The slot machine 10 can be played once when a prescribed number of medals are bet. The prescribed number in this embodiment is basically three, but the prescribed number is two only in 1BB-A games (described later) among a plurality of bonus games.

  The credit number display 27 is a 2-digit 8-segment display and is credited (hereinafter also referred to as “storage”) in the slot machine 10 (more specifically, stored data described later can be rewritten). The number of medals (upper limit is 50) stored in a non-volatile memory (RWM: read / write memory) is displayed. Here, as shown to Fig.4 (a), an 8-segment display is a display which consists of segment ag and segment DP. The shapes of the segments a to g are linear, and the shape of the segment DP (the light emitting surface of the segment DP) is a circle having a diameter of 1 mm. The lower-digit segment DP of the credit amount display 27 is used as an advantageous section lamp (hereinafter also referred to as “advantage section LED”, “advantage section display”, or “section display”). The segments a to g are also referred to as a 7-segment display portion, and the segment DP is also referred to as a dot segment display portion.

  In FIG. 4 (a), only the lower digits of the credit number display 27 show the signs of the segments a to g and the segment DP, but the same reference numerals are assigned to the segments in the other 8-segment displays. It is assumed that The acquired number display 28 is composed of a 2-digit 8-segment display, and displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player according to the game result. Of course, when the segment DP is used for some purpose, it is necessary to adopt an 8-segment display composed of the segments a to g and the segment DP. However, when the segment DP is not used, the segment DP is composed of the segments a to g. A 7-segment display may be employed. In addition, the 8-segment display and the 7-segment display are collectively referred to as “segment display”.

  In FIG. 2, the insertable display LED 24 is turned on when the slot machine 10 accepts insertion of medals, and is turned off when the insertion of medals is not accepted. The re-game display LED 23 is turned on when the next game is a re-game, and is turned off when the re-game is finished. The clearing display LED 22 is lit while the credited medal is paid out by operating the clearing switch 33 shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 1, on the lower side of the front panel 20 described above, there is provided an operation panel portion 30 that is formed substantially horizontally over the entire width of the slot machine 10 and protrudes toward the player. A door key 31 that locks or unlocks the front door 14 with respect to the main body 12 is provided on the right front side of the operation panel 30. In the present embodiment, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the door key 31 and rotated clockwise (rotated clockwise toward the front door 14), the front door 14 is unlocked and rotated counterclockwise (front door). 14), and an abnormal state (hereinafter also referred to as “error state”) can be canceled (reset).

  A medal insertion slot 32 for inserting medals into the slot machine 10 is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 30. In addition, a selector 80 (to be described later) for selecting inserted medals is provided inside the slot machine 10, and a medal sensor (insertion sensor) in the selector 80 is inserted from the medal insertion slot 32. Is detected, a medal detection signal is output to the main control means 100 described later. Based on the input medal detection signal, the main control means 100 counts the number of inserted medals and detects anomalies such as fraudulent behavior when inserting medals (hereinafter also referred to as “error detection”). ing.

  On the left side of the upper surface of the operation panel 30, bet switches 34 and 35 for betting credited medals on the slot machine 10 (in other words, setting a bet amount) are provided. Each time the 1-bet switch 34 is operated, only one of the credited medals is bet as a game betting target. The maximum bet switch 35 bets the medals up to the maximum number (specified number) that can be bet in the current game among the credited medals as the betting targets of the game. Further, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 with a prescribed number of medals being betted, the inserted medal is credited (stored in the RWM). Note that when a predetermined number of medals are bet and a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 in a state where the number of credits (stored in the RWM) reaches the upper limit (50), the medal will be described later. The medal payout opening 60 returns the tray 61.

  Between the medal slot 32 and the maximum bet switch 35, a selection switch 38 and a determination switch 39 for a player to input information to the slot machine 10 are provided. The selection switch 38 is composed of four switches: an upper switch, a lower switch, a left switch, and a right switch that specify the vertical and horizontal directions. Then, any one of an upward direction, a downward direction, a left direction, and a right direction is designated corresponding to the operated switch. The decision switch 39 is formed of a member that transmits light, and a light source such as an LED is provided therein. The character “PUSH” is printed on the upper surface (operation surface) of the decision switch 39.

  A start switch 36 is tiltably provided on the front left side of the operation panel 30. The start switch 36 is activated when the player bets a prescribed number of medals on the slot machine 10. However, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a re-game to be described later is arranged (wins) on the winning line, in the next game (re-game), the game in which the re-game player (also referred to as “replay role”) wins. The bets are automatically bet as many as the number of medals bet in the game, and the insertion display LEDs 26a, 26b, and 26c are turned on for the number of bets, and the operation of the start switch 36 for performing the next game is effective. Become. When a medal is inserted into the medal slot 32 in this state, the medal may be returned to the tray 61 or credited until the upper limit (50) is reached.

  Further, when the re-game player wins, the number of medals automatically bet on the next game may be determined according to the game state. For example, if a game is executed with two bets in the first game state (the specified number of SB games is “2”) and a re-game player wins a prize in the game, Since the game state is (the specified number of normal games is “3”), automatic betting processing for three cards is executed.

  When the player operates the start switch 36 in a state where the operation of the start switch 36 is valid, the three reels 40L, 40C, and 40R start to rotate. As a result, the symbols printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are changed (scrolled) from the top to the bottom in the display window 21 as a general rule. In some cases, the display may vary from top to bottom. The freeze effect is an effect that is executed in a state in which the progress of the game is delayed. In particular, when the progress of the game is delayed immediately after the start switch is operated, the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are appropriately rotated. Thus, it is possible to execute a freeze effect (hereinafter also referred to as “reel effect”) that enhances the interest of the game. As a reel production, for example, the reel is rotated in the direction opposite from the normal rotation direction (from top to bottom) (from bottom to top), or the reel is rotated from top to bottom or from bottom to top by a predetermined number of symbols. To display a specific symbol combination in a stopped state, rotate other reels while a predetermined reel is stopped, change the rotation speed of the reels, or change the reels according to the player's operation. The operation may be changed.

  Stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are provided in the center of the front surface of the operation panel 30 so as to correspond to the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. Here, the stop switches 37L, 37C and 37R are so-called self-illuminated push button switches, and have a structure in which the light emission color can be changed while the portion of the push button emits light. For example, when a stop switch operation is disabled (not acceptable), the push button part of the stop switch is lit red, and blue when the operation is enabled (acceptable) It becomes a luminescent color. Stop switches 37L, 37C and 37R are used on condition that the rotation speed of reels 40L, 40C and 40R has reached a predetermined steady rotation speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute, also simply referred to as “constant speed”). The operation of becomes effective. While the player's operation on the stop switch is disabled, the stop switch may be turned off instead of emitting red light.

  Further, when the left stop switch 37L is pushed during the game, the stop control of the left reel 40L is performed in the game to stop the rotation, and when the middle stop switch 37C is pushed, the middle reel 40C When the stop control is performed and the rotation is stopped and the right stop switch 37R is pushed, the stop control of the right reel 40R is performed and the rotation is stopped. In the following, operating the stop switch is referred to as “stop operation”, and after all reels start rotating, the first stop operation is the first stop operation, the second stop operation is the second stop operation, and the last This stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. When the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the center positions of three consecutive symbol areas that are stopped and displayed on the display window 21 among the twenty symbol areas set on the outer peripheral surface of each reel are the upper U , Stop so as to coincide with the center positions of the middle stage M and the lower stage D. Here, the position where the center position of the symbol area coincides with the center position of the stop display position is referred to as a fixed position.

  A clearing switch 33 is provided on the left side of the operation panel 30. If operated during the reception period, all bets and medals that have been bet are paid out, and the credit number display 27 displays Becomes “0”. Here, the term “clearing” may be written as “settlement”. During the reception period described above, for example, after all reels have stopped (when medals are paid out, after the medals have been paid out), a prescribed number of medals are bet and the start switch 36 is operated. Until the time.

  When the clearing switch 33 described above is operated once, the bet medals and all medals that have been credited are paid out. For example, when the clearing switch 33 is operated when there is a betted medal or a credited medal, only the betted medal is paid back, and this state (the medal is not betted). In the state), when the clearing switch 33 is operated again, all credited medals may be paid out. In addition, when the re-playing role is won in a certain game and it becomes possible to re-play in the next game, when the clearing switch 33 is operated, only the credited medal is refunded, It is recommended that the replay be executed as it is.

  A lower panel 50 on which a model name of the slot machine 10 and characters adopted as a motif are drawn is arranged below the operation panel 30. A left side lamp 52L is provided on the left side of the lower panel 50, and a right side lamp 52R is provided on the right side. The side lamps 52L and 52R are decorative lamps that blink (or turn on) according to a predetermined pattern in accordance with a game standby (hereinafter also referred to as “non-game”) or according to a game result. A medal payout opening 60 for paying out medals to the player is provided at a substantially lower center of the lower panel 50.

  For example, when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, if the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line L corresponds to a winning combination (also referred to as “small role”), the winning combination is supported. The number of medals is credited (stored in the RWM), or the hopper 83 (specifically, the hopper motor 46) described later is operated, and among the medals stored in the hopper 83, it corresponds to the winning winning combination. The number of medals to be paid out. When the clearing switch 33 is operated in a state where medals are credited, the credited medals are paid out. The medals paid out from the medal payout opening 60 are stored in the tray 61. On the right side and the left side of the medal payout opening 60, sound transmission holes 62R and 62L are provided for allowing sounds emitted from speakers 64R and 64L (described later) housed inside the slot machine 10 to pass outside. Yes.

  An image display device 70 composed of a liquid crystal display panel is provided on the upper portion of the front panel 20. The image display device 70 is not limited to a liquid crystal display panel, and any other display device can be used as long as the player can visually recognize image information and text information during a game or a non-game. . This image display device 70 is a game history image (so-called game history screen) for displaying the total number of games (also referred to as the total number of games), the total number of bonus winnings, etc., and a game after a password is entered. Two-dimensional code image (so-called two-dimensional code screen) for displaying the two-dimensional code including the number of times (also called the number of games) and the number of bonus winnings, etc., and for demonstrations displayed during game standby Image (so-called demo screen), effect image (so-called effect screen) for notifying the result of the role lottery and the operation mode of the stop switch (operation timing or operation sequence, etc.), progress of the slot machine game (betting medals → start Effect image (so-called effect) according to operation of the switch 36 → reel rotation → operation of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R → stop of rotation of all reels It is possible to display a face) or the like.

  Above the image display device 70, the reels 40L, 40C, 40R are stopped, and when a winning combination is won, or a medal is likely to be paid out (for example, during a bonus game or ART, for the player) An effect lamp 72 that blinks (or lights up) in a predetermined pattern is provided depending on the case where it is in an advantageous state. A left decorative lamp 72L is provided on the left side of the effect lamp 72, and a right decorative lamp 72R is provided on the right side. Similarly to the side lamps 52L and 52R, the decoration lamps 72L and 72R are decorative lamps that blink (or turn on) according to a predetermined pattern in accordance with a game standby or game result.

<Description of the internal structure of the slot machine>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 3, the same components as those shown in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front door 14 is opened, and illustrates the back side (inside the casing) of the front door 14 and the inside of the main body 12.

  In FIG. 3, sub-control means 200 for controlling the execution of the game effect performed in the slot machine 10 is housed in the case above the front door 14 and behind the image display device 70 shown in FIG. It is attached. The sub-control unit 200 includes a sub-control board and an image control board described later. Each of these control boards includes a circuit including electronic components such as a CPU and other ICs mounted on a printed board. In FIG. 3, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the right side of the display window 21, and the LEDs 29a and 29b are light sources of the ART lamp ARTLP shown in FIGS. The shape of the light emitting surface of the LEDs 29a and 29b is a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 4B, and the dimension of the light emitting surface is 1.2 mm long × 4 mm wide. Therefore, the area of the light emitting surface of the ART lamp ARTLP is larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit number indicator 27.

  Further, the light emission area of the ART lamp ARTLP shown in FIG. 2 (the broken line portion in FIG. 2) is larger than the light emission area of the segment DP of the credit number indicator 27 used as the advantageous interval LED. The ART lamp ARTLP is easier for the player to visually recognize than the LED. As a method for making the ART lamp ARTLP easier to see than the advantageous section LED, the ART lamp ARTLP may be lit brighter than the advantageous section LED instead of increasing the area of the light emitting surface or the light emitting area. . In this case, the area of the light emitting surface or light emitting region of the ART lamp ARTLP may be smaller than that of the advantageous section LED, or the area of both light emitting surfaces or light emitting regions may be the same.

  Thus, the advantageous section LED is less noticeable than the ART lamp ARTLP. That is, it is easy for the player to make a transition during ART, but it is difficult for the player to make a transition to the advantageous section (transition to the advantageous section). It is effective when the reason for providing the advantageous section LED is not to make it easier for the player to understand that the transition to the advantageous section is made. For example, there is a case where a transition to an advantageous section is provided to make it easier for the staff of the game hall to understand. However, this is not the case when the reason why the advantageous section LED is provided is to make it easier for the player to understand that the transition to the advantageous section is made. In such a case, it is preferable to make the advantageous section LED stand out from the ART lamp ARTLP (or make it stand out as much as the ART lamp ARTLP).

  Even if a conventional slot machine wins a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery”) that determines whether or not to start an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch, In most cases, the fact that the player has won the AT lottery is triggered by the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played since the game that has won the AT lottery. This is because it was thought that the player's sense of expectation for the AT game cannot be given for a long period of time if the game was won in the AT lottery.

  For this reason, some players who have won the AT lottery have stopped playing the game without noticing that (before notifying that they have won the AT lottery). . In particular, the trend was seen by beginners. On the other hand, there are those who are not willing to win the AT lottery with their own power from the end, and find a slot machine that has already won the AT lottery by playing only a predetermined number of games and play a game. Under these circumstances, the person who played the game when winning the AT lottery (the person who won the AT lottery) did not play the AT game, and a third party who did not contribute to the AT lottery There was a voice that it might be absurd to play games.

  In order to respond to such a voice, without realizing that the player has won a transition lottery that determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified, There was a need to provide a slot machine that can reduce the risk of stopping.

  In general, when most players stop playing a game, they check if there are no medals remaining in their credits. Then, when a medal remains in the credit, the settlement switch 33 is operated. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section shift lottery is won, the advantageous section LED is lit before the operation of the clearing switch 33 becomes effective. However, the case where the next game is shifted not to the advantageous section but to the waiting section described later is excluded. Thus, before the player operates the checkout switch 33 (stops the game), it can be notified that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won, so erroneously (not aware that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won). Stopping the game can be deterred.

  In the present embodiment, the unused segment (segment DP) of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED. Thereby, when the player confirms that no medal remains in the credit, it can be confirmed whether or not the advantageous section shift lottery is won at the same time. Furthermore, by using the unused segment of the credit amount display 27, it is not necessary to provide a separate LED, and the cost does not increase.

  In recent years, the number of slot machines with high accuracy (easy to shift during ART) and the probability of shifting during ART is increasing rapidly, but most of the slot machines installed at amusement halls are set to low setting values. There were complaints that it was quite high and did not shift to ART. Also, in some slot machines, if set to a high setting value, over 10,000 medals may be paid out in one ART, although rarely. The voice was raised.

  Therefore, in order to make the probability of shifting to high accuracy or ART difficult to be biased by the set value, the winning probability of the role (winning number) determined by the role lottery that is a condition for shifting to high accuracy or ART is the set value. And the winning probability of the transfer lottery for shifting to the high accuracy corresponding to the determined combination and the ART is determined to be the same according to the set value. In addition, in order to prevent excessive medals from being paid out due to a series of games, the situation of staying in a special state related to AT such as high accuracy and ART is excessive. The limit for staying in the state was decided.

  Based on these, in order to distinguish between a special state related to AT such as high accuracy and ART and other states, a “normal section”, an “advantageous section”, and a “standby section” are provided as game sections in this embodiment.

  “Regular section” means information that can grasp the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the game in which the result of the winning lottery in which the advantage / disadvantage is generated depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, winning number, winning / This is a game section in which transmission of a re-game winning number) to the sub control board is prohibited, and a game section in which notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is prohibited. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (or waiting section) to be described later based on a predetermined combination in which the winning probability of the combination (winning number) determined by the combination lottery is the same by the set value. It is a game section.

  “Advantageous section” refers to information (for example, winning number, winning / It is a game section in which a re-game winning number) can be transmitted to the sub-control board and a section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified. Also, as one of the conditions for ending the advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the “normal section” on the condition that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). It is a game section.

  The “standby section” refers to a game section when the player has a right to shift from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section” but has not yet shifted to the “advantageous section”. Specifically, when a bonus combination (in this embodiment, such as 1BB-A to F, where the winning information (or the operating state of the conditional device) is carried over after the next game) is won, “normal” A game section that can be transferred only when a lottery that shifts from “section” to “advantage section” is won, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning bonus combination is The “standby section” ends and the “advantage section” starts from the next game.

  Also, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery in which the advantage / disadvantage is generated by the operation mode of the stop switch is determined in the standby section, information that can grasp the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, This is a game section in which transmission of a winning number or a winning / replay winning number) to the sub-control board is prohibited, and a game section in which notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is prohibited. The “standby section” should originally be shifted to the “advantageous section”, but if it is shifted to the “advantageous section”, an inconvenient event may occur. It can be said that it is a game section that has been suspended. For this reason, if there is no possibility that an inconvenient event occurs, it is possible to shift to the “advantageous section” without shifting to the “standby section”. Incidentally, an inconvenient event is that the winning number can be determined at an unintended timing by turning on the advantageous section LED.

  The segment DP in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 may be used as the advantageous section LED. In this case, when the acquisition number display 28 is provided in the vicinity of the decision switch 39 and it is decided to shift from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone LED is lit before the operation of the decision switch 39 becomes effective. Is preferred. Thereby, for example, when the determination switch 39 is operated during non-game, in the slot machine 10 that displays the game history screen on the image display device 70, it is difficult for the player to overlook the lighting of the advantageous section LED.

  Specifically, when the determination switch 39 is operated during non-game, a menu screen is displayed on the image display device 70. Under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, it is possible to select which screen to display next from among the game history screen, the password input screen for entering a password, and the two-dimensional code screen by operating the selection switch 38. It has become. That is, when the player finishes the game, the player activates the two-dimensional code reader provided in the portable terminal and operates the decision switch 39 to obtain the two-dimensional code. Since the acquired number display 28 is provided in the vicinity of the determination switch 39, when the determination switch 39 is operated, since the acquired number display 28 is in the field of view, the advantageous section LED is lit. If so, it can be said that it is rare to notice the lighting. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being finished without noticing that the next game is shifted to the advantageous section. Of course, even when the segment DP of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous interval LED, the credit amount indicator 27 is provided in the vicinity of the determination switch 39, and when it is decided to shift from the normal interval to the advantageous interval, It is preferable to light the advantageous section LED before the operation of the decision switch 39 becomes effective.

  The selector 80 described above is provided below the display window 21, and a regular medal is selected from medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 shown in FIG. For example, when the external dimensions and material of the inserted medal do not meet a predetermined standard, the medal is guided to the return passage 81a connected to the medal payout opening 60 of FIG. On the other hand, when the external dimensions and material of the inserted medal conform to a predetermined standard, the receiving passage 81b for sending the medal to a medal storage part 83a (a container for storing the medal) of the hopper 83 described later. Lead to.

  The selector 80 includes a first insertion sensor 48a, a second insertion sensor 48b, and a medal passage sensor 49, and detects abnormalities related to detection of medals guided to the receiving passage 81b by these sensors and insertion of medals. ing. For example, the abnormality relating to the inserted medal is determined based on the time difference in which the medal is detected by the first insertion sensor 48a and the second insertion sensor 48b, the detection order, and the like. If the medal passage sensor 49 continues to detect medals for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that a medal clogging has occurred in the selector 80. Speakers 64R and 64L are attached to the lower side of the front door 14 at the positions of the sound transmission holes 62R and 62L shown in FIG.

  Next, inside the main body 12, a door switch 44 that detects opening / closing of the front door 14 is attached to the front upper right. Here, in FIG. 3, the door switch 44 is provided on the main body 12 side, but may be provided on the front door 14 side. A main control board case 102 that houses a main control board 101 that constitutes a hardware part of the main control means 100 that controls the game is attached inside the main body 12 and above the back plate.

  An external concentrated terminal board 86 is installed below the door switch 44. The external concentration terminal board 86 outputs a signal including information related to the game being played in the slot machine 10 to various external devices (a so-called hall computer, a game history display device installed in the game hall, etc.). It is a relay board for doing. A reel unit that encloses the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R is installed at substantially the center in the main body 12. Inside the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R for rotating the corresponding reels respectively, and spinning cylinder sensors 43L and 43C for detecting the reference positions (described later) of the corresponding reels. , 43R are provided.

  A power supply unit 82, a hopper 83, and a medal auxiliary storage 84 are arranged in order from the left side in FIG. The power supply unit 82 converts the input AC 100V into a plurality of types of DC voltages, and supplies them to various devices included in the slot machine 10. Further, on the front panel surface of the power supply unit 82, a power switch 82a that is a rocker switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10 is provided on the upper left side. Further, a key switch 82b is provided on the right side of the power switch 82a so as to make it possible to change a so-called set value. A push button type setting / reset switch 82c is provided below the power switch 82a. This setting / reset switch 82c is used to restart the game progress (control process) when the game progress (control process) is forcibly stopped due to detection of various abnormalities (excluding some abnormalities) to be described later. ) To be started.

  Note that when the key is turned counterclockwise in the door key 31 shown in FIG. 1, the same effect as when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated is exhibited. The key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c described above correspond to switching means that can be switched between an off state (first state) and an on state (second state). The door key 30 also corresponds to switching means that can switch between a state where the key is neutral (first state) and a state where the key is turned counterclockwise to release the error (second state). To do. The key switch 82 b and the setting / reset switch 82 c are attached to the power supply unit 82 provided in the main body 12, but may be attached to the back side of the front door 14. As described above, since the key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c are provided inside the casing including the main body 12 and the front door 14, the operation becomes difficult when the front door 14 is closed. Yes. Also, “difficult to operate” means that, for example, when the front door 14 is closed, it must be operated by an illegal act using a wire or a rod-like member, or the front door 14 is open. It also includes the meaning that the door switch 44 cannot be detected by an illegal act and the front door 14 must be opened and operated.

  The hopper 83 is a device that pays out medals when a small role is won as a result of a game or when a credited medal is returned to the player. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, when the rotary disk 83b is rotated by the hopper motor 46, the medals stored in the medal storage section 83a jump out one by one from the discharge port 83c. A payout passage 81c connected to the medal payout outlet 61 is provided on the back surface of the front door 14, and a medal that has jumped out from the discharge port 83c jumps into a medal hole 81d formed in the payout passage 81c. The medal is paid out to the tray 61. In the hopper 83, a first payout sensor 47a and a second payout sensor 47b for detecting a discharged medal are provided in the vicinity of the discharge port 83c. Based on the output signals of these payout sensors, the main control means 100 counts the medals that have been paid out and detects an abnormality related to the payout of medals.

  The medal storage unit 83a of the hopper 83 can store about 700 medals. However, when more than an allowable amount of medals is accumulated, medals overflow from the overflow chute 83d provided in the medal storage unit 83a. It is accommodated in the 3 medal auxiliary storage 84. The medal auxiliary storage 84 is a box-like member having an opening K on the upper surface as shown in FIG. 3, and the vertical wall surface on the back side of the medal auxiliary storage 84 has an opening K as shown in FIG. 3. A total of three round holes 84a are drilled, two near and one near the bottom. When the medal auxiliary storage 84 is placed at a predetermined position in the main body 12, the two rod-like electrodes 85 a attached to the main body 12 and the one rod-like electrode 85 b correspond to each other. The medal auxiliary storage 84 is inserted through the round hole 84a.

  As a result, when medals are accumulated in the medal auxiliary storage 84 and the medals are accumulated up to the position of the rod-shaped electrode 85a, the rod-shaped electrodes 85a and 85b are electrically connected by the conductivity of the medal itself. To do. The main control means 100 detects that the stored medal has reached the upper limit by detecting this conduction. Note that the number of the rod-shaped electrodes shown in FIG. 3 is two near the opening K and one near the bottom, but the number is not limited to this. There may be a total of two near one, or two near the opening K and two near the bottom.

<Main control board case>
Next, the external appearance of the main control board case 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (a) is a front view of the main control board case 102, FIG. 6 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 6 (c) is a cross-sectional view. 4 is a perspective view of a main control board case 102. FIG.

  In FIG. 6A, the protrusion 104a formed on the right side of the front surface is engaged with the claws formed on the bracket 16 (see FIG. 3) fixed to the back plate of the main body 12 (or in the mounting hole). In the inserted state, the fixtures 105a and 105b (see FIG. 6C) provided on the left side of the main control board case 102 are pushed into the bracket 16 side. As a result, the tips of the fixtures 105 a and 105 b are fitted into mounting holes (not shown) provided in the bracket 16, and the main control board case 102 is temporarily fixed to the bracket 16. In other words, the bracket 16 is a support portion when the main control board case 102 is attached to the slot machine 10.

  The main control board case 102 is composed of a case main body 102a made of a transparent plastic member and a case lid body 102b. As shown in FIG. 6B, the main control board 101 is accommodated therein. Further, on the front surface of the main control board case 102, a display window YM of the role ratio monitor 103 to be described later and an area to which a caulking use recording seal 108 is attached are formed. The display window YM is a recess formed at the installation position (mounting position) of the role ratio monitor 103, and the bottom surface of the recess is rectangular. This is because the display surface of the role monitor 103 and the surface of the main control board case 102 are brought as close as possible, so that when the display of the role monitor 103 is visually recognized, extraneous light is exposed to the surface of the main control board case 102. This is to prevent the display of the role ratio monitor 103 from being reflected and being difficult to see.

  However, if the distance between the display window YM and the display screen of the role ratio monitor 103 is too small, the role ratio monitor 103 is broken by an illegal action (for example, the display window YM of the main control board case 102 is pushed). There is a risk that the main control board case 102 may be charged with static electricity due to fraud, and the role monitor 103 may be adversely affected. For this reason, it is desirable that the distance between the display window YM and the display surface of the role ratio monitor 103 is 0.5 mm at the minimum. The horizontal dimension of the display window YM is preferably wider by 1 mm on the left and right with respect to the lateral width of the role ratio monitor 103. This is because if the horizontal dimension is the same as the horizontal width of the role ratio monitor 103, the display of the role ratio monitor 103 may be difficult to see depending on the angle at which the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the short side wall of the display window YM has a left side wall vertical in the figure, whereas the right side wall A is provided with an inclination θ. Yes. This is because the front right side of the front door 14 is opened because the hinge of the front door 14 is on the left side of the front of the housing, so that the main control board case 102 remains attached to the bracket 16. The role ratio monitor 103 is visually recognized from the front right side of 102. Therefore, by providing the inclination θ on the side wall A, the display of the role monitor 103 can be made difficult to be hidden by the edge c of the display window YM.

  Of course, since the bracket 16 may be in any position, when the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed from the front left side of the main control board case 102 (the bracket 16 is fixed to the left side plate of the main body 12). In this case, it is preferable to provide an inclination on the left side wall, and when the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed from the front upper side or the front lower side of the main control board case 102 (the bracket 16 is below the back plate of the main body 12). Or in the case of being fixed upward), it is preferable to provide an inclination on the upper or lower side wall. Note that one or more (up to four) side walls may be provided with an inclination. Here, the appropriate angle of the inclination θ is desirably a value within a range of 25 degrees to 60 degrees. When the angle is less than 25 degrees, the visibility decreases when the role ratio monitor 103 is confirmed with the front door 14 opened. If the angle exceeds 60 degrees, the description will be made with reference to FIG. 6A. Since the position of the caulking use recording sticker 108 is on the right side, the arrangement position (mounting position) of the microcomputer chip Z1 and the switch monitor ML ) (In order not to be placed (mounted) under the position where the caulking use recording seal 108 is attached).

  In addition, the main control board case 102 is provided with a plurality of caulking housing portions for housing caulking members (not shown). The caulking member is for leaving a trace when the main control board case 102 is opened or the main control board case 102 is removed from the bracket 16. In addition, once the caulking member is accommodated, each caulking housing portion cannot be removed unless the caulking housing portion itself is destroyed. 6A and 6C, the caulking housing portion 107a provided in the case lid body 102b accommodates a caulking member that caulks the case main body 102a and the case lid body 102b of the main control board case 102. Specifically, the case main body 102a is provided with a caulking attachment portion (not shown) for slidingly attaching the caulking member. The caulking member is provided on the case lid 102b after being attached to the caulking attachment portion. When the caulking member is accommodated in the caulking housing portion 107a, the case main body 102a and the case lid body 102b are caulked by the claws formed on the caulking member fitting into the holes formed in the caulking housing portion 107a. Thus, in order to open the main control board case 102 and take out the main control board 101, it is necessary to destroy the caulking housing portion 107a.

  Hereinafter, the caulking member accommodated in the caulking accommodating portion 107a is referred to as caulking member A (not shown). Similarly, the caulking members accommodated in the caulking accommodating portions 107b, 107c, and 107f are caulked member B (not illustrated). That's it.

  The caulking housing portions 107b and 107f (indicated as “B” and “F” in the figure) provided on the case lid 102b accommodate caulking members that caulk the main control board case 102 and the bracket 16. Specifically, the bracket 16 is provided with a caulking attachment portion (not shown) for slidingly attaching the caulking member, and after the caulking member is attached to the caulking attachment portion, the caulking provided on the case lid 102b. When the caulking member is accommodated in the accommodating portions 107b and 107f, the claws formed on the caulking member are fitted into the holes formed in the caulking accommodating portions 107b and 107f, so that the case lid body 102b and the bracket 16 are caulked. .

  Thus, in order to remove the main control board case 102 from the bracket 16, it is necessary to destroy the caulking housing portions 107b and 107f using a tool such as a screwdriver. Further, the caulking housing portion 107c (indicated as “C” in the drawing) provided in the case lid 102b accommodates the caulking member B that is removed when the main control board case 102 is recovered. Therefore, in order to avoid accidentally destroying the role monitor 103 when destroying the caulking housing portion, it is preferable that the role monitor 103 is not mounted in the vicinity of the caulking housing portion. Actually, as shown in FIGS. 6A, 6B, and 6C, the role monitor 103 is not mounted in the vicinity of the caulking housing portion 107a, and the caulking housing portions 107b, 107c, and 107f are not mounted. The main control board side connector CN1 is mounted in the vicinity, and the role monitor 103 is not mounted.

  That is, “the vicinity of the caulking housing portion” means that the distance between the caulking housing portion and the role ratio monitor 103 is too short, and other components (such as the main control board side connector CN1, etc., excluding extremely small components) are excluded. ) Means a state in which no one can be mounted.

  Further, the wire harness of the harness side connector fitted to the main control board side connector CN1 is routed in the direction (left side) of the caulking accommodating portions 107b, 107c, 107f so as not to hide the display of the role monitor 103. (A connector cover may be used) As a result, the visibility of the caulking housing portions 107b, 107c, and 107f is lowered. The fact that the caulking housing portion is destroyed is a serious problem (there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed), so at least the position of the caulking housing portion 107b is set so that the visibility of the caulking member B is not lowered. It is preferable that it is provided above the caulking housing part in the figure. By doing in this way, since the wire harness hangs down by the weight of the wire harness itself, the caulking housing portion 107b cannot be seen.

  Further, in order to leave a history of which caulking housing portion has been used, a caulking use recording seal 108 is affixed to the front surface and substantially the center of the main control board case 102. In the caulking use record sticker 108 shown in FIGS. 6A and 6C, the date and time when the caulking accommodating portion is used and the caulking for each type of caulking accommodating portion (“B”, “C”, “F”). There is an entry field for the name of the person in charge. After the slot machine 10 is manufactured (at the time of factory shipment), the caulking housing portion 107b is used first. The caulking housing part 107b is destroyed at the time of on-site inspection after installation in the game hall, and the caulking housing part 107f is used next after the inspection.

  Although not shown, a seal seal is affixed across the case main body 102a and the case lid 102b of the main control board case 102. The seal seal is covered with a seal seal cover on which the protrusion 104a and the protrusion 104b are formed. This seal seal is for leaving a trace when the main control board case 102 is opened. For example, when the seal sticker is mistakenly attached by the manufacturer, it is malicious. When a person performs an illegal act on the main control board 101, a solvent may be used to peel off the seal. At this time, since the solvent rarely enters the main control board case 102, “solvent danger” indicating the range where the solvent that has entered the case may reach the main control board 101. An "area" is provided. In the present embodiment, as shown by hatching in FIG. 7, the solvent danger area DE is provided on the right side of the microcomputer chip Z <b> 1 mounted on the main control board 101.

<Mounting parts of main control board>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the main components among the components mounted on the main control board 101 housed in the main control board case 102 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, on the main control board 101, a microcomputer chip Z1 (hereinafter also referred to as “microprocessor Z1”), oscillators G1, G2, and a set value display 87 including an 8-segment display, A role monitor 103, a segment driver SD which is a driving IC for various 8-segment displays, and digit drivers DD1 and DD2 are mounted. Various other components such as various ICs, a plurality of resistors R, a capacitor C and a Zener diode ZD, a switch monitor ML for checking on / off of a digital signal, and a main control board side connector CN1 are also mounted. Yes.

  The microcomputer chip Z1 includes a CPU, a ROM (read only memory), an RWM (read / write memory), a random number circuit (random number generation means), a timer circuit (timer count means), an I / O port, and the like. And controls each part of the slot machine 10 based on programs and data stored in the ROM. Hereinafter, when it is simply referred to as CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit or timer circuit, or when it is referred to as CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit or timer circuit of the main control means 100, it is provided in the microcomputer chip Z1. Refers to things. As can be seen from FIGS. 3 and 7, the microcomputer chip Z <b> 1 is mounted on the main control board 101 on the open side (right side in FIGS. 3 and 7) of the front door 14 from the front center of the slot machine 10.

  This is because the role monitor 103 and the main control board side connector CN1 are mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 rather than the front center as will be described later. In other words, many signals output from the microcomputer chip Z1 cannot drive other devices (for example, an 8-segment display) as they are, and most signals are output to an external IC. It is necessary to convert to a signal with specifications (voltage value, current value, etc.) suitable for the device. Therefore, in order to provide a space for mounting a driving IC for the role ratio monitor 103 at least between the microcomputer chip Z1 and the role ratio monitor 103, a distance between the microcomputer chip Z1 and the role ratio monitor 103 is provided. Need to put. Further, the microcomputer chip Z1 is hidden by the above-described caulking use record sticker 108 since it is visually confirmed whether or not the regular microcomputer chip Z1 is mounted after the slot machine 10 is installed in the game hall. It cannot be mounted at the position where it will end up. Therefore, when the microcomputer chip Z1 is to be mounted so as to satisfy these conditions, the opening side of the front door 14 is the optimum position from the front center.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the oscillators G1 and G2 output various clock signals to the microcomputer chip Z1. Specifically, the oscillator G1 generates a random number update clock signal for updating a random number generated in the microcomputer chip Z1, and the oscillator G2 generates a system clock signal for operating the CPU in the microcomputer chip Z1. To do. Note that all random numbers generated in the microcomputer chip Z1 need not be updated based on the update clock signal, but may be performed based on the system clock signal. For example, the random number used for the role lottery is updated based on the random number update clock signal, but the random number used for other lottery may be updated based on the system clock signal. Further, all the random numbers generated in the microcomputer chip Z1 may be updated based on the system clock signal without mounting the oscillator G1. These oscillators G1 and G2 are mounted as close as possible to the microcomputer chip Z1 so as to make it difficult for noise to appear in the output clock signal, and the wiring between the oscillators G1 and G2 and the microcomputer chip Z1 is made as short as possible. Is preferred.

  The switch monitor ML is composed of 20 LEDs, and each LED is turned on or off according to the on / off state of a digital signal (a signal output when the start switch 36 is operated, etc.) associated with the LED. To do. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the components and wirings on the path of each digital signal and the on / off state of the digital signal are normal. Therefore, the switch monitor ML is mounted on the main control board 101 at a position that is not hidden by the caulking use recording seal 108 described above. Moreover, when the light of each LED which comprises switch monitor ML is strong, there exists a possibility that the visibility of the role ratio monitor 103 mentioned later may fall with the light. For this reason, it is preferable not to mount the switch monitor ML near the role monitor 103.

  The term “in the vicinity of the role monitor” here refers to a state where the light of the switch monitor ML reaches the role monitor 103 and / or another component (between the role monitor 103 and the switch monitor ML). However, it is an IC or the like, excluding components that are extremely small (size that cannot block light). The same applies hereinafter.) A state in which no component is mounted (a state in which light is not blocked by another component). . However, the switch monitor ML may be mounted in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103 if there is no risk that the light of the switch monitor ML will deteriorate the visibility of the role ratio monitor 103. In this case, since the display of the role ratio monitor 103 and the switch monitor ML can be simultaneously included in the field of view, for example, it is possible to reduce the trouble of confirming the slot machine 10 installed in the game hall.

The role monitor 103 is provided to make it easier to confirm that the slot machine 10 has not been tampered with after the slot machine 10 is installed. A plurality of information relating to the gaming state is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), it consists of four 8-segment displays, and the 8-segment display of the lower two digits (two on the right side in FIG. 8 (a)) has various ratios ( It is a ratio display part RA that displays a numerical value that represents a value that will be described later, and the upper two digits (two on the left side in FIG. 8A) are the types of ratios displayed on the ratio display part RA ( Hereinafter, it is also an identifier display part ID for displaying “identifier”. The area of the display screen of the role ratio monitor 103 satisfies the relationship of M × N ÷ 4 ≧ 36 mm ² where N is the vertical dimension and M is the horizontal dimension.

  In this way, the role ratio monitor 103 is mounted on the main control board 101 at a position that is not hidden by the above-described caulking use recording sticker 108 so that the display contents can be viewed at any time as necessary. . Further, when the display on the role ratio monitor 103 is visually confirmed, since it is confirmed from the open side of the front door 14 (the right side of the front view of FIG. 7 (the microcomputer chip Z1 side)), the position where the caulking use recording sticker 108 is attached If a role ratio monitor is mounted on the side of this, a part of the display of the role ratio monitor 103 may be hidden behind the caulking use recording sticker 108 depending on the viewing angle. For this reason, it is preferable that the role ratio monitor 103 is mounted away from the position where the caulking use recording seal 108 is attached.

  Note that the appearance of the role ratio monitor 103 shown in FIG. 8A is that four eight segment indicators are arranged in a horizontal row and the identifier display portion ID and the ratio display portion RA are arranged in the horizontal direction. Not limited to this, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, two 8 segment indicators are arranged in two horizontal rows (2 × 2), and the upper two 8 segment indicators are displayed as identifier display units. ID, the lower two eight-segment display may be used as the ratio display RA. In this case, the segment DP on the lower digit side of the two upper eight segment indicators is lit.

  Further, since a main control board side connector CN1 described later is mounted on the hinge side (left side in FIG. 7) of the front door 14 from the center of the main control board 101, the role monitor 103 is also provided accordingly. It is mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 from the center of 101. This is because the wiring of the main control board 101 is efficiently formed. Specifically, the role monitor 103 is mounted on the wiring path between the duty ratio monitor driving IC and the main control board side connector CN1, thereby efficiently improving the wiring path formed on the board. Can do.

  Therefore, the role monitor 103 is preferably mounted in the vicinity of the main control board side connector CN1 and the drive IC for the role monitor. Here, “the vicinity of the main control board side connector CN1 and the drive IC for the ratio monitor” means between the ratio monitor 103 and the main control board side connector CN1, and between the ratio monitor 103 and the ratio. This means a state in which no other IC is mounted between the driving IC for monitoring (however, the resistor R and the capacitor C may be mounted). Further, since the ratio monitor 103 is a reusable component (a component that can be removed and mounted on another main control board), the main monitor should not be exposed to the solvent used when the sealing seal described above is peeled off. On the control board 101, it is mounted outside the solvent danger area.

  When the role monitor 103 cannot secure an area for mounting on the main control board 101, for example, the role monitor 103 itself or a small printed board on which the role monitor 103 is mounted is replaced with the main control board. It may be mounted perpendicular to 101. By doing in this way, while reducing the area | region for mounting the ratio monitor 103, the display content of the ratio monitor 103 can be made hard to see for a player etc. This is because the display does not face the front by mounting vertically. Further, the role ratio monitor 103 may be mounted at a place other than the main control board 101 (inside the casing of the slot machine 10). Further, the duty ratio of the drive signal for turning on the 8-segment display constituting the role ratio monitor 103 may be changed. With this configuration, the brightness of the display of the role ratio monitor 103 can be adjusted, and the display content of the role ratio monitor 103 can be made difficult for the player to see.

  It should be noted that there is a board manufacturer name displayed on the main control board 101 by silk printing, etching, laser marking or the like, which is preferably not in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103 other than the parts. Generally, a board manufacturer name is displayed on the main control board 101 in order to prove that it is not an unauthorized board, and the board manufacturer name is displayed on the main control board 101 at a place with high visibility. It is preferable. Since the main body of the role ratio monitor 103 has a certain height, if the board manufacturer name is displayed near the role ratio monitor 103, it may be hidden by the role ratio monitor 103 depending on the viewing angle. There is a possibility. Therefore, it is preferable that the display of the board manufacturer name is not in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103. In particular, when displaying the name of the board manufacturer by laser marking, it is preferable that the part is not in the vicinity of the role monitor 103 because all parts are mounted after mounting. This is because the role monitor 103 may be broken during laser marking.

  In addition, a plurality of board manufacturers may use a common main control board. In this case, the main control board (different from FIG. 7) displays a plurality of board manufacturer names, and each board manufacturer name can cut off the display of the board manufacturer name other than itself. Specifically, a part of the main control board can be excised, and the name of each board manufacturer is displayed there. Even in such a case, it is preferable that the display of the board manufacturer name is not in the vicinity of the role monitor 103. As a result, when the display of the name of another board manufacturer is removed, the role monitor 103 does not get in the way, and a load is applied to the portion where the role monitor 103 is soldered during the removal. Therefore, the possibility that the role ratio monitor 103 is removed from the substrate can be reduced.

  The set value display 87 is composed of one 8-segment display and is a display for displaying the set value. This set value is used for setting a winning probability of a predetermined combination in a combination lottery to be described later. Generally, six settings from “1” to “6” are possible. Here, when the same 8-segment display is used for the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 108, there is a high possibility that a driving IC for driving these displays is used in common. In such a case, if the set value display 87 is mounted in the vicinity of the role monitor 108, the wiring of the main control board 101 can be efficiently formed. However, in order to avoid misrecognition of display contents by each display device, it is better not to mount the role ratio monitor 103 and the set value display device 87 side by side. “Near the role monitor 108” means a state in which no other IC is mounted between the role monitor 103 and the set value display 87.

  The set value display 87 may be attached to a printed circuit board on which the set value display 87 is mounted on the back side of the front door 14 instead of on the main control board 101, for example. Further, the setting value may be displayed on the credit indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28 shown in FIG.

  As the driving ICs for displaying alphanumeric characters on the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103 and the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28 shown in FIG. 1, the segment driver SD, the digit driver There are DD1 and DD2. The segment driver SD is a driving IC that outputs a driving signal for each of the segments a to g and DP of the 8-segment display that constitutes the various displays described above. Output in parallel to the display. That is, the segment driver SD is used in common by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28.

  The digit driver DD1 is a driving IC that outputs an active signal for making an 8-segment display that performs display out of the four 8-segment displays constituting the role ratio monitor 103 displayable. The digit driver DD2 is an active signal for making the 8-segment display that performs display out of the 8-segment displays constituting the set value display 87, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28 a displayable state. Is a driving IC that outputs. Hereinafter, the drive signal output from the segment driver SD and the active signals output from the digit driver DD1 and the digit driver DD2 are collectively referred to simply as a drive signal.

  In FIG. 7, the main control board side connector CN1 is a connector for outputting drive signals from the segment driver SD and the digit driver DD2 to the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28. Specifically, since the credit number indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28 are mounted on a central display board (not shown) installed on the back surface of the front door 14, they are mounted on the central display board. The main control board side connector CN1 is connected by a wire harness (hereinafter referred to as “harness”) in which a plurality of electric wires are bundled. Of course, the main control board and the relay board may be connected by a harness, and the relay board and the central display board may be connected by a harness.

  A harness side connector is attached to each end of the harness, the harness side connector attached to one end of the harness is fitted to the main control board side connector CN1, and the harness side connector attached to the other end is The connector is fitted to the connector of the central display board provided on the back surface of the front door 14. Then, the harness itself is routed to the hinge side of the front door 14. Therefore, it is desirable that the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 rather than the front center of the main control board 101.

  Further, it is preferable that the main control board side connector CN1 is not mounted above the role monitor 103. That is, since the harness side connector is connected to the main control board side connector CN1, if the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted above the role monitor 103, the hanging harness covers the role monitor 103. There is a risk of being covered. Even when the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted below the role ratio monitor 103, if there is a risk that the loose harness may cover the role ratio monitor 103, the position is at the main control board side. It is preferable not to mount the connector CN1. However, this is not the case when the harness can be routed so as not to cover the role ratio monitor 103 using a connector cover or the like.

(About the contents displayed on the role monitor)
Next, information displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 will be described with reference to FIG. First, the advantageous section ratio is a value representing the ratio of the number of games in the advantageous section with respect to the total number of games as a two-digit percentage, and the identifier is “7U”. As a general rule, the medium-term continuous service ratio is the 2-digit percentage of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special role (so-called RB) out of the number of medals paid out during the last 6000 games. The identifier is “6y”.

  The ratio of medium-period roles is, in principle, during the operation of first-class special bonus, second-class special bonus (so-called CB) and ordinary bonus (so-called SB) out of the number of medals paid out during the last 6000 games. This is a value representing the percentage of the number of medals paid out as a percentage of two digits, and the identifier is “7y”. In the present embodiment, the second type special combination is not mounted. The cumulative consecutive combination ratio is a value representing the percentage of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special character out of the total number of medals paid out in the total number of games. “6A”. Cumulative combination ratio is a two-digit ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of Type 1 Special, Type 2 Special, and Normal types of medals. It is a value expressed as a percentage, and the identifier is “7A”. In the present embodiment, the second type special combination is not mounted.

  Here, when each information is displayed, the segment DP representing the decimal point is turned on in the 8-segment display on the lower digit side of the identifier display section ID. The display mode of the ratio display portion RA shown in FIG. 8 (c) is, for example, an advantageous section ratio (7U) of 70%, an intermediate period combination ratio (6y) of 60%, an intermediate period combination ratio (7y) of 70, The display mode is shown when the cumulative combination ratio (6A) is 60% and the cumulative combination ratio (7A) is 70%. The percentage value displayed on the ratio display RA is a value obtained by rounding down the decimals. When the result of calculating the ratio is 100%, control is performed so that “99” is displayed on the ratio display RA. To do.

  The various types of information described above are cyclically displayed in the order of advantageous period ratio → intermediate period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio, and the display time of each information is 5 seconds (allowable) The difference is ± 10%. Therefore, the display mode of the identifier display part ID changes from “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →. The display unit RA displays the percentage value corresponding to each identifier. Note that the display of the role ratio monitor 103 is started when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (specifically, when a timer interrupt process described later is executed). At the time of shipment from the factory (a situation where no game is played), the display mode of the identifier display unit ID is “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” Control is performed so that “00” is displayed on the ratio display portion RA when “7U.” →.

  Further, when displaying the intermediate period combination ratio and the intermediate period combination ratio, for example, when the total number of games is less than 6000 times, for example, since the day has started, the identifier is displayed. The identifier (“6y”, “7y”) to be displayed in the part ID is blinked. When the advantageous period ratio, the cumulative consecutive combination ratio, and the cumulative combined ratio are displayed, if the total number of games is less than 175,000, identifiers (“7U”, “ 6A "and" 7A ") blink. The blinking display in these cases is that the total time of the lighting period and the extinguishing period is 0.6 seconds (tolerance ± 10%), and the duty ratio of the lighting period is 50%. That is, control is performed so that the lighting period is about 0.3 seconds and the extinguishing period is about 0.3 seconds.

  In addition, since the slot machine 10 is equipped with the continuous action device related to the normal and first type special objects, the medium ratio combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination combination is included in the ratio monitor 103. For example, in a slot machine that is not equipped with a continuous actuating device related to Type 1 Specials, Type 2 Specials, Normals and Type 1 Specials. This information will not exist. In this case, as described above, the identifier displayed on the identifier display section ID changes from “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →. However, the display mode of the ratio display unit RA corresponding to the identifier for which no information exists is “-”. In place of this, it is also possible to prevent display regarding information that does not exist. For example, in the case of a slot machine that is equipped with an ordinary accessory but is not equipped with a continuous action device for the first type special, second type and first type special, The display content of the monitor 103 transitions from “7U.” → “7y.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →..., And only three types of information: advantageous period ratio, medium period ratio, and cumulative ratio May be displayed.

(Regarding the storage area used for the display of the role monitor)
Next, a storage area of an RWM (read / write memory) included in the microcomputer chip Z1 used for calculating information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 will be described with reference to FIG. This RWM is based on the total number of paid-out sheets, the number of paid-out items (type 1 special items, type 2 special items and normal-type paid-out numbers) and the combined number of paid-out types (type 1 special role). Memory for storing 2 bytes of information to store the cumulative value of the number of medals paid out during one set (400 games), with 400 games as one set for each of the number of paid-out items in operation) The area is set for 15 sets. These storage areas for 15 sets function as a ring buffer. That is, counting of various payouts is started, and when the cumulative value from the first set to the 15th set (400 games × 15 sets = 6000 games) is stored, the next set (6001 game to 6400 game) The cumulative value of the number of payouts in () is sequentially stored from the first set.

  For example, when various cumulative values from the first game to the 6000th game are stored from the first set to the 15th set, the cumulative values from the next 6001 game to the 6400 game are stored in the first set, Cumulative values from the 6401 game to the 6800 game are stored in the second set, and so on, starting from the set storing the earliest cumulative value.

  In addition, for each of the total payout number, the item payout number, and the continuous combination payout number, a storage area for storing information of 3 bytes is set to store a cumulative value for 15 sets. Here, in FIG. 8D, the total paid-out 6000 game cumulative value is expressed as a, the 6000 game cumulative value as the combination payout number is expressed as b, and the 6000 game cumulative value as the combined payout number is expressed as c. The accumulated values a to c are updated by calculating the accumulated value of 6000 games every time the accumulated value for one set is obtained (in other words, every 400 games).

  The RWM has a 1-byte storage area for storing the values of the medium-period role ratio and the medium-period role ratio. Each time the cumulative value of 6000 games is updated, the medium-period role ratio (role 6000 game cumulative value b of the physical payout number / 6000 game cumulative value a of the total payout number) and the middle period linkage ratio (6000 game cumulative value c of the combined payout amount c / 6000 game cumulative value a of the total payout number) The values of the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio calculated and stored in each storage area are updated. Thus, the calculation of the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio is a ring buffer consisting of 15 sets, with various accumulated values of 400 games (total number of payouts, number of items paid out, and number of combined payouts) as one set. It is calculated based on the accumulated value of 6000 games stored in.

  As described above, the “latest 6000 games” in the present embodiment is calculated with 400 games as one set. For example, between 6001 games and 6400 games, 1 to 6000 games are the most recent 6000 games. For example, between 6401 games and 6800 games, 401-6400 games are the latest 6000 games. Although 400 games are exemplified as the number of games in one set, any number of games such as 500 games and 1000 games may be used.

  In addition, a storage area for calculating the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio is set in the RWM, in addition to the storage area for calculating the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio described above. First, a 3-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative value is set for each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the combined payout number. The values of the cumulative payout number A, the cumulative prize payout number B, and the cumulative consecutive payout number C are updated every time a medal (game medium) is paid out. Further, based on the values of the cumulative payout number A, the cumulative feature payout number B, and the cumulative continuous feature payout number C, the cumulative role ratio (B / A) and the cumulative continuous role ratio (C / A) are calculated. Are stored in a 1-byte storage area. The values of the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio are calculated and updated every time one set of the number of games (for example, 400 games) is executed.

  Furthermore, a storage area for calculating the advantageous section ratio is set in the RWM. First, in order to count the number of games executed (total number of games) and the number of games executed during the advantageous section (number of advantageous section games), a storage area of 3 bytes is set in each RWM. The values of the total number of games D and the number of advantageous section games E can be updated every time one game is played. In other words, the value of the advantageous section game number E is not updated unless it is in the advantageous section. Further, an advantageous section ratio (E / D) is calculated based on the total game number D and the advantageous section game number E, and the result is stored in a 1-byte storage area. The value of the advantageous section ratio is also calculated and updated every time one game is played.

[Description of symbol and symbol arrangement]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the arrangement of symbols printed on the reel tape attached to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C and 40R will be described. 20 symbols are printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R as shown in FIG. The arrows shown in FIG. 9A indicate that the symbols on each reel scroll in the display window 21 when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are rotating during the game (except during the freezing effect). Shows direction.

  Each symbol on the reel is printed with one symbol in each symbol region divided into 20 equal parts in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, the types of symbols displayed in each symbol area include “white 7” symbols, “blue 7” symbols, and “ “Red 7” design, “Upper half circle” design showing the upper half of the circular design, “Lower half circle” design showing the lower half of the same circular design, and blue plum as motifs "Replay" design, "Bell" design with yellow bell motif, "Blank" design with tree motif, "Watermelon" design with green watermelon motif, and Red cherry motif There is a "cherry" design.

  In addition, symbol numbers “0” to “19” are predetermined in each symbol region of the reel tape attached to each of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, as shown in FIG. A symbol type code corresponding to the symbol number is stored in the ROM of the main control means 100. The symbol number of each reel and the corresponding type code are used when the slot machine 10 recognizes the symbol displayed at each stop display position (upper U, middle M, lower D) of the display window 21 for each reel. Referenced. Each reel tape shown in FIG. 9A shows a state where the symbol numbers “0” and “1” are separated, and the reel tapes are attached to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C and 40R. In this case, the symbols with symbol numbers “0” and “1” are consecutive.

[Description of correspondence between symbol combinations and condition devices]
Next, the correspondence between the symbol combination displayed on the winning line and the condition device when each reel of the symbol arrangement described above stops will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combinations shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 15 illustrate those in which a privilege is given to the player when those symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line. There are three types of benefits given to the player: re-games, winning (medal payout), and bonus games, and predetermined symbol combinations are associated with these privileges. Here, the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 correspond to the symbol combinations of the replaying role (replaying role) that can be given a replay, and the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 are small roles that can be awarded prizes. The symbol combinations shown in FIG. 15 correspond to symbol combinations of bonus combinations that can be given BB games or SB games as bonus games. Here, a bonus combination that can be given a BB game is called a BB combination, and a bonus combination that can be given an SB game is called an SB combination.

  Among the above-mentioned benefits, the re-game is a privilege that allows a game (re-game) to be performed again without inserting medals only for the next game when the corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on the winning line. Winning is a privilege that when a corresponding symbol combination is arranged on the winning line, the number of medals corresponding to the symbol combination is paid out to the player. A BB game (also referred to as a big bonus game) is a privilege that, when corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on a winning line, an RB game advantageous to the player is repeatedly performed from the next game until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. . That is, the accessory continuous operation apparatus according to the first type special accessory operates. The SB game (single bonus game) is a privilege that increases the possibility that a small role will win in the next game when corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on the winning line. That is, a normal accessory operates. Hereinafter, a game other than the BB game and the SB game is referred to as a normal game.

  An RB game executed during a BB game is a game in which a small role wins with a very high probability, and a predetermined number of winnings or an RB game starts within a number not exceeding eight times during an RB game. The game ends when a predetermined number of games are played out of the number of games not exceeding 12 games. In the slot machine 10, there are two types of RB games, RB-A games and RB-B games. The RB-A game and the RB-B game differ in the number of payouts when a small combination wins and the types of small combinations that can be won. When the RB game ends, if the BB game end condition is not satisfied, the RB game starts as it is from the next game. Note that when the BB game end condition is satisfied during the RB game, the RB game and the BB game are ended even during the RB game.

  In the following, in the case of representing a symbol combination, the symbol names in each reel are described in the order of left reel, middle reel, and right reel, and are enclosed in square brackets. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 01 shown in FIG.

  Each of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 10 to 15 is associated with a condition device. The condition device is a device that is regarded as a necessary condition for aligning the associated symbol combination on the winning line. When the conditional device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device is aligned on the winning line. Is possible. Which condition device is activated is determined by a lottery drawing described later. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, there are 16 condition devices related to the re-gamer, and “re-game 01” to “re-game 16”, and one or more symbol combinations correspond to each condition device. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, there are 20 condition devices related to the small combination, “winning 01” to “winning 20”. Like the re-playing combination, one or more symbols are provided for each conditional device. The combination corresponds. Here, in the “payout number” column of FIGS. 12 to 14, “a” is the number of payouts during normal game and SB game, “a” is the number of payouts during RB-A game, and “c” is RB -B indicates the number of payouts during game play. As a result, when the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 01, winning 02 or winning 13 are prepared, 12 medals are paid out during normal game, SB game or RB-B game, but RB- In the case of A game, 7 medals will be paid out.

  In contrast, when the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 05, winning 11 or winning 12 are prepared, three medals are paid out during normal game, SB game, or RB-B game. If the RB-A game is in progress, 7 medals will be paid out. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to winning 03 or winning 04 is prepared, three medals are paid out regardless of the type of game, and when the symbol combination corresponding to winning 06 to winning 10 is prepared, One medal is paid out regardless of the type. Furthermore, there is a possibility that winnings 14 to 19 may be won only during the RB-A game, and when the corresponding symbol combinations are prepared, seven medals are paid out. The winning 20 may be won only during the RB-B game, and 12 medals are paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the condition device related to the bonus combination is a condition device related to six BB combinations “1BB-A” to “1BB-F” and a condition device related to one SB combination “SB”. There is. When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-A are prepared, a BB game called 1BB-A game is started from the next game. During the 1BB-A game, the RB-A game is continuously executed. When the number of medals paid out during the 1BB-A game exceeds 84, the 1BB-A game ends. More specifically, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-A is prepared, the RB-A game is started from the next game, and when the small role is won twice or two games are performed during the RB-A game, The RB-A game ends. At that time, if the end condition for the 1BB-A game is not satisfied, the RB-A game is started in the next game. Thus, the RB-A game is repeatedly performed, and when the number of medals paid out during this time exceeds 84, the 1BB-A game is ended.

  When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-B are prepared, 1BB-B game is started from the next game. During the 1BB-B game, the RB-B game is continuously executed, and when the number of medals paid out during the 1BB-B game exceeds 348, the 1BB-B game ends. Here, in the RB-B game, as in the RB-A game, the end condition is satisfied when the small role wins twice or two games are played. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B is prepared, the RB-B game is started from the next game, and when the small role wins twice or two games are played during the RB-B game, the RB-B The game ends. At that time, if the end condition for the 1BB-B game is not satisfied, the RB-B game is started in the next game. In this way, the RB-B game is repeatedly performed. When the number of medals paid out during this time exceeds 348, the 1BB-B game is ended.

  When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-C to F are prepared, one of the 1BB-C to F games is started from the next game in accordance with the aligned symbol combinations. During 1BB-C to F games, RB-B games are continuously executed in the same way as 1BB-B games. However, if the number of medals paid out during 1BB-C to F games exceeds 60, 1BB -CF game ends. When the symbol combinations corresponding to SB are prepared, the SB game is started only for the next game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by providing six types of condition devices related to 1BB, even if, for example, a so-called reach eye is displayed and a player is perceived to win a bonus combination, the player can focus on a specific bonus combination. You can avoid it. On the other hand, if there are few types of condition devices related to 1BB, for example, when a strong impact such as a continuous performance is performed when a bonus combination is won, there is a high possibility that the bonus combination will win in the middle of the continuous presentation. Thus, if the bonus combination wins before the end of the continuous production, the interest of the game will be impaired. Therefore, it is preferable that the number of condition devices related to 1BB is larger than the maximum number of games of continuous effects.

[Description of control means]
Next, control means for controlling the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the functional block diagram shown in FIG. The control means of the slot machine 10 includes a main control means 100 that controls the progress of the game and a sub-control means 200 that controls the execution of the game effects. The main control means 100 performs control to advance the game in accordance with the player's operation, and the sub-control means 200 performs the effects executed as the game progresses based on the information transmitted from the main control means 100. Controls notification of various information. Note that transmission of information exchanged between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 is limited to one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200. No information is sent directly to 100.

≪Description of main control means≫
<Main control means and peripheral hardware configuration>
The main control means 100 is realized by the main control board 101 shown in FIG. Here, the CPU included in the microcomputer chip Z1 includes an accumulator (A register) for performing an operation, a plurality of general-purpose registers (B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, and Q register) And a flag register. Each of these registers is composed of 1 byte (8 bits). Of the general-purpose registers, the B and C registers, the D and E registers, and the H and L registers can be used as a pair of 16-bit (2-byte) registers, respectively. When two general purpose registers are used in pairs, two alphabets representing each register are described together. For example, when an H register and an L register are used as a pair, they are expressed as an HL register.

  The flag register is a flag in which each bit indicates a state related to the calculation result by the CPU. The flag register of the present embodiment includes a carry flag, a zero flag, and a second zero flag. Here, the carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry occurs when an operation (addition) is performed and when a carry occurs when an operation (subtraction) is performed. The zero flag is a flag that becomes “1” when the calculation result becomes “0”. The second zero flag is a flag that becomes “1” when the zero flag becomes “1” and when a predetermined operation (LD instruction) is performed.

  As described above, the microcomputer chip Z1 has a CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit and timer circuit, I / O port, and the like. The random number circuit updates the random number used when performing various lotteries based on the clock signal supplied from the oscillator G1 in FIG. 7, and the timer circuit is based on the clock signal supplied from the oscillator G2 in FIG. Generate an interrupt request signal. The I / O port includes an operation means 300, various lamps and indicators, stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R, cylinder sensors 43L, 43C, 43R, a door switch 44, a blocker 45, a hopper motor 46, a payout sensor 47a, 47b, the insertion sensors 48a and 48b, the medal passage sensor 49, and the external concentrated terminal board 86 are output with respect to the components, and the signals from the components are input. The various lamps and indicators include, for example, a set value indicator 87 and a role ratio monitor 103 mounted on the main control board 101 in addition to those shown in FIG.

  The stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R rotate or stop the corresponding reels 40L, 40C, and 40R according to the excitation signal output from the main control unit 100. The rotation sensors 43L, 43C, and 43R are provided corresponding to the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, respectively. When an index (a member to be detected) provided at the reference position of the corresponding reel is detected, the detection signal is output. Output to the main control means 100. As a result, the main control means 100 counts the number of steps of the stepping motor with reference to the detected position of the index, and determines the reel rotation position (and consequently the symbol displayed in the display window 21) based on the count value. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the stepping motor drive control is performed by the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the number of steps of the stepping motor may be counted based on the number of executions of the timer interrupt process. For example, in this embodiment, when the stepping motor is rotating at a constant speed, the stepping motor is rotated by one step each time the timer interrupt process is executed once. Therefore, if the count value of the number of executions of the timer interrupt process is cleared every time the above-described reference position is detected, the number of executions of the timer interrupt process will be different from the reference position when the stepping motor is rotating at a constant speed. It becomes the same value as the number of steps.

  The hopper motor 46 is provided in the hopper 83 (see FIG. 5), and discharges the medals in the medal storage part 83a from the medal payout opening 60 according to the drive signal output from the main control means 100. The payout sensors 47 a and 47 b detect medals paid out when the hopper motor 46 is driven, and output a detection signal to the main control means 100. The blocker 45 is installed in the selector 80 (see FIG. 3), and forms or releases a medal flow path in accordance with an on / off signal from the main control means 100. When the blocker 45 is on, a medal flow path is formed, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 are stored in the medal storage portion 83a of the hopper 83. On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is off, no medal flow path is formed, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 are discharged from the medal payout opening 60. The door switch 44 detects opening / closing of the front door 14 and outputs a detection signal to the main control means 100.

  The external concentrated terminal board 86 relays various signals output from the main control means 100 to an external game information display device or an external device such as a so-called hall computer, as to information relating to the game currently being played by the slot machine 10. To do. Here, the signal output from the external concentration terminal board 86 includes a medal insertion signal for outputting the same number of pulse signals as the number of bets bet on the game based on the operation of the start switch 36, The medal payout signal that outputs the same number of pulse signals as the number of medals paid out based on the winning of the winning combination, the BB signal that is turned on during the BB game, and the advantage that is turned on during the advantageous section described later There are section signals. Instead of the advantageous section signal, it may be an ART signal that is turned on during ART.

  The external concentrated terminal board 86 is provided with a relay circuit for each signal to be output, and the on / off state of the corresponding signal is switched by opening and closing the relay circuit. For example, a photocoupler is used instead of the relay circuit. May be.

  The operation means 300 includes the power switch 82a, the key switch 82b, and the setting / reset switch 82c shown in FIG. 3 in addition to the various switches provided on the front door of the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. The power switch 82 a is a switch for turning on / off the power supplied to each device in the slot machine 10. The key switch 82b has a key hole, and is a switch that is turned on or off by rotating a setting change key (setting key) inserted into the key hole. The setting / reset switch 82c is a push button type switch that is operated when an error is detected, when the error is canceled (reset), or when the setting value is changed during the setting change. Here, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated during the setting change, it is possible to change the value displayed on the setting value display 87 without changing the setting value data described later. It is. By the way, after the power switch 82a is turned off, the setting change key (setting key) inserted into the keyhole of the key switch 82b is rotated to turn the power switch 82a on in the on state. The setting is being changed.

  In this case, data at address F011 (acquired number display data; see FIG. 36) is used as a storage area to be displayed on the set value display 87. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated during the setting change, the information stored in the address F011 is updated, and the information corresponding to the information stored in the address F011 by the operation of the start switch 36 is updated to the address F000 ( Setting value data (see FIG. 36) can be stored. Note that information corresponding to the information stored in the address F011 can be stored in the address F000 based on the fact that the key switch 82b is turned off instead of the operation of the start switch 36.

  Here, when the data at the address F011 is used, the acquired number display 28 is more preferable than the set value display 87 as a display for displaying the set value. This is because the address F011 is a storage area for storing data for displaying the acquired number, stop switch operation mode (instruction number), and error type (error code) on the acquired number display 28. Therefore, during normal times (except when the setting is being changed or setting confirmation to be described later), information for displaying the number of acquired images, the operation mode of the stop switch, and the type of error is stored in the address F011, and the setting is being changed or set. Since the information for displaying the set value is stored during the confirmation, the address of the RWM can also be used. When the acquired number display 28 is also used as a display for displaying the set value, the set value display 87 is not necessary as a display for displaying the set value, and the cost can be reduced. The address F011 is given as an example of the storage area to be displayed on the setting value display 87, but another address may be used. In the present embodiment, the reset and the change of the set value are made possible by one push button type switch, but the reset and the change of the set value may be made possible by separate switches.

<Functional blocks of main control means>
The main control means 100 includes a winning combination determining means 110, a reel control means 115, a lottery state control means 120, a game section control means 125, a freeze control means 130, a notification game control means 140, and a hand ratio monitor control. Means 145, winning determination means 150, abnormality detection means 155, LED display control means 160, control command transmission means 165, and external signal transmission means 170 are included. The function of each means described below is realized by the CPU provided in the microcomputer chip Z1 executing a control program stored in the ROM.

(Explanation of the winning role determination means)
The winning combination determining means 110 determines the winning combination by lottery (role lottery) based on random numbers (numeric range: 0 to 65535) generated by the random number generating means included in the main control means 100. The determined winning combination is also referred to as “the lottery result based on the winning combination determination means” or “the result of the lottery”. FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show a list of types of winning combinations (in other words, lottery targets for the role lottery). Here, FIG. 17 shows the types of winning combinations that do not include a bonus combination, and FIG. 18 shows the types of winning combinations that include a bonus combination. In addition, the list shown in FIG. 17 also shows the types of condition devices that operate when each winning combination is determined.

  17 and 18, W is a winning number, A is a winning / replaying winning number, B is an effect group number, and Y is a winning feature winning number (only in FIG. 18). The winning / replay winning number indicates the winning number of the small role or replaying role, and the winning feature winning number indicates the winning number of the bonus role. The winning number W is assigned 1 to 47 for the winning combination in FIG. 17 that does not include the bonus combination, and the serial numbers 48 to 88 are allocated to the winning combination in FIG. 18 that includes the bonus combination. ing. In the winning lottery, first, a winning number is determined, and based on the determined winning number, a winning / replay winning number A (and a winning feature winning number Y for the winning combination shown in FIG. 18) is determined. For the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination shown in FIG. 17, the winning number W and the winning / replay winning number A have the same value. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, the effect group number B is associated with each winning / replaying winning number A.

  When the winning number is determined by the winning combination determining means 110, a winning / replay winning number A, a winning combination winning number Y, and an effect group number B are determined based on the determined winning number. The winning combination winning number Y and the effect group number B are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as information indicating the result of the winning lottery.

  Here, each of the winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 (replaying-A1 to A6) is associated with the production group number 1, and winning / replaying winning numbers 24 to 29 (winning -A1 to A1). A production group number 19 is associated with A6). This means that when any of winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 is determined in the role lottery, the push combination in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the specific condition device are aligned according to the determined winning / replay winning numbers. This is because they are different. More specifically, when the stop switch is operated in a specific push order, the symbol combinations corresponding to the specific condition device are prepared, and when the stop switch is operated in a push order other than the specific push order, the specific condition is set. The reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the condition devices other than the device are aligned. When a symbol combination corresponding to a specific condition device is prepared, many medals are paid out, or a state advantageous to the player is maintained.

  For this reason, for example, when the winning / replaying winning number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as it is, if the winning / replaying winning number is acquired by some fraudulent act, the symbol combination corresponding to the specific condition device is obtained from that value. It becomes possible to discriminate the pressing order in which they are aligned (hereinafter also referred to as “an advantageous pressing order”). For this reason, in order not to be able to determine an advantageous pressing order, the effect control group number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 instead of the winning / replay winning number, and the winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 are transmitted. On the other hand, the production group number 1 having the same value is associated. For the same reason, the same effect group number 19 is associated with the winning / replay winning numbers 24 to 29. There are other winning / replay winning numbers that have different symbol combinations corresponding to different condition devices depending on the pressing order, but they are operated in a specific pressing order and in a pressing order other than a specific pressing order. The number of medals to be paid out is not different from the time of being played, and one does not maintain an advantageous state and the other does not maintain an advantageous state. There is no need to associate group numbers.

  17 and 18 show the presence or absence of a setting difference for each winning combination. Here, for a winning combination whose winning probability changes between the set values 1 to 6, the setting difference is described as “present”, and for a winning combination whose setting probability is constant (does not change) between the setting values 1 to 6. The difference is marked as “none”.

  In FIG. 17, for each of the winning numbers 1 to 23 (winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 23) related to the replaying combination, any of the condition devices of the replays 01 to 16 shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. Are associated, and when the winning lottery is determined to be one of the winning numbers 1 to 23, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning combination is activated. For example, when winning number 11 (winning / replay winning number 11) is determined, re-game-D1 (double replay 5) is won, and replays 01, 02, 05, 07, 09 One condition device is activated. Thereby, according to the operation of the stop switch by the player, the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the activated condition devices are arranged.

  In addition, any of the winning devices 01 to 20 shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is associated with each of the winning numbers 24 to 47 (winning / replay winning numbers 24 to 47) related to the small role. If the winning number is determined as one of the winning numbers 24 to 47 in the winning lottery, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning combination is activated.

  The winning / replay winning number 30 (common bell A) and the winning / replay winning number 31 (common bell B) are provided for the winning number 31 and the winning number 62 (winning / replaying) that have different settings. By providing a game winning number 31), it is possible to make a great change in the ease of paying out medals (the ease of operation of winning 01 (payout of 12 medals)) according to the set value. At the same time, by providing a winning number 61 with no setting difference (the winning / replaying winning number 30 is determined), this can be used as an opportunity for an advantageous section shift lottery or the like (a winning number with a setting difference). 31 and winning number 62 cannot be used as a trigger).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reel stop control is the same regardless of whether the winning number 31, the winning number 62, or the winning number 61 is determined (the winning 01 is always aligned). . By doing so, it is impossible to specify which winning number has been determined in the game with the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01, so that the advantageous section transition lottery or the like may have been performed in the game. You can have the expectation that you can't.

  Next, in FIG. 18, for the winning numbers 48 to 88 including the bonus combination, any of the bonus combination condition devices shown in FIG. 15 is associated with a part of the winning combination shown in FIG. However, only the bonus combination is associated with the winning numbers 48, 57, 68, 73, 78, 83, 88. Thereby, for example, when the winning number 48 is determined by the lottery drawing, only the 1BB-A condition device operates. On the other hand, for example, when the winning number 49 is determined, the condition device of 1BB-A and the operating devices of the replays 01 and 02 (see the winning / replaying winning number 16 of FIG. 17) are operated. In addition, when any of the winning numbers including the bonus combination (excluding the SB combination) is determined and the condition device for the bonus combination is activated, the next combination until the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device for the bonus combination is completed. After this game, the bonus condition device continues to operate. This state is referred to as “inside” or “during bonus carryover”. When the re-game combination, small combination and SB combination condition devices are activated, the operation state is ended at least before the next game is started.

  The list of FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 shows all the winning combinations that can be the target of the lottery by the winning unit determining means 110. Among these winning combinations, the types of the winning combinations that are the targets of the lottery (In other words, the type of the winning number) and the winning probability of each winning combination vary depending on the lottery status. In the slot machine 10, there are four lottery states in the normal game: non-RT (RT0), RT1, RT2, and RT3, and in the lottery state in the bonus game, 1BB-A game (RB-A game), 1BB- There are two types of BF games (RB-B games), and there are six lottery states in total.

  Next, with reference to the combination lottery tables shown in FIG. 19 to FIG. 26, the types of winning combinations and winning probabilities that are the targets of the combination lottery in each lottery state will be described. 19 is a role lottery table used in non-RT, FIGS. 20 and 21 are role lottery tables used in RT1, FIGS. 22 and 23 are role lottery tables used in RT2, and FIG. 24 is used in RT3. FIG. 25 shows a role lottery table used during 1BB-A games (strictly speaking, during RB-A games) and 1BB-B to F games (strictly speaking, during RB-B games). The contents are shown. FIG. 26 is a combination lottery table used in the SB game that is started when the SB combination wins in the non-RT, RT1, and RT2.

  The role lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 26 are random numbers that are determined to be winning for each winning combination among the random number values 0 to 65535 (also referred to as random number values: 65536) generated by the random number circuit of the microcomputer chip Z1. (Hereinafter also referred to as “numerical number”). Thus, a value obtained by dividing the number corresponding to the winning combination by 65536 is the winning probability of the winning combination. As a result of the lottery, if any winning combination is not won, the game is lost and the winning number is 0. Each combination lottery table shows numbers in settings 1 to 6, but selection of these settings is performed by the key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c shown in FIG. Note that the selected and selected set values are displayed numerically on the set value display 87 shown in FIG.

  In the non-RT, as shown in the role lottery table of FIG. 19, the winning numbers 16, 20-22, 24-29, 31, 33, and 35 are subject to lottery for the winning combinations that do not include the bonus combination. For winning combinations that do not include a combination, winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery. In RT1, the winning numbers 1-15, 18, 20-22, 24-29, 31, 33, and 35 are selected for the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination as shown in the combination lottery tables of FIGS. As for the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination, the winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery.

  In RT2, the winning numbers 1 to 6, 18 to 22, 24 to 29, 31, 33, and 35 are selected for the winning combination not including the bonus combination as shown in the combination lottery tables of FIGS. For winning combinations that do not include a bonus combination, winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery. In RT3, as shown in the winning lottery table of FIG. 24, winning numbers 16, 17, 20 to 22, and 24 to 36 that are winning combinations that do not include a bonus winning combination are subject to lottery.

  As described above, during the 1BB-A game, the RB-A game is continuously performed until the end condition is satisfied, and during the 1BB-B to F games, the RB-B game is continuously performed. Accordingly, during the 1BB-A game (in the RB-A game), any one of the winning numbers 37 to 46 is always determined as shown in the role lottery table in FIG. In addition, during the 1BB-B to F games (in the RB-B game), the winning number 47 is always determined as shown in the role lottery table in FIG.

  If the SB combination wins in non-RT, RT1, and RT2, the next game becomes the SB game. During the SB game, as shown in the role lottery table of FIG. 26, the role lottery with the same contents as the role lottery table used during the non-RT shown in FIG. 19 is performed. More specifically, the number of winning numbers 33 (common three bells B) in the winning lottery table of FIG. 26 is “2” larger in each set value than the winning lottery table of FIG.

  As shown in each of the lottery tables of FIGS. 19 to 26, the same lottery is performed during non-RT and during the SB game. In RT1 and RT2, the type of re-gamer to be a lottery target Although both are partially different, the combined winning probability of the replaying combination is the same value (about 1 / 1.378 to about 1 / 1.354. However, the winning probability of the replaying combination winning simultaneously with the bonus combination is excluded.) It becomes extremely high and the probability of losing is extremely reduced, which can be said to be an advantageous state for the player. Further, the combined winning probability of the re-playing combination and the small combination in RT3 is set higher than the combined winning probability of the non-RT. During the 1BB-A game (RB-A game) and during the 1BB-B to F games (RB-B game), the small role is always won in both games, which is advantageous to the player. .

  When a winning lottery is performed by the winning combination determining means 100 and one winning number is determined, a winning / replay winning number and an effect group number (for the winning numbers 48 to 88, the winning items are determined based on the determined winning number). The winning number is also determined, and the winning combination number, winning / replay winning number, and effect group number are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RWM of the main control means 100. Then, the winning combination winning number and the effect group number stored in the RWM are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as information indicating the result of the winning lottery.

(Description of reel control means)
The reel control means 115 drives and controls stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R that rotate / stop the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. Thereby, the rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R is started based on the operation of the start switch 36 by the player, and after the rotation speeds of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R reach the above-described constant speed, Maintain speed. When any of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (more precisely, the stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop switch.

  The reel control means 115 stops the rotation of the corresponding reel within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch is operated. As a result, when the reels with 20 symbols provided on each reel as in this embodiment are stopped from rotating at a constant speed (80 rotations / minute) within 190 milliseconds, the rotation is 80 (rotation). / 60 (seconds) × 0.19 (seconds) × 20 (design) = approximately 5.067 The reel is stopped until the design is rotated. However, the reel control means 115 does not stop the symbol passing the stop display position (hereinafter referred to as “winning stop position”) related to the winning line when the stop switch is operated at the winning stop position. Control the stepping motor.

  Therefore, when the stop operation is performed, any one of the symbols from one symbol upstream of the symbols passing the winning stop position to four symbols upstream is set as the winning stop position. Can be stopped. Here, the range of “from the symbol positioned upstream one of the symbols passing the winning stop position to the symbol positioned four upstream when the stop operation is performed” is also referred to as “stop control range”. Say.

  When any winning number is determined by the winning combination determining unit 110, the reel control unit 115 stops the rotation of the reel so that the winning combination corresponding to the winning number stops on the winning line L ( So-called pull-in control). However, when the symbol constituting the winning symbol combination is not within the stop control range, the reels are stopped so as to prevent a winning other than the winning symbol from winning (so-called kicking control is performed).

  10 to 15, for example, for the symbol combination “Bell-Replay-Bell” of the replay 01, a winning line is always required due to the symbol arrangement and stop control range of each reel shown in FIG. There is no so-called “missing out” because it can be aligned at the top. On the other hand, for example, for the symbol combination “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” of 1BB-A, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the “blue 7” symbol does not exist in the stop control range, the winning is stopped. The “blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped at the position, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-A cannot be aligned, and it will be missed.

  For example, among the symbol combinations of the replay 12, the “blank” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol in the middle reel cannot be stopped at the winning stop position depending on the timing of the stop operation when viewed as individual symbols. However, in the middle reel, considering the arrangement interval between the “watermelon” symbols and the symbol interval from the “blank” symbol to the “watermelon” symbol, the “blank” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol are used regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Any of the symbols can be stopped at the winning stop position. Therefore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the replays 12 ("bell-blank-bell" or "bell-watermelon-bell") can always be aligned.

  Moreover, the reel control means 115 changes the symbol combination which performs pull-in control according to the pressing order of the stop switch for a predetermined winning combination. Specifically, when any of the winning numbers 1 to 6 (push order lips 1 to 6) is determined, and the stop operation is performed in a specific push order, the pull-in control such that the symbol combinations of the replay 01 are aligned. However, when a stop operation is performed in the other pressing order, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the replays 03 or 04 are aligned. The specific push order is left → middle → right when replay-A1 is determined, left → right → middle when replay−A2 is determined, and middle when replay−A3 is determined → Left → Right, Middle → Right → Left when Replay-A4 is determined, Right → Left → Medium when Replay−A5 is determined, Right → Middle → When Replay−A6 is determined Left.

  In addition, when any of the winning numbers 7 to 15 (double replays 1 to 9) is determined, the symbol combination of the replay 01 and the middle stop switch 37C are the first when the left stop switch 37L is first stopped. When the stop operation is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the replay 02 are aligned. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the condition devices corresponding to the winning number are aligned.

  Specifically, when the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 7 (double replay 1) is determined, any one of the replays 02, 05, or 06 depending on the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that these symbol combinations are aligned. If the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 8 (double replay 2) is determined, the symbol combination of any of the replays 02, 05, or 06 is selected depending on the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that they are aligned. When the winning number 9 (double replay 3) is determined, the pull-in control is performed so that any combination of symbols of the replays 02, 05, or 09 is arranged according to the timing of the stop operation.

  Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 05 is controlled when the winning number 7 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When the drawing control is performed on the odd number of the symbol combinations of the replay 05 shown in FIG. 10 and the drawing combination of the symbol combination of the replay 05 is controlled when the winning number 8 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for a symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 05 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 9 (double replay 3) or the winning number 11 (double replay 5) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 07, or 09 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 07 is controlled when the winning number 9 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper half circle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When drawing-in control is performed on the odd number among the symbol combinations of the replay 07 shown in FIG. 10 and the drawing combination of the symbol combination of the replay 07 is controlled when the winning number 11 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for the symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 07 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 10 (double replay 4) or the winning number 12 (double replay 6) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 08, or 09 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 08 is controlled when the winning number 10 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper half circle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When drawing-in control is performed for the recombination 08 number 1 symbol combination shown in Fig. 10 and the re-gaming 08 symbol combination is drawn in when the winning number 12 is determined, the right reel winning stop position (lower D) ) For the symbol combination (the second symbol combination of the replay 08 shown in FIG. 10) for which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed.

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 13 (double replay 7) or the winning number 14 (double replay 8) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 09, or 10 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 10 is controlled when the winning number 13 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When the drawing control is performed for the symbol combination of the replay 10 shown in Fig. 10 and the symbol combination of the replay 10 is controlled when the winning number 14 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for a symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 10 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower half circle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  In addition, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 15 (double replay 9) is determined, any one of the replays 02, 09, 10 or 11 depending on the timing of the stop operation Pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations are aligned. Here, in the case of drawing-in control of the symbol combination of the replay 10, the symbol combination in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (the symbol combination of the replay 10 shown in FIG. 10). Pull-in control is performed for an even number among these.

  In addition, when any of the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) is determined, when a stop operation is performed in a specific push order, only the first stop operation matches the specific push order, and The symbol combination that is the target of the pull-in control is different when the first stop operation does not coincide with the specific pressing order. For example, when the winning number 24 (push order bell 1) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of left → middle → right, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning symbol 01 combination is aligned. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pushing → right → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 03 are aligned. In addition, when the middle stop switch 37C or the right stop switch 37R is first stopped, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning combinations 07 or 08 can be matched.

  When the winning number 25 (push order bell 2) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of left → right → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but left → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from the middle to the right, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 03 are aligned. In addition, when the middle stop switch 37C or the right stop switch 37R is first stopped, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning combinations 07 or 08 can be matched.

  When the winning number 26 (push order bell 3) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 02 are aligned, but middle → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from right to left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prizes 04 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the right stop switch 37R is subjected to the first stop operation, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  When the winning number 27 (push order bell 4) is determined, if the stop operation is performed in the order of middle → right → left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 02 are aligned. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from left to right, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 04 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the right stop switch 37R is subjected to the first stop operation, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  When the winning number 28 (push order bell 5) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of right → left → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but right → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from the middle to the left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 05 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or winning prize 08 are aligned.

  When the winning number 29 (push order bell 6) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of right → middle → left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but the right → When the stop operation is performed in the order of the left-to-middle push-in, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 05 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  Further, when the winning number 37 (two consecutive winning prizes 1) is determined, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prizes 14 are aligned when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is first stopped. When the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed such that the winning combinations 14 or 15 are combined according to the timing of the stopping operation. In addition, when the winning number 38 (two consecutive winning prizes 2) is determined, pull-in control is performed so that when the left stop switch 37L is stopped for the first time, the symbol combinations of the winning prize 14 are aligned, and the middle stop switch 37C is the first stop switch 37C. When the stop operation is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that one of the winning combinations 14, 18 or 19 is matched according to the timing of the stop operation. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning 14 or the winning 15 are aligned according to the timing of the stopping operation.

  Here, when the winning combination 37 is determined and the drawing combination of the winning 15 is to be controlled, the symbol combination in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel (shown in FIG. 10). When the drawing control is performed on the odd number of the winning combination 15) and the winning combination 38 is drawn when the winning number 38 is determined, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set to “ Pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination (even number among the symbol combinations of the winning 15 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  In addition, when winning numbers 39 to 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 3 to 9) are determined, the pull-in control that the symbol combinations of winning 14 are aligned when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is first stopped. I do. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the condition devices corresponding to the winning number are aligned.

  Specifically, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 39 (two consecutive winnings 3) is determined, the symbol combination of winning 05 or winning 14 is selected according to the timing of the stopping operation. Pull-in control. If the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 40 (double winning prize 4) or the winning number 42 (double winning prize 6) is determined, the winning 14 or winning according to the timing of the stop operation Pull-in control of 16 symbol combinations is performed. Here, when drawing-in control of the winning 16 symbol combination when the winning number 40 is determined, the symbol combination (shown in FIG. 10) in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel. When the drawing control is performed on the odd number among the symbol combinations of the winning 16) and the drawing combination of the winning 16 is controlled when the winning number 42 is determined, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set to “ The drawing control is performed for the symbol combination (even number among the symbol combinations of the winning 16 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  When the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 41 (two consecutive winnings 5) is determined, the winning combination of winning 14 or winning 17 is drawn in according to the timing of the stopping operation. Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 43 (double winning award 7) or winning number 44 (double winning award 8) is determined, the winning 14 is made according to the timing of the stop operation. Alternatively, the drawing combination of the winning combination 18 is controlled. Here, when drawing-in control of the symbol combination of the winning 18 when the winning number 41 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel (shown in FIG. 10). When drawing-in control is performed for the winning combination 18 (No. 1 or No. 3 symbol combination), and the winning combination 43 is determined and the drawing combination of the winning 18 is controlled, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set. The drawing-in control is performed for the symbol combination (No. 2 or No. 4 symbol combination shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  When the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 45 (two consecutive winnings 9) is determined, the winning combination 14, 18 or 19 is drawn in according to the timing of the stopping operation.

(Explanation of lottery state control means)
Returning to FIG. 8, the lottery state control means 120 controls the transition of the above-mentioned lottery states (RT0 to RT3, 1BB-A game (RB-A game) and 1BB-B to F game (RB-B game)). . Specifically, the lottery state is managed by the RT state number, the operation state flag, and the operation type. The initial state of the lottery state is RT0 (non-RT). When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in each lottery state, the lottery state is shifted to another lottery state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when any of winning numbers 48 to 87 (that is, 1BB-A to F) is determined in the role lottery at RT0, the process proceeds to RT3 (FIG. 27, FIG. 27). Arrow D). Further, in RT3, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the condition device 1BB-A are prepared, the game moves to the 1BB-A game (RB-A game) (arrow E in the figure), and any of the condition devices 1BB-B to F When the corresponding symbol combinations are complete, the game shifts to 1BB-B to F games (RB-B games) (arrow F in the figure).

  When the end condition of 1BB-A game is satisfied in 1BB-A game (RB-A game) or when the corresponding end condition is satisfied in any of 1BB-B to F games (RB-B game), the process goes to RT2. Transition (arrow G in the figure). In RT2, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replays 09 or 12 are completed, the process proceeds to RT1 (arrow C in the figure). When one of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined in RT1 or RT2, the process proceeds to RT3 (arrow D in the figure), and either SB, replay 03, replay 04, or winning prizes 06 to 08 When the corresponding symbol combinations are complete, the process proceeds to RT0 (arrow B in the figure). In the following, the transition of the arrow C in FIG. 27 is also referred to as “promotion”, and the transition of the arrow B is also referred to as “demotion”.

  In any of the lottery states described above, when the RWM of the main control means 100 is initialized, the routine proceeds to RT0 (arrow A in the figure). Initialization of the RWM of the main control means 100 is executed by turning the power switch 82a from off to on under the condition that the key switch 82b is on. Note that when the initialization of the RWM is completed, the setting value can be changed and setting change is in progress (also referred to as a setting change mode). During the setting change, the set value data can be selected with a value within the range of “0” to “5” based on the operation of the setting / reset switch 82c. Further, during the setting change, after the start switch 36 is operated, the key switch 82b is switched from on to off to end the setting change and shift to a state where the game can be executed. The setting value data can be selected within the range of “0” to “5” by operating the setting / reset switch 82c until the start switch 36 is operated, and the start switch 36 is operated. After that, the set value data cannot be selected even when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated.

Here, the setting value data during the setting change and the display mode by the setting value display 87 will be described with examples.
Example 1) The set value data (address: F000 (H)) is updated by operating the setting / reset switch 82c during setting change. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “0”, the setting value data is set to “1”. If the setting reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “5”, the setting value data is set to “0”. In other words, the setting value data is cyclically updated within the range of “0” to “5” during the setting change.

  At this time, when the set value data is “0”, the data obtained by adding +1 to the set value data when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display is satisfied by the LED display control process by the timer interrupt process described later. As an offset value, an address corresponding to the display mode to be lit is designated using the LED segment table A shown in FIG. Specifically, an operation for adding the offset value to the head address 1211 (H) of the LED segment table A is performed, and the address is designated. Then, the segment to be lit is determined based on the data (segment data) stored at the specified address, and the determined segment data is output from the output port 3 shown in FIG.

Example 2) The set value data (address: F000 (H)) is updated by operating the setting / reset switch 82c during the setting change, and the set value data for display (address: Information of F0XX (H)) is also updated. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “0”, the setting value data is set to “1” and “2” is stored in the display setting value data. If the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is "5", the setting value data is set to "0" and "1" is stored in the display setting value data. Thus, the setting value data is updated cyclically within the range of “0” to “5” during the setting change.

  At this time, when the set value data is “0”, the offset value is displayed from the display set value data when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display is satisfied by the LED display control process by the timer interrupt process described later. The address corresponding to the display mode to be generated (obtained) and to be lit using the LED segment table A shown in FIG. Specifically, an operation for adding the offset value to the head address 1211 (H) of the LED segment table A is performed, and the address is designated. Then, the segment to be lit is determined based on the data (segment data) stored at the designated address, and the determined segment data is output from the output port 3 shown in FIG.

(Description of game section control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the game section control means 125 performs transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and changes (transition) of performance in the advantageous section. Here, the normal section is a section in which the push order of the stop switch cannot be reported (section in which information that can identify an advantageous push order should not be transmitted to the sub-control means 200). This is a section in which the pressing order of the stop switch can be notified (a section in which information that can specify an advantageous pressing order may be transmitted to the sub-control means 200). In addition, in the case of shifting to the advantageous section, the game section control means 125, as a general rule, when any one of the push order bells 1 to 6 is determined, the game order control means 125 has a push order in which the winning combination 01 or winning 02 is arranged at least once. If not notified, no transition to the normal section is made.

  For example, even if it is a specification that shifts to an advantageous section, further shifts to ART in the advantageous section, and moves to the normal section when 50 games are played in the state of ART, winning 01 or winning 02 in the advantageous section As long as it is not notified at least once of the pressing order in which the symbol combinations are aligned, even if 50 games have been played since the transition to ART, the transition to the normal section is not performed. In this case, the state during the ART may be continued as it is, or the state during the ART may be shifted to another state within the advantageous section. This is because there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may be reduced if the player moves to the normal section again without any benefit in spite of the shift to the advantageous section. Conventionally, even if an ART game is started, if the player's luck is bad (if the winning combination that should be notified of the push order is not won), the ART game is finished without informing the push order once. The player's willingness to play has been decreasing.

  However, any of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined during the advantageous section (when any of the winning numbers 48 to 56, 58, 60, 61, 63, 65, 67 is determined, the process proceeds to the advantageous section). If the bonus game (any one of 1BB-A to F games) of the determined winning number has been completed, the push order is notified once in the advantageous section. Even without it, it is possible to shift to the normal section. For example, when a bonus combination is won in the middle of an ART, and the bonus game starts and ends, the push order in which the winning combination 01 or winning 02 is combined is not notified once in the advantageous section. Even so, when the remaining number of games during ART is performed, the state (advantageous section) during ART is terminated. This is because the bonus game provides benefits to the player, so that in such a case, the push order must be notified at least once. It is because there exists a possibility of reducing.

  In addition, even if 1500 games were executed during the advantageous section, none of the push order bells 1 to 6 was determined, so that the push order (instruction number) could not be notified. Even if the push order is not notified once in the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section. This is because even if a player who has played 1500 games in the advantageous section and has not been notified of the push order once, is not able to improve the interest of the game even if the player is notified of the push order once.

  During the stay in the advantageous section, the segment DP (hereinafter also referred to as “advantage section LED”) in the 8-segment display of the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 is turned on. As described above, shifting to advantageously interval, for at least once to press the order of symbol combinations of winning 01 or prize 02 is aligned is informed, which is lit to teach you not leave in stop the player.

  The game section control means 125 controls the transition of the game section and the change (transition) of the performance in the advantageous section. The type of game section (normal section or advantageous section) and the performance of the advantageous section are managed by the game state number. That is, gaming state number 0 is associated with the normal section, and gaming state numbers 1 to 10 are associated with the advantageous section according to performance. The performance of the advantageous section includes “gase high probability” (game state number 1), “high probability” (game state number 2), “gase high probability bonus” (game state number 3), “high probability bonus” ( Game state number 4), “ART in progress” (gaming state number 5), “Additional special zone” (game state number 6), “ART bonus” (game state number 7), “ART return preparation” (game) There are state number 8), “in chance zone” (gaming state number 9), and “ending state” (game state number 10).

  In other words, even when the game hall business hours end in the state of the game state numbers 1 to 10 corresponding to the advantageous sections, the staff of the game hall performs an operation for changing the set value, Since the RWM of the control means 100 is initialized and the RWM address (F021) becomes “0”, the game state number 0 corresponding to the normal section is stored. Moreover, being in any state of the game state numbers 1 to 10 is possible by visually recognizing the advantageous section LED. Therefore, in the next morning, if it is not desired to start operating the game hall from the state in the advantageous section, the staff may confirm the advantageous section LED and perform an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, since the conventional slot machine was not equipped with a lamp corresponding to the advantageous section LED, the staff could not determine whether or not the current state was advantageous for the player, and the same set value was set the next day. Even if the user wants to use it, the RWM of all slot machines is initialized to prevent starting from an advantageous state the next morning. On the other hand, this embodiment is provided with an advantageous section LED, and when the same setting value (setting value data) is desired to be used on the next day, the setting value is changed when the advantageous section LED is turned off. Since it is understood that there is no need to perform the operation, it is possible to save the labor of the staff. In the present embodiment, a function (so-called conventional ceiling function) that shifts to an advantageous section based on the fact that the number of games played in the normal section has reached a specific number of games (eg, 1000 games). Since it is not provided, the advantage for the player does not change even if the game is started from any number of games in the normal section.

  The initial state is a normal section, and when any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined by the lottery in the normal section, the game section control means 125 performs an advantageous section transition lottery. In this advantageous section transition lottery, if the lottery results in a lottery, a high-precision lottery non-winning (hereinafter also referred to as “medium-final lottery win” or “gasse high-precision lottery win”) or a high-precision lottery win Will continue to stay in the normal section. In addition, if the high-precision lottery is not won, the next game can be shifted to Gase high-probability (game state number 1) (FIG. 28, arrow a). It is possible to shift from the next game to high probability (game state number 2) (arrow i in the figure).

  Here, the winning combination that triggers the advantageous section shift lottery is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22, but the winning combination with the setting probability 1 to setting 6 (setting value data “0” to “5”) whose winning probability does not change ( In other words, a winning combination with no setting difference can be set as appropriate. Moreover, according to the determined winning number among the winning numbers 20 to 22, the probability of being lost, non-winning high-precision lottery, or winning high-precision lottery may be varied. For example, when any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 is determined in the role lottery, the winning lottery may be either non-winning high-precision lottery or winning high-winning lottery. The distribution probability with the high-precision lottery winning may be varied according to the determined winning number.

  If you win a winning number with a setting difference that includes one of the prize winning numbers of 1BB-B to F in Gase High Accuracy and win one of the 1BB-B to F, you will receive a bonus (game state) No. 3) can be transferred to (No. 3 in the figure, arrow d), and when the bonus game corresponding to the winning bonus combination is completed, it is possible to move again to the higher accuracy (arrow O in the same figure). In addition, if the winning number including the 1BB-A winning feature winning number is won in Gase High Accuracy and the 1BB-A is won, it is possible to shift to the high probability medium bonus (game state number 4). It may be possible to move into the zone (game state number 9). In addition, if a winning number having no setting difference including a winning combination winning number of 1BB-B is won in Gase Kosei, and it wins that 1BB-B, it becomes possible to shift to a highly probable bonus (game state number 4).

  In addition, when winning at any one of 1BB-A to F with high accuracy, it is possible to shift to the high probability middle game (game state number 4) (arrow D in the figure), and a bonus game corresponding to the winning bonus combination is obtained. When finished, it is possible to move to high accuracy again (the figure, arrow o). For example, if the winning number 16 (Replay A1), which is the winning number with no setting difference in the winning lottery, is determined in the case of the high-risk and high-precision, the falling lottery is performed. (Fig., Arrow c). Here, the winning probability of the falling lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 16 is determined, it may be possible to shift to the normal section without performing the falling lottery.

  Further, the winning lot number 16 is taken as an example, but the winning number with no setting difference may be used, and the winning number of the falling lottery can be determined as appropriate. In addition, as described above, in order to end the advantageous section, in principle, when the maximum payout number is obtained by the operation mode of the player's stop switch during the advantageous section (so-called correct push order operation) When the winning numbers 24 to 29 having a case where the maximum payout number cannot be obtained (so-called incorrect answer pressing order) are won, at least once, a stop switch advantageous to the player The operation mode (so-called correct answer pressing order) is notified.

  This prevents the transition to the normal section without any benefit when shifting to the advantageous section. Therefore, an instructed flag (see FIG. 37, address F022) indicating whether or not the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous for the player is notified is provided. Thus, when the information stored in the instructed flag (address F022) is not information corresponding to “pressing order notified” (pressing order non-notifying), control is performed so that the falling lottery is not executed.

  Even if the falling lottery is executed and the falling lottery is won, the winning result may not be reflected to control the transition to the normal section. In this case, the probability of winning the falling lottery may be lower than the probability determined by the winning numbers 24-29. Or you may make it the probability that the winning number used as the opportunity to perform a falling lottery will be lower than the probability determined by winning numbers 24-29.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning number 16 (replay A1) is determined in high accuracy and high accuracy, the falling lottery is performed, but the winning number 49 (1BB-A + replay A1) is determined. However, the falling lottery is not performed. By the way, when the winning number 49 is determined in the high accuracy and high accuracy, after the end of the 1BB-A game, it becomes highly reliable RT2. During RT2, the winning number 16 is not determined, so no falling lottery is performed. In addition, during RT2, the winning number 19 (replay C) may be determined. When the winning number 19 is determined with high accuracy, the ART lottery is performed as described later. That is, it can be said that the player is pleased that the winning number 49 is determined with high accuracy and high accuracy.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop control is the same when the winning number 16 (replay A1) is determined and when the winning number 49 (1BB-A + replay A1) is determined (always) Replay 01 is prepared). That is, even if the replays 01 are prepared, it is impossible to specify which winning number has been determined.
By doing in this way, even if the replays 01 are prepared with high accuracy and high accuracy, the falling lottery will not necessarily be performed (because the winning number 49 may have been determined), so the expectation (The player's interest does not decrease.)

  In Gase Kosei, if any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined in the role lottery, a promotion lottery will be performed, and if the promotion lottery is won, the next game can be shifted to high accuracy (Figure, arrow F). The winning probability of this promotion lottery may vary depending on the determined winning number, or the winning probability may be set to 100% for one or more winning numbers. Further, instead of setting the winning probability to 100%, it may be possible to shift to high accuracy without performing the promotion lottery. In addition, it is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance items A to C), and if the winning number has no setting difference, it can be appropriately determined as a winning number that triggers the promotion lottery.

  Here, the game section control means 125 can shift to the advantageous section (in the chance zone) when any of the winning numbers 50 to 52 is determined in the normal section. At this time, when the winning numbers 50 to 52 are determined, not the 1BB-A but the symbol combinations corresponding to the chance eyes A to C are stopped and displayed. Then, before the start switch 36 for starting the next game of the game won by the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) and the start of the next game of the game won by the winning numbers 50 to 52 are started. Before the switch 36 is operated, the advantageous section LED is turned on.

  Furthermore, in the next game after winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) are won in the normal section and the advantageous section (gase high accuracy) is transferred, the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) are obtained. The winning lottery (predetermined lottery regarding AT) can be executed by winning. On the other hand, when winning numbers 50 to 52 (1BB-A + chances A to C) are won and the player moves to an advantageous section (in the chance zone), the winning numbers 20 to 22 ( Even if the chance item A to C) is won, the promotion lottery (predetermined lottery regarding AT) is not executed (it is not possible to shift to high accuracy). Here, in the next game in which the winning numbers 50 to 52 are won in the first gaming state (for example, RT0), the winning number is set in the second gaming state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is set higher. Lottery.

  That is, when the winning number 50 is won, the same symbol combination (chance A) as when the winning number 20 is won, and when the winning number 51 is won, the same symbol combination as when the winning number 21 is won. (Chance Eye B) When the winning number 52 is won, the reel is controlled so that the same symbol combination (chance eye C) as when the winning number 22 is won is stopped and displayed, so that the advantage section transition role When the winning number for which the symbol combination is stopped is won, it can be made impossible to grasp whether or not the bonus combination is won. In addition, conventionally, by being configured to be able to give a bonus such as a lottery regarding AT in the game inside the bonus, the player dares to play a game without aligning the symbol combination of the bonus role, etc. There was a possibility that it could become a strategy element, but in the situation where the bonus combination is won (inside), the player does not intentionally arrange the bonus combination by not performing the predetermined lottery regarding AT. It can be avoided.

  In other words, in the next game in which any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 is won, it is possible to give a privilege such as a lottery regarding AT, and the next game in which any of the winning numbers 50 to 52 is won ( In a situation where the symbol combination of the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed (inside the bonus), it is configured so that a privilege such as a lottery regarding AT cannot be given. In addition, when the winning number 19 (Replay C) is determined in the winning lottery, the ART lottery is performed, and if the ART lottery is won, it is possible to shift from the next game to during the ART (gaming state number 5). Yes (the figure, arrow key).

  The winning probability of this ART lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 19 is determined, it may be possible to shift to ART without performing ART lottery. Further, a gaming state such as an ART precursor (not shown) or an ART preparation (not shown) may be provided so that the state can be shifted to ART after passing through these states. In this case, it is necessary to provide a new game state number for managing ART precursors (not shown) and ART preparation (not shown). Note that the winning number is not limited to the winning number 19 and can be determined as a winning number as an opportunity for the ART lottery as long as it is a winning number with no setting difference.

  When a predetermined number of games are played after shifting to ART, it is possible to shift from an advantageous section to a normal section (the arrow in the figure). Here, the initial value of the predetermined number of games (hereinafter also referred to as “ART game number”) is 50 games. During the ART, if any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined in the role lottery, a special zone transfer lottery is performed. ) (In the figure, arrows). The winning probability of the above-mentioned special zone transfer lottery may be varied according to the determined winning number, or the winning probability may be set to 100% for one or more winning numbers. Further, instead of setting the winning probability to 100%, it is possible to add to the special zone without adding the special zone transfer lottery. In addition, it is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C), and can be appropriately determined as a winning number that triggers the special zone transfer lottery as long as there is no setting difference.

  The game section control means 125 performs the extra lottery when any of the winning numbers 7 to 15 (double replays 1 to 9) is determined by the role lottery during the extra special zone, and according to the lottery result, “ART” Increase the number of games. Here, the winning probability of the extra lottery is 0% when the winning number 7 (2 replays 1) is determined, 5% when the winning numbers 8 to 10 (2 replays 2 to 4) are determined, When winning numbers 11 to 13 (double replays 5 to 7) are determined, 25%, and when winning numbers 14 or 15 (double replays 8 and 9) are determined, they are 100%. Further, the number of games to be increased when winning the extra lottery may be varied according to the determined winning number. It should be noted that the number of games to be increased when winning the extra lottery may be determined by the extra game number lottery. Here, the winning probability of the extra lottery may be appropriately determined between 0% and 100%, and is not limited to the exemplified values. The winning number that triggers the extra lottery and the extra game number lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference.

  When 5 games are played after moving into the special zone, the special zone drop lottery is performed every time one of the winning numbers 1 to 6 (push order lip 1 to 6) is determined in the role lottery, If you win, you can move to ART. The winning number that triggers the special zone drop lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference. If you win any of 1BB-A to F during ART or during the specialization zone, you can move to the bonus during ART (gaming state number 7) (arrow D in the figure), corresponding to the winning bonus combination When the bonus game is over, it is possible to shift to ART return preparation (game state number 8) (arrow o in the figure).

  In the ART return preparation, when the winning number 19 (replay C) is determined, the return lottery is performed, and when winning, it is possible to shift to the game state number where the player stayed before playing the bonus game (the arrow in the figure). That is, when shifting from ART to bonus during ART, it is possible to shift to ART, and when shifting from within the specialization zone to bonus during ART, it is possible to shift into the specialization zone. Here, the winning probability of the return lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 19 is determined, it may be possible to shift to the game state number where the player stayed before playing the bonus game without performing the return lottery. Note that the winning number that triggers the return lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference.

  In addition, when 1BB-A (winning numbers 48 to 56) is won in the normal section, the game section control means 125 performs an advantageous section shift lottery. In this advantageous section transition lottery, it becomes a lottery result of losing and chance zone lottery winning, and when it becomes a losing, it stays in the normal section continuously. Here, the winning probability of the advantageous section shift lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. In addition, when 1BB-A (winning numbers 48 to 56) is won, the chance zone lottery winning may be performed without performing the advantageous section shifting lottery.

  When 1BB-A is won and the chance zone lottery is won, the next game can be entered into the chance zone (gaming state number 9) (the arrow in the figure). In the chance zone, the game section control means 125 performs an ART promotion lottery every time one of winning numbers 37 to 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 1 to 9) is determined in the role lottery. Here, the winning probability of the ART promotion lottery is 0% when the winning number 37 (double winning award 1) is determined, and 5% when the winning number 38-40 (double winning award 2-4) is determined. When winning numbers 41 to 43 (two consecutive winning prizes 5 to 7) are determined, 25%, and when winning numbers 44 or 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 8 and 9) are determined, 100%. Further, the ART promotion lottery may be performed only when the number of games in the 1BB-A game is equal to or greater than the specific number of games, or during a period until the specific number of games is reached.

  If you win 1BB-A and win the chance zone lottery, you can move from the next game to the chance zone preparation (advantageous section), and when 1BB-A wins, you are in the chance zone (advantageous section). It may be possible to migrate.

  When the ART promotion lottery is won during the 1BB-A game, when the 1BB-A game is over, the game can be shifted to the ART (arrows in the figure). On the other hand, when the ART promotion lottery has not been won, when the 1BB-A game is over, it is possible to move to the normal section again (arrow in the figure).

  When the game section control means 125 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the game section control means 125 starts counting the number of games executed during the advantageous section (game state numbers 1 to 9). This count value is cleared when returning from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the number of games executed in the advantageous section becomes 1470 games, it is possible to shift from the current gaming state number to the ending state (gaming state number 10) (the arrow in the figure). Then, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, it is possible to shift to the normal section (the arrow in the figure). In this way, by setting an upper limit of 1500 games for the number of games in the advantageous section, tens of thousands of medals are paid out in one advantageous section so that the player's gambling will not be remarkably lost. I have to. Here, even if the bonus game is being played when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, it is possible to shift to the normal section. Of course, even in this case, if the bonus game end condition is not satisfied, the bonus game is continued.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the ART lottery executed in the high probability (gaming state number 6) and the ART promotion lottery executed in the chance zone (gaming state number 9) shift to ART (in other words, the ART game). A lottery to determine whether or not to extend the stay period in ART, such as a lottery to determine whether or not to start) or an extra lottery executed in the special zone (game state number 6), This corresponds to “a predetermined lottery concerning a notification game”. In the present embodiment, the end condition during ART is the digestion of a predetermined number of games. However, for example, when performing an ART end lottery to determine whether or not to end ART, Corresponds to "Lottery of". Furthermore, when it is determined whether to extend the stay period during ART by performing a so-called loop lottery, this loop lottery also corresponds to the “predetermined lottery regarding the notification game”.

  When shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section, a series of addresses F020 to F028 in the storage area of the RWM are cleared (set to 0). In other words, the set value data at address F000, the RT state number at address F005, the stored number display data at F010, etc. are not cleared. As a result, only information relating to the advantageous section is cleared, so that even if the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered, the game can be executed normally.

  The game section control means 125 performs the following transition control in addition to the transition control shown in FIG. First, in the normal section, when the winning number 65 (1BB-B + watermelon A) is determined by the winning lottery, the normal section can be shifted to the standby section. In this standby section, although the transition to the effective section is confirmed, the stop switch push order cannot be reported as in the normal section (information that can identify an advantageous push order to the sub-control means 200). Must not be transmitted). In the waiting section, the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed. Further, it is not necessary to light the advantageous section LED during the standby section.

  After transitioning to the waiting zone, when winning 1BB-B, it is possible to shift from the waiting zone to the high probability middle bonus (game state number 4) of the advantageous zone. Further, at the latest, after the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B ("White 7-White 7-White 7") is prepared, the advantageous section LED is turned on until a medal for the next game can be inserted. . Then, when the 1BB-B game is completed, it is possible to shift to high probability (game state number 4), and thereafter, transition control is performed according to the transition diagram shown in FIG. Here, the route from the normal section to the advantageous section through the standby section is called “special route”.

  In the transition control performed by the gaming section control means 125, even if the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the transition to the normal section returns (transfers) without being promoted (shifted) to ART (gaming state number 5). The ratio between pattern A (for example, high accuracy or high accuracy only) and pattern B that is promoted (transferred) to ART during (at least game state number 5) at least once and then returned to the normal section (transferred) is about 7 : It is set to be 3. Further, in the case of pattern A, the expected number of medals that can be acquired (paid out) during the advantageous section (hereinafter also referred to as “expected number of acquired sheets”) is about 10, and the expected number of acquired medals in the advantageous section in the case of pattern B is It is assumed that it is designed to be about 460 sheets. As a result, the expected number of acquired images once shifted to the advantageous section is 460 × 0.3 + 10 × 0.7 = 145.

  As described above, the expected number of acquired sheets (145 sheets) when shifting to the advantageous section is set to be ½ (350 sheets) or less of the allowable storage number (700 sheets) of the medal storage section 83a of the hopper 83. For example, if the staff of the game hall replenishes about half of the allowable number of medals, for example, 350 medals at the start of business (there is no need to replenish medals, and the medal storage unit 83a is filled. In general, about half of the medals are replenished.) Even if the winning lot transition lottery is immediately won, there is a possibility that the medal in the medal storage portion 83a may be empty during the advantageous zone. Even if it is low (that is, it is not necessary to replenish medals) and it is not won in the advantageous section shift lottery for a while, the medal auxiliary storage 84 will not be filled immediately (snash In other words, it is not necessary to collect medals), so that the work burden on the staff after the game hall starts operating is reduced (there is no dissatisfaction with the player even if the number of staff is small). it can. In summary, it is preferable to set the expected number of acquisitions when moving to the advantageous section to be less than or equal to half the allowable storage number of the medal storage unit 83a. Alternatively, it is preferable to provide a hopper having a medal storage portion 83a capable of storing a number that is at least twice as many as the number of expected acquisitions when moving to an advantageous section.

  Furthermore, by making the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery less than 1 / (700 ÷ regulated number (regular number “3” in the normal game)), the medal in the medal storage unit 83a is reached at the end of the first advantageous section. Even if it almost disappears (for example, 350-145 = 105), there is a high possibility that the medal storage part 83a is full or nearly full before the next advantageous section starts. There is a low possibility that the medal storage portion 83a will be emptied even during the advantageous section (that is, it is not necessary to replenish medals). On the other hand, if the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 1 / (700 ÷ specified number (specified number “3” in the normal game)) or more, the medal storage unit 83a is stored at the end of the first advantageous section. Is likely to be almost lost (for example, 350-145 = 105), so it is unlikely that the medal storage unit 83a is full before the next advantageous section is started. The medal auxiliary storage 84 does not become full (that is, it is not necessary to collect medals).

  For the same reason, it is desirable to set the number of medals to be paid out in one bonus game to 350 or less. For example, as in this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out in one bonus game is 1BB-A. When there are 1BB-C to F games less than games and 1BB-B games, it is desirable to set the winning probabilities of 1BB-C to F higher than the winning probabilities of 1BB-A and 1BB-B. Even if the bonus combination is won, if it is 1BB-C to F, there is a low possibility that the medal in the medal storage unit 83a will be empty during the bonus game (that is, the medal cannot be replenished). That's it.

(Explanation of freeze control means)
In FIG. 16, the freeze control means 130 determines the progress of the game when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied when the game played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, and the next game becomes the normal section. Execute freeze control to delay. However, if the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches 1500 games and the bonus game is in progress and the bonus game end condition is not satisfied, the freeze that delays the progress of the game at that time The bonus game is continued without executing the control. In this way, if the bonus game is being played when the number of games executed during the advantageous period reaches 1500 games, the freeze control is executed when the game played during the advantageous period reaches 1500 games. Without executing, the freeze control is executed when the bonus game ends.

  In conventional slot machines, there are no restrictions on ART games, so tens of thousands of medals are paid out in one ART, and the gambling is not too high. There was an opinion. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games so that the gambling is not excessively high. Also, the freeze control means 130 freezes when a 1500 game is played in the advantageous section. Thereby, during this freeze, it is possible to display the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, etc. during the advantageous section (in particular, the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, the total number of ART sets, etc. during ART).

  However, when the 1500th game is reached during the bonus game, which is an advantageous section, the freeze control means 130 does not perform freeze control. Therefore, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the above-described advantageous section are not displayed. This is because if the freeze control is performed during the bonus game, the refreshing feeling during the bonus game may be cut off. In addition, freeze control is performed when the bonus game ends. This makes it possible to display the total number of games played during the bonus game and the total number of acquired games during the freeze.

  In addition, when the 1500th game is reached during the bonus game which is the advantageous section, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during the advantageous section, etc. The number of times, the total number of acquired sheets, and the total number of AT sets) may be displayed. Furthermore, the total number of games and the total number of acquired bonus games in the normal section may be added to the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous section.

(Explanation of notification game control means)
The notification game control means 140 can determine and notify the push order to be notified according to the winning combination when it shifts to the above-mentioned advantageous section (in the advantageous section). The notification of the pressing order is performed by displaying a numerical value called an instruction number on the acquired number display 28 shown in FIG. Specifically, instruction number 1 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 1) of left → middle → right (forward pressing), and instruction number 2 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 2) of left → right → middle (scissor pressing). ), Instruction number 3 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 3) of middle → left → right (forward middle press), and instruction number 4 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 4) of middle → right → left (reverse middle pressing). ), Instruction number 5 corresponds to the right → left → middle (reverse scissors press) push order (push order 5), and instruction number 6 corresponds to the right → middle → left (reverse push) push order (push order). 6). In addition, when the notification game control unit 140 does not notify the pressing order, an instruction number 0 that does not indicate a specific pressing order is set.

  When the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display unit 28, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the ten-segment display (hereinafter also referred to as “upper digit”) of the acquired number display unit 28 “ = ”Is displayed, and the instruction number is displayed on the 8-segment display of the first place (hereinafter also referred to as“ lower digit ”). In the present embodiment, the acquired number display 28 is used both for displaying the number of paid-out medals, displaying an error code (described later), and displaying an instruction number. By displaying “=” which is not displayed when displaying the number of medals to be paid out and the error code, the player can determine the type of information displayed.

  Here, in each section shown in FIG. 28, the notification game control means 140 is configured such that the normal section (the gaming state number 0), the high probability middle bonus (the gaming state number 3), and the high certainty bonus (the gaming state number 4). In addition, in the bonus during ART (game state number 7), the instruction number is not displayed on the acquired number display 28. On the other hand, in ART (gaming state number 5), in the specialization zone (gaming state number 6), in preparation for returning to ART (gaming state number 8), and in the ending state (gaming state number 10), the winning number When any of 24 to 29 is determined, the instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations of winning 01 or winning 02 are arranged are displayed. Hereinafter, such notification contents in the pressing order are also referred to as “all navigations”. In the case of high accuracy (game state number 1) and high probability (game state number 2), when winning numbers 24-29 are determined, at least one combination of winning 01 or winning 02 The corresponding instruction numbers are displayed (all navigations) in the order of pressing. In addition to the above instruction number, left →? →? Instruction number 7 corresponding to the push order (push order 7) of (first left stop), middle →? →? Instruction number 8 corresponding to the pressing order (pressing order 8) of (first middle stop), right →? →? If there is an instruction number 9 corresponding to the pressing order (pressing order 9) of (right first stop), after all navigation is performed, when any of winning numbers 24-29 is determined, winning 06 Instruction numbers 7 to 9 corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 08 and winning 10 (according to the determined winning number) are not arranged are displayed. Hereinafter, such notification contents in the pressing order are also referred to as “half-navigation”.

  The reason for performing the half-navigation is, for example, while waiting for the winning number 19 to be determined in order to shift to the ART state (gaming state number 3) in the high probability (gaming state number 2) and RT2, the winning number Any of 24-29 may be determined. At this time, in order to maintain RT2 (so that the symbol combinations corresponding to winning prizes 06 to 8 and winning prize 10 are not aligned), if all navigation is performed, 12 medals will be paid out. It is not preferable because medals are given excessively. Therefore, it is up to the player's luck to perform the half-navigation to ensure that the RT2 is maintained and 12 medals are paid out.

  In addition, it is not preferable to give medals excessively to the player (payout of 12 medals), but even in situations where it is not preferable to reduce medals (payout of 1 medal) , There is a merit in performing half navigation (12 payouts or 3 payouts depending on the player's luck). In a slot machine in which the instruction numbers 7 to 9 are not defined, the instruction number may not be displayed after all navigation is performed, or all navigation may be performed occasionally. In addition, high probability (game state number 2), during ART (game state number 5), during the specialization zone (game state number 6), ART return preparation (game state number 8), and ending state (game state number) In 10), when any of the winning numbers 1 to 6 is determined, the instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations of the replay 01 are arranged are displayed.

  Here, the number of initial games in the ART is set in consideration of the combined winning probability of the push order bells 1 to 6 so that the above-mentioned “all navigation” is performed at least once when moving to the advantageous section. Is desirable. As described above, in principle, when moving to the advantageous section, all navigation is not performed once, and the normal section is not transferred. Therefore, depending on the set initial game number, a predetermined number of games (initial game) This is because there is a possibility that inconvenience that it is not possible to shift to the normal section may occur despite the fact that several minutes) have been performed.

  It is assumed that in the normal section and RT2, any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance items A to C) is determined and the next game is shifted to the high probability (game state number 2). For example, assuming that the winning combination probability of push order bells 1 to 6 in RT1 and RT2 is 1 / 8.40, and the winning probability of Replay C (winning role to move from RT2 to RT1) is 1 / 1.93, it is highly accurate. (Game state number 2) and the number of games staying at RT2 can be estimated as 2 games (from the winning probability of Replay C). Also, in RT2, the number of games required from the transition to high probability (game state number 2) until the first “all navigation” is performed is estimated to be 9 games (from the combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6). (Including the case where the ART is being transferred to RT1 on the way).

  Therefore, if the number of initial games in ART is set to 9-2 = 7 games or more, the possibility that “all navigation” will be performed at least once before the condition for shifting to the normal section is satisfied is increased. Can do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the state during the ART cannot be ended although the end condition during the ART (execution of the predetermined number of games) is satisfied. In addition, since the winning probability of Replay C is set higher than the combined winning probability of the order bells 1 to 6, the possibility of “all navigation” being performed at high accuracy (gaming state number 2) and RT2 is reduced. Therefore, the notification of “all navigation” can be concentrated during ART.

  As the display mode of the instruction number, “= 0” is displayed when the instruction number is 0, but it may not be displayed. As the display mode of the instruction number, the instruction number may be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 and the lower digit may not be displayed. Here, as a non-display mode, it is possible to turn off all segments of the 8-segment display. Further, “=” may be displayed instead of non-display. Further, the instruction number is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, and the number indicating the stop switch to be actually operated (for example, the left stop switch 37 is No. 1 (“1”), the middle stop switch 37C is No. 2 ( “2”), the right stop switch 37 may sequentially display No. 3 (“3”)) in the lower digits.

  The display mode of the instruction number is not limited to that shown in FIG. 29 (a). For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a 7-bit numerical value (0 to 127) is displayed using one 8-segment display. You may make it display. In this case, segments a to g are associated with Bits 0 to 6 in the command number data to be described later, and each segment is turned on or off to display the command number expressed in binary (that is, within a numerical range of 0 to 127). To do. In this case, for example, when the instruction number 1 is displayed, only the segment a is turned on. Further, if the winning number (which may be a winning / replaying winning number) is known, an advantageous pressing order can be determined, so that the winning number may be displayed instead of the instruction number. For example, when displaying the winning number 28 (push order bell 5), the segments c, d, and e are turned on. Of course, these lighting modes may be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 or in the lower digit. The stop switch to be actually operated may be indicated by a binary number. In either case, segment data to be described later may be determined in advance so that such display can be performed.

(Explanation of role monitor control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the role ratio monitor control means 145 displays the advantageous section ratio, the medium period ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative ratio, and the cumulative ratio displayed on the ratio monitor 103 shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. Calculate the cumulative service ratio. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 8D, the cumulative value in the most recent 6000 games is counted for each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the consecutive combination payout number. Based on the value, the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio are calculated. Separately from this, the total cumulative value is counted for each of the total payout number, the item payout number, and the combined payout number, and based on each count value, the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio are calculated. Furthermore, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are counted, and the advantageous section ratio is calculated based on these count values.

(Explanation of winning determination means)
Returning to FIG. 16, when all of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R are stopped, the winning combination determination means 150 corresponds to any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, when it is determined that any BB combination of 1BB-A to F has won, the BB game starts from the next game, and when it is determined that the SB combination has won, the next game For example, when a game using the combination lottery table shown in FIG. 26 is performed and it is determined that the re-game player has won, the re-game is performed in the next game. The number of medals corresponding to the selected small role is paid out. Here, until the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, 50) is reached, the number of medals corresponding to the winning small role is added to the current number of credits, and the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, 50). After reaching the above, medals may be discharged from the medal payout opening 60 shown in FIG.

(Description of abnormality detection means)
The anomaly detection means 155 detects an abnormal state that may occur in the slot machine 10 during non-games and during a game or a situation that obstructs the progress of the game, and detects the detected anomalies or faults (hereinafter collectively referred to as “error”). Error number) is displayed on the acquired number display 28. Here, FIG. 30 shows some of the types of errors detected by the abnormality detection means 155.

  In FIG. 30, a power failure recovery error (error code: E1) indicates that the content of the RWM is not normal when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned ON (hereinafter also referred to as “ON” or “ON”) (for example, This error is detected when the contents of the RWM at power-off and the contents of the RWM at power-on do not match (parity check error)). This error is also detected when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment. The empty error (error code: CA) is an error detected when there are no medals stored in the medal storage unit 83a of the hopper 83. The door opening error (error code: Cd) is an error detected when the front door 14 of the slot machine 10 is opened. When these errors are detected, an error code corresponding to the detected error is displayed on the acquired number display 28 by the LED display control means 160 described later.

  Among the errors described above, the power recovery error is an error that can be detected when the slot machine 10 is powered on, and the empty error and the door opening error are errors that can be detected during the game. Further, when each error is detected, the main control means slot machine 10 enters a state where the game cannot be progressed (hereinafter also referred to as “non-game state”). The method of resuming the progress (returning method) differs depending on the type of error.

  First, when the game becomes impossible due to an empty error or a door opening error, the cause of the error is resolved, and the game control process is resumed by operating the reset / setting switch 82c (see FIG. 3). can do. Thus, the empty error and the door opening error are referred to as recoverable errors because the game control process can be resumed (returned) by operating the reset / setting switch 82c. Note that the game control process can be resumed also when the key is turned counterclockwise in the door key 31. The door opening error can be canceled based on the door being closed (without requiring the operation of the reset / setting switch 82c or turning the keypad counterclockwise). .

  On the other hand, when a power failure recovery error occurs, the slot machine 10 is turned off and the setting change key (setting key) inserted into the keyhole of the key switch 82b is turned on. In this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again. As a result, the setting is being changed. At this time, a predetermined storage area of the RWM is cleared. Thus, the power failure recovery error is referred to as a non-recoverable error because the game control process cannot be resumed (returned). The power failure recovery error is an error that can be detected immediately after the power is turned on.

  When an unrecoverable error occurs, the predetermined storage area (addresses F000 to F3FF) of the RWM is cleared at the time of return, and the information about the game stored in the cleared storage area is not maintained. Will be done. Note that when an unrecoverable error occurs, the address F000 is also initialized and "0" is stored. In this embodiment, when the address F000 is "0", the setting is being changed. “1” is displayed on the set value display 87. In other words, since the correction process for displaying “1” on the set value display 87 is not required, the capacity can be reduced.

(Description of LED display control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the LED display control means 160 includes a clearing display LED 22, a re-game display LED 23, an insertion possible display LED 24, a game start display LED 25, an insertion display LED 26 a to 26 c, a credit number display 27, an acquired number display 28, setting. Display control of the value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103 is performed. Here, the contents of the LED segment table A referred to when the LED display control means 160 performs display control of the 8-segment display constituting the credit number display 27, the acquired number display 28 and the set value display 87 are shown. FIG. 31 (b) shows the contents of the LED segment table B shown in FIG. 31 (a) and referred to when the display control of the 8-segment display constituting the role ratio monitor 103 is performed.

  The LED segment tables A and B are information stored in the ROM included in the main control means 100, and each segment ag (FIG. 4 (a), FIG. 29 (b) constituting the 8-segment display. ) See) which is to be lit, in other words, it can be said that the display mode of the 8-segment display is determined in advance. Hereinafter, this data is referred to as segment data. Also, the segments a to g shown in FIGS. 4 (a) and 29 (b) are each an 8-segment display constituting the credit number display 27, the acquired number display 28, the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103. Segments a to g are shown.

  There are 16 segment data in the LED segment table A in FIG. 31A, and each segment data is stored in ROM addresses 1211H to 1220H. Further, there are 13 segment data in the LED segment table B of FIG. 31B, and each segment data is stored in ROM addresses 1311H to 131DH. Each segment data is 1-byte data, and each bit D0 to D6 when the data is represented in binary corresponds to each segment a to g of the 8-segment display. That is, the least significant bit D0 corresponds to the segment a, the upper bit D1 corresponds to the segment b, and the bits D2 to D6 hereinafter correspond to the segments c to g, respectively. When the value of each bit is “0”, the corresponding segment is turned off, and when it is “1”, it is turned on. However, whether “1” is represented by a high level signal (for example, +5 V (volt)) or a low level signal (for example, ground potential) (in other words, whether it is active high or active low). May be determined as appropriate.

  In the following, description will be made taking active high (a high level signal is output from the data output terminal of the microcomputer chip Z1 when “1”) as an example. In the present embodiment, there is no item for which the ratio is not displayed on the role ratio monitor 103. For example, in a model having no advantageous section, “-” is displayed on the display unit that displays the advantageous section ratio. Therefore, the LED segment table B in which the segment data (40H) for lighting only the segment g at the ROM address 131E (offset value: DH) (display mode “−”) is stored may be used.

  Since the most significant bit D7 is not used for lighting control of the segments a to g of the 8-segment display, all the values of the most significant bit D7 of each segment data are “0”.

  For example, the segment data 3FH stored in the ROM address 1211H is expressed as “00111111” in binary, indicating that the segments a to f are turned on and the segment g is turned off. Therefore, the display mode is “0”. Similarly, segment data having display forms of numerals “1” to “9” are stored in the ROM addresses 1212H to 121AH, respectively. The addresses 121BH to 121FH store segment data in the form of displaying alphabets or symbols “A”, “=”, “C”, “d”, and “E”, respectively. Further, segment data for turning off all the segments is stored at the address 121FH.

  On the other hand, in the LED segment table B, the ROM addresses 1311H to 131AH store the segment data that display the numbers “0” to “9”, respectively, and the addresses 131BH to 121EH each include the alphabet. Alternatively, segment data that is a display form of the symbols “U”, “y”, “A”, and “−” is stored.

  The LED display control means 160 manages segment data acquired from the LED segment table by using an offset value. This offset value indicates an address value based on the leading address 1211H of the LED segment table A (1311H in the LED segment table B). For example, when the segment data is acquired from the LED segment table A, if the offset value is “0”, the segment data (3FH) of 1211H + 0H = 1121H is acquired, and if the offset value is “B”, 1211H + BH = 121CH segment data (48H) is acquired.

  Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35 whether lighting control of each display LED and 8-segment display is performed using the segment data acquired from the LED segment table A or B. FIG. FIG. 32 is a wiring diagram showing wiring and the like among the microcomputer chip Z1, the digit drivers DD1 and DD2, the segment driver SD, and the setting display 87 mounted on the main control board 101. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pin assignments of the output ports 2 to 4. FIG. 33 is a wiring diagram showing the wiring between each display LED and the 8-segment display mounted on the central display board installed on the back surface of the front door 14. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the bit of the signal (data) input to each 8-segment display and each segment and each display LED of the 8-segment display.

  In the wiring diagram of the main control board shown in FIG. 32, the microcomputer chip Z1 has three chip select signal output terminals XCS1 to XCS3 and 8-bit data output terminals D0 to D7. Digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and segment driver SD each have a clock input terminal CK, data input terminals D0 to D7 and data output terminals D0 to D7, and a signal input to clock input terminal CK is on (high level signal). When the signal is changed from OFF to LOW (low level signal), the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 is held, and signals corresponding to the signals are output from the data output terminals D0 to D7. When the signal input to the clock input terminal CK changes from off (low level signal) to on (high level signal), the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 is held, and the signal is Corresponding signals may be output from the data output terminals D0 to D7. Of course, a signal corresponding to the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 may be held and output from the data output terminals D0 to D7.

  The chip select signal output terminal XCS1 is the clock input terminal CK of the digit driver DD2, the chip select signal output terminal XCS2 is the clock input terminal CK of the segment driver SD, and the chip select signal output terminal XCS3 is the clock input terminal of the digit driver DD1. CK and each are connected. The data output terminals D0 to D7 of the microcomputer chip Z1 are connected to the digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and the data input terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD. However, since the bits D4 to D7 of the digit driver DD1 are not used (NC), these data input terminals are connected to the ground.

  Further, the data output terminals D0 to D2 of the digit driver DD2 are connected to the connectors of the central display board shown in FIG. 34 via corresponding drive circuits (not shown, but via the main control board side connector CN1 and the wire harness). The data output terminals D3 to D7 are connected to the 3rd to 7th pins of the input connector CN (hereinafter referred to as “input connector CN”). Further, the data output terminal D7 is also connected to the common terminal of the set value display 87. Further, the data output terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD correspond to the segments a to g (more specifically, to the segments a to g of the set value display 87 and the role monitor 103 through the corresponding driving circuits. LED anode) and the 8th to 15th pins of the input connector CN of FIG.

  Further, the data output terminal D0 of the digit driver DD1 is connected to the common terminal of the identifier display unit ID (upper digit) of the duty monitor 103, and the data output terminal D1 is connected to the common terminal of the identifier display unit ID (lower digit). The output terminal D2 is connected to the common terminal of the ratio display portion RA (upper digit) of the role monitor 103, and the data output terminal D3 is connected to the common terminal of the ratio display portion RA (lower digit). The common terminal of the 8-segment display is connected to the cathode of each LED corresponding to the segments a to g.

  The data output terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD are connected to the bases of pnp transistors included in the corresponding driving circuits. A voltage of +5 V is applied to the emitter of each pnp transistor, and the collector is connected to the input connector CN of the central display substrate. When a low level signal is supplied from the connected data output terminal to the base from the connected data output terminal, the pnp type transistor of each drive circuit is turned on, and a current flows from the emitter to the collector. Is supplied (high level voltage is applied).

  Data output terminals D0 to D2 of digit driver DD2 are connected to the bases of npn transistors included in the corresponding driving circuits. The emitter of each npn-type transistor is connected to the input connector CN of the central display substrate, and the collector is connected to the ground. When each npn transistor is supplied with a high level signal from the connected data output terminal to the base, the npn transistor is turned on so that a current can flow from the collector to the emitter. become.

  As described above, the pnp transistor of each drive circuit is turned on when a low level signal is supplied to the base, and the npn transistor is turned on when a high level signal is supplied to the base. . Incidentally, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D2, the digit driver DD2 outputs a high level (low level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D2, and inputs the data. When a high level (low level) signal is input to the terminals D3 to D7, a low level (high level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2. Further, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D7, the segment driver SD outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D7. ing. Furthermore, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D3, the digit driver DD1 outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D3. ing.

  If it is active low (when “1”, a low level signal is output from the data output terminal of the microcomputer chip Z1), on the contrary, the digit driver DD2 has a low level (to the data input terminals D0 to D2). When a high level signal is input, a high level (low level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2, and a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D3 to D7. In this case, a low level (high level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2. When a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D7, the segment driver SD outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D7. . Furthermore, when a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D3, the digit driver DD1 outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D3. ing.

  Next, in the wiring diagram of the central display board shown in FIG. 33, + 5V (volts) is supplied to the first and second pins of the input connector CN of the central display board, and each of the 1 to 3 input LEDs 26a to 26c is supplied. Connected to the anode. The third pin (input signal DG1) of the input connector CN is connected to a common terminal in the 8-segment display of the credit amount display 27 (upper digit). The 4th pin (input signal DG2) of the input connector CN is connected to the common terminal in the 8-segment display of the credit amount display 27 (lower digit).

  The fifth pin (input signal DG3) of the input connector CN is connected to a common terminal in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 (upper digit). The 6th pin (input signal DG4) of the input connector CN is connected to the common terminal in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 (lower digit). The seventh pin (input signal DG5) of the input connector CN is connected to the cathode of the clearing display LED 22. The common terminal of the 8-segment display is connected to the cathode of each LED corresponding to the segments a to g.

  The 8th to 14th pins (input signals SGa to SGg) of the input connector CN are connected to the anodes of the LEDs corresponding to the segments a to g included in the 8-segment display of the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28, respectively. It is connected. For example, No. 8 (input signal SGa) of the input connector CN is connected to the anode of the LED corresponding to the segment a in each of the 8-segment indicators of the credit amount indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28. Pin 15 (input signal SGp) of the input connector CN is connected to each anode of the segment DP in the clearing display LED 22, the re-game display LED 23, the insertion possible display LED 24, the game start display LED 25, and the credit number display 27 (lower digit). Has been. Further, the 16th to 18th pins (input signals IN1 to IN3) of the input connector CN are connected to the cathodes of the 1-sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 26c, respectively.

  Next, contents of signals output to digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and segment driver SD will be described with reference to FIG. Signals output from the output ports 2 to 4 of the microcomputer chip Z1 are input to each driver described above. Specifically, the output port 2 signal is output to the digit driver DD2, the output port 3 signal is output to the segment driver SD, and the output port 3 signal is output to the digit driver DD1.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (least significant bit) to D7 (most significant bit) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1, bits D0 to D2 are signals for lighting the input display LEDs 26a to 26c. Bit D0 is a signal for turning on the turn-on display LED 26a, bit D1 is a turn-on display LED 26b, and bit D2 is a signal for turning on the turn-on display LED 26c. Bits D3 to D7 are signals for designating an 8-segment display to be lit among the credit display 27, the acquired number display 28 and the set value display 87, respectively. It is also a signal for designating a display LED to be lit among various display LEDs (excluding the input display LED).

  Here, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D3 is digit 1, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D4 is digit 2, and the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D5 is digit 3. The 8-segment display designated by the signal of bit D6 is represented by digit 4, and the 8-segment display designated by the signal of bit D7 is represented by digit 5. The digit 1 is the upper digit of the credit indicator 27, the digit 2 is the lower digit of the credit indicator 27, the digit 3 is the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, the digit 4 is the lower digit of the acquired number indicator 28, and the digit 5 Corresponds to each 8-segment display of the set value display 87.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (least significant bit) to D7 (most significant bit) output from the output port 3 of the microcomputer chip Z1, bits D0 to D6 turn on the segments a to g of the 8-segment display, respectively. It is a signal for. Specifically, bit D0 corresponds to segment a, bit D1 corresponds to segment b, bit D2 corresponds to segment c, bit D3 corresponds to segment d, bit D4 corresponds to segment e, bit D5 corresponds to segment f, bit D6 corresponds to segment g Yes. The bit D7 is a signal for lighting various display LEDs or the segment DP of the 8-segment display.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (the least significant bit) to D7 (the most significant bit) output from the output port 4 of the microcomputer chip Z1, the bits D0 to D3 are the four 8-segment displays constituting the role monitor 103. It is a signal that designates an 8-segment display to be lit. Specifically, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D0 is the digit 6, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D1 is the digit 7, and the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D2 is set. An 8-segment display designated by the signal of digit 8 and bit D3 is referred to as digit 9. The digit 6 is the upper digit of the identifier display part ID, the digit 7 is the lower digit of the identifier display part ID, the digit 8 is the upper digit of the ratio display part RA, and the digit 9 is the lower digit of the ratio display part RA. Corresponding to the vessel.

  Note that the signals of the bits D4 to D7 output from the output port 4 are not used.

  Each time the timer interrupt processing is performed in the wiring diagrams shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. The so-called dynamic lighting control is performed by cyclically switching the 8-segment display and the display LEDs that are turned on, such as 5 → digit 9 → digit 6 →. Here, any one of the LED digit signals 1 to 5 output from the output port 2 and the LED digit signals 6 to 9 output from the output port 4 is output as a high level signal. Then, a low level signal is output from one of the data output terminals D3 to D7 of the digit driver DD2 or the data output terminals D0 to D3 of the digit driver DD1. That is, the digit corresponding to the LED digit signal which is at a high level (for example, +5 V (volt)) can be turned on. Then, the 8-segment display and the display LED corresponding to the digit in the lighting enabled state are turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the LED display control means 160 operates while the LED digit signal 1 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD2). Causes the segment data for displaying the tens value of the number of medals currently stored (credit) to be output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the game start display LED 25 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. If the number of credits is less than 10, segment data for displaying 0 may be output, or all segments may be turned off.

  While the LED digit signal 2 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D4 of the digit driver DD2), the number of medals currently stored (credited) Segment data for displaying values is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the advantageous section LED (the lower digit segment DP of the credit indicator 27) is to be lit, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3.

  While the LED digit signal 3 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D5 of the digit driver DD2), the display mode is to be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28. Corresponding segment data is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the enabling indicator LED 24 is to be lit, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The contents displayed in the upper digits of the acquired number display 28 are the tenth digit value when displaying the medal payout number (acquired number), “=” when displaying the instruction number, and displaying the error code. Becomes “E” or “C”. When displaying the medal payout number, if the medal payout number is less than 10, the segment data indicating 0 may be output from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the output port 3, or all segments may be output. The segment data to be turned off may be output.

  While the LED digit signal 4 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D6 of the digit driver DD2), the display mode is to be displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. Corresponding segment data is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the re-game display LED 23 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The contents displayed in the lower digits of the acquired number display unit 28 are the first place value when displaying the medal payout number, the numerical value of the instruction number when displaying the instruction number, and “1” when displaying the error code. ”,“ A ”, or“ d ”.

  When displaying the medal payout number, if the medal payout number is 0, the segment data indicating 0 may be output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3, or all segments are turned off. Data may be output. In addition, when a small role is won by a role lottery, if the selected small role is not won (when it is missed), “0” is displayed on the acquired number display 28, and in the case of a loss in the role lottery May be hidden. Thus, the player can identify whether the small role has been missed or whether the result of the role lottery has been lost.

  While the LED digit signal 5 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D7 of the digit driver DD2), the segment data for displaying the current set value is output to the output port 3. From D0 to D6. At this time, when the checkout display LED 22 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The set value is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed during non-games by a staff at the game hall, and in other cases, segment data for turning off all the segments a to g is displayed. Output from D0 to D6 of output port 3.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (c), the LED display control means 160 indicates that the LED digit signal 6 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D0 of the digit driver DD1). The segment data corresponding to the display mode (“6” or “7”) displayed in the upper digit of the identifier display part ID of the role ratio monitor 103 is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. While the LED digit signal 7 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D1 of the digit driver DD1), it is displayed in the lower digit of the identifier display portion ID of the role monitor 103. The segment data corresponding to the display mode (“U”, “y” or “A”) is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. Further, a high level signal is output to D7 of the output port 3 to light up the segment DP in the lower digit of the identifier display section ID.

  While the LED digit signal 8 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D2 of the digit driver DD1), of the ratio displayed on the ratio display portion RA of the role monitor 103 The segment data corresponding to the tens place value is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. While the LED digit signal 9 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD1), the ratio displayed on the ratio display portion RA of the role monitor 103 The segment data corresponding to the first place value is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3.

  In the LED display control described above, for example, when the display control of the 8-segment display of digit 1 and the display LED (the upper digit of the credit number display 27 and the game start display LED 25) is performed, a signal output from D3 of the output port 2 To high level. As a result, a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD2. Further, the output signals are set to low level from D4 to D7 of the output port 2 and from D0 to D3 of the output port 4. As a result, high level signals are output from the data output terminals D4 to D7 of the digit driver DD2 and the data output terminals D0 to 3 of the digit driver DD1. Furthermore, a signal based on segment data (see FIG. 31A) indicating the display mode (any one of 0 to 5) corresponding to the tens place value of the current credit number is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. Output. For example, if the value of the tens place is “2”, a high level signal is output from D0, D1, D3, D4, and D6 of the output port 3, and a low level signal is output from D2 and D5. As a result, low level signals are output from the output terminals D0, D1, D3, D4, and D6 of the segment driver SD, and high level signals are output from the output terminals D2 and D5.

  As a result, the input signals SGa, SGb, SGd, SGe, and SGg become high level (+5 V), and +5 V is applied to the anodes of the LEDs of the segments a, b, d, e, and g in the 8-segment display of the digits 1 to 9. Applied. However, a high level signal is output to the common terminal (cathode) of the 8-segment display with digits 2 to 9, and no current flows through the LEDs of segments a, b, d, e, and g. Is turned off. On the other hand, since the cathode of the 8-segment display of digit 1 is at a low level, a current flows through each LED of segments a, b, d, e, and g, and the numeral “2” is lit.

  At this time, since only the input signal DG1 is at the low level, the cathode of the game start display LED 25 is at the low level, and is turned on or off according to the level (high / low) of the input signal SGp.

  Note that the notification of the pressing order (display of the instruction number) may be performed using a dedicated display. This dedicated display is a multi-digit 8-segment display newly provided to notify the pressing order (displays the instruction number, etc.), and is a dedicated digit driver that outputs LED digit signals (unused The data output terminals D4 to D7 may be used as the digit driver DD1, and the LED segment signal output from the segment driver SD described above may be used for lighting control (display control).

  As described above, the segment driver SD is commonly used by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit amount display 27, and the acquired number display 28. In addition, it is recommended that a dedicated display (for example, digit 10) is provided in order to notify the pressing order (display of the instruction number). There are the following reasons for this. By mounting a plurality of segment drivers SD, dynamic lighting control can be performed in parallel (for example, digit 1 → digit 2 → digit 3 → digit 4 → digit 5 → digit 1 → …… 6 → digit 7 → digit 8 → digit 9 → digit 10 → digit 6 → ……), flickering can be reduced.

  However, the 8-segment display device may be broken during the manufacturing process of the slot machine 10 and may break down during the transportation of the slot machine 10 or after the transportation (for example, a specific segment is not lit). . Furthermore, there is a possibility that a part of the wiring between the segment driver and the 8-segment display is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is disconnected or is disconnected in the wire harness). The display of the error code, the medal payout number, or the number of credits conventionally displayed by the 8-segment display does not cause a great disadvantage to the player even if the display cannot be confirmed due to failure or disconnection ( The game result will not be affected), but the notification of the push order (display of the instruction number) will cause a major disadvantage to the player if the display cannot be confirmed even partly due to failure or disconnection (in the game result) Likely).

  For example, when “6” must be displayed on the 8-segment display (for example, when winning number 6 is determined in RT2) as a push order notification (indication number display), segment e fails If the wiring from the output terminal D4 of the segment driver is broken, the display of the 8-segment display becomes “5”. If the player believes this display and performs a stop operation in the order of right → left → middle push, the symbol combinations of the replay 04 are aligned and fall down to non-RT (RT0). That is, the game result is affected. Therefore, it is preferable that the 8-segment display that performs at least the notification of the pressing order (display of the instruction number) can confirm whether or not a failure or the like has occurred. For this reason, in this embodiment, the notification of the pressing order is performed by the acquired number display 28 instead of the dedicated display. Further, the segment driver SD is commonly used by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28.

  In the present embodiment, an error code is also displayed on the acquired number display 28, and for example, “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when a power failure recovery error occurs. Since the power failure recovery error is detected even when the power is turned on (turned on) for the first time after transportation, it is not disconnected at this time (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not connected). It can be confirmed whether it is broken or broken in the wire harness.

  Specifically, if “E” is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, it can be confirmed that the wiring from the data output terminals D0 and D3 to D7 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected. If “1” is displayed in the lower digit, it can be confirmed that the wiring from the data output terminals D1 and D2 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected. Similarly, “Cd” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when a door opening error occurs, and “CA” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when empty. Therefore, when the door is opened or when an empty error occurs, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not disconnected, the wire harness It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a disconnection.

  In the present embodiment, since the credit number display 27 is also controlled to turn on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD, the credit number is displayed when the number of credits is one and six. If “1” and “6” are displayed in the lower digits of the number indicator 27, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board is disconnected). That is not broken in the wire harness).

  In the present embodiment, since the set value display 87 is also controlled to turn on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD, when the set value is set to 1 during the change operation of the set value. If “1” and “6” are displayed on the setting value display 87 at the time of setting to 6, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, main It can be confirmed that the wiring on the control board is not disconnected.

  The duty ratio monitor 103 also displays a ratio ratio monitor when the segment g fails or the wiring from the output terminal D6 of the segment driver is disconnected when "7y" must be displayed on the 8-segment display. As shown in FIG. 8E, the identifier display unit ID 103 is displayed in a state where the segment g is turned off in the display mode of “y” in the lower digits. This is problematic because we do not know whether we wanted to display “7y” or “7U” (that is, whether we wanted to turn on segment g or turn on segment e). .

  In the present embodiment, since the obtained number display device 28, the credit number display device 27, and the set value display device 87 are controlled to be lit (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD. From the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD at the time of disconnection error, at the time of door opening, empty error, when the number of credits is 1 and 6, or when the setting value is 1 and 6 That is, it can be confirmed that the wiring is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not disconnected).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting enable display LED 24 and the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 are controlled to be turned on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD. Therefore, when the medal insertion is possible but the insertion possibility display LED 24 is not lit, there is a possibility that the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 may not be lit. I can confirm that there is. Specifically, there is a possibility that the wiring from the data output terminal D7 of the segment driver SD is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is disconnected or is disconnected in the wire harness). I can confirm that there is.

  In the present embodiment, the segment DP in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED. Of course, the single-load display LED 26a may be used as the advantageous section LED. However, when the single-load display LED 26a is used as an advantageous section LED, the following inconvenience may occur. As described above, + 5V (volts) is supplied to the first and second pins of the input connector CN of the central display board, and is connected to the anode of the one-sheet insertion display LED 26a (advantageous section LED). Furthermore, the 16th pin (input signal IN1) of the input connector CN is connected to the cathode of the single-load display LED 26a (advantageous section LED).

  That is, if the one-sheet insertion display signal (advantageous section signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is at a high level, the one-sheet insertion display LED 26a (advantageous section LED) can be turned on. On the other hand, despite the fact that the single-load display signal (advantageous section signal) needs to be at a low level (for example, during the normal section), it becomes a high level due to the influence of noise or the like. If this is the case, the single-loading display LED 26a (advantageous section LED) will be lit. On the other hand, when the segment DP of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED, the possibility that the above inconvenience occurs is reduced. As described above, the 4th pin (input signal DG2) of the input connector CN of the central display board is connected to the cathode of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the credit number display 27 (lower digit). Furthermore, the 15th pin (input signal SGp) of the input connector CN is connected to the anode of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the credit number indicator 27 (lower digit).

  That is, the LED digit signal 2 (advantageous interval signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is at a high level, and the LED segment signal p (advantageous interval signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is If the level is high, the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 can be turned on. Therefore, for example, even if the LED segment signal p (advantageous interval signal) becomes high level due to the influence of noise or the like even though it is in the normal interval, at that time, the LED digit signal 2 (advantageous interval signal) If is not at the high level, the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 is not lit. Thus, it can be said that the use of the DP segment of the credit number indicator 27 as the advantageous section LED is more resistant to noise and the like than the single-load display LED 26a is used as the advantageous section LED.

  The ART lamp ARTLP should be more resistant to noise and the like, similarly to the advantageous section lamp. This is because the player is confused when the ART lamp ARTLP is lit even though the ART is not in progress. In particular, if the ART lamp ARTLP is lit when the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player may be confused. Therefore, the wiring between the LED 29a, LED 29b, which is the light source of the ART lamp ARTLP mounted on a predetermined printed circuit board, and the microcomputer chip mounted on the sub-control board 202 or the image control board 204 is central. A credit number indicator mounted on the central display board, not the same wiring as the wiring between the single-loading display LED 26a mounted on the display board and the microcomputer chip Z1 mounted on the main control board 101 It is preferable that the wiring is the same as the wiring between the segment DP in the 27 lower digits and the microcomputer chip Z1 mounted on the main control board 101.

  Specifically, a digit signal (a signal designating a display to be lit) is input to the cathodes of the LEDs 29a and 29b, and a segment signal (a signal indicating a display mode to be lit) is input to the anodes of the LEDs 29a and 29b. Wiring. Thereby, it is possible to make the signal for controlling turning on / off output to the ART lamp ARTLP less susceptible to noise.

(Description of control command transmission means)
The control command transmission means (information transmission means) 160 transmits various information related to the game determined by each part of the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200. Information exchanged between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 is limited to one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200. No information is sent directly. Information transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 is transmitted by a control command by serial communication. The control command is composed of a first control command (1 byte) indicating the type of information to be transmitted and a second control command (1 byte) indicating the content of the information to be transmitted. In addition, you may transmit a control command not only by serial communication but by parallel communication (for example, 16 harnesses). The process for transmitting the control command to the sub-control means 200 (control command transmission process) is executed in step S522 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Among the information transmitted by the control command transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200, the main information is related to the set value, the game state, the number of inserted medals, the role lottery , A game section or an advantageous section, a switch operation, a reel stop control, a game result, a generated error, etc.

  Information relating to the game state includes information (RT state number, operation state flag, operation type, etc.) indicating each lottery state shown in FIG. 27, and each game state number shown in FIG. In addition, as for the result of the role lottery, there is a role winning number Y and a production group number B. As for various switch operations, there is information indicating that any one of the clearing switch 33, the start switch 36, and the stop switches 37L, 37C, 37R has been operated. As for the reel stop control, there are a symbol to be stopped and information indicating the number of sliding symbols. As for the results of the game, there are information indicating the symbols that are stopped and displayed and the number of medals to be paid out.

  As information regarding the game section and the advantageous section, various information stored in RWM addresses F020 to F028 described in FIG. Of course, it is not necessary to transmit unnecessary information such as the instructed flag stored in the address F022 or the instruction state flag stored in the address F023 when the sub-control unit 200 executes the effect.

(Description of external signal transmission means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the external signal transmission means 170 is described above via the external concentration terminal board 86 by a timer interruption process (described later) executed at a predetermined cycle (every 2.235 milliseconds) in the main control means 100. The medal insertion signal, medal payout signal, BB signal, advantageous section signal, and the like are output to the outside. In the present embodiment, when the BB combination wins, the BB signal is turned on, and when the BB game is finished, the BB signal is turned off (level output). Further, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section signal is turned on, and when the advantageous section is finished, it is turned off (level output). In addition, the advantageous section signal is turned on when a transition is made to a predetermined performance (for example, during ART (game state number 5)) in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section signal is turned off when the transition is made to the normal section. May be. Also, the above-described various signal output processing (external signal output processing) is executed in step S524 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

<Description of Information Stored in RWM of Main Control Unit 100>

  Next, a part of the contents of various data stored in the RWM of the main control means 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The RWM used in this embodiment can store 1 byte of data at each address, and all the address values shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 are expressed in hexadecimal numbers. In the description with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38, when an address is expressed using a 4-digit hexadecimal number, the letter “H” added at the end is omitted. The types of data shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 are only a part of the data stored in the RWM, and in addition to these data, data necessary for controlling the game is stored in the RWM. Needless to say.

  In FIG. 35, a value (set value data) corresponding to the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is stored at the RWM address F000. That is, 0 is displayed when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “1”, and 1 is displayed when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “2”. 2 when the set value is “3”, 3 when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “4”, and “5” when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “5”. 4. When the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “6”, 5 is stored.

  In the LED display process in the timer interrupt process (see step S510 in FIG. 48), when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display 87 is satisfied (for example, during the setting change or the setting confirmation) The data obtained by adding “1” to the data (set value data) stored at the address F000 is used as an offset value, the corresponding segment data is obtained from the LED segment table A, and the information “1” to “6” can be displayed. To control. The setting confirmation is a state in which the set value data cannot be changed, but the set value is displayed on the set value display 87. By the way, by turning (turning on) a setting change key (setting key) inserted into the key hole of the key switch 82b in a situation where no game is executed and no medal is bet. Control is performed during setting confirmation (also referred to as setting confirmation mode).

  In the conventional slot machine, when the set value can take the range of “1” to “6”, the set value data is also managed by “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value. However, when the minimum value of the set value data is “1”, it may be difficult to perform efficient control processing. Therefore, when the set value can take a range of “1” to “6”, if the minimum value of the set value data is set to “0” and the numerical range is set to “0” to “5”, at least as follows. Has an effect.

  First, an error check of a set value is facilitated, and an error check can be performed with a small program capacity. For example, in the calculation process of the set value error check, when 6 (maximum value of the set value data + 1) is subtracted from the set value data and it is determined that there is no carry (the carry flag is off) in the calculation result, An error (out of the set value range) can be determined. That is, when the set value data is from 0 to 5, a carry occurs, so that it is not judged as an error. However, when any other value (for example, 6 or 100) is stored, it is judged as an error because no carry occurs. can do. Thus, by checking the value of the carry flag, it can be determined whether or not the set value data stored in the RWM is within a normal numerical value range.

  On the other hand, when the set value data is stored as “1” to “6”, it cannot be determined as an error in the same process as the above-described subtraction. That is, when 7 (the maximum value of the set value data + 1) is subtracted from the set value data, for example, even if the set value data is “0”, a carry occurs, so that it is determined to be normal. For this reason, when “0” is stored in the set value data, another process for determining as an error is required, which reduces the program capacity. Note that the timing for performing an error check of the set value may be after the start switch 36 is operated and before the role lottery is performed or during the execution of the timer interrupt process. However, the timing is not limited to the exemplified timing.

Secondly, as an effect of storing the set value data as “0” to “5”, the winning combination having different winning probabilities in the winning lottery according to the set value (hereinafter, also referred to as “winning combination with setting difference”). .) Can be made easier. For example, the winning combination having a setting difference includes a replay-G in the combination lottery table (see FIG. 20) used in RT1. At this time, the numeric data referred to when determining whether or not the re-game-G is won may be stored in the ROM address XXX0 to address XXXA as follows.
Address XXX0 DEFW 3625; (set value data 0)
Address XXX2 DEFW 3547 (setting value data 1)
Address XXX4 DEFW 3329 (setting value data 2)
Address XXX6 DEFW 3172; (set value data 3)
Address XXX8 DEFW 2970 (setting value data 4)
Address XXXA DEFW 2795; (set value data 5)

  Here, the above-mentioned “address XXX0” is for simplifying the explanation and is different from the actual address. Further, DEFW means 2-byte data, and the subsequent value means numeric data. Although the above-mentioned numeric data is represented by a decimal value, it is assumed that the ROM stores the hexadecimal value. Furthermore, the notation “; (set value data 0)” describes the set value data corresponding to the set value data, and is not actually stored in the ROM.

  If the data that can be stored in one address of the ROM is 1 byte, it is stored in two ROM addresses separately for the upper byte and lower byte of the numeric data. For example, when storing the numerical data “3625” (= 0E29H) when the set value data is “0” in the ROM, the lower byte value 29H is stored in the address XXX0, and the upper byte value 0EH is stored in the address XXX1. Remember. Further, when storing the numerical data “2795” (= 0AEBH) when the set value data is “5” in the ROM, the lower byte value EBH is stored in the address XXXA, and the upper byte value 0AH is stored in the address XXXB. Remember.

  As described above, each numeric value is stored at each address so that the set values are in ascending order. For example, when the set value data is “0”, the 2-byte data (0E29H) stored in the address XXX0 and the address XXX1 is acquired in a register (for example, a pair register of the DE register), and is compared with a random value. It is determined whether or not replay-G is won. On the other hand, when the set value data is “5”, whether or not the re-game-G is won by acquiring the 2-byte data (0AEBH) stored in the address XXXA and the address XXXB in a register and performing a comparison operation with a random value. Determine. That is, the numerical data is acquired from different addresses according to the set value data.

  At this time, when 2-byte data is stored as numeric data, it corresponds to the set value data by designating the address as a reference as XXX0 and specifying the address by using the data obtained by doubling the set value data as an offset value. Can be obtained. For example, when the set value data is “3”, 6 is added to the address XXX0, and the numeric data 0C64H (“3172”) is acquired from the address XXX6 and the address XXX7. Note that when the numeric data is represented by 1-byte data, an address is designated using the set value data itself as an offset value without doubling the set value data, and a corresponding numeric value (for example, A register) is acquired. be able to.

  On the other hand, if the set value data is stored in the range of “1” to “6”, the set value data cannot be directly used as the offset value if the above-described numerical value is stored. . In this case, the offset value must be calculated as (set value data-1) × 2. For this reason, the lottery process is more complicated than when the set value data is changed from “0” to “5”.

  Further, the set value display 87 can display the set value by a conventional display method. Conventionally, it has become familiar to display values of “1” to “6” as set values on the display of the set value, and the range of this value is changed (for example, “0” to “5”). Although there was resistance to this, it is possible to display the values familiar to date while exhibiting the effects described above, so that, for example, the staff of the game hall will not be confused.

  As described above, the set value displayed on the set value display 87 and the set value data stored in the address F000 of the RWM are different from each other by one, but an advantageous effect can be obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 87 and the setting value data stored in the address F000 may be the same value. For example, when the setting value displayed on the setting value display 87 is “3”, the setting value data stored in the RWM address F000 may be 3.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the setting value ranges from “1” to “6”, six types of data from “0” to “5” can be stored in the RWM as setting value data. The set value display 87 can display six types of “1” to “6”. For example, the set value range is set to “1” to “4”, and the set value data starts from “0”. Four types of data up to “3” may be stored, and four types of “1” to “4” may be displayed on the set value display 87.

  The address F005 stores data for managing the lottery state during the normal game among the lottery states shown in FIG. Here, “0” is stored when the current lottery state is non-RT (RT0), “1” when RT1, “2” when RT2, and “3” when RT3.

  At the address F010, 1-byte data for displaying the number of medals credited to the slot machine 10 is stored in the credit number display 27. Specifically, an offset value (see FIG. 31A) for designating segment data corresponding to the value of the number of credited medals is stored in the upper and lower digits of the credit number display 27. The Here, in the stored 1-byte data, the upper 4 bits correspond to the offset value for displaying the upper digit of the credit number display 27, and the lower 4 bits are the lower digit of the credit number display 27. Corresponds to the offset value for display.

  Specifically, when the stored number is 0 to 9, the stored number display data is 00H to 09H (F0H to F9H when the upper digit is turned off). When the stored number is 10 to 19, the stored number display data is 10H to 19H. When the stored number is 20 to 29, the stored number display data is 20H to 29H. When the stored number is 30 to 39, the stored number display data is 30H to 39H. When the stored number is 40 to 49, the stored number display data is 40H to 49H. When the stored number is 50, the stored number display data is 50H. The case where “00H” is stored is synonymous with the case where “0” (the number of stored sheets is 0) is stored. In other words, “0” being stored is synonymous with “00H” being stored. Similarly, the case where “05H” is stored is used in the same meaning as the case where “5” (stored number is 5) is stored. In other words, “5” being stored is synonymous with “05H” being stored. Others may be expressed with the same meaning.

  For example, the stored number display data when the value “28” is displayed on the credit number display 27 is 28H. Here, the upper digit (2H) of the stored number display data 28H indicates an offset value for displaying a display mode of “2” in the upper digit of the credit number display 27. Further, the lower digit (8H) of the stored number display data 28H indicates an offset value for displaying a display mode of “8” in the lower digit of the credit number display 27.

  In the above example, when the number of stored sheets is 0, “0” is displayed in the lower digit of the credit number display 27. However, the upper digit and the lower digit may be turned off. In this case, the stored number display data is FFH.

  At the address F011, 1 byte for displaying the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small role (hereinafter also referred to as “paid out number” or “acquired number”), an instruction number, or an error code on the acquired number display 28. Are stored. Specifically, offset values (see FIG. 31A) for specifying segment data corresponding to alphanumeric characters or symbols to be displayed are stored in the upper and lower digits of the acquired number display 28. Here, in the stored 1-byte data, the upper 4 bits correspond to the offset value for displaying the upper digits of the acquired number display 28, and the lower 4 bits are the lower digits of the acquired number display 28. Corresponds to the offset value for display.

  When the payout number display unit 28 displays the payout number, 00H to 09 (F0H to F9H when the upper digits are turned off), 10, 11, or 12H is stored according to the number of medals to be paid out. When nothing is displayed (all segments are turned off), the value of FFH is stored. When the instruction number is displayed, any one of B0H to B6H is stored according to the instruction number to be displayed.

  Moreover, as data for displaying the instruction number, in addition to the above, the quotient value obtained by dividing by a predetermined constant (for example, 10H) is used as an offset value corresponding to the display mode displayed in the upper digit. The remainder value may be an offset value corresponding to the display mode displayed in the lower digit. For example, when “= 6” is displayed as the instruction number, the acquired number display data B6H is stored. As a result, when B6H is divided by 10H, the quotient value becomes BH. Therefore, “=” is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28. Further, since the remainder value at this time is 6H, “6” is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. The “predetermined constant” is not limited to 10H, and other values may be adopted.

  Further, when an abnormality is detected by the above-described abnormality detecting means 155, an offset value for displaying an error code corresponding to the detected abnormality is stored. That is, E1H is stored when a power failure recovery error is detected, CAH is stored when an empty error is detected, and CDH is stored when a door opening error is detected.

  From the above, for example, the acquired number display data when the value “7” (the upper digit is extinguished) is displayed as the payout number on the acquired number display 28 is F7H. Here, the upper digit (FH) of the acquired number display data F7H indicates an offset value for turning off the upper digit of the acquired number display unit 28. The lower digit (7H) of the acquired number display data F7H indicates an offset value for displaying the display mode “7” in the lower digit of the acquired number display unit 28. Similarly, the acquired number display data when the value “= 2” is displayed as the instruction number on the acquired number display 28 is B2H, and the acquired number display data when the error code “CA” is displayed is CAH. Further, the acquired number display data when the acquired number display 28 is turned off is FFH.

  Note that when displaying an error code (number) when an unrecoverable error occurs in the slot machine 10, an LED display request flag or an LED display request counter (described later) is not referred to. On the other hand, when a recoverable error (error that can be recovered by operating the reset / setting switch 82c without turning off the power once) occurs, the value of the LED display request flag and the value of the LED display request counter As a result of AND operation, the digit “1” becomes the lighting target (lighting enabled state).

  Also, when a recoverable error is detected during the game in which the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 (when any reel is rotating), the display of the instruction number is maintained and all the reels are After the stop (that is, the game is not disabled until all reels stop), an error code corresponding to the detected recoverable error may be displayed on the acquired number display 28. . In addition, when a recoverable error occurs while the instruction number is not displayed on the acquired number display 28 during the game, an error code corresponding to the recoverable error detected before all reels stop is acquired. You may make it display on the number display 28.

  The address F012 stores the value of the LED display counter (hereinafter also referred to as “LED display counter value”). The LED display counter value is 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits, and the value is used when generating LED digit signals output from D3 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 shown in FIG. To be referenced. The LED display counter value is 01H (00000001B) → 02H (00000010B) → 04H (00000100B) → 08H (00001000B) → 10H (00010000B) → 20H (00100000B) → 40H (01000000B) → 80H (10000000B) → 00H (00000000B) → 01H (00000001B) →...

  When the LED display counter value is 01H, only D0 of the output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D1 to D3 of the output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 02H, only D1 of the output port 4 is set to the high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D0, D2, and D3 of the output port 4 are set to the low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 04H, only D2 of output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of output port 2 and D0, D1, and D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output).

  When the LED display counter value is 08H, only D3 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D4 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 10H, only D4 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3, D5 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 20H, only D5 of the output port 2 is set to the high level (high level signal is output), and D3, D4, D6, D7 of the output port 2 and D0 to D3 of the output port 4 are set. Set to low level (output low level signal). When the LED display counter value is 40H, only D6 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D5 and D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 80H, only D7 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D6 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level ( Output a low-level signal). When the LED display counter value is 00H, only D3 of the output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D0 to D2 of the output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output).

  Thus, when the LED display counter value is 01H, the upper digit (digit 6) of the identifier display portion ID of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed, and when the LED display counter value is 02H, the identifier display of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed. The lower digit of the part ID and the segment DP (digit 7) are displayed and lit. When the LED display counter value is 04H, the upper digit (digit 8) of the ratio display part RA of the role monitor 103 is displayed. .

  When the LED display counter value is 08H, the upper digit of the credit number display 27 and the game start display LED 25 (digit 1) are displayed (lighted), and when the LED display counter value is 10H, the credit number display The 27 lower digits and the advantageous section LED (digit 2) are displayed (lighted). Further, when the LED display counter value is 20H, the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 and the displayable display LED 24 (digit 3) are displayed (lighted), and when the LED display counter value is 40H, the acquired number display The 28 lower digits and the re-game display LED 23 (digit 4) are displayed (lighted).

  When the LED display counter value is 80H, the set value indicator 87 and the settlement display LED 22 (digit 5) are displayed (lighted). When the LED display counter value is 00H, the ratio display section of the role monitor 103 is displayed. The lower digit (digit 9) of RA is displayed (lighted).

  During the setting change, “88” may be displayed on the acquired number display 28. Specifically, during the setting change, 88H is stored in the address F011 (acquired number display data) as the display data during the setting change. In this way, during the setting change, whether the acquired number display device 28 has failed (segments ag) have failed, or the wiring from the data output terminals D0-D6 of the segment driver SD has been established. It can be confirmed whether or not there is a disconnection (for example, whether the wiring on the main control board 101 or the central display board is disconnected or not in the wire harness).

  When the set value display 87 is not provided, for example, the set value (1 to 6) corresponding to the set value data is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28 during the change of the set value (during setting change). You may be made to do. In this case, 01H to 06H or F1H to F5H is stored as display data of the set value at the address F011. For example, it can be realized by controlling to store a value “+1” in the data (set value data) stored in the address F000H while the setting is being changed.

  In this way, during the setting change, when the setting value is set to “1” (setting value data is 0) and when the setting value is set to “6” (setting value data is 5), the acquired number display 28 is displayed. If “1” and “6” are displayed in the lower digits of the, all the segments in the lower digits are lit, so that the acquired number display 28 is not broken (segments a to g are broken). Whether the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 or the central display board is not disconnected, in the wire harness) It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a disconnection. The display is not limited to the lower digit of the acquired number display unit 28, but at least one of the upper digit of the acquired number display unit 28, the lower digit of the credit number display unit 27, and the upper digit of the credit number display unit 27 is displayed. A set value may be displayed using a device.

  In the address F014, the value of the instruction number is stored as a binary value. Accordingly, the numerical value range of data stored at this address is 00H to 06H. When the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display 28, the acquired number display data stored in the address F011 is generated based on the instruction number stored in the address. Specifically, the acquired number display data for displaying the instruction number is generated by adding B0H to the value stored in the address F014.

  At the address F015, the state of the game medal management flag is stored as 1-byte data. The bits D0 to D7 of the game medal management flag indicate the on / off state of various display LEDs and the state of the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. However, bit D5 is unused. First, the bit D0 stores whether the operation of the start switch 36 is permitted or prohibited. Here, “0” indicates prohibition (the game start display LED 25 is turned off), and “1” indicates permission (the game start display LED 25 is turned on). Bit D1 stores whether or not the current advantageous section (including the case where the advantageous section is started from the next game) is stored. If “0”, the normal section or the standby section (the advantageous section LED is turned off). ), “1” indicates an advantageous section (the advantageous section LED is lit). The advantageous section LED is the segment DP in the lower digit (digit 2) of the credit amount display 27. The bit D2 stores the on / off state of the blocker of the medal selector. If “0”, the medal can not be inserted (the insertable display LED 24 is off), and if “1”, the medal can be inserted (the insertable display LED 24 can be inserted). Is lit).

  The bit D3 stores the ON / OFF state of the re-game display LED 23. If “0”, the re-game display LED 23 is OFF, and “1” indicates ON. In the bit D4, the lighting / extinguishing state of the settlement display LED 22 is stored. If “0”, the settlement display LED 22 is turned off, and “1” indicates lighting. Bit D6 stores a value indicating whether or not the setting value can be changed. If the value is “0”, the value can be changed. If the value is “1”, the value cannot be changed. . Bit D7 stores a value indicating whether or not the number of medals inserted to play a game has reached the above-mentioned prescribed number (for example, three) (has reached the limit). “1” indicates that the limit has not been reached, indicating that the limit has been reached.

  The LED segment signal p (SGp) of D7 of the output port 3 is generated based on the values of the bits D0 to D4 of the data stored at the address.

  As described above, the LED display control means 160 performs display control of each 8-segment display of the digits 1 to 9 and the display LED based on various data stored in the RWM.

  Next, in FIG. 37, the address F016 stores the state of the operation state flag as 1-byte data. The operating state flag is a flag indicating whether or not an accessory is operating. In the present embodiment, any one of the 1BB-A to F games is being executed by the bit D2 of the operating state flag (first type special combination) Whether or not an RB-A game or an RB-B game is being executed at bit D3 (the first kind special bonus item is in operation). Indicates whether or not there is. Bit D5 indicates whether or not the SB game is being executed (ordinary action is in operation). Specifically, the value of the bit D2 is “1” when any of the 1BB-A to F games is being executed, and is “0” when not being executed. Further, the value of the bit D3 is “1” when any of the RB-A game and the RB-B game is being executed, and “0” when the game is not being executed. Furthermore, the value of the bit D5 is “1” when the SB game is being executed, and is “0” when the SB game is not being executed. Bits D0, D1, D4, D6 and D7 are unused.

  At the address F017, the operation type of the bonus game is stored as 1-byte data. Bit D0 is 1BB-A game, bit D1 is 1BB-B game, bit D2 is 1BB-C game, bit D3 is 1BB-D game, bit D4 is 1BB-E game, bit D5 is 1BB-F game, bit D6 Corresponds to SB games. Specifically, when a bonus game is being executed, the bit corresponding to the bonus game being executed is “1”, and the bit corresponding to the bonus game not being executed is “0”. From the above, during a non-bonus game (during a normal game), “0” is stored in the address. This makes it possible to identify which bonus game is operating, and to determine a winning lottery table or the like to be used during the bonus game.

  At the address F020, the state of the game section flag is stored as 1-byte data. The game section flag indicates the type of the current game section. When the value of bit D0 is 1, it indicates an advantageous section, and when it is 0, it indicates a section other than the advantageous section. . Further, when the value of the bit D1 is 1, it indicates a standby section, and when it is 0, it indicates a section other than the standby section. When both the values of the bits D0 and D1 are 0, it indicates a normal section. Bits D2 to D7 are unused.

  In the address F021, the game state number is stored as 1-byte data. Similarly to the game state number shown in FIG. 28, the game state number is 00H when the game section is a normal section. Further, when the gaming section is the advantageous section “gase high probability”, the gaming state number is 01H, and when it is “high probability”, the gaming state number is 02H. When the game section is the advantageous section “gase high probability bonus”, the game state number is 03H, and when the game section is “high probability bonus”, the game state number is 04H. The game state number is 05H when the game section is the advantageous section “During ART”, and the game state number is 06H when the game section is “In addition special zone”.

  When the game section is an “ART bonus” in the advantageous section, the game state number is 07H, and when it is “ART return preparation”, the game state number is 08H. The game state number is 09H when the game section is the “interest chance zone” of the advantageous section, and the game state number is 0AH when the game section is “ending state”.

  At the address F022, the state of the instructed flag is stored as 1-byte data. The instructed flag indicates whether or not an advantageous pushing order is notified (indicating the indication number) when any of winning numbers 24 to 29 (pushing order bells 1 to 6) is determined in the advantageous section. Flag. Here, in the state where the pressing order has not been notified after the transition to the advantageous section, the value of the instructed flag is 0, and the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to winning 01 or winning 02 is aligned is notified. Then, the value of the instructed flag becomes FFH. Once the value of the instructed flag becomes FFH, the value is maintained until the transition to the normal section.

  It should be noted that 1BB-A to 1BB- is not required to notify the pressing order when the winning numbers 24-29 (pushing order bells 1 to 6) are determined during the advantageous section. The value of the instructed flag may be set to FFH based on the fact that any bonus combination of F is won and the bonus game is executed. In other words, when a bonus combination is won during the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section without reporting the pressing order. For example, any one of 1BB-A to 1BB-F before the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are determined after the transition to Gase Kosei (game state number 1) Even if the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are won in the high-ranking after winning the bonus game corresponding to the selected bonus combination, It is possible to shift to the normal section without notifying

  In addition, although the case where Gase high probability was given was described as an example, the same applies to high probability (game state number 2), during ART (game state 5), etc., and winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bell 1 ~ 6) Even if the correct push order (advantageous push order) is not reported once, or the winning numbers 24-29 (push order bells 1-6) are never won It can be made possible to shift to a section.

  In the address F023, the state of the instruction state flag is stored as 1-byte data. The instruction state flag is a flag indicating in what manner of notification when the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are determined during the advantageous section. Here, when the value of the instruction state flag is 00H, the notification of the pressing order is not performed even if any of the winning numbers 24 to 29 is determined. When the winning numbers 24 to 29 are determined, half navigation is performed when the value of the instruction state flag is 01H, and full navigation is performed when the value of the instruction state flag is 02H.

  In the addresses F024 and F025, the value of the advantageous section counter indicating the number of games executed during the advantageous section is stored as 2-byte data. Here, lower 1 byte data of the value of the advantageous section counter is stored in the address F024, and upper byte data of the value of the advantageous section counter is stored in the address F025. The value of this advantageous section counter is referred to when determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the ending state (game state number 10) shown in FIG. 28 is satisfied. This advantageous section counter is also referred to when determining whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit (1500 games in this embodiment). Specifically, if an ART game number counter, which will be described later, is a value other than “0”, in the case where the transition to the ending state is not performed, based on the value of the advantageous section counter, When it is determined that the number of games has reached 1500 games, even if an ART game number counter (to be described later) has a value other than “0” (even if there are remaining ART games), the advantageous section is ended. Control.

  Here, the subtraction process regarding the value of the advantageous section counter is performed using a predetermined register (F (flag) register). That is, every time a game is played, the advantage counter stored in the addresses F024 and F025 is decremented by “1”. As a result, when both the carry flag and the zero flag are “0”, it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is not “0”. That is, it can be determined that the current advantage is in the advantageous section, and the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit. Further, when “1” is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section counter and the zero flag is “1”, it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter has changed from “1” to “0”. That is, it can be determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit. On the other hand, if the carry flag is “1” as a result of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter, it is determined that the advantageous section counter before “1” is subtracted from “0”. That is, it can be determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has not been originally set (in other words, the current game is “normal section”).

  When the value of the advantageous section counter is “0”, the carry flag is set to “1” when “1” is subtracted, and in this case, “0” is stored in the advantageous section counter. ing. In the case of such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute the process of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter only during the advantageous section, and only once in all the game sections including the normal section and the standby section. Even if a “1” subtraction process is performed from the advantageous section counter each time a game is played, the advantageous section counter can store a normal value. In this way, by configuring the advantageous section counter to be decremented by “1” in all the gaming sections, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is the advantageous section. 1 is subtracted, and if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, the capacity of the control program can be reduced as compared with a process in which the advantageous section counter is not subtracted by “1”.

  In the addresses F026 and F027, the value of the ART game number counter for managing the number of games executed during ART (game state number 5) is stored as 2-byte data. Here, in this embodiment, the value of the ART game number counter indicates the number of remaining games that can stay in the ART (hereinafter, also referred to as “ART remaining number of games”), and the ART game is played every time a game is played during the ART. It is assumed that the value of the number counter is decremented by one. Further, lower 1 byte data of the value of the ART game number counter is stored in the address F026, and upper 1 byte data of the value of the ART game number counter is stored in the address F027. In the present embodiment, basically, when 50 games are played during ART, the ART is ended (hereinafter also referred to as “ART game”) and the normal section is started (see the arrow in FIG. 28). Since the value of the ART game number counter may be added when the zone is shifted to the specialization zone (game state number 6), the value of the ART game number counter is set to 2-byte data.

  The address F028 stores the value of the ART set number counter for managing the number of ART game sets as 1-byte data. The value of the ART set number counter indicates the number of times of transition to ART (gaming state number 5) between the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the return to the regular section. Therefore, when the value of the ART set number counter shifts from the high probability (gaming state number 2) or the chance zone (gaming state number 9) to the ART state (gaming state number 5), it is in the added special zone (gaming state). “1” is added when the transition from No. 6) to ART (game state number 5) and when the transition from ART return preparation (gaming state number 8) to ART (gaming state number 5) is made. The

  Next, in FIG. 38, the winning combination number (00-07H) corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery is stored in the address F033. The address F034 stores a winning / replay winning number (00 to 2FH) corresponding to the winning number determined by the lottery. Here, when any of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined, the value of the winning combination winning number (01 to 06H) stored in the address F033 is won until a bonus winning combination corresponding to the determined winning number is won. Maintained without being updated. However, when the winning number 88 (SB alone) is determined, the value of the winning item winning number (07H) stored in the address F033 when the game at that time is ended is cleared to 00H. On the other hand, the value of the winning / replay winning number stored in the address F034 is cleared every time one game is finished.

  The address F053 stores the value of medal payout number data referred to when paying out the number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination. As a result, when the main control means 100 wins a small role, every time a process of paying out one medal from the hopper 83 (one payout process) is executed once, 1 is calculated from the value of the medal payout number data. Subtract and repeat the one-sheet payout process until it becomes zero.

  The address F054 is a payout number buffer for storing a medal payout number value corresponding to the winning small combination. That is, the value of the medal payout number data stored in the address F053 is updated every time one payout process is performed, and eventually becomes 0. It holds the number of medals paid out for winning.

  Note that the value in the payout number buffer is referred to in order to calculate the medium period combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, and cumulative combination ratio displayed on the combination ratio monitor 103.

  In the addresses F26D to F26F, the value of the total game number D (total game number counter value) of 3 bytes shown in FIG. 8D is stored. Here, of the total game number counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F26D, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F26E, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F26F.

  The addresses F270 to F272 store the 3-byte advantageous section game number E value (advantageous section game number counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, among the advantageous section game number counter values, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F270, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F271, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F272.

  Addresses F273 to F275 store the 3-byte (total cumulative) total payout number A value (total payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, of the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F273, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F274, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F275.

  Addresses F276 to F278 store a 3-byte (total cumulative) total consecutive combination payout number C value (continuous combination payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F276, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F277, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F278. The

  Addresses F279 to F27B store a 3-byte (total cumulative) total feature payout number B value (combined item payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F279, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F27A, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F27B. .

  It should be noted that the total game number counter value, the advantageous section game number counter value, the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the continuous character payout (cumulative) counter value, and the character payout (cumulative) counter value are FFFFFFH (decimal number 16777215). ) Until the value reaches FFFFFFH, the main control means 100 performs control so that the value is maintained and not updated. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to determine whether or not each count value is one round (a value counted from 000000H again after exceeding FFFFFFH).

  Next, in the addresses F27C to F27E, the value of the 6000 game cumulative value a (the payout (6000 times) counter value) of the total payout number of 3 bytes shown in FIG. 8D is stored. Here, of the payout (6000 times) counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F27C, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F27D, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F27E.

  Stored in addresses F27F to F281 are the values of the 6000 game cumulative value c of the three-byte consecutive payout number shown in FIG. 8D (continuous combination payout (6000 times) counter value). Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F27F, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F280, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F281 among the counter value (6000 times) counter value Is done.

  Stored in addresses F282 to F284 are the values of the 6000 game cumulative value b of the 3-byte feature payout number shown in FIG. 8D (the feature payout (6000 times) counter value). Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F282, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F283, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F284. The

  Although not shown, a ring buffer for calculating a value in the most recent 6000 game corresponding to each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the consecutive payout number (see FIG. 8D). Is set in the RWM. Here, each ring buffer is composed of 15 sets, and the payout number between 400 games per set is stored as data of 2 bytes, so two addresses are required per set. Therefore, 30 addresses are required to configure a ring buffer consisting of 15 sets (400 games × 15 sets).

  In addition, the total game number counter value, the advantageous section game number counter value, the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the accessory payout (cumulative) counter value, and the continuous feature payout (cumulative) counter value stored in each address described above. The payout (6000 times) counter value, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value are executed by clearing (initializing) the RWM executed when the set value is changed. Each count value is maintained (not cleared) even if it is performed. However, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RWM when the power is turned on (the presence or absence of abnormality can be determined by using a checksum or the like of the conventional RWM), the setting value is changed. Each count value is also cleared by clearing the RWM.

  Next, the value of the 1-byte advantageous section ratio E / D (advantageous section ratio data) shown in FIG. 8D is stored in the address F285, and the 1-byte medium period linkage ratio c is stored in the address F286. The value of / a (continuous character ratio (6000 times) data) is stored, and the value of medium byte ratio b / a of 1 byte (characteristic ratio (6000 times) data) is stored at address F287. . The address F288 stores a 1-byte cumulative combination ratio C / A value (continuous combination ratio (cumulative) data) shown in FIG. 8D, and the address F289 stores a 1-byte cumulative combination ratio. A value of the role ratio B / A (a character ratio (cumulative) data) is stored.

  Note that, based on each data stored in the addresses F285 to F289, an abbreviation (identifier) of contents displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 and a ratio thereof (see FIG. 8C) are displayed. In addition, the calculation of each data stored in the addresses F285 to F289 is performed after the end of one game for the advantageous section ratio, and the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative The role ratio is performed after the game is finished every 400 times (one set), and the data stored in the corresponding address is updated. In other words, the RWM “400 times-of-games counter (for example, address F208 (2))” for determining the game for calculating the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio. A storage area is also provided. This storage area is a cyclic increment counter that is incremented by 1 each time a game is executed and circulates from 0 to 399. The intermediate period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio Is controlled to be calculated when the counter reaches “0”.

  Next, in FIG. 39, the address F28E stores the state of the blink request flag as 1-byte data. The blinking request flag is set for each of the advantageous section ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio displayed on the identifier display portion ID and the ratio display portion RA of the combination ratio monitor 103. It is a flag that specifies whether or not to blink the display. Here, the bit D0 designates whether or not the value of the advantageous period ratio to be displayed on the ratio display portion RA is blinked. When the value of the advantageous period ratio is 70% or more, the value of the bit D0 is 1 (flashing). If it is less than 70%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D1 designates whether or not the value of the medium period linkage ratio displayed on the ratio display RA is blinked. When the value of the medium period linkage ratio is 60% or more, the value of bit D1 is 1 (flashing) If it is less than 60%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing). Bit D2 specifies whether or not to flash the medium period ratio value displayed on the ratio display RA. When the medium period ratio value is 70% or more, the value of bit D2 becomes 1 (flashes). If less than 70%, 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D3 designates whether or not the value of the cumulative linkage ratio displayed on the ratio display RA should be blinked. When the cumulative linkage ratio value is 60% or more, the value of bit D3 becomes 1 (flashing). If less than 60%, 0 (non-flashing). Bit D4 designates whether or not the cumulative role value displayed on the ratio display RA is to be blinked. When the cumulative role value is 70% or more, the value of bit D4 is 1 (flashing). If it is less than%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D5 becomes 1 when the number of executed games is less than 6000 games after the slot machine 10 is started, and becomes 0 when the number of executed games is 6000 games or more. When the value of the bit D5 is 1, the display of the abbreviation (6y) of the intermediate period combination ratio and the abbreviation (7y) of the intermediate period combination ratio in the identifier display part ID is blinked. On the other hand, when the value of the bit D5 becomes 0, the display of the abbreviation (6y) of the intermediate period combination ratio and the abbreviation (7y) of the intermediate period combination ratio in the identifier display part ID is not blinked.

  Bit D6 becomes 1 when the number of executed games is less than 175000 games since the operation of the slot machine 10 is started, and becomes 0 when the executed games become 175000 games or more. When the value of the bit D6 is 1, the display of the abbreviation (7U) of the effective section ratio, the abbreviation (6A) of the cumulative combination ratio, and the abbreviation (7A) of the cumulative combination ratio in the identifier display portion ID is blinked. On the other hand, when the value of bit D6 becomes 0, the display of the abbreviation (7U) of the effective section ratio, the abbreviation (6A) of the cumulative combination ratio, and the abbreviation (7A) of the cumulative combination ratio in the identifier display portion ID is made non-flashing. .

  Bit D7 is unused. When the various ratios described above become 100%, the value displayed on the ratio display portion RA is set to “99”.

  The address F28F stores a ratio display number for designating a ratio to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103. The ratio display number is 1-byte data, 01H when displaying the advantageous section ratio on the ratio monitor 103, 02H when displaying the intermediate period combination ratio, 03H when displaying the intermediate period ratio, and the cumulative total. 04H is stored when the combined ratio is displayed, and 05H is stored when the cumulative ratio is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the content displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 is repeatedly switched in the order of advantageous section ratio → intermediate period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio.

  The address F290 stores the value of a blinking switching flag that designates when to turn on and when it should be turned off for what is designated to blink in the address F28E. That is, in the case of blinking display, the value of bit D0 is 0 during the lighting period, and the value of bit D0 is 1 during the extinguishing period. Bits D1 to D7 are unused. Here, when blinking the display of the role ratio monitor 103, the blinking cycle is set to 0.6 seconds ± 10%, and the ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period is set to 1: 1. Therefore, about 0.3 second lighting and about 0.3 second light extinction are repeated alternately.

Addresses F291 and F292 store display switching time values for determining the timing for switching the display contents of the role ratio monitor 103. The value of the display switching time is 2-byte data, the lower byte value is stored in the address F291, and the upper byte value is stored in the address F292. Further, the value of the display switching time is incremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is performed within a numerical range of 0 to 08 BDH (0 to 2237 in decimal). When the value becomes “0”, the ratio display number of the address F28F is switched. Thereby, for example, when the timer interrupt process is executed every 2.235 milliseconds, the display content of the role monitor 103 is switched every 2238 × 2.235 × 10 ⁻³ = 5.00193 seconds.

The address F293 stores the value of the blinking switching time for determining the timing for switching between lighting and extinguishing when the display content of the role ratio monitor 103 is blinked. The value of the blinking switching time is 1-byte data, and is incremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is performed within a numerical range of 0 to 86H (decimal number 0 to 134). When the value becomes “0”, the value of the bit D0 of the address F290 is switched. Thereby, for example, when the timer interrupt process is executed every 2.235 milliseconds, the display of the role monitor 103 is turned on → off → every 135 × 2.235 × 10 ⁻³ ≈0.3017 seconds → Turns on / off → …….

≪Description of sub-control means≫
<Sub-control means and peripheral hardware configuration>
The sub-control unit 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, an RWM, and the like, and is transmitted from the sub-control board 202 that controls an effect to be executed based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 and the sub-control board 202. On the basis of the sub-control command, the image display device 70, the speakers 64L and 64R, and the image control board 204 that drives effect means such as the effect lamp 72 are configured. The sub control board 202 may be responsible for driving the rendering means such as the ART lamps 29a and 29b.

<Functional block of sub control board>
The sub-control board 202 determines the content of the effect or notification based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100, and generates the sub-control command for executing the determined effect or notification, A control command receiving unit 220 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 and a sub control command transmission / reception unit 230 that transmits a sub control command generated by the effect control unit 210 to the image control board 204. Has been.

(Description of production control means)
The effect control means 210 is a means for controlling an effect according to the game, and includes an effect lottery means 212 and an effect state control means 214. Here, the effect according to the game is a set value, lottery state, game state number (type of game section and performance of advantageous section), role lottery and game state number (type of game section and performance of advantageous section). An effect according to the result of the transfer lottery.

  The effect control means 210 is based on the control command received from the main control means 100, the effect lottery means 212 for determining the effect according to the current effect state by lottery, and the control command transmitted from the main control means 100. There is production state control means 214 for performing production state transition control. Here, the effect states controlled by the effect state control means 214 are effect states corresponding to the game state numbers 0 to 10 in the main control means 100 (however, they do not necessarily correspond one-to-one). The same transition control as the game section control means 125 may be performed.

(Description of control command receiving means)
The control command receiving unit 220 receives the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 through serial communication, converts the received control command into parallel data, and stores the command buffer (for example, RWM) included in the sub-control unit 200 in the order received. In a part of the storage area). As a result, the effect control unit 210 sequentially performs processing based on the control command stored first among the control commands stored in the command buffer.

(Description of sub-control command transmission / reception means)
The sub-control command transmission / reception unit 230 transmits the sub-control command generated by the effect control unit 210 to the image control board 204 by serial communication every predetermined period (for example, 1 millisecond). Further, the sub control command transmission / reception means 230 receives a command transmitted from a sub control command transmission / reception means 240 described later.

<Functional block of image control board>
The image control board 204 includes a sub-control command transmission / reception means 240 and an image / sound output means 240. Based on the sub-control command transmitted from the sub-control board 202, the image display device 70, speakers 64L and 64R, and various lamps. (ART lamps 29a and 29b, side lamps 52L and 52R, effect lamp 72, decorative lamps 74L and 74R) are driven and controlled, and the effect determined by effect control means 210 is executed.

(Description of sub-control command transmission / reception means)
The sub control command transmission / reception means 240 receives the sub control command transmitted by serial communication from the sub control command transmission / reception means 230, converts the received sub control command into parallel data, and stores them in the sub command buffer in the order received. I will do it. Further, the sub control command transmission / reception means 240 is a command indicating whether or not the image control board 204 is operating normally, and a command indicating whether or not the command transmitted from the sub control command transmission / reception means 230 has been normally received. Is transmitted to the sub-control command transmission / reception means 230. As a result, the sub control board 202 can detect an abnormality occurring in the image control board 204, and when the image control board 204 fails to receive the sub control command, the sub control command can be retransmitted. .

(Description of image / sound output means)
The image / sound output means 250 outputs the effect image signal and sound signal generated by the image control board 204 to the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R. Thereby, the effect image is displayed on the image display device 70, and sound is generated from the speakers 64L and 64R. On the other hand, a normal operation signal indicating whether or not the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R are normally operable is output to the image control board 204 (or the sub-control board 202). If the normal operation signal cannot be received, the image / audio signal may be held without being sent, or may be discarded as the game progresses.

<Explanation of production lottery concerning the prelude production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 44, the sign effect lottery for determining the content of the sign effect performed by the effect lottery means 212 will be described. The sign effect is an effect that is executed over one game or a plurality of games when a predetermined winning number is determined in the role lottery in order to increase the player's expectation for bonus games or ART games. The effect lottery means 212 determines the contents of the sign effect by performing an effect lottery based on various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44. The numerical values in the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44 indicate numbers, and the value obtained by dividing each number by 65536 is the probability of obtaining the lottery result.

  FIG. 40A is a diagram showing the contents of the precursor type lottery table for determining the type of precursor effect. The sign type lottery is a lottery for selecting either the sign type 1 or the sign type 2, and is executed when the winning combination determining unit 110 determines that the winning number is 65, 66, or 35. (However, this lottery opportunity is an example, and it may be executed when another winning number is determined as long as it is a winning number that exhibits the same effect described later). The effect lottery means 212 determines the winning number from the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 and the effect group number, and if the received winning combination winning number is 2 and the effect group number is 24, It is determined that the winning number 65 has been determined. If the received winning combination number is 2 and the production group number is 25, the winning number 66 is determined. If the received winning combination winning number is 0 and the production group number is 25, the winning number 35 is determined. to decide.

  Here, the winning number 65 is a so-called “winning number with no setting difference” that has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value data (address F000) from 0 to 5, and the winning number 66 is set. The value data (address F000) is a so-called “winning number with a setting difference” in which the winning probabilities differ according to 0-5, and the winning number 35 is won according to the setting value data (address F000) being 0-5. This is a so-called “winning number with a setting difference” with different probabilities.

  In other words, the winning number 65 is a winning number that allows the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (transition lottery is possible), and it is possible to shift from any performance of the advantageous section to the advantageous section of other performances. It is also the winning number (where migration lottery can be executed) In this embodiment, when the winning number 65 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to the standby section, and when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B is stopped and displayed, the advantageous section lamp is turned on and the 1BB-B game is turned on. The advantageous section starts from the first game. Furthermore, during a 1BB-B game executed based on the winning number 65, when a winning number with no setting difference (winning number 47 in this embodiment) is won, a bonus such as an extra lottery is added. It is possible to grant.

  On the other hand, the winning number 66 is a winning number that cannot be changed from the normal section to the advantageous section (cannot make a transition lottery) because there is a setting difference. This is a winning number that cannot be transferred. Furthermore, in the 1BB-B game executed based on the winning number 66, even if the winning number with no setting difference (winning number 47 in this embodiment) is won, the number of the ART games is added, etc. The privilege cannot be granted.

  The winning number 35 is a winning number that cannot be shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section because there is a setting difference (cannot make the transfer lottery), and the transition from any performance of the advantageous section to the advantageous section of other performance It is a winning number that cannot be transferred (cannot make a transfer lottery). The winning number does not include a bonus combination.

  That is, when the above-described winning numbers are compared, the winning numbers advantageous to the player are in the order of “65”, “66”, and “35”.

  However, in a game in which the winning number is determined as 65, 66, or 35, even if the player operates the stop switch corresponding to each reel, any symbol combination among winning 11 to winning 13 stops. In addition, since the missed points of the winning prizes 11 to 13 are stopped, it is difficult to determine which winning number is won from the reel stop mode. In addition, even if the winning number 65 is won, the advantageous section lamp is not lit (to shift to the standby section), so whether the winning number 65 has been won or not cannot be determined by lighting the advantageous section lamp.

  In the precursor type lottery table of FIG. 40A, when the winning number 66 or 35 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected regardless of whether it is in a non-favorable section (normal section or standby section) or advantageous section. (Numerical value is 65536). On the other hand, when the winning number 65 is determined, the selection probability of the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is different between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. That is, if it is in the non-advantageous section, the probability of selecting the precursor type 1 is high, and if it is in the advantageous section, the probability of selecting the precursor type 2 is high. Although the specific content of the effect will be described later, the content of the effect suggesting that the sign type 1 is more advantageous to the player (higher expectation) than the sign type 2 is easily selected.

  When the precursor type 1 or 2 is selected using the precursor type lottery table of FIG. 40 (a), the effect lottery means 212 executes the precursor effect using the precursor game number lottery table of FIG. 40 (b). A lottery game number lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be played (in other words, the length of the sign production). In the prelude game number lottery, one of 5 to 5 games is determined as the length of the prelude production, but the number of games to be determined differs depending on whether the bonus combination is won or not ing. When the bonus combination is not won, the probability of being determined as one game is higher than when the bonus combination is won. In addition, regardless of whether the bonus combination is won or not, when the precursor type 1 is selected, the probability that the number of games to be determined increases (determined to be 4 or 5 games) is high, and the precursor type 2 When is selected, the probability of being determined as three games is high.

  When the number of games for the precursor effect is determined using the precursor game number lottery table of FIG. 40 (b), the effect lottery means 212 determines the precursor scenario using the precursor scenario lottery table of FIG. 40 (c). A production scenario lottery is performed. The precursor scenario is configured according to the type of effect category to be executed for each game in which the precursor effect is produced, and different precursor scenario lottery tables are used when the precursor type 1 is selected and when the precursor type 2 is selected. The Here, there are five types of effect categories: “precursor”, “development”, “continuous effect”, “notification MID”, and “notification HI”.

  In the precursor scenario lottery table when the precursor type 1 is selected, one scenario is selected from ten scenarios, and two scenarios are prepared for each of the five games. Yes. For example, when the number of precursor games is determined to be five games, in the lottery table (precursor type 1) shown in FIG. 1 or No. A lottery for selecting the second scenario is performed. Similarly, when the number of precursor games is determined to be 4 games, 3 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario of 4 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 3 games, No. 4 is selected. 5 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario No. 6 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be two games, 7 or No. When a lottery for selecting a scenario of 8 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be one game, No. 8 is selected. 9 or No. A lottery for selecting 10 scenarios is performed. Also, in the precursor scenario lottery for each number of games, all of the odd No. Is likely to be selected.

  In the precursor scenario lottery table when precursor type 2 is selected, one scenario is selected from eight scenarios, and two scenarios are prepared for each of three to five games. One scenario is prepared for each of one game and two games. For example, when the number of precursor games is determined to be five games, in the lottery table (precursor type 2) shown in FIG. 1 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario 2 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 4 games, 3 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario of 4 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 3 games, No. 4 is selected. 5 or No. A lottery for selecting six scenarios is performed.

  In addition, if the number of precursor games is determined to be two games, the No. No. 7 is selected and the number of precursor games is determined to be one game. Eight scenarios are selected. In addition, when the number of precursor games is determined to be any of 3 to 5 games, in the precursor scenario lottery for each number of games, all of the even number No. Is likely to be selected.

  When the precursor scenario is determined using the precursor scenario lottery table of FIG. 40 (c), it is designated in the selected scenario using each lottery table shown in FIG. The effect pattern lottery for selecting one effect pattern from the effect patterns belonging to the effect category is performed. Here, the sign production type lottery, the sign game number lottery, and the sign scenario lottery described above are performed only once when the winning numbers 66, 65, and 35 are determined in the role lottery. The effect content lottery to be performed is performed for each game during the sign effect.

  In addition, in each lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (d), the selection probability of the effect pattern does not differ depending on the type of the currently staying section, but the type of the combination determined in each game during the precursor effect (Replay (replay A1, replay A2, etc. among replays), common bell (common bell B, common 3 bells B, etc. among small roles), watermelon (such as watermelon B among small roles) or predetermined Depending on the role, the selection probability of the production pattern may be different.

  Each effect category described above is associated with a plurality of effect patterns except for “continuous effect”. First, the effect category “sign” is associated with four effect patterns of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigator effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)”, and “roulette effect announcement”. ing. The effect category “notification MID” is associated with three effect patterns of “roulette effect notification”, “normal bonus notification”, and “next notice”. The effect category “notification HI” is associated with two effect patterns of “next notice” and “premier effect”. The effect category “development” is associated with three effect patterns of “light-off effect (development)”, “small role navigator effect (development)”, and “character effect (development)”.

  The effect category “continuous effect” is an effect that is executed over two games, and is an effect that notifies whether or not a bonus combination has been won according to the determined winning number at the end of the effect. Therefore, there is no production pattern associated with the production category “continuous production”, and the production pattern lottery is not performed during the continuous production.

  In the game in which the predicate effect is being produced, when the effect of the effect category “predictor” is performed, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table in FIG. In the production pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-1), when the bonus combination is not won (bonus non-winning), and when the bonus combination is won but not transferred to the advantageous section (bonus winning (with setting difference)) ) And when winning a bonus combination and moving to an advantageous section (bonus winning (no setting difference)), the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

  For example, when the bonus is not won and the replay or common bell is won, “Character effect (HI)” and “Roulette effect announcement” are not selected, but “Lighting effect (LOW)” One of the “navigation effects (LOW)” is selected with a probability of 1/2. In addition, when a watermelon or a predetermined role is won, one of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is 1 / It is selected with a probability of four.

  In addition, when the bonus is won (with a setting difference), when the replay or common bell is won, the “lighting off effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is selected rather than the probability of being selected. LOW) "or" small role navigation effect (LOW) "has a higher probability of being selected. In addition, when a watermelon or a predetermined role is won, one of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is 1 / It is selected with a probability of four. On the other hand, in the case of winning a bonus (no difference in setting), regardless of the winning combination, the probability that either “lighting off effect (LOW)” or “small role navigating effect (LOW)” will be selected. The probability that either “character production (HI)” or “roulette production announcement” is selected is higher.

  Next, in the game in which the predicate effect is being performed, when the effect of the effect category “notification MID” is performed, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-2). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-2), the selection probability of each effect pattern differs between the bonus non-winning, the bonus winning (with setting difference), and the bonus winning (without setting difference). That is, the selection probability of each effect pattern has the same value in the bonus winning (with setting difference) and the bonus winning (without setting difference).

  Specifically, when the bonus is not won, “Roulette effect announcement” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. In addition, for the bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference), one of the “Roulette effect notification”, “Normal bonus notification”, or “Next notice” effect patterns is selected. The probability that “notification” or “normal bonus notification” is selected is the same probability, and is higher than the probability that “next notice” is selected. It should be noted that the selection probability of each effect pattern in bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference) may vary depending on the type of winning combination.

  Next, when performing an effect of the effect category “announcement HI” in the game in the presence of the sign effect, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. Note that the production of the production category “notification HI” is performed only when the winning number 65 is determined (see (precursor type 1) in FIGS. 40A and 40C), so that the bonus winning is always performed. (No setting difference). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-3), “next notice” or “premier effect” is selected with a probability of 1/2, regardless of the type of winning combination.

  Next, when performing an effect of the effect category “development” in the game in the presence of the sign effect, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-4). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-4), the selection probability of each effect pattern differs between bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference). That is, in the bonus non-winning and the bonus winning (with a setting difference), the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same value.

  Specifically, when the bonus is not won and the bonus is won (with setting difference), regardless of the type of the winning combination, “lighting off (development)”, “small role navigating (development)” or “character production ( "Evolution" "is selected, but the probability of selecting" Lighting Off (Development) "or" Small Navi Production (Development) "is the same probability, and" Character Production ( Development) is higher than the probability of being selected. On the other hand, in the bonus winning (no setting difference), the probability of selecting “lighting off effect (development)” or “small role navigator effect (development)” is the same probability, but “character effect (development)” "Is lower than the probability of being selected.

  When the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41D in each game during the sign effect, it is determined using each effect content lottery table shown in FIGS. The specific production content in the production pattern is determined. Here, (e-1) to (e-5) in FIG. 42 are respectively “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigator effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)”, and “roulette effect”. It is a lottery table for determining the production contents in each production pattern of “notification” and “next notice”. Here, the same lottery table is used in the effect content lottery table regarding the “light extinction effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, and “character effect (HI)” regardless of the current staying section. . In addition, in the effect content lottery table regarding “roulette effect announcement” and “next notice”, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is an unfavorable section or an advantageous section.

  Also, (e-6) to (e-9) in FIG. 43 respectively represent “Premier effect”, “Light-off effect (development)”, “Small role navigation effect (development)”, and “Character effect (development)”. It is a lottery table for determining the production contents in each production pattern. Here, in the effect content lottery table regarding “light-off effect (development)” and “small role navigator effect (development)”, the same lottery table is used regardless of the current staying section. On the other hand, in the effect content lottery table regarding “Premier effect” and “Character effect (development)”, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section.

  Further, (e-10) in FIG. 44 is a lottery table for determining the production contents in the production pattern of “normal bonus notification”. In this effect content lottery table, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is a non-favorable section or an advantageous section.

  In the effect content lottery table in the effect pattern “light-off effect (LOW)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-1), the effect lamp 72 is turned off during the first stop operation (one stop-off), or turned off during the second stop operation. It is determined whether to turn off the light (2 lights off) or to turn off the lights at the time of the third stop operation (3 lights off). The selection probability of these effects does not change depending on the type of winning winning combination, but there is a high probability that “1 stop-off” will be selected in bonus non-winning cases, and “3 stop-off” in bonus winning (with setting difference). There is a high probability of being selected, and there is a high probability that “3 lights off” will be selected even in the bonus winning (no setting difference).

  In the effect content lottery table in the effect pattern “small role navigation effect (LOW)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-2), for example, the color of the character displayed on the image display device 70 is blue (blue navigation), or It is determined whether it is yellow (yellow navigation), green (green navigation), or white (white navigation). Here, in any state of bonus non-winning, bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference), if the winning combination is replayed, “Blue Navi” is selected and the winning combination is common “Yellow Navi” is selected when it becomes a bell, “Green Navi” is selected when the winning combination becomes watermelon, and “White Navi” is selected when the winning combination becomes a predetermined combination. For example, when winning a bonus (with setting difference), if the winning combination becomes a common bell, “blue navigation” may be selected with a very low probability. As a result, the correspondence between the character color and the winning combination does not match, so that it can be suggested to the player that the character is in an unusual state.

  In the lottery table of effect contents in the effect pattern “character effect (HI)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-3), for example, the character type displayed on the image display device 70 is “weak character”, “medium character”, or “ Which of “strong character” should be decided. In this lottery table, regardless of the type of winning combination, if the bonus is not selected, the probability of selecting “weak character”, “medium character”, and “strong character” in order is increased. . Further, when the bonus is won (with setting difference), the selection probabilities of the three types of characters are almost the same, but the selection probability of “strong character” is set to be the highest. Further, if the bonus is won (no difference in setting), the probability of selecting “strong character”, “medium character”, and “weak character” in that order is set higher.

  Next, for the effect pattern “roulette effect announcement”, for example, three icons of “chance icon”, “bonus icon”, and “premier icon” are displayed on the image display device 70, and any of these three icons is displayed. This is an effect that shows the process of selecting and shows which icon was selected last. In the icon selection process, for example, the display position of the cursor is sequentially moved on the three icons. Finally, the cursor is stopped and displayed on any one of the icons.

  The lottery table of the contents of the effect in the “roulette effect announcement” shown in FIG. 42 (e-4) is different between the non-favorable zone and the advantageous zone. In each lottery table in the non-favorable zone, the bonus non-winning state Then, regardless of the type of the winning combination, the effect of selecting the “chance icon” at the end is determined. In addition, when a bonus is won (with a setting difference), an effect for selecting the “bonus icon” is finally determined regardless of the type of the winning combination. If the bonus is won (no setting difference), either the effect of selecting the “bonus icon” or the effect of selecting the “premier icon” is selected, but the “premier icon” is selected. The selection probability of production is set higher. On the other hand, in each lottery table in the advantageous section, in the bonus non-winning state and the bonus winning (with setting difference), the lottery similar to the lottery table in the non-interesting section is performed, but the bonus winning (setting difference) None) In the case of odor, the selection probability of the effect of selecting the “premier icon” is set higher than the effect of selecting the “bonus icon” at the end.

  Next, the effect pattern “next notice” is an effect of displaying “next bonus” or “next premier” characters after displaying the “next notice” character on the image display device 70 for a predetermined time. The effect pattern “next announcement” is an effect pattern that is not selected in the bonus non-winning state, as is apparent from the effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. Therefore, the lottery table for the contents of the effect in the effect pattern “next notice” shown in FIG. 42 (e-5) does not show the lottery table in the bonus non-winning state.

  In addition, the lottery table of the content of the performance in the performance pattern “next notice” shown in FIG. If the bonus is won (with a setting difference), the “Next Bonus” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. If the bonus is won (no setting difference), the “Next Premier” is selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. Must be selected. On the other hand, in each lottery table in the advantageous section, when a bonus is won (with a setting difference), the “next bonus” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination, while a bonus winning (no setting difference) ), The probability of selecting “Next Bonus” is overwhelmingly higher regardless of the winning combination, but “Next Premier” may be selected.

  Next, in FIG. 43, in the production pattern “Premier Production”, the “Premier 1” production informing that the winning of the bonus combination has been confirmed, or the winning of the bonus combination is confirmed, and the execution of the ART game is confirmed. One of the “Premier 2” effects that informs the user of the event is executed. The production pattern “premier production” is an production pattern that can be selected only when the bonus is won (no setting difference), as is apparent from the production pattern lottery table shown in FIG. In the lottery table for the content of the performance in the performance pattern “Premier effect” shown in FIG. 43 (e-6), the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are different. Regardless of the type, “Premier 1” is always selected. In the lottery table in the advantageous section, “Premier 2” may be selected although the probability of selecting “Premier 1” is overwhelmingly higher regardless of the type of the winning combination.

  The lottery table for the content of the production in the production pattern “light-off production (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-7) uses the same lottery table during the non-advantageous section and during the advantageous section, In both the bonus winning (with setting difference) and the bonus winning (without setting difference), “3 stop-off & development” is always selected regardless of the type of winning combination. When “3 stop lights off & development” is selected, after the above “3 stop lights off” effect is performed, an extension effect that raises the expectation for winning the bonus combination is performed.

  The lottery table for the contents of the effect in the effect pattern “small role navigation effect (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-8) also uses the same lottery table in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. Regardless of the type of the winning combination, “Blue Navi → Development”, “Yellow Navi → Development”, “No Bonus Winning, Bonus Winning (with setting difference) and Bonus Winning (without setting difference) One of “green navigation → development” or “purple navigation → development” is selected with an equal probability (1/4). Here, the production contents of “blue navigation → development”, “yellow navigation → development”, “green navigation → development”, and “purple navigation → development” represent the character displayed on the image display device 70 in a corresponding color. (For example, blue for “blue navigator”) indicates that the development effect is to be performed to increase the expectation for winning the bonus combination.

  The lottery table for the content of the performance in the production pattern “character production (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-9) is different between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. In the lottery table when the bonus is not won, the selection probability of the production content “weak character → development” is the highest regardless of the type of the winning combination. In addition, the selection probability of “middle character → development” is high after “weak character → development”, and the production content “strong character → development” is selected with a small probability. In addition, in the lottery table when the bonus is won (with setting differences), the selection probabilities are in the order of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development”, regardless of the type of the winning combination. Although set to be lower, the selection probabilities of “medium character → development” and “strong character → development” are set higher than the lottery table when the bonus is not won. In the lottery table when bonus is won (no setting difference), unlike the other lottery tables, the selection probability decreases in the order of “strong character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “weak character → development”. Is set.

  In each lottery table in the advantageous section, the lottery table for bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) is the same as the lottery table in the non-favorable section described above, but the bonus winning (setting difference) In the lottery table at the time of “None”, the selection probability is set to decrease in the order of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development”. Here, the production contents of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development” are “weak” if the character corresponds to the image display device 70 (for example, “weak character → development”). "Character") is displayed, and it is shown that the development effect that raises the expectation for winning the bonus role is performed.

  Next, the lottery tables for the production contents in the production pattern “normal bonus notification” shown in FIG. 44 (e-10) differ between the non-favorable sections and the advantageous sections. In the lottery table when the bonus is not won, the selection probability of the production content “weak character → bonus announcement” is the highest regardless of the type of the winning combination. Also, the selection probability of “middle character → bonus announcement” is high after “weak character → development”, and the production content of “strong character → bonus announcement” is selected with a slight probability. . Here, the “bonus notice” is a result presentation indicating whether or not a bonus combination has been won. In the case of a bonus non-winning, an indication that the bonus combination has not been won. This refers to the production that indicates that the role has been won. In addition, in the lottery table when a bonus is won (with setting difference), the selection probability is set to decrease in the order of “weak character → bonus announcement”, “medium character → bonus announcement”, and “strong character → bonus announcement”. However, the selection probabilities of “medium character → bonus announcement” and “strong character → bonus announcement” are set higher than the lottery table when the bonus is not won. Unlike other lottery tables, the selection probability in the order of “strong character → bonus announcement”, “medium character → bonus announcement”, and “weak character → bonus announcement” is lower in the lottery table when bonus is won (no setting difference). It is set to be.

  In each lottery table in the advantageous section, the lottery table at the time of bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) has the same contents as the lottery table in the non-favorable section described above. In addition, the lottery table for bonus winning (no setting difference) has the same contents as the lottery table for bonus winning (with setting difference). Here, the production contents of “weak character → bonus notice”, “medium character → bonus notice”, and “strong character → bonus notice” are characters corresponding to the image display device 70 (for example, “weak character → bonus notice”). If there is a “weak character”), a result effect (notification effect) indicating whether or not the bonus combination has been won is shown.

Summarizing the contents of the precursor effects described above, the following effects are possible.
(1) In the winning numbers 65, 66, and 35, since the same effect mode may be selected up to the effect of executing whether or not the bonus combination is won, it is not known which winning number is won. Production can be performed.
(2) In the winning numbers 65 and 66, the same effect mode may be selected up to the effect indicating that the bonus has been won. Therefore, which winning number (one is the winning number to move to the advantageous section, the other is the winning number) A series of effects that do not know whether the bonus was won with the winning number that does not shift to the advantageous section) can be executed.
(3) When the winning numbers 65 and 66 are compared, there is a high probability that an effect with a high expectation given to the player by winning the winning number 65 is set, so the effects in each game are exhausted. It will not be.
(4) Depending on the result of the production lottery, the production that can be recognized that the winning number 65 has been won (the winning number to be transferred to the advantageous section) can be selected. It will be a thing.

[Description of processing by control means]
<< Description of control processing in main control means >>
Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 45 to 50, the processing contents of the game control executed by the main control means 100 will be described.

<Description of the game progress main process>
First, the contents of the game progress main process for controlling the game executed in the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 performs a game start process (step S10). In this game start process, the setting of the game standby display (so-called demo screen) start time, the current set value for the sub-control means 200, the game status (whether replaying or BB gaming is in progress), the current lottery status Information such as a game state number is transmitted. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a medal for playing a game has been inserted (step S12). If there is no inserted medal, the determination result is NO, and a game medal insertion standby display process is performed in which the current set value can be confirmed according to the on / off state of the key switch 82b (step S14). ). Incidentally, when the key switch 82b is in the ON state, the current set value (value corresponding to the set value data) is displayed on the set value display 87. When the set value display 87 is not provided, it may be displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28.

  If the determination result in step S12 is YES (medal has been inserted), or when the processing in step S14 is completed, the main control means 100 performs a process (game medal management process) associated with the insertion of the medal. (Step S16). This process includes, for example, a clearing process when the clearing switch 33 is operated, a process for detecting a medal inserted into the medal slot 32, and the like. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the operation of the start switch 36 can be accepted and whether or not the start switch 36 has been operated (step S18). Here, the operation of the start switch 36 can be accepted when a prescribed number of medals are inserted or when a re-gamer wins in the previous game. If the start switch 36 is not operated, the determination result in step S18 is NO, and the process returns to step S12.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S18 that the start switch 36 has been operated (YES), the blocker of the selector 80 is turned off to invalidate the insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 32 (step S20). Then, among the combination lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 26, the combination lottery process is performed based on the combination lottery table corresponding to the lottery state (step S22). Next, various lotteries (advantage zone transition lottery, promotion lottery, falling lottery, etc.) for performing the transition control of the gaming section shown in FIG. A game section lottery process for performing an ART lottery, an ART promotion lottery, a special zone transfer lottery, a special zone fall lottery, an extra lottery, etc.) is performed (step S24).

  Next, winning combinations with different symbol combinations that are subject to pull-in control depending on the order of pressing by combination lottery (a combination whose number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the pressing order, and whose advantageous state does not differ depending on whether it is maintained or not maintained. When “Excluded” is selected, an instruction display process for displaying an instruction number for notifying the pressing order in accordance with the current game state number on the acquired number display 28 is performed (step S26). 37, the game section flag (address F020), the main game state number (address F021), the advantageous section counter (address F024), the ART game number counter (address F026), the ART set number counter (address F028), etc. Is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S28).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a mask process for generating an effect group number for instructing an effect to be executed by the sub-control means 200 in accordance with the winning / replay winning number determined in the role lottery (step S30). ), The winning combination winning number and the effect group number corresponding to the result of the winning lottery are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S32). Then, after performing the reel rotation start preparation process performed before starting the rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R (step S34), the reel stop management process is performed (step S36). In this reel stop management process, rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R is started, and when the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are operated, stop control is performed for the reels corresponding to the operated stop switches.

  Here, the reel stop control is performed based on the operation flag generated based on the winning / replay winning number and the winning combination winning number. This operation flag is associated with flag information indicating whether or not each symbol combination shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. Is done. Further, every time the stop switch is operated, information indicating the operated stop switch and the fact that the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped are transmitted to the sub-control means 200.

  Next, when all the reels stop, the main control means 100 performs a display determination process for determining whether or not any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. Based on this, information on the displayed symbol combination is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S38). If the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line matches any of the small combinations, the medal payout number corresponding to the winning small combination is set to the RWM address F053 (medal payout number data) and Stored in address F054 (payout number buffer). Then, the hopper motor 46 is driven to perform a payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the matched small combination (step S40). Also, information indicating that is sent to the sub-control means 200 at the start of payout of medals and at the end of payout.

  Based on the current lottery status, the lottery status is determined based on the type of winning combination, whether the bonus combination is won, whether the bonus combination is won, whether the bonus game is over, etc. A migration process (see FIG. 27) is performed (step S42). Also, according to the current game state number, the game state number transition process (FIG. 28) based on whether or not a bonus combination has been won, whether or not the bonus game has ended, various lottery results related to the transition of the game state number, and the like. (Refer to step S44).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a ratio calculation process for calculating various ratios to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 (step S46), and then performs a game end check process (step S48). In the game end check process in step S48, on / off control of various signals output to the outside through the external concentrated terminal board 86, transmission control of information indicating that the game has ended to the sub-control means 200, and the like are performed. Do.

  When one game is completed by the above processing, the main control means 100 returns to the game start processing in step S10 again and performs processing for the next game.

<Description of ratio calculation process>
Next, the content of the ratio calculation process executed in step S46 of FIG. 45 (game progress main process) will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. As described above, the main control means 100 displays the five ratios of the advantageous section ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio as the ratios displayed on the ratio monitor 103. calculate. The flowchart of FIG. 46 shows a ratio calculation process for calculating the advantageous section ratio.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 46, first, the main control unit 100 adds 1 to the value of the total game number counter stored in the RWM address F26D (step S100). Then, it is determined whether or not the current game section is in the advantageous section (the game state number is 1 or more) (step S102). 1 is added to the value of the advantageous section game number counter being set (step S104).

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S102 that it is not in the advantageous section (step S102, NO), or when the process of step S104 is performed, the main control means 100 performs the advantageous section game count stored in the RWM address F270. The value of (dividend) is multiplied by 10, and the value and the total number of games (divisor) stored in the RWM address F26D are set in predetermined registers, respectively (step S106). Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the divisor (here, the value of the total number of games) is 0 (step S108). If it is 0, the determination result is YES, The ratio calculation execution process in step S110 is avoided. This is to avoid dividing the dividend by 0, and more specifically, to prevent inconvenience in the ratio calculation execution process described below.

  If the value of the divisor is not 0 in the determination process of step S106, the determination result is NO, and an operation is performed to divide the advantageous section game count (dividend) by the total game count (divisor). Here, in the ratio calculation process shown in FIG. 46, the calculation result (the value of the advantageous section ratio) of the number of advantageous section games divided by the total number of games (the value of the advantageous section ratio) is calculated as a two-digit value. A ratio calculation execution process is performed to perform division for obtaining the value of the place (step S110). By this ratio calculation execution process, the calculated quotient value is set in the lower 4 bits of a predetermined register (1 byte). The value of this quotient is the tens value of the percentage.

  Next, the main control means 100 performs processing for obtaining a remainder of division by the ratio calculation execution processing in step S110 (step S112). Detailed description regarding this processing will be described later. Then, the quotient value set in the lower 4 bits of the predetermined register is transferred to the upper 4 bits (step S114). Next, the main control means 100 multiplies the remainder value (dividend) obtained by the process of step S112 by 10 times, and the value and the total number of games (divisor) stored in the RWM address F26D. Each is set in a predetermined register (step S116). Note that when the value of the total number of games set in the predetermined register in step S106 is held when performing the process of step S116, the value of the total number of games may be used.

  Then, the main control means 100 performs a ratio calculation execution process in order to calculate the first value of the advantageous section ratio (step S118). In this ratio calculation execution process, the same process as the ratio calculation execution process in step S110 is performed. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the ratio calculation execution process in step S118 is added to the predetermined register in which the process in step S114 has been performed, and is stored in the RWM address F282 as advantageous section ratio data (step S120). Further, when the process of step S120 is performed when the determination result of step S108 is YES, the value of a predetermined register (in this case, 0) is stored as it is in the RWM address F285.

  The ratio calculation process shown in FIG. 46 is for calculating the advantageous section ratio, but by performing the same process, the medium period combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, and cumulative combination ratio are calculated. It is also possible to do. For example, when calculating the medium period combination ratio and the medium period ratio, first, a payout (6000 times) counter stored in the RWM addresses F27C to F27E, and a continuous character payout (6000 times) stored in the F27F to F281. The counter and the value of the item payout (6000 times) counter stored in F282 to F284 are updated.

  Then, when calculating the intermediate period linkage ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is carried out with the value of the continuous character payout (6000 times) counter as the dividend and the value of the payout (6000 times) counter as the divisor. The result is stored in RWM address F286. Further, when calculating the medium period ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the item payout (6000 times) counter as the dividend and the value of the payout (6000 times) counter as the divisor. Store in the RWM address F287.

  When calculating the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio, first, a total payout (cumulative) counter stored in the RWM addresses F273 to F275, a continuous character payout (cumulative) counter stored in F276 to F278, In addition, the value of the accessory payout (cumulative) counter stored in F279 to F27B is updated. Then, when calculating the cumulative combination ratio, the processing of Steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the continuous payout (cumulative) counter as the dividend and the value of the total payout (cumulative) counter as the divisor. Store in the RWM address F288. Further, when calculating the cumulative winning ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the bonus paying (cumulative) counter as the dividend and the value of the total paying (cumulative) counter as the divisor, and the result is the RWM address. Store in F289.

<Description of ratio calculation execution processing>
Next, the contents of the ratio calculation execution process executed in steps S110 and S118 of FIG. 46 (ratio calculation process) will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 subtracts the value of the lower 2 bytes of the divisor from the value of the lower 2 bytes of the dividend (step S118). Here, when this process is performed in step S110 of FIG. 46, the dividend becomes the advantageous section game count, and the divisor becomes the total game count. When this process is performed in step S118 of FIG. 46, the dividend is a remainder obtained by the ratio calculation execution process executed in step S110, and the divisor is the total number of games.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a carry has occurred by the subtraction process in step S200 (step S202). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the carry flag of the flag register has become “1”. When a carry occurs in the subtraction process in step S200, the determination result is YES, and it is determined whether or not the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is 0 (step S204). If the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is 0, the determination result is YES, and the main control unit 100 ends the ratio calculation execution process of FIG. On the other hand, if the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is not 0, the determination result is NO and 1 is subtracted from the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend (step S206).

  Next, the main control means 100 subtracts the value of the upper 2 bytes of the divisor from the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend (step S208). Here, if the determination result in step S202 is NO (no carryover has occurred), the process of step S208 is performed without performing steps S204 and S206. Then, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by the subtraction process in step S208 (step S210). If a carry has occurred, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the ratio calculation execution process in FIG. Exit. On the other hand, when the carry does not occur, the determination result is NO, and 1 is added to the value of the ratio that finally becomes the calculation result of the ratio calculation execution process (step S212). Then, the process returns to step S200, and thereafter, the processes of steps S200 to S212 are repeatedly executed until the determination result of step S204 or S210 is YES.

  Here, the subtraction processing in steps S200 and S208 is performed using a 2-byte register. The value of the register is less than 0 when the determination result in step S204 or S210 is YES. It is a value. For example, when 0019H is subtracted from 0015H, it becomes FFFCH. For this reason, when the remainder is obtained in the process of step S112 in FIG. 46, in the subtraction process in step S200 or S208 of FIG. 47, a process for returning to the value of the dividend immediately before the divisor is finally subtracted is performed.

<Explanation of timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the contents of the timer interruption process executed at predetermined intervals in the main control means 100 will be described. This timer interruption process is repeatedly executed at a period of about 2.235 milliseconds, and various 8-segment display devices and LED display control, detection of operations on each switch of the operation means 300 shown in FIG. 16, sub-control means 200, transmission of an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 86, generation and output of a control signal for driving control of the stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R, random number values and various counter values used as timers Processing such as updating.

  When the interrupt request signal (generation period: about 2.235 milliseconds) is output from the timer count means (timer circuit) provided in the microcomputer chip Z1, the main control means 100 outputs the timer allocation shown in FIG. Start processing. Here, when the timer interrupt process is executed, the return address of the process being executed in the game progress main process of FIG. 45 and the like is stored in the stack area. Thereby, after the timer interrupt process is completed, the process can be started from the continuation of the process executed in the game progress main process or the like based on the return address stored in the stack area.

  When the timer interrupt process of FIG. 48 is started, first, the main control means 100 performs an initial process of a timer interrupt process to be executed (step S500). For example, the data set in each register of the CPU is stored in the stack area of the RWM, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that a new timer interrupt process is not started during the timer interrupt process to be performed in the future. .

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a power-off (a power supply voltage has fallen below a predetermined value) is detected based on a power-off detection signal input to the input port 0 (step S502). . This power-off detection signal is output from a power supply monitoring circuit (not shown) provided on the main control board 101. When the main control unit 100 detects a power interruption, the determination result in step 502 is YES, and a power interruption process performed at the time of power interruption is performed (step S504). In this power-off process, the SP register is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM (for example, the stack pointer temporary storage area described above), the value of the power-off process completed flag indicating that the power-off process has been performed is set to 55H, and the RWM A checksum of the predetermined address range (F000 to F3FF) is calculated, and a value (2's complement) based on the result is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. Also, access to the RWM is prohibited, and a standby state for a reset signal input from the outside is entered.

  On the other hand, if the power cut-off is not detected in the determination process in step S502, the determination result is NO, and a blink request flag for designating whether or not each display content of the role ratio monitor 103 is blinked. A blinking request flag generation process for generating a value is performed (step S506). Next, the main control means 100 performs a blinking display process for blinking the display content designated to be blinked according to the value of the blinking request flag (step S508). Then, an LED display control process for performing display control of the credit amount display 27, the acquired number display 28, the set value display 87, and the role ratio monitor 103 is executed (step S510).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a timer measurement process for updating the count value of a timer that is generally used to count a predetermined time (step S512). In this timer measurement process, for example, the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) saved in a predetermined storage area of the RWM and the time detected by various sensors are subtracted. Specifically, the minimum game time is a time set after the start switch 36 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are betted, and “1835” is stored in the RWM as a time value. Then, until “0” is stored in the storage area of this RWM, even if there is an operation of the start switch 36 for starting the next game, the rotation start control for starting the rotation of the reel is not executed. It has become.

  In addition, as detection times of various sensors, a timer value or medal for measuring a medal passage time for determining whether or not a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 stays in the selector (medal clogging). There is a medal passage time for determining whether or not the hopper stays in the hopper. In addition, when a small role wins when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 cards), the payout amount corresponding to the small role is paid out from the hopper. At this time, whether or not the medal has been paid out. There is a medal unpaid time for determining whether or not.

  Next, the main control means 100 performs input port 0-2 reading processing for reading various external signals input to the input ports 0-2 and storing them in predetermined addresses of the RWM (step S514), and the reels 40L, 40L, In order to control the rotation of 40C and 40R, a reel drive management process is performed for each of the stepping motors 42L, 42C and 42R (step S516). When the reel drive management process is performed for all the stepping motors (step S518, YES), the main control unit 100 displays the display data of each display unit and each stepping motor based on the data stored in the RWM. Port output processing for outputting control signals, blocker drive signals, hopper motor drive signals, etc. for 42L, 42C, and 42R from the output port is executed (step S520).

  Next, the main control unit 100 transmits the control command stored first among the control commands stored in the ring buffer area set in the RWM to the sub-control unit 200 (step S522). Then, after performing an external signal output process for outputting various signals to be output to the outside via the external concentrated terminal board 86 (step S524), it is stored in a predetermined address (stack area) of the RWM by the initial process of step S500. Then, a return process for restoring the values of the various registers is performed (step S526), and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 48 is terminated.

<Description of blink request flag generation processing>
Next, the contents of the blink request flag generation process executed in step S506 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the main control means 100 sets the number of ratio data, the initial value for the blink request flag, the blink determination value table, and the value of the ratio data to be processed first in the corresponding predetermined registers (step S600). Here, the number of ratio data is the number of ratio data to be subjected to blinking display, and its value is 5 (advantageous section ratio, medium-period combination ratio, medium-period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, cumulative Ratio). The initial value for the blink request flag is the initial value of the blink request flag stored in the RWM address F28E, and the value is 00000000B. The blink determination value table is a table showing a value (determination value) that is a criterion for determining whether or not to perform blink display when each ratio data is displayed. As shown in FIG. The determination value for the cumulative period combination ratio is 60, the determination value for the intermediate period combination ratio is 70, the determination value for the intermediate period combination ratio is 60, and the determination value for the advantageous section ratio is 70. The blink determination value table in FIG. 49B is stored in the ROM.

  Further, in the blink request flag generation processing shown in FIG. 49A, the blink request flag for each ratio data in the order of cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → advantageous section ratio. Generate a value. Therefore, as the ratio data to be processed first, the cumulative ratio value stored in the RWM address F289 is set in a predetermined register.

  Next, the main control means 100 subtracts the corresponding determination value (here, 70) from the value of the ratio data (here, the cumulative winning ratio) set in step S600 (step S602). Then, the value of the carry flag when the subtraction is performed is set to the least significant bit of the initial value of the blink request flag, and the value of each bit is shifted by one bit to the upper bit side (left side) (step S604). Then, the value of the next ratio data (here, the cumulative linkage ratio) is set in a predetermined register (step S606), and it is determined whether or not the processing of steps S602 to S606 has been performed for the number of ratio data (step S606). S608). Specifically, when 1 is subtracted from the value of the ratio data number to become 0, the determination result in step S608 becomes YES.

  With the above processing, the corresponding judgment values are subtracted in the order of cumulative role ratio → cumulative linkage ratio → medium period role ratio → medium period linkage ratio → advantageous zone ratio, and the value of the carry flag by the subtraction result is Sequentially, the initial value of the blink request flag is set. When the determination result in step S608 is YES, the bit D4 of the initial value of the blink request flag is the carry flag value related to the cumulative role ratio, the bit D3 is the carry flag value and bit related to the cumulative role ratio The carry flag value related to the medium period combination ratio is set in D2, the carry flag value related to the medium period combination ratio is set in bit D1, and the carry flag value related to the advantageous section ratio is set in bit D0 (least significant bit). . That is, the values of the bits D0 to D4 in the initial value of the blink request flag are set to 1 when the value of each ratio data is equal to or less than the corresponding determination value, and the value of each ratio data exceeds the corresponding determination value. For those that are, it is 0.

  If the determination result in step S608 is YES, the main control means 100 refers to the value of the total game number counter stored in the RWM addresses F26D to F26F, and determines whether or not the value of the total game number is 6000 times or more. Is determined (step S610). If it is 6000 times or more, the determination result is YES, and the value of bit D5 in the initial value of the blink request flag is set to 1 (step S612). On the other hand, when the number is less than 6000, the process of step S612 is not performed, and the value of the bit D5 in the initial value of the blink request flag remains 0.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the total number of games is 175000 or more (step S614). If it is 175000 times or more, the determination result is YES, and the value of the bit D6 in the initial value of the blink request flag is set to 1 (step S616). On the other hand, when the number is less than 175,000, the process of step S616 is not performed, and the value of the bit D6 in the initial value of the blink request flag remains 0.

  The main control means 100 stores the value of the blink request flag generated by performing the above process in the RWM address F28E (step S618), and ends the blink request flag generation process shown in FIG.

<Description of blinking display processing>
Next, the contents of the blinking display process executed in step S508 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. The blinking display process shown in FIG. 50A is executed when the lighting control of the role ratio monitor 103 is performed (LED display counter values are 0 to 2 and 4).

  First, the main control means 100 refers to the value of the LED display counter stored in the RWM address F012 and the value of the ratio display number stored in the RWM address F28F, and sets the number of acquisitions corresponding to each value in a predetermined register. (Step S600). Here, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the value of the LED display counter is 1 or 2 (identification display portion ID is lit), if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous section ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is the number of acquisition times 6 if the value of the ratio display number is 2 (medium period combination ratio), and the number of acquisitions 6 is the ratio display number if the value of the ratio display number is 3 (medium period role ratio). If the value is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), when the value of the LED display counter is 4 or 0 (ratio indicator RA lighting), if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous zone ratio), the number of acquisitions is 1. However, if the value of the ratio display number is 2 (intermediate period combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 2 is the value, and if the value of the ratio display number is 3 (intermediate period combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 3 is the value of the ratio display number. Is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 4 is set, and if the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 5 is set. At this time, if the value of the LED display counter is 0, it is corrected to 00001000B and set in a predetermined register (for example, D register). This process is a process for setting the value of D3 (LED digit signal 9) of the output port 4 shown in FIG. 34 to “1”. When the value of the LED display counter is other than 0, the value is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) as it is.

  Next, the main control means 100 sets segment data for displaying various ratio values corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the RWM address F28F in a predetermined register (step S632). For example, if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous area ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the advantageous area ratio data stored in the RWM address F285 is converted to the role ratio monitor shown in FIG. Get from the segment table for display and set. If the value of the ratio display number is 2 (medium period linkage ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the continuous combination ratio (6000 times) data stored in the RWM address F286 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 3 (medium period ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the accessory ratio (6000 times) data stored in the RWM address F287 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the continuous combination ratio (cumulative) data stored in the RWM address F288 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), segment data corresponding to the value of the combination ratio (cumulative) data stored in the RWM address F289 is set.

  Next, the main control means 100 acquires the value of the blink request flag stored in the RWM address F28E and sets it in a predetermined register (step S634). Then, the value of the blink request flag set in the predetermined register is set to the lower bit side by the number of acquisitions set in the predetermined register (a register different from the register in which the value of the blink request flag is set) in step S630. Shifting by one bit in the direction of (right side) (step S636). In this shift process, the value of the least significant bit is shifted to the carry flag, and 0 is set to the most significant bit at that time.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the carry flag is 0 (step S638). Thereby, when displaying the identifier display part ID of the role ratio monitor 103 (the value of the LED display counter is 1 or 2), the ratio display number is 1, 4 or 5 (advantageous zone ratio, cumulative combined ratio or cumulative (Ratio), it is determined whether or not the value of bit D6 of the blink request flag is zero. On the other hand, when the ratio display number is 2 or 3 (intermediate period combination ratio or intermediate period combination ratio), it is determined whether or not the value of the bit D5 of the blink request flag is 0.

  Further, when the ratio display section RA of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed (the value of the LED display counter is 4 or 0), if the ratio display number is 1, the value of the bit D0 of the blink request flag is the ratio display number. If the ratio display number is 3, the value of the blink request flag bit D2 is the value of the blink request flag bit D2, and if the ratio display number is 4, the value of the blink request flag bit D3 is If the ratio display number is 5, it is determined whether or not the value of the bit D4 of the blink request flag is 0.

  If it is determined in step S638 that the carry flag value is 0, the determination result is YES, and it is determined whether or not the blinking switching flag stored in the RWM address F290 is “1” (step 1). S640). If the blinking switching flag is “1”, the determination result is YES, and the predetermined register (a register different from the register in which the blinking request flag and the number of acquisition times are set) is set in step S632. The existing segment data is cleared to 0 (step S642). Then, the segment data set in a predetermined register (for example, E register) is output from the output port 3 (see FIG. 34). In other words, when the blinking switching flag is “1”, it indicates “turned off” at the time of blinking, and therefore, the segment data (LED segment signal) output from the output port 3 is data indicating “no light”. Also, digit data (LED digit signal) for turning on the digit set in the D register is output from the output port 4 (see FIG. 34) (step S644), and the blinking shown in FIG. The display process ends.

  If the determination result in step S638 is NO (carry flag value is 1) or the determination result in step S640 is NO (flashing switch flag value is 0), the process immediately proceeds to step S644. Then, the segment data set in the predetermined register is output from the output port 3, and the blinking display process shown in FIG.

  Here, in the past, it was impossible to know the proportion of the advantageous section in the whole game, and further, by checking the actual advantageous section ratio, whether it was far from the design value of the proportion of the advantageous section, etc. I couldn't judge. Therefore, as described above, first, identification information (abbreviation (see FIG. 8C)) indicating the contents to be displayed is used as the first digit (upper digit of the identifier display unit ID) and the second digit of the role monitor 103. The third digit (ratio) is displayed in the digit (the lower digit of the identifier display part ID) and the information indicating the ratio (advantageous period ratio, medium period linkage ratio, middle period role ratio, cumulative linkage ratio, cumulative role ratio) It can be displayed in the upper digit of the display unit RA) and the fourth digit (the lower digit of the ratio display unit RA). If the stay ratio of the advantageous section calculated by the calculation means such as the ratio calculation process of FIG. 46 and the ratio calculation execution process of FIG. 47 described above is equal to or greater than a specific value, the blinking display process shown in FIG. 50 is performed. By performing, the lighting control is performed on the third digit and the fourth digit in a blinking manner.

  In addition, there is a counting means for counting the number of games (for example, a running firewood number counter of the RWM address F26D in FIG. 38), and if this counting means does not exceed the first value (175000), the stay in the advantageous section When displaying the ratio, lighting control is performed on the first digit and the second digit in a blinking manner. In this way, it is possible to easily confirm the stay ratio of the actual advantageous section by calculating the stay ratio of the advantageous section and changing the lighting mode based on the calculation result.

  With the above configuration, it is easy to identify whether the value is abnormal or not when the staff of the game hall, on-site inspectors, etc. visually observe the ratio of the advantageous section output to the ratio monitor 103. be able to.

<Explanation of route from normal section to ART>
In the slot machine 10 that performs the above-described control, an example of a route (route) from the normal section (non-RT) to the advantageous section “ART in progress” (RT1) will be described with reference to FIG. First, when a game is started from a normal section which is an initial state and a non-RT state ((a) in FIG. 51), any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is won, and an advantageous section When the winning lottery is selected for the transition lottery, the advantageous section “highly probable” is shifted to. However, the lottery state remains non-RT ((a) in the figure). In this state, if a bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won, the lottery state shifts to RT3. It shifts to “High accuracy middle bonus” ((c) in the figure).

  When the bonus game ends, the game section returns to the advantageous section “high probability” again, but the lottery state shifts to RT2 ((D) in the figure). Here, in RT2, since the winning lottery table of FIG. 22 is used, the winning number 19 (re-game-H) can be determined. When re-game-H is elected, it shifts to the advantageous section "During ART". When the symbol combinations corresponding to re-game 09 or 12 are prepared, the lottery state shifts to RT1 ((e) in the figure).

  Next, as a route different from the above-mentioned route, there is a route to win a bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) before winning a chance in the normal section. Specifically, in the normal section and the non-RT state ((a) in FIG. 51), when the bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won, the lottery state is changed to RT3. Transition. However, the game section remains the normal section ((f) in the figure). When the bonus game ends, the lottery state shifts to RT2 while maintaining the normal section ((ki) in the figure). At this time, if a symbol combination corresponding to any of SB, replay 03 or 04 or winning prizes 06 to 08 is prepared, the lottery state falls to non-RT ((a) in the figure), but it is won. If any of the numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) wins and the winning lot transition lottery wins the high-precision lottery, the lottery state remains at RT2 and shifts to the advantageous zone “high probability” (in FIG. D)). When the re-game-H is won and the symbol combinations corresponding to the re-game 09 or 12 are prepared, the advantageous section “ART is in progress” and the lottery state is shifted to RT 1 ((e) in the figure). .

  Here, the transition from (a) to (b) and the transition from (d) to (v) in FIG. 50 is conditional on the chances A to C and re-playing-H having no setting difference. Therefore, at first glance, even if the set value is changed, it seems that the probability of shifting to the advantageous section “During ART” cannot be adjusted. However, when considering the route from the normal section and non-RT state to the advantageous section “ART in progress” and RT1, first, in FIG. 50, (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e In the route of (), the winning of a bonus combination that can give a setting difference when transitioning from (b) to (c) is also a condition. In other words, the transition probability to RT2 can be made different depending on the winning probability of the bonus combination. As a result, by adjusting the winning probabilities of bonus combinations (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) according to the set value, the probability from (a) to (e) is adjusted. can do.

  Further, in FIG. 50, in the route of (A) → (F) → (G) → (D) → (E), a setting difference can be given when shifting from (A) to (F). Winning a bonus role is a condition. In other words, the transition probability to RT2 can be made different depending on the winning probability of the bonus combination. As a result, even if the bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won before changing to the advantageous section, by changing the set value, The probability of reaching (e) can be adjusted.

<< Description of control processing in sub-control means >>
Next, the contents of the sign effect lottery process executed by the effect lottery means 212 of the sub-control means 200 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sign effect lottery process is a process for determining the content of the sign effect using the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44. Note that the winning feature winning numbers and production group numbers described in the explanations of FIGS. 52 to 54 and FIGS. 52 to 54 are only specific numbers for the sake of simplicity. Needless to say, it can be applied even with other prize winning numbers and production group numbers.

  First, the effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the precursor effect flag stored in the RWM of the sub-control means 200 is turned on (step Ss10). The sign effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sign effect is currently being executed. When the sign effect flag is on, it indicates that the sign effect is being performed, and the sign effect flag is off. When it is, it indicates that it is not a precursor. When the sign effect flag is off, the determination result in step Ss10 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the value of the feature winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 2 or not. (Step Ss12).

  If the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 2, the determination result in step Ss12 is NO, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning winning combination number is 0 ( Step Ss14). When the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 0, the determination result in step Ss14 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control unit 100 is 0, the determination result in step Ss14 is YES, and then the effect lottery unit 212 transmits from the main control unit 100. It is determined whether or not the value of the rendered effect group number is 25 (step Ss16). If the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 25, the determination result in step Ss16 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the production group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 25, the winning number is determined to be 35 in the role lottery in the main control means 100. In this case, the determination result in step Ss16 is YES, and the effect lottery means 212 performs a sign effect execution lottery that determines whether or not to execute the sign effect (step Ss18).

  In the determination process of step Ss12 described above, if the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control unit 100 is 2, the determination result is YES, and the effect lottery unit 212 then displays the main control unit. It is determined whether or not the value of the effect group number transmitted from 100 is 24 or 25 (step Ss20). If the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is neither 24 nor 25, the determination result in step Ss20 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 performs the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. Exit. On the other hand, when the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 24 or 25, the winning number is determined to be 65 or 66 in the role lottery in the main control means 100. In this case, the determination result in step Ss20 is YES, and the effect lottery means 212 performs the sign effect execution lottery in step Ss18. Here, the winning probabilities of the prelude effect execution lottery may be constant regardless of the values of the winning feature winning numbers and the effect group numbers, or may be different depending on these values.

  When the sign production execution lottery of step Ss20 is performed, the production lottery means 212 next determines whether or not the sign production execution lottery has been won (step Ss22). The precursor effect flag is turned on (step Ss24). On the other hand, when it is not won, the determination result is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. When the sign effect flag is turned on in the process of step Ss24, the effect lottery means 212 next refers to the sign type lottery table shown in FIG. The sign type lottery corresponding to the value) is performed (step Ss26).

  Next, the production lottery means 212 refers to the precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 40B, and determines the length of the precursor production (the number of precursor games G) according to the precursor type determined by the precursor type lottery. (Step Ss28). Further, the effect lottery means 212 refers to the precursor scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 40C, and determines the content of the scenario according to the precursor type and the value of the determined precursor game number G (step Ss30). . Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determined precursor game number G (step Ss32). In the determination process of step Ss10 described above, if the indication effect flag is on, the determination result is YES and step Ss32 is immediately performed.

  Next, the effect lottery means 212 generates an effect pattern lottery table corresponding to the effect category corresponding to the current number of remaining games in the scenario determined by the process of step Ss30 among the various effect pattern lottery tables shown in FIG. Referring to the effect pattern lottery (step Ss34). In this effect pattern lottery, one effect pattern is determined according to the winning state of the bonus combination, the type of winning combination, and the like. Here, if the number of precursor games G is 4, the number of remaining games is 5, if the number of precursor games G is 3, the number of remaining games is 4, and if the number of precursor games G is 2, the remaining games If the number is 3, and the value of the precursor game number G is 1, it means that the number of remaining games is 2, and if the value of the predictor game number G is 0, the number of remaining games is 1.

  Next, the effect lottery means 212 performs the effect content lottery with reference to the effect content lottery table corresponding to the effect pattern determined by the process of step Ss34 among the various effect content lottery tables shown in FIGS. (Step Ss36). In the effect content lottery, one effect content is determined according to the winning state of the bonus combination, the type of the winning combination, and the like. The effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number G has become 0 (step Ss38). If the value of the precursor game number G has become 0, the determination result is YES. Then, the sign effect flag is turned off (step Ss38), and the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. 52 is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the precursor game number G does not become 0 in the determination process of step Ss38, the determination result is NO, and the precursor effect lottery process shown in FIG. 52 is performed without performing the process of step Ss38. finish. The sign effect is executed according to the effect content determined by the lottery process described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, description will be given of the contents of the effect that is executed when the above-mentioned precursor effect is performed after the bonus combination is won and then the bonus combination is won. Here, FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of effects executed when a bonus combination is won during the normal section and then the bonus combination is won. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of effects executed when a bonus combination is won in an advantageous section and the bonus combination is won thereafter.

  First, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined in the role lottery during the normal section, and the winning effect execution lottery in step Ss18 of FIG. 52 is won, referring to the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. The content is determined. Here, as is clear from the precursor type lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (a), when the winning number 65 is determined, either the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is selected. When the number 66 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected. Further, as described above, when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section, the “special route” that leads to the advantageous section through the standby section is followed.

  Based on the above, the flow of the production from when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined until the bonus combination is won will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section and the foreplay effect of the precursor type 1 is executed, it is determined that the transition to the advantageous section is made (substantially, the transition is made during ART). However, since the transition from the normal section to the standby section first, the advantageous section LED does not light up. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign production by the sign type 1 is finished, a special bonus prize production (hereinafter also referred to as “premier bonus production”. In FIG. 53, the characters “Special Epode” are displayed. ) Is executed. Further, the main control means 100 lights the advantageous section LED from when the bonus combination is won until the medal insertion for starting the next game becomes possible.

  Next, even when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section and the precursor type 2 is produced, the advantageous section LED does not light until the bonus combination is won because the transition from the normal section to the standby section is made. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign production by the sign type 2 is finished, the special bonus winning effect is executed as in the case where the sign production of the sign type 1 is performed. Further, the main control means 100 lights the advantageous section LED from when the bonus combination is won until the medal insertion for starting the next game becomes possible. Thereby, for example, the staff of the game hall can quickly recognize that the next game will shift to the advantageous section, and can take measures such as replenishing medals before the advantageous section becomes “ART in progress”. .

  On the other hand, in the case where the winning number 66 is determined and the foreplay effect of the sign type 2 is executed, since the winning section 66 is not determined and the advantageous section LED is not determined, the advantageous section LED does not light up. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign type 2 by the sign type 2 is finished, an effect at the time of normal bonus winning (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal bonus effect. In FIG. 53, a character image is displayed) is executed. Is done. Moreover, even if the bonus combination is won, naturally, the advantageous section LED does not light up.

  As described above, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined in the normal section, if the precursor type 2 of the precursor effect is executed, the advantageous section LED is not lit until at least the bonus combination wins. . For this reason, the player cannot determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section while the sign type 2 precursor effect is being performed, so the player is not allowed to move to the advantageous section until the bonus combination is won. Can maintain a sense of expectation. Furthermore, the player who did not notice lighting of the advantageous section LED by executing different effects depending on whether the advantageous section LED is lit or not when the bonus combination is won as an effect at the time of winning a prize. In addition, it is possible to notify whether or not the bonus game shifts to the advantageous section by the effect by the effect image or the like.

  Next, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined by the lottery during the advantageous section, if it is determined to execute the precursor effect, the winning number 65 is determined as in the normal section. Either the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is selected, but if the winning number 66 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected. However, since it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section LED is already lit.

  Based on the above, the flow of the production from when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined until the bonus combination is won will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the winning number 65 is determined during the advantageous section (for example, during the high accuracy of the gasses) and the precursor effect of the precursor type 1 is executed, if the bonus combination wins after the end of the precursor effect, Run.

  On the other hand, when the winning number 65 is determined during the advantageous section (for example, during the high accuracy of the gasses) and the precursor type 2 is performed, and when the winning number 66 is determined and the precursor type 2 is detected When the effect is executed, if the bonus combination is won after the sign effect, the normal bonus effect described above is executed in any case. However, unlike the normal bonus effect shown in FIG. 53, the next notice effect is performed during the normal bonus effect, and then develops into a continuous effect. If the winning number 65 has been determined, the end of the continuous performance is a victory (the effect of enhancing the expectation for the transition to ART is performed), and if the winning number 66 has been determined, the continuous performance Will be defeated (the effect of denying the transition to ART will be performed).

<Description of production in the ending state>
Referring to FIG. 28, as described in the transition control of the game section in the present embodiment, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and during ART (game state number 5), the image display device 70 When the production shown in 55 (a) is started and one of the winning numbers 22 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) is determined, the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 01 or winning 02 are aligned is notified. (See (b) in the figure). Then, when the number of games executed during ART reaches 50 games, the routine again shifts to the normal section. However, if the game shifts from ART to the special zone (game state number 6) and wins the extra lottery in that state, the number of games that can stay during the ART is added ((c in the figure) )reference).

  In this way, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section continues to stay in the advantageous section and becomes 1470 games, the ending state (game state number 10) is entered and the ending effect is started (in the figure). (See (d)). When the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the ending screen is displayed (see (e) in the figure), and then the normal section is started and the normal production is started (in the figure). (Refer to (f)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the contents of the effect when the bonus combination is won during the ending effect will be described. When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1470 games and an ending effect is being performed (see (a) in FIG. 56), if the bonus combination is won, the ending effect continues and the image display device 70 continues. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning bonus combination is displayed in the lower right of the screen to notify the player of the type of the bonus combination that has been won (see (b) in the figure). On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won during the normal section, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the symbol combination corresponding to the selected bonus combination is conspicuous in the center of the screen of the image display device 70. May be displayed.

  As a result, when a bonus combination won by the player is won, a bonus game is started (see (c) in the figure). At this time, if the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 before the bonus game ends, the above-mentioned ending screen is displayed (see (d) in the figure), and the routine shifts to the normal section. However, the ending screen displayed on the image display device 70 continues to be displayed as it is, and when the bonus game ends, the normal effect starts from the next game (see (f) in the figure). In this way, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games during the bonus game, the ending effect is continued until the bonus game ends without ending the ending effect at that time. You can taste the finish. Further, during the bonus game, for example, the ending effect is not switched to the effect during the bonus game, so there is no possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the effect.

  In addition, when the bonus combination is won during the ending production and the bonus game is started (see (c) in the figure), and the bonus game ends before the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, The ending effect is continued even after the bonus game ends (see (e) in the figure). When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the ending screen is displayed (see (e) in the figure), then the normal section is started and the normal production starts ((f) in the figure). reference).

  Note that the ending effect described above may be a so-called movie effect. In this case, the time for the ending effect (movie effect) is such that even if the game is played in the shortest time (4.1 seconds), the movie can be viewed to the end before reaching 1500 games. Preferably it is. If the 1500-game is not reached even after the movie presentation is finished, the movie presentation may be repeatedly executed from the beginning or from a predetermined position, or may be stopped at the last scene of the movie presentation. Also good.

[Modification]
The following configuration may be employed for the slot machine 10 described above.
(1) When the lottery status is non-RT, there is a high probability of losing in the role lottery, and basically there will be no stay in the ART (however, if the player did not follow the notified push order) Therefore, the combined winning probability of all re-game players in non-RT may be increased as the set value increases. Moreover, you may make the winning probability of a specific small role high, so that a setting value becomes high. As this specific small role, for example, in this embodiment, a common bell B with a winning number 31 (winning / replay winning number 31) and a common three bell B with a winning number 33 (winning / replay winning number 33) And the watermelon B with the winning number 35 (winning / replay winning number 35) corresponds to this. Further, the combined winning probability of all the re-game players in a specific RT state may be set to be lower as the setting is higher. For example, in the RT1 role lottery table shown in FIG. 20 and the RT2 role lottery table shown in FIG. 22 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the replay B of the winning number 18 (winning / replay winning number 18) is the set value. The higher the value is, the lower it is, and the winning probabilities of other replaying actors do not vary according to the set value. Therefore, the combined winning probabilities (hereinafter also referred to as “replay winning probabilities”) of all replaying players are: The higher the set value is, the lower it is.

  In conventional slot machines, the probability of winning an AT lottery according to the setting value and the AT's initial number of games when winning are changed to change the play rate (ease of paying out medals) for each setting value. It was. However, if the probability of shifting during ART according to the set value as in this embodiment or the initial number of games of ART is not changed, the winning probability of small roles and bonus roles will be changed according to the set value, It is necessary to change the play rate for each set value only by changing the replay winning probability. That is, also in this embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability of the small role that can be won regardless of the skill of the player so that the number of payouts such as the common bell B is large so that the payout rate becomes higher. ing.

  Thereby, the payout rate for each set value can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved. Even if the initial number of games of ART is the same, the number of medals to be paid out increases as the setting is higher. If the replay winning probability during RT1 is set to be higher as the setting is higher, the payout rate during ART when the setting is higher will be excessively high. At least the replay winning probability during RT1 is set to be lower as the setting is higher.

  Incidentally, during the ART when the setting is high even if the replay win probability is not changed according to the setting value (constant), and the loss probability is changed according to the setting value (the higher the setting is, the higher the loss probability is). In this case, the set value is easily estimated (in this case, it is estimated by counting the symbol combinations that are aligned only when there is a loss). It is not optimal).

  In addition, the winning probability of the push order bell and push order replay is not changed according to the set value. This is because if the win probability is changed according to the set value for the push order bell or the push order replay, there is a problem that it is easy or difficult to shift to non-RT according to the set value.

(2) If any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance points A to C) is determined in the role lottery during the normal section, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. In this advantageous section transition lottery, A result of lottery winning may be obtained. And when it becomes lost, it stays in a normal area continuously. Further, when the ART lottery is won, it may be possible to shift from the next game to the ART. However, in this case, in order to prevent medals from being excessively paid out to the player, in order to prevent transition to ART during the normal section and the lottery state is RT1, In other words, it is desirable that the ART lottery is won in the normal section and in the non-RT state, and that it is not during the ART and does not become RT1 except that the bonus combination is won. In other words, if the number of ART games is digested while in ART and RT1, the normal section and RT1 are reached, but in this state, the ART lottery is not won, or the normal section and non-priority are won before winning the ART lottery. It is desirable to move to RT.

  In order to do so, the probability of shifting to non-RT at the time of RT1 should be higher than the probability of shifting to ART. For example, when the transition is made to RT1 during the normal section, the combination winning probability of push order replays 1 to 6 in which the condition devices of replays 03 and 04 are activated at RT1 is 1 / 7.31, replay 03 or replay 04 1 / 8.77 for the probability of the combination of symbols, and 1 / 8.40 for the winning combination of push order bells 1 to 6 (the role of transition to non-RT) in which the condition devices for winning 06 to winning 08 operate. The probability that any symbol combination from 06 to winning prize 08 is set to 1 / 12.60. Further, the combined winning probability of the chance items A to C in RT1 is set to 1/60.

  In this way, when it is in the normal section and is RT1, the combined winning probability (probability of becoming an ART lottery winning) of the chance items A to C is made lower than the probability of shifting from RT1 to non-RT, so It becomes easier to fall to RT, and after winning the bonus combination, it can be set to RT1 and ART. For example, when determining the number of initial ART games (when always setting the same initial number of games), even when an irregular event such as a transition to ART is performed again in the normal section and the lottery state is RT1 Then, it is more likely that the player proceeds in a direction that is unfavorable for the player (for example, the initial number of ART games is set small). In the modified example, the initial number of ART games is not determined in consideration of irregular events, but irregular events are prevented from occurring frequently in the first place.

(3) To set the winning probability of the falling lottery to fall from the advantageous section to the normal section so that at least one “all navigation” is performed during the advantageous section, for example, staying in the normal section and non-RT The combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6 is 1 / 8.40, and the single winning probability of replay A1 is 1 /. 831. In addition, the winning probability of the falling lottery to the normal section in the advantageous section is 1 /. 831 × 1/2 = 1 / 16.62. In this way, by setting the probability of winning the falling lottery to the normal section lower than the combined winning probability of the push order bells 1 to 6, it is possible to perform “all navigation” at least once during the advantageous section Sexuality can be increased. It is more preferable that the single winning probability of Replay A1 is set to be lower than the combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6.

(4) When the upper limit of the number of games that can be executed in the advantageous section is determined to be 1500 games, the ending state (game state number 10) in FIG. 28 is changed to the normal section so as not to exceed this upper limit. May be made when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1200G. In this case, the condition for transitioning from any of the game state numbers 1 to 9 to the ending state (in the figure, arrow S) may be defined as when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes 1170G.

  In this way, even when the number of games in the advantageous section is not specified to exceed 1500 games, when determining whether or not to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section, first, in the advantageous section It is preferable to determine whether the number of games has reached 1500 games. Then, when it is determined that the game is not 1500 games, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the next advantageous section has reached 1200 games. To do.

(5) As an ending effect, for example, after the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1470 games, 8 games (40 seconds), 8 games (40 seconds), 7 games (40 seconds), 7 games (40 seconds) A movie effect consisting of four sections may be performed. In the last seven game sections, a movie effect shorter than 4.1 seconds × 7 games = 28.7 seconds may be performed.

  In this case, for example, if the first section (8 games) is played in the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the game ends in 4.1 × 8 = 32.8 seconds. It will take about 7 seconds to move. At this time, a telop “The movie will be skipped by the next operation” is displayed on the screen of the image display device having 70, and if the next operation is performed during this time, the movie production of the next section is started. You may do it. If the next operation is not performed when the above-described telop is displayed, the movie effect in the first section is executed to the end.

  That is, when the ending effects are configured by four movie effects A, B, C, and D, the player will visually recognize the first effects of A, B, C, and D, respectively. As a result, even a player who skips one movie effect confirms the necessary points, and can output an important part of the ending effect that the player wants to show to the player. In addition, although the ending effect for notifying the end of the advantageous section has been described as an example, not only the ending effect for notifying the end of the advantageous section, but also a special effect over a plurality of games in a specific state such as during a bonus game It can also be applied if you want to execute.

  Furthermore, in the last game of the advantageous section (1500 games reached), the total number of games in the advantageous section (or part of the advantageous section (for example, during ART)), the total number of acquired games (total number of payouts), etc. It is preferable to display the result on the image display device and execute the freeze effect. However, when the last game (1500 games reached) is in the bonus game or inside, the game including the freeze effect and the display of the game result described above is not executed, and the game in which the bonus game has ended (in the normal section) It is preferable to display the result of the game including the total number of games in the advantageous section, the total number obtained (total number of payouts), etc. on the image display device and execute the freeze effect.

(6) Even in the normal section, when the winning combination whose profit does not change depending on the pressing order is won, the pressing order may be notified.
(7) The winning probability of the promotion lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section may be 100% or 0%, but the predetermined winning probability is constant. However, if the winning combination that triggers the promotion lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “lottery trigger”) is different, an individual winning probability may be set for each winning combination.

(8) In the case where the lottery state fluctuates during the normal section, it is desirable not to use a winning combination that is likely to be won only in a specific lottery state as a transition lottery trigger to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the lottery state fluctuates during the advantageous section, a winning combination that may be won only in a specific lottery state may be used as a lottery trigger in the game state number transition lottery.
(9) Depending on the type of bonus that is won at the same time as the lottery opportunity, the transition may be made directly to the advantageous zone and to the advantageous zone via the standby zone.

(10) The waiting section is ended by winning the bonus combination, but may be ended before that. As an end condition in this case, for example, the standby section may be ended with a predetermined number of games after the standby section starts.
(11) The number of ART games can be added up to the first 1000 games after the transition to the advantageous section, and it is determined whether to continue the ART game every 20 games until reaching 1500 games thereafter. A loop lottery may be performed.
(12) Based on the state of the instructed flag (see FIG. 37) stored in the RWM address F022, it may be determined whether or not the advantageous section can be ended. That is, as one of the determination of the end of the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section can be ended if the value of the instructed flag is FFH, and it is determined that the end is impossible if it is 00H.

(13) An error control process may be executed when an empty error occurs. Here, the error control process is a part of the game progress main process and indicates a state waiting for an operation (error canceling operation) of the setting / reset switch 82c and the like. However, even when the error control process is being executed, the timer interrupt process is controlled to be executed. As described above, the timer of 4.1 seconds, which is the minimum game time, is timed by the timer interrupt process. By performing the timer interrupt process during the execution of the error control process, error control can be performed by the occurrence of an empty error. Even when the process is executed, 4.1 seconds (timer subtraction) are continuously performed.

  Conventionally, when an empty error occurs and the error control process is executed, the timer interrupt process also waits. Therefore, if an empty error occurs, the 4.1-second timer subtraction is also temporarily suspended, and an empty error occurs. After being released, the timer subtraction was resumed. For this reason, in the game after the occurrence of the empty error, a time of + α is required for the time elapsed until the empty error is canceled. However, in this embodiment, even during the error control process in which an empty error has occurred, the timer subtraction process of 4.1 seconds is performed, so that the game can be executed immediately after the empty error is released. . Thereby, compared with the case where the conventional empty error generate | occur | produced, the time until a game can be performed can be shortened. Although an empty error has been described as an example, the present invention can also be applied to other errors such as a medal clogging error.

(14) As an advantageous section counter of the RWM address (F024), “1500” is set before the advantageous section is started, and “1” is subtracted every time a game in the advantageous section is executed. When the counter reaches “0”, the advantageous section may be controlled to end. Further, at this time, when the ending effect becomes “30”, the advantageous section may be controlled to start.

(15) The winning number including the winning of the bonus combination as the winning combination, the winning number A where the advantageous segment shift lottery for shifting to the advantageous segment is performed, and the winning number including the winning of the bonus combination as the winning combination In addition, there is a winning number B for which an advantageous section transition lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is not performed, and a bonus combination is given when the winning number A is determined and when the winning number B is determined. As a production process until the production of the result indicating that it has been won, a common production process can be output, and if the winning number A is determined in the role lottery and the winning lottery is selected, a bonus The advantageous section lamp may be lit after the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the winning number A is determined and the advantageous section shift lottery is won, after the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, the effect is output in the first effect mode, and the winning number B is determined, An effect may be output in the second effect form after the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the “first effect mode” may be, for example, the premier bonus effect shown in FIG. 53, and the “second effect mode” may be, for example, the normal bonus shown in FIG. It may be something like a production.

  This is to notify immediately which winning number has been determined when there is a case where an advantageous section shift lottery is executed or an advantageous section shift lottery is not executed according to the determined winning number. In other words, since the player knows whether or not the advantageous section shift lottery has been executed based on the notified winning number, it does not occur that the player cannot have a sense of expectation in the game after the game. It is to make it.

  When such a configuration is adopted, the same effect may be selected even if different winning numbers are determined until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, and the bonus After the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been prepared, the advantageous interval lamp or the like is informed whether or not the winning zone transition lottery has been won, so it is thrilled until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is prepared and the third stop button is released. A feeling can be given.

(16) After satisfying the start condition of the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section (hereinafter also referred to as “the number of advantageous section games”) is updated as the game progresses. When the end condition is satisfied, predetermined information is set to an initial value (clear). The predetermined information includes at least information indicating an advantageous section game (for example, data such as RWM address F020 (game section flag) and F021 (game state number)) and an advantageous section game number (for example, RWM address F024). (Advantageous section counter) data). Further, the advantageous section end condition includes that the number of advantageous section games has reached a specific value (0), and a special effect (ending effect) suggesting that the number of advantageous section games is approaching the specific value. ) May be executed. Here, the special effect (ending effect) refers to an effect executed over a plurality of games. Further, when the first bonus combination is won during the normal section, the symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination won is displayed in the first mode, whereas the special effect (ending effect) in the advantageous section is displayed. ), The symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination won is displayed in the second mode while executing the special effect.

  The “first mode” is a mode in which, for example, a symbol combination (for example, “7-7-7”) corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed slightly larger in the center of the screen of the image display device. In addition, the “second mode” is a mode in which a symbol combination (for example, “7-7-7”) corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed slightly smaller at the right end of the screen of the image display device, for example.

  If a bonus combination is won when a special effect is being executed, and an effect indicating that the bonus combination is won is executed, it becomes impossible to enjoy the special effect being executed. For this reason, in a situation where a special performance is being output, the above configuration is used in order to perform an effect that allows the user to be notified of the bonus combination while being able to enjoy the special performance. It may be adopted.

  With the above configuration, when a bonus combination is won during an ending production that suggests that the player is nearing the end condition of the advantageous section, the bonus combination is played in a manner that does not interfere with the ending production. By notifying the winning combination or the symbol combination of the bonus combination, it is possible to effectively show the ending effect while prompting the player to arrange the symbol combination of the bonus combination.

(17) In the transition diagram of the lottery state shown in FIG. 27, after the bonus game (1BB-A game, 1BB-B game to 1BB-F game) is completed, the process proceeds to RT2, and from RT2 to RT1 (more specifically, Migrating from other RTs such as RT3). Here, when the bonus combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in the situation of RT1 and being in ART (gaming state number 5), the bonus game is executed on the condition. After the bonus game is completed, the game proceeds to RT2. (In this case, the lottery state transitions from RT1 → RT3 → 1BB-A game (or 1BB-B to F game) → RT2). At this time, the winning condition satisfying the transition condition from RT2 to RT1 when transitioning from RT2 to RT1, or the transition condition from RTX to RT1 when transitioning from RT2 to RTX (RT state other than RT1 and RT2) → RT1 If the player wins the game, the game may be added with respect to the number of games in the ART.

  Conventionally, it has been possible to execute an ART game extra lottery or the like under any conditions. On the other hand, it is desirable that the difference in the appearance due to the setting difference is based on the winning of the winning combination, and it is not desirable that the performance related to the instruction such as AT is different depending on the setting difference. For this reason, in a bonus game in which a winning combination having a setting difference and a bonus combination having a setting difference are won, the gaming machine is such that an extra lottery cannot be executed.

  Therefore, when the bonus combination is won during ART, the above-described configuration may be adopted so that an extra lottery regarding the number of games during ART can be executed. If such a configuration is adopted, for example, in the game in which the RT transition combination (for example, the replay C (replay-H) of the winning number 19 (winning / replaying winning number 19)) has been won is not being set in the ART. It is possible to give a bonus such as an extra number related to the number of games of the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

(18) After satisfying the advantageous section start condition, the number of advantageous section games is updated according to the progress of the game. When the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, predetermined information is initialized (cleared). To. The predetermined information includes at least information indicating an advantageous section game (for example, data such as RWM address F020 (game section flag) and F021 (game state number)) and an advantageous section game number (for example, RWM address F024). (Advantageous section counter) data). On the other hand, the predetermined information includes at least setting value data (for example, data of RWM address F000 (setting value data)) and information that can identify the RT state (for example, RWM address F005 (RT state number)). Data) and storage number data (for example, data of RWM address F010 (storage number display data)) are not included.

  Conventionally, for example, specifications that may cause thousands of medals to be paid out in a so-called “one blow” due to continuous (or continued) advantageous situations such as during ART have become mainstream. There was a risk that the heart would be beaten remarkably. Therefore, in order to make the game after the end of the advantageous section an appropriate game by initializing specific information based on the end of the advantageous section and not initializing predetermined information. It may be adopted.

  In the above configuration, in order to prevent a large number of balls from being obtained in a series of consecutive games, information relating to advantageous sections is initialized, while data such as set value data and stored number data are not initialized. Thus, the normal game (the game in the normal section) that is executed after the advantageous section ends can be normally executed.

(19) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section A transition lottery means, and a game medium discharge means for discharging a bet and / or stored game media when a clearing operation is performed. You may make it alert | report that it transfers to an effective area before operation becomes possible.

  Here, “notification of operation mode” includes notification of the pressing order of the stop switch and notification of the operation timing of the stop switch by showing a so-called symbol to be pressed (the same applies hereinafter). The “game medium” is not limited to a medal, and may be a game ball (a so-called pachinko ball). Moreover, the information which shows the value recorded on recording media, such as a magnetic card, a non-contact-type IC card, or a coin incorporating an IC chip, may be sufficient. Further, the “clearing operation” is an operation performed for discharging the bet and / or the stored game media, and corresponds to, for example, an operation of a clearing switch provided in the slot machine.

  Even if a conventional slot machine wins a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery”) that determines whether or not to start an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch, In most cases, the fact that the player has won the AT lottery is triggered by the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played since the game that has won the AT lottery. This is because it was thought that the player's sense of expectation for the AT game cannot be given for a long period of time if the game was won in the AT lottery. For this reason, some players who have won the AT lottery have stopped playing the game without noticing that (before notifying that they have won the AT lottery). . In particular, the trend was seen by beginners. On the other hand, there are those who are not willing to win the AT lottery with their own power from the end, and find a slot machine that has already won the AT lottery by playing only a predetermined number of games and play a game. Under these circumstances, the person who played the game when winning the AT lottery (the person who won the AT lottery) did not play the AT game, and a third party who did not contribute to the AT lottery There was a voice that it might be absurd to play games.

  Therefore, there is less risk that the subsequent game will be stopped without noticing that the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section in which the order of pressing the stop switch (and / or operation timing) can be notified is determined. In order to achieve this, it is conceivable to employ the above-described configuration (19).

  According to the configuration of (19) described above, when it is determined to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the transition to the effective section is notified before the clearing operation becomes possible. It is possible to reduce the possibility of stopping the game without noticing the fact. This is because most of the players check whether or not the stored game media remain when the game is stopped, and perform the clearing operation when the game media remain. Therefore, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, when the liquidation operation is attempted to stop the game, the transition to the advantageous section is made by notifying the fact before the liquidation operation becomes possible. The possibility of noticing the game becomes high and the possibility of stopping the subsequent game can be reduced despite the fact that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

  Further, in the configuration of (19) described above, a storage number display means for displaying the number of storages of the game medium by a lighting mode of a plurality of light emitters is provided, and the storage number display of the light emitters of the storage number display means. It is informed that a transition to an advantageous section is made by turning on a light-emitting body that is not used for the first time.

  Here, as the “reserved number display means”, an 8-segment display (display configured with seven segments a to g for displaying alphanumeric characters and one segment DP for displaying dots (decimal points)), etc. In this case, the segment DP corresponds to “a luminous body that is not used for displaying the number of stored”.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is notified that the transition to the advantageous section is determined by the light emitter that is not used for displaying the number of storages in the storage number display means. Thereby, when the display of the storage number display means is checked to confirm whether or not the game medium stored by the player remains, it is also visually confirmed whether or not it is informed that the player will shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game is stopped without noticing that it shifts to the advantageous section. Further, since it is notified that the advantageous section is shifted using the already provided display means, it is not necessary to newly provide a dedicated notification means, so the cost does not increase.

(20) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be notified, and an amount of game media according to the game result from the stored game media A payout means for paying out, and a game section control means for controlling the transition between the normal section and the advantageous section, and by the game performed until the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section again. The expected amount of game media to be paid out may be set to be equal to or less than half of the allowable storage amount of game media in the payout means.

  Conventional slot machines are generally equipped with a so-called hopper (device for paying out stored medals) and store medals inserted from the outside. , Paying out the number of medals corresponding to the winning small role. Conventionally, when there are no medals stored in the hopper, the slot machine detects this and notifies that an empty error (hereinafter also referred to as “CA error”) has occurred. Thereby, when the staff of the game hall notices the occurrence of the CA error, the hopper is replenished with medals. However, in general, since the number of staff is small relative to the number of slot machines installed in the amusement hall, the replenishment work of medals every time a CA error occurs is harsh for the staff of the amusement hall. It was. Of course, if the number of medals that can be stored in the hopper's medal storage unit is large, the frequency of occurrence of CA errors can be reduced. However, since the hopper is installed inside the slot machine, the size of the medal storage unit is increased. There is also a limit to increasing the allowable amount of medals.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable that the hopper's medal storage part is filled at the start of the game hall business. For example, in a state where the so-called bonus game or the above-described AT game is not performed, the player plays the game. As a result, the number of medals in the medal storage unit increases, and there is a possibility that a medal full error indicating that the medal allowable amount of the medal storage unit has been greatly exceeded soon occurs. As a result, if a medal full error occurs at the same time after the game hall starts operating, the staff of the game hall will be busy with the medal collection work to reduce the medals in the medal storage section. Also, depending on the number of staff at the game hall, even if a CA error occurs, the medal replenishment operation may not be performed immediately. In such a case, the player can play the game again after the CA error occurs. Since it will wait for a long time until it becomes possible, if the CA error occurs frequently, the player's irritation will increase. Also, during AT games that can inform the order of pressing the stop switch (and / or the operation timing), it is an advantageous state that a small role is easy to win (that is, the frequency at which medals are paid out is high). It can be said that this is a situation in which the interest of the player is increasing. Therefore, if a CA error frequently occurs in such a situation, the player is frequently interrupted, and there is a possibility that the player's irritation is further increased.

  In view of this, it is conceivable to employ the above-described configuration (20) so as to reduce the work burden associated with the game media stored in the slot machine.

  According to the configuration of (20) described above, for example, if a half of the amount of game media allowed in the payout means is replenished to the payout means at the start of business at the game hall, Even if it shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game medium stored in the payout means is exhausted due to the game played in the advantageous section. As a result, it is less likely that game media need to be replenished even if the zone has shifted to an advantageous section immediately after the start of business, so the work load related to the game media stored in the slot machine is reduced. be able to. In addition, even if you have not shifted to an advantageous section for a while after starting business, the game media stored in the payout means can be recovered in a short time because there is a sufficient amount of game media stored in the payout means Therefore, it is possible to reduce the work burden related to the game media stored in the slot machine.

  In the configuration of (20) described above, the gaming section control means performs an advantageous section transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is determined as follows: It may be set so as not to exceed the rate of winning once when a game is played using all of the same amount of game medium as the allowable storage amount of the payout means.

  According to the configuration described above, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set so as not to exceed the ratio of winning once when a game is played using all the same amount of game medium as the allowable storage amount of the payout means. Therefore, even if the game medium stored in the payout means is exhausted when the advantageous section ends, the amount of game media stored in the payout means until the next transition to the advantageous section However, there is a high possibility that the allowable storage amount has been reached or is approaching the allowable storage amount. For this reason, the possibility that the game medium stored in the payout means will be exhausted during the next advantageous section can be reduced, so that the possibility of requiring replenishment of the game medium is reduced, and the slot machine stores the game medium. The burden of work related to the played game media can be reduced.

(21) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be notified, a lottery means for performing lottery, and a predetermined end condition in the advantageous section A game section control means for ending the advantageous section based on the operation of the stop switch that provides an advantageous game result when the lottery means achieves a predetermined lottery result in the advantageous section. If the mode has never been notified, the advantageous section may not be terminated even if the predetermined termination condition is satisfied.

  Here, the “predetermined lottery result” corresponds to, for example, a winning combination (such as “Bell group” in Patent Document 1) with different payout numbers depending on the pressing order.

  Some conventional slot machines end an AT game when a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of stop switches. In such a slot machine, if the player to be notified is not elected once after the AT game starts due to bad luck of the player and before a predetermined number of games are played, an advantageous push order is The AT game was terminated even when it was never notified. However, it can be said that it is too severe for the player to end the AT game without giving the player the benefit even though the AT game is started. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, it is conceivable that the number of games to be used as an AT game end condition is increased to increase the possibility that a notification target role is won during an AT game. However, if the number of games that are the end condition of AT games is increased too much considering the players who are unlucky, the number of winning of the role to be notified exceeds the appropriate category in most players, and AT Since there may be a case where the number of medals to be paid out becomes too large during the game, there is a risk that the player's gambling will be excessively beaten.

  Therefore, as an AT game end condition, for example, when the number of medals paid out during an AT game reaches a predetermined number (payout number management), the number of medals inserted during an AT game is paid out. Conditions such as when the difference from the number of medals has reached a predetermined value (difference number management), or when the number of times of notification of an advantageous pressing order has reached a predetermined number, can be considered. However, if any of these end conditions is adopted, if the situation where the subject to be notified is not won during AT game, the AT game may not end indefinitely. There is.

  Therefore, in order to avoid a situation in which no benefit is obtained during the advantageous section despite the transition to the advantageous section, it is conceivable to adopt the configuration (21) described above.

  According to the configuration of (21) described above, the advantageous section does not end unless an advantageous push order is notified at least once during the advantageous section, so that the player cannot receive any benefit during the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to avoid denying the significance of the existence of an advantageous section.

  Further, in the configuration of (21) described above, the game section control means includes special game execution means for performing a special game when a special game result is obtained due to a specific lottery result in the lottery means, When the special game is performed in the advantageous section, the operation mode (push order and / or operation timing) of the stop switch that provides an advantageous game result when the lottery means achieves a predetermined lottery result in the advantageous section. ) May be terminated based on the fact that the predetermined termination condition is satisfied even if the notification is not reported once.

  Here, the “specific lottery result” corresponds to, for example, winning a so-called bonus combination in a combination lottery, and the “special game result” corresponds to winning a bonus combination. In addition, a so-called bonus game corresponds to the “special game”.

  According to the configuration described above, when a special game is played during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is determined based on the fact that the predetermined end condition is satisfied even if the advantageous pushing order is not notified in the advantageous section. finish. In this case, since the player is benefited by the special game during the advantageous section, it is possible to avoid a situation where no benefit is obtained during the advantageous section. In addition, since a large amount of medals are paid out during the bonus game, if the advantageous section is not terminated in order to perform one advantageous pushing order until such time, the player's interest is reduced. Such a situation can be avoided.

(22) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the push switch operation mode can be reported, a counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section, A game section control means for making a transition from the advantageous section to the normal section when the count value reaches a predetermined value during the section, wherein the gaming section control means is in the middle of a special game being performed in the advantageous section When the count value reaches a predetermined value, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed while continuing the special game. For example, a bonus game corresponds to the “special game”.

  In the conventional slot machine, there is no restriction on the continuation (for example, addition) of the AT game that can notify the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch. There was an opinion that an excessive number of medals may be paid out to AT games, and that the player's gambling feelings are being greatly revered.

  Therefore, the above-described configuration (22) is adopted so that the amount of game media given during the advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified can be moderately suppressed. It is possible.

  According to the configuration of (22) described above, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, so that it is given in one advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the amount of game media to an appropriate value, and it can be avoided that the player's gambling joy is significantly increased. Further, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value during the execution of the special game, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, but the special game is continuously performed. For this reason, the special game can be played to the end even after the transition to the normal section, so there is no possibility of giving the player a sense of unnecessary loss.

  In addition, in the configuration of (22) described above, when the count value reaches a predetermined value in the advantageous section, if the special game is not performed, the game is set in a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed. If the special game is being performed when the count value reaches a predetermined value, a configuration as shown in (22 ′) may be provided that includes freeze control means that does not set the freeze state.

  According to the above-described configuration (22 '), when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, a freeze state is established. For this reason, for example, the number of games played during the advantageous section and the amount of game media granted during the advantageous section (for example, the number of medals, etc.) during the freezing state Information relating to the game can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information. On the other hand, when the special game is being performed when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the frozen state is not entered. As a result, the special game is not interrupted in the middle due to the freeze state, and there is no possibility of deteriorating the refreshing feeling when the player is playing the special game.

  Furthermore, in the configuration of (22 ') described above, the freeze control means may be in the freeze state when the special game ends. In such a configuration, when the special game is finished, it is in a frozen state. For example, when it is in the frozen state, the number of games executed during the special game or given during the special game is given. Information relating to the game played during the special game, such as the amount of game media that has been played, can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information.

  In the middle of a special game, if the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, information related to the game performed in the advantageous section described above in the freeze state when the special game ends. It may be presented to the player. In addition, as information presented at this time, a value obtained by adding the number of games executed in the special game in the normal section to the number of games played in the advantageous section, or the amount of game media provided in the advantageous section In addition, a value obtained by adding the amount of game media provided in the special game during the normal section may be presented to the player.

(23) A specifying means for specifying any one of a plurality of setting values, and a lottery means for performing a lottery for determining a winning combination with a winning probability corresponding to the setting value specified by the specifying means. In the lottery state, a lottery subject to the lottery is divided into a plurality of small roles to which a game medium is given when winning, and a plurality of replays that can be played again without inserting the game medium when winning The winning combination of a re-competitor when the winning probability of a specific small role is different by at least two set values and the winning probability of a specific small role is set to a low value. The probability is set high, and the winning probability of the re-gamer when the winning probability of a specific small role is set high may be set low.

  In a conventional slot machine, whether or not to execute an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch is determined by AT lottery. The number of games that can be performed (initial number of games) is determined by lottery or the like. In addition, there are cases where the winning rate (ease of paying out medals) can be adjusted by changing the winning probability of the AT lottery described above and the determined initial number of games depending on the set value. Under these circumstances, in recent years, most of the slot machines installed in the amusement hall have been set to a low setting value, and there has been a complaint that it is difficult to win the AT lottery. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, the winning probability of the AT lottery and the determined initial number of games are not changed depending on the setting value, and only the winning probability of the small role, the re-playing role or the bonus role is set as the setting value. It is desirable to be able to adjust the payout rate by making it different accordingly.

  However, if the winning probability of the small role or re-gamer is increased as the setting value is higher as in the conventional case, the initial number of games does not change depending on the setting value, so the higher the setting value, the more medals are paid out during the AT game There was a possibility. However, if the initial number of games is set to be small, the player's willingness to play may be reduced.

  Therefore, in order to be able to adjust the rate at which game media are given by changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the possibility of an excessive amount of game media being given even at a high set value. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration (23) described above.

  According to the configuration of (23) described above, the winning probability of a specific small role is different between at least two set values, so that the payout rate can be adjusted by changing the set value. In addition, when the winning probability of a re-playing role is set to a high value when the winning probability of a specific small role is set low, and the setting value is set to a high winning probability of a specific small role Since the winning probability of the re-game player is set to be low, the possibility that an excessive amount of game media will be given can be reduced.

  Further, in the configuration of (23) described above, the re-games include push-order re-games having different symbol combinations when winning according to the press order of the stop switches, and the predetermined transition condition The lottery state control means for changing the lottery state according to the lottery means, the lottery means determines the winning combination with the current lottery state and the winning probability corresponding to the set value specified by the designation means, the lottery state transition means, In a specific lottery state, if a specific push order re-gamer is determined to be a winning combination, and the symbol combination at the time of winning is a specific symbol combination, the lottery state is changed from the specific lottery state to another lottery state Then, the winning probability of the specific push order re-gamer in the specific lottery state may not be different for each set value.

  According to the above-described configuration, the winning probability of the specific push order re-gamer in the specific lottery state is not changed according to the set value. Since the ease of shifting to the lottery state is constant, the change in the lottery state can be prevented from affecting the payout rate according to the change in the set value.

(24) a normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a game section control means for controlling transition between the normal section and the advantageous section; A lottery means for performing a lottery to determine a winning combination from among a plurality of combinations, and when the special combination is determined to be a winning combination by the lottery means in an advantageous section, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state, The game section control means performs a transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the normal section when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination by the lottery means in the advantageous section, and the transition lottery is won May shift to a normal section, and the predetermined combination may be determined as a winning combination together with a special combination.

  Here, the “special role” is a bonus role (1BB-A), and the “favorable state” is RT2 that is more likely to win a re-playing role (re-playing-H (replay C)). It is.

  Among conventional slot machines, in a slot machine that determines whether or not to shift from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state by a transition lottery performed when a predetermined winning combination is won, an advantageous gaming state is achieved. When the player is aware that the player has won the above-mentioned predetermined winning combination, there is a risk that the interest and motivation of the player will be reduced.

  Therefore, in order to allow the player to play a game with a sense of expectation even when a winning combination that may shift from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state is determined, the above-described (24 ) May be adopted.

  According to the configuration of (24) described above, when a predetermined combination is won in the advantageous section, a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the normal section is performed, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to the normal section is performed. . Therefore, there is a possibility that if the predetermined combination is won, the advantageous section may be shifted to the normal section. If the predetermined combination is won only by itself, the predetermined combination will be won and the player will be notified about the transition of the game section. There is a risk of losing a sense of loss. However, if the predetermined role can be won at the same time as the special role, and if it is won at the same time, it will be possible to shift to an advantageous state, and the player will have an expectation for the advantageous state by winning the predetermined role. You can have a sense of superiority. Thereby, even if the predetermined combination is won, the player can play the game with expectation.

(25) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and an advantageous section notification means indicating whether or not the stop switch is an advantageous section And a lottery means for determining the lottery result relating to the winning combination, and an effect control means for controlling the production, and the lottery result by the lottery means includes a first lottery result including a special role and a first lottery result. And a second lottery result that includes the special role, and when the first lottery result is determined as an effect by the effect control means, and the second lottery result is determined. And when the first lottery result is determined in the normal section, there is a case where the same content is produced in the process up to the result production indicating that the special role has been won. Figure corresponding to role There is a case where the combination is shifted to the advantageous section after being stopped and displayed, and when the second lottery result is determined in the normal section, it is advantageous even after the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed. When the first lottery result is determined in the normal section and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed, and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the symbol corresponding to the special combination is not included. You may make it alert | report using the said advantageous area alerting | reporting means, after a combination is stopped and displayed.

  Here, the “advantageous operation mode” includes, for example, an operation mode in which a small role with the largest number of medal payouts is won when a plurality of small roles are won, and the winning probability of a predetermined winning role is high. An operation mode in which a symbol combination that can be shifted to a lottery state is stopped and displayed, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts to a lottery state in which the winning probability of a predetermined winning combination is reduced can be avoided, and the like (The same applies below). The “special combination” may be a so-called bonus combination.

  Recently, a player who played a game when AT gaming was allowed would stop the game before AT game started without noticing that, and other players would benefit from it. In order to prevent such a situation, it is required to notify the user using a lamp or the like when an AT game is permitted. However, if it is immediately notified whether or not an AT game is permitted in such a slot machine, it becomes clear whether or not the AT game is permitted by the notification, and a sense of expectation is expected in subsequent games. Could not have.

  Therefore, even if the lottery result does not shift to an advantageous gaming state, the above-described configuration is adopted so that the player can play a game with a sense of expectation even in a subsequent game. It is possible to do.

  According to the configuration of (25) described above, when the first lottery result is determined, there is a case of shifting to the advantageous section, and when the second lottery result is determined, there is no case of shifting to the advantageous section. However, there is a case where the same content is produced until the result production indicating that the special role is won. For this reason, the player can play a game with expectation for the transition to the advantageous section until the presence / absence of notification by the advantageous section notification means performed after the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is determined.

  Further, in the configuration of (25) described above, the effect control means is configured to shift to the advantageous section after the first lottery result is determined in the normal section and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed. , The symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, the first effect can be executed in the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, and the second lottery result is determined in the normal section, The second effect may be executable in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed.

  According to the configuration described above, after the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, the first effect can be executed when the advantageous section is shifted to, and the second effect is executed when the advantageous combination is not shifted. Since it becomes possible, it can be recognized whether or not to shift to the advantageous section depending on the type of effect that can be executed.

(26) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and an advantageous section notification means indicating whether or not the stop switch is an advantageous section A lottery means for determining a lottery result relating to the winning combination, and the lottery result by the lottery means includes a lottery result different from the first lottery result including the predetermined role and the special role. And the second lottery result including the predetermined combination, and when the first lottery result is determined by the lottery means, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is determined regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. When the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined role can be displayed regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. When the first lottery result is determined by the selection means, it is possible to shift from the next game to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is shifted, before a predetermined operation for starting a game in the advantageous section is performed. When the advantageous section notifying means gives a notification and the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means in the normal section, it is possible to shift from the next game to the advantageous section. Before the predetermined operation for starting the game is performed, the advantageous section notification means notifies the third lottery result in the game in which the advantageous section starts by determining the second lottery result. If the third lottery result is determined in a game in which an advantageous section starts when the first lottery result is determined and the first lottery result is determined, the notification is performed. It may not be performed the lottery about the technique.

  Here, the “predetermined lottery regarding the notification game” includes, for example, a lottery regarding the start or end of an AT game (including a promotion lottery or a falling lottery of a gaming state), or a lottery regarding an execution period of an AT game (so-called extra lottery or loop) Including lottery).

  Conventionally, matters relating to AT games (for example, matters relating to the start or end of AT games, matters relating to the period of execution of AT games, matters relating to profits from AT games, etc.) (such a lottery is also referred to as “AT-related lottery”). )), Depending on the conditions under which AT-related lottery is performed, an unexpected profit may be given to the player by the player's intentional game operation. For example, if there is a slot machine that performs an AT-related lottery when a so-called bonus combination is won (inside the so-called bonus), the player intentionally after the bonus combination is won By performing the reel stop operation so that the bonus combination does not win, it becomes possible to continue the AT-related lottery state as long as the player desires.

  Therefore, the above-described configuration may be adopted in order to avoid giving an excessive profit to the player in a situation where a specific lottery result state can be maintained by a gaming operation. Conceivable.

  According to the configuration of (26) described above, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed both when the first lottery result is determined and when the second lottery result is determined. Can prevent the player from realizing that he has won. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a stop operation that does not intentionally win a special combination by the player. In addition, when the first lottery result is determined, even if the third lottery result is subsequently determined, since the lottery regarding the notification game is not performed, the lottery regarding the notification game is performed by the player's intentional game operation. There is no fear of continuing to give the opportunity.

  Further, in the configuration of (26) described above, the first lottery state and the second lottery state having different winning probabilities of the re-gamer are provided, and the second lottery state is more regenerated than the first lottery state. When the first winning result is determined in the first lottery state, the winning combination is set higher than the winning probability of the game player, and the next game after the game in which the first lottery result is determined is changed to the special combination. It is good also as a structure provided with the lottery state transfer means to which it transfers to a 2nd lottery state until the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the first lottery result is determined in the first lottery state, the winning probability of the re-gamer becomes high until the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed from the next game. Therefore, even if the lottery regarding the notification lottery is not performed after the first lottery result is determined, the player can play many games with a small investment.

(27) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a normal section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the advantageous section Section control means for transitioning to, gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state in the advantageous section in accordance with a predetermined transition condition, and advantageous section game count storage updated based on execution of the game performed during the advantageous section Means, a game section information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section, and information stored in at least the advantageous section game number storage means when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and An initialization unit that clears information stored in the game section information storage unit, and a specific information based on information stored in the advantageous section game number storage unit And the predetermined end condition includes that the information stored in the advantageous section game number storage means becomes a specific value, and the effect control means includes: When a predetermined special combination is won during the normal section, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is notified in the first mode, and the predetermined special combination is won during execution of the specific performance. May notify the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination in the second mode.

  Here, the “first mode” corresponds to, for example, when the symbol combination is notified by an image, the symbol combination to be notified is largely displayed at a conspicuous position such as the center of the screen. On the other hand, in the “second mode”, on the screen on which the specific effect being executed is displayed, for example, the symbol combination is reduced in the right corner of the screen (so that the display of the special effect is not hidden as much as possible). Applicable to display.

  In the conventional slot machine, various effects are performed in order to improve the interest of the game. Some of the slot machines that perform such effects include, for example, a state advantageous to the player (so-called bonus game or AT) in order to enhance the player's expectation, anxiety, achievement, satisfaction, superiority, etc. When there is a possibility of shifting to a game or the like, or when shifting to an advantageous state, there is also a special effect that is not normally performed. In a slot machine that performs such an effect, when a so-called bonus combination is won during a conventional performance, such as during an AT game, for example, the special combination being executed is interrupted and the bonus combination is Since an effect indicating that the player has been won is executed, the interest of the special effect is impaired, and there is a possibility that water may be poured into the exhilaration that the player is enjoying.

  Therefore, even if a special role is won during execution of a special performance, in order to be able to notify that the special role has been won while continuously executing the special performance, It is conceivable to adopt the configuration described above.

  According to the configuration of (27) described above, even if a special role is won during a special performance that suggests that the advantageous section is approaching, an aspect that does not interfere with the special performance being executed Since it is possible to notify that the special combination is won in the (second mode), it is possible to effectively continue the special performance while encouraging the player to win the special combination.

  In the above-described configuration (27), the advantageous section game number storage means stores a predetermined value different from “0” based on the fact that the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, and is stored in the advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which “1” is subtracted by “1” based on the execution of the received game (27 ′). With such a configuration, for example, when the specific value is set to “0” and the value stored in the advantageous section game number storage means is subtracted using the CPU register, the specific value is obtained by checking the zero flag. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU.

  In the configuration of (27) or (27 ′) described above, the notification mode of the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is such that the symbol combination is displayed smaller in the second mode than in the first mode. It may be. With such a configuration, when a predetermined special combination is won during a specific performance, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is displayed smaller than in the normal section. The notification for notifying the player that the player has won can be prevented from interfering with a specific performance.

(28) Setting value information storage means for storing setting value information, lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery, and a notification game capable of notifying an operation mode of a stop switch that provides a game result advantageous to the player Notification game execution means for executing the state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, wherein the lottery means determines the lottery result, and the first lottery state and the second lottery state differ in the winning probability of the predetermined lottery result If the first lottery result including the special role is determined by the lottery means in the second lottery state, after the special game corresponding to the special role is finished, In the first lottery state, when it is in the first lottery state and in the informing game state, a privilege relating to the informing game state can be granted based on the fact that the second lottery means is determined by the lottery means. In addition, the probability that the second lottery state is determined based on the fact that the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the second lottery result is determined is set value information stored in the set value information storage means. It may be the same regardless.

  Some slot machines that perform conventional AT games end the AT game when a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of the AT game, and if a predetermined combination is won during the AT game, Some have increased the number of games that can be played (so-called addition). Here, since there has been no limitation on a predetermined role that triggers the addition (hereinafter also referred to as “additional role”), for example, a role having a different winning probability according to a so-called set value is added. It was also possible to. However, the reason why the winning winning probabilities differ depending on the set value is to adjust the number of benefits given to the player by winning the winning winning combination. Therefore, if the difference in the setting value affects the performance of the AT game, for example, although the winning probability of the role is generally lower than the other setting value, the game will be more than the other setting value by the AT game. It is possible to increase the benefits given to the user, and it is not preferable because it cannot play the original role of the set value.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the frequency of occurrence of a lottery regarding AT games (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery opportunity”) is not affected by the difference in the set value. Do not draw lots related to AT games during bonus games that start when a combination with a different winning probability is not used as an AT lottery opportunity or a bonus combination with a different winning probability depending on the set value wins. It is possible. However, if no lottery related to AT games is performed during bonus games, players will not be able to gain any AT benefits even after shifting to bonus games. It was.

  Therefore, even when a special role is won during the execution of a notification game in which an advantageous push order is notified, a privilege related to the notification game can be given, and the interest of the player can be enhanced as described above. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration (28).

  According to the configuration of (28) described above, when the special game is performed by determining the first lottery result including the special role in the second lottery state, the first lottery is performed after the special game is finished. If the second lottery result is determined in the first lottery state and the notification game state when the state is shifted to the state, it is possible to grant a privilege related to the notification game state. Thus, since the privilege regarding the notification game can be given after the special role is won, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, as a configuration different from the above (28), a set value information storage means for storing set value information, a lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery, and a stop that provides a game result advantageous to the player A notification game execution means for executing a notification game state capable of notifying an operation mode of the switch until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, wherein the winning probability of a predetermined winning combination is determined as a state in which the winning combination is determined by the lottery means The first lottery state, the second lottery state, and the third lottery state are different, and the third lottery state is a lottery state that can be transferred via at least the first lottery state, When the first lottery result including the special combination is determined by the lottery means when the lottery state is 2, the transition to the first lottery state is made after the special game corresponding to the special combination is completed. Transition conditions for It becomes possible to shift to the third lottery state by playing, and when it is the third lottery state and the notification game state, the notification game state is related to the fact that the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means. A privilege can be granted, and the probability that the second lottery result is determined based on the fact that the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed is stored in the setting value information storage means. It may be the same regardless of the set value information.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the special game is performed by determining the first lottery result including the special combination in the second lottery state, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the special game is finished. When the second lottery state is determined and the second lottery result is determined when the first lottery state is shifted to the third lottery state and the third lottery state and the notification game state are established, a privilege related to the notification game state can be granted. To do. Thus, since the privilege regarding the notification game can be given after the special role is won, the interest of the player can be improved.

(29) A normal section where notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not performed, an advantageous section where notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is possible, a credit number storage means for storing the number of credits, and set value information Set value information storage means capable of storing a lottery, lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery based on the set value information, and lottery state information storage means for storing lottery state information indicating a lottery state by the lottery means And a section control means for shifting to the normal section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, an advantageous section game number storage means updated based on the execution of the game performed during the advantageous section, and the advantageous section A game section information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not the game is completed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section game number storage means The stored information, the information stored in the game section information storage means is at least initialized, the information stored in the credit number storage means, the information stored in the set value information storage means, the lottery The information stored in the state information storage means is not initialized, and the predetermined end condition includes that the information stored in the advantageous section game number storage means becomes a specific value. Good.

  Some conventional slot machines start AT games again based on the game results during the completed AT game even when the AT game is completed. In such a slot machine, an advantageous situation such as an AT game may continue beyond expectation, and in such a case, an excessive number of medals will be paid out due to one AT game. . For this reason, a player who has invested excessively in the game has the expectation that once the AT game is started, the investment may be regained, and the player's gambling will be greatly recognised. There was a risk of it.

  Therefore, it is possible not to become an excessively advantageous situation in a subsequent game by a game result performed in an advantageous situation, and to continue a game in an appropriate state after the advantageous situation is ended. In order to achieve this, it is conceivable to adopt the configuration (29).

  According to the above-described configuration, when the advantageous section is terminated, information on the advantageous section is initialized, so that there is no possibility that an excessive privilege is given to the player due to the game in the advantageous section once. be able to. On the other hand, since information related to games that are not related to the type of game section, such as the number of credits, setting value information, and lottery status information, is not initialized, the game in the normal section that is executed after the advantageous section ends normally is executed. it can.

(30) The normal section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, the advantageous section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and the advantageous period of the total number of games executed A calculation means for calculating an advantageous section ratio indicating a ratio of the number of games and a display means including four indicators, and information indicating the ratio among the four indicators constituting the display means is first displayed. Display on the third display unit and the second display unit, and display the identification information indicating the type of ratio displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit on the third display unit and the fourth display unit. When the section ratio is displayed on the display means, if the value of the advantageous section ratio is equal to or greater than a specific value, the value of the advantageous section ratio displayed on the first display and the second display is blinked. May be.

  In conventional slot machines, various probabilities are set appropriately so that so-called bonus games and AT games are properly performed, and medals are not paid out excessively, so that the player's gambling is not remarkably reduced. Yes. In addition, slot machines are tested before they are put on the market, and it is confirmed that excessive medals are not paid out. However, conventionally, even if the result of the slot machine operation test is good, even after the slot machine is actually installed in the amusement hall and the operation is started, bonus games and AT games are properly performed. There was no way to check if it was.

  In view of this, it is conceivable to adopt the above-described configuration (30) in order to make it possible to confirm whether or not the slot machine after being installed in the amusement hall shows behavior deviating from the design value.

  According to the configuration of (30) described above, the identification information indicating the type of the ratio to be displayed is displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit, and the ratio value corresponding to the displayed identification information is set to the first value. Displayed on the first display and the second display. The ratio displayed on the first display and the second display displays the ratio of the number of games executed in the advantageous section (advantageous section ratio) of the total number of games, and the advantageous section. When the ratio is greater than or equal to a specific value, the displayed value flashes, so when the amusement hall staff, on-site inspectors, etc. visually observe the advantageous section ratio displayed on the display means, the value is It is possible to easily determine whether or not the design value deviates.

  Further, in the configuration of (30) described above, the counter means for counting the total number of games is provided, and when the count value by the counter means does not exceed a predetermined value, the advantageous section ratio is displayed on the display means. The identification information displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit may be displayed blinking.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the total number of games does not exceed the predetermined value, the identification information displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit flashes, so the first display unit and the second display unit It can be easily understood that the advantageous section ratio displayed on the display unit is not calculated after a sufficient number of trials.

10 Slot Machine 12 Body 14 Front Door 21 Display Window 22 Clearing Display LED
23 Replay indicator LED
24 Displayable LED
25 Game start indicator LED
26a, 26b, 26c Input indicator LED
27 Credit number display 28 Acquired number display 33 Checkout switch 34 1-bet switch 35 Maximum bet switch 36 Start switch 37L, 37C, 37R Stop switch 38 Selection switch 39 Determination switch 40L, 40C, 40R Reel 42L, 42C, 42R Stepping Motor 46 Hopper motor 52L, 52R Side lamp 64L, 64R Speaker 70 Image display device 72 Production lamp 74L, 74R Decoration lamp 82b Key switch 82c Setting / reset switch 83 Hopper 83a Medals storage section 87 Setting value display 100 Main control means 101 main control board 103 role monitor 110 winning combination determining means 115 reel control means 120 lottery state control means 125 game section control means 130 freeze control hand 140 notifying game control unit 145 roles ratio monitoring control unit 155 abnormality detecting means 160 LED display control unit 200 sub-control means 212 effect random means

  The present invention relates to a slot machine.

  Conventionally, slot machines are widely known as one of gaming machines. In this type of slot machine, when a player inserts a prescribed number of game media such as medals and game balls, the start switch operation becomes effective, and when the player operates the start switch in this state, a lottery drawing is performed. A plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols drawn thereon start to rotate. When the rotation speed of the reel reaches a certain speed, the operation of the stop switch provided for each reel becomes effective, and when the player operates the stop switch, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. The stop control is performed.

  In the reel stop control described above, when any winning combination is won in the winning lottery, within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch is operated so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are aligned on the active line as much as possible. Pull-in control is performed in the range of. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is lost, kicking control is performed so that the symbol combinations corresponding to some combinations are not aligned on the effective line. If all the reels stop and a symbol combination corresponding to any combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, it means that the combination has won a prize, and a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. The

  Also, among the conventional slot machines, for example, as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, when the middle stage cherries are won, the main control board is in a notification-permitted state, and an advantageous notification effect for the player is executed. Some sub-control boards allow it. In this “advantageous notification effect”, when a “bell group” composed of a plurality of roles is won in the role lottery, the player is notified of the pushing order in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts is won by the sub-control board. .

JP 2014-161344 A

  In the conventional slot machine, there is no restriction on the continuation (for example, addition) of the AT game that can notify the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch. There was an opinion that an excessive number of medals may be paid out to AT games, and that the player's gambling feelings are being greatly revered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and appropriately suppresses the amount of game media provided during an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified. It aims to provide a slot machine that can.

In order to solve the problems described above, the present invention provides:
Among the game sections, even in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a specific result, the first section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch cannot be notified,
In the game section, the second section that can notify the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the game with the specific result ,
Have
A counter for grasping the number of games executed in the second section ;
Game control means ;
With
The game control means includes
In the second period, the value of the counter is based especially becomes a predetermined value, to start the first section with ends of the second section,
Based on the special symbol combination stopped display, the special gaming state is started,
Among the games in the second section and in the special game state, when the value of the counter reaches the predetermined value in the predetermined game, the second section is terminated while maintaining the special game state and the first It is characterized by starting a section .

Here, the “special gaming state ” corresponds to a so-called bonus game.

According to the invention described above, when the number of games that have been made in the second section is the upper limit (the value of the counter is a predetermined value) becomes, the transition from the second section to the first section is performed, once the second It is possible to suppress the amount of game media provided during the section to an appropriate value, and it is possible to avoid remarkably encouraging the player. Also, of the game is the second segment and special game state, if the number of games that have been executed during the second interval at a predetermined game becomes the upper limit, although migrate to the first section from the second section, The special game state is maintained . For this reason, even if it transfers to a 1st area , since a special game state is not complete | finished, there is no possibility of giving a player a useless feeling of loss.

Further, the present invention provides the above-described invention,
Teaching apparatus for teaching whether or not it is the second section
With
In the second period, the value of the counter becomes the predetermined value, when exiting the second segment is capable of executing a freezing when to end the second section,
In the predetermined game, when the value of the counter becomes the predetermined value and the second section is finished, freezing is not executed when the second section is finished .

According to the above-described invention, when the number of games executed during the second section reaches the upper limit , the game enters a freeze state when the second section ends . For this reason, for example, the number of games played during the second section and the amount of game media given during the second section (for example, the number of medals) during the second section Information regarding the played game can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information. On the other hand, when the predetermined game described above is performed when the number of games executed during the second section reaches the upper limit , the freeze state is not entered. Thus, without being by freeze state game in the special game state is interrupted, there is no possibility to impair the invigoration of when performing a game in the special game state to the player.

  As described above, according to the slot machine of the present invention, it is possible to moderately suppress the amount of game media provided during an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified.

It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external appearance of the front panel of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the internal structure of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the credit number indicator and ART lamp of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a three-sided view showing an appearance of a hopper of the slot machine. FIG. 44D is an exterior diagram showing an exterior of the main control board case of the slot machine. It is a board | substrate mounting figure which shows the various components mounted in the main control board of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external appearance and display content of the ratio monitor mounted in the main control board of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel with which the slot machine is provided. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is a functional block diagram which shows the functional structure of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of winning combination used as the object of the lottery in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of winning combination used as the object of the lottery in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is a lottery state transition diagram showing the transition of the lottery state in the role lottery of the slot machine and the transition conditions. It is a game section transition diagram showing the transition of the same slot machine gaming section (game state number) and the transition conditions. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect (display aspect) of the operation sequence of the stop switch controlled by the main control means of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of an abnormality (error) that is a detection target in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the LED segment table referred when performing display with the 8-segment display of the slot machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows a part of wiring on the main control board of the slot machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring on the center display board | substrate of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the signal output from each output port of the slot machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating correspondence with the number (digit) corresponding to each 8-segment display and each display LED of the slot machine, and each segment and each display LED of the 8-segment display, and a signal (data) bit It is. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game progress main process for controlling the progress of the game performed by the main control means of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the ratio calculation process performed within the game progress main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the ratio calculation execution process performed within the ratio calculation process of FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control means of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the blink flag production | generation process performed by the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the blink display process performed by the timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a route (route) from a normal section to an advantageous section (in ART) in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; It is a flowchart which shows the content of the sign effect lottery process performed by the sub-control means of the slot machine. In the slot machine, it is explanatory drawing in order to explain the flow of the production until after winning the bonus combination during the normal section until winning. In the slot machine, it is explanatory drawing in order to explain the flow of the production until after winning the bonus combination in the advantageous section until winning. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect performed in the state where the bonus is not elected in the advantageous area of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect performed in the state where the bonus was elected in the advantageous area of the slot machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 shows an external perspective view of a slot machine 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a main body 12 that houses various devices, and a front door 14 that can be opened and closed on the front side (player side) of the main body 12. A front panel 20 is provided substantially at the center of the front door 14, and a display window 21 is formed at the approximate center thereof as shown in FIG. Three reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are rotatably provided inside the main body 12 so that the design of each reel can be visually recognized from the display window 21.

  The reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are installed such that the rotation axes are aligned on the same straight line in the horizontal direction. Each reel has a ring shape, and a strip-shaped reel tape on which one symbol is printed is attached to each of 20 symbol areas equally divided on the outer peripheral surface thereof. When the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, three symbols that are continuous along the rotation direction of each reel among the twenty symbols printed on each reel can be visually recognized from the display window 21. ing. As a result, a total of 9 symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 21. Here, among the three consecutive symbols that are stopped and displayed when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the position at which the uppermost symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as the stop display position) is the upper U, center. The position where the symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the middle M, and the position where the lowermost symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the lower D.

  Whether or not any winning combination is won when the three reels are stopped depends on a combination of symbols stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop display position (hereinafter referred to as “design combination”) among the nine symbols described above. A line connecting these stop display positions is called a winning line. In the present embodiment, when the game is performed in a state where the prescribed number is “3” and three medals are betted (three medals are bet), the upper stage U and the middle reel 40C of the left reel 40L. It is determined whether or not a winning combination is made according to the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the middle M and the lower D (winning line La) of the right reel 40R. However, during a bonus game (also referred to as a bonus game) started by winning 1BB-A among a plurality of bonus combinations described later, the prescribed number is “2” and two medals are bet ( When a game is played in a state where two medals have been betted), the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper stage U of the left reel 40L, the lower stage D of the middle reel 40C, and the upper stage U (winning line Lb) of the right reel 40R. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. Thus, the winning line can be changed to a predetermined line according to the number of betted game media.

  In the following, when it is simply described that “the symbol combination is stopped and displayed” or “the symbol combination is complete”, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line (that is, the winning combination is won). ) Means. The stop display position that is a winning line is also referred to as a “winning stop position”.

  In addition to the display window 21, the front panel 20 is provided with various lamps and a display for notifying the player of various information regarding the game. First, the left side of the display window 21 is provided with an ART lamp ARTLP (also referred to as an AT lamp ATLP) that is turned on during ART described later. The light source of the ART lamp ARTLP is two LEDs 29a and 29b (described later) provided on the rear surface of the front panel 20, and the light of these LEDs transmits through the light-transmitting region indicated by the broken line in FIGS. It emits light.

  In FIG. 2, on the lower side of the display window 21, in order from the left, a game start display lamp 25 (hereinafter referred to as “game start display LED 25”), insertion display lamps 26a, 26b, and 26c (hereinafter referred to as “input display LED 26a”). , 26b, 26c "), credit number display 27 (hereinafter also referred to as" credit number display 27 "and" stored number display 27 "), and acquired number display 28 (hereinafter referred to as" payout number display "). 28 ”), a rechargeable display lamp 24 (hereinafter referred to as“ releasable display LED24 ”), a replay display lamp 23 (hereinafter referred to as“ replay display LED23 ”), and a clearing display lamp 22 ( Hereinafter, “clearing display LED 22”) is provided. The game start display LED 25 is turned on when the operation of the start switch 36 shown in FIG. 1 can be accepted, and is turned off when it is in any other state. The insertion display LEDs 26a, 26b and 26c display the number of medals bet. Here, when one medal is bet, the one-insertion display LED 26a is turned on. When two medals are bet, the one-insertion display LED 26a and the two-insertion display LED 26b are turned on, and three medals are displayed. When a bet is placed, the 1-sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 26c are lit.

  A medal to bet to play a game in the slot machine 10 is a kind of game medium. The game medium is not limited to a medal, but may be a game ball (so-called pachinko ball), or information indicating the value recorded on a recording medium such as a magnetic card, a non-contact IC card, or a coin incorporating an IC chip. It may be. The slot machine 10 can be played once when a prescribed number of medals are bet. The prescribed number in this embodiment is basically three, but the prescribed number is two only in 1BB-A games (described later) among a plurality of bonus games.

  The credit number display 27 is a 2-digit 8-segment display and is credited (hereinafter also referred to as “storage”) in the slot machine 10 (more specifically, stored data described later can be rewritten). The number of medals (upper limit is 50) stored in a non-volatile memory (RWM: read / write memory) is displayed. Here, as shown to Fig.4 (a), an 8-segment display is a display which consists of segment ag and segment DP. The shapes of the segments a to g are linear, and the shape of the segment DP (the light emitting surface of the segment DP) is a circle having a diameter of 1 mm. The lower-digit segment DP of the credit amount display 27 is used as an advantageous section lamp (hereinafter also referred to as “advantage section LED”, “advantage section display”, or “section display”). The segments a to g are also referred to as a 7-segment display portion, and the segment DP is also referred to as a dot segment display portion.

  In FIG. 4 (a), only the lower digits of the credit number display 27 show the signs of the segments a to g and the segment DP, but the same reference numerals are assigned to the segments in the other 8-segment displays. It is assumed that The acquired number display 28 is composed of a 2-digit 8-segment display, and displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player according to the game result. Of course, when the segment DP is used for some purpose, it is necessary to adopt an 8-segment display composed of the segments a to g and the segment DP. However, when the segment DP is not used, the segment DP is composed of the segments a to g. A 7-segment display may be employed. In addition, the 8-segment display and the 7-segment display are collectively referred to as “segment display”.

  In FIG. 2, the insertable display LED 24 is turned on when the slot machine 10 accepts insertion of medals, and is turned off when the insertion of medals is not accepted. The re-game display LED 23 is turned on when the next game is a re-game, and is turned off when the re-game is finished. The clearing display LED 22 is lit while the credited medal is paid out by operating the clearing switch 33 shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 1, on the lower side of the front panel 20 described above, there is provided an operation panel portion 30 that is formed substantially horizontally over the entire width of the slot machine 10 and protrudes toward the player. A door key 31 that locks or unlocks the front door 14 with respect to the main body 12 is provided on the right front side of the operation panel 30. In the present embodiment, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the door key 31 and rotated clockwise (rotated clockwise toward the front door 14), the front door 14 is unlocked and rotated counterclockwise (front door). 14), and an abnormal state (hereinafter also referred to as “error state”) can be canceled (reset).

  A medal insertion slot 32 for inserting medals into the slot machine 10 is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 30. In addition, a selector 80 (to be described later) for selecting inserted medals is provided inside the slot machine 10, and a medal sensor (insertion sensor) in the selector 80 is inserted from the medal insertion slot 32. Is detected, a medal detection signal is output to the main control means 100 described later. Based on the input medal detection signal, the main control means 100 counts the number of inserted medals and detects anomalies such as fraudulent behavior when inserting medals (hereinafter also referred to as “error detection”). ing.

  On the left side of the upper surface of the operation panel 30, bet switches 34 and 35 for betting credited medals on the slot machine 10 (in other words, setting a bet amount) are provided. Each time the 1-bet switch 34 is operated, only one of the credited medals is bet as a game betting target. The maximum bet switch 35 bets the medals up to the maximum number (specified number) that can be bet in the current game among the credited medals as the betting targets of the game. Further, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 with a prescribed number of medals being betted, the inserted medal is credited (stored in the RWM). Note that when a predetermined number of medals are bet and a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 in a state where the number of credits (stored in the RWM) reaches the upper limit (50), the medal will be described later. The medal payout opening 60 returns the tray 61.

  Between the medal slot 32 and the maximum bet switch 35, a selection switch 38 and a determination switch 39 for a player to input information to the slot machine 10 are provided. The selection switch 38 is composed of four switches: an upper switch, a lower switch, a left switch, and a right switch that specify the vertical and horizontal directions. Then, any one of an upward direction, a downward direction, a left direction, and a right direction is designated corresponding to the operated switch. The decision switch 39 is formed of a member that transmits light, and a light source such as an LED is provided therein. The character “PUSH” is printed on the upper surface (operation surface) of the decision switch 39.

  A start switch 36 is tiltably provided on the front left side of the operation panel 30. The start switch 36 is activated when the player bets a prescribed number of medals on the slot machine 10. However, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a re-game to be described later is arranged (wins) on the winning line, in the next game (re-game), the game in which the re-game player (also referred to as “replay role”) wins. The bets are automatically bet as many as the number of medals bet in the game, and the insertion display LEDs 26a, 26b, and 26c are turned on for the number of bets, and the operation of the start switch 36 for performing the next game is effective. Become. When a medal is inserted into the medal slot 32 in this state, the medal may be returned to the tray 61 or credited until the upper limit (50) is reached.

  Further, when the re-game player wins, the number of medals automatically bet on the next game may be determined according to the game state. For example, if a game is executed with two bets in the first game state (the specified number of SB games is “2”) and a re-game player wins a prize in the game, Since the game state is (the specified number of normal games is “3”), automatic betting processing for three cards is executed.

  When the player operates the start switch 36 in a state where the operation of the start switch 36 is valid, the three reels 40L, 40C, and 40R start to rotate. As a result, the symbols printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are changed (scrolled) from the top to the bottom in the display window 21 as a general rule. In some cases, the display may vary from top to bottom. The freeze effect is an effect that is executed in a state in which the progress of the game is delayed. In particular, when the progress of the game is delayed immediately after the start switch is operated, the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are appropriately rotated. Thus, it is possible to execute a freeze effect (hereinafter also referred to as “reel effect”) that enhances the interest of the game. As a reel production, for example, the reel is rotated in the direction opposite from the normal rotation direction (from top to bottom) (from bottom to top), or the reel is rotated from top to bottom or from bottom to top by a predetermined number of symbols. To display a specific symbol combination in a stopped state, rotate other reels while a predetermined reel is stopped, change the rotation speed of the reels, or change the reels according to the player's operation. The operation may be changed.

  Stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are provided in the center of the front surface of the operation panel 30 so as to correspond to the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. Here, the stop switches 37L, 37C and 37R are so-called self-illuminated push button switches, and have a structure in which the light emission color can be changed while the portion of the push button emits light. For example, when a stop switch operation is disabled (not acceptable), the push button part of the stop switch is lit red, and blue when the operation is enabled (acceptable) It becomes a luminescent color. Stop switches 37L, 37C and 37R are used on condition that the rotation speed of reels 40L, 40C and 40R has reached a predetermined steady rotation speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute, also simply referred to as “constant speed”). The operation of becomes effective. While the player's operation on the stop switch is disabled, the stop switch may be turned off instead of emitting red light.

  Further, when the left stop switch 37L is pushed during the game, the stop control of the left reel 40L is performed in the game to stop the rotation, and when the middle stop switch 37C is pushed, the middle reel 40C When the stop control is performed and the rotation is stopped and the right stop switch 37R is pushed, the stop control of the right reel 40R is performed and the rotation is stopped. In the following, operating the stop switch is referred to as “stop operation”, and after all reels start rotating, the first stop operation is the first stop operation, the second stop operation is the second stop operation, and the last This stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. When the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the center positions of three consecutive symbol areas that are stopped and displayed on the display window 21 among the twenty symbol areas set on the outer peripheral surface of each reel are the upper U , Stop so as to coincide with the center positions of the middle stage M and the lower stage D. Here, the position where the center position of the symbol area coincides with the center position of the stop display position is referred to as a fixed position.

  A clearing switch 33 is provided on the left side of the operation panel 30. If operated during the reception period, all bets and medals that have been bet are paid out, and the credit number display 27 displays Becomes “0”. Here, the term “clearing” may be written as “settlement”. During the reception period described above, for example, after all reels have stopped (when medals are paid out, after the medals have been paid out), a prescribed number of medals are bet and the start switch 36 is operated. Until the time.

  When the clearing switch 33 described above is operated once, the bet medals and all medals that have been credited are paid out. For example, when the clearing switch 33 is operated when there is a betted medal or a credited medal, only the betted medal is paid back, and this state (the medal is not betted). In the state), when the clearing switch 33 is operated again, all credited medals may be paid out. In addition, when the re-playing role is won in a certain game and it becomes possible to re-play in the next game, when the clearing switch 33 is operated, only the credited medal is refunded, It is recommended that the replay be executed as it is.

  A lower panel 50 on which a model name of the slot machine 10 and characters adopted as a motif are drawn is arranged below the operation panel 30. A left side lamp 52L is provided on the left side of the lower panel 50, and a right side lamp 52R is provided on the right side. The side lamps 52L and 52R are decorative lamps that blink (or turn on) according to a predetermined pattern in accordance with a game standby (hereinafter also referred to as “non-game”) or according to a game result. A medal payout opening 60 for paying out medals to the player is provided at a substantially lower center of the lower panel 50.

  For example, when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, if the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line L corresponds to a winning combination (also referred to as “small role”), the winning combination is supported. The number of medals is credited (stored in the RWM), or the hopper 83 (specifically, the hopper motor 46) described later is operated, and among the medals stored in the hopper 83, it corresponds to the winning winning combination. The number of medals to be paid out. When the clearing switch 33 is operated in a state where medals are credited, the credited medals are paid out. The medals paid out from the medal payout opening 60 are stored in the tray 61. On the right side and the left side of the medal payout opening 60, sound transmission holes 62R and 62L are provided for allowing sounds emitted from speakers 64R and 64L (described later) housed inside the slot machine 10 to pass outside. Yes.

  An image display device 70 composed of a liquid crystal display panel is provided on the upper portion of the front panel 20. The image display device 70 is not limited to a liquid crystal display panel, and any other display device can be used as long as the player can visually recognize image information and text information during a game or a non-game. . This image display device 70 is a game history image (so-called game history screen) for displaying the total number of games (also referred to as the total number of games), the total number of bonus winnings, etc., and a game after a password is entered. Two-dimensional code image (so-called two-dimensional code screen) for displaying the two-dimensional code including the number of times (also called the number of games) and the number of bonus winnings, etc., and for demonstrations displayed during game standby Image (so-called demo screen), effect image (so-called effect screen) for notifying the result of the role lottery and the operation mode of the stop switch (operation timing or operation sequence, etc.), progress of the slot machine game (betting medals → start Effect image (so-called effect) according to operation of the switch 36 → reel rotation → operation of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R → stop of rotation of all reels It is possible to display a face) or the like.

  Above the image display device 70, the reels 40L, 40C, 40R are stopped, and when a winning combination is won, or a medal is likely to be paid out (for example, during a bonus game or ART, for the player) An effect lamp 72 that blinks (or lights up) in a predetermined pattern is provided depending on the case where it is in an advantageous state. A left decorative lamp 72L is provided on the left side of the effect lamp 72, and a right decorative lamp 72R is provided on the right side. Similarly to the side lamps 52L and 52R, the decoration lamps 72L and 72R are decorative lamps that blink (or turn on) according to a predetermined pattern in accordance with a game standby or game result.

<Description of the internal structure of the slot machine>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 3, the same components as those shown in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front door 14 is opened, and illustrates the back side (inside the casing) of the front door 14 and the inside of the main body 12.

  In FIG. 3, sub-control means 200 for controlling the execution of the game effect performed in the slot machine 10 is housed in the case above the front door 14 and behind the image display device 70 shown in FIG. It is attached. The sub-control unit 200 includes a sub-control board and an image control board described later. Each of these control boards includes a circuit including electronic components such as a CPU and other ICs mounted on a printed board. In FIG. 3, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the right side of the display window 21, and the LEDs 29a and 29b are light sources of the ART lamp ARTLP shown in FIGS. The shape of the light emitting surface of the LEDs 29a and 29b is a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 4B, and the dimension of the light emitting surface is 1.2 mm long × 4 mm wide. Therefore, the area of the light emitting surface of the ART lamp ARTLP is larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit number indicator 27.

  Further, the light emission area of the ART lamp ARTLP shown in FIG. 2 (the broken line portion in FIG. 2) is larger than the light emission area of the segment DP of the credit number indicator 27 used as the advantageous interval LED. The ART lamp ARTLP is easier for the player to visually recognize than the LED. As a method for making the ART lamp ARTLP easier to see than the advantageous section LED, the ART lamp ARTLP may be lit brighter than the advantageous section LED instead of increasing the area of the light emitting surface or the light emitting area. . In this case, the area of the light emitting surface or light emitting region of the ART lamp ARTLP may be smaller than that of the advantageous section LED, or the area of both light emitting surfaces or light emitting regions may be the same.

  Thus, the advantageous section LED is less noticeable than the ART lamp ARTLP. That is, it is easy for the player to make a transition during ART, but it is difficult for the player to make a transition to the advantageous section (transition to the advantageous section). It is effective when the reason for providing the advantageous section LED is not to make it easier for the player to understand that the transition to the advantageous section is made. For example, there is a case where a transition to an advantageous section is provided to make it easier for the staff of the game hall to understand. However, this is not the case when the reason why the advantageous section LED is provided is to make it easier for the player to understand that the transition to the advantageous section is made. In such a case, it is preferable to make the advantageous section LED stand out from the ART lamp ARTLP (or make it stand out as much as the ART lamp ARTLP).

  Even if a conventional slot machine wins a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery”) that determines whether or not to start an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch, In most cases, the fact that the player has won the AT lottery is triggered by the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played since the game that has won the AT lottery. This is because it was thought that the player's sense of expectation for the AT game cannot be given for a long period of time if the game was won in the AT lottery.

  For this reason, some players who have won the AT lottery have stopped playing the game without noticing that (before notifying that they have won the AT lottery). . In particular, the trend was seen by beginners. On the other hand, there are those who are not willing to win the AT lottery with their own power from the end, and find a slot machine that has already won the AT lottery by playing only a predetermined number of games and play a game. Under these circumstances, the person who played the game when winning the AT lottery (the person who won the AT lottery) did not play the AT game, and a third party who did not contribute to the AT lottery There was a voice that it might be absurd to play games.

  In order to respond to such a voice, without realizing that the player has won a transition lottery that determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified, There was a need to provide a slot machine that can reduce the risk of stopping.

  In general, when most players stop playing a game, they check if there are no medals remaining in their credits. Then, when a medal remains in the credit, the settlement switch 33 is operated. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section shift lottery is won, the advantageous section LED is lit before the operation of the clearing switch 33 becomes effective. However, the case where the next game is shifted not to the advantageous section but to the waiting section described later is excluded. Thus, before the player operates the checkout switch 33 (stops the game), it can be notified that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won, so erroneously (not aware that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won). Stopping the game can be deterred.

  In the present embodiment, the unused segment (segment DP) of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED. Thereby, when the player confirms that no medal remains in the credit, it can be confirmed whether or not the advantageous section shift lottery is won at the same time. Furthermore, by using the unused segment of the credit amount display 27, it is not necessary to provide a separate LED, and the cost does not increase.

  In recent years, the number of slot machines with high accuracy (easy to shift during ART) and the probability of shifting during ART is increasing rapidly, but most of the slot machines installed at amusement halls are set to low setting values. There were complaints that it was quite high and did not shift to ART. Also, in some slot machines, if set to a high setting value, over 10,000 medals may be paid out in one ART, although rarely. The voice was raised.

  Therefore, in order to make the probability of shifting to high accuracy or ART difficult to be biased by the set value, the winning probability of the role (winning number) determined by the role lottery that is a condition for shifting to high accuracy or ART is the set value. And the winning probability of the transfer lottery for shifting to the high accuracy corresponding to the determined combination and the ART is determined to be the same according to the set value. In addition, in order to prevent excessive medals from being paid out due to a series of games, the situation of staying in a special state related to AT such as high accuracy and ART is excessive. The limit for staying in the state was decided.

  Based on these, in order to distinguish between a special state related to AT such as high accuracy and ART and other states, a “normal section”, an “advantageous section”, and a “standby section” are provided as game sections in this embodiment.

  “Regular section” means information that can grasp the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the game in which the result of the winning lottery in which the advantage / disadvantage is generated depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, winning number, winning / This is a game section in which transmission of a re-game winning number) to the sub control board is prohibited, and a game section in which notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is prohibited. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (or waiting section) to be described later based on a predetermined combination in which the winning probability of the combination (winning number) determined by the combination lottery is the same by the set value. It is a game section.

  “Advantageous section” refers to information (for example, winning number, winning / It is a game section in which a re-game winning number) can be transmitted to the sub-control board and a section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified. Also, as one of the conditions for ending the advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the “normal section” on the condition that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). It is a game section.

  The “standby section” refers to a game section when the player has a right to shift from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section” but has not yet shifted to the “advantageous section”. Specifically, when a bonus combination (in this embodiment, such as 1BB-A to F, where the winning information (or the operating state of the conditional device) is carried over after the next game) is won, “normal” A game section that can be transferred only when a lottery that shifts from “section” to “advantage section” is won, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning bonus combination is The “standby section” ends and the “advantage section” starts from the next game.

  Also, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery in which the advantage / disadvantage is generated by the operation mode of the stop switch is determined in the standby section, information that can grasp the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, This is a game section in which transmission of a winning number or a winning / replay winning number) to the sub-control board is prohibited, and a game section in which notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is prohibited. The “standby section” should originally be shifted to the “advantageous section”, but if it is shifted to the “advantageous section”, an inconvenient event may occur. It can be said that it is a game section that has been suspended. For this reason, if there is no possibility that an inconvenient event occurs, it is possible to shift to the “advantageous section” without shifting to the “standby section”. Incidentally, an inconvenient event is that the winning number can be determined at an unintended timing by turning on the advantageous section LED.

  The segment DP in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 may be used as the advantageous section LED. In this case, when the acquisition number display 28 is provided in the vicinity of the decision switch 39 and it is decided to shift from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone LED is lit before the operation of the decision switch 39 becomes effective. Is preferred. Thereby, for example, when the determination switch 39 is operated during non-game, in the slot machine 10 that displays the game history screen on the image display device 70, it is difficult for the player to overlook the lighting of the advantageous section LED.

  Specifically, when the determination switch 39 is operated during non-game, a menu screen is displayed on the image display device 70. Under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, it is possible to select which screen to display next from among the game history screen, the password input screen for entering a password, and the two-dimensional code screen by operating the selection switch 38. It has become. That is, when the player finishes the game, the player activates the two-dimensional code reader provided in the portable terminal and operates the decision switch 39 to obtain the two-dimensional code. Since the acquired number display 28 is provided in the vicinity of the determination switch 39, when the determination switch 39 is operated, since the acquired number display 28 is in the field of view, the advantageous section LED is lit. If so, it can be said that it is rare to notice the lighting. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being finished without noticing that the next game is shifted to the advantageous section. Of course, even when the segment DP of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous interval LED, the credit amount indicator 27 is provided in the vicinity of the determination switch 39, and when it is decided to shift from the normal interval to the advantageous interval, It is preferable to light the advantageous section LED before the operation of the decision switch 39 becomes effective.

  The selector 80 described above is provided below the display window 21, and a regular medal is selected from medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 shown in FIG. For example, when the external dimensions and material of the inserted medal do not meet a predetermined standard, the medal is guided to the return passage 81a connected to the medal payout opening 60 of FIG. On the other hand, when the external dimensions and material of the inserted medal conform to a predetermined standard, the receiving passage 81b for sending the medal to a medal storage part 83a (a container for storing the medal) of the hopper 83 described later. Lead to.

  The selector 80 includes a first insertion sensor 48a, a second insertion sensor 48b, and a medal passage sensor 49, and detects abnormalities related to detection of medals guided to the receiving passage 81b by these sensors and insertion of medals. ing. For example, the abnormality relating to the inserted medal is determined based on the time difference in which the medal is detected by the first insertion sensor 48a and the second insertion sensor 48b, the detection order, and the like. If the medal passage sensor 49 continues to detect medals for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that a medal clogging has occurred in the selector 80. Speakers 64R and 64L are attached to the lower side of the front door 14 at the positions of the sound transmission holes 62R and 62L shown in FIG.

  Next, inside the main body 12, a door switch 44 that detects opening / closing of the front door 14 is attached to the front upper right. Here, in FIG. 3, the door switch 44 is provided on the main body 12 side, but may be provided on the front door 14 side. A main control board case 102 that houses a main control board 101 that constitutes a hardware part of the main control means 100 that controls the game is attached inside the main body 12 and above the back plate.

  An external concentrated terminal board 86 is installed below the door switch 44. The external concentration terminal board 86 outputs a signal including information related to the game being played in the slot machine 10 to various external devices (a so-called hall computer, a game history display device installed in the game hall, etc.). It is a relay board for doing. A reel unit that encloses the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R is installed at substantially the center in the main body 12. Inside the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R for rotating the corresponding reels respectively, and spinning cylinder sensors 43L and 43C for detecting the reference positions (described later) of the corresponding reels. , 43R are provided.

  A power supply unit 82, a hopper 83, and a medal auxiliary storage 84 are arranged in order from the left side in FIG. The power supply unit 82 converts the input AC 100V into a plurality of types of DC voltages, and supplies them to various devices included in the slot machine 10. Further, on the front panel surface of the power supply unit 82, a power switch 82a that is a rocker switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10 is provided on the upper left side. Further, a key switch 82b is provided on the right side of the power switch 82a so as to make it possible to change a so-called set value. A push button type setting / reset switch 82c is provided below the power switch 82a. This setting / reset switch 82c is used to restart the game progress (control process) when the game progress (control process) is forcibly stopped due to detection of various abnormalities (excluding some abnormalities) to be described later. ) To be started.

  Note that when the key is turned counterclockwise in the door key 31 shown in FIG. 1, the same effect as when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated is exhibited. The key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c described above correspond to switching means that can be switched between an off state (first state) and an on state (second state). The door key 30 also corresponds to switching means that can switch between a state where the key is neutral (first state) and a state where the key is turned counterclockwise to release the error (second state). To do. The key switch 82 b and the setting / reset switch 82 c are attached to the power supply unit 82 provided in the main body 12, but may be attached to the back side of the front door 14. As described above, since the key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c are provided inside the casing including the main body 12 and the front door 14, the operation becomes difficult when the front door 14 is closed. Yes. Also, “difficult to operate” means that, for example, when the front door 14 is closed, it must be operated by an illegal act using a wire or a rod-like member, or the front door 14 is open. It also includes the meaning that the door switch 44 cannot be detected by an illegal act and the front door 14 must be opened and operated.

  The hopper 83 is a device that pays out medals when a small role is won as a result of a game or when a credited medal is returned to the player. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, when the rotary disk 83b is rotated by the hopper motor 46, the medals stored in the medal storage section 83a jump out one by one from the discharge port 83c. A payout passage 81c connected to the medal payout outlet 61 is provided on the back surface of the front door 14, and a medal that has jumped out from the discharge port 83c jumps into a medal hole 81d formed in the payout passage 81c. The medal is paid out to the tray 61. In the hopper 83, a first payout sensor 47a and a second payout sensor 47b for detecting a discharged medal are provided in the vicinity of the discharge port 83c. Based on the output signals of these payout sensors, the main control means 100 counts the medals that have been paid out and detects an abnormality related to the payout of medals.

  The medal storage unit 83a of the hopper 83 can store about 700 medals. However, when more than an allowable amount of medals is accumulated, medals overflow from the overflow chute 83d provided in the medal storage unit 83a. It is accommodated in the 3 medal auxiliary storage 84. The medal auxiliary storage 84 is a box-like member having an opening K on the upper surface as shown in FIG. 3, and the vertical wall surface on the back side of the medal auxiliary storage 84 has an opening K as shown in FIG. 3. A total of three round holes 84a are drilled, two near and one near the bottom. When the medal auxiliary storage 84 is placed at a predetermined position in the main body 12, the two rod-like electrodes 85 a attached to the main body 12 and the one rod-like electrode 85 b correspond to each other. The medal auxiliary storage 84 is inserted through the round hole 84a.

  As a result, when medals are accumulated in the medal auxiliary storage 84 and the medals are accumulated up to the position of the rod-shaped electrode 85a, the rod-shaped electrodes 85a and 85b are electrically connected by the conductivity of the medal itself. To do. The main control means 100 detects that the stored medal has reached the upper limit by detecting this conduction. Note that the number of the rod-shaped electrodes shown in FIG. 3 is two near the opening K and one near the bottom, but the number is not limited to this. There may be a total of two near one, or two near the opening K and two near the bottom.

<Main control board case>
Next, the external appearance of the main control board case 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (a) is a front view of the main control board case 102, FIG. 6 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 6 (c) is a cross-sectional view. 4 is a perspective view of a main control board case 102. FIG.

  In FIG. 6A, the protrusion 104a formed on the right side of the front surface is engaged with the claws formed on the bracket 16 (see FIG. 3) fixed to the back plate of the main body 12 (or in the mounting hole). In the inserted state, the fixtures 105a and 105b (see FIG. 6C) provided on the left side of the main control board case 102 are pushed into the bracket 16 side. As a result, the tips of the fixtures 105 a and 105 b are fitted into mounting holes (not shown) provided in the bracket 16, and the main control board case 102 is temporarily fixed to the bracket 16. In other words, the bracket 16 is a support portion when the main control board case 102 is attached to the slot machine 10.

  The main control board case 102 is composed of a case main body 102a made of a transparent plastic member and a case lid body 102b. As shown in FIG. 6B, the main control board 101 is accommodated therein. Further, on the front surface of the main control board case 102, a display window YM of the role ratio monitor 103 to be described later and an area to which a caulking use recording seal 108 is attached are formed. The display window YM is a recess formed at the installation position (mounting position) of the role ratio monitor 103, and the bottom surface of the recess is rectangular. This is because the display surface of the role monitor 103 and the surface of the main control board case 102 are brought as close as possible, so that when the display of the role monitor 103 is visually recognized, extraneous light is exposed to the surface of the main control board case 102. This is to prevent the display of the role ratio monitor 103 from being reflected and being difficult to see.

  However, if the distance between the display window YM and the display screen of the role ratio monitor 103 is too small, the role ratio monitor 103 is broken by an illegal action (for example, the display window YM of the main control board case 102 is pushed). There is a risk that the main control board case 102 may be charged with static electricity due to fraud, and the role monitor 103 may be adversely affected. For this reason, it is desirable that the distance between the display window YM and the display surface of the role ratio monitor 103 is 0.5 mm at the minimum. The horizontal dimension of the display window YM is preferably wider by 1 mm on the left and right with respect to the lateral width of the role ratio monitor 103. This is because if the horizontal dimension is the same as the horizontal width of the role ratio monitor 103, the display of the role ratio monitor 103 may be difficult to see depending on the angle at which the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the short side wall of the display window YM has a left side wall vertical in the figure, whereas the right side wall A is provided with an inclination θ. Yes. This is because the front right side of the front door 14 is opened because the hinge of the front door 14 is on the left side of the front of the housing, so that the main control board case 102 remains attached to the bracket 16. The role ratio monitor 103 is visually recognized from the front right side of 102. Therefore, by providing the inclination θ on the side wall A, the display of the role monitor 103 can be made difficult to be hidden by the edge c of the display window YM.

  Of course, since the bracket 16 may be in any position, when the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed from the front left side of the main control board case 102 (the bracket 16 is fixed to the left side plate of the main body 12). In this case, it is preferable to provide an inclination on the left side wall, and when the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed from the front upper side or the front lower side of the main control board case 102 (the bracket 16 is below the back plate of the main body 12). Or in the case of being fixed upward), it is preferable to provide an inclination on the upper or lower side wall. Note that one or more (up to four) side walls may be provided with an inclination. Here, the appropriate angle of the inclination θ is desirably a value within a range of 25 degrees to 60 degrees. When the angle is less than 25 degrees, the visibility decreases when the role ratio monitor 103 is confirmed with the front door 14 opened. If the angle exceeds 60 degrees, the description will be made with reference to FIG. 6A. Since the position of the caulking use recording sticker 108 is on the right side, the arrangement position (mounting position) of the microcomputer chip Z1 and the switch monitor ML ) (In order not to be placed (mounted) under the position where the caulking use recording seal 108 is attached).

  In addition, the main control board case 102 is provided with a plurality of caulking housing portions for housing caulking members (not shown). The caulking member is for leaving a trace when the main control board case 102 is opened or the main control board case 102 is removed from the bracket 16. In addition, once the caulking member is accommodated, each caulking housing portion cannot be removed unless the caulking housing portion itself is destroyed. 6A and 6C, the caulking housing portion 107a provided in the case lid body 102b accommodates a caulking member that caulks the case main body 102a and the case lid body 102b of the main control board case 102. Specifically, the case main body 102a is provided with a caulking attachment portion (not shown) for slidingly attaching the caulking member. The caulking member is provided on the case lid 102b after being attached to the caulking attachment portion. When the caulking member is accommodated in the caulking housing portion 107a, the case main body 102a and the case lid body 102b are caulked by the claws formed on the caulking member fitting into the holes formed in the caulking housing portion 107a. Thus, in order to open the main control board case 102 and take out the main control board 101, it is necessary to destroy the caulking housing portion 107a.

  Hereinafter, the caulking member accommodated in the caulking accommodating portion 107a is referred to as caulking member A (not shown). Similarly, the caulking members accommodated in the caulking accommodating portions 107b, 107c, and 107f are caulked member B (not illustrated). That's it.

  The caulking housing portions 107b and 107f (indicated as “B” and “F” in the figure) provided on the case lid 102b accommodate caulking members that caulk the main control board case 102 and the bracket 16. Specifically, the bracket 16 is provided with a caulking attachment portion (not shown) for slidingly attaching the caulking member, and after the caulking member is attached to the caulking attachment portion, the caulking provided on the case lid 102b. When the caulking member is accommodated in the accommodating portions 107b and 107f, the claws formed on the caulking member are fitted into the holes formed in the caulking accommodating portions 107b and 107f, so that the case lid body 102b and the bracket 16 are caulked. .

  Thus, in order to remove the main control board case 102 from the bracket 16, it is necessary to destroy the caulking housing portions 107b and 107f using a tool such as a screwdriver. Further, the caulking housing portion 107c (indicated as “C” in the drawing) provided in the case lid 102b accommodates the caulking member B that is removed when the main control board case 102 is recovered. Therefore, in order to avoid accidentally destroying the role monitor 103 when destroying the caulking housing portion, it is preferable that the role monitor 103 is not mounted in the vicinity of the caulking housing portion. Actually, as shown in FIGS. 6A, 6B, and 6C, the role monitor 103 is not mounted in the vicinity of the caulking housing portion 107a, and the caulking housing portions 107b, 107c, and 107f are not mounted. The main control board side connector CN1 is mounted in the vicinity, and the role monitor 103 is not mounted.

  That is, “the vicinity of the caulking housing portion” means that the distance between the caulking housing portion and the role ratio monitor 103 is too short, and other components (such as the main control board side connector CN1, etc., excluding extremely small components) are excluded. ) Means a state in which no one can be mounted.

  Further, the wire harness of the harness side connector fitted to the main control board side connector CN1 is routed in the direction (left side) of the caulking accommodating portions 107b, 107c, 107f so as not to hide the display of the role monitor 103. (A connector cover may be used) As a result, the visibility of the caulking housing portions 107b, 107c, and 107f is lowered. The fact that the caulking housing portion is destroyed is a serious problem (there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed), so at least the position of the caulking housing portion 107b is set so that the visibility of the caulking member B is not lowered. It is preferable that it is provided above the caulking housing part in the figure. By doing in this way, since the wire harness hangs down by the weight of the wire harness itself, the caulking housing portion 107b cannot be seen.

  Further, in order to leave a history of which caulking housing portion has been used, a caulking use recording seal 108 is affixed to the front surface and substantially the center of the main control board case 102. In the caulking use record sticker 108 shown in FIGS. 6A and 6C, the date and time when the caulking accommodating portion is used and the caulking for each type of caulking accommodating portion (“B”, “C”, “F”). There is an entry field for the name of the person in charge. After the slot machine 10 is manufactured (at the time of factory shipment), the caulking housing portion 107b is used first. The caulking housing part 107b is destroyed at the time of on-site inspection after installation in the game hall, and the caulking housing part 107f is used next after the inspection.

  Although not shown, a seal seal is affixed across the case main body 102a and the case lid 102b of the main control board case 102. The seal seal is covered with a seal seal cover on which the protrusion 104a and the protrusion 104b are formed. This seal seal is for leaving a trace when the main control board case 102 is opened. For example, when the seal sticker is mistakenly attached by the manufacturer, it is malicious. When a person performs an illegal act on the main control board 101, a solvent may be used to peel off the seal. At this time, since the solvent rarely enters the main control board case 102, “solvent danger” indicating the range where the solvent that has entered the case may reach the main control board 101. An "area" is provided. In the present embodiment, as shown by hatching in FIG. 7, the solvent danger area DE is provided on the right side of the microcomputer chip Z <b> 1 mounted on the main control board 101.

<Mounting parts of main control board>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the main components among the components mounted on the main control board 101 housed in the main control board case 102 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, on the main control board 101, a microcomputer chip Z1 (hereinafter also referred to as “microprocessor Z1”), oscillators G1, G2, and a set value display 87 including an 8-segment display, A role monitor 103, a segment driver SD which is a driving IC for various 8-segment displays, and digit drivers DD1 and DD2 are mounted. Various other components such as various ICs, a plurality of resistors R, a capacitor C and a Zener diode ZD, a switch monitor ML for checking on / off of a digital signal, and a main control board side connector CN1 are also mounted. Yes.

  The microcomputer chip Z1 includes a CPU, a ROM (read only memory), an RWM (read / write memory), a random number circuit (random number generation means), a timer circuit (timer count means), an I / O port, and the like. And controls each part of the slot machine 10 based on programs and data stored in the ROM. Hereinafter, when it is simply referred to as CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit or timer circuit, or when it is referred to as CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit or timer circuit of the main control means 100, it is provided in the microcomputer chip Z1. Refers to things. As can be seen from FIGS. 3 and 7, the microcomputer chip Z <b> 1 is mounted on the main control board 101 on the open side (right side in FIGS. 3 and 7) of the front door 14 from the front center of the slot machine 10.

  This is because the role monitor 103 and the main control board side connector CN1 are mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 rather than the front center as will be described later. In other words, many signals output from the microcomputer chip Z1 cannot drive other devices (for example, an 8-segment display) as they are, and most signals are output to an external IC. It is necessary to convert to a signal with specifications (voltage value, current value, etc.) suitable for the device. Therefore, in order to provide a space for mounting a driving IC for the role ratio monitor 103 at least between the microcomputer chip Z1 and the role ratio monitor 103, a distance between the microcomputer chip Z1 and the role ratio monitor 103 is provided. Need to put. Further, the microcomputer chip Z1 is hidden by the above-described caulking use record sticker 108 since it is visually confirmed whether or not the regular microcomputer chip Z1 is mounted after the slot machine 10 is installed in the game hall. It cannot be mounted at the position where it will end up. Therefore, when the microcomputer chip Z1 is to be mounted so as to satisfy these conditions, the opening side of the front door 14 is the optimum position from the front center.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the oscillators G1 and G2 output various clock signals to the microcomputer chip Z1. Specifically, the oscillator G1 generates a random number update clock signal for updating a random number generated in the microcomputer chip Z1, and the oscillator G2 generates a system clock signal for operating the CPU in the microcomputer chip Z1. To do. Note that all random numbers generated in the microcomputer chip Z1 need not be updated based on the update clock signal, but may be performed based on the system clock signal. For example, the random number used for the role lottery is updated based on the random number update clock signal, but the random number used for other lottery may be updated based on the system clock signal. Further, all the random numbers generated in the microcomputer chip Z1 may be updated based on the system clock signal without mounting the oscillator G1. These oscillators G1 and G2 are mounted as close as possible to the microcomputer chip Z1 so as to make it difficult for noise to appear in the output clock signal, and the wiring between the oscillators G1 and G2 and the microcomputer chip Z1 is made as short as possible. Is preferred.

  The switch monitor ML is composed of 20 LEDs, and each LED is turned on or off according to the on / off state of a digital signal (a signal output when the start switch 36 is operated, etc.) associated with the LED. To do. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the components and wirings on the path of each digital signal and the on / off state of the digital signal are normal. Therefore, the switch monitor ML is mounted on the main control board 101 at a position that is not hidden by the caulking use recording seal 108 described above. Moreover, when the light of each LED which comprises switch monitor ML is strong, there exists a possibility that the visibility of the role ratio monitor 103 mentioned later may fall with the light. For this reason, it is preferable not to mount the switch monitor ML near the role monitor 103.

  The term “in the vicinity of the role monitor” here refers to a state where the light of the switch monitor ML reaches the role monitor 103 and / or another component (between the role monitor 103 and the switch monitor ML). However, it is an IC or the like, excluding components that are extremely small (size that cannot block light). The same applies hereinafter.) A state in which no component is mounted (a state in which light is not blocked by another component). . However, the switch monitor ML may be mounted in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103 if there is no risk that the light of the switch monitor ML will deteriorate the visibility of the role ratio monitor 103. In this case, since the display of the role ratio monitor 103 and the switch monitor ML can be simultaneously included in the field of view, for example, it is possible to reduce the trouble of confirming the slot machine 10 installed in the game hall.

The role monitor 103 is provided to make it easier to confirm that the slot machine 10 has not been tampered with after the slot machine 10 is installed. A plurality of information relating to the gaming state is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), it consists of four 8-segment displays, and the 8-segment display of the lower two digits (two on the right side in FIG. 8 (a)) has various ratios ( It is a ratio display part RA that displays a numerical value that represents a value that will be described later, and the upper two digits (two on the left side in FIG. 8A) are the types of ratios displayed on the ratio display part RA ( Hereinafter, it is also an identifier display part ID for displaying “identifier”. The area of the display screen of the role ratio monitor 103 satisfies the relationship of M × N ÷ 4 ≧ 36 mm ² where N is the vertical dimension and M is the horizontal dimension.

  In this way, the role ratio monitor 103 is mounted on the main control board 101 at a position that is not hidden by the above-described caulking use recording sticker 108 so that the display contents can be viewed at any time as necessary. . Further, when the display on the role ratio monitor 103 is visually confirmed, since it is confirmed from the open side of the front door 14 (the right side of the front view of FIG. 7 (the microcomputer chip Z1 side)), the position where the caulking use recording sticker 108 is attached If a role ratio monitor is mounted on the side of this, a part of the display of the role ratio monitor 103 may be hidden behind the caulking use recording sticker 108 depending on the viewing angle. For this reason, it is preferable that the role ratio monitor 103 is mounted away from the position where the caulking use recording seal 108 is attached.

  Note that the appearance of the role ratio monitor 103 shown in FIG. 8A is that four eight segment indicators are arranged in a horizontal row and the identifier display portion ID and the ratio display portion RA are arranged in the horizontal direction. Not limited to this, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, two 8 segment indicators are arranged in two horizontal rows (2 × 2), and the upper two 8 segment indicators are displayed as identifier display units. ID, the lower two eight-segment display may be used as the ratio display RA. In this case, the segment DP on the lower digit side of the two upper eight segment indicators is lit.

  Further, since a main control board side connector CN1 described later is mounted on the hinge side (left side in FIG. 7) of the front door 14 from the center of the main control board 101, the role monitor 103 is also provided accordingly. It is mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 from the center of 101. This is because the wiring of the main control board 101 is efficiently formed. Specifically, the role monitor 103 is mounted on the wiring path between the duty ratio monitor driving IC and the main control board side connector CN1, thereby efficiently improving the wiring path formed on the board. Can do.

  Therefore, the role monitor 103 is preferably mounted in the vicinity of the main control board side connector CN1 and the drive IC for the role monitor. Here, “the vicinity of the main control board side connector CN1 and the drive IC for the ratio monitor” means between the ratio monitor 103 and the main control board side connector CN1, and between the ratio monitor 103 and the ratio. This means a state in which no other IC is mounted between the driving IC for monitoring (however, the resistor R and the capacitor C may be mounted). Further, since the ratio monitor 103 is a reusable component (a component that can be removed and mounted on another main control board), the main monitor should not be exposed to the solvent used when the sealing seal described above is peeled off. On the control board 101, it is mounted outside the solvent danger area.

  When the role monitor 103 cannot secure an area for mounting on the main control board 101, for example, the role monitor 103 itself or a small printed board on which the role monitor 103 is mounted is replaced with the main control board. It may be mounted perpendicular to 101. By doing in this way, while reducing the area | region for mounting the ratio monitor 103, the display content of the ratio monitor 103 can be made hard to see for a player etc. This is because the display does not face the front by mounting vertically. Further, the role ratio monitor 103 may be mounted at a place other than the main control board 101 (inside the casing of the slot machine 10). Further, the duty ratio of the drive signal for turning on the 8-segment display constituting the role ratio monitor 103 may be changed. With this configuration, the brightness of the display of the role ratio monitor 103 can be adjusted, and the display content of the role ratio monitor 103 can be made difficult for the player to see.

  It should be noted that there is a board manufacturer name displayed on the main control board 101 by silk printing, etching, laser marking or the like, which is preferably not in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103 other than the parts. Generally, a board manufacturer name is displayed on the main control board 101 in order to prove that it is not an unauthorized board, and the board manufacturer name is displayed on the main control board 101 at a place with high visibility. It is preferable. Since the main body of the role ratio monitor 103 has a certain height, if the board manufacturer name is displayed near the role ratio monitor 103, it may be hidden by the role ratio monitor 103 depending on the viewing angle. There is a possibility. Therefore, it is preferable that the display of the board manufacturer name is not in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103. In particular, when displaying the name of the board manufacturer by laser marking, it is preferable that the part is not in the vicinity of the role monitor 103 because all parts are mounted after mounting. This is because the role monitor 103 may be broken during laser marking.

  In addition, a plurality of board manufacturers may use a common main control board. In this case, the main control board (different from FIG. 7) displays a plurality of board manufacturer names, and each board manufacturer name can cut off the display of the board manufacturer name other than itself. Specifically, a part of the main control board can be excised, and the name of each board manufacturer is displayed there. Even in such a case, it is preferable that the display of the board manufacturer name is not in the vicinity of the role monitor 103. As a result, when the display of the name of another board manufacturer is removed, the role monitor 103 does not get in the way, and a load is applied to the portion where the role monitor 103 is soldered during the removal. Therefore, the possibility that the role ratio monitor 103 is removed from the substrate can be reduced.

  The set value display 87 is composed of one 8-segment display and is a display for displaying the set value. This set value is used for setting a winning probability of a predetermined combination in a combination lottery to be described later. Generally, six settings from “1” to “6” are possible. Here, when the same 8-segment display is used for the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 108, there is a high possibility that a driving IC for driving these displays is used in common. In such a case, if the set value display 87 is mounted in the vicinity of the role monitor 108, the wiring of the main control board 101 can be efficiently formed. However, in order to avoid misrecognition of display contents by each display device, it is better not to mount the role ratio monitor 103 and the set value display device 87 side by side. “Near the role monitor 108” means a state in which no other IC is mounted between the role monitor 103 and the set value display 87.

  The set value display 87 may be attached to a printed circuit board on which the set value display 87 is mounted on the back side of the front door 14 instead of on the main control board 101, for example. Further, the setting value may be displayed on the credit indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28 shown in FIG.

  As the driving ICs for displaying alphanumeric characters on the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103 and the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28 shown in FIG. 1, the segment driver SD, the digit driver There are DD1 and DD2. The segment driver SD is a driving IC that outputs a driving signal for each of the segments a to g and DP of the 8-segment display that constitutes the various displays described above. Output in parallel to the display. That is, the segment driver SD is used in common by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28.

  The digit driver DD1 is a driving IC that outputs an active signal for making an 8-segment display that performs display out of the four 8-segment displays constituting the role ratio monitor 103 displayable. The digit driver DD2 is an active signal for making the 8-segment display that performs display out of the 8-segment displays constituting the set value display 87, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28 a displayable state. Is a driving IC that outputs. Hereinafter, the drive signal output from the segment driver SD and the active signals output from the digit driver DD1 and the digit driver DD2 are collectively referred to simply as a drive signal.

  In FIG. 7, the main control board side connector CN1 is a connector for outputting drive signals from the segment driver SD and the digit driver DD2 to the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28. Specifically, since the credit number indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28 are mounted on a central display board (not shown) installed on the back surface of the front door 14, they are mounted on the central display board. The main control board side connector CN1 is connected by a wire harness (hereinafter referred to as “harness”) in which a plurality of electric wires are bundled. Of course, the main control board and the relay board may be connected by a harness, and the relay board and the central display board may be connected by a harness.

  A harness side connector is attached to each end of the harness, the harness side connector attached to one end of the harness is fitted to the main control board side connector CN1, and the harness side connector attached to the other end is The connector is fitted to the connector of the central display board provided on the back surface of the front door 14. Then, the harness itself is routed to the hinge side of the front door 14. Therefore, it is desirable that the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 rather than the front center of the main control board 101.

  Further, it is preferable that the main control board side connector CN1 is not mounted above the role monitor 103. That is, since the harness side connector is connected to the main control board side connector CN1, if the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted above the role monitor 103, the hanging harness covers the role monitor 103. There is a risk of being covered. Even when the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted below the role ratio monitor 103, if there is a risk that the loose harness may cover the role ratio monitor 103, the position is at the main control board side. It is preferable not to mount the connector CN1. However, this is not the case when the harness can be routed so as not to cover the role ratio monitor 103 using a connector cover or the like.

(About the contents displayed on the role monitor)
Next, information displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 will be described with reference to FIG. First, the advantageous section ratio is a value representing the ratio of the number of games in the advantageous section with respect to the total number of games as a two-digit percentage, and the identifier is “7U”. As a general rule, the medium-term continuous service ratio is the 2-digit percentage of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special role (so-called RB) out of the number of medals paid out during the last 6000 games. The identifier is “6y”.

  The ratio of medium-period roles is, in principle, during the operation of first-class special bonus, second-class special bonus (so-called CB) and ordinary bonus (so-called SB) out of the number of medals paid out during the last 6000 games. This is a value representing the percentage of the number of medals paid out as a percentage of two digits, and the identifier is “7y”. In the present embodiment, the second type special combination is not mounted. The cumulative consecutive combination ratio is a value representing the percentage of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special character out of the total number of medals paid out in the total number of games. “6A”. Cumulative combination ratio is a two-digit ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of Type 1 Special, Type 2 Special, and Normal types of medals. It is a value expressed as a percentage, and the identifier is “7A”. In the present embodiment, the second type special combination is not mounted.

  Here, when each information is displayed, the segment DP representing the decimal point is turned on in the 8-segment display on the lower digit side of the identifier display section ID. The display mode of the ratio display portion RA shown in FIG. 8 (c) is, for example, an advantageous section ratio (7U) of 70%, an intermediate period combination ratio (6y) of 60%, an intermediate period combination ratio (7y) of 70, The display mode is shown when the cumulative combination ratio (6A) is 60% and the cumulative combination ratio (7A) is 70%. The percentage value displayed on the ratio display RA is a value obtained by rounding down the decimals. When the result of calculating the ratio is 100%, control is performed so that “99” is displayed on the ratio display RA. To do.

  The various types of information described above are cyclically displayed in the order of advantageous period ratio → intermediate period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio, and the display time of each information is 5 seconds (allowable) The difference is ± 10%. Therefore, the display mode of the identifier display part ID changes from “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →. The display unit RA displays the percentage value corresponding to each identifier. Note that the display of the role ratio monitor 103 is started when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (specifically, when a timer interrupt process described later is executed). At the time of shipment from the factory (a situation where no game is played), the display mode of the identifier display unit ID is “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” Control is performed so that “00” is displayed on the ratio display portion RA when “7U.” →.

  Further, when displaying the intermediate period combination ratio and the intermediate period combination ratio, for example, when the total number of games is less than 6000 times, for example, since the day has started, the identifier is displayed. The identifier (“6y”, “7y”) to be displayed in the part ID is blinked. When the advantageous period ratio, the cumulative consecutive combination ratio, and the cumulative combined ratio are displayed, if the total number of games is less than 175,000, identifiers (“7U”, “ 6A "and" 7A ") blink. The blinking display in these cases is that the total time of the lighting period and the extinguishing period is 0.6 seconds (tolerance ± 10%), and the duty ratio of the lighting period is 50%. That is, control is performed so that the lighting period is about 0.3 seconds and the extinguishing period is about 0.3 seconds.

  In addition, since the slot machine 10 is equipped with the continuous action device related to the normal and first type special objects, the medium ratio combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination combination is included in the ratio monitor 103. For example, in a slot machine that is not equipped with a continuous actuating device related to Type 1 Specials, Type 2 Specials, Normals and Type 1 Specials. This information will not exist. In this case, as described above, the identifier displayed on the identifier display section ID changes from “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →. However, the display mode of the ratio display unit RA corresponding to the identifier for which no information exists is “-”. In place of this, it is also possible to prevent display regarding information that does not exist. For example, in the case of a slot machine that is equipped with an ordinary accessory but is not equipped with a continuous action device for the first type special, second type and first type special, The display content of the monitor 103 transitions from “7U.” → “7y.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →..., And only three types of information: advantageous period ratio, medium period ratio, and cumulative ratio May be displayed.

(Regarding the storage area used for the display of the role monitor)
Next, a storage area of an RWM (read / write memory) included in the microcomputer chip Z1 used for calculating information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 will be described with reference to FIG. This RWM is based on the total number of paid-out sheets, the number of paid-out items (type 1 special items, type 2 special items and normal-type paid-out numbers) and the combined number of paid-out types (type 1 special role). Memory for storing 2 bytes of information to store the cumulative value of the number of medals paid out during one set (400 games), with 400 games as one set for each of the number of paid-out items in operation) The area is set for 15 sets. These storage areas for 15 sets function as a ring buffer. That is, counting of various payouts is started, and when the cumulative value from the first set to the 15th set (400 games × 15 sets = 6000 games) is stored, the next set (6001 game to 6400 game) The cumulative value of the number of payouts in () is sequentially stored from the first set.

  For example, when various cumulative values from the first game to the 6000th game are stored from the first set to the 15th set, the cumulative values from the next 6001 game to the 6400 game are stored in the first set, Cumulative values from the 6401 game to the 6800 game are stored in the second set, and so on, starting from the set storing the earliest cumulative value.

  In addition, for each of the total payout number, the item payout number, and the continuous combination payout number, a storage area for storing information of 3 bytes is set to store a cumulative value for 15 sets. Here, in FIG. 8D, the total paid-out 6000 game cumulative value is expressed as a, the 6000 game cumulative value as the combination payout number is expressed as b, and the 6000 game cumulative value as the combined payout number is expressed as c. The accumulated values a to c are updated by calculating the accumulated value of 6000 games every time the accumulated value for one set is obtained (in other words, every 400 games).

  The RWM has a 1-byte storage area for storing the values of the medium-period role ratio and the medium-period role ratio. Each time the cumulative value of 6000 games is updated, the medium-period role ratio (role 6000 game cumulative value b of the physical payout number / 6000 game cumulative value a of the total payout number) and the middle period linkage ratio (6000 game cumulative value c of the combined payout amount c / 6000 game cumulative value a of the total payout number) The values of the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio calculated and stored in each storage area are updated. Thus, the calculation of the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio is a ring buffer consisting of 15 sets, with various accumulated values of 400 games (total number of payouts, number of items paid out, and number of combined payouts) as one set. It is calculated based on the accumulated value of 6000 games stored in.

  As described above, the “latest 6000 games” in the present embodiment is calculated with 400 games as one set. For example, between 6001 games and 6400 games, 1 to 6000 games are the most recent 6000 games. For example, between 6401 games and 6800 games, 401-6400 games are the latest 6000 games. Although 400 games are exemplified as the number of games in one set, any number of games such as 500 games and 1000 games may be used.

  In addition, a storage area for calculating the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio is set in the RWM, in addition to the storage area for calculating the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio described above. First, a 3-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative value is set for each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the combined payout number. The values of the cumulative payout number A, the cumulative prize payout number B, and the cumulative consecutive payout number C are updated every time a medal (game medium) is paid out. Further, based on the values of the cumulative payout number A, the cumulative feature payout number B, and the cumulative continuous feature payout number C, the cumulative role ratio (B / A) and the cumulative continuous role ratio (C / A) are calculated. Are stored in a 1-byte storage area. The values of the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio are calculated and updated every time one set of the number of games (for example, 400 games) is executed.

  Furthermore, a storage area for calculating the advantageous section ratio is set in the RWM. First, in order to count the number of games executed (total number of games) and the number of games executed during the advantageous section (number of advantageous section games), a storage area of 3 bytes is set in each RWM. The values of the total number of games D and the number of advantageous section games E can be updated every time one game is played. In other words, the value of the advantageous section game number E is not updated unless it is in the advantageous section. Further, an advantageous section ratio (E / D) is calculated based on the total game number D and the advantageous section game number E, and the result is stored in a 1-byte storage area. The value of the advantageous section ratio is also calculated and updated every time one game is played.

[Description of symbol and symbol arrangement]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the arrangement of symbols printed on the reel tape attached to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C and 40R will be described. 20 symbols are printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R as shown in FIG. The arrows shown in FIG. 9A indicate that the symbols on each reel scroll in the display window 21 when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are rotating during the game (except during the freezing effect). Shows direction.

  Each symbol on the reel is printed with one symbol in each symbol region divided into 20 equal parts in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, the types of symbols displayed in each symbol area include “white 7” symbols, “blue 7” symbols, and “ “Red 7” design, “Upper half circle” design showing the upper half of the circular design, “Lower half circle” design showing the lower half of the same circular design, and blue plum as motifs "Replay" design, "Bell" design with yellow bell motif, "Blank" design with tree motif, "Watermelon" design with green watermelon motif, and Red cherry motif There is a "cherry" design.

  In addition, symbol numbers “0” to “19” are predetermined in each symbol region of the reel tape attached to each of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, as shown in FIG. A symbol type code corresponding to the symbol number is stored in the ROM of the main control means 100. The symbol number of each reel and the corresponding type code are used when the slot machine 10 recognizes the symbol displayed at each stop display position (upper U, middle M, lower D) of the display window 21 for each reel. Referenced. Each reel tape shown in FIG. 9A shows a state where the symbol numbers “0” and “1” are separated, and the reel tapes are attached to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C and 40R. In this case, the symbols with symbol numbers “0” and “1” are consecutive.

[Description of correspondence between symbol combinations and condition devices]
Next, the correspondence between the symbol combination displayed on the winning line and the condition device when each reel of the symbol arrangement described above stops will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combinations shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 15 illustrate those in which a privilege is given to the player when those symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line. There are three types of benefits given to the player: re-games, winning (medal payout), and bonus games, and predetermined symbol combinations are associated with these privileges. Here, the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 correspond to the symbol combinations of the replaying role (replaying role) that can be given a replay, and the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 are small roles that can be awarded prizes. The symbol combinations shown in FIG. 15 correspond to symbol combinations of bonus combinations that can be given BB games or SB games as bonus games. Here, a bonus combination that can be given a BB game is called a BB combination, and a bonus combination that can be given an SB game is called an SB combination.

  Among the above-mentioned benefits, the re-game is a privilege that allows a game (re-game) to be performed again without inserting medals only for the next game when the corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on the winning line. Winning is a privilege that when a corresponding symbol combination is arranged on the winning line, the number of medals corresponding to the symbol combination is paid out to the player. A BB game (also referred to as a big bonus game) is a privilege that, when corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on a winning line, an RB game advantageous to the player is repeatedly performed from the next game until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. . That is, the accessory continuous operation apparatus according to the first type special accessory operates. The SB game (single bonus game) is a privilege that increases the possibility that a small role will win in the next game when corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on the winning line. That is, a normal accessory operates. Hereinafter, a game other than the BB game and the SB game is referred to as a normal game.

  An RB game executed during a BB game is a game in which a small role wins with a very high probability, and a predetermined number of winnings or an RB game starts within a number not exceeding eight times during an RB game. The game ends when a predetermined number of games are played out of the number of games not exceeding 12 games. In the slot machine 10, there are two types of RB games, RB-A games and RB-B games. The RB-A game and the RB-B game differ in the number of payouts when a small combination wins and the types of small combinations that can be won. When the RB game ends, if the BB game end condition is not satisfied, the RB game starts as it is from the next game. Note that when the BB game end condition is satisfied during the RB game, the RB game and the BB game are ended even during the RB game.

  In the following, in the case of representing a symbol combination, the symbol names in each reel are described in the order of left reel, middle reel, and right reel, and are enclosed in square brackets. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 01 shown in FIG.

  Each of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 10 to 15 is associated with a condition device. The condition device is a device that is regarded as a necessary condition for aligning the associated symbol combination on the winning line. When the conditional device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device is aligned on the winning line. Is possible. Which condition device is activated is determined by a lottery drawing described later. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, there are 16 condition devices related to the re-gamer, and “re-game 01” to “re-game 16”, and one or more symbol combinations correspond to each condition device. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, there are 20 condition devices related to the small combination, “winning 01” to “winning 20”. Like the re-playing combination, one or more symbols are provided for each conditional device. The combination corresponds. Here, in the “payout number” column of FIGS. 12 to 14, “a” is the number of payouts during normal game and SB game, “a” is the number of payouts during RB-A game, and “c” is RB -B indicates the number of payouts during game play. As a result, when the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 01, winning 02 or winning 13 are prepared, 12 medals are paid out during normal game, SB game or RB-B game, but RB- In the case of A game, 7 medals will be paid out.

  In contrast, when the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 05, winning 11 or winning 12 are prepared, three medals are paid out during normal game, SB game, or RB-B game. If the RB-A game is in progress, 7 medals will be paid out. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to winning 03 or winning 04 is prepared, three medals are paid out regardless of the type of game, and when the symbol combination corresponding to winning 06 to winning 10 is prepared, One medal is paid out regardless of the type. Furthermore, there is a possibility that winnings 14 to 19 may be won only during the RB-A game, and when the corresponding symbol combinations are prepared, seven medals are paid out. The winning 20 may be won only during the RB-B game, and 12 medals are paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the condition device related to the bonus combination is a condition device related to six BB combinations “1BB-A” to “1BB-F” and a condition device related to one SB combination “SB”. There is. When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-A are prepared, a BB game called 1BB-A game is started from the next game. During the 1BB-A game, the RB-A game is continuously executed. When the number of medals paid out during the 1BB-A game exceeds 84, the 1BB-A game ends. More specifically, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-A is prepared, the RB-A game is started from the next game, and when the small role is won twice or two games are performed during the RB-A game, The RB-A game ends. At that time, if the end condition for the 1BB-A game is not satisfied, the RB-A game is started in the next game. Thus, the RB-A game is repeatedly performed, and when the number of medals paid out during this time exceeds 84, the 1BB-A game is ended.

  When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-B are prepared, 1BB-B game is started from the next game. During the 1BB-B game, the RB-B game is continuously executed, and when the number of medals paid out during the 1BB-B game exceeds 348, the 1BB-B game ends. Here, in the RB-B game, as in the RB-A game, the end condition is satisfied when the small role wins twice or two games are played. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B is prepared, the RB-B game is started from the next game, and when the small role wins twice or two games are played during the RB-B game, the RB-B The game ends. At that time, if the end condition for the 1BB-B game is not satisfied, the RB-B game is started in the next game. In this way, the RB-B game is repeatedly performed. When the number of medals paid out during this time exceeds 348, the 1BB-B game is ended.

  When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-C to F are prepared, one of the 1BB-C to F games is started from the next game in accordance with the aligned symbol combinations. During 1BB-C to F games, RB-B games are continuously executed in the same way as 1BB-B games. However, if the number of medals paid out during 1BB-C to F games exceeds 60, 1BB -CF game ends. When the symbol combinations corresponding to SB are prepared, the SB game is started only for the next game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by providing six types of condition devices related to 1BB, even if, for example, a so-called reach eye is displayed and a player is perceived to win a bonus combination, the player can focus on a specific bonus combination. You can avoid it. On the other hand, if there are few types of condition devices related to 1BB, for example, when a strong impact such as a continuous performance is performed when a bonus combination is won, there is a high possibility that the bonus combination will win in the middle of the continuous presentation. Thus, if the bonus combination wins before the end of the continuous production, the interest of the game will be impaired. Therefore, it is preferable that the number of condition devices related to 1BB is larger than the maximum number of games of continuous effects.

[Description of control means]
Next, control means for controlling the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the functional block diagram shown in FIG. The control means of the slot machine 10 includes a main control means 100 that controls the progress of the game and a sub-control means 200 that controls the execution of the game effects. The main control means 100 performs control to advance the game in accordance with the player's operation, and the sub-control means 200 performs the effects executed as the game progresses based on the information transmitted from the main control means 100. Controls notification of various information. Note that transmission of information exchanged between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 is limited to one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200. No information is sent directly to 100.

≪Description of main control means≫
<Main control means and peripheral hardware configuration>
The main control means 100 is realized by the main control board 101 shown in FIG. Here, the CPU included in the microcomputer chip Z1 includes an accumulator (A register) for performing an operation, a plurality of general-purpose registers (B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, and Q register) And a flag register. Each of these registers is composed of 1 byte (8 bits). Of the general-purpose registers, the B and C registers, the D and E registers, and the H and L registers can be used as a pair of 16-bit (2-byte) registers, respectively. When two general purpose registers are used in pairs, two alphabets representing each register are described together. For example, when an H register and an L register are used as a pair, they are expressed as an HL register.

  The flag register is a flag in which each bit indicates a state related to the calculation result by the CPU. The flag register of the present embodiment includes a carry flag, a zero flag, and a second zero flag. Here, the carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry occurs when an operation (addition) is performed and when a carry occurs when an operation (subtraction) is performed. The zero flag is a flag that becomes “1” when the calculation result becomes “0”. The second zero flag is a flag that becomes “1” when the zero flag becomes “1” and when a predetermined operation (LD instruction) is performed.

  As described above, the microcomputer chip Z1 has a CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit and timer circuit, I / O port, and the like. The random number circuit updates the random number used when performing various lotteries based on the clock signal supplied from the oscillator G1 in FIG. 7, and the timer circuit is based on the clock signal supplied from the oscillator G2 in FIG. Generate an interrupt request signal. The I / O port includes an operation means 300, various lamps and indicators, stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R, cylinder sensors 43L, 43C, 43R, a door switch 44, a blocker 45, a hopper motor 46, a payout sensor 47a, 47b, the insertion sensors 48a and 48b, the medal passage sensor 49, and the external concentrated terminal board 86 are output with respect to the components, and the signals from the components are input. The various lamps and indicators include, for example, a set value indicator 87 and a role ratio monitor 103 mounted on the main control board 101 in addition to those shown in FIG.

  The stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R rotate or stop the corresponding reels 40L, 40C, and 40R according to the excitation signal output from the main control unit 100. The rotation sensors 43L, 43C, and 43R are provided corresponding to the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, respectively. When an index (a member to be detected) provided at the reference position of the corresponding reel is detected, the detection signal is output. Output to the main control means 100. As a result, the main control means 100 counts the number of steps of the stepping motor with reference to the detected position of the index, and determines the reel rotation position (and consequently the symbol displayed in the display window 21) based on the count value. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the stepping motor drive control is performed by the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the number of steps of the stepping motor may be counted based on the number of executions of the timer interrupt process. For example, in this embodiment, when the stepping motor is rotating at a constant speed, the stepping motor is rotated by one step each time the timer interrupt process is executed once. Therefore, if the count value of the number of executions of the timer interrupt process is cleared every time the above-described reference position is detected, the number of executions of the timer interrupt process will be different from the reference position when the stepping motor is rotating at a constant speed. It becomes the same value as the number of steps.

  The hopper motor 46 is provided in the hopper 83 (see FIG. 5), and discharges the medals in the medal storage part 83a from the medal payout opening 60 according to the drive signal output from the main control means 100. The payout sensors 47 a and 47 b detect medals paid out when the hopper motor 46 is driven, and output a detection signal to the main control means 100. The blocker 45 is installed in the selector 80 (see FIG. 3), and forms or releases a medal flow path in accordance with an on / off signal from the main control means 100. When the blocker 45 is on, a medal flow path is formed, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 are stored in the medal storage portion 83a of the hopper 83. On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is off, no medal flow path is formed, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 are discharged from the medal payout opening 60. The door switch 44 detects opening / closing of the front door 14 and outputs a detection signal to the main control means 100.

  The external concentrated terminal board 86 relays various signals output from the main control means 100 to an external game information display device or an external device such as a so-called hall computer, as to information relating to the game currently being played by the slot machine 10. To do. Here, the signal output from the external concentration terminal board 86 includes a medal insertion signal for outputting the same number of pulse signals as the number of bets bet on the game based on the operation of the start switch 36, The medal payout signal that outputs the same number of pulse signals as the number of medals paid out based on the winning of the winning combination, the BB signal that is turned on during the BB game, and the advantage that is turned on during the advantageous section described later There are section signals. Instead of the advantageous section signal, it may be an ART signal that is turned on during ART.

  The external concentrated terminal board 86 is provided with a relay circuit for each signal to be output, and the on / off state of the corresponding signal is switched by opening and closing the relay circuit. For example, a photocoupler is used instead of the relay circuit. May be.

  The operation means 300 includes the power switch 82a, the key switch 82b, and the setting / reset switch 82c shown in FIG. 3 in addition to the various switches provided on the front door of the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. The power switch 82 a is a switch for turning on / off the power supplied to each device in the slot machine 10. The key switch 82b has a key hole, and is a switch that is turned on or off by rotating a setting change key (setting key) inserted into the key hole. The setting / reset switch 82c is a push button type switch that is operated when an error is detected, when the error is canceled (reset), or when the setting value is changed during the setting change. Here, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated during the setting change, it is possible to change the value displayed on the setting value display 87 without changing the setting value data described later. It is. By the way, after the power switch 82a is turned off, the setting change key (setting key) inserted into the keyhole of the key switch 82b is rotated to turn the power switch 82a on in the on state. The setting is being changed.

  In this case, data at address F011 (acquired number display data; see FIG. 36) is used as a storage area to be displayed on the set value display 87. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated during the setting change, the information stored in the address F011 is updated, and the information corresponding to the information stored in the address F011 by the operation of the start switch 36 is updated to the address F000 ( Setting value data (see FIG. 36) can be stored. Note that information corresponding to the information stored in the address F011 can be stored in the address F000 based on the fact that the key switch 82b is turned off instead of the operation of the start switch 36.

  Here, when the data at the address F011 is used, the acquired number display 28 is more preferable than the set value display 87 as a display for displaying the set value. This is because the address F011 is a storage area for storing data for displaying the acquired number, stop switch operation mode (instruction number), and error type (error code) on the acquired number display 28. Therefore, during normal times (except when the setting is being changed or setting confirmation to be described later), information for displaying the number of acquired images, the operation mode of the stop switch, and the type of error is stored in the address F011, and the setting is being changed or set. Since the information for displaying the set value is stored during the confirmation, the address of the RWM can also be used. When the acquired number display 28 is also used as a display for displaying the set value, the set value display 87 is not necessary as a display for displaying the set value, and the cost can be reduced. The address F011 is given as an example of the storage area to be displayed on the setting value display 87, but another address may be used. In the present embodiment, the reset and the change of the set value are made possible by one push button type switch, but the reset and the change of the set value may be made possible by separate switches.

<Functional blocks of main control means>
The main control means 100 includes a winning combination determining means 110, a reel control means 115, a lottery state control means 120, a game section control means 125, a freeze control means 130, a notification game control means 140, and a hand ratio monitor control. Means 145, winning determination means 150, abnormality detection means 155, LED display control means 160, control command transmission means 165, and external signal transmission means 170 are included. The function of each means described below is realized by the CPU provided in the microcomputer chip Z1 executing a control program stored in the ROM.

(Explanation of the winning role determination means)
The winning combination determining means 110 determines the winning combination by lottery (role lottery) based on random numbers (numeric range: 0 to 65535) generated by the random number generating means included in the main control means 100. The determined winning combination is also referred to as “the lottery result based on the winning combination determination means” or “the result of the lottery”. FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show a list of types of winning combinations (in other words, lottery targets for the role lottery). Here, FIG. 17 shows the types of winning combinations that do not include a bonus combination, and FIG. 18 shows the types of winning combinations that include a bonus combination. In addition, the list shown in FIG. 17 also shows the types of condition devices that operate when each winning combination is determined.

  17 and 18, W is a winning number, A is a winning / replaying winning number, B is an effect group number, and Y is a winning feature winning number (only in FIG. 18). The winning / replay winning number indicates the winning number of the small role or replaying role, and the winning feature winning number indicates the winning number of the bonus role. The winning number W is assigned 1 to 47 for the winning combination in FIG. 17 that does not include the bonus combination, and the serial numbers 48 to 88 are allocated to the winning combination in FIG. 18 that includes the bonus combination. ing. In the winning lottery, first, a winning number is determined, and based on the determined winning number, a winning / replay winning number A (and a winning feature winning number Y for the winning combination shown in FIG. 18) is determined. For the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination shown in FIG. 17, the winning number W and the winning / replay winning number A have the same value. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, the effect group number B is associated with each winning / replaying winning number A.

  When the winning number is determined by the winning combination determining means 110, a winning / replay winning number A, a winning combination winning number Y, and an effect group number B are determined based on the determined winning number. The winning combination winning number Y and the effect group number B are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as information indicating the result of the winning lottery.

  Here, each of the winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 (replaying-A1 to A6) is associated with the production group number 1, and winning / replaying winning numbers 24 to 29 (winning -A1 to A1). A production group number 19 is associated with A6). This means that when any of winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 is determined in the role lottery, the push combination in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the specific condition device are aligned according to the determined winning / replay winning numbers. This is because they are different. More specifically, when the stop switch is operated in a specific push order, the symbol combinations corresponding to the specific condition device are prepared, and when the stop switch is operated in a push order other than the specific push order, the specific condition is set. The reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the condition devices other than the device are aligned. When a symbol combination corresponding to a specific condition device is prepared, many medals are paid out, or a state advantageous to the player is maintained.

  For this reason, for example, when the winning / replaying winning number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as it is, if the winning / replaying winning number is acquired by some fraudulent act, the symbol combination corresponding to the specific condition device is obtained from that value. It becomes possible to discriminate the pressing order in which they are aligned (hereinafter also referred to as “an advantageous pressing order”). For this reason, in order not to be able to determine an advantageous pressing order, the effect control group number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 instead of the winning / replay winning number, and the winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 are transmitted. On the other hand, the production group number 1 having the same value is associated. For the same reason, the same effect group number 19 is associated with the winning / replay winning numbers 24 to 29. There are other winning / replay winning numbers that have different symbol combinations corresponding to different condition devices depending on the pressing order, but they are operated in a specific pressing order and in a pressing order other than a specific pressing order. The number of medals to be paid out is not different from the time of being played, and one does not maintain an advantageous state and the other does not maintain an advantageous state. There is no need to associate group numbers.

  17 and 18 show the presence or absence of a setting difference for each winning combination. Here, for a winning combination whose winning probability changes between the set values 1 to 6, the setting difference is described as “present”, and for a winning combination whose setting probability is constant (does not change) between the setting values 1 to 6. The difference is marked as “none”.

  In FIG. 17, for each of the winning numbers 1 to 23 (winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 23) related to the replaying combination, any of the condition devices of the replays 01 to 16 shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. Are associated, and when the winning lottery is determined to be one of the winning numbers 1 to 23, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning combination is activated. For example, when winning number 11 (winning / replay winning number 11) is determined, re-game-D1 (double replay 5) is won, and replays 01, 02, 05, 07, 09 One condition device is activated. Thereby, according to the operation of the stop switch by the player, the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the activated condition devices are arranged.

  In addition, any of the winning devices 01 to 20 shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is associated with each of the winning numbers 24 to 47 (winning / replay winning numbers 24 to 47) related to the small role. If the winning number is determined as one of the winning numbers 24 to 47 in the winning lottery, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning combination is activated.

  The winning / replay winning number 30 (common bell A) and the winning / replay winning number 31 (common bell B) are provided for the winning number 31 and the winning number 62 (winning / replaying) that have different settings. By providing a game winning number 31), it is possible to make a great change in the ease of paying out medals (the ease of operation of winning 01 (payout of 12 medals)) according to the set value. At the same time, by providing a winning number 61 with no setting difference (the winning / replaying winning number 30 is determined), this can be used as an opportunity for an advantageous section shift lottery or the like (a winning number with a setting difference). 31 and winning number 62 cannot be used as a trigger).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reel stop control is the same regardless of whether the winning number 31, the winning number 62, or the winning number 61 is determined (the winning 01 is always aligned). . By doing so, it is impossible to specify which winning number has been determined in the game with the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01, so that the advantageous section transition lottery or the like may have been performed in the game. You can have the expectation that you can't.

  Next, in FIG. 18, for the winning numbers 48 to 88 including the bonus combination, any of the bonus combination condition devices shown in FIG. 15 is associated with a part of the winning combination shown in FIG. However, only the bonus combination is associated with the winning numbers 48, 57, 68, 73, 78, 83, 88. Thereby, for example, when the winning number 48 is determined by the lottery drawing, only the 1BB-A condition device operates. On the other hand, for example, when the winning number 49 is determined, the condition device of 1BB-A and the operating devices of the replays 01 and 02 (see the winning / replaying winning number 16 of FIG. 17) are operated. In addition, when any of the winning numbers including the bonus combination (excluding the SB combination) is determined and the condition device for the bonus combination is activated, the next combination until the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device for the bonus combination is completed. After this game, the bonus condition device continues to operate. This state is referred to as “inside” or “during bonus carryover”. When the re-game combination, small combination and SB combination condition devices are activated, the operation state is ended at least before the next game is started.

  The list of FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 shows all the winning combinations that can be the target of the lottery by the winning unit determining means 110. Among these winning combinations, the types of the winning combinations that are the targets of the lottery (In other words, the type of the winning number) and the winning probability of each winning combination vary depending on the lottery status. In the slot machine 10, there are four lottery states in the normal game: non-RT (RT0), RT1, RT2, and RT3, and in the lottery state in the bonus game, 1BB-A game (RB-A game), 1BB- There are two types of BF games (RB-B games), and there are six lottery states in total.

  Next, with reference to the combination lottery tables shown in FIG. 19 to FIG. 26, the types of winning combinations and winning probabilities that are the targets of the combination lottery in each lottery state will be described. 19 is a role lottery table used in non-RT, FIGS. 20 and 21 are role lottery tables used in RT1, FIGS. 22 and 23 are role lottery tables used in RT2, and FIG. 24 is used in RT3. FIG. 25 shows a role lottery table used during 1BB-A games (strictly speaking, during RB-A games) and 1BB-B to F games (strictly speaking, during RB-B games). The contents are shown. FIG. 26 is a combination lottery table used in the SB game that is started when the SB combination wins in the non-RT, RT1, and RT2.

  The role lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 26 are random numbers that are determined to be winning for each winning combination among the random number values 0 to 65535 (also referred to as random number values: 65536) generated by the random number circuit of the microcomputer chip Z1. (Hereinafter also referred to as “numerical number”). Thus, a value obtained by dividing the number corresponding to the winning combination by 65536 is the winning probability of the winning combination. As a result of the lottery, if any winning combination is not won, the game is lost and the winning number is 0. Each combination lottery table shows numbers in settings 1 to 6, but selection of these settings is performed by the key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c shown in FIG. Note that the selected and selected set values are displayed numerically on the set value display 87 shown in FIG.

  In the non-RT, as shown in the role lottery table of FIG. 19, the winning numbers 16, 20-22, 24-29, 31, 33, and 35 are subject to lottery for the winning combinations that do not include the bonus combination. For winning combinations that do not include a combination, winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery. In RT1, the winning numbers 1-15, 18, 20-22, 24-29, 31, 33, and 35 are selected for the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination as shown in the combination lottery tables of FIGS. As for the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination, the winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery.

  In RT2, the winning numbers 1 to 6, 18 to 22, 24 to 29, 31, 33, and 35 are selected for the winning combination not including the bonus combination as shown in the combination lottery tables of FIGS. For winning combinations that do not include a bonus combination, winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery. In RT3, as shown in the winning lottery table of FIG. 24, winning numbers 16, 17, 20 to 22, and 24 to 36 that are winning combinations that do not include a bonus winning combination are subject to lottery.

  As described above, during the 1BB-A game, the RB-A game is continuously performed until the end condition is satisfied, and during the 1BB-B to F games, the RB-B game is continuously performed. Accordingly, during the 1BB-A game (in the RB-A game), any one of the winning numbers 37 to 46 is always determined as shown in the role lottery table in FIG. In addition, during the 1BB-B to F games (in the RB-B game), the winning number 47 is always determined as shown in the role lottery table in FIG.

  If the SB combination wins in non-RT, RT1, and RT2, the next game becomes the SB game. During the SB game, as shown in the role lottery table of FIG. 26, the role lottery with the same contents as the role lottery table used during the non-RT shown in FIG. 19 is performed. More specifically, the number of winning numbers 33 (common three bells B) in the winning lottery table of FIG. 26 is “2” larger in each set value than the winning lottery table of FIG.

  As shown in each of the lottery tables of FIGS. 19 to 26, the same lottery is performed during non-RT and during the SB game. In RT1 and RT2, the types of re-game players to be drawn Although both are partially different, the combined winning probability of the replaying combination is the same value (about 1 / 1.378 to about 1 / 1.354. However, the winning probability of the replaying combination winning simultaneously with the bonus combination is excluded.) It becomes extremely high and the probability of losing is extremely reduced, which can be said to be an advantageous state for the player. Further, the combined winning probability of the re-playing combination and the small combination in RT3 is set higher than the combined winning probability of the non-RT. During the 1BB-A game (RB-A game) and during the 1BB-B to F games (RB-B game), the small role is always won in both games, which is advantageous to the player. .

  When a winning lottery is performed by the winning combination determining means 100 and one winning number is determined, a winning / replay winning number and an effect group number (for the winning numbers 48 to 88, the winning items are determined based on the determined winning number). The winning number is also determined, and the winning combination number, winning / replay winning number, and effect group number are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RWM of the main control means 100. Then, the winning combination winning number and the effect group number stored in the RWM are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as information indicating the result of the winning lottery.

(Description of reel control means)
The reel control means 115 drives and controls stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R that rotate / stop the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. Thereby, the rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R is started based on the operation of the start switch 36 by the player, and after the rotation speeds of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R reach the above-described constant speed, Maintain speed. When any of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (more precisely, the stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop switch.

  The reel control means 115 stops the rotation of the corresponding reel within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch is operated. As a result, when the reels with 20 symbols provided on each reel as in this embodiment are stopped from rotating at a constant speed (80 rotations / minute) within 190 milliseconds, the rotation is 80 (rotation). / 60 (seconds) × 0.19 (seconds) × 20 (design) = approximately 5.067 The reel is stopped until the design is rotated. However, the reel control means 115 does not stop the symbol passing the stop display position (hereinafter referred to as “winning stop position”) related to the winning line when the stop switch is operated at the winning stop position. Control the stepping motor.

  Therefore, when the stop operation is performed, any one of the symbols from one symbol upstream of the symbols passing the winning stop position to four symbols upstream is set as the winning stop position. Can be stopped. Here, the range of “from the symbol positioned upstream one of the symbols passing the winning stop position to the symbol positioned four upstream when the stop operation is performed” is also referred to as “stop control range”. Say.

  When any winning number is determined by the winning combination determining unit 110, the reel control unit 115 stops the rotation of the reel so that the winning combination corresponding to the winning number stops on the winning line L ( So-called pull-in control). However, when the symbol constituting the winning symbol combination is not within the stop control range, the reels are stopped so as to prevent a winning other than the winning symbol from winning (so-called kicking control is performed).

  10 to 15, for example, for the symbol combination “Bell-Replay-Bell” of the replay 01, a winning line is always required due to the symbol arrangement and stop control range of each reel shown in FIG. There is no so-called “missing out” because it can be aligned at the top. On the other hand, for example, for the symbol combination “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” of 1BB-A, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the “blue 7” symbol does not exist in the stop control range, the winning is stopped. The “blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped at the position, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-A cannot be aligned, and it will be missed.

  For example, among the symbol combinations of the replay 12, the “blank” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol in the middle reel cannot be stopped at the winning stop position depending on the timing of the stop operation when viewed as individual symbols. However, in the middle reel, considering the arrangement interval between the “watermelon” symbols and the symbol interval from the “blank” symbol to the “watermelon” symbol, the “blank” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol are used regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Any of the symbols can be stopped at the winning stop position. Therefore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the replays 12 ("bell-blank-bell" or "bell-watermelon-bell") can always be aligned.

  Moreover, the reel control means 115 changes the symbol combination which performs pull-in control according to the pressing order of the stop switch for a predetermined winning combination. Specifically, when any of the winning numbers 1 to 6 (push order lips 1 to 6) is determined, and the stop operation is performed in a specific push order, the pull-in control such that the symbol combinations of the replay 01 are aligned. However, when a stop operation is performed in the other pressing order, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the replays 03 or 04 are aligned. The specific push order is left → middle → right when replay-A1 is determined, left → right → middle when replay−A2 is determined, and middle when replay−A3 is determined → Left → Right, Middle → Right → Left when Replay-A4 is determined, Right → Left → Medium when Replay−A5 is determined, Right → Middle → When Replay−A6 is determined Left.

  In addition, when any of the winning numbers 7 to 15 (double replays 1 to 9) is determined, when the left stop switch 37L is first stopped, the symbol combination of the replay 01 and the middle stop switch 37C are the first. When the stop operation is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the replay 02 are aligned. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the condition devices corresponding to the winning number are aligned.

  Specifically, when the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 7 (double replay 1) is determined, any one of the replays 02, 05, or 06 depending on the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that these symbol combinations are aligned. If the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 8 (double replay 2) is determined, the symbol combination of any of the replays 02, 05, or 06 is selected depending on the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that they are aligned. When the winning number 9 (double replay 3) is determined, the pull-in control is performed so that any combination of symbols of the replays 02, 05, or 09 is arranged according to the timing of the stop operation.

  Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 05 is controlled when the winning number 7 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When the drawing control is performed on the odd number of the symbol combinations of the replay 05 shown in FIG. 10 and the drawing combination of the symbol combination of the replay 05 is controlled when the winning number 8 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for a symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 05 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 9 (double replay 3) or the winning number 11 (double replay 5) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 07, or 09 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 07 is controlled when the winning number 9 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper half circle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When drawing-in control is performed on the odd number among the symbol combinations of the replay 07 shown in FIG. 10 and the drawing combination of the symbol combination of the replay 07 is controlled when the winning number 11 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for the symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 07 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 10 (double replay 4) or the winning number 12 (double replay 6) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 08, or 09 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 08 is controlled when the winning number 10 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper half circle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When drawing-in control is performed for the recombination 08 number 1 symbol combination shown in Fig. 10 and the re-gaming 08 symbol combination is drawn in when the winning number 12 is determined, the right reel winning stop position (lower D) ) For the symbol combination (the second symbol combination of the replay 08 shown in FIG. 10) for which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed.

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 13 (double replay 7) or the winning number 14 (double replay 8) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 09, or 10 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 10 is controlled when the winning number 13 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When the drawing control is performed for the symbol combination of the replay 10 shown in Fig. 10 and the symbol combination of the replay 10 is controlled when the winning number 14 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for a symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 10 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower half circle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  In addition, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 15 (double replay 9) is determined, any one of the replays 02, 09, 10 or 11 depending on the timing of the stop operation Pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations are aligned. Here, in the case of drawing-in control of the symbol combination of the replay 10, the symbol combination in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (the symbol combination of the replay 10 shown in FIG. 10). Pull-in control is performed for an even number among these.

  In addition, when any of the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) is determined, when a stop operation is performed in a specific push order, only the first stop operation matches the specific push order, and The symbol combination that is the target of the pull-in control is different when the first stop operation does not coincide with the specific pressing order. For example, when the winning number 24 (push order bell 1) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of left → middle → right, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning symbol 01 combination is aligned. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pushing → right → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 03 are aligned. In addition, when the middle stop switch 37C or the right stop switch 37R is first stopped, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning combinations 07 or 08 can be matched.

  When the winning number 25 (push order bell 2) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of left → right → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but left → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from the middle to the right, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 03 are aligned. In addition, when the middle stop switch 37C or the right stop switch 37R is first stopped, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning combinations 07 or 08 can be matched.

  When the winning number 26 (push order bell 3) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 02 are aligned, but middle → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from right to left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prizes 04 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the right stop switch 37R is subjected to the first stop operation, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  When the winning number 27 (push order bell 4) is determined, if the stop operation is performed in the order of middle → right → left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 02 are aligned. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from left to right, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 04 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the right stop switch 37R is subjected to the first stop operation, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  When the winning number 28 (push order bell 5) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of right → left → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but right → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from the middle to the left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 05 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or winning prize 08 are aligned.

  When the winning number 29 (push order bell 6) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of right → middle → left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but the right → When the stop operation is performed in the order of the left-to-middle push-in, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 05 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  Further, when the winning number 37 (two consecutive winning prizes 1) is determined, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prizes 14 are aligned when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is first stopped. When the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed such that the winning combinations 14 or 15 are combined according to the timing of the stopping operation. In addition, when the winning number 38 (two consecutive winning prizes 2) is determined, pull-in control is performed so that when the left stop switch 37L is stopped for the first time, the symbol combinations of the winning prize 14 are aligned, and the middle stop switch 37C is the first stop switch 37C. When the stop operation is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that one of the winning combinations 14, 18 or 19 is matched according to the timing of the stop operation. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning 14 or the winning 15 are aligned according to the timing of the stopping operation.

  Here, when the winning combination 37 is determined and the drawing combination of the winning 15 is to be controlled, the symbol combination in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel (shown in FIG. 10). When the drawing control is performed on the odd number of the winning combination 15) and the winning combination 38 is drawn when the winning number 38 is determined, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set to “ Pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination (even number among the symbol combinations of the winning 15 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  In addition, when winning numbers 39 to 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 3 to 9) are determined, the pull-in control that the symbol combinations of winning 14 are aligned when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is first stopped. I do. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the condition devices corresponding to the winning number are aligned.

  Specifically, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 39 (two consecutive winnings 3) is determined, the symbol combination of winning 05 or winning 14 is selected according to the timing of the stopping operation. Pull-in control. If the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 40 (double winning prize 4) or the winning number 42 (double winning prize 6) is determined, the winning 14 or winning according to the timing of the stop operation Pull-in control of 16 symbol combinations is performed. Here, when drawing-in control of the winning 16 symbol combination when the winning number 40 is determined, the symbol combination (shown in FIG. 10) in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel. When the drawing control is performed on the odd number among the symbol combinations of the winning 16) and the drawing combination of the winning 16 is controlled when the winning number 42 is determined, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set to “ The drawing control is performed for the symbol combination (even number among the symbol combinations of the winning 16 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  When the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 41 (two consecutive winnings 5) is determined, the winning combination of winning 14 or winning 17 is drawn in according to the timing of the stopping operation. Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 43 (double winning award 7) or winning number 44 (double winning award 8) is determined, the winning 14 is made according to the timing of the stop operation. Alternatively, the drawing combination of the winning combination 18 is controlled. Here, when drawing-in control of the symbol combination of the winning 18 when the winning number 41 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel (shown in FIG. 10). When drawing-in control is performed for the winning combination 18 (No. 1 or No. 3 symbol combination), and the winning combination 43 is determined and the drawing combination of the winning 18 is controlled, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set. The drawing-in control is performed for the symbol combination (No. 2 or No. 4 symbol combination shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  When the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 45 (two consecutive winnings 9) is determined, the winning combination 14, 18 or 19 is drawn in according to the timing of the stopping operation.

(Explanation of lottery state control means)
Returning to FIG. 8, the lottery state control means 120 controls the transition of the above-mentioned lottery states (RT0 to RT3, 1BB-A game (RB-A game) and 1BB-B to F game (RB-B game)). . Specifically, the lottery state is managed by the RT state number, the operation state flag, and the operation type. The initial state of the lottery state is RT0 (non-RT). When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in each lottery state, the lottery state is shifted to another lottery state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when any of winning numbers 48 to 87 (that is, 1BB-A to F) is determined in the role lottery at RT0, the process proceeds to RT3 (FIG. 27, FIG. 27). Arrow D). Further, in RT3, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the condition device 1BB-A are prepared, the game moves to the 1BB-A game (RB-A game) (arrow E in the figure), and any of the condition devices 1BB-B to F When the corresponding symbol combinations are complete, the game shifts to 1BB-B to F games (RB-B games) (arrow F in the figure).

  When the end condition of 1BB-A game is satisfied in 1BB-A game (RB-A game) or when the corresponding end condition is satisfied in any of 1BB-B to F games (RB-B game), the process goes to RT2. Transition (arrow G in the figure). In RT2, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replays 09 or 12 are completed, the process proceeds to RT1 (arrow C in the figure). When one of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined in RT1 or RT2, the process proceeds to RT3 (arrow D in the figure), and either SB, replay 03, replay 04, or winning prizes 06 to 08 When the corresponding symbol combinations are complete, the process proceeds to RT0 (arrow B in the figure). In the following, the transition of the arrow C in FIG. 27 is also referred to as “promotion”, and the transition of the arrow B is also referred to as “demotion”.

  In any of the lottery states described above, when the RWM of the main control means 100 is initialized, the routine proceeds to RT0 (arrow A in the figure). Initialization of the RWM of the main control means 100 is executed by turning the power switch 82a from off to on under the condition that the key switch 82b is on. Note that when the initialization of the RWM is completed, the setting value can be changed and setting change is in progress (also referred to as a setting change mode). During the setting change, the set value data can be selected with a value within the range of “0” to “5” based on the operation of the setting / reset switch 82c. Further, during the setting change, after the start switch 36 is operated, the key switch 82b is switched from on to off to end the setting change and shift to a state where the game can be executed. The setting value data can be selected within the range of “0” to “5” by operating the setting / reset switch 82c until the start switch 36 is operated, and the start switch 36 is operated. After that, the set value data cannot be selected even when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated.

Here, the setting value data during the setting change and the display mode by the setting value display 87 will be described with examples.
Example 1) The set value data (address: F000 (H)) is updated by operating the setting / reset switch 82c during setting change. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “0”, the setting value data is set to “1”. If the setting reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “5”, the setting value data is set to “0”. In other words, the setting value data is cyclically updated within the range of “0” to “5” during the setting change.

  At this time, when the set value data is “0”, the data obtained by adding +1 to the set value data when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display is satisfied by the LED display control process by the timer interrupt process described later. As an offset value, an address corresponding to the display mode to be lit is designated using the LED segment table A shown in FIG. Specifically, an operation for adding the offset value to the head address 1211 (H) of the LED segment table A is performed, and the address is designated. Then, the segment to be lit is determined based on the data (segment data) stored at the specified address, and the determined segment data is output from the output port 3 shown in FIG.

Example 2) The set value data (address: F000 (H)) is updated by operating the setting / reset switch 82c during the setting change, and the set value data for display (address: Information of F0XX (H)) is also updated. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “0”, the setting value data is set to “1” and “2” is stored in the display setting value data. If the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is "5", the setting value data is set to "0" and "1" is stored in the display setting value data. Thus, the setting value data is updated cyclically within the range of “0” to “5” during the setting change.

  At this time, when the set value data is “0”, the offset value is displayed from the display set value data when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display is satisfied by the LED display control process by the timer interrupt process described later. The address corresponding to the display mode to be generated (obtained) and to be lit using the LED segment table A shown in FIG. Specifically, an operation for adding the offset value to the head address 1211 (H) of the LED segment table A is performed, and the address is designated. Then, the segment to be lit is determined based on the data (segment data) stored at the designated address, and the determined segment data is output from the output port 3 shown in FIG.

(Description of game section control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the game section control means 125 performs transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and changes (transition) of performance in the advantageous section. Here, the normal section is a section in which the push order of the stop switch cannot be reported (section in which information that can identify an advantageous push order should not be transmitted to the sub-control means 200). This is a section in which the pressing order of the stop switch can be notified (a section in which information that can specify an advantageous pressing order may be transmitted to the sub-control means 200). In addition, in the case of shifting to the advantageous section, the game section control means 125, as a general rule, when any one of the push order bells 1 to 6 is determined, the game order control means 125 has a push order in which the winning combination 01 or winning 02 is arranged at least once. If not notified, no transition to the normal section is made.

  For example, even if it is a specification that shifts to an advantageous section, further shifts to ART in the advantageous section, and moves to the normal section when 50 games are played in the state of ART, winning 01 or winning 02 in the advantageous section As long as it is not notified at least once of the pressing order in which the symbol combinations are aligned, even if 50 games have been played since the transition to ART, the transition to the normal section is not performed. In this case, the state during the ART may be continued as it is, or the state during the ART may be shifted to another state within the advantageous section. This is because there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may be reduced if the player moves to the normal section again without any benefit in spite of the shift to the advantageous section. Conventionally, even if an ART game is started, if the player's luck is bad (if the winning combination that should be notified of the push order is not won), the ART game is finished without informing the push order once. The player's willingness to play has been decreasing.

  However, any of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined during the advantageous section (when any of the winning numbers 48 to 56, 58, 60, 61, 63, 65, 67 is determined, the process proceeds to the advantageous section). If the bonus game (any one of 1BB-A to F games) of the determined winning number has been completed, the push order is notified once in the advantageous section. Even without it, it is possible to shift to the normal section. For example, when a bonus combination is won in the middle of an ART, and the bonus game starts and ends, the push order in which the winning combination 01 or winning 02 is combined is not notified once in the advantageous section. Even so, when the remaining number of games during ART is performed, the state (advantageous section) during ART is terminated. This is because the bonus game provides benefits to the player, so that in such a case, the push order must be notified at least once. It is because there exists a possibility of reducing.

  In addition, even if 1500 games were executed during the advantageous section, none of the push order bells 1 to 6 was determined, so that the push order (instruction number) could not be notified. Even if the push order is not notified once in the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section. This is because even if a player who has played 1500 games in the advantageous section and has not been notified of the push order once, is not able to improve the interest of the game even if the player is notified of the push order once.

  During the stay in the advantageous section, the segment DP (hereinafter also referred to as “advantage section LED”) in the 8-segment display of the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 is turned on. As described above, shifting to advantageously interval, for at least once to press the order of symbol combinations of winning 01 or prize 02 is aligned is informed, which is lit to teach you not leave in stop the player.

  The game section control means 125 controls the transition of the game section and the change (transition) of the performance in the advantageous section. The type of game section (normal section or advantageous section) and the performance of the advantageous section are managed by the game state number. That is, gaming state number 0 is associated with the normal section, and gaming state numbers 1 to 10 are associated with the advantageous section according to performance. The performance of the advantageous section includes “gase high probability” (game state number 1), “high probability” (game state number 2), “gase high probability bonus” (game state number 3), “high probability bonus” ( Game state number 4), “ART in progress” (gaming state number 5), “Additional special zone” (game state number 6), “ART bonus” (game state number 7), “ART return preparation” (game) There are state number 8), “in chance zone” (gaming state number 9), and “ending state” (game state number 10).

  In other words, even when the game hall business hours end in the state of the game state numbers 1 to 10 corresponding to the advantageous sections, the staff of the game hall performs an operation for changing the set value, Since the RWM of the control means 100 is initialized and the RWM address (F021) becomes “0”, the game state number 0 corresponding to the normal section is stored. Moreover, being in any state of the game state numbers 1 to 10 is possible by visually recognizing the advantageous section LED. Therefore, in the next morning, if it is not desired to start operating the game hall from the state in the advantageous section, the staff may confirm the advantageous section LED and perform an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, since the conventional slot machine was not equipped with a lamp corresponding to the advantageous section LED, the staff could not determine whether or not the current state was advantageous for the player, and the same set value was set the next day. Even if the user wants to use it, the RWM of all slot machines is initialized to prevent starting from an advantageous state the next morning. On the other hand, this embodiment is provided with an advantageous section LED, and when the same setting value (setting value data) is desired to be used on the next day, the setting value is changed when the advantageous section LED is turned off. Since it is understood that there is no need to perform the operation, it is possible to save the labor of the staff. In the present embodiment, a function (so-called conventional ceiling function) that shifts to an advantageous section based on the fact that the number of games played in the normal section has reached a specific number of games (eg, 1000 games). Since it is not provided, the advantage for the player does not change even if the game is started from any number of games in the normal section.

  The initial state is a normal section, and when any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined by the lottery in the normal section, the game section control means 125 performs an advantageous section transition lottery. In this advantageous section transition lottery, if the lottery results in a lottery, a high-precision lottery non-winning (hereinafter also referred to as “medium-winning lottery” or “gasse high-winning lottery”) or a high-precision lottery win Will continue to stay in the normal section. In addition, if the high-precision lottery is not won, the next game can be shifted to Gase high-probability (game state number 1) (FIG. 28, arrow a). It is possible to shift from the next game to high probability (game state number 2) (arrow i in the figure).

  Here, the winning combination that triggers the advantageous section shift lottery is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22, but the winning combination with the setting probability 1 to setting 6 (setting value data “0” to “5”) whose winning probability does not change ( In other words, a winning combination with no setting difference can be set as appropriate. Moreover, according to the determined winning number among the winning numbers 20 to 22, the probability of becoming a lost, highly-probable lottery non-winning or highly-probable lottery winning may be varied. For example, when any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 is determined in the role lottery, the winning lottery may be either non-winning high-precision lottery or winning high-winning lottery. The distribution probability with the high-precision lottery winning may be varied according to the determined winning number.

  If you win a winning number with a setting difference that includes one of the prize winning numbers of 1BB-B to F in Gase High Accuracy and win one of the 1BB-B to F, you will receive a bonus (game state) No. 3) can be transferred to (No. 3 in the figure, arrow d), and when the bonus game corresponding to the winning bonus combination is completed, it is possible to move again to the higher accuracy (arrow O in the same figure). In addition, if the winning number including the 1BB-A winning feature winning number is won in Gase High Accuracy and the 1BB-A is won, it is possible to shift to the high probability medium bonus (game state number 4). It may be possible to move into the zone (game state number 9). In addition, if a winning number having no setting difference including a winning combination winning number of 1BB-B is won in Gase Kosei, and it wins that 1BB-B, it becomes possible to shift to a highly probable bonus (game state number 4).

  In addition, when winning at any one of 1BB-A to F with high accuracy, it is possible to shift to the high probability middle game (game state number 4) (arrow D in the figure), and a bonus game corresponding to the winning bonus combination is obtained. When finished, it is possible to move to high accuracy again (the figure, arrow o). For example, if the winning number 16 (Replay A1), which is the winning number with no setting difference in the winning lottery, is determined in the case of the high-risk and high-precision, the falling lottery is performed. (Fig., Arrow c). Here, the winning probability of the falling lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 16 is determined, it may be possible to shift to the normal section without performing the falling lottery.

  Furthermore, the lottery lottery is performed by using the winning number 16 as an example, but the winning number having no setting difference may be used, and the winning number of the falling lottery can be appropriately determined. In addition, as described above, in order to end the advantageous section, in principle, when the maximum payout number is obtained by the operation mode of the player's stop switch during the advantageous section (so-called correct push order operation) When the winning numbers 24 to 29 having a case where the maximum payout number cannot be obtained (so-called incorrect answer pressing order) are won, at least once, a stop switch advantageous to the player The operation mode (so-called correct answer pressing order) is notified.

  This prevents the transition to the normal section without any benefit when shifting to the advantageous section. Therefore, an instructed flag (see FIG. 37, address F022) indicating whether or not the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous for the player is notified is provided. Thus, when the information stored in the instructed flag (address F022) is not information corresponding to “pressing order notified” (pressing order non-notifying), control is performed so that the falling lottery is not executed.

  Even if the falling lottery is executed and the falling lottery is won, the winning result may not be reflected to control the transition to the normal section. In this case, the probability of winning the falling lottery may be lower than the probability determined by the winning numbers 24-29. Or you may make it the probability that the winning number used as the opportunity to perform a falling lottery will be lower than the probability determined by winning numbers 24-29.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning number 16 (replay A1) is determined in high accuracy and high accuracy, the falling lottery is performed, but the winning number 49 (1BB-A + replay A1) is determined. However, the falling lottery is not performed. By the way, when the winning number 49 is determined in the high accuracy and high accuracy, after the end of the 1BB-A game, it becomes highly reliable RT2. During RT2, the winning number 16 is not determined, so no falling lottery is performed. In addition, during RT2, the winning number 19 (replay C) may be determined. When the winning number 19 is determined with high accuracy, the ART lottery is performed as described later. That is, it can be said that the player is pleased that the winning number 49 is determined with high accuracy and high accuracy.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop control is the same when the winning number 16 (replay A1) is determined and when the winning number 49 (1BB-A + replay A1) is determined (always) Replay 01 is prepared). That is, even if the replays 01 are prepared, it is impossible to specify which winning number has been determined.
By doing in this way, even if the replays 01 are prepared with high accuracy and high accuracy, the falling lottery will not necessarily be performed (because the winning number 49 may have been determined), so the expectation (The player's interest does not decrease.)

  In Gase Kosei, if any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined in the role lottery, a promotion lottery will be performed, and if the promotion lottery is won, the next game can be shifted to high accuracy (Figure, arrow F). The winning probability of this promotion lottery may vary depending on the determined winning number, or the winning probability may be set to 100% for one or more winning numbers. Further, instead of setting the winning probability to 100%, it may be possible to shift to high accuracy without performing the promotion lottery. In addition, it is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance items A to C), and if the winning number has no setting difference, it can be appropriately determined as a winning number that triggers the promotion lottery.

  Here, the game section control means 125 can shift to the advantageous section (in the chance zone) when any of the winning numbers 50 to 52 is determined in the normal section. At this time, when the winning numbers 50 to 52 are determined, not the 1BB-A but the symbol combinations corresponding to the chance eyes A to C are stopped and displayed. Then, before the start switch 36 for starting the next game of the game won by the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) and the start of the next game of the game won by the winning numbers 50 to 52 are started. Before the switch 36 is operated, the advantageous section LED is turned on.

  Furthermore, in the next game after winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) are won in the normal section and the advantageous section (gase high accuracy) is transferred, the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) are obtained. The winning lottery (predetermined lottery regarding AT) can be executed by winning. On the other hand, when winning numbers 50 to 52 (1BB-A + chances A to C) are won and the player moves to an advantageous section (in the chance zone), the winning numbers 20 to 22 ( Even if the chance item A to C) is won, the promotion lottery (predetermined lottery regarding AT) is not executed (it is not possible to shift to high accuracy). Here, in the next game in which the winning numbers 50 to 52 are won in the first gaming state (for example, RT0), the winning number is set in the second gaming state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is set higher. Lottery.

  That is, when the winning number 50 is won, the same symbol combination (chance A) as when the winning number 20 is won, and when the winning number 51 is won, the same symbol combination as when the winning number 21 is won. (Chance Eye B) When the winning number 52 is won, the reel is controlled so that the same symbol combination (chance eye C) as when the winning number 22 is won is stopped and displayed, so that the advantage section transition role When the winning number for which the symbol combination is stopped is won, it can be made impossible to grasp whether or not the bonus combination is won. In addition, conventionally, by being configured to be able to give a bonus such as a lottery regarding AT in the game inside the bonus, the player dares to play a game without aligning the symbol combination of the bonus role, etc. There was a possibility that it could become a strategy element, but in the situation where the bonus combination is won (inside), the player does not intentionally arrange the bonus combination by not performing the predetermined lottery regarding AT. It can be avoided.

  In other words, in the next game in which any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 is won, it is possible to give a privilege such as a lottery regarding AT, and the next game in which any of the winning numbers 50 to 52 is won ( In a situation where the symbol combination of the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed (inside the bonus), it is configured so that a privilege such as a lottery regarding AT cannot be given. In addition, when the winning number 19 (Replay C) is determined in the winning lottery, the ART lottery is performed, and if the ART lottery is won, it is possible to shift from the next game to during the ART (gaming state number 5). Yes (the figure, arrow key).

  The winning probability of this ART lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 19 is determined, it may be possible to shift to ART without performing ART lottery. Further, a gaming state such as an ART precursor (not shown) or an ART preparation (not shown) may be provided so that the state can be shifted to ART after passing through these states. In this case, it is necessary to provide a new game state number for managing ART precursors (not shown) and ART preparation (not shown). Note that the winning number is not limited to the winning number 19 and can be determined as a winning number as an opportunity for the ART lottery as long as it is a winning number with no setting difference.

  When a predetermined number of games are played after shifting to ART, it is possible to shift from an advantageous section to a normal section (the arrow in the figure). Here, the initial value of the predetermined number of games (hereinafter also referred to as “ART game number”) is 50 games. During the ART, if any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined in the role lottery, a special zone transfer lottery is performed. ) (In the figure, arrows). The winning probability of the above-mentioned special zone transfer lottery may be varied according to the determined winning number, or the winning probability may be set to 100% for one or more winning numbers. Further, instead of setting the winning probability to 100%, it is possible to add to the special zone without adding the special zone transfer lottery. In addition, it is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C), and can be appropriately determined as a winning number that triggers the special zone transfer lottery as long as there is no setting difference.

  The game section control means 125 performs the extra lottery when any of the winning numbers 7 to 15 (double replays 1 to 9) is determined by the role lottery during the extra special zone, and according to the lottery result, “ART” Increase the number of games. Here, the winning probability of the extra lottery is 0% when the winning number 7 (2 replays 1) is determined, 5% when the winning numbers 8 to 10 (2 replays 2 to 4) are determined, When winning numbers 11 to 13 (double replays 5 to 7) are determined, 25%, and when winning numbers 14 or 15 (double replays 8 and 9) are determined, they are 100%. Further, the number of games to be increased when winning the extra lottery may be varied according to the determined winning number. It should be noted that the number of games to be increased when winning the extra lottery may be determined by the extra game number lottery. Here, the winning probability of the extra lottery may be appropriately determined between 0% and 100%, and is not limited to the exemplified values. The winning number that triggers the extra lottery and the extra game number lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference.

  When 5 games are played after moving into the special zone, the special zone drop lottery is performed every time one of the winning numbers 1 to 6 (push order lip 1 to 6) is determined in the role lottery, If you win, you can move to ART. The winning number that triggers the special zone drop lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference. If you win any of 1BB-A to F during ART or during the specialization zone, you can move to the bonus during ART (gaming state number 7) (arrow D in the figure), corresponding to the winning bonus combination When the bonus game is over, it is possible to shift to ART return preparation (game state number 8) (arrow o in the figure).

  In the ART return preparation, when the winning number 19 (replay C) is determined, the return lottery is performed, and when winning, it is possible to shift to the game state number where the player stayed before playing the bonus game (the arrow in the figure). That is, when shifting from ART to bonus during ART, it is possible to shift to ART, and when shifting from within the specialization zone to bonus during ART, it is possible to shift into the specialization zone. Here, the winning probability of the return lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 19 is determined, it is possible to shift to the game state number where the player stayed before playing the bonus game without performing the return lottery. Note that the winning number that triggers the return lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference.

  In addition, when 1BB-A (winning numbers 48 to 56) is won in the normal section, the game section control means 125 performs an advantageous section shift lottery. In this advantageous section transition lottery, it becomes a lottery result of losing and chance zone lottery winning, and when it becomes a losing, it stays in the normal section continuously. Here, the winning probability of the advantageous section shift lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. In addition, when 1BB-A (winning numbers 48 to 56) is won, the chance zone lottery winning may be performed without performing the advantageous section shifting lottery.

  When 1BB-A is won and the chance zone lottery is won, the next game can be entered into the chance zone (gaming state number 9) (the arrow in the figure). In the chance zone, the game section control means 125 performs an ART promotion lottery every time one of winning numbers 37 to 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 1 to 9) is determined in the role lottery. Here, the winning probability of the ART promotion lottery is 0% when the winning number 37 (double winning award 1) is determined, and 5% when the winning number 38-40 (double winning award 2-4) is determined. When winning numbers 41 to 43 (two consecutive winning prizes 5 to 7) are determined, 25%, and when winning numbers 44 or 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 8 and 9) are determined, 100%. Further, the ART promotion lottery may be performed only when the number of games in the 1BB-A game is equal to or greater than the specific number of games, or during a period until the specific number of games is reached.

  If you win 1BB-A and win the chance zone lottery, you can move from the next game to the chance zone preparation (advantageous section), and when 1BB-A wins, you are in the chance zone (advantageous section). It may be possible to migrate.

  When the ART promotion lottery is won during the 1BB-A game, when the 1BB-A game is over, the game can be shifted to the ART (arrows in the figure). On the other hand, when the ART promotion lottery has not been won, when the 1BB-A game is over, it is possible to move to the normal section again (arrow in the figure).

  When the game section control means 125 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the game section control means 125 starts counting the number of games executed during the advantageous section (game state numbers 1 to 9). This count value is cleared when returning from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the number of games executed in the advantageous section becomes 1470 games, it is possible to shift from the current gaming state number to the ending state (gaming state number 10) (the arrow in the figure). Then, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, it is possible to shift to the normal section (the arrow in the figure). In this way, by setting an upper limit of 1500 games for the number of games in the advantageous section, tens of thousands of medals are paid out in one advantageous section so that the player's gambling will not be remarkably lost. I have to. Here, even if the bonus game is being played when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, it is possible to shift to the normal section. Of course, even in this case, if the bonus game end condition is not satisfied, the bonus game is continued.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the ART lottery executed in the high probability (gaming state number 6) and the ART promotion lottery executed in the chance zone (gaming state number 9) shift to ART (in other words, the ART game). A lottery to determine whether or not to extend the stay period in ART, such as a lottery to determine whether or not to start) or an extra lottery executed in the special zone (game state number 6), This corresponds to “a predetermined lottery concerning a notification game”. In the present embodiment, the end condition during ART is the digestion of a predetermined number of games. However, for example, when performing an ART end lottery to determine whether or not to end ART, Corresponds to "Lottery of". Furthermore, when it is determined whether or not to extend the stay period during ART by performing a so-called loop lottery, this loop lottery also corresponds to the “predetermined lottery regarding the notification game”.

  When shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section, a series of addresses F020 to F028 in the storage area of the RWM are cleared (set to 0). In other words, the set value data at address F000, the RT state number at address F005, the stored number display data at F010, etc. are not cleared. As a result, only information relating to the advantageous section is cleared, so that even if the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered, the game can be executed normally.

  The game section control means 125 performs the following transition control in addition to the transition control shown in FIG. First, in the normal section, when the winning number 65 (1BB-B + watermelon A) is determined by the lottery, the normal section can be shifted to the standby section. In this standby section, although the transition to the effective section is confirmed, the stop switch push order cannot be reported as in the normal section (information that can identify an advantageous push order to the sub-control means 200). Must not be transmitted). In the waiting section, the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed. Further, it is not necessary to light the advantageous section LED during the standby section.

  After transitioning to the waiting zone, when winning 1BB-B, it is possible to shift from the waiting zone to the high probability middle bonus (game state number 4) of the advantageous zone. In addition, the advantageous section LED is turned on until a medal for the next game can be inserted after the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B ("White 7-White 7-White 7") is prepared at the latest. . Then, when the 1BB-B game is completed, it is possible to shift to high probability (game state number 4), and thereafter, transition control is performed according to the transition diagram shown in FIG. Here, the route from the normal section to the advantageous section through the standby section is called “special route”.

  In the transition control performed by the gaming section control means 125, even if the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the transition to the normal section returns (transfers) without being promoted (shifted) to ART (gaming state number 5). The ratio between pattern A (for example, high accuracy or high accuracy only) and pattern B that is promoted (transferred) to ART during (at least game state number 5) at least once and then returned to the normal section (transferred) is about 7 : It is set to be 3. Further, in the case of pattern A, the expected number of medals that can be acquired (paid out) during the advantageous section (hereinafter also referred to as “expected number of acquired sheets”) is about 10, and the expected number of acquired medals in the advantageous section in the case of pattern B is It is assumed that it is designed to be about 460 sheets. As a result, the expected number of acquired images once shifted to the advantageous section is 460 × 0.3 + 10 × 0.7 = 145.

  As described above, the expected number of acquired sheets (145 sheets) when shifting to the advantageous section is set to be ½ (350 sheets) or less of the allowable storage number (700 sheets) of the medal storage section 83a of the hopper 83. For example, if the staff of the game hall replenishes about half of the allowable number of medals, for example, 350 medals at the start of business (there is no need to replenish medals, and the medal storage unit 83a is filled. In general, about half of the medals are replenished.) Even if the winning lot transition lottery is immediately won, there is a possibility that the medal in the medal storage portion 83a may be empty during the advantageous zone. Even if it is low (that is, it is not necessary to replenish medals) and it is not won in the advantageous section shift lottery for a while, the medal auxiliary storage 84 will not be filled immediately (snash In other words, it is not necessary to collect medals), so that the work burden on the staff after the game hall starts operating is reduced (there is no dissatisfaction with the player even if the number of staff is small). it can. In summary, it is preferable to set the expected number of acquisitions when moving to the advantageous section to be less than or equal to half the allowable storage number of the medal storage unit 83a. Alternatively, it is preferable to provide a hopper having a medal storage portion 83a capable of storing a number that is at least twice as many as the number of expected acquisitions when moving to an advantageous section.

  Furthermore, by making the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery less than 1 / (700 ÷ regulated number (regular number “3” in the normal game)), the medal in the medal storage unit 83a is reached at the end of the first advantageous section. Even if it almost disappears (for example, 350-145 = 105), there is a high possibility that the medal storage part 83a is full or nearly full before the next advantageous section starts. There is a low possibility that the medal storage portion 83a will be emptied even during the advantageous section (that is, it is not necessary to replenish medals). On the other hand, if the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 1 / (700 ÷ specified number (specified number “3” in the normal game)) or more, the medal storage unit 83a is stored at the end of the first advantageous section. Is likely to be almost lost (for example, 350-145 = 105), so it is unlikely that the medal storage unit 83a is full before the next advantageous section is started. The medal auxiliary storage 84 does not become full (that is, it is not necessary to collect medals).

  For the same reason, it is desirable to set the number of medals to be paid out in one bonus game to 350 or less. For example, as in this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out in one bonus game is 1BB-A. When there are 1BB-C to F games less than games and 1BB-B games, it is desirable to set the winning probabilities of 1BB-C to F higher than the winning probabilities of 1BB-A and 1BB-B. Even if the bonus combination is won, if it is 1BB-C to F, there is a low possibility that the medal in the medal storage unit 83a will be empty during the bonus game (that is, the medal cannot be replenished). That's it.

(Explanation of freeze control means)
In FIG. 16, the freeze control means 130 determines the progress of the game when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied when the game played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, and the next game becomes the normal section. Execute freeze control to delay. However, if the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches 1500 games and the bonus game is in progress and the bonus game end condition is not satisfied, the freeze that delays the progress of the game at that time The bonus game is continued without executing the control. In this way, if the bonus game is being played when the number of games executed during the advantageous period reaches 1500 games, the freeze control is executed when the game played during the advantageous period reaches 1500 games. Without executing, the freeze control is executed when the bonus game ends.

  In conventional slot machines, there are no restrictions on ART games, so tens of thousands of medals are paid out in one ART, and the gambling is not too high. There was an opinion. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games so that the gambling is not excessively high. Also, the freeze control means 130 freezes when a 1500 game is played in the advantageous section. Thereby, during this freeze, it is possible to display the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, etc. during the advantageous section (in particular, the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, the total number of ART sets, etc. during ART).

  However, when the 1500th game is reached during the bonus game, which is an advantageous section, the freeze control means 130 does not perform freeze control. Therefore, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the above-described advantageous section are not displayed. This is because if the freeze control is performed during the bonus game, the refreshing feeling during the bonus game may be cut off. In addition, freeze control is performed when the bonus game ends. This makes it possible to display the total number of games played during the bonus game and the total number of acquired games during the freeze.

  In addition, when the 1500th game is reached during the bonus game which is the advantageous section, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during the advantageous section, etc. The number of times, the total number of acquired sheets, and the total number of AT sets) may be displayed. Further, the total number of games and the total number of acquired bonus games in the normal section may be added to the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous section.

(Explanation of notification game control means)
The notification game control means 140 can determine and notify the push order to be notified according to the winning combination when it shifts to the above-mentioned advantageous section (in the advantageous section). The notification of the pressing order is performed by displaying a numerical value called an instruction number on the acquired number display 28 shown in FIG. Specifically, instruction number 1 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 1) of left → middle → right (forward pressing), and instruction number 2 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 2) of left → right → middle (scissor pressing). ), Instruction number 3 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 3) of middle → left → right (forward middle press), and instruction number 4 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 4) of middle → right → left (reverse middle pressing). ), Instruction number 5 corresponds to the right → left → middle (reverse scissors press) push order (push order 5), and instruction number 6 corresponds to the right → middle → left (reverse push) push order (push order). 6). In addition, when the notification game control unit 140 does not notify the pressing order, an instruction number 0 that does not indicate a specific pressing order is set.

  When the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display unit 28, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the ten-segment display (hereinafter also referred to as “upper digit”) of the acquired number display unit 28 “ = ”Is displayed, and the instruction number is displayed on the 8-segment display of the first place (hereinafter also referred to as“ lower digit ”). In the present embodiment, the acquired number display 28 is used both for displaying the number of paid-out medals, displaying an error code (described later), and displaying an instruction number. By displaying “=” which is not displayed when displaying the number of medals to be paid out and the error code, the player can determine the type of information displayed.

  Here, in each section shown in FIG. 28, the notification game control means 140 is configured such that the normal section (the gaming state number 0), the high probability middle bonus (the gaming state number 3), and the high certainty bonus (the gaming state number 4). In addition, in the bonus during ART (game state number 7), the instruction number is not displayed on the acquired number display 28. On the other hand, in ART (gaming state number 5), in the specialization zone (gaming state number 6), in preparation for returning to ART (gaming state number 8), and in the ending state (gaming state number 10), the winning number When any of 24 to 29 is determined, the instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations of winning 01 or winning 02 are arranged are displayed. Hereinafter, such notification contents in the pressing order are also referred to as “all navigations”. In the case of high accuracy (game state number 1) and high probability (game state number 2), when winning numbers 24-29 are determined, at least one combination of winning 01 or winning 02 The corresponding instruction numbers are displayed (all navigations) in the order of pressing. In addition to the above instruction number, left →? →? Instruction number 7 corresponding to the push order (push order 7) of (first left stop), middle →? →? Instruction number 8 corresponding to the pressing order (pressing order 8) of (first middle stop), right →? →? If there is an instruction number 9 corresponding to the pressing order (pressing order 9) of (right first stop), after all navigation is performed, when any of winning numbers 24-29 is determined, winning 06 Instruction numbers 7 to 9 corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 08 and winning 10 (according to the determined winning number) are not arranged are displayed. Hereinafter, such notification contents in the pressing order are also referred to as “half-navigation”.

  The reason for performing the half-navigation is, for example, while waiting for the winning number 19 to be determined in order to shift to the ART state (gaming state number 3) in the high probability (gaming state number 2) and RT2, the winning number Any of 24-29 may be determined. At this time, in order to maintain RT2 (so that the symbol combinations corresponding to winning prizes 06 to 8 and winning prize 10 are not aligned), if all navigation is performed, 12 medals will be paid out. It is not preferable because medals are given excessively. Therefore, it is up to the player's luck to perform the half-navigation to ensure that the RT2 is maintained and 12 medals are paid out.

  In addition, it is not preferable to give medals excessively to the player (payout of 12 medals), but even in situations where it is not preferable to reduce medals (payout of 1 medal) , There is a merit in performing half navigation (12 payouts or 3 payouts depending on the player's luck). In a slot machine in which the instruction numbers 7 to 9 are not defined, the instruction number may not be displayed after all navigation is performed, or all navigation may be performed occasionally. In addition, high probability (game state number 2), during ART (game state number 5), during the specialization zone (game state number 6), ART return preparation (game state number 8), and ending state (game state number) In 10), when any of the winning numbers 1 to 6 is determined, the instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations of the replay 01 are arranged are displayed.

  Here, the number of initial games in the ART is set in consideration of the combined winning probability of the push order bells 1 to 6 so that the above-mentioned “all navigation” is performed at least once when moving to the advantageous section. Is desirable. As described above, in principle, when moving to the advantageous section, all navigation is not performed once, and the normal section is not transferred. Therefore, depending on the set initial game number, a predetermined number of games (initial game) This is because there is a possibility that inconvenience that it is not possible to shift to the normal section may occur despite the fact that several minutes) have been performed.

  It is assumed that in the normal section and RT2, any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance items A to C) is determined and the next game is shifted to the high probability (game state number 2). For example, assuming that the winning combination probability of push order bells 1 to 6 in RT1 and RT2 is 1 / 8.40, and the winning probability of Replay C (winning role to move from RT2 to RT1) is 1 / 1.93, it is highly accurate. (Game state number 2) and the number of games staying at RT2 can be estimated as 2 games (from the winning probability of Replay C). Also, in RT2, the number of games required from the transition to high probability (game state number 2) until the first “all navigation” is performed is estimated to be 9 games (from the combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6). (Including the case where the ART is being transferred to RT1 on the way).

  Therefore, if the number of initial games in ART is set to 9-2 = 7 games or more, the possibility that “all navigation” will be performed at least once before the condition for shifting to the normal section is satisfied is increased. Can do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the state during the ART cannot be ended although the end condition during the ART (execution of the predetermined number of games) is satisfied. In addition, since the winning probability of Replay C is set higher than the combined winning probability of the order bells 1 to 6, the possibility of “all navigation” being performed at high accuracy (gaming state number 2) and RT2 is reduced. Therefore, the notification of “all navigation” can be concentrated during ART.

  As the display mode of the instruction number, “= 0” is displayed when the instruction number is 0, but it may not be displayed. As the display mode of the instruction number, the instruction number may be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 and the lower digit may not be displayed. Here, as a non-display mode, it is possible to turn off all segments of the 8-segment display. Further, “=” may be displayed instead of non-display. Further, the instruction number is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, and the number indicating the stop switch to be actually operated (for example, the left stop switch 37 is No. 1 (“1”), the middle stop switch 37C is No. 2 ( “2”), the right stop switch 37 may sequentially display No. 3 (“3”)) in the lower digits.

  The display mode of the instruction number is not limited to that shown in FIG. 29 (a). For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a 7-bit numerical value (0 to 127) is displayed using one 8-segment display. You may make it display. In this case, segments a to g are associated with Bits 0 to 6 in the command number data to be described later, and each segment is turned on or off to display the command number expressed in binary (that is, within a numerical range of 0 to 127). To do. In this case, for example, when the instruction number 1 is displayed, only the segment a is turned on. Further, if the winning number (which may be a winning / replaying winning number) is known, an advantageous pressing order can be determined, so that the winning number may be displayed instead of the instruction number. For example, when displaying the winning number 28 (push order bell 5), the segments c, d, and e are turned on. Of course, these lighting modes may be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 or in the lower digit. The stop switch to be actually operated may be indicated by a binary number. In either case, segment data to be described later may be determined in advance so that such display can be performed.

(Explanation of role monitor control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the role ratio monitor control means 145 displays the advantageous section ratio, the medium period ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative ratio, and the cumulative ratio displayed on the ratio monitor 103 shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. Calculate the cumulative service ratio. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 8D, the cumulative value in the most recent 6000 games is counted for each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the consecutive combination payout number. Based on the value, the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio are calculated. Separately from this, the total cumulative value is counted for each of the total payout number, the item payout number, and the combined payout number, and based on each count value, the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio are calculated. Furthermore, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are counted, and the advantageous section ratio is calculated based on these count values.

(Explanation of winning determination means)
Returning to FIG. 16, when all of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R are stopped, the winning combination determination means 150 corresponds to any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, when it is determined that any BB combination of 1BB-A to F has won, the BB game starts from the next game, and when it is determined that the SB combination has won, the next game For example, when a game using the combination lottery table shown in FIG. 26 is performed and it is determined that the re-game player has won, the re-game is performed in the next game. The number of medals corresponding to the selected small role is paid out. Here, until the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, 50) is reached, the number of medals corresponding to the winning small role is added to the current number of credits, and the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, 50). After reaching the above, medals may be discharged from the medal payout opening 60 shown in FIG.

(Description of abnormality detection means)
The anomaly detection means 155 detects an abnormal state that may occur in the slot machine 10 during non-games and during a game or a situation that obstructs the progress of the game, and detects the detected anomalies or faults (hereinafter collectively referred to as “error”). Error number) is displayed on the acquired number display 28. Here, FIG. 30 shows some of the types of errors detected by the abnormality detection means 155.

  In FIG. 30, a power failure recovery error (error code: E1) indicates that the content of the RWM is not normal when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned ON (hereinafter also referred to as “ON” or “ON”) (for example, This error is detected when the contents of the RWM at power-off and the contents of the RWM at power-on do not match (parity check error)). This error is also detected when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment. The empty error (error code: CA) is an error detected when there are no medals stored in the medal storage unit 83a of the hopper 83. The door opening error (error code: Cd) is an error detected when the front door 14 of the slot machine 10 is opened. When these errors are detected, an error code corresponding to the detected error is displayed on the acquired number display 28 by the LED display control means 160 described later.

  Among the errors described above, the power recovery error is an error that can be detected when the slot machine 10 is powered on, and the empty error and the door opening error are errors that can be detected during the game. Further, when each error is detected, the main control means slot machine 10 enters a state where the game cannot be progressed (hereinafter also referred to as “non-game state”). The method of resuming the progress (returning method) differs depending on the type of error.

  First, when the game becomes impossible due to an empty error or a door opening error, the cause of the error is resolved, and the game control process is resumed by operating the reset / setting switch 82c (see FIG. 3). can do. Thus, the empty error and the door opening error are referred to as recoverable errors because the game control process can be resumed (returned) by operating the reset / setting switch 82c. Note that the game control process can be resumed also when the key is turned counterclockwise in the door key 31. The door opening error can be canceled based on the door being closed (without requiring the operation of the reset / setting switch 82c or turning the keypad counterclockwise). .

  On the other hand, when a power failure recovery error occurs, the slot machine 10 is turned off and the setting change key (setting key) inserted into the keyhole of the key switch 82b is turned on. In this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again. As a result, the setting is being changed. At this time, a predetermined storage area of the RWM is cleared. Thus, the power failure recovery error is referred to as a non-recoverable error because the game control process cannot be resumed (returned). The power failure recovery error is an error that can be detected immediately after the power is turned on.

  When an unrecoverable error occurs, the predetermined storage area (addresses F000 to F3FF) of the RWM is cleared at the time of return, and the information about the game stored in the cleared storage area is not maintained. Will be done. Note that when an unrecoverable error occurs, the address F000 is also initialized and "0" is stored. In this embodiment, when the address F000 is "0", the setting is being changed. “1” is displayed on the set value display 87. In other words, since the correction process for displaying “1” on the set value display 87 is not required, the capacity can be reduced.

(Description of LED display control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the LED display control means 160 includes a clearing display LED 22, a re-game display LED 23, an insertion possible display LED 24, a game start display LED 25, an insertion display LED 26 a to 26 c, a credit number display 27, an acquired number display 28, setting. Display control of the value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103 is performed. Here, the contents of the LED segment table A referred to when the LED display control means 160 performs display control of the 8-segment display constituting the credit number display 27, the acquired number display 28 and the set value display 87 are shown. FIG. 31 (b) shows the contents of the LED segment table B shown in FIG. 31 (a) and referred to when the display control of the 8-segment display constituting the role ratio monitor 103 is performed.

  The LED segment tables A and B are information stored in the ROM included in the main control means 100, and each segment ag (FIG. 4 (a), FIG. 29 (b) constituting the 8-segment display. ) See) which is to be lit, in other words, it can be said that the display mode of the 8-segment display is determined in advance. Hereinafter, this data is referred to as segment data. Also, the segments a to g shown in FIGS. 4 (a) and 29 (b) are each an 8-segment display constituting the credit number display 27, the acquired number display 28, the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103. Segments a to g are shown.

  There are 16 segment data in the LED segment table A in FIG. 31A, and each segment data is stored in ROM addresses 1211H to 1220H. Further, there are 13 segment data in the LED segment table B of FIG. 31B, and each segment data is stored in ROM addresses 1311H to 131DH. Each segment data is 1-byte data, and each bit D0 to D6 when the data is expressed in a binary system corresponds to each segment a to g of the 8-segment display. That is, the least significant bit D0 corresponds to the segment a, the upper bit D1 corresponds to the segment b, and the bits D2 to D6 hereinafter correspond to the segments c to g, respectively. When the value of each bit is “0”, the corresponding segment is turned off, and when it is “1”, it is turned on. However, whether “1” is represented by a high level signal (for example, +5 V (volt)) or a low level signal (for example, ground potential) (in other words, whether it is active high or active low). May be determined as appropriate.

  In the following, description will be made taking active high (a high level signal is output from the data output terminal of the microcomputer chip Z1 when “1”) as an example. In the present embodiment, there is no item for which the ratio is not displayed on the role ratio monitor 103. For example, in a model having no advantageous section, “-” is displayed on the display unit that displays the advantageous section ratio. Therefore, the LED segment table B in which the segment data (40H) for lighting only the segment g at the ROM address 131E (offset value: DH) (display mode “−”) is stored may be used.

  Since the most significant bit D7 is not used for lighting control of the segments a to g of the 8-segment display, all the values of the most significant bit D7 of each segment data are “0”.

  For example, the segment data 3FH stored in the ROM address 1211H is expressed as “00111111” in binary, indicating that the segments a to f are turned on and the segment g is turned off. Therefore, the display mode is “0”. Similarly, segment data having display forms of numerals “1” to “9” are stored in the ROM addresses 1212H to 121AH, respectively. The addresses 121BH to 121FH store segment data in the form of displaying alphabets or symbols “A”, “=”, “C”, “d”, and “E”, respectively. Further, segment data for turning off all the segments is stored at the address 121FH.

  On the other hand, in the LED segment table B, the ROM addresses 1311H to 131AH store the segment data that display the numbers “0” to “9”, respectively, and the addresses 131BH to 121EH each include the alphabet. Alternatively, segment data that is a display form of the symbols “U”, “y”, “A”, and “−” is stored.

  The LED display control means 160 manages segment data acquired from the LED segment table by using an offset value. This offset value indicates an address value based on the leading address 1211H of the LED segment table A (1311H in the LED segment table B). For example, when the segment data is acquired from the LED segment table A, if the offset value is “0”, the segment data (3FH) of 1211H + 0H = 1121H is acquired, and if the offset value is “B”, 1211H + BH = 121CH segment data (48H) is acquired.

  Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35 whether lighting control of each display LED and 8-segment display is performed using the segment data acquired from the LED segment table A or B. FIG. FIG. 32 is a wiring diagram showing wiring and the like among the microcomputer chip Z1, the digit drivers DD1 and DD2, the segment driver SD, and the setting display 87 mounted on the main control board 101. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pin assignments of the output ports 2 to 4. FIG. 33 is a wiring diagram showing the wiring between each display LED and the 8-segment display mounted on the central display board installed on the back surface of the front door 14. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the bit of the signal (data) input to each 8-segment display and each segment and each display LED of the 8-segment display.

  In the wiring diagram of the main control board shown in FIG. 32, the microcomputer chip Z1 has three chip select signal output terminals XCS1 to XCS3 and 8-bit data output terminals D0 to D7. Digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and segment driver SD each have a clock input terminal CK, data input terminals D0 to D7 and data output terminals D0 to D7, and a signal input to clock input terminal CK is on (high level signal). When the signal is changed from OFF to LOW (low level signal), the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 is held, and signals corresponding to the signals are output from the data output terminals D0 to D7. When the signal input to the clock input terminal CK changes from off (low level signal) to on (high level signal), the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 is held, and the signal is Corresponding signals may be output from the data output terminals D0 to D7. Of course, a signal corresponding to the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 may be held and output from the data output terminals D0 to D7.

  The chip select signal output terminal XCS1 is the clock input terminal CK of the digit driver DD2, the chip select signal output terminal XCS2 is the clock input terminal CK of the segment driver SD, and the chip select signal output terminal XCS3 is the clock input terminal of the digit driver DD1. CK and each are connected. The data output terminals D0 to D7 of the microcomputer chip Z1 are connected to the digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and the data input terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD. However, since the bits D4 to D7 of the digit driver DD1 are not used (NC), these data input terminals are connected to the ground.

  Further, the data output terminals D0 to D2 of the digit driver DD2 are connected to the connectors of the central display board shown in FIG. 34 via corresponding drive circuits (not shown, but via the main control board side connector CN1 and the wire harness). The data output terminals D3 to D7 are connected to the 3rd to 7th pins of the input connector CN (hereinafter referred to as “input connector CN”). Further, the data output terminal D7 is also connected to the common terminal of the set value display 87. Further, the data output terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD correspond to the segments a to g (more specifically, to the segments a to g of the set value display 87 and the role monitor 103 through the corresponding driving circuits. LED anode) and the 8th to 15th pins of the input connector CN of FIG.

  Further, the data output terminal D0 of the digit driver DD1 is connected to the common terminal of the identifier display unit ID (upper digit) of the duty monitor 103, and the data output terminal D1 is connected to the common terminal of the identifier display unit ID (lower digit). The output terminal D2 is connected to the common terminal of the ratio display portion RA (upper digit) of the role monitor 103, and the data output terminal D3 is connected to the common terminal of the ratio display portion RA (lower digit). The common terminal of the 8-segment display is connected to the cathode of each LED corresponding to the segments a to g.

  The data output terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD are connected to the bases of pnp transistors included in the corresponding driving circuits. A voltage of +5 V is applied to the emitter of each pnp transistor, and the collector is connected to the input connector CN of the central display substrate. When a low level signal is supplied from the connected data output terminal to the base from the connected data output terminal, the pnp type transistor of each drive circuit is turned on, and a current flows from the emitter to the collector. Is supplied (high level voltage is applied).

  Data output terminals D0 to D2 of digit driver DD2 are connected to the bases of npn transistors included in the corresponding driving circuits. The emitter of each npn-type transistor is connected to the input connector CN of the central display substrate, and the collector is connected to the ground. When each npn transistor is supplied with a high level signal from the connected data output terminal to the base, the npn transistor is turned on so that a current can flow from the collector to the emitter. become.

  As described above, the pnp transistor of each drive circuit is turned on when a low level signal is supplied to the base, and the npn transistor is turned on when a high level signal is supplied to the base. . Incidentally, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D2, the digit driver DD2 outputs a high level (low level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D2, and inputs the data. When a high level (low level) signal is input to the terminals D3 to D7, a low level (high level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2. Further, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D7, the segment driver SD outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D7. ing. Furthermore, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D3, the digit driver DD1 outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D3. ing.

  If it is active low (when “1”, a low level signal is output from the data output terminal of the microcomputer chip Z1), on the contrary, the digit driver DD2 has a low level (to the data input terminals D0 to D2). When a high level signal is input, a high level (low level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2, and a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D3 to D7. In this case, a low level (high level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2. When a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D7, the segment driver SD outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D7. . Furthermore, when a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D3, the digit driver DD1 outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D3. ing.

  Next, in the wiring diagram of the central display board shown in FIG. 33, + 5V (volts) is supplied to the first and second pins of the input connector CN of the central display board, and each of the 1 to 3 input LEDs 26a to 26c is supplied. Connected to the anode. The third pin (input signal DG1) of the input connector CN is connected to a common terminal in the 8-segment display of the credit amount display 27 (upper digit). The 4th pin (input signal DG2) of the input connector CN is connected to the common terminal in the 8-segment display of the credit amount display 27 (lower digit).

  The fifth pin (input signal DG3) of the input connector CN is connected to a common terminal in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 (upper digit). The 6th pin (input signal DG4) of the input connector CN is connected to the common terminal in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 (lower digit). The seventh pin (input signal DG5) of the input connector CN is connected to the cathode of the clearing display LED 22. The common terminal of the 8-segment display is connected to the cathode of each LED corresponding to the segments a to g.

  The 8th to 14th pins (input signals SGa to SGg) of the input connector CN are connected to the anodes of the LEDs corresponding to the segments a to g included in the 8-segment display of the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28, respectively. It is connected. For example, No. 8 (input signal SGa) of the input connector CN is connected to the anode of the LED corresponding to the segment a in each of the 8-segment indicators of the credit amount indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28. Pin 15 (input signal SGp) of the input connector CN is connected to each anode of the segment DP in the clearing display LED 22, the re-game display LED 23, the insertion possible display LED 24, the game start display LED 25, and the credit number display 27 (lower digit). Has been. Further, the 16th to 18th pins (input signals IN1 to IN3) of the input connector CN are connected to the cathodes of the 1-sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 26c, respectively.

  Next, contents of signals output to digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and segment driver SD will be described with reference to FIG. Signals output from the output ports 2 to 4 of the microcomputer chip Z1 are input to each driver described above. Specifically, the output port 2 signal is output to the digit driver DD2, the output port 3 signal is output to the segment driver SD, and the output port 3 signal is output to the digit driver DD1.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (least significant bit) to D7 (most significant bit) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1, bits D0 to D2 are signals for lighting the input display LEDs 26a to 26c. Bit D0 is a signal for turning on the turn-on display LED 26a, bit D1 is a turn-on display LED 26b, and bit D2 is a signal for turning on the turn-on display LED 26c. Bits D3 to D7 are signals for designating an 8-segment display to be lit among the credit display 27, the acquired number display 28 and the set value display 87, respectively. It is also a signal for designating a display LED to be lit among various display LEDs (excluding the input display LED).

  Here, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D3 is digit 1, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D4 is digit 2, and the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D5 is digit 3. The 8-segment display designated by the signal of bit D6 is represented by digit 4, and the 8-segment display designated by the signal of bit D7 is represented by digit 5. The digit 1 is the upper digit of the credit indicator 27, the digit 2 is the lower digit of the credit indicator 27, the digit 3 is the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, the digit 4 is the lower digit of the acquired number indicator 28, and the digit 5 Corresponds to each 8-segment display of the set value display 87.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (least significant bit) to D7 (most significant bit) output from the output port 3 of the microcomputer chip Z1, bits D0 to D6 turn on the segments a to g of the 8-segment display, respectively. It is a signal for. Specifically, bit D0 corresponds to segment a, bit D1 corresponds to segment b, bit D2 corresponds to segment c, bit D3 corresponds to segment d, bit D4 corresponds to segment e, bit D5 corresponds to segment f, bit D6 corresponds to segment g Yes. The bit D7 is a signal for lighting various display LEDs or the segment DP of the 8-segment display.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (the least significant bit) to D7 (the most significant bit) output from the output port 4 of the microcomputer chip Z1, the bits D0 to D3 are the four 8-segment displays constituting the role monitor 103. It is a signal that designates an 8-segment display to be lit. Specifically, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D0 is the digit 6, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D1 is the digit 7, and the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D2 is set. An 8-segment display designated by the signal of digit 8 and bit D3 is referred to as digit 9. The digit 6 is the upper digit of the identifier display part ID, the digit 7 is the lower digit of the identifier display part ID, the digit 8 is the upper digit of the ratio display part RA, and the digit 9 is the lower digit of the ratio display part RA. Corresponding to the vessel.

  Note that the signals of the bits D4 to D7 output from the output port 4 are not used.

  Each time the timer interrupt processing is performed in the wiring diagrams shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the LED display control means 160 is digit 6 → digit 7 → digit 8 → digit 1 → digit 2 → digit 3 → digit 4 → digit. The so-called dynamic lighting control is performed by cyclically switching the 8-segment display and the display LEDs that are turned on, such as 5 → digit 9 → digit 6 →. Here, any one of the LED digit signals 1 to 5 output from the output port 2 and the LED digit signals 6 to 9 output from the output port 4 is output as a high level signal. Then, a low level signal is output from one of the data output terminals D3 to D7 of the digit driver DD2 or the data output terminals D0 to D3 of the digit driver DD1. That is, the digit corresponding to the LED digit signal that is at a high level (for example, +5 V (volt)) can be turned on. Then, the 8-segment display and the display LED corresponding to the digit in the lighting enabled state are turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the LED display control means 160 operates while the LED digit signal 1 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD2). Causes the segment data for displaying the tens value of the number of medals currently stored (credit) to be output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the game start display LED 25 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. If the number of credits is less than 10, segment data for displaying 0 may be output, or all segments may be turned off.

  While the LED digit signal 2 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D4 of the digit driver DD2), the number of medals currently stored (credited) Segment data for displaying values is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the advantageous section LED (the lower digit segment DP of the credit indicator 27) is to be lit, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3.

  While the LED digit signal 3 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D5 of the digit driver DD2), the display mode is to be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28. Corresponding segment data is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the enabling indicator LED 24 is to be lit, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The contents displayed in the upper digits of the acquired number display 28 are the tenth digit value when displaying the medal payout number (acquired number), “=” when displaying the instruction number, and displaying the error code. Becomes “E” or “C”. When displaying the medal payout number, if the medal payout number is less than 10, the segment data indicating 0 may be output from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the output port 3, or all segments may be output. The segment data to be turned off may be output.

  While the LED digit signal 4 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D6 of the digit driver DD2), the display mode is to be displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. Corresponding segment data is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the re-game display LED 23 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The contents displayed in the lower digits of the acquired number display unit 28 are the first place value when displaying the medal payout number, the numerical value of the instruction number when displaying the instruction number, and “1” when displaying the error code. ”,“ A ”, or“ d ”.

  When displaying the medal payout number, if the medal payout number is 0, the segment data indicating 0 may be output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3, or all segments are turned off. Data may be output. In addition, when a small role is won by a role lottery, if the selected small role is not won (when it is missed), “0” is displayed on the acquired number display 28, and in the case of a loss in the role lottery May be hidden. Thus, the player can identify whether the small role has been missed or whether the result of the role lottery has been lost.

  While the LED digit signal 5 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D7 of the digit driver DD2), the segment data for displaying the current set value is output to the output port 3. From D0 to D6. At this time, when the checkout display LED 22 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The set value is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed during non-games by a staff at the game hall, and in other cases, segment data for turning off all the segments a to g is displayed. Output from D0 to D6 of output port 3.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (c), the LED display control means 160 indicates that the LED digit signal 6 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D0 of the digit driver DD1). The segment data corresponding to the display mode (“6” or “7”) displayed in the upper digit of the identifier display part ID of the role ratio monitor 103 is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. While the LED digit signal 7 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D1 of the digit driver DD1), it is displayed in the lower digit of the identifier display portion ID of the role monitor 103. The segment data corresponding to the display mode (“U”, “y” or “A”) is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. Further, a high level signal is output to D7 of the output port 3 to light up the segment DP in the lower digit of the identifier display section ID.

  While the LED digit signal 8 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D2 of the digit driver DD1), of the ratio displayed on the ratio display portion RA of the role monitor 103 The segment data corresponding to the tens place value is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. While the LED digit signal 9 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD1), the ratio displayed on the ratio display portion RA of the role monitor 103 The segment data corresponding to the first place value is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3.

  In the LED display control described above, for example, when the display control of the 8-segment display of digit 1 and the display LED (the upper digit of the credit number display 27 and the game start display LED 25) is performed, a signal output from D3 of the output port 2 To high level. As a result, a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD2. Further, the output signals are set to low level from D4 to D7 of the output port 2 and from D0 to D3 of the output port 4. As a result, high level signals are output from the data output terminals D4 to D7 of the digit driver DD2 and the data output terminals D0 to 3 of the digit driver DD1. Furthermore, a signal based on segment data (see FIG. 31A) indicating the display mode (any one of 0 to 5) corresponding to the tens place value of the current credit number is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. Output. For example, if the value of the tens place is “2”, a high level signal is output from D0, D1, D3, D4, and D6 of the output port 3, and a low level signal is output from D2 and D5. As a result, low level signals are output from the output terminals D0, D1, D3, D4, and D6 of the segment driver SD, and high level signals are output from the output terminals D2 and D5.

  As a result, the input signals SGa, SGb, SGd, SGe, and SGg become high level (+5 V), and +5 V is applied to the anodes of the LEDs of the segments a, b, d, e, and g in the 8-segment display of the digits 1 to 9. Applied. However, a high level signal is output to the common terminal (cathode) of the 8-segment display with digits 2 to 9, and no current flows through the LEDs of segments a, b, d, e, and g. Is turned off. On the other hand, since the cathode of the 8-segment display of digit 1 is at a low level, a current flows through each LED of segments a, b, d, e, and g, and the numeral “2” is lit.

  At this time, since only the input signal DG1 is at the low level, the cathode of the game start display LED 25 is at the low level, and is turned on or off according to the level (high / low) of the input signal SGp.

  Note that the notification of the pressing order (display of the instruction number) may be performed using a dedicated display. This dedicated display is a multi-digit 8-segment display newly provided to notify the pressing order (displays the instruction number, etc.), and is a dedicated digit driver that outputs LED digit signals (unused The data output terminals D4 to D7 may be used as the digit driver DD1, and the LED segment signal output from the segment driver SD described above may be used for lighting control (display control).

  As described above, the segment driver SD is commonly used by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit amount display 27, and the acquired number display 28. In addition, it is recommended that a dedicated display (for example, digit 10) is provided in order to notify the pressing order (display of the instruction number). There are the following reasons for this. By mounting multiple segment drivers SD, it is possible to perform dynamic lighting control in parallel (for example, digit 1 → digit 2 → digit 3 → digit 4 → digit 5 → digit 1 → …… 6 → digit 7 → digit 8 → digit 9 → digit 10 → digit 6 → ……), flickering can be reduced.

  However, the 8-segment display device may be broken during the manufacturing process of the slot machine 10 and may break down during the transportation of the slot machine 10 or after the transportation (for example, a specific segment is not lit). . Furthermore, there is a possibility that a part of the wiring between the segment driver and the 8-segment display is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is disconnected or is disconnected in the wire harness). The display of the error code, the medal payout number, or the number of credits conventionally displayed by the 8-segment display does not cause a great disadvantage to the player even if the display cannot be confirmed due to failure or disconnection ( The game result will not be affected), but the notification of the push order (display of the instruction number) will cause a major disadvantage to the player if the display cannot be confirmed even partly due to failure or disconnection (in the game result) Likely).

  For example, when “6” must be displayed on the 8-segment display (for example, when winning number 6 is determined in RT2) as a push order notification (indication number display), segment e fails If the wiring from the output terminal D4 of the segment driver is broken, the display of the 8-segment display becomes “5”. If the player believes this display and performs a stop operation in the order of right → left → middle push, the symbol combinations of the replay 04 are aligned and fall down to non-RT (RT0). That is, the game result is affected. Therefore, it is preferable that the 8-segment display that performs at least the notification of the pressing order (display of the instruction number) can confirm whether or not a failure or the like has occurred. For this reason, in this embodiment, the notification of the pressing order is performed by the acquired number display 28 instead of the dedicated display. Further, the segment driver SD is commonly used by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28.

  In the present embodiment, an error code is also displayed on the acquired number display 28, and for example, “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when a power failure recovery error occurs. Since the power failure recovery error is detected even when the power is turned on (turned on) for the first time after transportation, it is not disconnected at this time (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not connected). It can be confirmed whether it is broken or broken in the wire harness.

  Specifically, if “E” is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, it can be confirmed that the wiring from the data output terminals D0 and D3 to D7 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected. If “1” is displayed in the lower digit, it can be confirmed that the wiring from the data output terminals D1 and D2 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected. Similarly, “Cd” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when a door opening error occurs, and “CA” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when empty. Therefore, when the door is opened or when an empty error occurs, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not disconnected, the wire harness It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a disconnection.

  In the present embodiment, since the credit number display 27 is also controlled to turn on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD, the credit number is displayed when the number of credits is one and six. If “1” and “6” are displayed in the lower digits of the number indicator 27, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board is disconnected). That is not broken in the wire harness).

  In the present embodiment, since the set value display 87 is also controlled to turn on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD, when the set value is set to 1 during the change operation of the set value. If “1” and “6” are displayed on the setting value display 87 at the time of setting to 6, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, main It can be confirmed that the wiring on the control board is not disconnected.

  The duty ratio monitor 103 also displays a ratio ratio monitor when the segment g fails or the wiring from the output terminal D6 of the segment driver is disconnected when "7y" must be displayed on the 8-segment display. As shown in FIG. 8E, the identifier display unit ID 103 is displayed in a state where the segment g is turned off in the display mode of “y” in the lower digits. This is problematic because it is not known whether "7y" or "7U" is desired to be displayed (that is, whether segment g is desired to be lit or segment e is desired to be lit). .

  In the present embodiment, since the obtained number display device 28, the credit number display device 27, and the set value display device 87 are controlled to be lit (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD. From the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD at the time of disconnection error, at the time of door opening, empty error, when the number of credits is 1 and 6, or when the setting value is 1 and 6 That is, it can be confirmed that the wiring is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not disconnected).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting enable display LED 24 and the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 are controlled to be turned on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD. Therefore, when the medal insertion is possible but the insertion possibility display LED 24 is not lit, there is a possibility that the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 may not be lit. I can confirm that there is. Specifically, there is a possibility that the wiring from the data output terminal D7 of the segment driver SD is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is disconnected or is disconnected in the wire harness). I can confirm that there is.

  In the present embodiment, the segment DP in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED. Of course, the single-load display LED 26a may be used as the advantageous section LED. However, when the single-load display LED 26a is used as an advantageous section LED, the following inconvenience may occur. As described above, + 5V (volts) is supplied to the first and second pins of the input connector CN of the central display board, and is connected to the anode of the one-sheet insertion display LED 26a (advantageous section LED). Furthermore, the 16th pin (input signal IN1) of the input connector CN is connected to the cathode of the single-load display LED 26a (advantageous section LED).

  That is, if the one-sheet insertion display signal (advantageous section signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is at a high level, the one-sheet insertion display LED 26a (advantageous section LED) can be turned on. On the other hand, despite the fact that the single-load display signal (advantageous section signal) needs to be at a low level (for example, during the normal section), it becomes a high level due to the influence of noise or the like. If this is the case, the single-loading display LED 26a (advantageous section LED) will be lit. On the other hand, when the segment DP of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED, the possibility that the above inconvenience occurs is reduced. As described above, the 4th pin (input signal DG2) of the input connector CN of the central display board is connected to the cathode of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the credit number display 27 (lower digit). Furthermore, the 15th pin (input signal SGp) of the input connector CN is connected to the anode of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the credit number indicator 27 (lower digit).

  That is, the LED digit signal 2 (advantageous interval signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is at a high level, and the LED segment signal p (advantageous interval signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is If the level is high, the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 can be turned on. Therefore, for example, even if the LED segment signal p (advantageous interval signal) becomes high level due to the influence of noise or the like even though it is in the normal interval, at that time, the LED digit signal 2 (advantageous interval signal) If is not at the high level, the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 is not lit. Thus, it can be said that the use of the DP segment of the credit number indicator 27 as the advantageous section LED is more resistant to noise and the like than the single-load display LED 26a is used as the advantageous section LED.

  The ART lamp ARTLP should be more resistant to noise and the like, similarly to the advantageous section lamp. This is because the player is confused when the ART lamp ARTLP is lit even though the ART is not in progress. In particular, if the ART lamp ARTLP is lit when the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player may be confused. Therefore, the wiring between the LED 29a, LED 29b, which is the light source of the ART lamp ARTLP mounted on a predetermined printed circuit board, and the microcomputer chip mounted on the sub-control board 202 or the image control board 204 is central. A credit number indicator mounted on the central display board, not the same wiring as the wiring between the single-loading display LED 26a mounted on the display board and the microcomputer chip Z1 mounted on the main control board 101 It is preferable that the wiring is the same as the wiring between the segment DP in the 27 lower digits and the microcomputer chip Z1 mounted on the main control board 101.

  Specifically, a digit signal (a signal for designating a display to be lit) is input to the cathodes of the LEDs 29a and 29b, and a segment signal (a signal indicating a display mode to be lit) is input to the anodes of the LEDs 29a and 29b. Wiring. Thereby, it is possible to make the signal for controlling turning on / off output to the ART lamp ARTLP less susceptible to noise.

(Description of control command transmission means)
The control command transmission means (information transmission means) 160 transmits various information related to the game determined by each part of the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200. Information exchanged between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 is limited to one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200. No information is sent directly. Information transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 is transmitted by a control command by serial communication. The control command is composed of a first control command (1 byte) indicating the type of information to be transmitted and a second control command (1 byte) indicating the content of the information to be transmitted. In addition, you may transmit a control command not only by serial communication but by parallel communication (for example, 16 harnesses). The process for transmitting the control command to the sub-control means 200 (control command transmission process) is executed in step S522 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Among the information transmitted by the control command transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200, the main information is related to the set value, the game state, the number of inserted medals, the role lottery , A game section or an advantageous section, a switch operation, a reel stop control, a game result, a generated error, etc.

  Information relating to the game state includes information (RT state number, operation state flag, operation type, etc.) indicating each lottery state shown in FIG. 27, and each game state number shown in FIG. In addition, as for the result of the role lottery, there is a role winning number Y and a production group number B. As for various switch operations, there is information indicating that any one of the clearing switch 33, the start switch 36, and the stop switches 37L, 37C, 37R has been operated. As for the reel stop control, there are a symbol to be stopped and information indicating the number of sliding symbols. As for the results of the game, there are information indicating the symbols that are stopped and displayed and the number of medals to be paid out.

  As information regarding the game section and the advantageous section, various information stored in RWM addresses F020 to F028 described in FIG. Of course, it is not necessary to transmit unnecessary information such as the instructed flag stored in the address F022 or the instruction state flag stored in the address F023 when the sub-control unit 200 executes the effect.

(Description of external signal transmission means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the external signal transmission means 170 is described above via the external concentration terminal board 86 by a timer interruption process (described later) executed at a predetermined cycle (every 2.235 milliseconds) in the main control means 100. The medal insertion signal, medal payout signal, BB signal, advantageous section signal, and the like are output to the outside. In the present embodiment, when the BB combination wins, the BB signal is turned on, and when the BB game is finished, the BB signal is turned off (level output). Further, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section signal is turned on, and when the advantageous section is finished, it is turned off (level output). In addition, the advantageous section signal is turned on when a transition is made to a predetermined performance (for example, during ART (game state number 5)) in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section signal is turned off when the transition is made to the normal section. May be. Also, the above-described various signal output processing (external signal output processing) is executed in step S524 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

<Description of Information Stored in RWM of Main Control Unit 100>

  Next, a part of the contents of various data stored in the RWM of the main control means 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The RWM used in this embodiment can store 1 byte of data at each address, and all the address values shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 are expressed in hexadecimal numbers. In the description with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38, when an address is expressed using a 4-digit hexadecimal number, the letter “H” added at the end is omitted. The types of data shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 are only a part of the data stored in the RWM, and in addition to these data, data necessary for controlling the game is stored in the RWM. Needless to say.

  In FIG. 35, a value (set value data) corresponding to the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is stored at the RWM address F000. That is, 0 is displayed when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “1”, and 1 is displayed when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “2”. 2 when the set value is “3”, 3 when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “4”, and “5” when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “5”. 4. When the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “6”, 5 is stored.

  In the LED display process in the timer interrupt process (see step S510 in FIG. 48), when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display 87 is satisfied (for example, during the setting change or the setting confirmation) The data obtained by adding “1” to the data (set value data) stored at the address F000 is used as an offset value, the corresponding segment data is obtained from the LED segment table A, and the information “1” to “6” can be displayed. To control. The setting confirmation is a state in which the set value data cannot be changed, but the set value is displayed on the set value display 87. By the way, by turning (turning on) a setting change key (setting key) inserted into the key hole of the key switch 82b in a situation where no game is executed and no medal is bet. Control is performed during setting confirmation (also referred to as setting confirmation mode).

  In the conventional slot machine, when the set value can take the range of “1” to “6”, the set value data is also managed by “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value. However, when the minimum value of the set value data is “1”, it may be difficult to perform efficient control processing. Therefore, when the set value can take a range of “1” to “6”, if the minimum value of the set value data is set to “0” and the numerical range is set to “0” to “5”, at least as follows. Has an effect.

  First, an error check of a set value is facilitated, and an error check can be performed with a small program capacity. For example, in the calculation process of the set value error check, when 6 (maximum value of the set value data + 1) is subtracted from the set value data and it is determined that there is no carry (the carry flag is off) in the calculation result, An error (out of the set value range) can be determined. That is, when the set value data is from 0 to 5, a carry occurs, so that it is not judged as an error. However, when any other value (for example, 6 or 100) is stored, it is judged as an error because no carry occurs. can do. Thus, by checking the value of the carry flag, it can be determined whether or not the set value data stored in the RWM is within a normal numerical value range.

  On the other hand, when the set value data is stored as “1” to “6”, it cannot be determined as an error in the same process as the above-described subtraction. That is, when 7 (the maximum value of the set value data + 1) is subtracted from the set value data, for example, even if the set value data is “0”, a carry occurs, so that it is determined to be normal. For this reason, when “0” is stored in the set value data, another process for determining as an error is required, which reduces the program capacity. Note that the timing for performing an error check of the set value may be after the start switch 36 is operated and before the role lottery is performed or during the execution of the timer interrupt process. However, the timing is not limited to the exemplified timing.

Secondly, as an effect of storing the set value data as “0” to “5”, the winning combination having different winning probabilities in the winning lottery according to the set value (hereinafter, also referred to as “winning combination with setting difference”). .) Can be made easier. For example, the winning combination having a setting difference includes a replay-G in the combination lottery table (see FIG. 20) used in RT1. At this time, the numeric data referred to when determining whether or not the re-game-G is won may be stored in the ROM address XXX0 to address XXXA as follows.
Address XXX0 DEFW 3625; (set value data 0)
Address XXX2 DEFW 3547 (setting value data 1)
Address XXX4 DEFW 3329 (setting value data 2)
Address XXX6 DEFW 3172; (set value data 3)
Address XXX8 DEFW 2970 (setting value data 4)
Address XXXA DEFW 2795; (set value data 5)

  Here, the above-mentioned “address XXX0” is for simplifying the explanation and is different from the actual address. Further, DEFW means 2-byte data, and the subsequent value means numeric data. Although the above-mentioned numeric data is represented by a decimal value, it is assumed that the ROM stores the hexadecimal value. Furthermore, the notation “; (set value data 0)” describes the set value data corresponding to the set value data, and is not actually stored in the ROM.

  If the data that can be stored in one address of the ROM is 1 byte, it is stored in two ROM addresses separately for the upper byte and lower byte of the numeric data. For example, when storing the numerical data “3625” (= 0E29H) when the set value data is “0” in the ROM, the lower byte value 29H is stored in the address XXX0, and the upper byte value 0EH is stored in the address XXX1. Remember. Further, when storing the numerical data “2795” (= 0AEBH) when the set value data is “5” in the ROM, the lower byte value EBH is stored in the address XXXA, and the upper byte value 0AH is stored in the address XXXB. Remember.

  As described above, each numeric value is stored at each address so that the set values are in ascending order. For example, when the set value data is “0”, the 2-byte data (0E29H) stored in the address XXX0 and the address XXX1 is acquired in a register (for example, a pair register of the DE register), and is compared with a random value. It is determined whether or not replay-G is won. On the other hand, when the set value data is “5”, whether or not the re-game-G is won by acquiring the 2-byte data (0AEBH) stored in the address XXXA and the address XXXB in a register and performing a comparison operation with a random value. Determine. That is, the numerical data is acquired from different addresses according to the set value data.

  At this time, when 2-byte data is stored as numeric data, it corresponds to the set value data by designating the address as a reference as XXX0 and specifying the address by using the data obtained by doubling the set value data as an offset value. Can be obtained. For example, when the set value data is “3”, 6 is added to the address XXX0, and the numeric data 0C64H (“3172”) is acquired from the address XXX6 and the address XXX7. When the numerical value data is represented by 1-byte data, the setting value data itself is designated as an offset value without doubling the setting value data, and the corresponding numerical value (for example, A register) is acquired. be able to.

  On the other hand, if the set value data is stored as “1” to “6”, the set value data cannot be directly used as the offset value if the above-described numerical value is stored. . In this case, the offset value must be calculated as (set value data-1) × 2. For this reason, the lottery process is more complicated than when the set value data is changed from “0” to “5”.

  Further, the set value display 87 can display the set value by a conventional display method. Conventionally, it has become familiar to display values of “1” to “6” as set values on the display of the set value, and the range of this value is changed (for example, “0” to “5”). Although there was resistance to this, it is possible to display the values familiar to date while exhibiting the effects described above, so that, for example, the staff of the game hall will not be confused.

  As described above, the set value displayed on the set value display 87 and the set value data stored in the address F000 of the RWM are different from each other by one, but an advantageous effect can be obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 87 and the setting value data stored in the address F000 may be the same value. For example, when the setting value displayed on the setting value display 87 is “3”, the setting value data stored in the RWM address F000 may be 3.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the setting value ranges from “1” to “6”, six types of data from “0” to “5” can be stored in the RWM as setting value data. The set value display 87 can display six types of “1” to “6”. For example, the set value range is set to “1” to “4”, and the set value data starts from “0”. Four types of data up to “3” may be stored, and four types of “1” to “4” may be displayed on the set value display 87.

  The address F005 stores data for managing the lottery state during the normal game among the lottery states shown in FIG. Here, “0” is stored when the current lottery state is non-RT (RT0), “1” when RT1, “2” when RT2, and “3” when RT3.

  At the address F010, 1-byte data for displaying the number of medals credited to the slot machine 10 is stored in the credit number display 27. Specifically, an offset value (see FIG. 31A) for designating segment data corresponding to the value of the number of credited medals is stored in the upper and lower digits of the credit number display 27. The Here, in the stored 1-byte data, the upper 4 bits correspond to the offset value for displaying the upper digit of the credit number display 27, and the lower 4 bits are the lower digit of the credit number display 27. Corresponds to the offset value for display.

  Specifically, when the stored number is 0 to 9, the stored number display data is 00H to 09H (F0H to F9H when the upper digit is turned off). When the stored number is 10 to 19, the stored number display data is 10H to 19H. When the stored number is 20 to 29, the stored number display data is 20H to 29H. When the stored number is 30 to 39, the stored number display data is 30H to 39H. When the stored number is 40 to 49, the stored number display data is 40H to 49H. When the stored number is 50, the stored number display data is 50H. The case where “00H” is stored is synonymous with the case where “0” (the number of stored sheets is 0) is stored. In other words, “0” being stored is synonymous with “00H” being stored. Similarly, the case where “05H” is stored is used in the same meaning as the case where “5” (stored number is 5) is stored. In other words, “5” being stored is synonymous with “05H” being stored. Others may be expressed with the same meaning.

  For example, the stored number display data when the value “28” is displayed on the credit number display 27 is 28H. Here, the upper digit (2H) of the stored number display data 28H indicates an offset value for displaying a display mode of “2” in the upper digit of the credit number display 27. Further, the lower digit (8H) of the stored number display data 28H indicates an offset value for displaying a display mode of “8” in the lower digit of the credit number display 27.

  In the above example, when the number of stored sheets is 0, “0” is displayed in the lower digit of the credit number display 27. However, the upper digit and the lower digit may be turned off. In this case, the stored number display data is FFH.

  At the address F011, 1 byte for displaying the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small role (hereinafter also referred to as “paid out number” or “acquired number”), an instruction number, or an error code on the acquired number display 28. Are stored. Specifically, offset values (see FIG. 31A) for specifying segment data corresponding to alphanumeric characters or symbols to be displayed are stored in the upper and lower digits of the acquired number display 28. Here, in the stored 1-byte data, the upper 4 bits correspond to the offset value for displaying the upper digits of the acquired number display 28, and the lower 4 bits are the lower digits of the acquired number display 28. Corresponds to the offset value for display.

  When the payout number display unit 28 displays the payout number, 00H to 09 (F0H to F9H when the upper digits are turned off), 10, 11, or 12H is stored according to the number of medals to be paid out. When nothing is displayed (all segments are turned off), the value of FFH is stored. When the instruction number is displayed, any one of B0H to B6H is stored according to the instruction number to be displayed.

  Moreover, as data for displaying the instruction number, in addition to the above, the quotient value obtained by dividing by a predetermined constant (for example, 10H) is used as an offset value corresponding to the display mode displayed in the upper digit. The remainder value may be an offset value corresponding to the display mode displayed in the lower digit. For example, when “= 6” is displayed as the instruction number, the acquired number display data B6H is stored. As a result, when B6H is divided by 10H, the quotient value becomes BH. Therefore, “=” is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28. Further, since the remainder value at this time is 6H, “6” is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. The “predetermined constant” is not limited to 10H, and other values may be adopted.

  Further, when an abnormality is detected by the above-described abnormality detecting means 155, an offset value for displaying an error code corresponding to the detected abnormality is stored. That is, E1H is stored when a power failure recovery error is detected, CAH is stored when an empty error is detected, and CDH is stored when a door opening error is detected.

  From the above, for example, the acquired number display data when the value “7” (the upper digit is extinguished) is displayed as the payout number on the acquired number display 28 is F7H. Here, the upper digit (FH) of the acquired number display data F7H indicates an offset value for turning off the upper digit of the acquired number display unit 28. The lower digit (7H) of the acquired number display data F7H indicates an offset value for displaying the display mode “7” in the lower digit of the acquired number display unit 28. Similarly, the acquired number display data when the value “= 2” is displayed as the instruction number on the acquired number display 28 is B2H, and the acquired number display data when the error code “CA” is displayed is CAH. Further, the acquired number display data when the acquired number display 28 is turned off is FFH.

  Note that when displaying an error code (number) when an unrecoverable error occurs in the slot machine 10, an LED display request flag or an LED display request counter (described later) is not referred to. On the other hand, when a recoverable error (error that can be recovered by operating the reset / setting switch 82c without turning off the power once) occurs, the value of the LED display request flag and the value of the LED display request counter As a result of AND operation, the digit “1” becomes the lighting target (lighting enabled state).

  Also, when a recoverable error is detected during the game in which the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 (when any reel is rotating), the display of the instruction number is maintained and all the reels are After the stop (that is, the game is not disabled until all reels stop), an error code corresponding to the detected recoverable error may be displayed on the acquired number display 28. . In addition, when a recoverable error occurs while the instruction number is not displayed on the acquired number display 28 during the game, an error code corresponding to the recoverable error detected before all reels stop is acquired. You may make it display on the number display 28.

  The address F012 stores the value of the LED display counter (hereinafter also referred to as “LED display counter value”). The LED display counter value is 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits, and this value is used when generating LED digit signals output from D3 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 shown in FIG. To be referenced. LED display counter value is 01H (00000001B)-> 02H (00000010B)-> 04H (00000100B)-> 08H (00001000B)-> 10H (00010000B)-> 20H (00100000B)-> 40H (01000000B)-> 80H (10000000B) → 00H (00000000B) → 01H (00000001B) →...

  When the LED display counter value is 01H, only D0 of the output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D1 to D3 of the output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 02H, only D1 of the output port 4 is set to the high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D0, D2, and D3 of the output port 4 are set to the low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 04H, only D2 of output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of output port 2 and D0, D1, and D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output).

  When the LED display counter value is 08H, only D3 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D4 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 10H, only D4 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3, D5 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 20H, only D5 of the output port 2 is set to the high level (high level signal is output), and D3, D4, D6, D7 of the output port 2 and D0 to D3 of the output port 4 are set. Set to low level (output low level signal). When the LED display counter value is 40H, only D6 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D5 and D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 80H, only D7 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D6 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level ( Output a low-level signal). When the LED display counter value is 00H, only D3 of the output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D0 to D2 of the output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output).

  Thus, when the LED display counter value is 01H, the upper digit (digit 6) of the identifier display portion ID of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed, and when the LED display counter value is 02H, the identifier display of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed. The lower digit of the part ID and the segment DP (digit 7) are displayed and lit. When the LED display counter value is 04H, the upper digit (digit 8) of the ratio display part RA of the role monitor 103 is displayed. .

  When the LED display counter value is 08H, the upper digit of the credit number display 27 and the game start display LED 25 (digit 1) are displayed (lighted), and when the LED display counter value is 10H, the credit number display The 27 lower digits and the advantageous section LED (digit 2) are displayed (lighted). Further, when the LED display counter value is 20H, the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 and the displayable display LED 24 (digit 3) are displayed (lighted), and when the LED display counter value is 40H, the acquired number display The 28 lower digits and the re-game display LED 23 (digit 4) are displayed (lighted).

  When the LED display counter value is 80H, the set value indicator 87 and the settlement display LED 22 (digit 5) are displayed (lighted). When the LED display counter value is 00H, the ratio display section of the role monitor 103 is displayed. The lower digit (digit 9) of RA is displayed (lighted).

  During the setting change, “88” may be displayed on the acquired number display 28. Specifically, during the setting change, 88H is stored in the address F011 (acquired number display data) as the display data during the setting change. In this way, during the setting change, whether the acquired number display device 28 has failed (segments ag) have failed, or the wiring from the data output terminals D0-D6 of the segment driver SD has been established. It can be confirmed whether or not there is a disconnection (for example, whether the wiring on the main control board 101 or the central display board is disconnected or not in the wire harness).

  When the set value display 87 is not provided, for example, the set value (1 to 6) corresponding to the set value data is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28 during the change of the set value (during setting change). You may be made to do. In this case, 01H to 06H or F1H to F5H is stored as display data of the set value at the address F011. For example, it can be realized by controlling to store a value “+1” in the data (set value data) stored in the address F000H while the setting is being changed.

  In this way, during the setting change, when the setting value is set to “1” (setting value data is 0) and when the setting value is set to “6” (setting value data is 5), the acquired number display 28 is displayed. If “1” and “6” are displayed in the lower digits of the, all the segments in the lower digits are lit, so that the acquired number display 28 is not broken (segments a to g are broken). Whether the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 or the central display board is not disconnected, in the wire harness) It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a disconnection. The display is not limited to the lower digit of the acquired number display unit 28, but at least one of the upper digit of the acquired number display unit 28, the lower digit of the credit number display unit 27, and the upper digit of the credit number display unit 27 is displayed. A set value may be displayed using a device.

  In the address F014, the value of the instruction number is stored as a binary value. Accordingly, the numerical value range of data stored at this address is 00H to 06H. When the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display 28, the acquired number display data stored in the address F011 is generated based on the instruction number stored in the address. Specifically, the acquired number display data for displaying the instruction number is generated by adding B0H to the value stored in the address F014.

  At the address F015, the state of the game medal management flag is stored as 1-byte data. The bits D0 to D7 of the game medal management flag indicate the on / off state of various display LEDs and the state of the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. However, bit D5 is unused. First, the bit D0 stores whether the operation of the start switch 36 is permitted or prohibited. Here, “0” indicates prohibition (the game start display LED 25 is turned off), and “1” indicates permission (the game start display LED 25 is turned on). Bit D1 stores whether or not the current advantageous section (including the case where the advantageous section is started from the next game) is stored. If “0”, the normal section or the standby section (the advantageous section LED is turned off). ), “1” indicates an advantageous section (the advantageous section LED is lit). The advantageous section LED is the segment DP in the lower digit (digit 2) of the credit amount display 27. The bit D2 stores the on / off state of the blocker of the medal selector. If “0”, the medal can not be inserted (the insertable display LED 24 is off), and if “1”, the medal can be inserted (the insertable display LED 24 can be inserted). Is lit).

  The bit D3 stores the ON / OFF state of the re-game display LED 23. If “0”, the re-game display LED 23 is OFF, and “1” indicates ON. In the bit D4, the lighting / extinguishing state of the settlement display LED 22 is stored. If “0”, the settlement display LED 22 is turned off, and “1” indicates lighting. Bit D6 stores a value indicating whether or not the setting value can be changed. If the value is “0”, the value can be changed. If the value is “1”, the value cannot be changed. . Bit D7 stores a value indicating whether or not the number of medals inserted to play a game has reached the above-mentioned prescribed number (for example, three) (has reached the limit). “1” indicates that the limit has not been reached, indicating that the limit has been reached.

  The LED segment signal p (SGp) of D7 of the output port 3 is generated based on the values of the bits D0 to D4 of the data stored at the address.

  As described above, the LED display control means 160 performs display control of each 8-segment display of the digits 1 to 9 and the display LED based on various data stored in the RWM.

  Next, in FIG. 37, the address F016 stores the state of the operation state flag as 1-byte data. The operating state flag is a flag indicating whether or not an accessory is operating. In the present embodiment, any one of the 1BB-A to F games is being executed by the bit D2 of the operating state flag (first type special combination) Whether or not an RB-A game or an RB-B game is being executed at bit D3 (the first kind special bonus item is in operation). Indicates whether or not there is. Bit D5 indicates whether or not the SB game is being executed (ordinary action is in operation). Specifically, the value of the bit D2 is “1” when any of the 1BB-A to F games is being executed, and is “0” when not being executed. Further, the value of the bit D3 is “1” when any of the RB-A game and the RB-B game is being executed, and “0” when the game is not being executed. Furthermore, the value of the bit D5 is “1” when the SB game is being executed, and is “0” when the SB game is not being executed. Bits D0, D1, D4, D6 and D7 are unused.

  At the address F017, the operation type of the bonus game is stored as 1-byte data. Bit D0 is 1BB-A game, bit D1 is 1BB-B game, bit D2 is 1BB-C game, bit D3 is 1BB-D game, bit D4 is 1BB-E game, bit D5 is 1BB-F game, bit D6 Corresponds to SB games. Specifically, when a bonus game is being executed, the bit corresponding to the bonus game being executed is “1”, and the bit corresponding to the bonus game not being executed is “0”. From the above, during a non-bonus game (during a normal game), “0” is stored in the address. This makes it possible to identify which bonus game is operating, and to determine a winning lottery table or the like to be used during the bonus game.

  At the address F020, the state of the game section flag is stored as 1-byte data. The game section flag indicates the type of the current game section. When the value of bit D0 is 1, it indicates an advantageous section, and when it is 0, it indicates a section other than the advantageous section. . Further, when the value of the bit D1 is 1, it indicates a standby section, and when it is 0, it indicates a section other than the standby section. When both the values of the bits D0 and D1 are 0, it indicates a normal section. Bits D2 to D7 are unused.

  In the address F021, the game state number is stored as 1-byte data. Similarly to the game state number shown in FIG. 28, the game state number is 00H when the game section is a normal section. Further, when the gaming section is the advantageous section “gase high probability”, the gaming state number is 01H, and when it is “high probability”, the gaming state number is 02H. When the game section is the advantageous section “gase high probability bonus”, the game state number is 03H, and when the game section is “high probability bonus”, the game state number is 04H. The game state number is 05H when the game section is the advantageous section “During ART”, and the game state number is 06H when the game section is “In addition special zone”.

  When the game section is an “ART bonus” in the advantageous section, the game state number is 07H, and when it is “ART return preparation”, the game state number is 08H. The game state number is 09H when the game section is the “interest chance zone” of the advantageous section, and the game state number is 0AH when the game section is “ending state”.

  At the address F022, the state of the instructed flag is stored as 1-byte data. The instructed flag indicates whether or not an advantageous pushing order is notified (indicating the indication number) when any of winning numbers 24 to 29 (pushing order bells 1 to 6) is determined in the advantageous section. Flag. Here, in the state where the pressing order has not been notified after the transition to the advantageous section, the value of the instructed flag is 0, and the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to winning 01 or winning 02 is aligned is notified. Then, the value of the instructed flag becomes FFH. Once the value of the instructed flag becomes FFH, the value is maintained until the transition to the normal section.

  It should be noted that 1BB-A to 1BB- is not required to notify the pressing order when the winning numbers 24-29 (pushing order bells 1 to 6) are determined during the advantageous section. The value of the instructed flag may be set to FFH based on the fact that any bonus combination of F is won and the bonus game is executed. In other words, when a bonus combination is won during the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section without reporting the pressing order. For example, any one of 1BB-A to 1BB-F before the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are determined after the transition to Gase Kosei (game state number 1) Even if the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are won in the high-ranking after winning the bonus game corresponding to the selected bonus combination, It is possible to shift to the normal section without notifying

  In addition, although the case where Gase high probability was given was described as an example, the same applies to high probability (game state number 2), during ART (game state 5), etc., and winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bell 1 ~ 6) Even if the correct push order (advantageous push order) is not reported once, or the winning numbers 24-29 (push order bells 1-6) are never won It can be made possible to shift to a section.

  In the address F023, the state of the instruction state flag is stored as 1-byte data. The instruction state flag is a flag indicating in what manner of notification when the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are determined during the advantageous section. Here, when the value of the instruction state flag is 00H, the notification of the pressing order is not performed even if any of the winning numbers 24 to 29 is determined. When the winning numbers 24 to 29 are determined, half navigation is performed when the value of the instruction state flag is 01H, and full navigation is performed when the value of the instruction state flag is 02H.

  In the addresses F024 and F025, the value of the advantageous section counter indicating the number of games executed during the advantageous section is stored as 2-byte data. Here, lower 1 byte data of the value of the advantageous section counter is stored in the address F024, and upper byte data of the value of the advantageous section counter is stored in the address F025. The value of this advantageous section counter is referred to when determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the ending state (game state number 10) shown in FIG. 28 is satisfied. This advantageous section counter is also referred to when determining whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit (1500 games in this embodiment). Specifically, if an ART game number counter, which will be described later, is a value other than “0”, in the case where the transition to the ending state is not performed, based on the value of the advantageous section counter, When it is determined that the number of games has reached 1500 games, even if an ART game number counter (to be described later) has a value other than “0” (even if there are remaining ART games), the advantageous section is ended. Control.

  Here, the subtraction process regarding the value of the advantageous section counter is performed using a predetermined register (F (flag) register). That is, every time a game is played, the advantage counter stored in the addresses F024 and F025 is decremented by “1”. As a result, when both the carry flag and the zero flag are “0”, it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is not “0”. That is, it can be determined that the current advantage is in the advantageous section, and the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit. Further, when “1” is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section counter and the zero flag is “1”, it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter has changed from “1” to “0”. That is, it can be determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit. On the other hand, if the carry flag is “1” as a result of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter, it is determined that the advantageous section counter before “1” is subtracted from “0”. That is, it can be determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has not been originally set (in other words, the current game is “normal section”).

  When the value of the advantageous section counter is “0”, the carry flag is set to “1” when “1” is subtracted, and in this case, “0” is stored in the advantageous section counter. ing. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute the process of subtracting “1” from the advantageous interval counter only during the advantageous interval. Even if a “1” subtraction process is performed from the advantageous section counter each time a game is played, the advantageous section counter can store a normal value. In this way, by configuring the advantageous section counter to be decremented by “1” in all the gaming sections, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is the advantageous section. 1 is subtracted, and if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, the capacity of the control program can be reduced as compared with a process in which the advantageous section counter is not subtracted by “1”.

  In the addresses F026 and F027, the value of the ART game number counter for managing the number of games executed during ART (game state number 5) is stored as 2-byte data. Here, in the present embodiment, the value of the ART game number counter indicates the number of remaining games that can stay in the ART (hereinafter, also referred to as “ART remaining number of games”). It is assumed that the value of the number counter is decremented by one. Further, lower 1 byte data of the value of the ART game number counter is stored in the address F026, and upper 1 byte data of the value of the ART game number counter is stored in the address F027. In the present embodiment, basically, when 50 games are played during ART, the ART is ended (hereinafter also referred to as “ART game”) and the normal section is started (see the arrow in FIG. 28). Since the value of the ART game number counter may be added when the zone is shifted to the specialization zone (game state number 6), the value of the ART game number counter is set to 2-byte data.

  The address F028 stores the value of the ART set number counter for managing the number of ART game sets as 1-byte data. The value of the ART set number counter indicates the number of times of transition to ART (gaming state number 5) between the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the return to the regular section. Therefore, when the value of the ART set number counter shifts from the high probability (gaming state number 2) or the chance zone (gaming state number 9) to the ART state (gaming state number 5), it is in the added special zone (gaming state). “1” is added when the transition from No. 6) to ART (game state number 5) and when the transition from ART return preparation (gaming state number 8) to ART (gaming state number 5) is made. The

  Next, in FIG. 38, the winning combination number (00-07H) corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery is stored in the address F033. The address F034 stores a winning / replay winning number (00 to 2FH) corresponding to the winning number determined by the lottery. Here, when any of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined, the value of the winning combination winning number (01 to 06H) stored in the address F033 is won until a bonus winning combination corresponding to the determined winning number is won. Maintained without being updated. However, when the winning number 88 (SB alone) is determined, the value of the winning item winning number (07H) stored in the address F033 when the game at that time is ended is cleared to 00H. On the other hand, the value of the winning / replay winning number stored in the address F034 is cleared every time one game is finished.

  The address F053 stores the value of medal payout number data referred to when paying out the number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination. As a result, when the main control means 100 wins a small role, every time a process of paying out one medal from the hopper 83 (one payout process) is executed once, 1 is calculated from the value of the medal payout number data. Subtract and repeat the one-sheet payout process until it becomes zero.

  The address F054 is a payout number buffer for storing a medal payout number value corresponding to the winning small combination. That is, the value of the medal payout number data stored in the address F053 is updated every time one payout process is performed, and eventually becomes 0. It holds the number of medals paid out for winning.

  Note that the value in the payout number buffer is referred to in order to calculate the medium period combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, and cumulative combination ratio displayed on the combination ratio monitor 103.

  In the addresses F26D to F26F, the value of the total game number D (total game number counter value) of 3 bytes shown in FIG. 8D is stored. Here, of the total game number counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F26D, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F26E, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F26F.

  The addresses F270 to F272 store the 3-byte advantageous section game number E value (advantageous section game number counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, among the advantageous section game number counter values, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F270, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F271, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F272.

  Addresses F273 to F275 store the 3-byte (total cumulative) total payout number A value (total payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, of the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F273, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F274, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F275.

  Addresses F276 to F278 store a 3-byte (total cumulative) total consecutive combination payout number C value (continuous combination payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F276, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F277, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F278. The

  Addresses F279 to F27B store a 3-byte (total cumulative) total feature payout number B value (combined item payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F279, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F27A, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F27B. .

  It should be noted that the total game number counter value, the advantageous section game number counter value, the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the continuous character payout (cumulative) counter value, and the character payout (cumulative) counter value are FFFFFFH (decimal number 16777215). ) Until the value reaches FFFFFFH, the main control means 100 performs control so that the value is maintained and not updated. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to determine whether or not each count value is one round (a value counted from 000000H again after exceeding FFFFFFH).

  Next, in the addresses F27C to F27E, the value of the 6000 game cumulative value a (the payout (6000 times) counter value) of the total payout number of 3 bytes shown in FIG. 8D is stored. Here, of the payout (6000 times) counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F27C, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F27D, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F27E.

  Stored in addresses F27F to F281 are the values of the 6000 game cumulative value c of the three-byte consecutive payout number shown in FIG. 8D (continuous combination payout (6000 times) counter value). Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F27F, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F280, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F281 among the counter value (6000 times) counter value Is done.

  Stored in addresses F282 to F284 are the values of the 6000 game cumulative value b of the 3-byte feature payout number shown in FIG. 8D (the feature payout (6000 times) counter value). Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F282, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F283, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F284. The

  Although not shown, a ring buffer for calculating a value in the most recent 6000 game corresponding to each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the consecutive payout number (see FIG. 8D). Is set in the RWM. Here, each ring buffer is composed of 15 sets, and the payout number between 400 games per set is stored as data of 2 bytes, so two addresses are required per set. Therefore, 30 addresses are required to configure a ring buffer consisting of 15 sets (400 games × 15 sets).

  In addition, the total game number counter value, the advantageous section game number counter value, the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the accessory payout (cumulative) counter value, and the continuous feature payout (cumulative) counter value stored in each address described above. The payout (6000 times) counter value, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value are executed by clearing (initializing) the RWM executed when the set value is changed. Each count value is maintained (not cleared) even if it is performed. However, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RWM when the power is turned on (the presence or absence of abnormality can be determined by using a checksum or the like of the conventional RWM), the setting value is changed. Each count value is also cleared by clearing the RWM.

  Next, the value of the 1-byte advantageous section ratio E / D (advantageous section ratio data) shown in FIG. 8D is stored in the address F285, and the 1-byte medium period linkage ratio c is stored in the address F286. The value of / a (continuous character ratio (6000 times) data) is stored, and the value of medium byte ratio b / a of 1 byte (characteristic ratio (6000 times) data) is stored at address F287. . The address F288 stores a 1-byte cumulative combination ratio C / A value (continuous combination ratio (cumulative) data) shown in FIG. 8D, and the address F289 stores a 1-byte cumulative combination ratio. A value of the role ratio B / A (a character ratio (cumulative) data) is stored.

  Note that, based on each data stored in the addresses F285 to F289, an abbreviation (identifier) of contents displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 and a ratio thereof (see FIG. 8C) are displayed. In addition, the calculation of each data stored in the addresses F285 to F289 is performed after the end of one game for the advantageous section ratio, and the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative The role ratio is performed after the game is finished every 400 times (one set), and the data stored in the corresponding address is updated. In other words, the RWM “400 times-of-games counter (for example, address F208 (2))” for determining the game for calculating the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio. A storage area is also provided. This storage area is a cyclic increment counter that is incremented by 1 each time a game is executed and circulates from 0 to 399. The intermediate period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio Is controlled to be calculated when the counter reaches “0”.

  Next, in FIG. 39, the address F28E stores the state of the blink request flag as 1-byte data. The blinking request flag is set for each of the advantageous section ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio displayed on the identifier display portion ID and the ratio display portion RA of the combination ratio monitor 103. It is a flag that specifies whether or not to blink the display. Here, the bit D0 designates whether or not the value of the advantageous period ratio to be displayed on the ratio display portion RA is blinked. When the value of the advantageous period ratio is 70% or more, the value of the bit D0 is 1 (flashing). If it is less than 70%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D1 designates whether or not the value of the medium period linkage ratio displayed on the ratio display RA is blinked. When the value of the medium period linkage ratio is 60% or more, the value of bit D1 is 1 (flashing) If it is less than 60%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing). Bit D2 specifies whether or not to flash the medium period ratio value displayed on the ratio display RA. When the medium period ratio value is 70% or more, the value of bit D2 becomes 1 (flashes). If less than 70%, 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D3 designates whether or not the value of the cumulative linkage ratio displayed on the ratio display RA should be blinked. When the cumulative linkage ratio value is 60% or more, the value of bit D3 becomes 1 (flashing). If less than 60%, 0 (non-flashing). Bit D4 designates whether or not the cumulative role value displayed on the ratio display RA is to be blinked. When the cumulative role value is 70% or more, the value of bit D4 is 1 (flashing). If it is less than%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D5 becomes 1 when the number of executed games is less than 6000 games after the slot machine 10 is started, and becomes 0 when the number of executed games is 6000 games or more. When the value of the bit D5 is 1, the display of the abbreviation (6y) of the intermediate period combination ratio and the abbreviation (7y) of the intermediate period combination ratio in the identifier display part ID is blinked. On the other hand, when the value of the bit D5 becomes 0, the display of the abbreviation (6y) of the intermediate period combination ratio and the abbreviation (7y) of the intermediate period combination ratio in the identifier display part ID is not blinked.

  Bit D6 becomes 1 when the number of executed games is less than 175000 games since the operation of the slot machine 10 is started, and becomes 0 when the executed games become 175000 games or more. When the value of the bit D6 is 1, the display of the abbreviation (7U) of the effective section ratio, the abbreviation (6A) of the cumulative combination ratio, and the abbreviation (7A) of the cumulative combination ratio in the identifier display portion ID is blinked. On the other hand, when the value of bit D6 becomes 0, the display of the abbreviation (7U) of the effective section ratio, the abbreviation (6A) of the cumulative combination ratio, and the abbreviation (7A) of the cumulative combination ratio in the identifier display portion ID is made non-flashing. .

  Bit D7 is unused. When the various ratios described above become 100%, the value displayed on the ratio display portion RA is set to “99”.

  The address F28F stores a ratio display number for designating a ratio to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103. The ratio display number is 1-byte data, 01H when displaying the advantageous section ratio on the ratio monitor 103, 02H when displaying the intermediate period combination ratio, 03H when displaying the intermediate period ratio, and the cumulative total. 04H is stored when the combined ratio is displayed, and 05H is stored when the cumulative ratio is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the content displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 is repeatedly switched in the order of advantageous section ratio → intermediate period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio.

  The address F290 stores the value of a blinking switching flag that designates when to turn on and when it should be turned off for what is designated to blink in the address F28E. That is, in the case of blinking display, the value of bit D0 is 0 during the lighting period, and the value of bit D0 is 1 during the extinguishing period. Bits D1 to D7 are unused. Here, when blinking the display of the role ratio monitor 103, the blinking cycle is set to 0.6 seconds ± 10%, and the ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period is set to 1: 1. Therefore, about 0.3 second lighting and about 0.3 second light extinction are repeated alternately.

Addresses F291 and F292 store display switching time values for determining the timing for switching the display contents of the role ratio monitor 103. The value of the display switching time is 2-byte data, the lower byte value is stored in the address F291, and the upper byte value is stored in the address F292. Further, the value of the display switching time is incremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is performed within a numerical range of 0 to 08 BDH (0 to 2237 in decimal). When the value becomes “0”, the ratio display number of the address F28F is switched. Thereby, for example, when the timer interrupt process is executed every 2.235 milliseconds, the display content of the role monitor 103 is switched every 2238 × 2.235 × 10 ⁻³ = 5.00193 seconds.

The address F293 stores the value of the blinking switching time for determining the timing for switching between lighting and extinguishing when the display content of the role ratio monitor 103 is blinked. The value of the blinking switching time is 1-byte data, and is incremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is performed within a numerical range of 0 to 86H (decimal number 0 to 134). When the value becomes “0”, the value of the bit D0 of the address F290 is switched. Thereby, for example, when the timer interrupt process is executed every 2.235 milliseconds, the display of the role monitor 103 is turned on → off → every 135 × 2.235 × 10 ⁻³ ≈0.3017 seconds → Turns on / off → …….

≪Description of sub-control means≫
<Sub-control means and peripheral hardware configuration>
The sub-control unit 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, an RWM, and the like, and is transmitted from the sub-control board 202 that controls an effect to be executed based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 and the sub-control board 202. On the basis of the sub-control command, the image display device 70, the speakers 64L and 64R, and the image control board 204 that drives effect means such as the effect lamp 72 are configured. The sub control board 202 may be responsible for driving the rendering means such as the ART lamps 29a and 29b.

<Functional block of sub control board>
The sub-control board 202 determines the content of the effect or notification based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100, and generates the sub-control command for executing the determined effect or notification, A control command receiving unit 220 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 and a sub control command transmission / reception unit 230 that transmits a sub control command generated by the effect control unit 210 to the image control board 204. Has been.

(Description of production control means)
The effect control means 210 is a means for controlling an effect according to the game, and includes an effect lottery means 212 and an effect state control means 214. Here, the effect according to the game is a set value, lottery state, game state number (type of game section and performance of advantageous section), role lottery and game state number (type of game section and performance of advantageous section). An effect according to the result of the transfer lottery.

  The effect control means 210 is based on the control command received from the main control means 100, the effect lottery means 212 for determining the effect according to the current effect state by lottery, and the control command transmitted from the main control means 100. There is production state control means 214 for performing production state transition control. Here, the effect states controlled by the effect state control means 214 are effect states corresponding to the game state numbers 0 to 10 in the main control means 100 (however, they do not necessarily correspond one-to-one). The same transition control as the game section control means 125 may be performed.

(Description of control command receiving means)
The control command receiving unit 220 receives the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 through serial communication, converts the received control command into parallel data, and stores the command buffer (for example, RWM) included in the sub-control unit 200 in the order received. In a part of the storage area). As a result, the effect control unit 210 sequentially performs processing based on the control command stored first among the control commands stored in the command buffer.

(Description of sub-control command transmission / reception means)
The sub-control command transmission / reception unit 230 transmits the sub-control command generated by the effect control unit 210 to the image control board 204 by serial communication every predetermined period (for example, 1 millisecond). Further, the sub control command transmission / reception means 230 receives a command transmitted from a sub control command transmission / reception means 240 described later.

<Functional block of image control board>
The image control board 204 includes a sub-control command transmission / reception means 240 and an image / sound output means 240. Based on the sub-control command transmitted from the sub-control board 202, the image display device 70, speakers 64L and 64R, and various lamps. (ART lamps 29a and 29b, side lamps 52L and 52R, effect lamp 72, decorative lamps 74L and 74R) are driven and controlled, and the effect determined by effect control means 210 is executed.

(Description of sub-control command transmission / reception means)
The sub control command transmission / reception means 240 receives the sub control command transmitted by serial communication from the sub control command transmission / reception means 230, converts the received sub control command into parallel data, and stores them in the sub command buffer in the order received. I will do it. Further, the sub control command transmission / reception means 240 is a command indicating whether or not the image control board 204 is operating normally, and a command indicating whether or not the command transmitted from the sub control command transmission / reception means 230 has been normally received. Is transmitted to the sub-control command transmission / reception means 230. As a result, the sub control board 202 can detect an abnormality occurring in the image control board 204, and when the image control board 204 fails to receive the sub control command, the sub control command can be retransmitted. .

(Description of image / sound output means)
The image / sound output means 250 outputs the effect image signal and sound signal generated by the image control board 204 to the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R. Thereby, the effect image is displayed on the image display device 70, and sound is generated from the speakers 64L and 64R. On the other hand, a normal operation signal indicating whether or not the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R are normally operable is output to the image control board 204 (or the sub-control board 202). If the normal operation signal cannot be received, the image / audio signal may be held without being sent, or may be discarded as the game progresses.

<Explanation of production lottery concerning the prelude production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 44, the sign effect lottery for determining the content of the sign effect performed by the effect lottery means 212 will be described. The sign effect is an effect that is executed over one game or a plurality of games when a predetermined winning number is determined in the role lottery in order to increase the player's expectation for bonus games or ART games. The effect lottery means 212 determines the contents of the sign effect by performing an effect lottery based on various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44. The numerical values in the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44 indicate numbers, and the value obtained by dividing each number by 65536 is the probability of obtaining the lottery result.

  FIG. 40A is a diagram showing the contents of the precursor type lottery table for determining the type of precursor effect. The sign type lottery is a lottery for selecting either the sign type 1 or the sign type 2, and is executed when the winning combination determining unit 110 determines that the winning number is 65, 66, or 35. (However, this lottery opportunity is an example, and it may be executed when another winning number is determined as long as it is a winning number that exhibits the same effect described later). The effect lottery means 212 determines the winning number from the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 and the effect group number, and if the received winning combination winning number is 2 and the effect group number is 24, It is determined that the winning number 65 has been determined. If the received winning combination number is 2 and the production group number is 25, the winning number 66 is determined. If the received winning combination winning number is 0 and the production group number is 25, the winning number 35 is determined. to decide.

  Here, the winning number 65 is a so-called “winning number with no setting difference” that has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value data (address F000) from 0 to 5, and the winning number 66 is set. The value data (address F000) is a so-called “winning number with a setting difference” in which the winning probabilities differ according to 0-5, and the winning number 35 is won according to the setting value data (address F000) being 0-5. This is a so-called “winning number with a setting difference” with different probabilities.

  In other words, the winning number 65 is a winning number that allows the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (transition lottery is possible), and it is possible to shift from any performance of the advantageous section to the advantageous section of other performances. It is also the winning number (where migration lottery can be executed). In this embodiment, when the winning number 65 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to the standby section, and when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B is stopped and displayed, the advantageous section lamp is turned on and the 1BB-B game is turned on. The advantageous section starts from the first game. Furthermore, during a 1BB-B game executed based on the winning number 65, when a winning number with no setting difference (winning number 47 in this embodiment) is won, a bonus such as an extra lottery is added. It is possible to grant.

  On the other hand, the winning number 66 is a winning number that cannot be changed from the normal section to the advantageous section (cannot make a transition lottery) because there is a setting difference, and from any performance of the advantageous section to the advantageous section of other performance. It is a winning number that cannot be transferred (cannot be transferred lottery). Furthermore, in the 1BB-B game executed based on the winning number 66, even if the winning number with no setting difference (winning number 47 in this embodiment) is won, the number of the ART games is added, etc. The privilege cannot be granted.

  The winning number 35 is a winning number that cannot be shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section because there is a setting difference (cannot make the transfer lottery), and the transition from any performance of the advantageous section to the advantageous section of other performance It is a winning number that cannot be transferred (cannot make a transfer lottery). The winning number does not include a bonus combination.

  That is, when the above-described winning numbers are compared, the winning numbers advantageous to the player are in the order of “65”, “66”, and “35”.

  However, in a game in which the winning number is determined as 65, 66, or 35, even if the player operates the stop switch corresponding to each reel, any symbol combination among winning 11 to winning 13 stops. However, since the missed points of the winning prizes 11 to 13 are stopped, it is difficult to determine which winning number is won from the reel stop mode. In addition, even if the winning number 65 is won, the advantageous section lamp is not lit (to shift to the standby section), so whether the winning number 65 has been won or not cannot be determined by lighting the advantageous section lamp.

  In the precursor type lottery table of FIG. 40A, when the winning number 66 or 35 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected regardless of whether it is in a non-favorable section (normal section or standby section) or advantageous section. (Numerical value is 65536). On the other hand, when the winning number 65 is determined, the selection probability of the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is different between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. That is, if it is in the non-advantageous section, the probability of selecting the precursor type 1 is high, and if it is in the advantageous section, the probability of selecting the precursor type 2 is high. Although the specific content of the effect will be described later, the content of the effect suggesting that the sign type 1 is more advantageous to the player (higher expectation) than the sign type 2 is easily selected.

  When the precursor type 1 or 2 is selected using the precursor type lottery table of FIG. 40 (a), the effect lottery means 212 executes the precursor effect using the precursor game number lottery table of FIG. 40 (b). A lottery game number lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be played (in other words, the length of the sign production). In the prelude game number lottery, one of 5 to 5 games is determined as the length of the prelude production, but the number of games to be determined differs depending on whether the bonus combination is won or not ing. When the bonus combination is not won, the probability of being determined as one game is higher than when the bonus combination is won. In addition, regardless of whether the bonus combination is won or not, when the precursor type 1 is selected, the probability that the number of games to be determined increases (determined to be 4 or 5 games) is high, and the precursor type 2 When is selected, the probability of being determined as three games is high.

  When the number of games for the precursor effect is determined using the precursor game number lottery table of FIG. 40 (b), the effect lottery means 212 determines the precursor scenario using the precursor scenario lottery table of FIG. 40 (c). A production scenario lottery is performed. The precursor scenario is configured according to the type of effect category to be executed for each game in which the precursor effect is produced, and different precursor scenario lottery tables are used when the precursor type 1 is selected and when the precursor type 2 is selected. The Here, there are five types of effect categories: “precursor”, “development”, “continuous effect”, “notification MID”, and “notification HI”.

  In the precursor scenario lottery table when the precursor type 1 is selected, one scenario is selected from ten scenarios, and two scenarios are prepared for each of the five games. Yes. For example, when the number of precursor games is determined to be five games, in the lottery table (precursor type 1) shown in FIG. 1 or No. A lottery for selecting the second scenario is performed. Similarly, when the number of precursor games is determined to be 4 games, 3 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario of 4 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 3 games, No. 4 is selected. 5 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario No. 6 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be two games, 7 or No. When a lottery for selecting a scenario of 8 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be one game, No. 8 is selected. 9 or No. A lottery for selecting 10 scenarios is performed. Also, in the precursor scenario lottery for each number of games, all of the odd No. Is likely to be selected.

  In the precursor scenario lottery table when precursor type 2 is selected, one scenario is selected from eight scenarios, and two scenarios are prepared for each of three to five games. One scenario is prepared for each of one game and two games. For example, when the number of precursor games is determined to be five games, in the lottery table (precursor type 2) shown in FIG. 1 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario 2 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 4 games, 3 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario of 4 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 3 games, No. 4 is selected. 5 or No. A lottery for selecting six scenarios is performed.

  In addition, if the number of precursor games is determined to be two games, the No. No. 7 is selected and the number of precursor games is determined to be one game. Eight scenarios are selected. In addition, when the number of precursor games is determined to be any of 3 to 5 games, in the precursor scenario lottery for each number of games, all of the even number No. Is likely to be selected.

  When the precursor scenario is determined using the precursor scenario lottery table of FIG. 40 (c), it is designated in the selected scenario using each lottery table shown in FIG. The effect pattern lottery for selecting one effect pattern from the effect patterns belonging to the effect category is performed. Here, the sign production type lottery, the sign game number lottery, and the sign scenario lottery described above are performed only once when the winning numbers 66, 65, and 35 are determined in the role lottery. The effect content lottery to be performed is performed for each game during the sign effect.

  In addition, in each lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (d), the selection probability of the effect pattern does not differ depending on the type of the currently staying section, but the type of the combination determined in each game during the precursor effect (Replay (replay A1, replay A2, etc. among replays), common bell (common bell B, common 3 bells B, etc. among small roles), watermelon (such as watermelon B among small roles) or predetermined Depending on the role, the selection probability of the production pattern may be different.

  Each effect category described above is associated with a plurality of effect patterns except for “continuous effect”. First, the effect category “sign” is associated with four effect patterns of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigator effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)”, and “roulette effect announcement”. ing. The effect category “notification MID” is associated with three effect patterns of “roulette effect notification”, “normal bonus notification”, and “next notice”. The effect category “notification HI” is associated with two effect patterns of “next notice” and “premier effect”. The effect category “development” is associated with three effect patterns of “light-off effect (development)”, “small role navigator effect (development)”, and “character effect (development)”.

  The effect category “continuous effect” is an effect that is executed over two games, and is an effect that notifies whether or not a bonus combination has been won according to the determined winning number at the end of the effect. Therefore, there is no production pattern associated with the production category “continuous production”, and the production pattern lottery is not performed during the continuous production.

  In the game in which the predicate effect is being produced, when the effect of the effect category “predictor” is performed, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table in FIG. In the production pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-1), when the bonus combination is not won (bonus non-winning), and when the bonus combination is won but not transferred to the advantageous section (bonus winning (with setting difference)) ) And when winning a bonus combination and moving to an advantageous section (bonus winning (no setting difference)), the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

  For example, when the bonus is not won and the replay or common bell is won, “Character effect (HI)” and “Roulette effect announcement” are not selected, but “Lighting effect (LOW)” One of the “navigation effects (LOW)” is selected with a probability of 1/2. In addition, when a watermelon or a predetermined role is won, one of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is 1 / It is selected with a probability of four.

  In addition, when the bonus is won (with a setting difference), when the replay or common bell is won, the “lighting off effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is selected rather than the probability of being selected. LOW) "or" small role navigation effect (LOW) "has a higher probability of being selected. In addition, when a watermelon or a predetermined role is won, one of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is 1 / It is selected with a probability of four. On the other hand, in the case of winning a bonus (no difference in setting), regardless of the winning combination, the probability that either “lighting off effect (LOW)” or “small role navigating effect (LOW)” will be selected. The probability that either “character production (HI)” or “roulette production announcement” is selected is higher.

  Next, in the game in which the predicate effect is being performed, when the effect of the effect category “notification MID” is performed, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-2). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-2), the selection probability of each effect pattern differs between the bonus non-winning, the bonus winning (with setting difference), and the bonus winning (without setting difference). That is, the selection probability of each effect pattern has the same value in the bonus winning (with setting difference) and the bonus winning (without setting difference).

  Specifically, when the bonus is not won, “Roulette effect announcement” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. In addition, for the bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference), one of the “Roulette effect notification”, “Normal bonus notification”, or “Next notice” effect patterns is selected. The probability that “notification” or “normal bonus notification” is selected is the same probability, and is higher than the probability that “next notice” is selected. It should be noted that the selection probability of each effect pattern in bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference) may vary depending on the type of winning combination.

  Next, when performing an effect of the effect category “announcement HI” in the game in the presence of the sign effect, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. Note that the production of the production category “notification HI” is performed only when the winning number 65 is determined (see (precursor type 1) in FIGS. 40A and 40C), so that the bonus winning is always performed. (No setting difference). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-3), “next notice” or “premier effect” is selected with a probability of 1/2, regardless of the type of winning combination.

  Next, when performing an effect of the effect category “development” in the game in the presence of the sign effect, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-4). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-4), the selection probability of each effect pattern differs between bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference). That is, in the bonus non-winning and the bonus winning (with a setting difference), the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same value.

  Specifically, when the bonus is not won and the bonus is won (with setting difference), regardless of the type of the winning combination, “lighting off (development)”, “small role navigating (development)” or “character production ( "Evolution" "is selected, but the probability of selecting" Lighting Off (Development) "or" Small Navi Production (Development) "is the same probability, and" Character Production ( Development) is higher than the probability of being selected. On the other hand, in the bonus winning (no setting difference), the probability of selecting “lighting off effect (development)” or “small role navigator effect (development)” is the same probability, but “character effect (development)” "Is lower than the probability of being selected.

  When the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41D in each game during the sign effect, it is determined using each effect content lottery table shown in FIGS. The specific production content in the production pattern is determined. Here, (e-1) to (e-5) in FIG. 42 are respectively “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigator effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)”, and “roulette effect”. It is a lottery table for determining the production contents in each production pattern of “notification” and “next notice”. Here, the same lottery table is used in the effect content lottery table regarding the “light extinction effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, and “character effect (HI)” regardless of the current staying section. . In addition, in the effect content lottery table regarding “roulette effect announcement” and “next notice”, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is an unfavorable section or an advantageous section.

  Also, (e-6) to (e-9) in FIG. 43 respectively represent “Premier effect”, “Light-off effect (development)”, “Small role navigation effect (development)”, and “Character effect (development)”. It is a lottery table for determining the production contents in each production pattern. Here, in the effect content lottery table regarding “light-off effect (development)” and “small role navigator effect (development)”, the same lottery table is used regardless of the current staying section. On the other hand, in the effect content lottery table regarding “Premier effect” and “Character effect (development)”, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section.

  Further, (e-10) in FIG. 44 is a lottery table for determining the production contents in the production pattern of “normal bonus notification”. In this effect content lottery table, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is a non-favorable section or an advantageous section.

  In the effect content lottery table in the effect pattern “light-off effect (LOW)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-1), the effect lamp 72 is turned off during the first stop operation (one stop-off), or turned off during the second stop operation. It is determined whether to turn off the light (2 lights off) or to turn off the lights at the time of the third stop operation (3 lights off). The selection probability of these effects does not change depending on the type of winning winning combination, but there is a high probability that “1 stop-off” will be selected in bonus non-winning cases, and “3 stop-off” in bonus winning (with setting difference). There is a high probability of being selected, and there is a high probability that “3 lights off” will be selected even in the bonus winning (no setting difference).

  In the effect content lottery table in the effect pattern “small role navigation effect (LOW)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-2), for example, the color of the character displayed on the image display device 70 is blue (blue navigation), or Whether it is yellow (yellow navigation), green (green navigation), or white (white navigation) is determined. Here, in any state of bonus non-winning, bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference), if the winning combination is replayed, “Blue Navi” is selected and the winning combination is common “Yellow Navi” is selected when it becomes a bell, “Green Navi” is selected when the winning combination becomes watermelon, and “White Navi” is selected when the winning combination becomes a predetermined combination. For example, when winning a bonus (with setting difference), if the winning combination becomes a common bell, “blue navigation” may be selected with a very low probability. As a result, the correspondence between the character color and the winning combination does not match, so that it can be suggested to the player that the character is in an unusual state.

  In the lottery table of effect contents in the effect pattern “character effect (HI)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-3), for example, the character type displayed on the image display device 70 is “weak character”, “medium character”, or “ Which of “strong character” should be decided. In this lottery table, regardless of the type of winning combination, if the bonus is not selected, the probability of selecting “weak character”, “medium character”, and “strong character” in order is increased. . Further, when the bonus is won (with setting difference), the selection probabilities of the three types of characters are almost the same, but the selection probability of “strong character” is set to be the highest. Further, if the bonus is won (no difference in setting), the probability of selecting “strong character”, “medium character”, and “weak character” in that order is set higher.

  Next, for the effect pattern “roulette effect announcement”, for example, three icons of “chance icon”, “bonus icon”, and “premier icon” are displayed on the image display device 70, and any of these three icons is displayed. This is an effect that shows the process of selecting and shows which icon was selected last. In the icon selection process, for example, the display position of the cursor is sequentially moved on the three icons. Finally, the cursor is stopped and displayed on any one of the icons.

  The lottery table of the contents of the effect in the “roulette effect announcement” shown in FIG. 42 (e-4) is different between the non-favorable zone and the advantageous zone. In each lottery table in the non-favorable zone, the bonus non-winning state Then, regardless of the type of the winning combination, the effect of selecting the “chance icon” at the end is determined. In addition, when a bonus is won (with a setting difference), an effect for selecting the “bonus icon” is finally determined regardless of the type of the winning combination. If the bonus is won (no setting difference), either the effect of selecting the “bonus icon” or the effect of selecting the “premier icon” is selected, but the “premier icon” is selected. The selection probability of production is set higher. On the other hand, in each lottery table in the advantageous section, in the bonus non-winning state and the bonus winning (with setting difference), the lottery similar to the lottery table in the non-interesting section is performed, but the bonus winning (setting difference) None) In the case of odor, the selection probability of the effect of selecting the “premier icon” is set higher than the effect of selecting the “bonus icon” at the end.

  Next, the effect pattern “next notice” is an effect of displaying “next bonus” or “next premier” characters after displaying the “next notice” character on the image display device 70 for a predetermined time. The effect pattern “next announcement” is an effect pattern that is not selected in the bonus non-winning state, as is apparent from the effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. Therefore, the lottery table for the contents of the effect in the effect pattern “next notice” shown in FIG. 42 (e-5) does not show the lottery table in the bonus non-winning state.

  In addition, the lottery table of the content of the performance in the performance pattern “next notice” shown in FIG. If the bonus is won (with a setting difference), the “Next Bonus” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. If the bonus is won (no setting difference), the “Next Premier” is selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. Must be selected. On the other hand, in each lottery table in the advantageous section, when a bonus is won (with a setting difference), the “next bonus” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination, while a bonus winning (no setting difference) ), The probability of selecting “Next Bonus” is overwhelmingly higher regardless of the winning combination, but “Next Premier” may be selected.

  Next, in FIG. 43, in the production pattern “Premier Production”, the “Premier 1” production informing that the winning of the bonus combination has been confirmed, or the winning of the bonus combination is confirmed, and the execution of the ART game is confirmed. One of the “Premier 2” effects that informs the user of the event is executed. The production pattern “premier production” is an production pattern that can be selected only when the bonus is won (no setting difference), as is apparent from the production pattern lottery table shown in FIG. In the lottery table for the content of the performance in the performance pattern “Premier effect” shown in FIG. 43 (e-6), the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are different. Regardless of the type, “Premier 1” is always selected. In the lottery table in the advantageous section, “Premier 2” may be selected although the probability of selecting “Premier 1” is overwhelmingly higher regardless of the type of the winning combination.

  The lottery table for the content of the production in the production pattern “light-off production (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-7) uses the same lottery table during the non-advantageous section and during the advantageous section, In both the bonus winning (with setting difference) and the bonus winning (without setting difference), “3 stop-off & development” is always selected regardless of the type of winning combination. When “3 stop lights off & development” is selected, after the above “3 stop lights off” effect is performed, an extension effect that raises the expectation for winning the bonus combination is performed.

  The lottery table for the contents of the effect in the effect pattern “small role navigation effect (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-8) also uses the same lottery table in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. Regardless of the type of the winning combination, “Blue Navi → Development”, “Yellow Navi → Development”, “No Bonus Winning, Bonus Winning (with setting difference) and Bonus Winning (without setting difference) One of “green navigation → development” or “purple navigation → development” is selected with an equal probability (1/4). Here, the production contents of “blue navigation → development”, “yellow navigation → development”, “green navigation → development”, and “purple navigation → development” represent the character displayed on the image display device 70 in a corresponding color. (For example, blue for “blue navigator”) indicates that the development effect is to be performed to increase the expectation for winning the bonus combination.

  The lottery table for the content of the performance in the production pattern “character production (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-9) is different between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. In the lottery table when the bonus is not won, the selection probability of the production content “weak character → development” is the highest regardless of the type of the winning combination. In addition, the selection probability of “middle character → development” is high after “weak character → development”, and the production content “strong character → development” is selected with a small probability. In addition, in the lottery table when the bonus is won (with setting differences), the selection probabilities are in the order of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development”, regardless of the type of the winning combination. Although set to be lower, the selection probabilities of “medium character → development” and “strong character → development” are set higher than the lottery table when the bonus is not won. In the lottery table when bonus is won (no setting difference), unlike the other lottery tables, the selection probability decreases in the order of “strong character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “weak character → development”. Is set.

  In each lottery table in the advantageous section, the lottery table for bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) is the same as the lottery table in the non-favorable section described above, but the bonus winning (setting difference) In the lottery table at the time of “None”, the selection probability is set to decrease in the order of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development”. Here, the production contents of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development” are “weak” if the character corresponds to the image display device 70 (for example, “weak character → development”). "Character") is displayed, and it is shown that the development effect that raises the expectation for winning the bonus role is performed.

  Next, the lottery tables for the production contents in the production pattern “normal bonus notification” shown in FIG. 44 (e-10) differ between the non-favorable sections and the advantageous sections. In the lottery table when the bonus is not won, the selection probability of the production content “weak character → bonus announcement” is the highest regardless of the type of the winning combination. Also, the selection probability of “middle character → bonus announcement” is high after “weak character → development”, and the production content of “strong character → bonus announcement” is selected with a slight probability. . Here, the “bonus notice” is a result presentation indicating whether or not a bonus combination has been won. In the case of a bonus non-winning, an indication that the bonus combination has not been won. This refers to the production that indicates that the role has been won. In addition, in the lottery table when a bonus is won (with setting difference), the selection probability is set to decrease in the order of “weak character → bonus announcement”, “medium character → bonus announcement”, and “strong character → bonus announcement”. However, the selection probabilities of “medium character → bonus announcement” and “strong character → bonus announcement” are set higher than the lottery table when the bonus is not won. Unlike other lottery tables, the selection probability in the order of “strong character → bonus announcement”, “medium character → bonus announcement”, and “weak character → bonus announcement” is lower in the lottery table when bonus is won (no setting difference). It is set to be.

  In each lottery table in the advantageous section, the lottery table at the time of bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) has the same contents as the lottery table in the non-favorable section described above. In addition, the lottery table for bonus winning (no setting difference) has the same contents as the lottery table for bonus winning (with setting difference). Here, the production contents of “weak character → bonus notice”, “medium character → bonus notice”, and “strong character → bonus notice” are characters corresponding to the image display device 70 (for example, “weak character → bonus notice”). If there is a “weak character”), a result effect (notification effect) indicating whether or not the bonus combination has been won is shown.

Summarizing the contents of the precursor effects described above, the following effects are possible.
(1) In the winning numbers 65, 66, and 35, since the same effect mode may be selected up to the effect of executing whether or not the bonus combination is won, it is not known which winning number is won. Production can be performed.
(2) In the winning numbers 65 and 66, the same effect mode may be selected up to the effect indicating that the bonus has been won. Therefore, which winning number (one is the winning number to move to the advantageous section, the other is the winning number) A series of effects that do not know whether the bonus was won with the winning number that does not shift to the advantageous section) can be executed.
(3) When the winning numbers 65 and 66 are compared, there is a high probability that an effect with a high expectation given to the player by winning the winning number 65 is set, so the effects in each game are exhausted. It will not be.
(4) Depending on the result of the production lottery, the production that can be recognized that the winning number 65 has been won (the winning number to be transferred to the advantageous section) can be selected. It will be a thing.

[Description of processing by control means]
<< Description of control processing in main control means >>
Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 45 to 50, the processing contents of the game control executed by the main control means 100 will be described.

<Description of the game progress main process>
First, the contents of the game progress main process for controlling the game executed in the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 performs a game start process (step S10). In this game start process, the setting of the game standby display (so-called demo screen) start time, the current set value for the sub-control means 200, the game status (whether replaying or BB gaming is in progress), the current lottery status Information such as a game state number is transmitted. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a medal for playing a game has been inserted (step S12). If there is no inserted medal, the determination result is NO, and a game medal insertion standby display process is performed in which the current set value can be confirmed according to the on / off state of the key switch 82b (step S14). ). Incidentally, when the key switch 82b is in the ON state, the current set value (value corresponding to the set value data) is displayed on the set value display 87. When the set value display 87 is not provided, it may be displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28.

  If the determination result in step S12 is YES (medal has been inserted), or when the processing in step S14 is completed, the main control means 100 performs a process (game medal management process) associated with the insertion of the medal. (Step S16). This process includes, for example, a clearing process when the clearing switch 33 is operated, a process for detecting a medal inserted into the medal slot 32, and the like. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the operation of the start switch 36 can be accepted and whether or not the start switch 36 has been operated (step S18). Here, the operation of the start switch 36 can be accepted when a prescribed number of medals are inserted or when a re-gamer wins in the previous game. If the start switch 36 is not operated, the determination result in step S18 is NO, and the process returns to step S12.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S18 that the start switch 36 has been operated (YES), the blocker of the selector 80 is turned off to invalidate the insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 32 (step S20). Then, among the combination lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 26, the combination lottery process is performed based on the combination lottery table corresponding to the lottery state (step S22). Next, various lotteries (advantage zone transition lottery, promotion lottery, falling lottery, etc.) for performing the transition control of the gaming section shown in FIG. 28 in accordance with the winning number determined in the role lottery and the current game state number A game section lottery process for performing an ART lottery, an ART promotion lottery, a special zone transfer lottery, a special zone fall lottery, an extra lottery, etc.) is performed (step S24).

  Next, winning combinations with different symbol combinations that are subject to pull-in control depending on the order of pressing by combination lottery (a combination whose number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the pressing order, and whose advantageous state does not differ depending on whether it is maintained or not maintained. When “Excluded” is selected, an instruction display process for displaying an instruction number for notifying the pressing order in accordance with the current game state number on the acquired number display 28 is performed (step S26). 37, the game section flag (address F020), the main game state number (address F021), the advantageous section counter (address F024), the ART game number counter (address F026), the ART set number counter (address F028), etc. Is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S28).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a mask process for generating an effect group number for instructing an effect to be executed by the sub-control means 200 in accordance with the winning / replay winning number determined in the role lottery (step S30). ), The winning combination winning number and the effect group number corresponding to the result of the winning lottery are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S32). Then, after performing the reel rotation start preparation process performed before starting the rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R (step S34), the reel stop management process is performed (step S36). In this reel stop management process, rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R is started, and when the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are operated, stop control is performed for the reels corresponding to the operated stop switches.

  Here, the reel stop control is performed based on the operation flag generated based on the winning / replay winning number and the winning combination winning number. This operation flag is associated with flag information indicating whether or not each symbol combination shown in FIGS. 10 to 15 is to be subject to the pull-in control, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM in the role lottery process. Is done. Further, every time the stop switch is operated, information indicating the operated stop switch and the fact that the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped are transmitted to the sub-control means 200.

  Next, when all the reels stop, the main control means 100 performs a display determination process for determining whether or not any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. Based on this, information on the displayed symbol combination is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S38). If the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line matches any of the small combinations, the medal payout number corresponding to the winning small combination is set to the RWM address F053 (medal payout number data) and Stored in address F054 (payout number buffer). Then, the hopper motor 46 is driven to perform a payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the matched small combination (step S40). Also, information indicating that is sent to the sub-control means 200 at the start of payout of medals and at the end of payout.

  Based on the current lottery status, the lottery status is determined based on the type of winning combination, whether the bonus combination is won, whether the bonus combination is won, whether the bonus game is over, etc. A migration process (see FIG. 27) is performed (step S42). Also, according to the current game state number, the game state number transition process (FIG. 28) based on whether or not a bonus combination has been won, whether or not the bonus game has ended, various lottery results related to the transition of the game state number, and the like. (Refer to step S44).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a ratio calculation process for calculating various ratios to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 (step S46), and then performs a game end check process (step S48). In the game end check process in step S48, on / off control of various signals output to the outside through the external concentrated terminal board 86, transmission control of information indicating that the game has ended to the sub-control means 200, and the like are performed. Do.

  When one game is completed by the above processing, the main control means 100 returns to the game start processing in step S10 again and performs processing for the next game.

<Description of ratio calculation process>
Next, the content of the ratio calculation process executed in step S46 of FIG. 45 (game progress main process) will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. As described above, the main control means 100 displays the five ratios of the advantageous section ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio as the ratios displayed on the ratio monitor 103. calculate. The flowchart of FIG. 46 shows a ratio calculation process for calculating the advantageous section ratio.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 46, first, the main control means 100 adds 1 to the value of the total game number counter stored in the RWM address F26D (step S100). Then, it is determined whether or not the current game section is in the advantageous section (the game state number is 1 or more) (step S102). If it is in the advantageous section, the determination result is YES and the result is stored in the RWM address F270. 1 is added to the value of the advantageous section game number counter being set (step S104).

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S102 that it is not in the advantageous section (step S102, NO), or when the process of step S104 is performed, the main control means 100 performs the advantageous section game count stored in the RWM address F270. The value of (dividend) is multiplied by 10, and the value and the total number of games (divisor) stored in the RWM address F26D are set in predetermined registers, respectively (step S106). Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the divisor (here, the value of the total number of games) is 0 (step S108). If it is 0, the determination result is YES, The ratio calculation execution process in step S110 is avoided. This is to avoid dividing the dividend by 0, and more specifically, to prevent inconvenience in the ratio calculation execution process described below.

  If the value of the divisor is not 0 in the determination process of step S106, the determination result is NO, and an operation is performed to divide the advantageous section game count (dividend) by the total game count (divisor). Here, in the ratio calculation process shown in FIG. 46, the calculation result (the value of the advantageous section ratio) of the number of advantageous section games divided by the total number of games (the value of the advantageous section ratio) is calculated as a two-digit value. A ratio calculation execution process is performed to perform division for obtaining the value of the place (step S110). By this ratio calculation execution process, the calculated quotient value is set in the lower 4 bits of a predetermined register (1 byte). The value of this quotient is the tens value of the percentage.

  Next, the main control means 100 performs processing for obtaining a remainder of division by the ratio calculation execution processing in step S110 (step S112). Detailed description regarding this processing will be described later. Then, the quotient value set in the lower 4 bits of the predetermined register is transferred to the upper 4 bits (step S114). Next, the main control means 100 multiplies the remainder value (dividend) obtained by the process of step S112 by 10 times, and the value and the total number of games (divisor) stored in the RWM address F26D. Each is set in a predetermined register (step S116). Note that when the value of the total number of games set in the predetermined register in step S106 is held when performing the process of step S116, the value of the total number of games may be used.

  Then, the main control means 100 performs a ratio calculation execution process in order to calculate the first value of the advantageous section ratio (step S118). In this ratio calculation execution process, the same process as the ratio calculation execution process in step S110 is performed. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the ratio calculation execution process in step S118 is added to the predetermined register in which the process in step S114 has been performed, and is stored in the RWM address F282 as advantageous section ratio data (step S120). Further, when the process of step S120 is performed when the determination result of step S108 is YES, the value of a predetermined register (in this case, 0) is stored as it is in the RWM address F285.

  The ratio calculation process shown in FIG. 46 is for calculating the advantageous section ratio, but by performing the same process, the medium period combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, and cumulative combination ratio are calculated. It is also possible to do. For example, when calculating the medium period combination ratio and the medium period ratio, first, a payout (6000 times) counter stored in the RWM addresses F27C to F27E, and a continuous character payout (6000 times) stored in the F27F to F281. The counter and the value of the item payout (6000 times) counter stored in F282 to F284 are updated.

  Then, when calculating the intermediate period linkage ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is carried out with the value of the continuous character payout (6000 times) counter as the dividend and the value of the payout (6000 times) counter as the divisor. The result is stored in RWM address F286. Further, when calculating the medium period ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the item payout (6000 times) counter as the dividend and the value of the payout (6000 times) counter as the divisor. Store in the RWM address F287.

  When calculating the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio, first, a total payout (cumulative) counter stored in the RWM addresses F273 to F275, a continuous character payout (cumulative) counter stored in F276 to F278, In addition, the value of the accessory payout (cumulative) counter stored in F279 to F27B is updated. Then, when calculating the cumulative combination ratio, the processing of Steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the continuous payout (cumulative) counter as the dividend and the value of the total payout (cumulative) counter as the divisor. Store in the RWM address F288. Further, when calculating the cumulative winning ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the bonus paying (cumulative) counter as the dividend and the value of the total paying (cumulative) counter as the divisor, and the result is the RWM address. Store in F289.

<Description of ratio calculation execution processing>
Next, the contents of the ratio calculation execution process executed in steps S110 and S118 of FIG. 46 (ratio calculation process) will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 subtracts the value of the lower 2 bytes of the divisor from the value of the lower 2 bytes of the dividend (step S118). Here, when this process is performed in step S110 of FIG. 46, the dividend becomes the advantageous section game count, and the divisor becomes the total game count. When this process is performed in step S118 of FIG. 46, the dividend is a remainder obtained by the ratio calculation execution process executed in step S110, and the divisor is the total number of games.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a carry has occurred by the subtraction process in step S200 (step S202). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the carry flag of the flag register has become “1”. When a carry occurs in the subtraction process in step S200, the determination result is YES, and it is determined whether or not the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is 0 (step S204). If the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is 0, the determination result is YES, and the main control unit 100 ends the ratio calculation execution process of FIG. On the other hand, if the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is not 0, the determination result is NO and 1 is subtracted from the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend (step S206).

  Next, the main control means 100 subtracts the value of the upper 2 bytes of the divisor from the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend (step S208). Here, if the determination result in step S202 is NO (no carryover has occurred), the process of step S208 is performed without performing steps S204 and S206. Then, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by the subtraction process in step S208 (step S210). If a carry has occurred, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the ratio calculation execution process in FIG. Exit. On the other hand, when the carry does not occur, the determination result is NO, and 1 is added to the value of the ratio that finally becomes the calculation result of the ratio calculation execution process (step S212). Then, the process returns to step S200, and thereafter, the processes of steps S200 to S212 are repeatedly executed until the determination result of step S204 or S210 is YES.

  Here, the subtraction processing in steps S200 and S208 is performed using a 2-byte register. The value of the register is less than 0 when the determination result in step S204 or S210 is YES. It is a value. For example, when 0019H is subtracted from 0015H, it becomes FFFCH. For this reason, when the remainder is obtained in the process of step S112 in FIG. 46, in the subtraction process in step S200 or S208 of FIG. 47, a process for returning to the value of the dividend immediately before the divisor is finally subtracted is performed.

<Explanation of timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the contents of the timer interruption process executed at predetermined intervals in the main control means 100 will be described. This timer interruption process is repeatedly executed at a period of about 2.235 milliseconds, and various 8-segment display devices and LED display control, detection of operations on each switch of the operation means 300 shown in FIG. 16, sub-control means 200, transmission of an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 86, generation and output of a control signal for driving control of the stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R, random number values and various counter values used as timers Processing such as updating.

  When the interrupt request signal (generation period: about 2.235 milliseconds) is output from the timer count means (timer circuit) provided in the microcomputer chip Z1, the main control means 100 outputs the timer allocation shown in FIG. Start processing. Here, when the timer interrupt process is executed, the return address of the process being executed in the game progress main process of FIG. 45 and the like is stored in the stack area. Thereby, after the timer interrupt process is completed, the process can be started from the continuation of the process executed in the game progress main process or the like based on the return address stored in the stack area.

  When the timer interrupt process of FIG. 48 is started, first, the main control means 100 performs an initial process of a timer interrupt process to be executed (step S500). For example, the data set in each register of the CPU is stored in the stack area of the RWM, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that a new timer interrupt process is not started during the timer interrupt process to be performed in the future. .

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a power-off (a power supply voltage has fallen below a predetermined value) is detected based on a power-off detection signal input to the input port 0 (step S502). . This power-off detection signal is output from a power supply monitoring circuit (not shown) provided on the main control board 101. When the main control unit 100 detects a power interruption, the determination result in step 502 is YES, and a power interruption process performed at the time of power interruption is performed (step S504). In this power-off process, the SP register is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM (for example, the stack pointer temporary storage area described above), the value of the power-off process completed flag indicating that the power-off process has been performed is set to 55H, and the RWM A checksum of the predetermined address range (F000 to F3FF) is calculated, and a value (2's complement) based on the result is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. Also, access to the RWM is prohibited, and a standby state for a reset signal input from the outside is entered.

  On the other hand, if the power cut-off is not detected in the determination process in step S502, the determination result is NO, and a blink request flag for designating whether or not each display content of the role ratio monitor 103 is blinked. A blinking request flag generation process for generating a value is performed (step S506). Next, the main control means 100 performs a blinking display process for blinking the display content designated to be blinked according to the value of the blinking request flag (step S508). Then, an LED display control process for performing display control of the credit amount display 27, the acquired number display 28, the set value display 87, and the role ratio monitor 103 is executed (step S510).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a timer measurement process for updating the count value of a timer that is generally used to count a predetermined time (step S512). In this timer measurement process, for example, the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) saved in a predetermined storage area of the RWM and the time detected by various sensors are subtracted. Specifically, the minimum game time is a time set after the start switch 36 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are betted, and “1835” is stored in the RWM as a time value. Then, until “0” is stored in the storage area of this RWM, even if there is an operation of the start switch 36 for starting the next game, the rotation start control for starting the rotation of the reel is not executed. It has become.

  In addition, as detection times of various sensors, a timer value or medal for measuring a medal passage time for determining whether or not a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 stays in the selector (medal clogging). There is a medal passage time for determining whether or not the hopper stays in the hopper. In addition, when a small role wins when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 cards), the payout amount corresponding to the small role is paid out from the hopper. At this time, whether or not the medal has been paid out. There is a medal unpaid time for determining whether or not.

  Next, the main control means 100 performs input port 0-2 reading processing for reading various external signals input to the input ports 0-2 and storing them in predetermined addresses of the RWM (step S514), and the reels 40L, 40L, In order to control the rotation of 40C and 40R, a reel drive management process is performed for each of the stepping motors 42L, 42C and 42R (step S516). When the reel drive management process is performed for all the stepping motors (step S518, YES), the main control unit 100 displays the display data of each display unit and each stepping motor based on the data stored in the RWM. Port output processing for outputting control signals, blocker drive signals, hopper motor drive signals, etc. for 42L, 42C, and 42R from the output port is executed (step S520).

  Next, the main control unit 100 transmits the control command stored first among the control commands stored in the ring buffer area set in the RWM to the sub-control unit 200 (step S522). Then, after performing an external signal output process for outputting various signals to be output to the outside via the external concentrated terminal board 86 (step S524), it is stored in a predetermined address (stack area) of the RWM by the initial process of step S500. Then, a return process for restoring the values of the various registers is performed (step S526), and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 48 is terminated.

<Description of blink request flag generation processing>
Next, the contents of the blink request flag generation process executed in step S506 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the main control means 100 sets the number of ratio data, the initial value for the blink request flag, the blink determination value table, and the value of the ratio data to be processed first in the corresponding predetermined registers (step S600). Here, the number of ratio data is the number of ratio data to be subjected to blinking display, and its value is 5 (advantageous section ratio, medium-period combination ratio, medium-period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, cumulative Ratio). The initial value for the blink request flag is the initial value of the blink request flag stored in the RWM address F28E, and the value is 00000000B. The blink determination value table is a table showing a value (determination value) that is a criterion for determining whether or not to perform blink display when each ratio data is displayed. As shown in FIG. The determination value for the cumulative period combination ratio is 60, the determination value for the intermediate period combination ratio is 70, the determination value for the intermediate period combination ratio is 60, and the determination value for the advantageous section ratio is 70. The blink determination value table in FIG. 49B is stored in the ROM.

  Further, in the blink request flag generation processing shown in FIG. 49A, the blink request flag for each ratio data in the order of cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → advantageous section ratio. Generate a value. Therefore, as the ratio data to be processed first, the cumulative ratio value stored in the RWM address F289 is set in a predetermined register.

  Next, the main control means 100 subtracts the corresponding determination value (here, 70) from the value of the ratio data (here, the cumulative winning ratio) set in step S600 (step S602). Then, the value of the carry flag when the subtraction is performed is set to the least significant bit of the initial value of the blink request flag, and the value of each bit is shifted by one bit to the upper bit side (left side) (step S604). Then, the value of the next ratio data (here, the cumulative linkage ratio) is set in a predetermined register (step S606), and it is determined whether or not the processing of steps S602 to S606 has been performed for the number of ratio data (step S606). S608). Specifically, when 1 is subtracted from the value of the ratio data number to become 0, the determination result in step S608 becomes YES.

  With the above processing, the corresponding judgment values are subtracted in the order of cumulative role ratio → cumulative linkage ratio → medium period role ratio → medium period linkage ratio → advantageous zone ratio, and the value of the carry flag by the subtraction result is Sequentially, the initial value of the blink request flag is set. When the determination result in step S608 is YES, the bit D4 of the initial value of the blink request flag is the carry flag value related to the cumulative role ratio, the bit D3 is the carry flag value and bit related to the cumulative role ratio The carry flag value related to the medium period combination ratio is set in D2, the carry flag value related to the medium period combination ratio is set in bit D1, and the carry flag value related to the advantageous section ratio is set in bit D0 (least significant bit). . That is, the values of the bits D0 to D4 in the initial value of the blink request flag are set to 1 when the value of each ratio data is equal to or less than the corresponding determination value, and the value of each ratio data exceeds the corresponding determination value. For those that are, it is 0.

  If the decision result in step S608 is YES, the main control means 100 refers to the value of the total game number counter stored in the RWM addresses F26D to F26F, and determines whether or not the value of the total game number is 6000 times or more. Is determined (step S610). If it is 6000 times or more, the determination result is YES, and the value of bit D5 in the initial value of the blink request flag is set to 1 (step S612). On the other hand, when the number is less than 6000, the process of step S612 is not performed, and the value of the bit D5 in the initial value of the blink request flag remains 0.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the total number of games is 175000 or more (step S614). If it is 175000 times or more, the determination result is YES, and the value of bit D6 in the initial value of the blink request flag is set to 1 (step S616). On the other hand, when the number is less than 175,000, the process of step S616 is not performed, and the value of the bit D6 in the initial value of the blink request flag remains 0.

  The main control means 100 stores the value of the blink request flag generated by performing the above process in the RWM address F28E (step S618), and ends the blink request flag generation process shown in FIG.

<Description of blinking display processing>
Next, the contents of the blinking display process executed in step S508 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. The blinking display process shown in FIG. 50A is executed when the lighting control of the role ratio monitor 103 is performed (LED display counter values are 0 to 2 and 4).

  First, the main control means 100 refers to the value of the LED display counter stored in the RWM address F012 and the value of the ratio display number stored in the RWM address F28F, and sets the number of acquisitions corresponding to each value in a predetermined register. (Step S600). Here, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the value of the LED display counter is 1 or 2 (identification display portion ID is lit), if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous section ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is the number of acquisition times 6 if the value of the ratio display number is 2 (medium period combination ratio), and the number of acquisitions 6 is the ratio display number if the value of the ratio display number is 3 (medium period role ratio). If the value is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), when the value of the LED display counter is 4 or 0 (ratio indicator RA lighting), if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous zone ratio), the number of acquisitions is 1. However, if the value of the ratio display number is 2 (intermediate period combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 2 is the value, and if the value of the ratio display number is 3 (intermediate period combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 3 is the value of the ratio display number. Is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 4 is set, and if the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 5 is set. At this time, if the value of the LED display counter is 0, it is corrected to 00001000B and set in a predetermined register (for example, D register). This process is a process for setting the value of D3 (LED digit signal 9) of the output port 4 shown in FIG. 34 to “1”. When the value of the LED display counter is other than 0, the value is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) as it is.

  Next, the main control means 100 sets segment data for displaying various ratio values corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the RWM address F28F in a predetermined register (step S632). For example, if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous area ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the advantageous area ratio data stored in the RWM address F285 is converted to the role ratio monitor shown in FIG. Get from the segment table for display and set. If the value of the ratio display number is 2 (medium period linkage ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the continuous combination ratio (6000 times) data stored in the RWM address F286 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 3 (medium period ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the accessory ratio (6000 times) data stored in the RWM address F287 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the continuous combination ratio (cumulative) data stored in the RWM address F288 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), segment data corresponding to the value of the combination ratio (cumulative) data stored in the RWM address F289 is set.

  Next, the main control means 100 acquires the value of the blink request flag stored in the RWM address F28E and sets it in a predetermined register (step S634). Then, the value of the blink request flag set in the predetermined register is set to the lower bit side by the number of acquisitions set in the predetermined register (a register different from the register in which the value of the blink request flag is set) in step S630. The data is shifted bit by bit in the (right) direction (step S636). In this shift process, the value of the least significant bit is shifted to the carry flag, and 0 is set to the most significant bit at that time.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the carry flag is 0 (step S638). Thereby, when displaying the identifier display part ID of the role ratio monitor 103 (the value of the LED display counter is 1 or 2), the ratio display number is 1, 4 or 5 (advantageous zone ratio, cumulative combined ratio or cumulative (Ratio), it is determined whether or not the value of bit D6 of the blink request flag is zero. On the other hand, when the ratio display number is 2 or 3 (intermediate period combination ratio or intermediate period combination ratio), it is determined whether or not the value of the bit D5 of the blink request flag is 0.

  Further, when the ratio display section RA of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed (the value of the LED display counter is 4 or 0), if the ratio display number is 1, the value of the bit D0 of the blink request flag is the ratio display number. If the ratio display number is 3, the value of the blink request flag bit D2 is the value of the blink request flag bit D2, and if the ratio display number is 4, the value of the blink request flag bit D3 is If the ratio display number is 5, it is determined whether or not the value of the bit D4 of the blink request flag is 0.

  If it is determined in step S638 that the carry flag value is 0, the determination result is YES, and it is determined whether or not the blinking switching flag stored in the RWM address F290 is “1” (step 1). S640). If the blinking switching flag is “1”, the determination result is YES, and the predetermined register (a register different from the register in which the blinking request flag and the number of acquisition times are set) is set in step S632. The existing segment data is cleared to 0 (step S642). Then, the segment data set in a predetermined register (for example, E register) is output from the output port 3 (see FIG. 34). In other words, when the blinking switching flag is “1”, it indicates “turned off” at the time of blinking, and therefore, the segment data (LED segment signal) output from the output port 3 is data indicating “no light”. Also, digit data (LED digit signal) for turning on the digit set in the D register is output from the output port 4 (see FIG. 34) (step S644), and the blinking shown in FIG. The display process ends.

  If the determination result in step S638 is NO (carry flag value is 1) or the determination result in step S640 is NO (flashing switch flag value is 0), the process immediately proceeds to step S644. Then, the segment data set in the predetermined register is output from the output port 3, and the blinking display process shown in FIG.

  Here, in the past, it was impossible to know the proportion of the advantageous section in the whole game, and further, by checking the actual advantageous section ratio, whether it was far from the design value of the proportion of the advantageous section, etc. I couldn't judge. Therefore, as described above, first, identification information (abbreviation (see FIG. 8C)) indicating the contents to be displayed is used as the first digit (upper digit of the identifier display unit ID) and the second digit of the role monitor 103. The third digit (ratio) is displayed in the digit (the lower digit of the identifier display part ID) and the information indicating the ratio (advantageous period ratio, medium period linkage ratio, middle period role ratio, cumulative linkage ratio, cumulative role ratio) It can be displayed in the upper digit of the display unit RA) and the fourth digit (the lower digit of the ratio display unit RA). If the stay ratio of the advantageous section calculated by the calculation means such as the ratio calculation process of FIG. 46 and the ratio calculation execution process of FIG. 47 described above is equal to or greater than a specific value, the blinking display process shown in FIG. 50 is performed. By performing, the lighting control is performed on the third digit and the fourth digit in a blinking manner.

  In addition, there is a counting means for counting the number of games (for example, a running firewood number counter of the RWM address F26D in FIG. 38), and if this counting means does not exceed the first value (175000), the stay in the advantageous section When displaying the ratio, lighting control is performed on the first digit and the second digit in a blinking manner. In this way, it is possible to easily confirm the stay ratio of the actual advantageous section by calculating the stay ratio of the advantageous section and changing the lighting mode based on the calculation result.

  With the above configuration, it is easy to identify whether the value is abnormal or not when the staff of the game hall, on-site inspectors, etc. visually observe the ratio of the advantageous section output to the ratio monitor 103. be able to.

<Explanation of route from normal section to ART>
In the slot machine 10 that performs the above-described control, an example of a route (route) from the normal section (non-RT) to the advantageous section “ART in progress” (RT1) will be described with reference to FIG. First, when a game is started from a normal section which is an initial state and a non-RT state ((a) in FIG. 51), any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is won, and an advantageous section When the winning lottery is selected for the transition lottery, the advantageous section “highly probable” is shifted to. However, the lottery state remains non-RT ((a) in the figure). In this state, if a bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won, the lottery state shifts to RT3. It shifts to “High accuracy middle bonus” ((c) in the figure).

  When the bonus game ends, the game section returns to the advantageous section “high probability” again, but the lottery state shifts to RT2 ((D) in the figure). Here, in RT2, since the winning lottery table of FIG. 22 is used, the winning number 19 (re-game-H) can be determined. When re-game-H is elected, it shifts to the advantageous section "During ART". When the symbol combinations corresponding to re-game 09 or 12 are prepared, the lottery state shifts to RT1 ((e) in the figure).

  Next, as a route different from the above-mentioned route, there is a route to win a bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) before winning a chance in the normal section. Specifically, in the normal section and the non-RT state ((a) in FIG. 51), when the bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won, the lottery state is changed to RT3. Transition. However, the game section remains the normal section ((f) in the figure). When the bonus game ends, the lottery state shifts to RT2 while maintaining the normal section ((ki) in the figure). At this time, if a symbol combination corresponding to any of SB, replay 03 or 04 or winning prizes 06 to 08 is prepared, the lottery state falls to non-RT ((a) in the figure), but it is won. If any of the numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) wins and the winning lot transition lottery wins the high-precision lottery, the lottery state remains at RT2 and shifts to the advantageous zone “high probability” (in FIG. D)). When the re-game-H is won and the symbol combinations corresponding to the re-game 09 or 12 are prepared, the advantageous section “ART is in progress” and the lottery state is shifted to RT 1 ((e) in the figure). .

  Here, the transition from (a) to (b) and the transition from (d) to (v) in FIG. 50 is conditional on the chances A to C and re-playing-H having no setting difference. Therefore, at first glance, even if the set value is changed, it seems that the probability of shifting to the advantageous section “During ART” cannot be adjusted. However, when considering the route from the normal section and non-RT state to the advantageous section “ART in progress” and RT1, first, in FIG. 50, (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e In the route of (), the winning of a bonus combination that can give a setting difference when transitioning from (b) to (c) is also a condition. In other words, the transition probability to RT2 can be made different depending on the winning probability of the bonus combination. As a result, by adjusting the winning probabilities of bonus combinations (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) according to the set value, the probability from (a) to (e) is adjusted. can do.

  Further, in FIG. 50, in the route of (A) → (F) → (G) → (D) → (E), a setting difference can be given when shifting from (A) to (F). Winning a bonus role is a condition. In other words, the transition probability to RT2 can be made different depending on the winning probability of the bonus combination. As a result, even if the bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won before changing to the advantageous section, by changing the set value, The probability of reaching (e) can be adjusted.

<< Description of control processing in sub-control means >>
Next, the contents of the sign effect lottery process executed by the effect lottery means 212 of the sub-control means 200 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sign effect lottery process is a process for determining the content of the sign effect using the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44. Note that the winning feature winning numbers and production group numbers described in the explanations of FIGS. 52 to 54 and FIGS. 52 to 54 are only specific numbers for the sake of simplicity. Needless to say, it can be applied even with other prize winning numbers and production group numbers.

  First, the effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the precursor effect flag stored in the RWM of the sub-control means 200 is turned on (step Ss10). The sign effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sign effect is currently being executed. When the sign effect flag is on, it indicates that the sign effect is being performed, and the sign effect flag is off. When it is, it indicates that it is not a precursor. When the sign effect flag is off, the determination result in step Ss10 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the value of the feature winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 2 or not. (Step Ss12).

  If the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 2, the determination result in step Ss12 is NO, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning winning combination number is 0 ( Step Ss14). When the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 0, the determination result in step Ss14 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control unit 100 is 0, the determination result in step Ss14 is YES, and then the effect lottery unit 212 transmits from the main control unit 100. It is determined whether or not the value of the rendered effect group number is 25 (step Ss16). If the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 25, the determination result in step Ss16 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the production group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 25, the winning number is determined to be 35 in the role lottery in the main control means 100. In this case, the determination result in step Ss16 is YES, and the effect lottery means 212 performs a sign effect execution lottery that determines whether or not to execute the sign effect (step Ss18).

  In the determination process of step Ss12 described above, if the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control unit 100 is 2, the determination result is YES, and the effect lottery unit 212 then displays the main control unit. It is determined whether or not the value of the effect group number transmitted from 100 is 24 or 25 (step Ss20). If the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is neither 24 nor 25, the determination result in step Ss20 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 performs the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. Exit. On the other hand, when the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 24 or 25, the winning number is determined to be 65 or 66 in the role lottery in the main control means 100. In this case, the determination result in step Ss20 is YES, and the effect lottery means 212 performs the sign effect execution lottery in step Ss18. Here, the winning probabilities of the prelude effect execution lottery may be constant regardless of the values of the winning feature winning numbers and the effect group numbers, or may be different depending on these values.

  When the sign production execution lottery of step Ss20 is performed, the production lottery means 212 next determines whether or not the sign production execution lottery has been won (step Ss22). The precursor effect flag is turned on (step Ss24). On the other hand, if it is not won, the determination result is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. When the sign effect flag is turned on in the process of step Ss24, the effect lottery means 212 next refers to the sign type lottery table shown in FIG. The sign type lottery corresponding to the value) is performed (step Ss26).

  Next, the production lottery means 212 refers to the precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 40B, and determines the length of the precursor production (the number of precursor games G) according to the precursor type determined by the precursor type lottery. (Step Ss28). Further, the effect lottery means 212 refers to the precursor scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 40C, and determines the content of the scenario according to the precursor type and the value of the determined precursor game number G (step Ss30). . Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determined precursor game number G (step Ss32). In the determination process of step Ss10 described above, if the indication effect flag is on, the determination result is YES and step Ss32 is immediately performed.

  Next, the effect lottery means 212 generates an effect pattern lottery table corresponding to the effect category corresponding to the current number of remaining games in the scenario determined by the process of step Ss30 among the various effect pattern lottery tables shown in FIG. Referring to the effect pattern lottery (step Ss34). In this effect pattern lottery, one effect pattern is determined according to the winning state of the bonus combination, the type of winning combination, and the like. Here, if the number of precursor games G is 4, the number of remaining games is 5, if the number of precursor games G is 3, the number of remaining games is 4, and if the number of precursor games G is 2, the remaining games If the number is 3, and the value of the precursor game number G is 1, it means that the number of remaining games is 2, and if the value of the predictor game number G is 0, the number of remaining games is 1.

  Next, the effect lottery means 212 performs the effect content lottery with reference to the effect content lottery table corresponding to the effect pattern determined by the process of step Ss34 among the various effect content lottery tables shown in FIGS. (Step Ss36). In the effect content lottery, one effect content is determined according to the winning state of the bonus combination, the type of the winning combination, and the like. The effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number G has become 0 (step Ss38). If the value of the precursor game number G has become 0, the determination result is YES. Then, the sign effect flag is turned off (step Ss38), and the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. 52 is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the precursor game number G does not become 0 in the determination process of step Ss38, the determination result is NO, and the precursor effect lottery process shown in FIG. 52 is performed without performing the process of step Ss38. finish. The sign effect is executed according to the effect content determined by the lottery process described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, description will be given of the contents of the effect that is executed when the above-mentioned precursor effect is performed after the bonus combination is won and then the bonus combination is won. Here, FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of effects executed when a bonus combination is won during the normal section and then the bonus combination is won. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of effects executed when a bonus combination is won in an advantageous section and the bonus combination is won thereafter.

  First, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined in the role lottery during the normal section, and the winning effect execution lottery in step Ss18 of FIG. 52 is won, referring to the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. The content is determined. Here, as is clear from the precursor type lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (a), when the winning number 65 is determined, either the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is selected. When the number 66 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected. Further, as described above, when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section, the “special route” that leads to the advantageous section through the standby section is followed.

  Based on the above, the flow of the production from when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined until the bonus combination is won will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section and the foreplay effect of the precursor type 1 is executed, it is determined that the transition to the advantageous section is made (substantially, the transition is made during ART). However, since the transition from the normal section to the standby section first, the advantageous section LED does not light up. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign production by the sign type 1 is finished, a special bonus prize production (hereinafter also referred to as “premier bonus production”. In FIG. 53, the characters “Special Epode” are displayed. ) Is executed. Further, the main control means 100 lights the advantageous section LED from when the bonus combination is won until the medal insertion for starting the next game becomes possible.

  Next, even when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section and the precursor type 2 is produced, the advantageous section LED does not light until the bonus combination is won because the transition from the normal section to the standby section is made. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign production by the sign type 2 is finished, the special bonus winning effect is executed as in the case where the sign production of the sign type 1 is performed. Further, the main control means 100 lights the advantageous section LED from when the bonus combination is won until the medal insertion for starting the next game becomes possible. Thereby, for example, the staff of the game hall can quickly recognize that the next game will shift to the advantageous section, and can take measures such as replenishing medals before the advantageous section becomes “ART in progress”. .

  On the other hand, in the case where the winning number 66 is determined and the foreplay effect of the sign type 2 is executed, since the winning section 66 is not determined and the advantageous section LED is not determined, the advantageous section LED does not light up. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign type 2 by the sign type 2 is finished, an effect at the time of normal bonus winning (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal bonus effect. In FIG. 53, a character image is displayed) is executed. Is done. Moreover, even if the bonus combination is won, naturally, the advantageous section LED does not light up.

  As described above, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined in the normal section, if the precursor type 2 of the precursor effect is executed, the advantageous section LED is not lit until at least the bonus combination wins. . For this reason, the player cannot determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section while the sign type 2 precursor effect is being performed, so the player is not allowed to move to the advantageous section until the bonus combination is won. Can maintain a sense of expectation. Furthermore, the player who did not notice lighting of the advantageous section LED by executing different effects depending on whether the advantageous section LED is lit or not when the bonus combination is won as an effect at the time of winning a prize. In addition, it is possible to notify whether or not the bonus game shifts to the advantageous section by the effect by the effect image or the like.

  Next, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined by the lottery during the advantageous section, if it is determined to execute the precursor effect, the winning number 65 is determined as in the normal section. Either the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is selected, but if the winning number 66 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected. However, since it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section LED is already lit.

  Based on the above, the flow of the production from when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined until the bonus combination is won will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the winning number 65 is determined during the advantageous section (for example, during the high accuracy of the gasses) and the precursor effect of the precursor type 1 is executed, if the bonus combination wins after the end of the precursor effect, Run.

  On the other hand, when the winning number 65 is determined during the advantageous section (for example, during the high accuracy of the gasses) and the precursor type 2 is performed, and when the winning number 66 is determined and the precursor type 2 is detected When the effect is executed, if the bonus combination is won after the sign effect, the normal bonus effect described above is executed in any case. However, unlike the normal bonus effect shown in FIG. 53, the next notice effect is performed during the normal bonus effect, and then develops into a continuous effect. If the winning number 65 has been determined, the end of the continuous performance is a victory (the effect of enhancing the expectation for the transition to ART is performed), and if the winning number 66 has been determined, the continuous performance Will be defeated (the effect of denying the transition to ART will be performed).

<Description of production in the ending state>
Referring to FIG. 28, as described in the transition control of the game section in the present embodiment, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and during ART (game state number 5), the image display device 70 When the production shown in 55 (a) is started and one of the winning numbers 22 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) is determined, the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 01 or winning 02 are aligned is notified. (See (b) in the figure). Then, when the number of games executed during ART reaches 50 games, the routine again shifts to the normal section. However, if the game shifts from ART to the special zone (game state number 6) and wins the extra lottery in that state, the number of games that can stay during the ART is added ((c in the figure) )reference).

  In this way, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section continues to stay in the advantageous section and becomes 1470 games, the ending state (game state number 10) is entered and the ending effect is started (in the figure). (See (d)). When the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the ending screen is displayed (see (e) in the figure), and then the normal section is started and the normal production is started (in the figure). (Refer to (f)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the contents of the effect when the bonus combination is won during the ending effect will be described. When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1470 games and an ending effect is being performed (see (a) in FIG. 56), if the bonus combination is won, the ending effect continues and the image display device 70 continues. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning bonus combination is displayed in the lower right of the screen to notify the player of the type of the bonus combination that has been won (see (b) in the figure). On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won during the normal section, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the symbol combination corresponding to the selected bonus combination is conspicuous in the center of the screen of the image display device 70. May be displayed.

  As a result, when a bonus combination won by the player is won, a bonus game is started (see (c) in the figure). At this time, if the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 before the bonus game ends, the above-mentioned ending screen is displayed (see (d) in the figure), and the routine shifts to the normal section. However, the ending screen displayed on the image display device 70 continues to be displayed as it is, and when the bonus game ends, the normal effect starts from the next game (see (f) in the figure). In this way, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games during the bonus game, the ending effect is continued until the bonus game ends without ending the ending effect at that time. You can taste the finish. Further, during the bonus game, for example, the ending effect is not switched to the effect during the bonus game, so there is no possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the effect.

  In addition, when the bonus combination is won during the ending production and the bonus game is started (see (c) in the figure), and the bonus game ends before the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, The ending effect is continued even after the bonus game ends (see (e) in the figure). When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the ending screen is displayed (see (e) in the figure), then the normal section is started and the normal production starts ((f) in the figure). reference).

  Note that the ending effect described above may be a so-called movie effect. In this case, the time for the ending effect (movie effect) is such that even if the game is played in the shortest time (4.1 seconds), the movie can be viewed to the end before reaching 1500 games. Preferably it is. If the 1500-game is not reached even after the movie presentation is finished, the movie presentation may be repeatedly executed from the beginning or from a predetermined position, or may be stopped at the last scene of the movie presentation. Also good.

[Modification]
The following configuration may be employed for the slot machine 10 described above.
(1) When the lottery status is non-RT, there is a high probability of losing in the role lottery, and basically there will be no stay in the ART (however, if the player did not follow the notified push order) Therefore, the combined winning probability of all re-game players in non-RT may be increased as the set value increases. Moreover, you may make the winning probability of a specific small role high, so that a setting value becomes high. As this specific small role, for example, in this embodiment, a common bell B with a winning number 31 (winning / replay winning number 31) and a common three bell B with a winning number 33 (winning / replay winning number 33) And the watermelon B with the winning number 35 (winning / replay winning number 35) corresponds to this. Further, the combined winning probability of all the re-game players in a specific RT state may be set to be lower as the setting is higher. For example, in the RT1 role lottery table shown in FIG. 20 and the RT2 role lottery table shown in FIG. 22 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the replay B of the winning number 18 (winning / replay winning number 18) is the set value. The higher the value is, the lower it is, and the winning probabilities of other replaying actors do not vary according to the set value. Therefore, the combined winning probabilities (hereinafter also referred to as “replay winning probabilities”) of all replaying players are: The higher the set value is, the lower it is.

  In conventional slot machines, the probability of winning an AT lottery according to the setting value and the AT's initial number of games when winning are changed to change the play rate (ease of paying out medals) for each setting value. It was. However, if the probability of shifting during ART according to the set value as in this embodiment or the initial number of games of ART is not changed, the winning probability of small roles and bonus roles will be changed according to the set value, It is necessary to change the play rate for each set value only by changing the replay winning probability. That is, also in this embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability of the small role that can be won regardless of the skill of the player so that the number of payouts such as the common bell B is large so that the payout rate becomes higher. ing.

  Thereby, the payout rate for each set value can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved. Even if the initial number of games of ART is the same, the number of medals to be paid out increases as the setting is higher. If the replay winning probability during RT1 is set to be higher as the setting is higher, the payout rate during ART when the setting is higher will be excessively high. At least the replay winning probability during RT1 is set to be lower as the setting is higher.

  Incidentally, during the ART when the setting is high even if the replay win probability is not changed according to the setting value (constant), and the loss probability is changed according to the setting value (the higher the setting is, the higher the loss probability is). In this case, the set value is easily estimated (in this case, it is estimated by counting the symbol combinations that are aligned only when there is a loss). It is not optimal).

  In addition, the winning probability of the push order bell and push order replay is not changed according to the set value. This is because if the win probability is changed according to the set value for the push order bell or the push order replay, there is a problem that it is easy or difficult to shift to non-RT according to the set value.

(2) If any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance points A to C) is determined in the role lottery during the normal section, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. In this advantageous section transition lottery, A result of lottery winning may be obtained. And when it becomes lost, it stays in a normal area continuously. Further, when the ART lottery is won, it may be possible to shift from the next game to the ART. However, in this case, in order to prevent medals from being excessively paid out to the player, in order to prevent transition to ART during the normal section and the lottery state is RT1, In other words, it is desirable that the ART lottery is won in the normal section and in the non-RT state, and that it is not during the ART and does not become RT1 except that the bonus combination is won. In other words, if the number of ART games is digested while in ART and RT1, the normal section and RT1 are reached, but in this state, the ART lottery is not won, or the normal section and non-priority are won before winning the ART lottery. It is desirable to move to RT.

  In order to do so, the probability of shifting to non-RT at the time of RT1 should be higher than the probability of shifting to ART. For example, when the transition is made to RT1 during the normal section, the combination winning probability of push order replays 1 to 6 in which the condition devices of replays 03 and 04 are activated at RT1 is 1 / 7.31, replay 03 or replay 04 1 / 8.77 for the probability of the combination of symbols, and 1 / 8.40 for the winning combination of push order bells 1 to 6 (the role of transition to non-RT) in which the condition devices for winning 06 to winning 08 operate. The probability that any symbol combination from 06 to winning prize 08 is set to 1 / 12.60. Further, the combined winning probability of the chance items A to C in RT1 is set to 1/60.

  In this way, when it is in the normal section and is RT1, the combined winning probability (probability of becoming an ART lottery winning) of the chance items A to C is made lower than the probability of shifting from RT1 to non-RT, so It becomes easier to fall to RT, and after winning the bonus combination, it can be set to RT1 and ART. For example, when determining the number of initial ART games (when always setting the same initial number of games), even when an irregular event such as a transition to ART is performed again in the normal section and the lottery state is RT1 Then, it is more likely that the player proceeds in a direction that is unfavorable for the player (for example, the initial number of ART games is set small). In the modified example, the initial number of ART games is not determined in consideration of irregular events, but irregular events are prevented from occurring frequently in the first place.

(3) To set the winning probability of the falling lottery to fall from the advantageous section to the normal section so that at least one “all navigation” is performed during the advantageous section, for example, staying in the normal section and non-RT The combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6 is 1 / 8.40, and the single winning probability of replay A1 is 1 /. 831. In addition, the winning probability of the falling lottery to the normal section in the advantageous section is 1 /. 831 × 1/2 = 1 / 16.62. In this way, by setting the probability of winning the falling lottery to the normal section lower than the combined winning probability of the push order bells 1 to 6, it is possible to perform “all navigation” at least once during the advantageous section Sexuality can be increased. It is more preferable that the single winning probability of Replay A1 is set to be lower than the combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6.

(4) When the upper limit of the number of games that can be executed in the advantageous section is determined to be 1500 games, the ending state (game state number 10) in FIG. 28 is changed to the normal section so as not to exceed this upper limit. May be made when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1200G. In this case, the condition for transitioning from any of the game state numbers 1 to 9 to the ending state (in the figure, arrow S) may be defined as when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes 1170G.

  In this way, even when the number of games in the advantageous section is not specified to exceed 1500 games, when determining whether or not to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section, first, in the advantageous section It is preferable to determine whether the number of games has reached 1500 games. Then, when it is determined that the game is not 1500 games, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the next advantageous section has reached 1200 games. To do.

(5) As an ending effect, for example, after the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1470 games, 8 games (40 seconds), 8 games (40 seconds), 7 games (40 seconds), 7 games (40 seconds) A movie effect consisting of four sections may be performed. In the last seven game sections, a movie effect shorter than 4.1 seconds × 7 games = 28.7 seconds may be performed.

  In this case, for example, if the first section (8 games) is played in the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the game ends in 4.1 × 8 = 32.8 seconds. It will take about 7 seconds to move. At this time, a telop “The movie will be skipped by the next operation” is displayed on the screen of the image display device having 70, and if the next operation is performed during this time, the movie production of the next section is started. You may do it. If the next operation is not performed when the above-described telop is displayed, the movie effect in the first section is executed to the end.

  That is, when the ending effects are configured by four movie effects A, B, C, and D, the player will visually recognize the first effects of A, B, C, and D, respectively. As a result, even a player who skips one movie effect confirms the necessary points, and can output an important part of the ending effect that the player wants to show to the player. In addition, although the ending effect for notifying the end of the advantageous section has been described as an example, not only the ending effect for notifying the end of the advantageous section, but also a special effect over a plurality of games in a specific state such as during a bonus game It can also be applied if you want to execute.

  Furthermore, in the last game of the advantageous section (1500 games reached), the total number of games in the advantageous section (or part of the advantageous section (for example, during ART)), the total number of acquired games (total number of payouts), etc. It is preferable to display the result on the image display device and execute the freeze effect. However, when the last game (1500 games reached) is in the bonus game or inside, the game including the freeze effect and the display of the game result described above is not executed, and the game in which the bonus game has ended (in the normal section) It is preferable to display the result of the game including the total number of games in the advantageous section, the total number obtained (total number of payouts), etc. on the image display device and execute the freeze effect.

(6) Even in the normal section, when the winning combination whose profit does not change depending on the pressing order is won, the pressing order may be notified.
(7) The winning probability of the promotion lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section may be 100% or 0%, but the predetermined winning probability is constant. However, if the winning combination that triggers the promotion lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “lottery trigger”) is different, an individual winning probability may be set for each winning combination.

(8) In the case where the lottery state fluctuates during the normal section, it is desirable not to use a winning combination that is likely to be won only in a specific lottery state as a transition lottery trigger to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the lottery state fluctuates during the advantageous section, a winning combination that may be won only in a specific lottery state may be used as a lottery trigger in the game state number transition lottery.
(9) Depending on the type of bonus that is won at the same time as the lottery opportunity, the transition may be made directly to the advantageous zone and to the advantageous zone via the standby zone.

(10) The waiting section is ended by winning the bonus combination, but may be ended before that. As an end condition in this case, for example, the standby section may be ended with a predetermined number of games after the standby section starts.
(11) The number of ART games can be added up to the first 1000 games after the transition to the advantageous section, and it is determined whether to continue the ART game every 20 games until reaching 1500 games thereafter. A loop lottery may be performed.
(12) Based on the state of the instructed flag (see FIG. 37) stored in the RWM address F022, it may be determined whether or not the advantageous section can be ended. That is, as one of the determination of the end of the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section can be ended if the value of the instructed flag is FFH, and it is determined that the end is impossible if it is 00H.

(13) An error control process may be executed when an empty error occurs. Here, the error control process is a part of the game progress main process and indicates a state waiting for an operation (error canceling operation) of the setting / reset switch 82c and the like. However, even when the error control process is being executed, the timer interrupt process is controlled to be executed. As described above, the timer of 4.1 seconds, which is the minimum game time, is timed by the timer interrupt process. By performing the timer interrupt process during the execution of the error control process, error control can be performed by the occurrence of an empty error. Even when the process is executed, 4.1 seconds (timer subtraction) are continuously performed.

  Conventionally, when an empty error occurs and the error control process is executed, the timer interrupt process also waits. Therefore, if an empty error occurs, the 4.1-second timer subtraction is also temporarily suspended, and an empty error occurs. After being released, the timer subtraction was resumed. For this reason, in the game after the occurrence of the empty error, a time of + α is required for the time elapsed until the empty error is canceled. However, in this embodiment, even during the error control process in which an empty error has occurred, the timer subtraction process of 4.1 seconds is performed, so that the game can be executed immediately after the empty error is released. . Thereby, compared with the case where the conventional empty error generate | occur | produced, the time until a game can be performed can be shortened. Although an empty error has been described as an example, the present invention can also be applied to other errors such as a medal clogging error.

(14) As an advantageous section counter of the RWM address (F024), “1500” is set before the advantageous section is started, and “1” is subtracted every time a game in the advantageous section is executed. When the counter reaches “0”, the advantageous section may be controlled to end. Further, at this time, when the ending effect becomes “30”, the advantageous section may be controlled to start.

(15) The winning number including the winning of the bonus combination as the winning combination, the winning number A where the advantageous segment shift lottery for shifting to the advantageous segment is performed, and the winning number including the winning of the bonus combination as the winning combination In addition, there is a winning number B for which an advantageous section transition lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is not performed, and a bonus combination is given when the winning number A is determined and when the winning number B is determined. As a production process until the production of the result indicating that it has been won, a common production process can be output, and if the winning number A is determined in the role lottery and the winning lottery is selected, a bonus The advantageous section lamp may be lit after the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the winning number A is determined and the advantageous section shift lottery is won, after the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, the effect is output in the first effect mode, and the winning number B is determined, An effect may be output in the second effect form after the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the “first effect mode” may be, for example, the premier bonus effect shown in FIG. 53, and the “second effect mode” may be, for example, the normal bonus shown in FIG. It may be something like a production.

  This is to notify immediately which winning number has been determined when there is a case where an advantageous section shift lottery is executed or an advantageous section shift lottery is not executed according to the determined winning number. In other words, since the player knows whether or not the advantageous section shift lottery has been executed based on the notified winning number, it does not occur that the player cannot have a sense of expectation in the game after the game. It is to make it.

  When such a configuration is adopted, the same effect may be selected even if different winning numbers are determined until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, and the bonus After the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been prepared, the advantageous interval lamp or the like is informed whether or not the winning zone transition lottery has been won, so it is thrilled until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is prepared and the third stop button is released. A feeling can be given.

(16) After satisfying the start condition of the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section (hereinafter also referred to as “the number of advantageous section games”) is updated as the game progresses. When the end condition is satisfied, predetermined information is set to an initial value (clear). The predetermined information includes at least information indicating an advantageous section game (for example, data such as RWM address F020 (game section flag) and F021 (game state number)) and an advantageous section game number (for example, RWM address F024). (Advantageous section counter) data). Further, the advantageous section end condition includes that the number of advantageous section games has reached a specific value (0), and a special effect (ending effect) suggesting that the number of advantageous section games is approaching the specific value. ) May be executed. Here, the special effect (ending effect) refers to an effect executed over a plurality of games. Further, when the first bonus combination is won during the normal section, the symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination won is displayed in the first mode, whereas the special effect (ending effect) in the advantageous section is displayed. When the first bonus combination is won during execution, the symbol combination corresponding to the selected first bonus combination is displayed in the second mode while executing the special effect.

  The “first mode” is a mode in which, for example, a symbol combination (for example, “7-7-7”) corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed slightly larger in the center of the screen of the image display device. In addition, the “second mode” is a mode in which a symbol combination (for example, “7-7-7”) corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed slightly smaller at the right end of the screen of the image display device, for example.

  If a bonus combination is won when a special effect is being executed, and an effect indicating that the bonus combination is won is executed, it becomes impossible to enjoy the special effect being executed. For this reason, in a situation where a special performance is being output, the above configuration is used in order to perform an effect that allows the user to be notified of the bonus combination while being able to enjoy the special performance. It may be adopted.

  With the above configuration, when a bonus combination is won during an ending production that suggests that the player is nearing the end condition of the advantageous section, the bonus combination is played in a manner that does not interfere with the ending production. By notifying the winning combination or the symbol combination of the bonus combination, it is possible to effectively show the ending effect while prompting the player to arrange the symbol combination of the bonus combination.

(17) In the transition diagram of the lottery state shown in FIG. 27, after the bonus game (1BB-A game, 1BB-B game to 1BB-F game) is completed, the process proceeds to RT2, and from RT2 to RT1 (more specifically, Migrating from other RTs such as RT3). Here, when the bonus combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in the situation of RT1 and being in ART (gaming state number 5), the bonus game is executed on the condition. After the bonus game is completed, the game proceeds to RT2. (In this case, the lottery state transitions from RT1 → RT3 → 1BB-A game (or 1BB-B to F game) → RT2). At this time, the winning condition satisfying the transition condition from RT2 to RT1 when transitioning from RT2 to RT1, or the transition condition from RTX to RT1 when transitioning from RT2 to RTX (RT state other than RT1 and RT2) → RT1 If the player wins the game, the game may be added with respect to the number of games in the ART.

  Conventionally, it has been possible to execute an ART game extra lottery or the like under any conditions. On the other hand, it is desirable that the difference in the appearance due to the setting difference is based on the winning of the winning combination, and it is not desirable that the performance related to the instruction such as AT is different depending on the setting difference. For this reason, in a bonus game in which a winning combination having a setting difference and a bonus combination having a setting difference are won, the gaming machine is such that an extra lottery cannot be executed.

  Therefore, when the bonus combination is won during ART, the above-described configuration may be adopted so that an extra lottery regarding the number of games during ART can be executed. If such a configuration is adopted, for example, in the game in which the RT transition combination (for example, the replay C (replay-H) of the winning number 19 (winning / replaying winning number 19)) has been won is not being set in the ART. It is possible to give a bonus such as an extra number related to the number of games of the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

(18) After satisfying the advantageous section start condition, the number of advantageous section games is updated according to the progress of the game. When the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, predetermined information is initialized (cleared). To. The predetermined information includes at least information indicating an advantageous section game (for example, data such as RWM address F020 (game section flag) and F021 (game state number)) and an advantageous section game number (for example, RWM address F024). (Advantageous section counter) data). On the other hand, the predetermined information includes at least setting value data (for example, data of RWM address F000 (setting value data)) and information that can identify the RT state (for example, RWM address F005 (RT state number)). Data) and storage number data (for example, data of RWM address F010 (storage number display data)) are not included.

  Conventionally, for example, specifications that may cause thousands of medals to be paid out in a so-called “one blow” due to continuous (or continued) advantageous situations such as during ART have become mainstream. There was a risk that the heart would be beaten remarkably. Therefore, in order to make the game after the end of the advantageous section an appropriate game by initializing specific information based on the end of the advantageous section and not initializing predetermined information. It may be adopted.

  In the above configuration, in order to prevent a large number of balls from being obtained in a series of consecutive games, information relating to advantageous sections is initialized, while data such as set value data and stored number data are not initialized. Thus, the normal game (the game in the normal section) that is executed after the advantageous section ends can be normally executed.

(19) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section A transition lottery means, and a game medium discharge means for discharging a bet and / or stored game media when a clearing operation is performed. You may make it alert | report that it transfers to an effective area before operation becomes possible.

  Here, “notification of operation mode” includes notification of the pressing order of the stop switch and notification of the operation timing of the stop switch by showing a so-called symbol to be pressed (the same applies hereinafter). The “game medium” is not limited to a medal, and may be a game ball (a so-called pachinko ball). Moreover, the information which shows the value recorded on recording media, such as a magnetic card, a non-contact-type IC card, or a coin incorporating an IC chip, may be sufficient. Further, the “clearing operation” is an operation performed for discharging the bet and / or the stored game media, and corresponds to, for example, an operation of a clearing switch provided in the slot machine.

  Even if a conventional slot machine wins a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery”) that determines whether or not to start an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch, In most cases, the fact that the player has won the AT lottery is triggered by the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played since the game that has won the AT lottery. This is because it was thought that the player's sense of expectation for the AT game cannot be given for a long period of time if the game was won in the AT lottery. For this reason, some players who have won the AT lottery have stopped playing the game without noticing that (before notifying that they have won the AT lottery). . In particular, the trend was seen by beginners. On the other hand, there are those who are not willing to win the AT lottery with their own power from the end, and find a slot machine that has already won the AT lottery by playing only a predetermined number of games and play a game. Under these circumstances, the person who played the game when winning the AT lottery (the person who won the AT lottery) did not play the AT game, and a third party who did not contribute to the AT lottery There was a voice that it might be absurd to play games.

  Therefore, there is less risk that the subsequent game will be stopped without noticing that the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section in which the order of pressing the stop switch (and / or operation timing) can be notified is determined. In order to achieve this, it is conceivable to employ the above-described configuration (19).

  According to the configuration of (19) described above, when it is determined to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the transition to the effective section is notified before the clearing operation becomes possible. It is possible to reduce the possibility of stopping the game without noticing the fact. This is because most of the players check whether or not the stored game media remain when the game is stopped, and perform the clearing operation when the game media remain. Therefore, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, when the liquidation operation is attempted to stop the game, the transition to the advantageous section is made by notifying the fact before the liquidation operation becomes possible. The possibility of noticing the game becomes high and the possibility of stopping the subsequent game can be reduced despite the fact that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

  Further, in the configuration of (19) described above, a storage number display means for displaying the number of storages of the game medium by a lighting mode of a plurality of light emitters is provided, and the storage number display of the light emitters of the storage number display means. It is informed that a transition to an advantageous section is made by turning on a light-emitting body that is not used for the first time.

  Here, as the “reserved number display means”, an 8-segment display (display configured with seven segments a to g for displaying alphanumeric characters and one segment DP for displaying dots (decimal points)), etc. In this case, the segment DP corresponds to “a luminous body that is not used for displaying the number of stored”.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is notified that the transition to the advantageous section is determined by the light emitter that is not used for displaying the number of storages in the storage number display means. Thereby, when the display of the storage number display means is checked to confirm whether or not the game medium stored by the player remains, it is also visually confirmed whether or not it is informed that the player will shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game is stopped without noticing that it shifts to the advantageous section. Further, since it is notified that the advantageous section is shifted using the already provided display means, it is not necessary to newly provide a dedicated notification means, so the cost does not increase.

(20) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be notified, and an amount of game media according to the game result from the stored game media A payout means for paying out, and a game section control means for controlling the transition between the normal section and the advantageous section, and by the game performed until the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section again. The expected amount of game media to be paid out may be set to be equal to or less than half of the allowable storage amount of game media in the payout means.

  Conventional slot machines are generally equipped with a so-called hopper (device for paying out stored medals) and store medals inserted from the outside. , Paying out the number of medals corresponding to the winning small role. Conventionally, when there are no medals stored in the hopper, the slot machine detects this and notifies that an empty error (hereinafter also referred to as “CA error”) has occurred. Thereby, when the staff of the game hall notices the occurrence of the CA error, the hopper is replenished with medals. However, in general, since the number of staff is small relative to the number of slot machines installed in the amusement hall, the replenishment work of medals every time a CA error occurs is harsh for the staff of the amusement hall. It was. Of course, if the number of medals that can be stored in the hopper's medal storage unit is large, the frequency of occurrence of CA errors can be reduced. However, since the hopper is installed inside the slot machine, the size of the medal storage unit is increased. There is also a limit to increasing the allowable amount of medals.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable that the hopper's medal storage part is filled at the start of the game hall business. For example, in a state where the so-called bonus game or the above-described AT game is not performed, the player plays the game. As a result, the number of medals in the medal storage unit increases, and there is a possibility that a medal full error indicating that the medal allowable amount of the medal storage unit has been greatly exceeded soon occurs. As a result, if a medal full error occurs at the same time after the game hall starts operating, the staff of the game hall will be busy with the medal collection work to reduce the medals in the medal storage section. Also, depending on the number of staff at the game hall, even if a CA error occurs, the medal replenishment operation may not be performed immediately. In such a case, the player can play the game again after the CA error occurs. Since it will wait for a long time until it becomes possible, if the CA error occurs frequently, the player's irritation will increase. Also, during AT games that can inform the order of pressing the stop switch (and / or the operation timing), it is an advantageous state that a small role is easy to win (that is, the frequency at which medals are paid out is high). It can be said that this is a situation in which the interest of the player is increasing. Therefore, if a CA error frequently occurs in such a situation, the player is frequently interrupted, and there is a possibility that the player's irritation is further increased.

  In view of this, it is conceivable to employ the above-described configuration (20) so as to reduce the work burden associated with the game media stored in the slot machine.

  According to the configuration of (20) described above, for example, if a half of the amount of game media allowed in the payout means is replenished to the payout means at the start of business at the game hall, Even if it shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game medium stored in the payout means is exhausted due to the game played in the advantageous section. As a result, it is less likely that game media need to be replenished even if the zone has shifted to an advantageous section immediately after the start of business, so the work load related to the game media stored in the slot machine is reduced. be able to. In addition, even if you have not shifted to an advantageous section for a while after starting business, the game media stored in the payout means can be recovered in a short time because there is a sufficient amount of game media stored in the payout means Therefore, it is possible to reduce the work burden related to the game media stored in the slot machine.

  In the configuration of (20) described above, the gaming section control means performs an advantageous section transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is determined as follows: It may be set so as not to exceed the rate of winning once when a game is played using all of the same amount of game medium as the allowable storage amount of the payout means.

  According to the configuration described above, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set so as not to exceed the ratio of winning once when a game is played using all the same amount of game medium as the allowable storage amount of the payout means. Therefore, even if the game medium stored in the payout means is exhausted when the advantageous section ends, the amount of game media stored in the payout means until the next transition to the advantageous section However, there is a high possibility that the allowable storage amount has been reached or is approaching the allowable storage amount. For this reason, the possibility that the game medium stored in the payout means will be exhausted during the next advantageous section can be reduced, so that the possibility of requiring replenishment of the game medium is reduced, and the slot machine stores the game medium. The burden of work related to the played game media can be reduced.

(21) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be notified, a lottery means for performing lottery, and a predetermined end condition in the advantageous section A game section control means for ending the advantageous section based on the operation of the stop switch that provides an advantageous game result when the lottery means achieves a predetermined lottery result in the advantageous section. If the mode has never been notified, the advantageous section may not be terminated even if the predetermined termination condition is satisfied.

  Here, the “predetermined lottery result” corresponds to, for example, a winning combination (such as “Bell group” in Patent Document 1) with different payout numbers depending on the pressing order.

  Some conventional slot machines end an AT game when a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of stop switches. In such a slot machine, if the player to be notified is not elected once after the AT game starts due to bad luck of the player and before a predetermined number of games are played, an advantageous push order is The AT game was terminated even when it was never notified. However, it can be said that it is too severe for the player to end the AT game without giving the player the benefit even though the AT game is started. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, it is conceivable that the number of games to be used as an AT game end condition is increased to increase the possibility that a notification target role is won during an AT game. However, if the number of games that are the end condition of AT games is increased too much considering the players who are unlucky, the number of winning of the role to be notified exceeds the appropriate category in most players, and AT Since there may be a case where the number of medals to be paid out becomes too large during the game, there is a risk that the player's gambling will be excessively beaten.

  Therefore, as an AT game end condition, for example, when the number of medals paid out during an AT game reaches a predetermined number (payout number management), the number of medals inserted during an AT game is paid out. Conditions such as when the difference from the number of medals has reached a predetermined value (difference number management), or when the number of times of notification of an advantageous pressing order has reached a predetermined number, can be considered. However, if any of these end conditions is adopted, if the situation where the subject to be notified is not won during AT game, the AT game may not end indefinitely. There is.

  Therefore, in order to avoid a situation in which no benefit is obtained during the advantageous section despite the transition to the advantageous section, it is conceivable to employ the configuration (21) described above.

  According to the configuration of (21) described above, the advantageous section does not end unless an advantageous push order is notified at least once during the advantageous section, so that the player cannot receive any benefit during the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to avoid denying the significance of the existence of an advantageous section.

  Further, in the configuration of (21) described above, the game section control means includes special game execution means for performing a special game when a special game result is obtained due to a specific lottery result in the lottery means, When the special game is performed in the advantageous section, the operation mode (push order and / or operation timing) of the stop switch that provides an advantageous game result when the lottery means achieves a predetermined lottery result in the advantageous section. ) May be terminated based on the fact that the predetermined termination condition is satisfied even if the notification is not reported once.

  Here, the “specific lottery result” corresponds to, for example, winning a so-called bonus combination in a combination lottery, and the “special game result” corresponds to winning a bonus combination. In addition, a so-called bonus game corresponds to the “special game”.

  According to the configuration described above, when a special game is played during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is determined based on the fact that the predetermined end condition is satisfied even if the advantageous pushing order is not notified in the advantageous section. finish. In this case, since the player is benefited by the special game during the advantageous section, it is possible to avoid a situation where no benefit is obtained during the advantageous section. In addition, since a large amount of medals are paid out during the bonus game, if the advantageous section is not terminated in order to perform one advantageous pushing order until such time, the player's interest is reduced. Such a situation can be avoided.

(22) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the push switch operation mode can be reported, a counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section, A game section control means for making a transition from the advantageous section to the normal section when the count value reaches a predetermined value during the section, wherein the gaming section control means is in the middle of a special game being performed in the advantageous section When the count value reaches a predetermined value, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed while continuing the special game. For example, a bonus game corresponds to the “special game”.

  In the conventional slot machine, there is no restriction on the continuation (for example, addition) of the AT game that can notify the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch. There was an opinion that an excessive number of medals may be paid out to AT games, and that the player's gambling feelings are being greatly revered.

  Therefore, the above-described configuration (22) is adopted so that the amount of game media given during the advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified can be moderately suppressed. It is possible.

  According to the configuration of (22) described above, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, so that it is given in one advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the amount of game media to an appropriate value, and it can be avoided that the player's gambling joy is significantly increased. Further, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value during the execution of the special game, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, but the special game is continuously performed. For this reason, the special game can be played to the end even after the transition to the normal section, so there is no possibility of giving the player a sense of unnecessary loss.

  In addition, in the configuration of (22) described above, when the count value reaches a predetermined value in the advantageous section, if the special game is not performed, the game is set in a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed. If the special game is being performed when the count value reaches a predetermined value, a configuration as shown in (22 ′) may be provided that includes freeze control means that does not set the freeze state.

  According to the above-described configuration (22 '), when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, a freeze state is established. For this reason, for example, the number of games played during the advantageous section and the amount of game media granted during the advantageous section (for example, the number of medals, etc.) during the freezing state Information relating to the game can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information. On the other hand, when the special game is being performed when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the frozen state is not entered. As a result, the special game is not interrupted in the middle due to the freeze state, and there is no possibility of deteriorating the refreshing feeling when the player is playing the special game.

  Furthermore, in the configuration of (22 ') described above, the freeze control means may be in the freeze state when the special game ends. In such a configuration, when the special game is finished, it is in a frozen state. For example, when it is in the frozen state, the number of games executed during the special game or given during the special game is given. Information relating to the game played during the special game, such as the amount of game media that has been played, can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information.

  In the middle of a special game, if the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, information related to the game performed in the advantageous section described above in the freeze state when the special game ends. It may be presented to the player. In addition, as information presented at this time, a value obtained by adding the number of games executed in the special game in the normal section to the number of games played in the advantageous section, or the amount of game media provided in the advantageous section In addition, a value obtained by adding the amount of game media provided in the special game during the normal section may be presented to the player.

(23) A specifying means for specifying any one of a plurality of setting values, and a lottery means for performing a lottery for determining a winning combination with a winning probability corresponding to the setting value specified by the specifying means. In the lottery state, a lottery subject to the lottery is divided into a plurality of small roles to which a game medium is given when winning, and a plurality of replays that can be played again without inserting the game medium when winning The winning combination of a re-competitor when the winning probability of a specific small role is different by at least two set values and the winning probability of a specific small role is set to a low value. The probability is set high, and the winning probability of the re-gamer when the winning probability of a specific small role is set high may be set low.

  In a conventional slot machine, whether or not to execute an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch is determined by AT lottery. The number of games that can be performed (initial number of games) is determined by lottery or the like. In addition, there are cases where the winning rate (ease of paying out medals) can be adjusted by changing the winning probability of the AT lottery described above and the determined initial number of games depending on the set value. Under these circumstances, in recent years, most of the slot machines installed in the amusement hall have been set to a low setting value, and there has been a complaint that it is difficult to win the AT lottery. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, the winning probability of the AT lottery and the determined initial number of games are not changed depending on the setting value, and only the winning probability of the small role, the re-playing role or the bonus role is set as the setting value. It is desirable to be able to adjust the payout rate by making it different accordingly.

  However, if the winning probability of the small role or re-gamer is increased as the setting value is higher as in the conventional case, the initial number of games does not change depending on the setting value, so the higher the setting value, the more medals are paid out during the AT game There was a possibility. However, if the initial number of games is set to be small, the player's willingness to play may be reduced.

  Therefore, in order to be able to adjust the rate at which game media are given by changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the possibility of an excessive amount of game media being given even at a high set value. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration (23) described above.

  According to the configuration of (23) described above, the winning probability of a specific small role is different between at least two set values, so that the payout rate can be adjusted by changing the set value. In addition, when the winning probability of a re-playing role is set to a high value when the winning probability of a specific small role is set low, and the setting value is set to a high winning probability of a specific small role Since the winning probability of the re-game player is set to be low, the possibility that an excessive amount of game media will be given can be reduced.

  Further, in the configuration of (23) described above, the re-games include push-order re-games having different symbol combinations when winning according to the press order of the stop switches, and the predetermined transition condition The lottery state control means for changing the lottery state according to the lottery means, the lottery means determines the winning combination with the current lottery state and the winning probability corresponding to the set value specified by the designation means, the lottery state transition means, In a specific lottery state, if a specific push order re-gamer is determined to be a winning combination, and the symbol combination at the time of winning is a specific symbol combination, the lottery state is changed from the specific lottery state to another lottery state Then, the winning probability of the specific push order re-gamer in the specific lottery state may not be different for each set value.

  According to the above-described configuration, the winning probability of the specific push order re-gamer in the specific lottery state is not changed according to the set value. Since the ease of shifting to the lottery state is constant, the change in the lottery state can be prevented from affecting the payout rate according to the change in the set value.

(24) a normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a game section control means for controlling transition between the normal section and the advantageous section; A lottery means for performing a lottery to determine a winning combination from among a plurality of combinations, and when the special combination is determined to be a winning combination by the lottery means in an advantageous section, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state, The game section control means performs a transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the normal section when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination by the lottery means in the advantageous section, and the transition lottery is won May shift to a normal section, and the predetermined combination may be determined as a winning combination together with a special combination.

  Here, the “special role” is a bonus role (1BB-A), and the “favorable state” is RT2 that is more likely to win a re-playing role (re-playing-H (replay C)). It is.

  Among conventional slot machines, in a slot machine that determines whether or not to shift from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state by a transition lottery performed when a predetermined winning combination is won, an advantageous gaming state is achieved. When the player is aware that the player has won the above-mentioned predetermined winning combination, there is a risk that the interest and motivation of the player will be reduced.

  Therefore, in order to allow the player to play a game with a sense of expectation even when a winning combination that may shift from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state is determined, the above-described (24 ) May be adopted.

  According to the configuration of (24) described above, when a predetermined combination is won in the advantageous section, a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the normal section is performed, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to the normal section is performed. . Therefore, there is a possibility that if the predetermined combination is won, the advantageous section may be shifted to the normal section. If the predetermined combination is won only by itself, the predetermined combination will be won and the player will be notified about the transition of the game section. There is a risk of losing a sense of loss. However, if the predetermined role can be won at the same time as the special role, and if it is won at the same time, it will be possible to shift to an advantageous state, and the player will have an expectation for the advantageous state by winning the predetermined role. You can have a sense of superiority. Thereby, even if the predetermined combination is won, the player can play the game with expectation.

(25) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and an advantageous section notification means indicating whether or not the stop switch is an advantageous section And a lottery means for determining the lottery result relating to the winning combination, and an effect control means for controlling the production, and the lottery result by the lottery means includes a first lottery result including a special role and a first lottery result. And a second lottery result that includes the special role, and when the first lottery result is determined as an effect by the effect control means, and the second lottery result is determined. And when the first lottery result is determined in the normal section, there is a case where the same content is produced in the process up to the result production indicating that the special role has been won. Figure corresponding to role There is a case where the combination is shifted to the advantageous section after being stopped and displayed, and when the second lottery result is determined in the normal section, it is advantageous even after the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed. When the first lottery result is determined in the normal section and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed, and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the symbol corresponding to the special combination is not included. You may make it alert | report using the said advantageous area alerting | reporting means, after a combination is stopped and displayed.

  Here, the “advantageous operation mode” includes, for example, an operation mode in which a small role with the largest number of medal payouts is won when a plurality of small roles are won, and the winning probability of a predetermined winning role is high. An operation mode in which a symbol combination that can be shifted to a lottery state is stopped and displayed, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts to a lottery state in which the winning probability of a predetermined winning combination is reduced can be avoided, and the like (The same applies below). The “special combination” may be a so-called bonus combination.

  Recently, a player who played a game when AT gaming was allowed would stop the game before AT game started without noticing that, and other players would benefit from it. In order to prevent such a situation, it is required to notify the user using a lamp or the like when an AT game is permitted. However, if it is immediately notified whether or not an AT game is permitted in such a slot machine, it becomes clear whether or not the AT game is permitted by the notification, and a sense of expectation is expected in subsequent games. Could not have.

  Therefore, even if the lottery result does not shift to an advantageous gaming state, the above-described configuration is adopted so that the player can play a game with a sense of expectation even in a subsequent game. It is possible to do.

  According to the configuration of (25) described above, when the first lottery result is determined, there is a case of shifting to the advantageous section, and when the second lottery result is determined, there is no case of shifting to the advantageous section. However, there is a case where the same content is produced until the result production indicating that the special role is won. For this reason, the player can play a game with expectation for the transition to the advantageous section until the presence / absence of notification by the advantageous section notification means performed after the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is determined.

  Further, in the configuration of (25) described above, the effect control means is configured to shift to the advantageous section after the first lottery result is determined in the normal section and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed. , The symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, the first effect can be executed in the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, and the second lottery result is determined in the normal section, The second effect may be executable in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed.

  According to the configuration described above, after the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, the first effect can be executed when the advantageous section is shifted to, and the second effect is executed when the advantageous combination is not shifted. Since it becomes possible, it can be recognized whether or not to shift to the advantageous section depending on the type of effect that can be executed.

(26) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and an advantageous section notification means indicating whether or not the stop switch is an advantageous section A lottery means for determining a lottery result relating to the winning combination, and the lottery result by the lottery means includes a lottery result different from the first lottery result including the predetermined role and the special role. And the second lottery result including the predetermined combination, and when the first lottery result is determined by the lottery means, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is determined regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. When the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined role can be displayed regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. When the first lottery result is determined by the selection means, it is possible to shift from the next game to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is shifted, before a predetermined operation for starting a game in the advantageous section is performed. When the advantageous section notifying means gives a notification and the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means in the normal section, it is possible to shift from the next game to the advantageous section. Before the predetermined operation for starting the game is performed, the advantageous section notification means notifies the third lottery result in the game in which the advantageous section starts by determining the second lottery result. If the third lottery result is determined in a game in which an advantageous section starts when the first lottery result is determined and the first lottery result is determined, the notification is performed. It may not be performed the lottery about the technique.

  Here, the “predetermined lottery regarding the notification game” includes, for example, a lottery regarding the start or end of an AT game (including a promotion lottery or a falling lottery of a gaming state), or a lottery regarding an execution period of an AT game (so-called extra lottery or loop) Including lottery).

  Conventionally, matters relating to AT games (for example, matters relating to the start or end of AT games, matters relating to the period of execution of AT games, matters relating to profits from AT games, etc.) (such a lottery is also referred to as “AT-related lottery”). )), Depending on the conditions under which AT-related lottery is performed, an unexpected profit may be given to the player by the player's intentional game operation. For example, if there is a slot machine that performs an AT-related lottery when a so-called bonus combination is won (inside the so-called bonus), the player intentionally after the bonus combination is won By performing the reel stop operation so that the bonus combination does not win, it becomes possible to continue the AT-related lottery state as long as the player desires.

  Therefore, the above-described configuration may be adopted in order to avoid giving an excessive profit to the player in a situation where a specific lottery result state can be maintained by a gaming operation. Conceivable.

  According to the configuration of (26) described above, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed both when the first lottery result is determined and when the second lottery result is determined. Can prevent the player from realizing that he has won. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a stop operation that does not intentionally win a special combination by the player. In addition, when the first lottery result is determined, even if the third lottery result is subsequently determined, since the lottery regarding the notification game is not performed, the lottery regarding the notification game is performed by the player's intentional game operation. There is no fear of continuing to give the opportunity.

  Further, in the configuration of (26) described above, the first lottery state and the second lottery state having different winning probabilities of the re-gamer are provided, and the second lottery state is more regenerated than the first lottery state. When the first winning result is determined in the first lottery state, the winning combination is set higher than the winning probability of the game player, and the next game after the game in which the first lottery result is determined is changed to the special combination. It is good also as a structure provided with the lottery state transfer means to which it transfers to a 2nd lottery state until the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the first lottery result is determined in the first lottery state, the winning probability of the re-gamer becomes high until the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed from the next game. Therefore, even if the lottery regarding the notification lottery is not performed after the first lottery result is determined, the player can play many games with a small investment.

(27) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a normal section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the advantageous section Section control means for transitioning to, gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state in the advantageous section in accordance with a predetermined transition condition, and advantageous section game count storage updated based on execution of the game performed during the advantageous section Means, a game section information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section, and information stored in at least the advantageous section game number storage means when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and An initialization unit that clears information stored in the game section information storage unit, and a specific information based on information stored in the advantageous section game number storage unit And the predetermined end condition includes that the information stored in the advantageous section game number storage means becomes a specific value, and the effect control means includes: When a predetermined special combination is won during the normal section, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is notified in the first mode, and the predetermined special combination is won during execution of the specific performance. May notify the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination in the second mode.

  Here, the “first mode” corresponds to, for example, when the symbol combination is notified by an image, the symbol combination to be notified is largely displayed at a conspicuous position such as the center of the screen. On the other hand, in the “second mode”, on the screen on which the specific effect being executed is displayed, for example, the symbol combination is reduced in the right corner of the screen (so that the display of the special effect is not hidden as much as possible). Applicable to display.

  In the conventional slot machine, various effects are performed in order to improve the interest of the game. Some of the slot machines that perform such effects include, for example, a state advantageous to the player (so-called bonus game or AT) in order to enhance the player's expectation, anxiety, achievement, satisfaction, superiority, etc. When there is a possibility of shifting to a game or the like, or when shifting to an advantageous state, there is also a special effect that is not normally performed. In a slot machine that performs such an effect, when a so-called bonus combination is won during a conventional performance, such as during an AT game, for example, the special combination being executed is interrupted and the bonus combination is Since an effect indicating that the player has been won is executed, the interest of the special effect is impaired, and there is a possibility that water may be poured into the exhilaration that the player is enjoying.

  Therefore, even if a special role is won during execution of a special performance, in order to be able to notify that the special role has been won while continuously executing the special performance, It is conceivable to adopt the configuration described above.

  According to the configuration of (27) described above, even if a special role is won during a special performance that suggests that the advantageous section is approaching, an aspect that does not interfere with the special performance being executed Since it is possible to notify that the special combination is won in the (second mode), it is possible to effectively continue the special performance while encouraging the player to win the special combination.

  In the above-described configuration (27), the advantageous section game number storage means stores a predetermined value different from “0” based on the fact that the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, and is stored in the advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which “1” is subtracted by “1” based on the execution of the received game (27 ′). With such a configuration, for example, when the specific value is set to “0” and the value stored in the advantageous section game number storage means is subtracted using the CPU register, the specific value is obtained by checking the zero flag. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU.

  In the configuration of (27) or (27 ′) described above, the notification mode of the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is such that the symbol combination is displayed smaller in the second mode than in the first mode. It may be. With such a configuration, when a predetermined special combination is won during a specific performance, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is displayed smaller than in the normal section. The notification for notifying the player that the player has won can be prevented from interfering with a specific performance.

(28) Setting value information storage means for storing setting value information, lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery, and a notification game capable of notifying an operation mode of a stop switch that provides a game result advantageous to the player Notification game execution means for executing the state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, wherein the lottery means determines the lottery result, and the first lottery state and the second lottery state differ in the winning probability of the predetermined lottery result If the first lottery result including the special role is determined by the lottery means in the second lottery state, after the special game corresponding to the special role is finished, In the first lottery state, when it is in the first lottery state and in the informing game state, a privilege relating to the informing game state can be granted based on the fact that the second lottery means is determined by the lottery means. In addition, the probability that the second lottery state is determined based on the fact that the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the second lottery result is determined is set value information stored in the set value information storage means. It may be the same regardless.

  Some slot machines that perform conventional AT games end the AT game when a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of the AT game, and if a predetermined combination is won during the AT game, Some have increased the number of games that can be played (so-called addition). Here, since there has been no limitation on a predetermined role that triggers the addition (hereinafter also referred to as “additional role”), for example, a role having a different winning probability according to a so-called set value is added. It was also possible to. However, the reason why the winning winning probabilities differ depending on the set value is to adjust the number of benefits given to the player by winning the winning winning combination. Therefore, if the difference in the setting value affects the performance of the AT game, for example, although the winning probability of the role is generally lower than the other setting value, the game will be more than the other setting value by the AT game. It is possible to increase the benefits given to the user, and it is not preferable because it cannot play the original role of the set value.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the frequency of occurrence of a lottery regarding AT games (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery opportunity”) is not affected by the difference in the set value. Do not draw lots related to AT games during bonus games that start when a combination with a different winning probability is not used as an AT lottery opportunity or a bonus combination with a different winning probability depending on the set value wins. It is possible. However, if no lottery related to AT games is performed during bonus games, players will not be able to gain any AT benefits even after shifting to bonus games. It was.

  Therefore, even when a special role is won during the execution of a notification game in which an advantageous push order is notified, a privilege related to the notification game can be given, and the interest of the player can be enhanced as described above. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration (28).

  According to the configuration of (28) described above, when the special game is performed by determining the first lottery result including the special role in the second lottery state, the first lottery is performed after the special game is finished. If the second lottery result is determined in the first lottery state and the notification game state when the state is shifted to the state, it is possible to grant a privilege related to the notification game state. Thus, since the privilege regarding the notification game can be given after the special role is won, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, as a configuration different from the above (28), a set value information storage means for storing set value information, a lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery, and a stop that provides a game result advantageous to the player A notification game execution means for executing a notification game state capable of notifying an operation mode of the switch until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, wherein the winning probability of a predetermined winning combination is determined as a state in which the winning combination is determined by the lottery means The first lottery state, the second lottery state, and the third lottery state are different, and the third lottery state is a lottery state that can be transferred via at least the first lottery state, When the first lottery result including the special combination is determined by the lottery means when the lottery state is 2, the transition to the first lottery state is made after the special game corresponding to the special combination is completed. Transition conditions for It becomes possible to shift to the third lottery state by playing, and when it is the third lottery state and the notification game state, the notification game state is related to the fact that the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means. A privilege can be granted, and the probability that the second lottery result is determined based on the fact that the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed is stored in the setting value information storage means. It may be the same regardless of the set value information.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the special game is performed by determining the first lottery result including the special combination in the second lottery state, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the special game is finished. When the second lottery state is determined and the second lottery result is determined when the first lottery state is shifted to the third lottery state and the third lottery state and the notification game state are established, a privilege related to the notification game state can be granted. To do. Thus, since the privilege regarding the notification game can be given after the special role is won, the interest of the player can be improved.

(29) A normal section where notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not performed, an advantageous section where notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is possible, a credit number storage means for storing the number of credits, and set value information Set value information storage means capable of storing a lottery, lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery based on the set value information, and lottery state information storage means for storing lottery state information indicating a lottery state by the lottery means And a section control means for shifting to the normal section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, an advantageous section game number storage means updated based on the execution of the game performed during the advantageous section, and the advantageous section A game section information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not the game is completed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section game number storage means The stored information, the information stored in the game section information storage means is at least initialized, the information stored in the credit number storage means, the information stored in the set value information storage means, the lottery The information stored in the state information storage means is not initialized, and the predetermined end condition includes that the information stored in the advantageous section game number storage means becomes a specific value. Good.

  Some conventional slot machines start AT games again based on the game results during the completed AT game even when the AT game is completed. In such a slot machine, an advantageous situation such as an AT game may continue beyond expectation, and in such a case, an excessive number of medals will be paid out due to one AT game. . For this reason, a player who has invested excessively in the game has the expectation that once the AT game is started, the investment may be regained, and the player's gambling will be greatly recognised. There was a risk of it.

  Therefore, it is possible not to become an excessively advantageous situation in a subsequent game by a game result performed in an advantageous situation, and to continue a game in an appropriate state after the advantageous situation is ended. In order to achieve this, it is conceivable to adopt the configuration (29).

  According to the above-described configuration, when the advantageous section is terminated, information on the advantageous section is initialized, so that there is no possibility that an excessive privilege is given to the player due to the game in the advantageous section once. be able to. On the other hand, since information related to games that are not related to the type of game section, such as the number of credits, setting value information, and lottery status information, is not initialized, the game in the normal section that is executed after the advantageous section ends normally is executed. it can.

(30) The normal section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, the advantageous section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and the advantageous period of the total number of games executed A calculation means for calculating an advantageous section ratio indicating a ratio of the number of games and a display means including four indicators, and information indicating the ratio among the four indicators constituting the display means is first displayed. Display on the third display unit and the second display unit, and display the identification information indicating the type of ratio displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit on the third display unit and the fourth display unit. When the section ratio is displayed on the display means, if the value of the advantageous section ratio is equal to or greater than a specific value, the value of the advantageous section ratio displayed on the first display and the second display is blinked. May be.

  In conventional slot machines, various probabilities are set appropriately so that so-called bonus games and AT games are properly performed, and medals are not paid out excessively, so that the player's gambling is not remarkably reduced. Yes. In addition, slot machines are tested before they are put on the market, and it is confirmed that excessive medals are not paid out. However, conventionally, even if the result of the slot machine operation test is good, even after the slot machine is actually installed in the amusement hall and the operation is started, bonus games and AT games are properly performed. There was no way to check if it was.

  In view of this, it is conceivable to adopt the above-described configuration (30) in order to make it possible to confirm whether or not the slot machine after being installed in the amusement hall shows behavior deviating from the design value.

  According to the configuration of (30) described above, the identification information indicating the type of the ratio to be displayed is displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit, and the ratio value corresponding to the displayed identification information is set to the first value. Displayed on the first display and the second display. The ratio displayed on the first display and the second display displays the ratio of the number of games executed in the advantageous section (advantageous section ratio) of the total number of games, and the advantageous section. When the ratio is greater than or equal to a specific value, the displayed value flashes, so when the amusement hall staff, on-site inspectors, etc. visually observe the advantageous section ratio displayed on the display means, the value is It is possible to easily determine whether or not the design value deviates.

  Further, in the configuration of (30) described above, the counter means for counting the total number of games is provided, and when the count value by the counter means does not exceed a predetermined value, the advantageous section ratio is displayed on the display means. The identification information displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit may be displayed blinking.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the total number of games does not exceed the predetermined value, the identification information displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit flashes, so the first display unit and the second display unit It can be easily understood that the advantageous section ratio displayed on the display unit is not calculated after a sufficient number of trials.

10 Slot Machine 12 Body 14 Front Door 21 Display Window 22 Clearing Display LED
23 Replay indicator LED
24 Displayable LED
25 Game start indicator LED
26a, 26b, 26c Input indicator LED
27 Credit number display 28 Acquired number display 33 Checkout switch 34 1-bet switch 35 Maximum bet switch 36 Start switch 37L, 37C, 37R Stop switch 38 Selection switch 39 Determination switch 40L, 40C, 40R Reel 42L, 42C, 42R Stepping Motor 46 Hopper motor 52L, 52R Side lamp 64L, 64R Speaker 70 Image display device 72 Production lamp 74L, 74R Decoration lamp 82b Key switch 82c Setting / reset switch 83 Hopper 83a Medals storage section 87 Setting value display 100 Main control means 101 main control board 103 role monitor 110 winning combination determining means 115 reel control means 120 lottery state control means 125 game section control means 130 freeze control hand 140 notifying game control unit 145 roles ratio monitoring control unit 155 abnormality detecting means 160 LED display control unit 200 sub-control means 212 effect random means

  The present invention relates to a slot machine.

  Conventionally, slot machines are widely known as one of gaming machines. In this type of slot machine, when a player inserts a prescribed number of game media such as medals and game balls, the start switch operation becomes effective, and when the player operates the start switch in this state, a lottery drawing is performed. A plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols drawn thereon start to rotate. When the rotation speed of the reel reaches a certain speed, the operation of the stop switch provided for each reel becomes effective, and when the player operates the stop switch, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. The stop control is performed.

  In the reel stop control described above, when any winning combination is won in the winning lottery, within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch is operated so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are aligned on the active line as much as possible. Pull-in control is performed in the range of. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is lost, kicking control is performed so that the symbol combinations corresponding to some combinations are not aligned on the effective line. If all the reels stop and a symbol combination corresponding to any combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, it means that the combination has won a prize, and a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. The

  Also, among the conventional slot machines, for example, as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, when the middle stage cherries are won, the main control board is in a notification-permitted state, and an advantageous notification effect for the player is executed. Some sub-control boards allow it. In this “advantageous notification effect”, when a “bell group” composed of a plurality of roles is won in the role lottery, the player is notified of the pushing order in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts is won by the sub-control board. .

JP 2014-161344 A

  In the conventional slot machine, there is no restriction on the continuation (for example, addition) of the AT game that can notify the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch. There was an opinion that an excessive number of medals may be paid out to AT games, and that the player's gambling feelings are being greatly revered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and appropriately suppresses the amount of game media provided during an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified. It aims to provide a slot machine that can.

In order to solve the problems described above, the present invention provides:
Among the game section, in the gaming result will have a specific result of the winning lottery, the first section can not perform notification advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
In the game section, the second section that can notify the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the game with the specific result,
Have
A counter for grasping the number of games executed in the second section;
Game control means;
LEDs that can be lit in the second section;
With
The game control means includes
In the second section, based on the fact that the counter value has reached a predetermined value, the second section is ended and the first section is started,
In the second section, the value of the counter becomes the predetermined value, and when the second section is finished, freezing can be performed when the second section is finished,
Based on the special symbol combination stopped display, the special gaming state is started,
Of the game is the second section and the special game state, at predetermined game, when the value of the counter reaches the predetermined value, while maintaining the special game state, the ends of the second section Start the first leg ,
In the predetermined game, when the value of the counter becomes the predetermined value and the second section is finished, freezing is not executed when the second section is finished .

  Here, the “special gaming state” corresponds to a so-called bonus game.

  According to the above-described invention, when the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit (the value of the counter is a predetermined value), the transition from the second section to the first section is performed. It is possible to suppress the amount of game media provided during the section to an appropriate value, and it is possible to avoid remarkably encouraging the player. In addition, among the games in the second section and in the special game state, when the number of games executed in the second section in a predetermined game reaches the upper limit, the game shifts from the second section to the first section. The gaming state is maintained. For this reason, even if it transfers to a 1st area, since a special game state is not complete | finished, there is no possibility of giving a player a useless feeling of loss.

Further , when the number of games executed during the second section reaches the upper limit, the game enters a freeze state when the second section is ended. For this reason, for example, the number of games played during the second section and the amount of game media given during the second section (for example, the number of medals) during the second section Information regarding the played game can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information. On the other hand, when the predetermined game described above is performed when the number of games executed during the second section reaches the upper limit, the freeze state is not entered. Thereby, the game in the special game state is not interrupted in the middle due to the freeze state, and there is no possibility that the player feels refreshed when playing the game in the special game state.

  As described above, according to the slot machine of the present invention, it is possible to moderately suppress the amount of game media provided during an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified.

It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external appearance of the front panel of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the internal structure of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the credit number indicator and ART lamp of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a three-sided view showing an appearance of a hopper of the slot machine. FIG. 44D is an exterior diagram showing an exterior of the main control board case of the slot machine. It is a board | substrate mounting figure which shows the various components mounted in the main control board of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external appearance and display content of the ratio monitor mounted in the main control board of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel with which the slot machine is provided. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is a functional block diagram which shows the functional structure of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of winning combination used as the object of the lottery in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of winning combination used as the object of the lottery in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the part lottery table used by the part lottery of the slot machine. It is a lottery state transition diagram showing the transition of the lottery state in the role lottery of the slot machine and the transition conditions. It is a game section transition diagram showing the transition of the same slot machine gaming section (game state number) and the transition conditions. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect (display aspect) of the operation sequence of the stop switch controlled by the main control means of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of an abnormality (error) that is a detection target in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the LED segment table referred when performing display with the 8-segment display of the slot machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows a part of wiring on the main control board of the slot machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring on the center display board | substrate of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the signal output from each output port of the slot machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating correspondence with the number (digit) corresponding to each 8-segment display and each display LED of the slot machine, and each segment and each display LED of the 8-segment display, and a signal (data) bit It is. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various lottery tables used by the effect lottery which determines the content of the sign effect implemented with the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game progress main process for controlling the progress of the game performed by the main control means of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the ratio calculation process performed within the game progress main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the ratio calculation execution process performed within the ratio calculation process of FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control means of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the blink flag production | generation process performed by the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the blink display process performed by the timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a route (route) from a normal section to an advantageous section (in ART) in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; It is a flowchart which shows the content of the sign effect lottery process performed by the sub-control means of the slot machine. In the slot machine, it is explanatory drawing in order to explain the flow of the production until after winning the bonus combination during the normal section until winning. In the slot machine, it is explanatory drawing in order to explain the flow of the production until after winning the bonus combination in the advantageous section until winning. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect performed in the state where the bonus is not elected in the advantageous area of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the ending effect performed in the state where the bonus was elected in the advantageous area of the slot machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 shows an external perspective view of a slot machine 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a main body 12 that houses various devices, and a front door 14 that can be opened and closed on the front side (player side) of the main body 12. A front panel 20 is provided substantially at the center of the front door 14, and a display window 21 is formed at the approximate center thereof as shown in FIG. Three reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are rotatably provided inside the main body 12 so that the design of each reel can be visually recognized from the display window 21.

  The reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are installed such that the rotation axes are aligned on the same straight line in the horizontal direction. Each reel has a ring shape, and a strip-shaped reel tape on which one symbol is printed is attached to each of 20 symbol areas equally divided on the outer peripheral surface thereof. When the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, three symbols that are continuous along the rotation direction of each reel among the twenty symbols printed on each reel can be visually recognized from the display window 21. ing. As a result, a total of 9 symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window 21. Here, among the three consecutive symbols that are stopped and displayed when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the position at which the uppermost symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as the stop display position) is the upper U, center. The position where the symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the middle M, and the position where the lowermost symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the lower D.

  Whether or not any winning combination is won when the three reels are stopped depends on a combination of symbols stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop display position (hereinafter referred to as “design combination”) among the nine symbols described above. A line connecting these stop display positions is called a winning line. In the present embodiment, when the game is performed in a state where the prescribed number is “3” and three medals are betted (three medals are bet), the upper stage U and the middle reel 40C of the left reel 40L. It is determined whether or not a winning combination is made according to the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the middle M and the lower D (winning line La) of the right reel 40R. However, during a bonus game (also referred to as a bonus game) started by winning 1BB-A among a plurality of bonus combinations described later, the prescribed number is “2” and two medals are bet ( When a game is played in a state where two medals have been betted), the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the upper stage U of the left reel 40L, the lower stage D of the middle reel 40C, and the upper stage U (winning line Lb) of the right reel 40R. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. Thus, the winning line can be changed to a predetermined line according to the number of betted game media.

  In the following, when it is simply described that “the symbol combination is stopped and displayed” or “the symbol combination is complete”, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line (that is, the winning combination is won). ) Means. The stop display position that is a winning line is also referred to as a “winning stop position”.

  In addition to the display window 21, the front panel 20 is provided with various lamps and a display for notifying the player of various information regarding the game. First, the left side of the display window 21 is provided with an ART lamp ARTLP (also referred to as an AT lamp ATLP) that is turned on during ART described later. The light source of the ART lamp ARTLP is two LEDs 29a and 29b (described later) provided on the rear surface of the front panel 20, and the light of these LEDs transmits through the light-transmitting region indicated by the broken line in FIGS. It emits light.

  In FIG. 2, on the lower side of the display window 21, in order from the left, a game start display lamp 25 (hereinafter referred to as “game start display LED 25”), insertion display lamps 26a, 26b, and 26c (hereinafter referred to as “input display LED 26a”). , 26b, 26c "), credit number display 27 (hereinafter also referred to as" credit number display 27 "and" stored number display 27 "), and acquired number display 28 (hereinafter referred to as" payout number display "). 28 ”), a rechargeable display lamp 24 (hereinafter referred to as“ releasable display LED24 ”), a replay display lamp 23 (hereinafter referred to as“ replay display LED23 ”), and a clearing display lamp 22 ( Hereinafter, “clearing display LED 22”) is provided. The game start display LED 25 is turned on when the operation of the start switch 36 shown in FIG. 1 can be accepted, and is turned off when it is in any other state. The insertion display LEDs 26a, 26b and 26c display the number of medals bet. Here, when one medal is bet, the one-insertion display LED 26a is turned on. When two medals are bet, the one-insertion display LED 26a and the two-insertion display LED 26b are turned on, and three medals are displayed. When a bet is placed, the 1-sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 26c are lit.

  A medal to bet to play a game in the slot machine 10 is a kind of game medium. The game medium is not limited to a medal, but may be a game ball (so-called pachinko ball), or information indicating the value recorded on a recording medium such as a magnetic card, a non-contact IC card, or a coin incorporating an IC chip. It may be. The slot machine 10 can be played once when a prescribed number of medals are bet. The prescribed number in this embodiment is basically three, but the prescribed number is two only in 1BB-A games (described later) among a plurality of bonus games.

  The credit number display 27 is a 2-digit 8-segment display and is credited (hereinafter also referred to as “storage”) in the slot machine 10 (more specifically, stored data described later can be rewritten). The number of medals (upper limit is 50) stored in a non-volatile memory (RWM: read / write memory) is displayed. Here, as shown to Fig.4 (a), an 8-segment display is a display which consists of segment ag and segment DP. The shapes of the segments a to g are linear, and the shape of the segment DP (the light emitting surface of the segment DP) is a circle having a diameter of 1 mm. The lower-digit segment DP of the credit amount display 27 is used as an advantageous section lamp (hereinafter also referred to as “advantage section LED”, “advantage section display”, or “section display”). The segments a to g are also referred to as a 7-segment display portion, and the segment DP is also referred to as a dot segment display portion.

  In FIG. 4 (a), only the lower digits of the credit number display 27 show the signs of the segments a to g and the segment DP, but the same reference numerals are assigned to the segments in the other 8-segment displays. It is assumed that The acquired number display 28 is composed of a 2-digit 8-segment display, and displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player according to the game result. Of course, when the segment DP is used for some purpose, it is necessary to adopt an 8-segment display composed of the segments a to g and the segment DP. However, when the segment DP is not used, the segment DP is composed of the segments a to g. A 7-segment display may be employed. In addition, the 8-segment display and the 7-segment display are collectively referred to as “segment display”.

  In FIG. 2, the insertable display LED 24 is turned on when the slot machine 10 accepts insertion of medals, and is turned off when the insertion of medals is not accepted. The re-game display LED 23 is turned on when the next game is a re-game, and is turned off when the re-game is finished. The clearing display LED 22 is lit while the credited medal is paid out by operating the clearing switch 33 shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 1, on the lower side of the front panel 20 described above, there is provided an operation panel portion 30 that is formed substantially horizontally over the entire width of the slot machine 10 and protrudes toward the player. A door key 31 that locks or unlocks the front door 14 with respect to the main body 12 is provided on the right front side of the operation panel 30. In the present embodiment, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the door key 31 and rotated clockwise (rotated clockwise toward the front door 14), the front door 14 is unlocked and rotated counterclockwise (front door). 14), and an abnormal state (hereinafter also referred to as “error state”) can be canceled (reset).

  A medal insertion slot 32 for inserting medals into the slot machine 10 is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 30. In addition, a selector 80 (to be described later) for selecting inserted medals is provided inside the slot machine 10, and a medal sensor (insertion sensor) in the selector 80 is inserted from the medal insertion slot 32. Is detected, a medal detection signal is output to the main control means 100 described later. Based on the input medal detection signal, the main control means 100 counts the number of inserted medals and detects anomalies such as fraudulent behavior when inserting medals (hereinafter also referred to as “error detection”). ing.

  On the left side of the upper surface of the operation panel 30, bet switches 34 and 35 for betting credited medals on the slot machine 10 (in other words, setting a bet amount) are provided. Each time the 1-bet switch 34 is operated, only one of the credited medals is bet as a game betting target. The maximum bet switch 35 bets the medals up to the maximum number (specified number) that can be bet in the current game among the credited medals as the betting targets of the game. Further, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 with a prescribed number of medals being betted, the inserted medal is credited (stored in the RWM). Note that when a predetermined number of medals are bet and a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 in a state where the number of credits (stored in the RWM) reaches the upper limit (50), the medal will be described later. The medal payout opening 60 returns the tray 61.

  Between the medal slot 32 and the maximum bet switch 35, a selection switch 38 and a determination switch 39 for a player to input information to the slot machine 10 are provided. The selection switch 38 is composed of four switches: an upper switch, a lower switch, a left switch, and a right switch that specify the vertical and horizontal directions. Then, any one of an upward direction, a downward direction, a left direction, and a right direction is designated corresponding to the operated switch. The decision switch 39 is formed of a member that transmits light, and a light source such as an LED is provided therein. The character “PUSH” is printed on the upper surface (operation surface) of the decision switch 39.

  A start switch 36 is tiltably provided on the front left side of the operation panel 30. The start switch 36 is activated when the player bets a prescribed number of medals on the slot machine 10. However, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a re-game to be described later is arranged (wins) on the winning line, in the next game (re-game), the game in which the re-game player (also referred to as “replay role”) wins. The bets are automatically bet as many as the number of medals bet in the game, and the insertion display LEDs 26a, 26b, and 26c are turned on for the number of bets, and the operation of the start switch 36 for performing the next game is effective. Become. When a medal is inserted into the medal slot 32 in this state, the medal may be returned to the tray 61 or credited until the upper limit (50) is reached.

  Further, when the re-game player wins, the number of medals automatically bet on the next game may be determined according to the game state. For example, if a game is executed with two bets in the first game state (the specified number of SB games is “2”) and a re-game player wins a prize in the game, Since the game state is (the specified number of normal games is “3”), automatic betting processing for three cards is executed.

  When the player operates the start switch 36 in a state where the operation of the start switch 36 is valid, the three reels 40L, 40C, and 40R start to rotate. As a result, the symbols printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are changed (scrolled) from the top to the bottom in the display window 21 as a general rule. In some cases, the display may vary from top to bottom. The freeze effect is an effect that is executed in a state in which the progress of the game is delayed. In particular, when the progress of the game is delayed immediately after the start switch is operated, the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are appropriately rotated. Thus, it is possible to execute a freeze effect (hereinafter also referred to as “reel effect”) that enhances the interest of the game. As a reel production, for example, the reel is rotated in the direction opposite from the normal rotation direction (from top to bottom) (from bottom to top), or the reel is rotated from top to bottom or from bottom to top by a predetermined number of symbols. To display a specific symbol combination in a stopped state, rotate other reels while a predetermined reel is stopped, change the rotation speed of the reels, or change the reels according to the player's operation. The operation may be changed.

  Stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are provided in the center of the front surface of the operation panel 30 so as to correspond to the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. Here, the stop switches 37L, 37C and 37R are so-called self-illuminated push button switches, and have a structure in which the light emission color can be changed while the portion of the push button emits light. For example, when a stop switch operation is disabled (not acceptable), the push button part of the stop switch is lit red, and blue when the operation is enabled (acceptable) It becomes a luminescent color. Stop switches 37L, 37C and 37R are used on condition that the rotation speed of reels 40L, 40C and 40R has reached a predetermined steady rotation speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute, also simply referred to as “constant speed”). The operation of becomes effective. While the player's operation on the stop switch is disabled, the stop switch may be turned off instead of emitting red light.

  Further, when the left stop switch 37L is pushed during the game, the stop control of the left reel 40L is performed in the game to stop the rotation, and when the middle stop switch 37C is pushed, the middle reel 40C When the stop control is performed and the rotation is stopped and the right stop switch 37R is pushed, the stop control of the right reel 40R is performed and the rotation is stopped. In the following, operating the stop switch is referred to as “stop operation”, and after all reels start rotating, the first stop operation is the first stop operation, the second stop operation is the second stop operation, and the last This stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. When the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the center positions of three consecutive symbol areas that are stopped and displayed on the display window 21 among the twenty symbol areas set on the outer peripheral surface of each reel are the upper U , Stop so as to coincide with the center positions of the middle stage M and the lower stage D. Here, the position where the center position of the symbol area coincides with the center position of the stop display position is referred to as a fixed position.

  A clearing switch 33 is provided on the left side of the operation panel 30. If operated during the reception period, all bets and medals that have been bet are paid out, and the credit number display 27 displays Becomes “0”. Here, the term “clearing” may be written as “settlement”. During the reception period described above, for example, after all reels have stopped (when medals are paid out, after the medals have been paid out), a prescribed number of medals are bet and the start switch 36 is operated. Until the time.

  When the clearing switch 33 described above is operated once, the bet medals and all medals that have been credited are paid out. For example, when the clearing switch 33 is operated when there is a betted medal or a credited medal, only the betted medal is paid back, and this state (the medal is not betted). In the state), when the clearing switch 33 is operated again, all credited medals may be paid out. In addition, when the re-playing role is won in a certain game and it becomes possible to re-play in the next game, when the clearing switch 33 is operated, only the credited medal is refunded, It is recommended that the replay be executed as it is.

  A lower panel 50 on which a model name of the slot machine 10 and characters adopted as a motif are drawn is arranged below the operation panel 30. A left side lamp 52L is provided on the left side of the lower panel 50, and a right side lamp 52R is provided on the right side. The side lamps 52L and 52R are decorative lamps that blink (or turn on) according to a predetermined pattern in accordance with a game standby (hereinafter also referred to as “non-game”) or according to a game result. A medal payout opening 60 for paying out medals to the player is provided at a substantially lower center of the lower panel 50.

  For example, when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, if the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line L corresponds to a winning combination (also referred to as “small role”), the winning combination is supported. The number of medals is credited (stored in the RWM), or the hopper 83 (specifically, the hopper motor 46) described later is operated, and among the medals stored in the hopper 83, it corresponds to the winning winning combination. The number of medals to be paid out. When the clearing switch 33 is operated in a state where medals are credited, the credited medals are paid out. The medals paid out from the medal payout opening 60 are stored in the tray 61. On the right side and the left side of the medal payout opening 60, sound transmission holes 62R and 62L are provided for allowing sounds emitted from speakers 64R and 64L (described later) housed inside the slot machine 10 to pass outside. Yes.

  An image display device 70 composed of a liquid crystal display panel is provided on the upper portion of the front panel 20. The image display device 70 is not limited to a liquid crystal display panel, and any other display device can be used as long as the player can visually recognize image information and text information during a game or a non-game. . This image display device 70 is a game history image (so-called game history screen) for displaying the total number of games (also referred to as the total number of games), the total number of bonus winnings, etc., and a game after a password is entered. Two-dimensional code image (so-called two-dimensional code screen) for displaying the two-dimensional code including the number of times (also called the number of games) and the number of bonus winnings, etc., and for demonstrations displayed during game standby Image (so-called demo screen), effect image (so-called effect screen) for notifying the result of the role lottery and the operation mode of the stop switch (operation timing or operation sequence, etc.), progress of the slot machine game (betting medals → start Effect image (so-called effect) according to operation of the switch 36 → reel rotation → operation of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R → stop of rotation of all reels It is possible to display a face) or the like.

  Above the image display device 70, the reels 40L, 40C, 40R are stopped, and when a winning combination is won, or a medal is likely to be paid out (for example, during a bonus game or ART, for the player) An effect lamp 72 that blinks (or lights up) in a predetermined pattern is provided depending on the case where it is in an advantageous state. A left decorative lamp 72L is provided on the left side of the effect lamp 72, and a right decorative lamp 72R is provided on the right side. Similarly to the side lamps 52L and 52R, the decoration lamps 72L and 72R are decorative lamps that blink (or turn on) according to a predetermined pattern in accordance with a game standby or game result.

<Description of the internal structure of the slot machine>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 3, the same components as those shown in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front door 14 is opened, and illustrates the back side (inside the casing) of the front door 14 and the inside of the main body 12.

  In FIG. 3, sub-control means 200 for controlling the execution of the game effect performed in the slot machine 10 is housed in the case above the front door 14 and behind the image display device 70 shown in FIG. It is attached. The sub-control unit 200 includes a sub-control board and an image control board described later. Each of these control boards includes a circuit including electronic components such as a CPU and other ICs mounted on a printed board. In FIG. 3, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the right side of the display window 21, and the LEDs 29a and 29b are light sources of the ART lamp ARTLP shown in FIGS. The shape of the light emitting surface of the LEDs 29a and 29b is a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 4B, and the dimension of the light emitting surface is 1.2 mm long × 4 mm wide. Therefore, the area of the light emitting surface of the ART lamp ARTLP is larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit number indicator 27.

  Further, the light emission area of the ART lamp ARTLP shown in FIG. 2 (the broken line portion in FIG. 2) is larger than the light emission area of the segment DP of the credit number indicator 27 used as the advantageous interval LED. The ART lamp ARTLP is easier for the player to visually recognize than the LED. As a method for making the ART lamp ARTLP easier to see than the advantageous section LED, the ART lamp ARTLP may be lit brighter than the advantageous section LED instead of increasing the area of the light emitting surface or the light emitting area. . In this case, the area of the light emitting surface or light emitting region of the ART lamp ARTLP may be smaller than that of the advantageous section LED, or the area of both light emitting surfaces or light emitting regions may be the same.

  Thus, the advantageous section LED is less noticeable than the ART lamp ARTLP. That is, it is easy for the player to make a transition during ART, but it is difficult for the player to make a transition to the advantageous section (transition to the advantageous section). It is effective when the reason for providing the advantageous section LED is not to make it easier for the player to understand that the transition to the advantageous section is made. For example, there is a case where a transition to an advantageous section is provided to make it easier for the staff of the game hall to understand. However, this is not the case when the reason why the advantageous section LED is provided is to make it easier for the player to understand that the transition to the advantageous section is made. In such a case, it is preferable to make the advantageous section LED stand out from the ART lamp ARTLP (or make it stand out as much as the ART lamp ARTLP).

  Even if a conventional slot machine wins a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery”) that determines whether or not to start an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch, In most cases, the fact that the player has won the AT lottery is triggered by the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played since the game that has won the AT lottery. This is because it was thought that the player's sense of expectation for the AT game cannot be given for a long period of time if the game was won in the AT lottery.

  For this reason, some players who have won the AT lottery have stopped playing the game without noticing that (before notifying that they have won the AT lottery). . In particular, the trend was seen by beginners. On the other hand, there are those who are not willing to win the AT lottery with their own power from the end, and find a slot machine that has already won the AT lottery by playing only a predetermined number of games and play a game. Under these circumstances, the person who played the game when winning the AT lottery (the person who won the AT lottery) did not play the AT game, and a third party who did not contribute to the AT lottery There was a voice that it might be absurd to play games.

  In order to respond to such a voice, without realizing that the player has won a transition lottery that determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified, There was a need to provide a slot machine that can reduce the risk of stopping.

  In general, when most players stop playing a game, they check if there are no medals remaining in their credits. Then, when a medal remains in the credit, the settlement switch 33 is operated. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section shift lottery is won, the advantageous section LED is lit before the operation of the clearing switch 33 becomes effective. However, the case where the next game is shifted not to the advantageous section but to the waiting section described later is excluded. Thus, before the player operates the checkout switch 33 (stops the game), it can be notified that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won, so erroneously (not aware that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won). Stopping the game can be deterred.

  In the present embodiment, the unused segment (segment DP) of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED. Thereby, when the player confirms that no medal remains in the credit, it can be confirmed whether or not the advantageous section shift lottery is won at the same time. Furthermore, by using the unused segment of the credit amount display 27, it is not necessary to provide a separate LED, and the cost does not increase.

  In recent years, the number of slot machines with high accuracy (easy to shift during ART) and the probability of shifting during ART is increasing rapidly, but most of the slot machines installed at amusement halls are set to low setting values. There were complaints that it was quite high and did not shift to ART. Also, in some slot machines, if set to a high setting value, over 10,000 medals may be paid out in one ART, although rarely. The voice was raised.

  Therefore, in order to make the probability of shifting to high accuracy or ART difficult to be biased by the set value, the winning probability of the role (winning number) determined by the role lottery that is a condition for shifting to high accuracy or ART is the set value. And the winning probability of the transfer lottery for shifting to the high accuracy corresponding to the determined combination and the ART is determined to be the same according to the set value. In addition, in order to prevent excessive medals from being paid out due to a series of games, the situation of staying in a special state related to AT such as high accuracy and ART is excessive. The limit for staying in the state was decided.

  Based on these, in order to distinguish between a special state related to AT such as high accuracy and ART and other states, a “normal section”, an “advantageous section”, and a “standby section” are provided as game sections in this embodiment.

  “Regular section” means information that can grasp the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the game in which the result of the winning lottery in which the advantage / disadvantage is generated depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, winning number, winning / This is a game section in which transmission of a re-game winning number) to the sub control board is prohibited, and a game section in which notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is prohibited. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (or waiting section) to be described later based on a predetermined combination in which the winning probability of the combination (winning number) determined by the combination lottery is the same by the set value. It is a game section.

  “Advantageous section” refers to information (for example, winning number, winning / It is a game section in which a re-game winning number) can be transmitted to the sub-control board and a section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified. Also, as one of the conditions for ending the advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the “normal section” on the condition that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). It is a game section.

  The “standby section” refers to a game section when the player has a right to shift from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section” but has not yet shifted to the “advantageous section”. Specifically, when a bonus combination (in this embodiment, such as 1BB-A to F, where the winning information (or the operating state of the conditional device) is carried over after the next game) is won, “normal” A game section that can be transferred only when a lottery that shifts from “section” to “advantage section” is won, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning bonus combination is The “standby section” ends and the “advantage section” starts from the next game.

  Also, in the game in which the result of the winning lottery in which the advantage / disadvantage is generated by the operation mode of the stop switch is determined in the standby section, information that can grasp the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (for example, This is a game section in which transmission of a winning number or a winning / replay winning number) to the sub-control board is prohibited, and a game section in which notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is prohibited. The “standby section” should originally be shifted to the “advantageous section”, but if it is shifted to the “advantageous section”, an inconvenient event may occur. It can be said that it is a game section that has been suspended. For this reason, if there is no possibility that an inconvenient event occurs, it is possible to shift to the “advantageous section” without shifting to the “standby section”. Incidentally, an inconvenient event is that the winning number can be determined at an unintended timing by turning on the advantageous section LED.

  The segment DP in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 may be used as the advantageous section LED. In this case, when the acquisition number display 28 is provided in the vicinity of the decision switch 39 and it is decided to shift from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone LED is lit before the operation of the decision switch 39 becomes effective. Is preferred. Thereby, for example, when the determination switch 39 is operated during non-game, in the slot machine 10 that displays the game history screen on the image display device 70, it is difficult for the player to overlook the lighting of the advantageous section LED.

  Specifically, when the determination switch 39 is operated during non-game, a menu screen is displayed on the image display device 70. Under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, it is possible to select which screen to display next from among the game history screen, the password input screen for entering a password, and the two-dimensional code screen by operating the selection switch 38. It has become. That is, when the player finishes the game, the player activates the two-dimensional code reader provided in the portable terminal and operates the decision switch 39 to obtain the two-dimensional code. Since the acquired number display 28 is provided in the vicinity of the determination switch 39, when the determination switch 39 is operated, since the acquired number display 28 is in the field of view, the advantageous section LED is lit. If so, it can be said that it is rare to notice the lighting. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being finished without noticing that the next game is shifted to the advantageous section. Of course, even when the segment DP of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous interval LED, the credit amount indicator 27 is provided in the vicinity of the determination switch 39, and when it is decided to shift from the normal interval to the advantageous interval, It is preferable to light the advantageous section LED before the operation of the decision switch 39 becomes effective.

  The selector 80 described above is provided below the display window 21, and a regular medal is selected from medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 shown in FIG. For example, when the external dimensions and material of the inserted medal do not meet a predetermined standard, the medal is guided to the return passage 81a connected to the medal payout opening 60 of FIG. On the other hand, when the external dimensions and material of the inserted medal conform to a predetermined standard, the receiving passage 81b for sending the medal to a medal storage part 83a (a container for storing the medal) of the hopper 83 described later. Lead to.

  The selector 80 includes a first insertion sensor 48a, a second insertion sensor 48b, and a medal passage sensor 49, and detects abnormalities related to detection of medals guided to the receiving passage 81b by these sensors and insertion of medals. ing. For example, the abnormality relating to the inserted medal is determined based on the time difference in which the medal is detected by the first insertion sensor 48a and the second insertion sensor 48b, the detection order, and the like. If the medal passage sensor 49 continues to detect medals for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that a medal clogging has occurred in the selector 80. Speakers 64R and 64L are attached to the lower side of the front door 14 at the positions of the sound transmission holes 62R and 62L shown in FIG.

  Next, inside the main body 12, a door switch 44 that detects opening / closing of the front door 14 is attached to the front upper right. Here, in FIG. 3, the door switch 44 is provided on the main body 12 side, but may be provided on the front door 14 side. A main control board case 102 that houses a main control board 101 that constitutes a hardware part of the main control means 100 that controls the game is attached inside the main body 12 and above the back plate.

  An external concentrated terminal board 86 is installed below the door switch 44. The external concentration terminal board 86 outputs a signal including information related to the game being played in the slot machine 10 to various external devices (a so-called hall computer, a game history display device installed in the game hall, etc.). It is a relay board for doing. A reel unit that encloses the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R is installed at substantially the center in the main body 12. Inside the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R for rotating the corresponding reels respectively, and spinning cylinder sensors 43L and 43C for detecting the reference positions (described later) of the corresponding reels. , 43R are provided.

  A power supply unit 82, a hopper 83, and a medal auxiliary storage 84 are arranged in order from the left side in FIG. The power supply unit 82 converts the input AC 100V into a plurality of types of DC voltages, and supplies them to various devices included in the slot machine 10. Further, on the front panel surface of the power supply unit 82, a power switch 82a that is a rocker switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10 is provided on the upper left side. Further, a key switch 82b is provided on the right side of the power switch 82a so as to make it possible to change a so-called set value. A push button type setting / reset switch 82c is provided below the power switch 82a. This setting / reset switch 82c is used to restart the game progress (control process) when the game progress (control process) is forcibly stopped due to detection of various abnormalities (excluding some abnormalities) to be described later. ) To be started.

  Note that when the key is turned counterclockwise in the door key 31 shown in FIG. 1, the same effect as when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated is exhibited. The key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c described above correspond to switching means that can be switched between an off state (first state) and an on state (second state). The door key 30 also corresponds to switching means that can switch between a state where the key is neutral (first state) and a state where the key is turned counterclockwise to release the error (second state). To do. The key switch 82 b and the setting / reset switch 82 c are attached to the power supply unit 82 provided in the main body 12, but may be attached to the back side of the front door 14. As described above, since the key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c are provided inside the casing including the main body 12 and the front door 14, the operation becomes difficult when the front door 14 is closed. Yes. Also, “difficult to operate” means that, for example, when the front door 14 is closed, it must be operated by an illegal act using a wire or a rod-like member, or the front door 14 is open. It also includes the meaning that the door switch 44 cannot be detected by an illegal act and the front door 14 must be opened and operated.

  The hopper 83 is a device that pays out medals when a small role is won as a result of a game or when a credited medal is returned to the player. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, when the rotary disk 83b is rotated by the hopper motor 46, the medals stored in the medal storage section 83a jump out one by one from the discharge port 83c. A payout passage 81c connected to the medal payout outlet 61 is provided on the back surface of the front door 14, and a medal that has jumped out from the discharge port 83c jumps into a medal hole 81d formed in the payout passage 81c. The medal is paid out to the tray 61. In the hopper 83, a first payout sensor 47a and a second payout sensor 47b for detecting a discharged medal are provided in the vicinity of the discharge port 83c. Based on the output signals of these payout sensors, the main control means 100 counts the medals that have been paid out and detects an abnormality related to the payout of medals.

  The medal storage unit 83a of the hopper 83 can store about 700 medals. However, when more than an allowable amount of medals is accumulated, medals overflow from the overflow chute 83d provided in the medal storage unit 83a. It is accommodated in the 3 medal auxiliary storage 84. The medal auxiliary storage 84 is a box-like member having an opening K on the upper surface as shown in FIG. 3, and the vertical wall surface on the back side of the medal auxiliary storage 84 has an opening K as shown in FIG. 3. A total of three round holes 84a are drilled, two near and one near the bottom. When the medal auxiliary storage 84 is placed at a predetermined position in the main body 12, the two rod-like electrodes 85 a attached to the main body 12 and the one rod-like electrode 85 b correspond to each other. The medal auxiliary storage 84 is inserted through the round hole 84a.

  As a result, when medals are accumulated in the medal auxiliary storage 84 and the medals are accumulated up to the position of the rod-shaped electrode 85a, the rod-shaped electrodes 85a and 85b are electrically connected by the conductivity of the medal itself. To do. The main control means 100 detects that the stored medal has reached the upper limit by detecting this conduction. Note that the number of the rod-shaped electrodes shown in FIG. 3 is two near the opening K and one near the bottom, but the number is not limited to this. There may be a total of two near one, or two near the opening K and two near the bottom.

<Main control board case>
Next, the external appearance of the main control board case 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (a) is a front view of the main control board case 102, FIG. 6 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 6 (c) is a cross-sectional view. 4 is a perspective view of a main control board case 102. FIG.

  In FIG. 6A, the protrusion 104a formed on the right side of the front surface is engaged with the claws formed on the bracket 16 (see FIG. 3) fixed to the back plate of the main body 12 (or in the mounting hole). In the inserted state, the fixtures 105a and 105b (see FIG. 6C) provided on the left side of the main control board case 102 are pushed into the bracket 16 side. As a result, the tips of the fixtures 105 a and 105 b are fitted into mounting holes (not shown) provided in the bracket 16, and the main control board case 102 is temporarily fixed to the bracket 16. In other words, the bracket 16 is a support portion when the main control board case 102 is attached to the slot machine 10.

  The main control board case 102 is composed of a case main body 102a made of a transparent plastic member and a case lid body 102b. As shown in FIG. 6B, the main control board 101 is accommodated therein. Further, on the front surface of the main control board case 102, a display window YM of the role ratio monitor 103 to be described later and an area to which a caulking use recording seal 108 is attached are formed. The display window YM is a recess formed at the installation position (mounting position) of the role ratio monitor 103, and the bottom surface of the recess is rectangular. This is because the display surface of the role monitor 103 and the surface of the main control board case 102 are brought as close as possible, so that when the display of the role monitor 103 is visually recognized, extraneous light is exposed to the surface of the main control board case 102. This is to prevent the display of the role ratio monitor 103 from being reflected and being difficult to see.

  However, if the distance between the display window YM and the display screen of the role ratio monitor 103 is too small, the role ratio monitor 103 is broken by an illegal action (for example, the display window YM of the main control board case 102 is pushed). There is a risk that the main control board case 102 may be charged with static electricity due to fraud, and the role monitor 103 may be adversely affected. For this reason, it is desirable that the distance between the display window YM and the display surface of the role ratio monitor 103 is 0.5 mm at the minimum. The horizontal dimension of the display window YM is preferably wider by 1 mm on the left and right with respect to the lateral width of the role ratio monitor 103. This is because if the horizontal dimension is the same as the horizontal width of the role ratio monitor 103, the display of the role ratio monitor 103 may be difficult to see depending on the angle at which the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the short side wall of the display window YM has a left side wall vertical in the figure, whereas the right side wall A is provided with an inclination θ. Yes. This is because the front right side of the front door 14 is opened because the hinge of the front door 14 is on the left side of the front of the housing, so that the main control board case 102 remains attached to the bracket 16. The role ratio monitor 103 is visually recognized from the front right side of 102. Therefore, by providing the inclination θ on the side wall A, the display of the role monitor 103 can be made difficult to be hidden by the edge c of the display window YM.

  Of course, since the bracket 16 may be in any position, when the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed from the front left side of the main control board case 102 (the bracket 16 is fixed to the left side plate of the main body 12). In this case, it is preferable to provide an inclination on the left side wall, and when the role ratio monitor 103 is viewed from the front upper side or the front lower side of the main control board case 102 (the bracket 16 is below the back plate of the main body 12). Or in the case of being fixed upward), it is preferable to provide an inclination on the upper or lower side wall. Note that one or more (up to four) side walls may be provided with an inclination. Here, the appropriate angle of the inclination θ is desirably a value within a range of 25 degrees to 60 degrees. When the angle is less than 25 degrees, the visibility decreases when the role ratio monitor 103 is confirmed with the front door 14 opened. If the angle exceeds 60 degrees, the description will be made with reference to FIG. 6A. Since the position of the caulking use recording sticker 108 is on the right side, the arrangement position (mounting position) of the microcomputer chip Z1 and the switch monitor ML ) (In order not to be placed (mounted) under the position where the caulking use recording seal 108 is attached).

  In addition, the main control board case 102 is provided with a plurality of caulking housing portions for housing caulking members (not shown). The caulking member is for leaving a trace when the main control board case 102 is opened or the main control board case 102 is removed from the bracket 16. In addition, once the caulking member is accommodated, each caulking housing portion cannot be removed unless the caulking housing portion itself is destroyed. 6A and 6C, the caulking housing portion 107a provided in the case lid body 102b accommodates a caulking member that caulks the case main body 102a and the case lid body 102b of the main control board case 102. Specifically, the case main body 102a is provided with a caulking attachment portion (not shown) for slidingly attaching the caulking member. The caulking member is provided on the case lid 102b after being attached to the caulking attachment portion. When the caulking member is accommodated in the caulking housing portion 107a, the case main body 102a and the case lid body 102b are caulked by the claws formed on the caulking member fitting into the holes formed in the caulking housing portion 107a. Thus, in order to open the main control board case 102 and take out the main control board 101, it is necessary to destroy the caulking housing portion 107a.

  Hereinafter, the caulking member accommodated in the caulking accommodating portion 107a is referred to as caulking member A (not shown). Similarly, the caulking members accommodated in the caulking accommodating portions 107b, 107c, and 107f are caulked member B (not illustrated). That's it.

  The caulking housing portions 107b and 107f (indicated as “B” and “F” in the figure) provided on the case lid 102b accommodate caulking members that caulk the main control board case 102 and the bracket 16. Specifically, the bracket 16 is provided with a caulking attachment portion (not shown) for slidingly attaching the caulking member, and after the caulking member is attached to the caulking attachment portion, the caulking provided on the case lid 102b. When the caulking member is accommodated in the accommodating portions 107b and 107f, the claws formed on the caulking member are fitted into the holes formed in the caulking accommodating portions 107b and 107f, so that the case lid body 102b and the bracket 16 are caulked. .

  Thus, in order to remove the main control board case 102 from the bracket 16, it is necessary to destroy the caulking housing portions 107b and 107f using a tool such as a screwdriver. Further, the caulking housing portion 107c (indicated as “C” in the drawing) provided in the case lid 102b accommodates the caulking member B that is removed when the main control board case 102 is recovered. Therefore, in order to avoid accidentally destroying the role monitor 103 when destroying the caulking housing portion, it is preferable that the role monitor 103 is not mounted in the vicinity of the caulking housing portion. Actually, as shown in FIGS. 6A, 6B, and 6C, the role monitor 103 is not mounted in the vicinity of the caulking housing portion 107a, and the caulking housing portions 107b, 107c, and 107f are not mounted. The main control board side connector CN1 is mounted in the vicinity, and the role monitor 103 is not mounted.

  That is, “the vicinity of the caulking housing portion” means that the distance between the caulking housing portion and the role ratio monitor 103 is too short, and other components (such as the main control board side connector CN1, etc., excluding extremely small components) are excluded. ) Means a state in which no one can be mounted.

  Further, the wire harness of the harness side connector fitted to the main control board side connector CN1 is routed in the direction (left side) of the caulking accommodating portions 107b, 107c, 107f so as not to hide the display of the role monitor 103. (A connector cover may be used) As a result, the visibility of the caulking housing portions 107b, 107c, and 107f is lowered. The fact that the caulking housing portion is destroyed is a serious problem (there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed), so at least the position of the caulking housing portion 107b is set so that the visibility of the caulking member B is not lowered. It is preferable that it is provided above the caulking housing part in the figure. By doing in this way, since the wire harness hangs down by the weight of the wire harness itself, the caulking housing portion 107b cannot be seen.

  Further, in order to leave a history of which caulking housing portion has been used, a caulking use recording seal 108 is affixed to the front surface and substantially the center of the main control board case 102. In the caulking use record sticker 108 shown in FIGS. 6A and 6C, the date and time when the caulking accommodating portion is used and the caulking for each type of caulking accommodating portion (“B”, “C”, “F”). There is an entry field for the name of the person in charge. After the slot machine 10 is manufactured (at the time of factory shipment), the caulking housing portion 107b is used first. The caulking housing part 107b is destroyed at the time of on-site inspection after installation in the game hall, and the caulking housing part 107f is used next after the inspection.

  Although not shown, a seal seal is affixed across the case main body 102a and the case lid 102b of the main control board case 102. The seal seal is covered with a seal seal cover on which the protrusion 104a and the protrusion 104b are formed. This seal seal is for leaving a trace when the main control board case 102 is opened. For example, when the seal sticker is mistakenly attached by the manufacturer, it is malicious. When a person performs an illegal act on the main control board 101, a solvent may be used to peel off the seal. At this time, since the solvent rarely enters the main control board case 102, “solvent danger” indicating the range where the solvent that has entered the case may reach the main control board 101. An "area" is provided. In the present embodiment, as shown by hatching in FIG. 7, the solvent danger area DE is provided on the right side of the microcomputer chip Z <b> 1 mounted on the main control board 101.

<Mounting parts of main control board>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the main components among the components mounted on the main control board 101 housed in the main control board case 102 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, on the main control board 101, a microcomputer chip Z1 (hereinafter also referred to as “microprocessor Z1”), oscillators G1, G2, and a set value display 87 including an 8-segment display, A role monitor 103, a segment driver SD which is a driving IC for various 8-segment displays, and digit drivers DD1 and DD2 are mounted. In addition, various components such as various ICs, a plurality of resistors R, a capacitor C and a Zener diode ZD, a switch monitor ML for checking on / off of a digital signal, and a main control board side connector CN1 are mounted. Yes.

  The microcomputer chip Z1 includes a CPU, a ROM (read only memory), an RWM (read / write memory), a random number circuit (random number generation means), a timer circuit (timer count means), an I / O port, and the like. And controls each part of the slot machine 10 based on programs and data stored in the ROM. Hereinafter, when it is simply referred to as CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit or timer circuit, or when it is referred to as CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit or timer circuit of the main control means 100, it is provided in the microcomputer chip Z1. Refers to things. As can be seen from FIGS. 3 and 7, the microcomputer chip Z <b> 1 is mounted on the main control board 101 on the open side (right side in FIGS. 3 and 7) of the front door 14 from the front center of the slot machine 10.

  This is because the role monitor 103 and the main control board side connector CN1 are mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 rather than the front center as will be described later. In other words, many signals output from the microcomputer chip Z1 cannot drive other devices (for example, an 8-segment display) as they are, and most signals are output to an external IC. It is necessary to convert to a signal with specifications (voltage value, current value, etc.) suitable for the device. Therefore, in order to provide a space for mounting a driving IC for the role ratio monitor 103 at least between the microcomputer chip Z1 and the role ratio monitor 103, a distance between the microcomputer chip Z1 and the role ratio monitor 103 is provided. Need to put. Further, the microcomputer chip Z1 is hidden by the above-described caulking use record sticker 108 since it is visually confirmed whether or not the regular microcomputer chip Z1 is mounted after the slot machine 10 is installed in the game hall. It cannot be mounted at the position where it will end up. Therefore, when the microcomputer chip Z1 is to be mounted so as to satisfy these conditions, the opening side of the front door 14 is the optimum position from the front center.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the oscillators G1 and G2 output various clock signals to the microcomputer chip Z1. Specifically, the oscillator G1 generates a random number update clock signal for updating a random number generated in the microcomputer chip Z1, and the oscillator G2 generates a system clock signal for operating the CPU in the microcomputer chip Z1. To do. Note that all random numbers generated in the microcomputer chip Z1 need not be updated based on the update clock signal, but may be performed based on the system clock signal. For example, the random number used for the role lottery is updated based on the random number update clock signal, but the random number used for other lottery may be updated based on the system clock signal. Further, all the random numbers generated in the microcomputer chip Z1 may be updated based on the system clock signal without mounting the oscillator G1. These oscillators G1 and G2 are mounted as close as possible to the microcomputer chip Z1 so as to make it difficult for noise to appear in the output clock signal, and the wiring between the oscillators G1 and G2 and the microcomputer chip Z1 is made as short as possible. Is preferred.

  The switch monitor ML is composed of 20 LEDs, and each LED is turned on or off according to the on / off state of a digital signal (a signal output when the start switch 36 is operated, etc.) associated with the LED. To do. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the components and wirings on the path of each digital signal and the on / off state of the digital signal are normal. Therefore, the switch monitor ML is mounted on the main control board 101 at a position that is not hidden by the caulking use recording seal 108 described above. Moreover, when the light of each LED which comprises switch monitor ML is strong, there exists a possibility that the visibility of the role ratio monitor 103 mentioned later may fall with the light. For this reason, it is preferable not to mount the switch monitor ML near the role monitor 103.

  The term “in the vicinity of the role monitor” here refers to a state where the light of the switch monitor ML reaches the role monitor 103 and / or another component (between the role monitor 103 and the switch monitor ML). However, it is an IC or the like, excluding components that are extremely small (size that cannot block light). The same applies hereinafter.) A state in which no component is mounted (a state in which light is not blocked by another component). . However, the switch monitor ML may be mounted in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103 if there is no risk that the light of the switch monitor ML will deteriorate the visibility of the role ratio monitor 103. In this case, since the display of the role ratio monitor 103 and the switch monitor ML can be simultaneously included in the field of view, for example, it is possible to reduce the trouble of confirming the slot machine 10 installed in the game hall.

The role monitor 103 is provided to make it easier to confirm that the slot machine 10 has not been tampered with after the slot machine 10 is installed. A plurality of information relating to the gaming state is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), it consists of four 8-segment displays, and the 8-segment display of the lower two digits (two on the right side in FIG. 8 (a)) has various ratios ( It is a ratio display part RA that displays a numerical value that represents a value that will be described later, and the upper two digits (two on the left side in FIG. 8A) are the types of ratios displayed on the ratio display part RA ( Hereinafter, it is also an identifier display part ID for displaying “identifier”. The area of the display screen of the role ratio monitor 103 satisfies the relationship of M × N ÷ 4 ≧ 36 mm ² where N is the vertical dimension and M is the horizontal dimension.

  In this way, the role ratio monitor 103 is mounted on the main control board 101 at a position that is not hidden by the above-described caulking use recording sticker 108 so that the display contents can be viewed at any time as necessary. . Further, when the display on the role ratio monitor 103 is visually confirmed, since it is confirmed from the open side of the front door 14 (the right side of the front view of FIG. 7 (the microcomputer chip Z1 side)), the position where the caulking use recording sticker 108 is attached If a role ratio monitor is mounted on the side of this, a part of the display of the role ratio monitor 103 may be hidden behind the caulking use recording sticker 108 depending on the viewing angle. For this reason, it is preferable that the role ratio monitor 103 is mounted away from the position where the caulking use recording seal 108 is attached.

  Note that the appearance of the role ratio monitor 103 shown in FIG. 8A is that four eight segment indicators are arranged in a horizontal row and the identifier display portion ID and the ratio display portion RA are arranged in the horizontal direction. Not limited to this, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, two 8 segment indicators are arranged in two horizontal rows (2 × 2), and the upper two 8 segment indicators are displayed as identifier display units. ID, the lower two eight-segment display may be used as the ratio display RA. In this case, the segment DP on the lower digit side of the two upper eight segment indicators is lit.

  Further, since a main control board side connector CN1 described later is mounted on the hinge side (left side in FIG. 7) of the front door 14 from the center of the main control board 101, the role monitor 103 is also provided accordingly. It is mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 from the center of 101. This is because the wiring of the main control board 101 is efficiently formed. Specifically, the role monitor 103 is mounted on the wiring path between the duty ratio monitor driving IC and the main control board side connector CN1, thereby efficiently improving the wiring path formed on the board. Can do.

  Therefore, the role monitor 103 is preferably mounted in the vicinity of the main control board side connector CN1 and the drive IC for the role monitor. Here, “the vicinity of the main control board side connector CN1 and the drive IC for the ratio monitor” means between the ratio monitor 103 and the main control board side connector CN1, and between the ratio monitor 103 and the ratio. This means a state in which no other IC is mounted between the driving IC for monitoring (however, the resistor R and the capacitor C may be mounted). Further, since the ratio monitor 103 is a reusable component (a component that can be removed and mounted on another main control board), the main monitor should not be exposed to the solvent used when the sealing seal described above is peeled off. On the control board 101, it is mounted outside the solvent danger area.

  When the role monitor 103 cannot secure an area for mounting on the main control board 101, for example, the role monitor 103 itself or a small printed board on which the role monitor 103 is mounted is replaced with the main control board. It may be mounted perpendicular to 101. By doing in this way, while reducing the area | region for mounting the ratio monitor 103, the display content of the ratio monitor 103 can be made hard to see for a player etc. This is because the display does not face the front by mounting vertically. Further, the role ratio monitor 103 may be mounted at a place other than the main control board 101 (inside the casing of the slot machine 10). Further, the duty ratio of the drive signal for turning on the 8-segment display constituting the role ratio monitor 103 may be changed. With this configuration, the brightness of the display of the role ratio monitor 103 can be adjusted, and the display content of the role ratio monitor 103 can be made difficult for the player to see.

  It should be noted that there is a board manufacturer name displayed on the main control board 101 by silk printing, etching, laser marking or the like, which is preferably not in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103 other than the parts. Generally, a board manufacturer name is displayed on the main control board 101 in order to prove that it is not an unauthorized board, and the board manufacturer name is displayed on the main control board 101 at a place with high visibility. It is preferable. Since the main body of the role ratio monitor 103 has a certain height, if the board manufacturer name is displayed near the role ratio monitor 103, it may be hidden by the role ratio monitor 103 depending on the viewing angle. There is a possibility. Therefore, it is preferable that the display of the board manufacturer name is not in the vicinity of the role ratio monitor 103. In particular, when displaying the name of the board manufacturer by laser marking, it is preferable that the part is not in the vicinity of the role monitor 103 because all parts are mounted after mounting. This is because the role monitor 103 may be broken during laser marking.

  In addition, a plurality of board manufacturers may use a common main control board. In this case, the main control board (different from FIG. 7) displays a plurality of board manufacturer names, and each board manufacturer name can cut off the display of the board manufacturer name other than itself. Specifically, a part of the main control board can be excised, and the name of each board manufacturer is displayed there. Even in such a case, it is preferable that the display of the board manufacturer name is not in the vicinity of the role monitor 103. As a result, when the display of the name of another board manufacturer is removed, the role monitor 103 does not get in the way, and a load is applied to the portion where the role monitor 103 is soldered during the removal. Therefore, the possibility that the role ratio monitor 103 is removed from the substrate can be reduced.

  The set value display 87 is composed of one 8-segment display and is a display for displaying the set value. This set value is used for setting a winning probability of a predetermined combination in a combination lottery to be described later. Generally, six settings from “1” to “6” are possible. Here, when the same 8-segment display is used for the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 108, there is a high possibility that a driving IC for driving these displays is used in common. In such a case, if the set value display 87 is mounted in the vicinity of the role monitor 108, the wiring of the main control board 101 can be efficiently formed. However, in order to avoid misrecognition of display contents by each display device, it is better not to mount the role ratio monitor 103 and the set value display device 87 side by side. “Near the role monitor 108” means a state in which no other IC is mounted between the role monitor 103 and the set value display 87.

  The set value display 87 may be attached to a printed circuit board on which the set value display 87 is mounted on the back side of the front door 14 instead of on the main control board 101, for example. Further, the setting value may be displayed on the credit indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28 shown in FIG.

  As the driving ICs for displaying alphanumeric characters on the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103 and the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28 shown in FIG. 1, the segment driver SD, the digit driver There are DD1 and DD2. The segment driver SD is a driving IC that outputs a driving signal for each of the segments a to g and DP of the 8-segment display that constitutes the various displays described above. Output in parallel to the display. That is, the segment driver SD is used in common by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28.

  The digit driver DD1 is a driving IC that outputs an active signal for making an 8-segment display that performs display out of the four 8-segment displays constituting the role ratio monitor 103 displayable. The digit driver DD2 is an active signal for making the 8-segment display that performs display out of the 8-segment displays constituting the set value display 87, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28 a displayable state. Is a driving IC that outputs. Hereinafter, the drive signal output from the segment driver SD and the active signals output from the digit driver DD1 and the digit driver DD2 are collectively referred to simply as a drive signal.

  In FIG. 7, the main control board side connector CN1 is a connector for outputting drive signals from the segment driver SD and the digit driver DD2 to the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28. Specifically, since the credit number indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28 are mounted on a central display board (not shown) installed on the back surface of the front door 14, they are mounted on the central display board. The main control board side connector CN1 is connected by a wire harness (hereinafter referred to as “harness”) in which a plurality of electric wires are bundled. Of course, the main control board and the relay board may be connected by a harness, and the relay board and the central display board may be connected by a harness.

  A harness side connector is attached to each end of the harness, the harness side connector attached to one end of the harness is fitted to the main control board side connector CN1, and the harness side connector attached to the other end is The connector is fitted to the connector of the central display board provided on the back surface of the front door 14. Then, the harness itself is routed to the hinge side of the front door 14. Therefore, it is desirable that the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted on the hinge side of the front door 14 rather than the front center of the main control board 101.

  Further, it is preferable that the main control board side connector CN1 is not mounted above the role monitor 103. That is, since the harness side connector is connected to the main control board side connector CN1, if the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted above the role monitor 103, the hanging harness covers the role monitor 103. There is a risk of being covered. Even when the main control board side connector CN1 is mounted below the role ratio monitor 103, if there is a risk that the loose harness may cover the role ratio monitor 103, the position is at the main control board side. It is preferable not to mount the connector CN1. However, this is not the case when the harness can be routed so as not to cover the role ratio monitor 103 using a connector cover or the like.

(About the contents displayed on the role monitor)
Next, information displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 will be described with reference to FIG. First, the advantageous section ratio is a value representing the ratio of the number of games in the advantageous section with respect to the total number of games as a two-digit percentage, and the identifier is “7U”. As a general rule, the medium-term continuous service ratio is the 2-digit percentage of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special role (so-called RB) out of the number of medals paid out during the last 6000 games. The identifier is “6y”.

  The ratio of medium-period roles is, in principle, during the operation of first-class special bonus, second-class special bonus (so-called CB) and ordinary bonus (so-called SB) out of the number of medals paid out during the last 6000 games. This is a value representing the percentage of the number of medals paid out as a percentage of two digits, and the identifier is “7y”. In the present embodiment, the second type special combination is not mounted. The cumulative consecutive combination ratio is a value representing the percentage of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special character out of the total number of medals paid out in the total number of games. “6A”. Cumulative combination ratio is a two-digit ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of Type 1 Special, Type 2 Special, and Normal types of medals. It is a value expressed as a percentage, and the identifier is “7A”. In the present embodiment, the second type special combination is not mounted.

  Here, when each information is displayed, the segment DP representing the decimal point is turned on in the 8-segment display on the lower digit side of the identifier display section ID. The display mode of the ratio display portion RA shown in FIG. 8 (c) is, for example, an advantageous section ratio (7U) of 70%, an intermediate period combination ratio (6y) of 60%, an intermediate period combination ratio (7y) of 70, The display mode is shown when the cumulative combination ratio (6A) is 60% and the cumulative combination ratio (7A) is 70%. The percentage value displayed on the ratio display RA is a value obtained by rounding down the decimals. When the result of calculating the ratio is 100%, control is performed so that “99” is displayed on the ratio display RA. To do.

  The various types of information described above are cyclically displayed in the order of advantageous period ratio → intermediate period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio, and the display time of each information is 5 seconds (allowable) The difference is ± 10%. Therefore, the display mode of the identifier display part ID changes from “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →. The display unit RA displays the percentage value corresponding to each identifier. Note that the display of the role ratio monitor 103 is started when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (specifically, when a timer interrupt process described later is executed). At the time of shipment from the factory (a situation where no game is played), the display mode of the identifier display unit ID is “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” Control is performed so that “00” is displayed on the ratio display portion RA when “7U.” →.

  Further, when displaying the intermediate period combination ratio and the intermediate period combination ratio, for example, when the total number of games is less than 6000 times, for example, since the day has started, the identifier is displayed. The identifier (“6y”, “7y”) to be displayed in the part ID is blinked. When the advantageous period ratio, the cumulative consecutive combination ratio, and the cumulative combined ratio are displayed, if the total number of games is less than 175,000, identifiers (“7U”, “ 6A "and" 7A ") blink. The blinking display in these cases is that the total time of the lighting period and the extinguishing period is 0.6 seconds (tolerance ± 10%), and the duty ratio of the lighting period is 50%. That is, control is performed so that the lighting period is about 0.3 seconds and the extinguishing period is about 0.3 seconds.

  In addition, since the slot machine 10 is equipped with the continuous action device related to the normal and first type special objects, the medium ratio combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination combination is included in the ratio monitor 103. For example, in a slot machine that is not equipped with a continuous actuating device related to Type 1 Specials, Type 2 Specials, Normals and Type 1 Specials. This information will not exist. In this case, as described above, the identifier displayed on the identifier display section ID changes from “7U.” → “6y.” → “7y.” → “6A.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →. However, the display mode of the ratio display unit RA corresponding to the identifier for which no information exists is “-”. In place of this, it is also possible to prevent display regarding information that does not exist. For example, in the case of a slot machine that is equipped with an ordinary accessory but is not equipped with a continuous action device for the first type special, second type and first type special, The display content of the monitor 103 transitions from “7U.” → “7y.” → “7A.” → “7U.” →..., And only three types of information: advantageous period ratio, medium period ratio, and cumulative ratio May be displayed.

(Regarding the storage area used for the display of the role monitor)
Next, a storage area of an RWM (read / write memory) included in the microcomputer chip Z1 used for calculating information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 will be described with reference to FIG. This RWM is based on the total number of paid-out sheets, the number of paid-out items (type 1 special items, type 2 special items and normal-type paid-out numbers) and the combined number of paid-out types (type 1 special role). Memory for storing 2 bytes of information to store the cumulative value of the number of medals paid out during one set (400 games), with 400 games as one set for each of the number of paid-out items in operation) The area is set for 15 sets. These storage areas for 15 sets function as a ring buffer. That is, counting of various payouts is started, and when the cumulative value from the first set to the 15th set (400 games × 15 sets = 6000 games) is stored, the next set (6001 game to 6400 game) The cumulative value of the number of payouts in () is sequentially stored from the first set.

  For example, when various cumulative values from the first game to the 6000th game are stored from the first set to the 15th set, the cumulative values from the next 6001 game to the 6400 game are stored in the first set, Cumulative values from the 6401 game to the 6800 game are stored in the second set, and so on, starting from the set storing the earliest cumulative value.

  In addition, for each of the total payout number, the item payout number, and the continuous combination payout number, a storage area for storing information of 3 bytes is set to store a cumulative value for 15 sets. Here, in FIG. 8D, the total paid-out 6000 game cumulative value is expressed as a, the 6000 game cumulative value as the combination payout number is expressed as b, and the 6000 game cumulative value as the combined payout number is expressed as c. The accumulated values a to c are updated by calculating the accumulated value of 6000 games every time the accumulated value for one set is obtained (in other words, every 400 games).

  The RWM has a 1-byte storage area for storing the values of the medium-period role ratio and the medium-period role ratio. Each time the cumulative value of 6000 games is updated, the medium-period role ratio (role 6000 game cumulative value b of the physical payout number / 6000 game cumulative value a of the total payout number) and the middle period linkage ratio (6000 game cumulative value c of the combined payout amount c / 6000 game cumulative value a of the total payout number) The values of the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio calculated and stored in each storage area are updated. Thus, the calculation of the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio is a ring buffer consisting of 15 sets, with various accumulated values of 400 games (total number of payouts, number of items paid out, and number of combined payouts) as one set. It is calculated based on the accumulated value of 6000 games stored in.

  As described above, the “latest 6000 games” in the present embodiment is calculated with 400 games as one set. For example, between 6001 games and 6400 games, 1 to 6000 games are the most recent 6000 games. For example, between 6401 games and 6800 games, 401-6400 games are the latest 6000 games. Although 400 games are exemplified as the number of games in one set, any number of games such as 500 games and 1000 games may be used.

  In addition, a storage area for calculating the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio is set in the RWM, in addition to the storage area for calculating the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio described above. First, a 3-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative value is set for each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the combined payout number. The values of the cumulative payout number A, the cumulative prize payout number B, and the cumulative consecutive payout number C are updated every time a medal (game medium) is paid out. Further, based on the values of the cumulative payout number A, the cumulative feature payout number B, and the cumulative continuous feature payout number C, the cumulative role ratio (B / A) and the cumulative continuous role ratio (C / A) are calculated. Are stored in a 1-byte storage area. The values of the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio are calculated and updated every time one set of the number of games (for example, 400 games) is executed.

  Furthermore, a storage area for calculating the advantageous section ratio is set in the RWM. First, in order to count the number of games executed (total number of games) and the number of games executed during the advantageous section (number of advantageous section games), a storage area of 3 bytes is set in each RWM. The values of the total number of games D and the number of advantageous section games E can be updated every time one game is played. In other words, the value of the advantageous section game number E is not updated unless it is in the advantageous section. Further, an advantageous section ratio (E / D) is calculated based on the total game number D and the advantageous section game number E, and the result is stored in a 1-byte storage area. The value of the advantageous section ratio is also calculated and updated every time one game is played.

[Description of symbol and symbol arrangement]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the arrangement of symbols printed on the reel tape attached to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C and 40R will be described. 20 symbols are printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R as shown in FIG. The arrows shown in FIG. 9A indicate that the symbols on each reel scroll in the display window 21 when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are rotating during the game (except during the freezing effect). Shows direction.

  Each symbol on the reel is printed with one symbol in each symbol region divided into 20 equal parts in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, the types of symbols displayed in each symbol area include “white 7” symbols, “blue 7” symbols, and “ “Red 7” design, “Upper half circle” design showing the upper half of the circular design, “Lower half circle” design showing the lower half of the same circular design, and blue plum as motifs "Replay" design, "Bell" design with yellow bell motif, "Blank" design with tree motif, "Watermelon" design with green watermelon motif, and Red cherry motif There is a "cherry" design.

  In addition, symbol numbers “0” to “19” are predetermined in each symbol region of the reel tape attached to each of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, as shown in FIG. A symbol type code corresponding to the symbol number is stored in the ROM of the main control means 100. The symbol number of each reel and the corresponding type code are used when the slot machine 10 recognizes the symbol displayed at each stop display position (upper U, middle M, lower D) of the display window 21 for each reel. Referenced. Each reel tape shown in FIG. 9A shows a state where the symbol numbers “0” and “1” are separated, and the reel tapes are attached to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C and 40R. In this case, the symbols with symbol numbers “0” and “1” are consecutive.

[Description of correspondence between symbol combinations and condition devices]
Next, the correspondence between the symbol combination displayed on the winning line and the condition device when each reel of the symbol arrangement described above stops will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combinations shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 15 illustrate those in which a privilege is given to the player when those symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line. There are three types of benefits given to the player: re-games, winning (medal payout), and bonus games, and predetermined symbol combinations are associated with these privileges. Here, the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 correspond to the symbol combinations of the replaying role (replaying role) that can be given a replay, and the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 are small roles that can be awarded prizes. The symbol combinations shown in FIG. 15 correspond to symbol combinations of bonus combinations that can be given BB games or SB games as bonus games. Here, a bonus combination that can be given a BB game is called a BB combination, and a bonus combination that can be given an SB game is called an SB combination.

  Among the above-mentioned benefits, the re-game is a privilege that allows a game (re-game) to be performed again without inserting medals only for the next game when the corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on the winning line. Winning is a privilege that when a corresponding symbol combination is arranged on the winning line, the number of medals corresponding to the symbol combination is paid out to the player. A BB game (also referred to as a big bonus game) is a privilege that, when corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on a winning line, an RB game advantageous to the player is repeatedly performed from the next game until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. . That is, the accessory continuous operation apparatus according to the first type special accessory operates. The SB game (single bonus game) is a privilege that increases the possibility that a small role will win in the next game when corresponding symbol combinations are arranged on the winning line. That is, a normal accessory operates. Hereinafter, a game other than the BB game and the SB game is referred to as a normal game.

  An RB game executed during a BB game is a game in which a small role wins with a very high probability, and a predetermined number of winnings or an RB game starts within a number not exceeding eight times during an RB game. The game ends when a predetermined number of games are played out of the number of games not exceeding 12 games. In the slot machine 10, there are two types of RB games, RB-A games and RB-B games. The RB-A game and the RB-B game differ in the number of payouts when a small combination wins and the types of small combinations that can be won. When the RB game ends, if the BB game end condition is not satisfied, the RB game starts as it is from the next game. Note that when the BB game end condition is satisfied during the RB game, the RB game and the BB game are ended even during the RB game.

  In the following, in the case of representing a symbol combination, the symbol names in each reel are described in the order of left reel, middle reel, and right reel, and are enclosed in square brackets. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 01 shown in FIG.

  Each of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 10 to 15 is associated with a condition device. The condition device is a device that is regarded as a necessary condition for aligning the associated symbol combination on the winning line. When the conditional device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device is aligned on the winning line. Is possible. Which condition device is activated is determined by a lottery drawing described later. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, there are 16 condition devices related to the re-gamer, and “re-game 01” to “re-game 16”, and one or more symbol combinations correspond to each condition device. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, there are 20 condition devices related to the small combination, “winning 01” to “winning 20”. Like the re-playing combination, one or more symbols are provided for each conditional device. The combination corresponds. Here, in the “payout number” column of FIGS. 12 to 14, “a” is the number of payouts during normal game and SB game, “a” is the number of payouts during RB-A game, and “c” is RB -B indicates the number of payouts during game play. As a result, when the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 01, winning 02 or winning 13 are prepared, 12 medals are paid out during normal game, SB game or RB-B game, but RB- In the case of A game, 7 medals will be paid out.

  In contrast, when the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 05, winning 11 or winning 12 are prepared, three medals are paid out during normal game, SB game, or RB-B game. If the RB-A game is in progress, 7 medals will be paid out. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to winning 03 or winning 04 is prepared, three medals are paid out regardless of the type of game, and when the symbol combination corresponding to winning 06 to winning 10 is prepared, One medal is paid out regardless of the type. Furthermore, there is a possibility that winnings 14 to 19 may be won only during the RB-A game, and when the corresponding symbol combinations are prepared, seven medals are paid out. The winning 20 may be won only during the RB-B game, and 12 medals are paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the condition device related to the bonus combination is a condition device related to six BB combinations “1BB-A” to “1BB-F” and a condition device related to one SB combination “SB”. There is. When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-A are prepared, a BB game called 1BB-A game is started from the next game. During the 1BB-A game, the RB-A game is continuously executed. When the number of medals paid out during the 1BB-A game exceeds 84, the 1BB-A game ends. More specifically, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-A is prepared, the RB-A game is started from the next game, and when the small role is won twice or two games are performed during the RB-A game, The RB-A game ends. At that time, if the end condition for the 1BB-A game is not satisfied, the RB-A game is started in the next game. Thus, the RB-A game is repeatedly performed, and when the number of medals paid out during this time exceeds 84, the 1BB-A game is ended.

  When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-B are prepared, 1BB-B game is started from the next game. During the 1BB-B game, the RB-B game is continuously executed, and when the number of medals paid out during the 1BB-B game exceeds 348, the 1BB-B game ends. Here, in the RB-B game, as in the RB-A game, the end condition is satisfied when the small role wins twice or two games are played. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B is prepared, the RB-B game is started from the next game, and when the small role wins twice or two games are played during the RB-B game, the RB-B The game ends. At that time, if the end condition for the 1BB-B game is not satisfied, the RB-B game is started in the next game. In this way, the RB-B game is repeatedly performed. When the number of medals paid out during this time exceeds 348, the 1BB-B game is ended.

  When the symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB-C to F are prepared, one of the 1BB-C to F games is started from the next game in accordance with the aligned symbol combinations. During 1BB-C to F games, RB-B games are continuously executed in the same way as 1BB-B games. However, if the number of medals paid out during 1BB-C to F games exceeds 60, 1BB -CF game ends. When the symbol combinations corresponding to SB are prepared, the SB game is started only for the next game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by providing six types of condition devices related to 1BB, even if, for example, a so-called reach eye is displayed and a player is perceived to win a bonus combination, the player can focus on a specific bonus combination. You can avoid it. On the other hand, if there are few types of condition devices related to 1BB, for example, when a strong impact such as a continuous performance is performed when a bonus combination is won, there is a high possibility that the bonus combination will win in the middle of the continuous presentation. Thus, if the bonus combination wins before the end of the continuous production, the interest of the game will be impaired. Therefore, it is preferable that the number of condition devices related to 1BB is larger than the maximum number of games of continuous effects.

[Description of control means]
Next, control means for controlling the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the functional block diagram shown in FIG. The control means of the slot machine 10 includes a main control means 100 that controls the progress of the game and a sub-control means 200 that controls the execution of the game effects. The main control means 100 performs control to advance the game in accordance with the player's operation, and the sub-control means 200 performs the effects executed as the game progresses based on the information transmitted from the main control means 100. Controls notification of various information. Note that transmission of information exchanged between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 is limited to one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200. No information is sent directly to 100.

≪Description of main control means≫
<Main control means and peripheral hardware configuration>
The main control means 100 is realized by the main control board 101 shown in FIG. Here, the CPU included in the microcomputer chip Z1 includes an accumulator (A register) for performing an operation, a plurality of general-purpose registers (B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, and Q register) And a flag register. Each of these registers is composed of 1 byte (8 bits). Of the general-purpose registers, the B and C registers, the D and E registers, and the H and L registers can be used as a pair of 16-bit (2-byte) registers, respectively. When two general purpose registers are used in pairs, two alphabets representing each register are described together. For example, when an H register and an L register are used as a pair, they are expressed as an HL register.

  The flag register is a flag in which each bit indicates a state related to the calculation result by the CPU. The flag register of the present embodiment includes a carry flag, a zero flag, and a second zero flag. Here, the carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry occurs when an operation (addition) is performed and when a carry occurs when an operation (subtraction) is performed. The zero flag is a flag that becomes “1” when the calculation result becomes “0”. The second zero flag is a flag that becomes “1” when the zero flag becomes “1” and when a predetermined operation (LD instruction) is performed.

  As described above, the microcomputer chip Z1 has a CPU, ROM, RWM, random number circuit and timer circuit, I / O port, and the like. The random number circuit updates the random number used when performing various lotteries based on the clock signal supplied from the oscillator G1 in FIG. 7, and the timer circuit is based on the clock signal supplied from the oscillator G2 in FIG. Generate an interrupt request signal. The I / O port includes an operation means 300, various lamps and indicators, stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R, cylinder sensors 43L, 43C, 43R, a door switch 44, a blocker 45, a hopper motor 46, a payout sensor 47a, 47b, the insertion sensors 48a and 48b, the medal passage sensor 49, and the external concentrated terminal board 86 are output with respect to the components, and the signals from the components are input. The various lamps and indicators include, for example, a set value indicator 87 and a role ratio monitor 103 mounted on the main control board 101 in addition to those shown in FIG.

  The stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R rotate or stop the corresponding reels 40L, 40C, and 40R according to the excitation signal output from the main control unit 100. The rotation sensors 43L, 43C, and 43R are provided corresponding to the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, respectively. When an index (a member to be detected) provided at the reference position of the corresponding reel is detected, the detection signal is output. Output to the main control means 100. As a result, the main control means 100 counts the number of steps of the stepping motor with reference to the detected position of the index, and determines the reel rotation position (and consequently the symbol displayed in the display window 21) based on the count value. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the stepping motor drive control is performed by the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the number of steps of the stepping motor may be counted based on the number of executions of the timer interrupt process. For example, in this embodiment, when the stepping motor is rotating at a constant speed, the stepping motor is rotated by one step each time the timer interrupt process is executed once. Therefore, if the count value of the number of executions of the timer interrupt process is cleared every time the above-described reference position is detected, the number of executions of the timer interrupt process will be different from the reference position when the stepping motor is rotating at a constant speed. It becomes the same value as the number of steps.

  The hopper motor 46 is provided in the hopper 83 (see FIG. 5), and discharges the medals in the medal storage part 83a from the medal payout opening 60 according to the drive signal output from the main control means 100. The payout sensors 47 a and 47 b detect medals paid out when the hopper motor 46 is driven, and output a detection signal to the main control means 100. The blocker 45 is installed in the selector 80 (see FIG. 3), and forms or releases a medal flow path in accordance with an on / off signal from the main control means 100. When the blocker 45 is on, a medal flow path is formed, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 are stored in the medal storage portion 83a of the hopper 83. On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is off, no medal flow path is formed, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 are discharged from the medal payout opening 60. The door switch 44 detects opening / closing of the front door 14 and outputs a detection signal to the main control means 100.

  The external concentrated terminal board 86 relays various signals output from the main control means 100 to an external game information display device or an external device such as a so-called hall computer, as to information relating to the game currently being played by the slot machine 10. To do. Here, the signal output from the external concentration terminal board 86 includes a medal insertion signal for outputting the same number of pulse signals as the number of bets bet on the game based on the operation of the start switch 36, The medal payout signal that outputs the same number of pulse signals as the number of medals paid out based on the winning of the winning combination, the BB signal that is turned on during the BB game, and the advantage that is turned on during the advantageous section described later There are section signals. Instead of the advantageous section signal, it may be an ART signal that is turned on during ART.

  The external concentrated terminal board 86 is provided with a relay circuit for each signal to be output, and the on / off state of the corresponding signal is switched by opening and closing the relay circuit. For example, a photocoupler is used instead of the relay circuit. May be.

  The operation means 300 includes the power switch 82a, the key switch 82b, and the setting / reset switch 82c shown in FIG. 3 in addition to the various switches provided on the front door of the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. The power switch 82 a is a switch for turning on / off the power supplied to each device in the slot machine 10. The key switch 82b has a key hole, and is a switch that is turned on or off by rotating a setting change key (setting key) inserted into the key hole. The setting / reset switch 82c is a push button type switch that is operated when an error is detected, when the error is canceled (reset), or when the setting value is changed during the setting change. Here, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated during the setting change, it is possible to change the value displayed on the setting value display 87 without changing the setting value data described later. It is. By the way, after the power switch 82a is turned off, the setting change key (setting key) inserted into the keyhole of the key switch 82b is rotated to turn the power switch 82a on in the on state. The setting is being changed.

  In this case, data at address F011 (acquired number display data; see FIG. 36) is used as a storage area to be displayed on the set value display 87. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated during the setting change, the information stored in the address F011 is updated, and the information corresponding to the information stored in the address F011 by the operation of the start switch 36 is updated to the address F000 ( Setting value data (see FIG. 36) can be stored. Note that information corresponding to the information stored in the address F011 can be stored in the address F000 based on the fact that the key switch 82b is turned off instead of the operation of the start switch 36.

  Here, when the data at the address F011 is used, the acquired number display 28 is more preferable than the set value display 87 as a display for displaying the set value. This is because the address F011 is a storage area for storing data for displaying the acquired number, stop switch operation mode (instruction number), and error type (error code) on the acquired number display 28. Therefore, during normal times (except when the setting is being changed or setting confirmation to be described later), information for displaying the number of acquired images, the operation mode of the stop switch, and the type of error is stored in the address F011, and the setting is being changed or set. Since the information for displaying the set value is stored during the confirmation, the address of the RWM can also be used. When the acquired number display 28 is also used as a display for displaying the set value, the set value display 87 is not necessary as a display for displaying the set value, and the cost can be reduced. The address F011 is given as an example of the storage area to be displayed on the setting value display 87, but another address may be used. In the present embodiment, the reset and the change of the set value are made possible by one push button type switch, but the reset and the change of the set value may be made possible by separate switches.

<Functional blocks of main control means>
The main control means 100 includes a winning combination determining means 110, a reel control means 115, a lottery state control means 120, a game section control means 125, a freeze control means 130, a notification game control means 140, and a hand ratio monitor control. Means 145, winning determination means 150, abnormality detection means 155, LED display control means 160, control command transmission means 165, and external signal transmission means 170 are included. The function of each means described below is realized by the CPU provided in the microcomputer chip Z1 executing a control program stored in the ROM.

(Explanation of the winning role determination means)
The winning combination determining means 110 determines the winning combination by lottery (role lottery) based on random numbers (numeric range: 0 to 65535) generated by the random number generating means included in the main control means 100. The determined winning combination is also referred to as “the lottery result based on the winning combination determination means” or “the result of the lottery”. FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show a list of types of winning combinations (in other words, lottery targets for the role lottery). Here, FIG. 17 shows the types of winning combinations that do not include a bonus combination, and FIG. 18 shows the types of winning combinations that include a bonus combination. In addition, the list shown in FIG. 17 also shows the types of condition devices that operate when each winning combination is determined.

  17 and 18, W is a winning number, A is a winning / replaying winning number, B is an effect group number, and Y is a winning feature winning number (only in FIG. 18). The winning / replay winning number indicates the winning number of the small role or replaying role, and the winning feature winning number indicates the winning number of the bonus role. The winning number W is assigned 1 to 47 for the winning combination in FIG. 17 that does not include the bonus combination, and the serial numbers 48 to 88 are allocated to the winning combination in FIG. 18 that includes the bonus combination. ing. In the winning lottery, first, a winning number is determined, and based on the determined winning number, a winning / replay winning number A (and a winning feature winning number Y for the winning combination shown in FIG. 18) is determined. For the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination shown in FIG. 17, the winning number W and the winning / replay winning number A have the same value. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, the effect group number B is associated with each winning / replaying winning number A.

  When the winning number is determined by the winning combination determining means 110, a winning / replay winning number A, a winning combination winning number Y, and an effect group number B are determined based on the determined winning number. The winning combination winning number Y and the effect group number B are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as information indicating the result of the winning lottery.

  Here, each of the winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 (replaying-A1 to A6) is associated with the production group number 1, and winning / replaying winning numbers 24 to 29 (winning -A1 to A1). A production group number 19 is associated with A6). This means that when any of winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 is determined in the role lottery, the push combination in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the specific condition device are aligned according to the determined winning / replay winning numbers. This is because they are different. More specifically, when the stop switch is operated in a specific push order, the symbol combinations corresponding to the specific condition device are prepared, and when the stop switch is operated in a push order other than the specific push order, the specific condition is set. The reel stop control is performed so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the condition devices other than the device are aligned. When a symbol combination corresponding to a specific condition device is prepared, many medals are paid out, or a state advantageous to the player is maintained.

  For this reason, for example, when the winning / replaying winning number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as it is, if the winning / replaying winning number is acquired by some fraudulent act, the symbol combination corresponding to the specific condition device is obtained from that value. It becomes possible to discriminate the pressing order in which they are aligned (hereinafter also referred to as “an advantageous pressing order”). For this reason, in order not to be able to determine an advantageous pressing order, the effect control group number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 instead of the winning / replay winning number, and the winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 6 are transmitted. On the other hand, the production group number 1 having the same value is associated. For the same reason, the same effect group number 19 is associated with the winning / replay winning numbers 24 to 29. There are other winning / replay winning numbers that have different symbol combinations corresponding to different condition devices depending on the pressing order, but they are operated in a specific pressing order and in a pressing order other than a specific pressing order. The number of medals to be paid out is not different from the time of being played, and one does not maintain an advantageous state and the other does not maintain an advantageous state. There is no need to associate group numbers.

  17 and 18 show the presence or absence of a setting difference for each winning combination. Here, for a winning combination whose winning probability changes between the set values 1 to 6, the setting difference is described as “present”, and for a winning combination whose setting probability is constant (does not change) between the setting values 1 to 6. The difference is marked as “none”.

  In FIG. 17, for each of the winning numbers 1 to 23 (winning / replay winning numbers 1 to 23) related to the replaying combination, any of the condition devices of the replays 01 to 16 shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. Are associated, and when the winning lottery is determined to be one of the winning numbers 1 to 23, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning combination is activated. For example, when winning number 11 (winning / replay winning number 11) is determined, re-game-D1 (double replay 5) is won, and replays 01, 02, 05, 07, 09 One condition device is activated. Thereby, according to the operation of the stop switch by the player, the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the activated condition devices are arranged.

  In addition, any of the winning devices 01 to 20 shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is associated with each of the winning numbers 24 to 47 (winning / replay winning numbers 24 to 47) related to the small role. If the winning number is determined as one of the winning numbers 24 to 47 in the winning lottery, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning combination is activated.

  The winning / replay winning number 30 (common bell A) and the winning / replay winning number 31 (common bell B) are provided for the winning number 31 and the winning number 62 (winning / replaying) that have different settings. By providing a game winning number 31), it is possible to make a great change in the ease of paying out medals (the ease of operation of winning 01 (payout of 12 medals)) according to the set value. At the same time, by providing a winning number 61 with no setting difference (the winning / replaying winning number 30 is determined), this can be used as an opportunity for an advantageous section shift lottery or the like (a winning number with a setting difference). 31 and winning number 62 cannot be used as a trigger).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reel stop control is the same regardless of whether the winning number 31, the winning number 62, or the winning number 61 is determined (the winning 01 is always aligned). . By doing so, it is impossible to specify which winning number has been determined in the game with the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01, so that the advantageous section transition lottery or the like may have been performed in the game. You can have the expectation that you can't.

  Next, in FIG. 18, for the winning numbers 48 to 88 including the bonus combination, any of the bonus combination condition devices shown in FIG. 15 is associated with a part of the winning combination shown in FIG. However, only the bonus combination is associated with the winning numbers 48, 57, 68, 73, 78, 83, 88. Thereby, for example, when the winning number 48 is determined by the lottery drawing, only the 1BB-A condition device operates. On the other hand, for example, when the winning number 49 is determined, the condition device of 1BB-A and the operating devices of the replays 01 and 02 (see the winning / replaying winning number 16 of FIG. 17) are operated. In addition, when any of the winning numbers including the bonus combination (excluding the SB combination) is determined and the condition device for the bonus combination is activated, the next combination until the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device for the bonus combination is completed. After this game, the bonus condition device continues to operate. This state is referred to as “inside” or “during bonus carryover”. When the re-game combination, small combination and SB combination condition devices are activated, the operation state is ended at least before the next game is started.

  The list of FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 shows all the winning combinations that can be the target of the lottery by the winning unit determining means 110. Among these winning combinations, the types of the winning combinations that are the targets of the lottery (In other words, the type of the winning number) and the winning probability of each winning combination vary depending on the lottery status. In the slot machine 10, there are four lottery states in the normal game: non-RT (RT0), RT1, RT2, and RT3, and in the lottery state in the bonus game, 1BB-A game (RB-A game), 1BB- There are two types of BF games (RB-B games), and there are six lottery states in total.

  Next, with reference to the combination lottery tables shown in FIG. 19 to FIG. 26, the types of winning combinations and winning probabilities that are the targets of the combination lottery in each lottery state will be described. 19 is a role lottery table used in non-RT, FIGS. 20 and 21 are role lottery tables used in RT1, FIGS. 22 and 23 are role lottery tables used in RT2, and FIG. 24 is used in RT3. FIG. 25 shows a role lottery table used during 1BB-A games (strictly speaking, during RB-A games) and 1BB-B to F games (strictly speaking, during RB-B games). The contents are shown. FIG. 26 is a combination lottery table used in the SB game that is started when the SB combination wins in the non-RT, RT1, and RT2.

  The role lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 26 are random numbers that are determined to be winning for each winning combination among the random number values 0 to 65535 (also referred to as random number values: 65536) generated by the random number circuit of the microcomputer chip Z1. (Hereinafter also referred to as “numerical number”). Thus, a value obtained by dividing the number corresponding to the winning combination by 65536 is the winning probability of the winning combination. As a result of the lottery, if any winning combination is not won, the game is lost and the winning number is 0. Each combination lottery table shows numbers in settings 1 to 6, but selection of these settings is performed by the key switch 82b and the setting / reset switch 82c shown in FIG. Note that the selected and selected set values are displayed numerically on the set value display 87 shown in FIG.

  In the non-RT, as shown in the role lottery table of FIG. 19, the winning numbers 16, 20-22, 24-29, 31, 33, and 35 are subject to lottery for the winning combinations that do not include the bonus combination. For winning combinations that do not include a combination, winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery. In RT1, the winning numbers 1-15, 18, 20-22, 24-29, 31, 33, and 35 are selected for the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination as shown in the combination lottery tables of FIGS. As for the winning combination that does not include the bonus combination, the winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery.

  In RT2, the winning numbers 1 to 6, 18 to 22, 24 to 29, 31, 33, and 35 are selected for the winning combination not including the bonus combination as shown in the combination lottery tables of FIGS. For winning combinations that do not include a bonus combination, winning numbers 48 to 88 are subject to lottery. In RT3, as shown in the winning lottery table of FIG. 24, winning numbers 16, 17, 20 to 22, and 24 to 36 that are winning combinations that do not include a bonus winning combination are subject to lottery.

  As described above, during the 1BB-A game, the RB-A game is continuously performed until the end condition is satisfied, and during the 1BB-B to F games, the RB-B game is continuously performed. Accordingly, during the 1BB-A game (in the RB-A game), any one of the winning numbers 37 to 46 is always determined as shown in the role lottery table in FIG. In addition, during the 1BB-B to F games (in the RB-B game), the winning number 47 is always determined as shown in the role lottery table in FIG.

  If the SB combination wins in non-RT, RT1, and RT2, the next game becomes the SB game. During the SB game, as shown in the role lottery table of FIG. 26, the role lottery with the same contents as the role lottery table used during the non-RT shown in FIG. 19 is performed. More specifically, the number of winning numbers 33 (common three bells B) in the winning lottery table of FIG. 26 is “2” larger in each set value than the winning lottery table of FIG.

  As shown in each of the lottery tables of FIGS. 19 to 26, the same lottery is performed during non-RT and during the SB game. In RT1 and RT2, the types of re-game players to be drawn Although both are partially different, the combined winning probability of the replaying combination is the same value (about 1 / 1.378 to about 1 / 1.354. However, the winning probability of the replaying combination winning simultaneously with the bonus combination is excluded.) It becomes extremely high and the probability of losing is extremely reduced, which can be said to be an advantageous state for the player. Further, the combined winning probability of the re-playing combination and the small combination in RT3 is set higher than the combined winning probability of the non-RT. During the 1BB-A game (RB-A game) and during the 1BB-B to F games (RB-B game), the small role is always won in both games, which is advantageous to the player. .

  When a winning lottery is performed by the winning combination determining means 100 and one winning number is determined, a winning / replay winning number and an effect group number (for the winning numbers 48 to 88, the winning items are determined based on the determined winning number). The winning number is also determined, and the winning combination number, winning / replay winning number, and effect group number are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RWM of the main control means 100. Then, the winning combination winning number and the effect group number stored in the RWM are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as information indicating the result of the winning lottery.

(Description of reel control means)
The reel control means 115 drives and controls stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R that rotate / stop the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. Thereby, the rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R is started based on the operation of the start switch 36 by the player, and after the rotation speeds of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R reach the above-described constant speed, Maintain speed. When any of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (more precisely, the stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop switch.

  The reel control means 115 stops the rotation of the corresponding reel within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch is operated. As a result, when the reels with 20 symbols provided on each reel as in this embodiment are stopped from rotating at a constant speed (80 rotations / minute) within 190 milliseconds, the rotation is 80 (rotation). / 60 (seconds) × 0.19 (seconds) × 20 (design) = approximately 5.067 The reel is stopped until the design is rotated. However, the reel control means 115 does not stop the symbol passing the stop display position (hereinafter referred to as “winning stop position”) related to the winning line when the stop switch is operated at the winning stop position. Control the stepping motor.

  Therefore, when the stop operation is performed, any one of the symbols from one symbol upstream of the symbols passing the winning stop position to four symbols upstream is set as the winning stop position. Can be stopped. Here, the range of “from the symbol positioned upstream one of the symbols passing the winning stop position to the symbol positioned four upstream when the stop operation is performed” is also referred to as “stop control range”. Say.

  When any winning number is determined by the winning combination determining unit 110, the reel control unit 115 stops the rotation of the reel so that the winning combination corresponding to the winning number stops on the winning line L ( So-called pull-in control). However, when the symbol constituting the winning symbol combination is not within the stop control range, the reels are stopped so as to prevent a winning other than the winning symbol from winning (so-called kicking control is performed).

  10 to 15, for example, for the symbol combination “Bell-Replay-Bell” of the replay 01, a winning line is always required due to the symbol arrangement and stop control range of each reel shown in FIG. There is no so-called “missing out” because it can be aligned at the top. On the other hand, for example, for the symbol combination “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” of 1BB-A, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the “blue 7” symbol does not exist in the stop control range, the winning is stopped. The “blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped at the position, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-A cannot be aligned, and it will be missed.

  For example, among the symbol combinations of the replay 12, the “blank” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol in the middle reel cannot be stopped at the winning stop position depending on the timing of the stop operation when viewed as individual symbols. However, in the middle reel, considering the arrangement interval between the “watermelon” symbols and the symbol interval from the “blank” symbol to the “watermelon” symbol, the “blank” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol are used regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Any of the symbols can be stopped at the winning stop position. Therefore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the replays 12 ("bell-blank-bell" or "bell-watermelon-bell") can always be aligned.

  Moreover, the reel control means 115 changes the symbol combination which performs pull-in control according to the pressing order of the stop switch for a predetermined winning combination. Specifically, when any of the winning numbers 1 to 6 (push order lips 1 to 6) is determined, and the stop operation is performed in a specific push order, the pull-in control such that the symbol combinations of the replay 01 are aligned. However, when a stop operation is performed in the other pressing order, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the replays 03 or 04 are aligned. The specific push order is left → middle → right when replay-A1 is determined, left → right → middle when replay−A2 is determined, and middle when replay−A3 is determined → Left → Right, Middle → Right → Left when Replay-A4 is determined, Right → Left → Medium when Replay−A5 is determined, Right → Middle → When Replay−A6 is determined Left.

  In addition, when any of the winning numbers 7 to 15 (double replays 1 to 9) is determined, when the left stop switch 37L is first stopped, the symbol combination of the replay 01 and the middle stop switch 37C are the first. When the stop operation is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the replay 02 are aligned. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the condition devices corresponding to the winning number are aligned.

  Specifically, when the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 7 (double replay 1) is determined, any one of the replays 02, 05, or 06 depending on the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that these symbol combinations are aligned. If the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 8 (double replay 2) is determined, the symbol combination of any of the replays 02, 05, or 06 is selected depending on the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that they are aligned. When the winning number 9 (double replay 3) is determined, the pull-in control is performed so that any combination of symbols of the replays 02, 05, or 09 is arranged according to the timing of the stop operation.

  Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 05 is controlled when the winning number 7 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When the drawing control is performed on the odd number of the symbol combinations of the replay 05 shown in FIG. 10 and the drawing combination of the symbol combination of the replay 05 is controlled when the winning number 8 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for a symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 05 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 9 (double replay 3) or the winning number 11 (double replay 5) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 07, or 09 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 07 is controlled when the winning number 9 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper half circle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When drawing-in control is performed on the odd number among the symbol combinations of the replay 07 shown in FIG. 10 and the drawing combination of the symbol combination of the replay 07 is controlled when the winning number 11 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for the symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 07 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 10 (double replay 4) or the winning number 12 (double replay 6) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 08, or 09 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 08 is controlled when the winning number 10 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper half circle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When drawing-in control is performed for the recombination 08 number 1 symbol combination shown in Fig. 10 and the re-gaming 08 symbol combination is drawn in when the winning number 12 is determined, the right reel winning stop position (lower D) ) For the symbol combination (the second symbol combination of the replay 08 shown in FIG. 10) for which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed.

  Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 13 (double replay 7) or the winning number 14 (double replay 8) is determined, the replay is performed according to the timing of the stop operation. Pull-in control is performed so that any symbol combination of 02, 09, or 10 is aligned. Here, when the drawing combination of the replay 10 is controlled when the winning number 13 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “upper semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (see FIG. When the drawing control is performed for the symbol combination of the replay 10 shown in Fig. 10 and the symbol combination of the replay 10 is controlled when the winning number 14 is determined, the winning stop position ( The drawing-in control is performed for a symbol combination (an even number among the symbol combinations of the replay 10 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “lower half circle” symbol is displayed in the lower part D).

  In addition, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 15 (double replay 9) is determined, any one of the replays 02, 09, 10 or 11 depending on the timing of the stop operation Pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations are aligned. Here, in the case of drawing-in control of the symbol combination of the replay 10, the symbol combination in which the “lower semicircle” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (lower D) of the right reel (the symbol combination of the replay 10 shown in FIG. 10). Pull-in control is performed for an even number among these.

  In addition, when any of the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) is determined, when a stop operation is performed in a specific push order, only the first stop operation matches the specific push order, and The symbol combination that is the target of the pull-in control is different when the first stop operation does not coincide with the specific pressing order. For example, when the winning number 24 (push order bell 1) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of left → middle → right, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning symbol 01 combination is aligned. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pushing → right → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 03 are aligned. In addition, when the middle stop switch 37C or the right stop switch 37R is first stopped, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning combinations 07 or 08 can be matched.

  When the winning number 25 (push order bell 2) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of left → right → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but left → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from the middle to the right, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 03 are aligned. In addition, when the middle stop switch 37C or the right stop switch 37R is first stopped, the pull-in control is performed so that the winning combinations 07 or 08 can be matched.

  When the winning number 26 (push order bell 3) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 02 are aligned, but middle → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from right to left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prizes 04 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the right stop switch 37R is subjected to the first stop operation, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  When the winning number 27 (push order bell 4) is determined, if the stop operation is performed in the order of middle → right → left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 02 are aligned. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from left to right, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 04 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the right stop switch 37R is subjected to the first stop operation, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  When the winning number 28 (push order bell 5) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of right → left → middle, pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but right → When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing from the middle to the left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 05 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or winning prize 08 are aligned.

  When the winning number 29 (push order bell 6) is determined and the stop operation is performed in the order of right → middle → left, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 01 are aligned, but the right → When the stop operation is performed in the order of the left-to-middle push-in, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning 05 are aligned. In addition, when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prize 06 or the winning prize 10 are aligned.

  Further, when the winning number 37 (two consecutive winning prizes 1) is determined, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning prizes 14 are aligned when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is first stopped. When the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed such that the winning combinations 14 or 15 are combined according to the timing of the stopping operation. In addition, when the winning number 38 (two consecutive winning prizes 2) is determined, pull-in control is performed so that when the left stop switch 37L is stopped for the first time, the symbol combinations of the winning prize 14 are aligned, and the middle stop switch 37C is the first stop switch 37C. When the stop operation is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that one of the winning combinations 14, 18 or 19 is matched according to the timing of the stop operation. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning 14 or the winning 15 are aligned according to the timing of the stopping operation.

  Here, when the winning combination 37 is determined and the drawing combination of the winning 15 is to be controlled, the symbol combination in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel (shown in FIG. 10). When the drawing control is performed on the odd number of the winning combination 15) and the winning combination 38 is drawn when the winning number 38 is determined, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set to “ Pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination (even number among the symbol combinations of the winning 15 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  In addition, when winning numbers 39 to 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 3 to 9) are determined, the pull-in control that the symbol combinations of winning 14 are aligned when the left stop switch 37L or the middle stop switch 37C is first stopped. I do. Further, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the condition devices corresponding to the winning number are aligned.

  Specifically, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 39 (two consecutive winnings 3) is determined, the symbol combination of winning 05 or winning 14 is selected according to the timing of the stopping operation. Pull-in control. If the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 40 (double winning prize 4) or the winning number 42 (double winning prize 6) is determined, the winning 14 or winning according to the timing of the stop operation Pull-in control of 16 symbol combinations is performed. Here, when drawing-in control of the winning 16 symbol combination when the winning number 40 is determined, the symbol combination (shown in FIG. 10) in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel. When the drawing control is performed on the odd number among the symbol combinations of the winning 16) and the drawing combination of the winning 16 is controlled when the winning number 42 is determined, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set to “ The drawing control is performed for the symbol combination (even number among the symbol combinations of the winning 16 shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  When the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 41 (two consecutive winnings 5) is determined, the winning combination of winning 14 or winning 17 is drawn in according to the timing of the stopping operation. Further, when the right stop switch 37R is first stopped when the winning number 43 (double winning award 7) or winning number 44 (double winning award 8) is determined, the winning 14 is made according to the timing of the stop operation. Alternatively, the drawing combination of the winning combination 18 is controlled. Here, when drawing-in control of the symbol combination of the winning 18 when the winning number 41 is determined, the symbol combination in which the “bell” symbol is displayed at the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel (shown in FIG. 10). When drawing-in control is performed for the winning combination 18 (No. 1 or No. 3 symbol combination), and the winning combination 43 is determined and the drawing combination of the winning 18 is controlled, the winning stop position (upper U) of the right reel is set. The drawing-in control is performed for the symbol combination (No. 2 or No. 4 symbol combination shown in FIG. 10) in which the “cherry” symbol is displayed.

  When the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning number 45 (two consecutive winnings 9) is determined, the winning combination 14, 18 or 19 is drawn in according to the timing of the stopping operation.

(Explanation of lottery state control means)
Returning to FIG. 8, the lottery state control means 120 controls the transition of the above-mentioned lottery states (RT0 to RT3, 1BB-A game (RB-A game) and 1BB-B to F game (RB-B game)). . Specifically, the lottery state is managed by the RT state number, the operation state flag, and the operation type. The initial state of the lottery state is RT0 (non-RT). When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in each lottery state, the lottery state is shifted to another lottery state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when any of winning numbers 48 to 87 (that is, 1BB-A to F) is determined in the role lottery at RT0, the process proceeds to RT3 (FIG. 27, FIG. 27). Arrow D). Further, in RT3, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the condition device 1BB-A are prepared, the game moves to the 1BB-A game (RB-A game) (arrow E in the figure), and any of the condition devices 1BB-B to F When the corresponding symbol combinations are complete, the game shifts to 1BB-B to F games (RB-B games) (arrow F in the figure).

  When the end condition of 1BB-A game is satisfied in 1BB-A game (RB-A game) or when the corresponding end condition is satisfied in any of 1BB-B to F games (RB-B game), the process goes to RT2. Transition (arrow G in the figure). In RT2, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replays 09 or 12 are completed, the process proceeds to RT1 (arrow C in the figure). When one of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined in RT1 or RT2, the process proceeds to RT3 (arrow D in the figure), and either SB, replay 03, replay 04, or winning prizes 06 to 08 When the corresponding symbol combinations are complete, the process proceeds to RT0 (arrow B in the figure). In the following, the transition of the arrow C in FIG. 27 is also referred to as “promotion”, and the transition of the arrow B is also referred to as “demotion”.

  In any of the lottery states described above, when the RWM of the main control means 100 is initialized, the routine proceeds to RT0 (arrow A in the figure). Initialization of the RWM of the main control means 100 is executed by turning the power switch 82a from off to on under the condition that the key switch 82b is on. Note that when the initialization of the RWM is completed, the setting value can be changed and setting change is in progress (also referred to as a setting change mode). During the setting change, the set value data can be selected with a value within the range of “0” to “5” based on the operation of the setting / reset switch 82c. Further, during the setting change, after the start switch 36 is operated, the key switch 82b is switched from on to off to end the setting change and shift to a state where the game can be executed. The setting value data can be selected within the range of “0” to “5” by operating the setting / reset switch 82c until the start switch 36 is operated, and the start switch 36 is operated. After that, the set value data cannot be selected even when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated.

Here, the setting value data during the setting change and the display mode by the setting value display 87 will be described with examples.
Example 1) The set value data (address: F000 (H)) is updated by operating the setting / reset switch 82c during setting change. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “0”, the setting value data is set to “1”. If the setting reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “5”, the setting value data is set to “0”. In other words, the setting value data is cyclically updated within the range of “0” to “5” during the setting change.

  At this time, when the set value data is “0”, the data obtained by adding +1 to the set value data when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display is satisfied by the LED display control process by the timer interrupt process described later. As an offset value, an address corresponding to the display mode to be lit is designated using the LED segment table A shown in FIG. Specifically, an operation for adding the offset value to the head address 1211 (H) of the LED segment table A is performed, and the address is designated. Then, the segment to be lit is determined based on the data (segment data) stored at the specified address, and the determined segment data is output from the output port 3 shown in FIG.

Example 2) The set value data (address: F000 (H)) is updated by operating the setting / reset switch 82c during the setting change, and the set value data for display (address: Information of F0XX (H)) is also updated. For example, when the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is “0”, the setting value data is set to “1” and “2” is stored in the display setting value data. If the setting / reset switch 82c is operated when the setting value data is "5", the setting value data is set to "0" and "1" is stored in the display setting value data. Thus, the setting value data is updated cyclically within the range of “0” to “5” during the setting change.

  At this time, when the set value data is “0”, the offset value is displayed from the display set value data when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display is satisfied by the LED display control process by the timer interrupt process described later. The address corresponding to the display mode to be generated (obtained) and to be lit using the LED segment table A shown in FIG. Specifically, an operation for adding the offset value to the head address 1211 (H) of the LED segment table A is performed, and the address is designated. Then, the segment to be lit is determined based on the data (segment data) stored at the designated address, and the determined segment data is output from the output port 3 shown in FIG.

(Description of game section control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the game section control means 125 performs transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and changes (transition) of performance in the advantageous section. Here, the normal section is a section in which the push order of the stop switch cannot be reported (section in which information that can identify an advantageous push order should not be transmitted to the sub-control means 200). This is a section in which the pressing order of the stop switch can be notified (a section in which information that can specify an advantageous pressing order may be transmitted to the sub-control means 200). In addition, in the case of shifting to the advantageous section, the game section control means 125, as a general rule, when any one of the push order bells 1 to 6 is determined, the game order control means 125 has a push order in which the winning combination 01 or winning 02 is arranged at least once. If not notified, no transition to the normal section is made.

  For example, even if it is a specification that shifts to an advantageous section, further shifts to ART in the advantageous section, and moves to the normal section when 50 games are played in the state of ART, winning 01 or winning 02 in the advantageous section As long as it is not notified at least once of the pressing order in which the symbol combinations are aligned, even if 50 games have been played since the transition to ART, the transition to the normal section is not performed. In this case, the state during the ART may be continued as it is, or the state during the ART may be shifted to another state within the advantageous section. This is because there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may be reduced if the player moves to the normal section again without any benefit in spite of the shift to the advantageous section. Conventionally, even if an ART game is started, if the player's luck is bad (if the winning combination that should be notified of the push order is not won), the ART game is finished without informing the push order once. The player's willingness to play has been decreasing.

  However, any of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined during the advantageous section (when any of the winning numbers 48 to 56, 58, 60, 61, 63, 65, 67 is determined, the process proceeds to the advantageous section). If the bonus game (any one of 1BB-A to F games) of the determined winning number has been completed, the push order is notified once in the advantageous section. Even without it, it is possible to shift to the normal section. For example, when a bonus combination is won in the middle of an ART, and the bonus game starts and ends, the push order in which the winning combination 01 or winning 02 is combined is not notified once in the advantageous section. Even so, when the remaining number of games during ART is performed, the state (advantageous section) during ART is terminated. This is because the bonus game provides benefits to the player, so that in such a case, the push order must be notified at least once. It is because there exists a possibility of reducing.

  In addition, even if 1500 games were executed during the advantageous section, none of the push order bells 1 to 6 was determined, so that the push order (instruction number) could not be notified. Even if the push order is not notified once in the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section. This is because even if a player who has played 1500 games in the advantageous section and has not been notified of the push order once, is not able to improve the interest of the game even if the player is notified of the push order once.

  During the stay in the advantageous section, the segment DP (hereinafter also referred to as “advantage section LED”) in the 8-segment display of the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 is turned on. As described above, shifting to advantageously interval, for at least once to press the order of symbol combinations of winning 01 or prize 02 is aligned is informed, which is lit to teach you not leave in stop the player.

  The game section control means 125 controls the transition of the game section and the change (transition) of the performance in the advantageous section. The type of game section (normal section or advantageous section) and the performance of the advantageous section are managed by the game state number. That is, gaming state number 0 is associated with the normal section, and gaming state numbers 1 to 10 are associated with the advantageous section according to performance. The performance of the advantageous section includes “gase high probability” (game state number 1), “high probability” (game state number 2), “gase high probability bonus” (game state number 3), “high probability bonus” ( Game state number 4), “ART in progress” (gaming state number 5), “Additional special zone” (game state number 6), “ART bonus” (game state number 7), “ART return preparation” (game) There are state number 8), “in chance zone” (gaming state number 9), and “ending state” (game state number 10).

  In other words, even when the game hall business hours end in the state of the game state numbers 1 to 10 corresponding to the advantageous sections, the staff of the game hall performs an operation for changing the set value, Since the RWM of the control means 100 is initialized and the RWM address (F021) becomes “0”, the game state number 0 corresponding to the normal section is stored. Moreover, being in any state of the game state numbers 1 to 10 is possible by visually recognizing the advantageous section LED. Therefore, in the next morning, if it is not desired to start operating the game hall from the state in the advantageous section, the staff may confirm the advantageous section LED and perform an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, since the conventional slot machine was not equipped with a lamp corresponding to the advantageous section LED, the staff could not determine whether or not the current state was advantageous for the player, and the same set value was set the next day. Even if the user wants to use it, the RWM of all slot machines is initialized to prevent starting from an advantageous state the next morning. On the other hand, this embodiment is provided with an advantageous section LED, and when the same setting value (setting value data) is desired to be used on the next day, the setting value is changed when the advantageous section LED is turned off. Since it is understood that there is no need to perform the operation, it is possible to save the labor of the staff. In the present embodiment, a function (so-called conventional ceiling function) that shifts to an advantageous section based on the fact that the number of games played in the normal section has reached a specific number of games (eg, 1000 games). Since it is not provided, the advantage for the player does not change even if the game is started from any number of games in the normal section.

  The initial state is a normal section, and when any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined by the lottery in the normal section, the game section control means 125 performs an advantageous section transition lottery. In this advantageous section transition lottery, if the lottery results in a lottery, a high-precision lottery non-winning (hereinafter also referred to as “medium-winning lottery” or “gasse high-winning lottery”) or a high-precision lottery win Will continue to stay in the normal section. In addition, if the high-precision lottery is not won, the next game can be shifted to Gase high-probability (game state number 1) (FIG. 28, arrow a). It is possible to shift from the next game to high probability (game state number 2) (arrow i in the figure).

  Here, the winning combination that triggers the advantageous section shift lottery is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22, but the winning combination with the setting probability 1 to setting 6 (setting value data “0” to “5”) whose winning probability does not change ( In other words, a winning combination with no setting difference can be set as appropriate. Moreover, according to the determined winning number among the winning numbers 20 to 22, the probability of becoming a lost, highly-probable lottery non-winning or highly-probable lottery winning may be varied. For example, when any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 is determined in the role lottery, the winning lottery may be either non-winning high-precision lottery or winning high-winning lottery. The distribution probability with the high-precision lottery winning may be varied according to the determined winning number.

  If you win a winning number with a setting difference that includes one of the prize winning numbers of 1BB-B to F in Gase High Accuracy and win one of the 1BB-B to F, you will receive a bonus (game state) No. 3) can be transferred to (No. 3 in the figure, arrow d), and when the bonus game corresponding to the winning bonus combination is completed, it is possible to move again to the higher accuracy (arrow O in the same figure). In addition, if the winning number including the 1BB-A winning feature winning number is won in Gase High Accuracy and the 1BB-A is won, it is possible to shift to the high probability medium bonus (game state number 4). It may be possible to move into the zone (game state number 9). In addition, if a winning number having no setting difference including a winning combination winning number of 1BB-B is won in Gase Kosei, and it wins that 1BB-B, it becomes possible to shift to a highly probable bonus (game state number 4).

  In addition, when winning at any one of 1BB-A to F with high accuracy, it is possible to shift to the high probability middle game (game state number 4) (arrow D in the figure), and a bonus game corresponding to the winning bonus combination is obtained. When finished, it is possible to move to high accuracy again (the figure, arrow o). For example, if the winning number 16 (Replay A1), which is the winning number with no setting difference in the winning lottery, is determined in the case of the high-risk and high-precision, the falling lottery is performed. (Fig., Arrow c). Here, the winning probability of the falling lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 16 is determined, it may be possible to shift to the normal section without performing the falling lottery.

  Furthermore, the lottery lottery is performed by using the winning number 16 as an example, but the winning number having no setting difference may be used, and the winning number of the falling lottery can be appropriately determined. In addition, as described above, in order to end the advantageous section, in principle, when the maximum payout number is obtained by the operation mode of the player's stop switch during the advantageous section (so-called correct push order operation) When the winning numbers 24 to 29 having a case where the maximum payout number cannot be obtained (so-called incorrect answer pressing order) are won, at least once, a stop switch advantageous to the player The operation mode (so-called correct answer pressing order) is notified.

  This prevents the transition to the normal section without any benefit when shifting to the advantageous section. Therefore, an instructed flag (see FIG. 37, address F022) indicating whether or not the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous for the player is notified is provided. Thus, when the information stored in the instructed flag (address F022) is not information corresponding to “pressing order notified” (pressing order non-notifying), control is performed so that the falling lottery is not executed.

  Even if the falling lottery is executed and the falling lottery is won, the winning result may not be reflected to control the transition to the normal section. In this case, the probability of winning the falling lottery may be lower than the probability determined by the winning numbers 24-29. Or you may make it the probability that the winning number used as the opportunity to perform a falling lottery will be lower than the probability determined by winning numbers 24-29.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning number 16 (replay A1) is determined in high accuracy and high accuracy, the falling lottery is performed, but the winning number 49 (1BB-A + replay A1) is determined. However, the falling lottery is not performed. By the way, when the winning number 49 is determined in the high accuracy and high accuracy, after the end of the 1BB-A game, it becomes highly reliable RT2. During RT2, the winning number 16 is not determined, so no falling lottery is performed. In addition, during RT2, the winning number 19 (replay C) may be determined. When the winning number 19 is determined with high accuracy, the ART lottery is performed as described later. That is, it can be said that the player is pleased that the winning number 49 is determined with high accuracy and high accuracy.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop control is the same when the winning number 16 (replay A1) is determined and when the winning number 49 (1BB-A + replay A1) is determined (always) Replay 01 is prepared). That is, even if the replays 01 are prepared, it is impossible to specify which winning number has been determined.
By doing in this way, even if the replays 01 are prepared with high accuracy and high accuracy, the falling lottery will not necessarily be performed (because the winning number 49 may have been determined), so the expectation (The player's interest does not decrease.)

  In Gase Kosei, if any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined in the role lottery, a promotion lottery will be performed, and if the promotion lottery is won, the next game can be shifted to high accuracy (Figure, arrow F). The winning probability of this promotion lottery may vary depending on the determined winning number, or the winning probability may be set to 100% for one or more winning numbers. Further, instead of setting the winning probability to 100%, it may be possible to shift to high accuracy without performing the promotion lottery. In addition, it is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance items A to C), and if the winning number has no setting difference, it can be appropriately determined as a winning number that triggers the promotion lottery.

  Here, the game section control means 125 can shift to the advantageous section (in the chance zone) when any of the winning numbers 50 to 52 is determined in the normal section. At this time, when the winning numbers 50 to 52 are determined, not the 1BB-A but the symbol combinations corresponding to the chance eyes A to C are stopped and displayed. Then, before the start switch 36 for starting the next game of the game won by the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) and the start of the next game of the game won by the winning numbers 50 to 52 are started. Before the switch 36 is operated, the advantageous section LED is turned on.

  Furthermore, in the next game after winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) are won in the normal section and the advantageous section (gase high accuracy) is transferred, the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) are obtained. The winning lottery (predetermined lottery regarding AT) can be executed by winning. On the other hand, when winning numbers 50 to 52 (1BB-A + chances A to C) are won and the player moves to an advantageous section (in the chance zone), the winning numbers 20 to 22 ( Even if the chance item A to C) is won, the promotion lottery (predetermined lottery regarding AT) is not executed (it is not possible to shift to high accuracy). Here, in the next game in which the winning numbers 50 to 52 are won in the first gaming state (for example, RT0), the winning number is set in the second gaming state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is set higher. Lottery.

  That is, when the winning number 50 is won, the same symbol combination (chance A) as when the winning number 20 is won, and when the winning number 51 is won, the same symbol combination as when the winning number 21 is won. (Chance Eye B) When the winning number 52 is won, the reel is controlled so that the same symbol combination (chance eye C) as when the winning number 22 is won is stopped and displayed, so that the advantage section transition role When the winning number for which the symbol combination is stopped is won, it can be made impossible to grasp whether or not the bonus combination is won. In addition, conventionally, by being configured to be able to give a bonus such as a lottery regarding AT in the game inside the bonus, the player dares to play a game without aligning the symbol combination of the bonus role, etc. There was a possibility that it could become a strategy element, but in the situation where the bonus combination is won (inside), the player does not intentionally arrange the bonus combination by not performing the predetermined lottery regarding AT. It can be avoided.

  In other words, in the next game in which any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 is won, it is possible to give a privilege such as a lottery regarding AT, and the next game in which any of the winning numbers 50 to 52 is won ( In a situation where the symbol combination of the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed (inside the bonus), it is configured so that a privilege such as a lottery regarding AT cannot be given. In addition, when the winning number 19 (Replay C) is determined in the winning lottery, the ART lottery is performed, and if the ART lottery is won, it is possible to shift from the next game to during the ART (gaming state number 5). Yes (the figure, arrow key).

  The winning probability of this ART lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 19 is determined, it may be possible to shift to ART without performing ART lottery. Further, a gaming state such as an ART precursor (not shown) or an ART preparation (not shown) may be provided so that the state can be shifted to ART after passing through these states. In this case, it is necessary to provide a new game state number for managing ART precursors (not shown) and ART preparation (not shown). Note that the winning number is not limited to the winning number 19 and can be determined as a winning number as an opportunity for the ART lottery as long as it is a winning number with no setting difference.

  When a predetermined number of games are played after shifting to ART, it is possible to shift from an advantageous section to a normal section (the arrow in the figure). Here, the initial value of the predetermined number of games (hereinafter also referred to as “ART game number”) is 50 games. During the ART, if any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is determined in the role lottery, a special zone transfer lottery is performed. ) (In the figure, arrows). The winning probability of the above-mentioned special zone transfer lottery may be varied according to the determined winning number, or the winning probability may be set to 100% for one or more winning numbers. Further, instead of setting the winning probability to 100%, it is possible to add to the special zone without adding the special zone transfer lottery. In addition, it is not limited to the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C), and can be appropriately determined as a winning number that triggers the special zone transfer lottery as long as there is no setting difference.

  The game section control means 125 performs the extra lottery when any of the winning numbers 7 to 15 (double replays 1 to 9) is determined by the role lottery during the extra special zone, and according to the lottery result, “ART” Increase the number of games. Here, the winning probability of the extra lottery is 0% when the winning number 7 (2 replays 1) is determined, 5% when the winning numbers 8 to 10 (2 replays 2 to 4) are determined, When winning numbers 11 to 13 (double replays 5 to 7) are determined, 25%, and when winning numbers 14 or 15 (double replays 8 and 9) are determined, they are 100%. Further, the number of games to be increased when winning the extra lottery may be varied according to the determined winning number. It should be noted that the number of games to be increased when winning the extra lottery may be determined by the extra game number lottery. Here, the winning probability of the extra lottery may be appropriately determined between 0% and 100%, and is not limited to the exemplified values. The winning number that triggers the extra lottery and the extra game number lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference.

  When 5 games are played after moving into the special zone, the special zone drop lottery is performed every time one of the winning numbers 1 to 6 (push order lip 1 to 6) is determined in the role lottery, If you win, you can move to ART. The winning number that triggers the special zone drop lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference. If you win any of 1BB-A to F during ART or during the specialization zone, you can move to the bonus during ART (gaming state number 7) (arrow D in the figure), corresponding to the winning bonus combination When the bonus game is over, it is possible to shift to ART return preparation (game state number 8) (arrow o in the figure).

  In the ART return preparation, when the winning number 19 (replay C) is determined, the return lottery is performed, and when winning, it is possible to shift to the game state number where the player stayed before playing the bonus game (the arrow in the figure). That is, when shifting from ART to bonus during ART, it is possible to shift to ART, and when shifting from within the specialization zone to bonus during ART, it is possible to shift into the specialization zone. Here, the winning probability of the return lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. Further, when the winning number 19 is determined, it is possible to shift to the game state number where the player stayed before playing the bonus game without performing the return lottery. Note that the winning number that triggers the return lottery can be appropriately set as long as the winning number has no setting difference.

  In addition, when 1BB-A (winning numbers 48 to 56) is won in the normal section, the game section control means 125 performs an advantageous section shift lottery. In this advantageous section transition lottery, it becomes a lottery result of losing and chance zone lottery winning, and when it becomes a losing, it stays in the normal section continuously. Here, the winning probability of the advantageous section shift lottery may be determined as appropriate. For example, the winning probability may be 100%. In addition, when 1BB-A (winning numbers 48 to 56) is won, the chance zone lottery winning may be performed without performing the advantageous section shifting lottery.

  When 1BB-A is won and the chance zone lottery is won, the next game can be entered into the chance zone (gaming state number 9) (the arrow in the figure). In the chance zone, the game section control means 125 performs an ART promotion lottery every time one of winning numbers 37 to 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 1 to 9) is determined in the role lottery. Here, the winning probability of the ART promotion lottery is 0% when the winning number 37 (double winning award 1) is determined, and 5% when the winning number 38-40 (double winning award 2-4) is determined. When winning numbers 41 to 43 (two consecutive winning prizes 5 to 7) are determined, 25%, and when winning numbers 44 or 45 (two consecutive winning prizes 8 and 9) are determined, 100%. Further, the ART promotion lottery may be performed only when the number of games in the 1BB-A game is equal to or greater than the specific number of games, or during a period until the specific number of games is reached.

  If you win 1BB-A and win the chance zone lottery, you can move from the next game to the chance zone preparation (advantageous section), and when 1BB-A wins, you are in the chance zone (advantageous section). It may be possible to migrate.

  When the ART promotion lottery is won during the 1BB-A game, when the 1BB-A game is over, the game can be shifted to the ART (arrows in the figure). On the other hand, when the ART promotion lottery has not been won, when the 1BB-A game is over, it is possible to move to the normal section again (arrow in the figure).

  When the game section control means 125 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the game section control means 125 starts counting the number of games executed during the advantageous section (game state numbers 1 to 9). This count value is cleared when returning from the advantageous section to the normal section. When the number of games executed in the advantageous section becomes 1470 games, it is possible to shift from the current gaming state number to the ending state (gaming state number 10) (the arrow in the figure). Then, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, it is possible to shift to the normal section (the arrow in the figure). In this way, by setting an upper limit of 1500 games for the number of games in the advantageous section, tens of thousands of medals are paid out in one advantageous section so that the player's gambling will not be remarkably lost. I have to. Here, even if the bonus game is being played when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, it is possible to shift to the normal section. Of course, even in this case, if the bonus game end condition is not satisfied, the bonus game is continued.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the ART lottery executed in the high probability (gaming state number 6) and the ART promotion lottery executed in the chance zone (gaming state number 9) shift to ART (in other words, the ART game). A lottery to determine whether or not to extend the stay period in ART, such as a lottery to determine whether or not to start) or an extra lottery executed in the special zone (game state number 6), This corresponds to “a predetermined lottery concerning a notification game”. In the present embodiment, the end condition during ART is the digestion of a predetermined number of games. However, for example, when performing an ART end lottery to determine whether or not to end ART, Corresponds to "Lottery of". Furthermore, when it is determined whether or not to extend the stay period during ART by performing a so-called loop lottery, this loop lottery also corresponds to the “predetermined lottery regarding the notification game”.

  When shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section, a series of addresses F020 to F028 in the storage area of the RWM are cleared (set to 0). In other words, the set value data at address F000, the RT state number at address F005, the stored number display data at F010, etc. are not cleared. As a result, only information relating to the advantageous section is cleared, so that even if the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered, the game can be executed normally.

  The game section control means 125 performs the following transition control in addition to the transition control shown in FIG. First, in the normal section, when the winning number 65 (1BB-B + watermelon A) is determined by the lottery, the normal section can be shifted to the standby section. In this standby section, although the transition to the effective section is confirmed, the stop switch push order cannot be reported as in the normal section (information that can identify an advantageous push order to the sub-control means 200). Must not be transmitted). In the waiting section, the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed. Further, it is not necessary to light the advantageous section LED during the standby section.

  After transitioning to the waiting zone, when winning 1BB-B, it is possible to shift from the waiting zone to the high probability middle bonus (game state number 4) of the advantageous zone. In addition, the advantageous section LED is turned on until a medal for the next game can be inserted after the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B ("White 7-White 7-White 7") is prepared at the latest. . Then, when the 1BB-B game is completed, it is possible to shift to high probability (game state number 4), and thereafter, transition control is performed according to the transition diagram shown in FIG. Here, the route from the normal section to the advantageous section through the standby section is called “special route”.

  In the transition control performed by the gaming section control means 125, even if the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the transition to the normal section returns (transfers) without being promoted (shifted) to ART (gaming state number 5). The ratio between pattern A (for example, high accuracy or high accuracy only) and pattern B that is promoted (transferred) to ART during (at least game state number 5) at least once and then returned to the normal section (transferred) is about 7 : It is set to be 3. Further, in the case of pattern A, the expected number of medals that can be acquired (paid out) during the advantageous section (hereinafter also referred to as “expected number of acquired sheets”) is about 10, and the expected number of acquired medals in the advantageous section in the case of pattern B is It is assumed that it is designed to be about 460 sheets. As a result, the expected number of acquired images once shifted to the advantageous section is 460 × 0.3 + 10 × 0.7 = 145.

  As described above, the expected number of acquired sheets (145 sheets) when shifting to the advantageous section is set to be ½ (350 sheets) or less of the allowable storage number (700 sheets) of the medal storage section 83a of the hopper 83. For example, if the staff of the game hall replenishes about half of the allowable number of medals, for example, 350 medals at the start of business (there is no need to replenish medals, and the medal storage unit 83a is filled. In general, about half of the medals are replenished.) Even if the winning lot transition lottery is immediately won, there is a possibility that the medal in the medal storage portion 83a may be empty during the advantageous zone. Even if it is low (that is, it is not necessary to replenish medals) and it is not won in the advantageous section shift lottery for a while, the medal auxiliary storage 84 will not be filled immediately (snash In other words, it is not necessary to collect medals), so that the work burden on the staff after the game hall starts operating is reduced (there is no dissatisfaction with the player even if the number of staff is small). it can. In summary, it is preferable to set the expected number of acquisitions when moving to the advantageous section to be less than or equal to half the allowable storage number of the medal storage unit 83a. Alternatively, it is preferable to provide a hopper having a medal storage portion 83a capable of storing a number that is at least twice as many as the number of expected acquisitions when moving to an advantageous section.

  Furthermore, by making the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery less than 1 / (700 ÷ regulated number (regular number “3” in the normal game)), the medal in the medal storage unit 83a is reached at the end of the first advantageous section. Even if it almost disappears (for example, 350-145 = 105), there is a high possibility that the medal storage part 83a is full or nearly full before the next advantageous section starts. There is a low possibility that the medal storage portion 83a will be emptied even during the advantageous section (that is, it is not necessary to replenish medals). On the other hand, if the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 1 / (700 ÷ specified number (specified number “3” in the normal game)) or more, the medal storage unit 83a is stored at the end of the first advantageous section. Is likely to be almost lost (for example, 350-145 = 105), so it is unlikely that the medal storage unit 83a is full before the next advantageous section is started. The medal auxiliary storage 84 does not become full (that is, it is not necessary to collect medals).

  For the same reason, it is desirable to set the number of medals to be paid out in one bonus game to 350 or less. For example, as in this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out in one bonus game is 1BB-A. When there are 1BB-C to F games less than games and 1BB-B games, it is desirable to set the winning probabilities of 1BB-C to F higher than the winning probabilities of 1BB-A and 1BB-B. Even if the bonus combination is won, if it is 1BB-C to F, there is a low possibility that the medal in the medal storage unit 83a will be empty during the bonus game (that is, the medal cannot be replenished). That's it.

(Explanation of freeze control means)
In FIG. 16, the freeze control means 130 determines the progress of the game when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied when the game played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, and the next game becomes the normal section. Execute freeze control to delay. However, if the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches 1500 games and the bonus game is in progress and the bonus game end condition is not satisfied, the freeze that delays the progress of the game at that time The bonus game is continued without executing the control. In this way, if the bonus game is being played when the number of games executed during the advantageous period reaches 1500 games, the freeze control is executed when the game played during the advantageous period reaches 1500 games. Without executing, the freeze control is executed when the bonus game ends.

  In conventional slot machines, there are no restrictions on ART games, so tens of thousands of medals are paid out in one ART, and the gambling is not too high. There was an opinion. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games so that the gambling is not excessively high. Also, the freeze control means 130 freezes when a 1500 game is played in the advantageous section. Thereby, during this freeze, it is possible to display the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, etc. during the advantageous section (in particular, the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, the total number of ART sets, etc. during ART).

  However, when the 1500th game is reached during the bonus game, which is an advantageous section, the freeze control means 130 does not perform freeze control. Therefore, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the above-described advantageous section are not displayed. This is because if the freeze control is performed during the bonus game, the refreshing feeling during the bonus game may be cut off. In addition, freeze control is performed when the bonus game ends. This makes it possible to display the total number of games played during the bonus game and the total number of acquired games during the freeze.

  In addition, when the 1500th game is reached during the bonus game which is the advantageous section, the total number of games and the total number of games acquired during the advantageous section, etc. The number of times, the total number of acquired sheets, and the total number of AT sets) may be displayed. Further, the total number of games and the total number of acquired bonus games in the normal section may be added to the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the advantageous section.

(Explanation of notification game control means)
The notification game control means 140 can determine and notify the push order to be notified according to the winning combination when it shifts to the above-mentioned advantageous section (in the advantageous section). The notification of the pressing order is performed by displaying a numerical value called an instruction number on the acquired number display 28 shown in FIG. Specifically, instruction number 1 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 1) of left → middle → right (forward pressing), and instruction number 2 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 2) of left → right → middle (scissor pressing). ), Instruction number 3 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 3) of middle → left → right (forward middle press), and instruction number 4 corresponds to the pressing order (pressing order 4) of middle → right → left (reverse middle pressing). ), Instruction number 5 corresponds to the right → left → middle (reverse scissors press) push order (push order 5), and instruction number 6 corresponds to the right → middle → left (reverse push) push order (push order). 6). In addition, when the notification game control unit 140 does not notify the pressing order, an instruction number 0 that does not indicate a specific pressing order is set.

  When the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display unit 28, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the ten-segment display (hereinafter also referred to as “upper digit”) of the acquired number display unit 28 “ = ”Is displayed, and the instruction number is displayed on the 8-segment display of the first place (hereinafter also referred to as“ lower digit ”). In the present embodiment, the acquired number display 28 is used both for displaying the number of paid-out medals, displaying an error code (described later), and displaying an instruction number. By displaying “=” which is not displayed when displaying the number of medals to be paid out and the error code, the player can determine the type of information displayed.

  Here, in each section shown in FIG. 28, the notification game control means 140 is configured such that the normal section (the gaming state number 0), the high probability middle bonus (the gaming state number 3), and the high certainty bonus (the gaming state number 4). In addition, in the bonus during ART (game state number 7), the instruction number is not displayed on the acquired number display 28. On the other hand, in ART (gaming state number 5), in the specialization zone (gaming state number 6), in preparation for returning to ART (gaming state number 8), and in the ending state (gaming state number 10), the winning number When any of 24 to 29 is determined, the instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations of winning 01 or winning 02 are arranged are displayed. Hereinafter, such notification contents in the pressing order are also referred to as “all navigations”. In the case of high accuracy (game state number 1) and high probability (game state number 2), when winning numbers 24-29 are determined, at least one combination of winning 01 or winning 02 The corresponding instruction numbers are displayed (all navigations) in the order of pressing. In addition to the above instruction number, left →? →? Instruction number 7 corresponding to the push order (push order 7) of (first left stop), middle →? →? Instruction number 8 corresponding to the pressing order (pressing order 8) of (first middle stop), right →? →? If there is an instruction number 9 corresponding to the pressing order (pressing order 9) of (right first stop), after all navigation is performed, when any of winning numbers 24-29 is determined, winning 06 Instruction numbers 7 to 9 corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 08 and winning 10 (according to the determined winning number) are not arranged are displayed. Hereinafter, such notification contents in the pressing order are also referred to as “half-navigation”.

  The reason for performing the half-navigation is, for example, while waiting for the winning number 19 to be determined in order to shift to the ART state (gaming state number 3) in the high probability (gaming state number 2) and RT2, the winning number Any of 24-29 may be determined. At this time, in order to maintain RT2 (so that the symbol combinations corresponding to winning prizes 06 to 8 and winning prize 10 are not aligned), if all navigation is performed, 12 medals will be paid out. It is not preferable because medals are given excessively. Therefore, it is up to the player's luck to perform the half-navigation to ensure that the RT2 is maintained and 12 medals are paid out.

  In addition, it is not preferable to give medals excessively to the player (payout of 12 medals), but even in situations where it is not preferable to reduce medals (payout of 1 medal) , There is a merit in performing half navigation (12 payouts or 3 payouts depending on the player's luck). In a slot machine in which the instruction numbers 7 to 9 are not defined, the instruction number may not be displayed after all navigation is performed, or all navigation may be performed occasionally. In addition, high probability (game state number 2), during ART (game state number 5), during the specialization zone (game state number 6), ART return preparation (game state number 8), and ending state (game state number) In 10), when any of the winning numbers 1 to 6 is determined, the instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order in which the symbol combinations of the replay 01 are arranged are displayed.

  Here, the number of initial games in the ART is set in consideration of the combined winning probability of the push order bells 1 to 6 so that the above-mentioned “all navigation” is performed at least once when moving to the advantageous section. Is desirable. As described above, in principle, when moving to the advantageous section, all navigation is not performed once, and the normal section is not transferred. Therefore, depending on the set initial game number, a predetermined number of games (initial game) This is because there is a possibility that inconvenience that it is not possible to shift to the normal section may occur despite the fact that several minutes) have been performed.

  It is assumed that in the normal section and RT2, any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance items A to C) is determined and the next game is shifted to the high probability (game state number 2). For example, assuming that the winning combination probability of push order bells 1 to 6 in RT1 and RT2 is 1 / 8.40, and the winning probability of Replay C (winning role to move from RT2 to RT1) is 1 / 1.93, it is highly accurate. (Game state number 2) and the number of games staying at RT2 can be estimated as 2 games (from the winning probability of Replay C). Also, in RT2, the number of games required from the transition to high probability (game state number 2) until the first “all navigation” is performed is estimated to be 9 games (from the combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6). (Including the case where the ART is being transferred to RT1 on the way).

  Therefore, if the number of initial games in ART is set to 9-2 = 7 games or more, the possibility that “all navigation” will be performed at least once before the condition for shifting to the normal section is satisfied is increased. Can do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the state during the ART cannot be ended although the end condition during the ART (execution of the predetermined number of games) is satisfied. In addition, since the winning probability of Replay C is set higher than the combined winning probability of the order bells 1 to 6, the possibility of “all navigation” being performed at high accuracy (gaming state number 2) and RT2 is reduced. Therefore, the notification of “all navigation” can be concentrated during ART.

  As the display mode of the instruction number, “= 0” is displayed when the instruction number is 0, but it may not be displayed. As the display mode of the instruction number, the instruction number may be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 and the lower digit may not be displayed. Here, as a non-display mode, it is possible to turn off all segments of the 8-segment display. Further, “=” may be displayed instead of non-display. Further, the instruction number is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, and the number indicating the stop switch to be actually operated (for example, the left stop switch 37 is No. 1 (“1”), the middle stop switch 37C is No. 2 ( “2”), the right stop switch 37 may sequentially display No. 3 (“3”)) in the lower digits.

  The display mode of the instruction number is not limited to that shown in FIG. 29 (a). For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a 7-bit numerical value (0 to 127) is displayed using one 8-segment display. You may make it display. In this case, segments a to g are associated with Bits 0 to 6 in the command number data to be described later, and each segment is turned on or off to display the command number expressed in binary (that is, within a numerical range of 0 to 127). To do. In this case, for example, when the instruction number 1 is displayed, only the segment a is turned on. Further, if the winning number (which may be a winning / replaying winning number) is known, an advantageous pressing order can be determined, so that the winning number may be displayed instead of the instruction number. For example, when displaying the winning number 28 (push order bell 5), the segments c, d, and e are turned on. Of course, these lighting modes may be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 or in the lower digit. The stop switch to be actually operated may be indicated by a binary number. In either case, segment data to be described later may be determined in advance so that such display can be performed.

(Explanation of role monitor control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the role ratio monitor control means 145 displays the advantageous section ratio, the medium period ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative ratio, and the cumulative ratio displayed on the ratio monitor 103 shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. Calculate the cumulative service ratio. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 8D, the cumulative value in the most recent 6000 games is counted for each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the consecutive combination payout number. Based on the value, the medium period combination ratio and the medium period combination ratio are calculated. Separately from this, the total cumulative value is counted for each of the total payout number, the item payout number, and the combined payout number, and based on each count value, the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio are calculated. Furthermore, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are counted, and the advantageous section ratio is calculated based on these count values.

(Explanation of winning determination means)
Returning to FIG. 16, when all of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R are stopped, the winning combination determination means 150 corresponds to any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, when it is determined that any BB combination of 1BB-A to F has won, the BB game starts from the next game, and when it is determined that the SB combination has won, the next game For example, when a game using the combination lottery table shown in FIG. 26 is performed and it is determined that the re-game player has won, the re-game is performed in the next game. The number of medals corresponding to the selected small role is paid out. Here, until the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, 50) is reached, the number of medals corresponding to the winning small role is added to the current number of credits, and the upper limit of the number of credits (for example, 50). After reaching the above, medals may be discharged from the medal payout opening 60 shown in FIG.

(Description of abnormality detection means)
The anomaly detection means 155 detects an abnormal state that may occur in the slot machine 10 during non-games and during a game or a situation that obstructs the progress of the game, and detects the detected anomalies or faults (hereinafter collectively referred to as “error”). Error number) is displayed on the acquired number display 28. Here, FIG. 30 shows some of the types of errors detected by the abnormality detection means 155.

  In FIG. 30, a power failure recovery error (error code: E1) indicates that the content of the RWM is not normal when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned ON (hereinafter also referred to as “ON” or “ON”) (for example, This error is detected when the contents of the RWM at power-off and the contents of the RWM at power-on do not match (parity check error)). This error is also detected when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment. The empty error (error code: CA) is an error detected when there are no medals stored in the medal storage unit 83a of the hopper 83. The door opening error (error code: Cd) is an error detected when the front door 14 of the slot machine 10 is opened. When these errors are detected, an error code corresponding to the detected error is displayed on the acquired number display 28 by the LED display control means 160 described later.

  Among the errors described above, the power recovery error is an error that can be detected when the slot machine 10 is powered on, and the empty error and the door opening error are errors that can be detected during the game. Further, when each error is detected, the main control means slot machine 10 enters a state where the game cannot be progressed (hereinafter also referred to as “non-game state”). The method of resuming the progress (returning method) differs depending on the type of error.

  First, when the game becomes impossible due to an empty error or a door opening error, the cause of the error is resolved, and the game control process is resumed by operating the reset / setting switch 82c (see FIG. 3). can do. Thus, the empty error and the door opening error are referred to as recoverable errors because the game control process can be resumed (returned) by operating the reset / setting switch 82c. Note that the game control process can be resumed also when the key is turned counterclockwise in the door key 31. The door opening error can be canceled based on the door being closed (without requiring the operation of the reset / setting switch 82c or turning the keypad counterclockwise). .

  On the other hand, when a power failure recovery error occurs, the slot machine 10 is turned off and the setting change key (setting key) inserted into the keyhole of the key switch 82b is turned on. In this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again. As a result, the setting is being changed. At this time, a predetermined storage area of the RWM is cleared. Thus, the power failure recovery error is referred to as a non-recoverable error because the game control process cannot be resumed (returned). The power failure recovery error is an error that can be detected immediately after the power is turned on.

  When an unrecoverable error occurs, the predetermined storage area (addresses F000 to F3FF) of the RWM is cleared at the time of return, and the information about the game stored in the cleared storage area is not maintained. Will be done. Note that when an unrecoverable error occurs, the address F000 is also initialized and "0" is stored. In this embodiment, when the address F000 is "0", the setting is being changed. “1” is displayed on the set value display 87. In other words, since the correction process for displaying “1” on the set value display 87 is not required, the capacity can be reduced.

(Description of LED display control means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the LED display control means 160 includes a clearing display LED 22, a re-game display LED 23, an insertion possible display LED 24, a game start display LED 25, an insertion display LED 26 a to 26 c, a credit number display 27, an acquired number display 28, setting. Display control of the value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103 is performed. Here, the contents of the LED segment table A referred to when the LED display control means 160 performs display control of the 8-segment display constituting the credit number display 27, the acquired number display 28 and the set value display 87 are shown. FIG. 31 (b) shows the contents of the LED segment table B shown in FIG. 31 (a) and referred to when the display control of the 8-segment display constituting the role ratio monitor 103 is performed.

  The LED segment tables A and B are information stored in the ROM included in the main control means 100, and each segment ag (FIG. 4 (a), FIG. 29 (b) constituting the 8-segment display. ) See) which is to be lit, in other words, it can be said that the display mode of the 8-segment display is determined in advance. Hereinafter, this data is referred to as segment data. Also, the segments a to g shown in FIGS. 4 (a) and 29 (b) are each an 8-segment display constituting the credit number display 27, the acquired number display 28, the set value display 87 and the role ratio monitor 103. Segments a to g are shown.

  There are 16 segment data in the LED segment table A in FIG. 31A, and each segment data is stored in ROM addresses 1211H to 1220H. Further, there are 13 segment data in the LED segment table B of FIG. 31B, and each segment data is stored in ROM addresses 1311H to 131DH. Each segment data is 1-byte data, and each bit D0 to D6 when the data is expressed in a binary system corresponds to each segment a to g of the 8-segment display. That is, the least significant bit D0 corresponds to the segment a, the upper bit D1 corresponds to the segment b, and the bits D2 to D6 hereinafter correspond to the segments c to g, respectively. When the value of each bit is “0”, the corresponding segment is turned off, and when it is “1”, it is turned on. However, whether “1” is represented by a high level signal (for example, +5 V (volt)) or a low level signal (for example, ground potential) (in other words, whether it is active high or active low). May be determined as appropriate.

  In the following, description will be made taking active high (a high level signal is output from the data output terminal of the microcomputer chip Z1 when “1”) as an example. In the present embodiment, there is no item for which the ratio is not displayed on the role ratio monitor 103. For example, in a model having no advantageous section, “-” is displayed on the display unit that displays the advantageous section ratio. Therefore, the LED segment table B in which the segment data (40H) for lighting only the segment g at the ROM address 131E (offset value: DH) (display mode “−”) is stored may be used.

  Since the most significant bit D7 is not used for lighting control of the segments a to g of the 8-segment display, all the values of the most significant bit D7 of each segment data are “0”.

  For example, the segment data 3FH stored in the ROM address 1211H is expressed as “00111111” in binary, indicating that the segments a to f are turned on and the segment g is turned off. Therefore, the display mode is “0”. Similarly, segment data having display forms of numerals “1” to “9” are stored in the ROM addresses 1212H to 121AH, respectively. The addresses 121BH to 121FH store segment data in the form of displaying alphabets or symbols “A”, “=”, “C”, “d”, and “E”, respectively. Further, segment data for turning off all the segments is stored at the address 121FH.

  On the other hand, in the LED segment table B, the ROM addresses 1311H to 131AH store the segment data that display the numbers “0” to “9”, respectively, and the addresses 131BH to 121EH each include the alphabet. Alternatively, segment data that is a display form of the symbols “U”, “y”, “A”, and “−” is stored.

  The LED display control means 160 manages segment data acquired from the LED segment table by using an offset value. This offset value indicates an address value based on the leading address 1211H of the LED segment table A (1311H in the LED segment table B). For example, when the segment data is acquired from the LED segment table A, if the offset value is “0”, the segment data (3FH) of 1211H + 0H = 1121H is acquired, and if the offset value is “B”, 1211H + BH = 121CH segment data (48H) is acquired.

  Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35 whether lighting control of each display LED and 8-segment display is performed using the segment data acquired from the LED segment table A or B. FIG. FIG. 32 is a wiring diagram showing wiring and the like among the microcomputer chip Z1, the digit drivers DD1 and DD2, the segment driver SD, and the setting display 87 mounted on the main control board 101. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pin assignments of the output ports 2 to 4. FIG. 33 is a wiring diagram showing the wiring between each display LED and the 8-segment display mounted on the central display board installed on the back surface of the front door 14. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the bit of the signal (data) input to each 8-segment display and each segment and each display LED of the 8-segment display.

  In the wiring diagram of the main control board shown in FIG. 32, the microcomputer chip Z1 has three chip select signal output terminals XCS1 to XCS3 and 8-bit data output terminals D0 to D7. Digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and segment driver SD each have a clock input terminal CK, data input terminals D0 to D7 and data output terminals D0 to D7, and a signal input to clock input terminal CK is on (high level signal). When the signal is changed from OFF to LOW (low level signal), the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 is held, and signals corresponding to the signals are output from the data output terminals D0 to D7. When the signal input to the clock input terminal CK changes from off (low level signal) to on (high level signal), the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 is held, and the signal is Corresponding signals may be output from the data output terminals D0 to D7. Of course, a signal corresponding to the signal input to the data input terminals D0 to D7 may be held and output from the data output terminals D0 to D7.

  The chip select signal output terminal XCS1 is the clock input terminal CK of the digit driver DD2, the chip select signal output terminal XCS2 is the clock input terminal CK of the segment driver SD, and the chip select signal output terminal XCS3 is the clock input terminal of the digit driver DD1. CK and each are connected. The data output terminals D0 to D7 of the microcomputer chip Z1 are connected to the digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and the data input terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD. However, since the bits D4 to D7 of the digit driver DD1 are not used (NC), these data input terminals are connected to the ground.

  Further, the data output terminals D0 to D2 of the digit driver DD2 are connected to the connectors of the central display board shown in FIG. 34 via corresponding drive circuits (not shown, but via the main control board side connector CN1 and the wire harness). The data output terminals D3 to D7 are connected to the 3rd to 7th pins of the input connector CN (hereinafter referred to as “input connector CN”). Further, the data output terminal D7 is also connected to the common terminal of the set value display 87. Further, the data output terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD correspond to the segments a to g (more specifically, to the segments a to g of the set value display 87 and the role monitor 103 through the corresponding driving circuits. LED anode) and the 8th to 15th pins of the input connector CN of FIG.

  Further, the data output terminal D0 of the digit driver DD1 is connected to the common terminal of the identifier display unit ID (upper digit) of the duty monitor 103, and the data output terminal D1 is connected to the common terminal of the identifier display unit ID (lower digit). The output terminal D2 is connected to the common terminal of the ratio display portion RA (upper digit) of the role monitor 103, and the data output terminal D3 is connected to the common terminal of the ratio display portion RA (lower digit). The common terminal of the 8-segment display is connected to the cathode of each LED corresponding to the segments a to g.

  The data output terminals D0 to D7 of the segment driver SD are connected to the bases of pnp transistors included in the corresponding driving circuits. A voltage of +5 V is applied to the emitter of each pnp transistor, and the collector is connected to the input connector CN of the central display substrate. When a low level signal is supplied from the connected data output terminal to the base from the connected data output terminal, the pnp type transistor of each drive circuit is turned on, and a current flows from the emitter to the collector. Is supplied (high level voltage is applied).

  Data output terminals D0 to D2 of digit driver DD2 are connected to the bases of npn transistors included in the corresponding driving circuits. The emitter of each npn-type transistor is connected to the input connector CN of the central display substrate, and the collector is connected to the ground. When each npn transistor is supplied with a high level signal from the connected data output terminal to the base, the npn transistor is turned on so that a current can flow from the collector to the emitter. become.

  As described above, the pnp transistor of each drive circuit is turned on when a low level signal is supplied to the base, and the npn transistor is turned on when a high level signal is supplied to the base. . Incidentally, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D2, the digit driver DD2 outputs a high level (low level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D2, and inputs the data. When a high level (low level) signal is input to the terminals D3 to D7, a low level (high level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2. Further, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D7, the segment driver SD outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D7. ing. Furthermore, when a high level (low level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D3, the digit driver DD1 outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D3. ing.

  If it is active low (when “1”, a low level signal is output from the data output terminal of the microcomputer chip Z1), on the contrary, the digit driver DD2 has a low level (to the data input terminals D0 to D2). When a high level signal is input, a high level (low level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2, and a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D3 to D7. In this case, a low level (high level) signal is output from the data output terminals D0 to D2. When a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D7, the segment driver SD outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D7. . Furthermore, when a low level (high level) signal is input to the data input terminals D0 to D3, the digit driver DD1 outputs a low level (high level) signal from the data output terminals D0 to D3. ing.

  Next, in the wiring diagram of the central display board shown in FIG. 33, + 5V (volts) is supplied to the first and second pins of the input connector CN of the central display board, and each of the 1 to 3 input LEDs 26a to 26c is supplied. Connected to the anode. The third pin (input signal DG1) of the input connector CN is connected to a common terminal in the 8-segment display of the credit amount display 27 (upper digit). The 4th pin (input signal DG2) of the input connector CN is connected to the common terminal in the 8-segment display of the credit amount display 27 (lower digit).

  The fifth pin (input signal DG3) of the input connector CN is connected to a common terminal in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 (upper digit). The 6th pin (input signal DG4) of the input connector CN is connected to the common terminal in the 8-segment display of the acquired number display 28 (lower digit). The seventh pin (input signal DG5) of the input connector CN is connected to the cathode of the clearing display LED 22. The common terminal of the 8-segment display is connected to the cathode of each LED corresponding to the segments a to g.

  The 8th to 14th pins (input signals SGa to SGg) of the input connector CN are connected to the anodes of the LEDs corresponding to the segments a to g included in the 8-segment display of the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28, respectively. It is connected. For example, No. 8 (input signal SGa) of the input connector CN is connected to the anode of the LED corresponding to the segment a in each of the 8-segment indicators of the credit amount indicator 27 and the acquired number indicator 28. Pin 15 (input signal SGp) of the input connector CN is connected to each anode of the segment DP in the clearing display LED 22, the re-game display LED 23, the insertion possible display LED 24, the game start display LED 25, and the credit number display 27 (lower digit). Has been. Further, the 16th to 18th pins (input signals IN1 to IN3) of the input connector CN are connected to the cathodes of the 1-sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 26c, respectively.

  Next, contents of signals output to digit drivers DD1 and DD2 and segment driver SD will be described with reference to FIG. Signals output from the output ports 2 to 4 of the microcomputer chip Z1 are input to each driver described above. Specifically, the output port 2 signal is output to the digit driver DD2, the output port 3 signal is output to the segment driver SD, and the output port 3 signal is output to the digit driver DD1.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (least significant bit) to D7 (most significant bit) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1, bits D0 to D2 are signals for lighting the input display LEDs 26a to 26c. Bit D0 is a signal for turning on the turn-on display LED 26a, bit D1 is a turn-on display LED 26b, and bit D2 is a signal for turning on the turn-on display LED 26c. Bits D3 to D7 are signals for designating an 8-segment display to be lit among the credit display 27, the acquired number display 28 and the set value display 87, respectively. It is also a signal for designating a display LED to be lit among various display LEDs (excluding the input display LED).

  Here, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D3 is digit 1, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D4 is digit 2, and the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D5 is digit 3. The 8-segment display designated by the signal of bit D6 is represented by digit 4, and the 8-segment display designated by the signal of bit D7 is represented by digit 5. The digit 1 is the upper digit of the credit indicator 27, the digit 2 is the lower digit of the credit indicator 27, the digit 3 is the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, the digit 4 is the lower digit of the acquired number indicator 28, and the digit 5 Corresponds to each 8-segment display of the set value display 87.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (least significant bit) to D7 (most significant bit) output from the output port 3 of the microcomputer chip Z1, bits D0 to D6 turn on the segments a to g of the 8-segment display, respectively. It is a signal for. Specifically, bit D0 corresponds to segment a, bit D1 corresponds to segment b, bit D2 corresponds to segment c, bit D3 corresponds to segment d, bit D4 corresponds to segment e, bit D5 corresponds to segment f, bit D6 corresponds to segment g Yes. The bit D7 is a signal for lighting various display LEDs or the segment DP of the 8-segment display.

  Of the 8-bit signals D0 (the least significant bit) to D7 (the most significant bit) output from the output port 4 of the microcomputer chip Z1, the bits D0 to D3 are the four 8-segment displays constituting the role monitor 103. It is a signal that designates an 8-segment display to be lit. Specifically, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D0 is the digit 6, the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D1 is the digit 7, and the 8-segment display specified by the signal of bit D2 is set. An 8-segment display designated by the signal of digit 8 and bit D3 is referred to as digit 9. The digit 6 is the upper digit of the identifier display part ID, the digit 7 is the lower digit of the identifier display part ID, the digit 8 is the upper digit of the ratio display part RA, and the digit 9 is the lower digit of the ratio display part RA. Corresponding to the vessel.

  Note that the signals of the bits D4 to D7 output from the output port 4 are not used.

  Each time the timer interrupt processing is performed in the wiring diagrams shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the LED display control means 160 is digit 6 → digit 7 → digit 8 → digit 1 → digit 2 → digit 3 → digit 4 → digit. The so-called dynamic lighting control is performed by cyclically switching the 8-segment display and the display LEDs that are turned on, such as 5 → digit 9 → digit 6 →. Here, any one of the LED digit signals 1 to 5 output from the output port 2 and the LED digit signals 6 to 9 output from the output port 4 is output as a high level signal. Then, a low level signal is output from one of the data output terminals D3 to D7 of the digit driver DD2 or the data output terminals D0 to D3 of the digit driver DD1. That is, the digit corresponding to the LED digit signal that is at a high level (for example, +5 V (volt)) can be turned on. Then, the 8-segment display and the display LED corresponding to the digit in the lighting enabled state are turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the LED display control means 160 operates while the LED digit signal 1 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD2). Causes the segment data for displaying the tens value of the number of medals currently stored (credit) to be output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the game start display LED 25 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. If the number of credits is less than 10, segment data for displaying 0 may be output, or all segments may be turned off.

  While the LED digit signal 2 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D4 of the digit driver DD2), the number of medals currently stored (credited) Segment data for displaying values is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the advantageous section LED (the lower digit segment DP of the credit indicator 27) is to be lit, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3.

  While the LED digit signal 3 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D5 of the digit driver DD2), the display mode is to be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28. Corresponding segment data is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the enabling indicator LED 24 is to be lit, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The contents displayed in the upper digits of the acquired number display 28 are the tenth digit value when displaying the medal payout number (acquired number), “=” when displaying the instruction number, and displaying the error code. Becomes “E” or “C”. When displaying the medal payout number, if the medal payout number is less than 10, the segment data indicating 0 may be output from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the output port 3, or all segments may be output. The segment data to be turned off may be output.

  While the LED digit signal 4 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D6 of the digit driver DD2), the display mode is to be displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. Corresponding segment data is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. At this time, when the re-game display LED 23 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The contents displayed in the lower digits of the acquired number display unit 28 are the first place value when displaying the medal payout number, the numerical value of the instruction number when displaying the instruction number, and “1” when displaying the error code. ”,“ A ”, or“ d ”.

  When displaying the medal payout number, if the medal payout number is 0, the segment data indicating 0 may be output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3, or all segments are turned off. Data may be output. In addition, when a small role is won by a role lottery, if the selected small role is not won (when it is missed), “0” is displayed on the acquired number display 28, and in the case of a loss in the role lottery May be hidden. Thus, the player can identify whether the small role has been missed or whether the result of the role lottery has been lost.

  While the LED digit signal 5 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D7 of the digit driver DD2), the segment data for displaying the current set value is output to the output port 3. From D0 to D6. At this time, when the checkout display LED 22 is to be turned on, a high level signal is output from D7 of the output port 3. The set value is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed during non-games by a staff at the game hall, and in other cases, segment data for turning off all the segments a to g is displayed. Output from D0 to D6 of output port 3.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (c), the LED display control means 160 indicates that the LED digit signal 6 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D0 of the digit driver DD1). The segment data corresponding to the display mode (“6” or “7”) displayed in the upper digit of the identifier display part ID of the role ratio monitor 103 is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. While the LED digit signal 7 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D1 of the digit driver DD1), it is displayed in the lower digit of the identifier display portion ID of the role monitor 103. The segment data corresponding to the display mode (“U”, “y” or “A”) is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. Further, a high level signal is output to D7 of the output port 3 to light up the segment DP in the lower digit of the identifier display section ID.

  While the LED digit signal 8 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D2 of the digit driver DD1), of the ratio displayed on the ratio display portion RA of the role monitor 103 The segment data corresponding to the tens place value is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. While the LED digit signal 9 is at a high level (a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD1), the ratio displayed on the ratio display portion RA of the role monitor 103 The segment data corresponding to the first place value is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3.

  In the LED display control described above, for example, when the display control of the 8-segment display of digit 1 and the display LED (the upper digit of the credit number display 27 and the game start display LED 25) is performed, a signal output from D3 of the output port 2 To high level. As a result, a low level signal is output from the data output terminal D3 of the digit driver DD2. Further, the output signals are set to low level from D4 to D7 of the output port 2 and from D0 to D3 of the output port 4. As a result, high level signals are output from the data output terminals D4 to D7 of the digit driver DD2 and the data output terminals D0 to 3 of the digit driver DD1. Furthermore, a signal based on segment data (see FIG. 31A) indicating the display mode (any one of 0 to 5) corresponding to the tens place value of the current credit number is output from D0 to D6 of the output port 3. Output. For example, if the value of the tens place is “2”, a high level signal is output from D0, D1, D3, D4, and D6 of the output port 3, and a low level signal is output from D2 and D5. As a result, low level signals are output from the output terminals D0, D1, D3, D4, and D6 of the segment driver SD, and high level signals are output from the output terminals D2 and D5.

  As a result, the input signals SGa, SGb, SGd, SGe, and SGg become high level (+5 V), and +5 V is applied to the anodes of the LEDs of the segments a, b, d, e, and g in the 8-segment display of the digits 1 to 9. Applied. However, a high level signal is output to the common terminal (cathode) of the 8-segment display with digits 2 to 9, and no current flows through the LEDs of segments a, b, d, e, and g. Is turned off. On the other hand, since the cathode of the 8-segment display of digit 1 is at a low level, a current flows through each LED of segments a, b, d, e, and g, and the numeral “2” is lit.

  At this time, since only the input signal DG1 is at the low level, the cathode of the game start display LED 25 is at the low level, and is turned on or off according to the level (high / low) of the input signal SGp.

  Note that the notification of the pressing order (display of the instruction number) may be performed using a dedicated display. This dedicated display is a multi-digit 8-segment display newly provided to notify the pressing order (displays the instruction number, etc.), and is a dedicated digit driver that outputs LED digit signals (unused The data output terminals D4 to D7 may be used as the digit driver DD1, and the LED segment signal output from the segment driver SD described above may be used for lighting control (display control).

  As described above, the segment driver SD is commonly used by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit amount display 27, and the acquired number display 28. In addition, it is recommended that a dedicated display (for example, digit 10) is provided in order to notify the pressing order (display of the instruction number). There are the following reasons for this. By mounting multiple segment drivers SD, it is possible to perform dynamic lighting control in parallel (for example, digit 1 → digit 2 → digit 3 → digit 4 → digit 5 → digit 1 → …… 6 → digit 7 → digit 8 → digit 9 → digit 10 → digit 6 → ……), flickering can be reduced.

  However, the 8-segment display device may be broken during the manufacturing process of the slot machine 10 and may break down during the transportation of the slot machine 10 or after the transportation (for example, a specific segment is not lit). . Furthermore, there is a possibility that a part of the wiring between the segment driver and the 8-segment display is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is disconnected or is disconnected in the wire harness). The display of the error code, the medal payout number, or the number of credits conventionally displayed by the 8-segment display does not cause a great disadvantage to the player even if the display cannot be confirmed due to failure or disconnection ( The game result will not be affected), but the notification of the push order (display of the instruction number) will cause a major disadvantage to the player if the display cannot be confirmed even partly due to failure or disconnection (in the game result) Likely).

  For example, when “6” must be displayed on the 8-segment display (for example, when winning number 6 is determined in RT2) as a push order notification (indication number display), segment e fails If the wiring from the output terminal D4 of the segment driver is broken, the display of the 8-segment display becomes “5”. If the player believes this display and performs a stop operation in the order of right → left → middle push, the symbol combinations of the replay 04 are aligned and fall down to non-RT (RT0). That is, the game result is affected. Therefore, it is preferable that the 8-segment display that performs at least the notification of the pressing order (display of the instruction number) can confirm whether or not a failure or the like has occurred. For this reason, in this embodiment, the notification of the pressing order is performed by the acquired number display 28 instead of the dedicated display. Further, the segment driver SD is commonly used by the set value display 87, the role ratio monitor 103, the credit number display 27, and the acquired number display 28.

  In the present embodiment, an error code is also displayed on the acquired number display 28, and for example, “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when a power failure recovery error occurs. Since the power failure recovery error is detected even when the power is turned on (turned on) for the first time after transportation, it is not disconnected at this time (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not connected). It can be confirmed whether it is broken or broken in the wire harness.

  Specifically, if “E” is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, it can be confirmed that the wiring from the data output terminals D0 and D3 to D7 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected. If “1” is displayed in the lower digit, it can be confirmed that the wiring from the data output terminals D1 and D2 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected. Similarly, “Cd” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when a door opening error occurs, and “CA” is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when empty. Therefore, when the door is opened or when an empty error occurs, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not disconnected, the wire harness It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a disconnection.

  In the present embodiment, since the credit number display 27 is also controlled to turn on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD, the credit number is displayed when the number of credits is one and six. If “1” and “6” are displayed in the lower digits of the number indicator 27, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board is disconnected). That is not broken in the wire harness).

  In the present embodiment, since the set value display 87 is also controlled to turn on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD, when the set value is set to 1 during the change operation of the set value. If “1” and “6” are displayed on the setting value display 87 at the time of setting to 6, the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is not disconnected (for example, main It can be confirmed that the wiring on the control board is not disconnected.

  The duty ratio monitor 103 also displays a ratio ratio monitor when the segment g fails or the wiring from the output terminal D6 of the segment driver is disconnected when "7y" must be displayed on the 8-segment display. As shown in FIG. 8E, the identifier display unit ID 103 is displayed in a state where the segment g is turned off in the display mode of “y” in the lower digits. This is problematic because it is not known whether "7y" or "7U" is desired to be displayed (that is, whether segment g is desired to be lit or segment e is desired to be lit). .

  In the present embodiment, since the obtained number display device 28, the credit number display device 27, and the set value display device 87 are controlled to be lit (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD. From the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD at the time of disconnection error, at the time of door opening, empty error, when the number of credits is 1 and 6, or when the setting value is 1 and 6 That is, it can be confirmed that the wiring is not disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is not disconnected).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting enable display LED 24 and the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 are controlled to be turned on (display control) by the LED segment signal output from the same segment driver SD. Therefore, when the medal insertion is possible but the insertion possibility display LED 24 is not lit, there is a possibility that the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 may not be lit. I can confirm that there is. Specifically, there is a possibility that the wiring from the data output terminal D7 of the segment driver SD is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 is disconnected or is disconnected in the wire harness). I can confirm that there is.

  In the present embodiment, the segment DP in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED. Of course, the single-load display LED 26a may be used as the advantageous section LED. However, when the single-load display LED 26a is used as an advantageous section LED, the following inconvenience may occur. As described above, + 5V (volts) is supplied to the first and second pins of the input connector CN of the central display board, and is connected to the anode of the one-sheet insertion display LED 26a (advantageous section LED). Furthermore, the 16th pin (input signal IN1) of the input connector CN is connected to the cathode of the single-load display LED 26a (advantageous section LED).

  That is, if the one-sheet insertion display signal (advantageous section signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is at a high level, the one-sheet insertion display LED 26a (advantageous section LED) can be turned on. On the other hand, despite the fact that the single-load display signal (advantageous section signal) needs to be at a low level (for example, during the normal section), it becomes a high level due to the influence of noise or the like. If this is the case, the single-loading display LED 26a (advantageous section LED) will be lit. On the other hand, when the segment DP of the credit amount indicator 27 is used as the advantageous section LED, the possibility that the above inconvenience occurs is reduced. As described above, the 4th pin (input signal DG2) of the input connector CN of the central display board is connected to the cathode of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the credit number display 27 (lower digit). Furthermore, the 15th pin (input signal SGp) of the input connector CN is connected to the anode of the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the credit number indicator 27 (lower digit).

  That is, the LED digit signal 2 (advantageous interval signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is at a high level, and the LED segment signal p (advantageous interval signal) output from the output port 2 of the microcomputer chip Z1 is If the level is high, the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount indicator 27 can be turned on. Therefore, for example, even if the LED segment signal p (advantageous interval signal) becomes high level due to the influence of noise or the like even though it is in the normal interval, at that time, the LED digit signal 2 (advantageous interval signal) If is not at the high level, the segment DP (advantageous section LED) in the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 is not lit. Thus, it can be said that the use of the DP segment of the credit number indicator 27 as the advantageous section LED is more resistant to noise and the like than the single-load display LED 26a is used as the advantageous section LED.

  The ART lamp ARTLP should be more resistant to noise and the like, similarly to the advantageous section lamp. This is because the player is confused when the ART lamp ARTLP is lit even though the ART is not in progress. In particular, if the ART lamp ARTLP is lit when the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player may be confused. Therefore, the wiring between the LED 29a, LED 29b, which is the light source of the ART lamp ARTLP mounted on a predetermined printed circuit board, and the microcomputer chip mounted on the sub-control board 202 or the image control board 204 is central. A credit number indicator mounted on the central display board, not the same wiring as the wiring between the single-loading display LED 26a mounted on the display board and the microcomputer chip Z1 mounted on the main control board 101 It is preferable that the wiring is the same as the wiring between the segment DP in the 27 lower digits and the microcomputer chip Z1 mounted on the main control board 101.

  Specifically, a digit signal (a signal for designating a display to be lit) is input to the cathodes of the LEDs 29a and 29b, and a segment signal (a signal indicating a display mode to be lit) is input to the anodes of the LEDs 29a and 29b. Wiring. Thereby, it is possible to make the signal for controlling turning on / off output to the ART lamp ARTLP less susceptible to noise.

(Description of control command transmission means)
The control command transmission means (information transmission means) 160 transmits various information related to the game determined by each part of the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200. Information exchanged between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 is limited to one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200. No information is sent directly. Information transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 is transmitted by a control command by serial communication. The control command is composed of a first control command (1 byte) indicating the type of information to be transmitted and a second control command (1 byte) indicating the content of the information to be transmitted. In addition, you may transmit a control command not only by serial communication but by parallel communication (for example, 16 harnesses). The process for transmitting the control command to the sub-control means 200 (control command transmission process) is executed in step S522 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Among the information transmitted by the control command transmitted from the main control means 100 to the sub-control means 200, the main information is related to the set value, the game state, the number of inserted medals, the role lottery , A game section or an advantageous section, a switch operation, a reel stop control, a game result, a generated error, etc.

  Information relating to the game state includes information (RT state number, operation state flag, operation type, etc.) indicating each lottery state shown in FIG. 27, and each game state number shown in FIG. In addition, as for the result of the role lottery, there is a role winning number Y and a production group number B. As for various switch operations, there is information indicating that any one of the clearing switch 33, the start switch 36, and the stop switches 37L, 37C, 37R has been operated. As for the reel stop control, there are a symbol to be stopped and information indicating the number of sliding symbols. As for the results of the game, there are information indicating the symbols that are stopped and displayed and the number of medals to be paid out.

  As information regarding the game section and the advantageous section, various information stored in RWM addresses F020 to F028 described in FIG. Of course, it is not necessary to transmit unnecessary information such as the instructed flag stored in the address F022 or the instruction state flag stored in the address F023 when the sub-control unit 200 executes the effect.

(Description of external signal transmission means)
Returning to FIG. 16, the external signal transmission means 170 is described above via the external concentration terminal board 86 by a timer interruption process (described later) executed at a predetermined cycle (every 2.235 milliseconds) in the main control means 100. The medal insertion signal, medal payout signal, BB signal, advantageous section signal, and the like are output to the outside. In the present embodiment, when the BB combination wins, the BB signal is turned on, and when the BB game is finished, the BB signal is turned off (level output). Further, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section signal is turned on, and when the advantageous section is finished, it is turned off (level output). In addition, the advantageous section signal is turned on when a transition is made to a predetermined performance (for example, during ART (game state number 5)) in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section signal is turned off when the transition is made to the normal section. May be. Also, the above-described various signal output processing (external signal output processing) is executed in step S524 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

<Description of Information Stored in RWM of Main Control Unit 100>

  Next, a part of the contents of various data stored in the RWM of the main control means 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The RWM used in this embodiment can store 1 byte of data at each address, and all the address values shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 are expressed in hexadecimal numbers. In the description with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38, when an address is expressed using a 4-digit hexadecimal number, the letter “H” added at the end is omitted. The types of data shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 are only a part of the data stored in the RWM, and in addition to these data, data necessary for controlling the game is stored in the RWM. Needless to say.

  In FIG. 35, a value (set value data) corresponding to the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is stored at the RWM address F000. That is, 0 is displayed when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “1”, and 1 is displayed when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “2”. 2 when the set value is “3”, 3 when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “4”, and “5” when the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “5”. 4. When the set value displayed on the set value display 87 is “6”, 5 is stored.

  In the LED display process in the timer interrupt process (see step S510 in FIG. 48), when the condition for displaying the set value on the set value display 87 is satisfied (for example, during the setting change or the setting confirmation) The data obtained by adding “1” to the data (set value data) stored at the address F000 is used as an offset value, the corresponding segment data is obtained from the LED segment table A, and the information “1” to “6” can be displayed. To control. The setting confirmation is a state in which the set value data cannot be changed, but the set value is displayed on the set value display 87. By the way, by turning (turning on) a setting change key (setting key) inserted into the key hole of the key switch 82b in a situation where no game is executed and no medal is bet. Control is performed during setting confirmation (also referred to as setting confirmation mode).

  In the conventional slot machine, when the set value can take the range of “1” to “6”, the set value data is also managed by “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value. However, when the minimum value of the set value data is “1”, it may be difficult to perform efficient control processing. Therefore, when the set value can take a range of “1” to “6”, if the minimum value of the set value data is set to “0” and the numerical range is set to “0” to “5”, at least as follows. Has an effect.

  First, an error check of a set value is facilitated, and an error check can be performed with a small program capacity. For example, in the calculation process of the set value error check, when 6 (maximum value of the set value data + 1) is subtracted from the set value data and it is determined that there is no carry (the carry flag is off) in the calculation result, An error (out of the set value range) can be determined. That is, when the set value data is from 0 to 5, a carry occurs, so that it is not judged as an error. However, when any other value (for example, 6 or 100) is stored, it is judged as an error because no carry occurs. can do. Thus, by checking the value of the carry flag, it can be determined whether or not the set value data stored in the RWM is within a normal numerical value range.

  On the other hand, when the set value data is stored as “1” to “6”, it cannot be determined as an error in the same process as the above-described subtraction. That is, when 7 (the maximum value of the set value data + 1) is subtracted from the set value data, for example, even if the set value data is “0”, a carry occurs, so that it is determined to be normal. For this reason, when “0” is stored in the set value data, another process for determining as an error is required, which reduces the program capacity. Note that the timing for performing an error check of the set value may be after the start switch 36 is operated and before the role lottery is performed or during the execution of the timer interrupt process. However, the timing is not limited to the exemplified timing.

Secondly, as an effect of storing the set value data as “0” to “5”, the winning combination having different winning probabilities in the winning lottery according to the set value (hereinafter, also referred to as “winning combination with setting difference”). .) Can be made easier. For example, the winning combination having a setting difference includes a replay-G in the combination lottery table (see FIG. 20) used in RT1. At this time, the numeric data referred to when determining whether or not the re-game-G is won may be stored in the ROM address XXX0 to address XXXA as follows.
Address XXX0 DEFW 3625; (set value data 0)
Address XXX2 DEFW 3547 (setting value data 1)
Address XXX4 DEFW 3329 (setting value data 2)
Address XXX6 DEFW 3172; (set value data 3)
Address XXX8 DEFW 2970 (setting value data 4)
Address XXXA DEFW 2795; (set value data 5)

  Here, the above-mentioned “address XXX0” is for simplifying the explanation and is different from the actual address. Further, DEFW means 2-byte data, and the subsequent value means numeric data. Although the above-mentioned numeric data is represented by a decimal value, it is assumed that the ROM stores the hexadecimal value. Furthermore, the notation “; (set value data 0)” describes the set value data corresponding to the set value data, and is not actually stored in the ROM.

  If the data that can be stored in one address of the ROM is 1 byte, it is stored in two ROM addresses separately for the upper byte and lower byte of the numeric data. For example, when storing the numerical data “3625” (= 0E29H) when the set value data is “0” in the ROM, the lower byte value 29H is stored in the address XXX0, and the upper byte value 0EH is stored in the address XXX1. Remember. Further, when storing the numerical data “2795” (= 0AEBH) when the set value data is “5” in the ROM, the lower byte value EBH is stored in the address XXXA, and the upper byte value 0AH is stored in the address XXXB. Remember.

  As described above, each numeric value is stored at each address so that the set values are in ascending order. For example, when the set value data is “0”, the 2-byte data (0E29H) stored in the address XXX0 and the address XXX1 is acquired in a register (for example, a pair register of the DE register), and is compared with a random value. It is determined whether or not replay-G is won. On the other hand, when the set value data is “5”, whether or not the re-game-G is won by acquiring the 2-byte data (0AEBH) stored in the address XXXA and the address XXXB in a register and performing a comparison operation with a random value. Determine. That is, the numerical data is acquired from different addresses according to the set value data.

  At this time, when 2-byte data is stored as numeric data, it corresponds to the set value data by designating the address as a reference as XXX0 and specifying the address by using the data obtained by doubling the set value data as an offset value. Can be obtained. For example, when the set value data is “3”, 6 is added to the address XXX0, and the numeric data 0C64H (“3172”) is acquired from the address XXX6 and the address XXX7. When the numerical value data is represented by 1-byte data, the setting value data itself is designated as an offset value without doubling the setting value data, and the corresponding numerical value (for example, A register) is acquired. be able to.

  On the other hand, if the set value data is stored as “1” to “6”, the set value data cannot be directly used as the offset value if the above-described numerical value is stored. . In this case, the offset value must be calculated as (set value data-1) × 2. For this reason, the lottery process is more complicated than when the set value data is changed from “0” to “5”.

  Further, the set value display 87 can display the set value by a conventional display method. Conventionally, it has become familiar to display values of “1” to “6” as set values on the display of the set value, and the range of this value is changed (for example, “0” to “5”). Although there was resistance to this, it is possible to display the values familiar to date while exhibiting the effects described above, so that, for example, the staff of the game hall will not be confused.

  As described above, the set value displayed on the set value display 87 and the set value data stored in the address F000 of the RWM are different from each other by one, but an advantageous effect can be obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 87 and the setting value data stored in the address F000 may be the same value. For example, when the setting value displayed on the setting value display 87 is “3”, the setting value data stored in the RWM address F000 may be 3.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the setting value ranges from “1” to “6”, six types of data from “0” to “5” can be stored in the RWM as setting value data. The set value display 87 can display six types of “1” to “6”. For example, the set value range is set to “1” to “4”, and the set value data starts from “0”. Four types of data up to “3” may be stored, and four types of “1” to “4” may be displayed on the set value display 87.

  The address F005 stores data for managing the lottery state during the normal game among the lottery states shown in FIG. Here, “0” is stored when the current lottery state is non-RT (RT0), “1” when RT1, “2” when RT2, and “3” when RT3.

  At the address F010, 1-byte data for displaying the number of medals credited to the slot machine 10 is stored in the credit number display 27. Specifically, an offset value (see FIG. 31A) for designating segment data corresponding to the value of the number of credited medals is stored in the upper and lower digits of the credit number display 27. The Here, in the stored 1-byte data, the upper 4 bits correspond to the offset value for displaying the upper digit of the credit number display 27, and the lower 4 bits are the lower digit of the credit number display 27. Corresponds to the offset value for display.

  Specifically, when the stored number is 0 to 9, the stored number display data is 00H to 09H (F0H to F9H when the upper digit is turned off). When the stored number is 10 to 19, the stored number display data is 10H to 19H. When the stored number is 20 to 29, the stored number display data is 20H to 29H. When the stored number is 30 to 39, the stored number display data is 30H to 39H. When the stored number is 40 to 49, the stored number display data is 40H to 49H. When the stored number is 50, the stored number display data is 50H. The case where “00H” is stored is synonymous with the case where “0” (the number of stored sheets is 0) is stored. In other words, “0” being stored is synonymous with “00H” being stored. Similarly, the case where “05H” is stored is used in the same meaning as the case where “5” (stored number is 5) is stored. In other words, “5” being stored is synonymous with “05H” being stored. Others may be expressed with the same meaning.

  For example, the stored number display data when the value “28” is displayed on the credit number display 27 is 28H. Here, the upper digit (2H) of the stored number display data 28H indicates an offset value for displaying a display mode of “2” in the upper digit of the credit number display 27. Further, the lower digit (8H) of the stored number display data 28H indicates an offset value for displaying a display mode of “8” in the lower digit of the credit number display 27.

  In the above example, when the number of stored sheets is 0, “0” is displayed in the lower digit of the credit number display 27. However, the upper digit and the lower digit may be turned off. In this case, the stored number display data is FFH.

  At the address F011, 1 byte for displaying the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small role (hereinafter also referred to as “paid out number” or “acquired number”), an instruction number, or an error code on the acquired number display 28. Are stored. Specifically, offset values (see FIG. 31A) for specifying segment data corresponding to alphanumeric characters or symbols to be displayed are stored in the upper and lower digits of the acquired number display 28. Here, in the stored 1-byte data, the upper 4 bits correspond to the offset value for displaying the upper digits of the acquired number display 28, and the lower 4 bits are the lower digits of the acquired number display 28. Corresponds to the offset value for display.

  When the payout number display unit 28 displays the payout number, 00H to 09 (F0H to F9H when the upper digits are turned off), 10, 11, or 12H is stored according to the number of medals to be paid out. When nothing is displayed (all segments are turned off), the value of FFH is stored. When the instruction number is displayed, any one of B0H to B6H is stored according to the instruction number to be displayed.

  Moreover, as data for displaying the instruction number, in addition to the above, the quotient value obtained by dividing by a predetermined constant (for example, 10H) is used as an offset value corresponding to the display mode displayed in the upper digit. The remainder value may be an offset value corresponding to the display mode displayed in the lower digit. For example, when “= 6” is displayed as the instruction number, the acquired number display data B6H is stored. As a result, when B6H is divided by 10H, the quotient value becomes BH. Therefore, “=” is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28. Further, since the remainder value at this time is 6H, “6” is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. The “predetermined constant” is not limited to 10H, and other values may be adopted.

  Further, when an abnormality is detected by the above-described abnormality detecting means 155, an offset value for displaying an error code corresponding to the detected abnormality is stored. That is, E1H is stored when a power failure recovery error is detected, CAH is stored when an empty error is detected, and CDH is stored when a door opening error is detected.

  From the above, for example, the acquired number display data when the value “7” (the upper digit is extinguished) is displayed as the payout number on the acquired number display 28 is F7H. Here, the upper digit (FH) of the acquired number display data F7H indicates an offset value for turning off the upper digit of the acquired number display unit 28. The lower digit (7H) of the acquired number display data F7H indicates an offset value for displaying the display mode “7” in the lower digit of the acquired number display unit 28. Similarly, the acquired number display data when the value “= 2” is displayed as the instruction number on the acquired number display 28 is B2H, and the acquired number display data when the error code “CA” is displayed is CAH. Further, the acquired number display data when the acquired number display 28 is turned off is FFH.

  Note that when displaying an error code (number) when an unrecoverable error occurs in the slot machine 10, an LED display request flag or an LED display request counter (described later) is not referred to. On the other hand, when a recoverable error (error that can be recovered by operating the reset / setting switch 82c without turning off the power once) occurs, the value of the LED display request flag and the value of the LED display request counter As a result of AND operation, the digit “1” becomes the lighting target (lighting enabled state).

  Also, when a recoverable error is detected during the game in which the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 (when any reel is rotating), the display of the instruction number is maintained and all the reels are After the stop (that is, the game is not disabled until all reels stop), an error code corresponding to the detected recoverable error may be displayed on the acquired number display 28. . In addition, when a recoverable error occurs while the instruction number is not displayed on the acquired number display 28 during the game, an error code corresponding to the recoverable error detected before all reels stop is acquired. You may make it display on the number display 28.

  The address F012 stores the value of the LED display counter (hereinafter also referred to as “LED display counter value”). The LED display counter value is 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits, and this value is used when generating LED digit signals output from D3 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 shown in FIG. To be referenced. LED display counter value is 01H (00000001B)-> 02H (00000010B)-> 04H (00000100B)-> 08H (00001000B)-> 10H (00010000B)-> 20H (00100000B)-> 40H (01000000B)-> 80H (10000000B) → 00H (00000000B) → 01H (00000001B) →...

  When the LED display counter value is 01H, only D0 of the output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D1 to D3 of the output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 02H, only D1 of the output port 4 is set to the high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D0, D2, and D3 of the output port 4 are set to the low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 04H, only D2 of output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of output port 2 and D0, D1, and D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output).

  When the LED display counter value is 08H, only D3 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D4 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 10H, only D4 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3, D5 to D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 20H, only D5 of the output port 2 is set to the high level (high level signal is output), and D3, D4, D6, D7 of the output port 2 and D0 to D3 of the output port 4 are set. Set to low level (output low level signal). When the LED display counter value is 40H, only D6 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D5 and D7 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output). When the LED display counter value is 80H, only D7 of output port 2 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D6 of output port 2 and D0 to D3 of output port 4 are set to low level ( Output a low-level signal). When the LED display counter value is 00H, only D3 of the output port 4 is set to high level (a high level signal is output), and D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and D0 to D2 of the output port 4 are set to low level. To (low level signal output).

  Thus, when the LED display counter value is 01H, the upper digit (digit 6) of the identifier display portion ID of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed, and when the LED display counter value is 02H, the identifier display of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed. The lower digit of the part ID and the segment DP (digit 7) are displayed and lit. When the LED display counter value is 04H, the upper digit (digit 8) of the ratio display part RA of the role monitor 103 is displayed. .

  When the LED display counter value is 08H, the upper digit of the credit number display 27 and the game start display LED 25 (digit 1) are displayed (lighted), and when the LED display counter value is 10H, the credit number display The 27 lower digits and the advantageous section LED (digit 2) are displayed (lighted). Further, when the LED display counter value is 20H, the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 and the displayable display LED 24 (digit 3) are displayed (lighted), and when the LED display counter value is 40H, the acquired number display The 28 lower digits and the re-game display LED 23 (digit 4) are displayed (lighted).

  When the LED display counter value is 80H, the set value indicator 87 and the settlement display LED 22 (digit 5) are displayed (lighted). When the LED display counter value is 00H, the ratio display section of the role monitor 103 is displayed. The lower digit (digit 9) of RA is displayed (lighted).

  During the setting change, “88” may be displayed on the acquired number display 28. Specifically, during the setting change, 88H is stored in the address F011 (acquired number display data) as the display data during the setting change. In this way, during the setting change, whether the acquired number display device 28 has failed (segments ag) have failed, or the wiring from the data output terminals D0-D6 of the segment driver SD has been established. It can be confirmed whether or not there is a disconnection (for example, whether the wiring on the main control board 101 or the central display board is disconnected or not in the wire harness).

  When the set value display 87 is not provided, for example, the set value (1 to 6) corresponding to the set value data is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28 during the change of the set value (during setting change). You may be made to do. In this case, 01H to 06H or F1H to F5H is stored as display data of the set value at the address F011. For example, it can be realized by controlling to store a value “+1” in the data (set value data) stored in the address F000H while the setting is being changed.

  In this way, during the setting change, when the setting value is set to “1” (setting value data is 0) and when the setting value is set to “6” (setting value data is 5), the acquired number display 28 is displayed. If “1” and “6” are displayed in the lower digits of the, all the segments in the lower digits are lit, so that the acquired number display 28 is not broken (segments a to g are broken). Whether the wiring from the data output terminals D0 to D6 of the segment driver SD is disconnected (for example, the wiring on the main control board 101 or the central display board is not disconnected, in the wire harness) It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a disconnection. The display is not limited to the lower digit of the acquired number display unit 28, but at least one of the upper digit of the acquired number display unit 28, the lower digit of the credit number display unit 27, and the upper digit of the credit number display unit 27 is displayed. A set value may be displayed using a device.

  In the address F014, the value of the instruction number is stored as a binary value. Accordingly, the numerical value range of data stored at this address is 00H to 06H. When the instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display 28, the acquired number display data stored in the address F011 is generated based on the instruction number stored in the address. Specifically, the acquired number display data for displaying the instruction number is generated by adding B0H to the value stored in the address F014.

  At the address F015, the state of the game medal management flag is stored as 1-byte data. The bits D0 to D7 of the game medal management flag indicate the on / off state of various display LEDs and the state of the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. However, bit D5 is unused. First, the bit D0 stores whether the operation of the start switch 36 is permitted or prohibited. Here, “0” indicates prohibition (the game start display LED 25 is turned off), and “1” indicates permission (the game start display LED 25 is turned on). Bit D1 stores whether or not the current advantageous section (including the case where the advantageous section is started from the next game) is stored. If “0”, the normal section or the standby section (the advantageous section LED is turned off). ), “1” indicates an advantageous section (the advantageous section LED is lit). The advantageous section LED is the segment DP in the lower digit (digit 2) of the credit amount display 27. The bit D2 stores the on / off state of the blocker of the medal selector. If “0”, the medal can not be inserted (the insertable display LED 24 is off), and if “1”, the medal can be inserted (the insertable display LED 24 can be inserted). Is lit).

  The bit D3 stores the ON / OFF state of the re-game display LED 23. If “0”, the re-game display LED 23 is OFF, and “1” indicates ON. In the bit D4, the lighting / extinguishing state of the settlement display LED 22 is stored. If “0”, the settlement display LED 22 is turned off, and “1” indicates lighting. Bit D6 stores a value indicating whether or not the setting value can be changed. If the value is “0”, the value can be changed. If the value is “1”, the value cannot be changed. . Bit D7 stores a value indicating whether or not the number of medals inserted to play a game has reached the above-mentioned prescribed number (for example, three) (has reached the limit). “1” indicates that the limit has not been reached, indicating that the limit has been reached.

  The LED segment signal p (SGp) of D7 of the output port 3 is generated based on the values of the bits D0 to D4 of the data stored at the address.

  As described above, the LED display control means 160 performs display control of each 8-segment display of the digits 1 to 9 and the display LED based on various data stored in the RWM.

  Next, in FIG. 37, the address F016 stores the state of the operation state flag as 1-byte data. The operating state flag is a flag indicating whether or not an accessory is operating. In the present embodiment, any one of the 1BB-A to F games is being executed by the bit D2 of the operating state flag (first type special combination) Whether or not an RB-A game or an RB-B game is being executed at bit D3 (the first kind special bonus item is in operation). Indicates whether or not there is. Bit D5 indicates whether or not the SB game is being executed (ordinary action is in operation). Specifically, the value of the bit D2 is “1” when any of the 1BB-A to F games is being executed, and is “0” when not being executed. Further, the value of the bit D3 is “1” when any of the RB-A game and the RB-B game is being executed, and “0” when the game is not being executed. Furthermore, the value of the bit D5 is “1” when the SB game is being executed, and is “0” when the SB game is not being executed. Bits D0, D1, D4, D6 and D7 are unused.

  At the address F017, the operation type of the bonus game is stored as 1-byte data. Bit D0 is 1BB-A game, bit D1 is 1BB-B game, bit D2 is 1BB-C game, bit D3 is 1BB-D game, bit D4 is 1BB-E game, bit D5 is 1BB-F game, bit D6 Corresponds to SB games. Specifically, when a bonus game is being executed, the bit corresponding to the bonus game being executed is “1”, and the bit corresponding to the bonus game not being executed is “0”. From the above, during a non-bonus game (during a normal game), “0” is stored in the address. This makes it possible to identify which bonus game is operating, and to determine a winning lottery table or the like to be used during the bonus game.

  At the address F020, the state of the game section flag is stored as 1-byte data. The game section flag indicates the type of the current game section. When the value of bit D0 is 1, it indicates an advantageous section, and when it is 0, it indicates a section other than the advantageous section. . Further, when the value of the bit D1 is 1, it indicates a standby section, and when it is 0, it indicates a section other than the standby section. When both the values of the bits D0 and D1 are 0, it indicates a normal section. Bits D2 to D7 are unused.

  In the address F021, the game state number is stored as 1-byte data. Similarly to the game state number shown in FIG. 28, the game state number is 00H when the game section is a normal section. Further, when the gaming section is the advantageous section “gase high probability”, the gaming state number is 01H, and when it is “high probability”, the gaming state number is 02H. When the game section is the advantageous section “gase high probability bonus”, the game state number is 03H, and when the game section is “high probability bonus”, the game state number is 04H. The game state number is 05H when the game section is the advantageous section “During ART”, and the game state number is 06H when the game section is “In addition special zone”.

  When the game section is an “ART bonus” in the advantageous section, the game state number is 07H, and when it is “ART return preparation”, the game state number is 08H. The game state number is 09H when the game section is the “interest chance zone” of the advantageous section, and the game state number is 0AH when the game section is “ending state”.

  At the address F022, the state of the instructed flag is stored as 1-byte data. The instructed flag indicates whether or not an advantageous pushing order is notified (indicating the indication number) when any of winning numbers 24 to 29 (pushing order bells 1 to 6) is determined in the advantageous section. Flag. Here, in the state where the pressing order has not been notified after the transition to the advantageous section, the value of the instructed flag is 0, and the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to winning 01 or winning 02 is aligned is notified. Then, the value of the instructed flag becomes FFH. Once the value of the instructed flag becomes FFH, the value is maintained until the transition to the normal section.

  It should be noted that 1BB-A to 1BB- is not required to notify the pressing order when the winning numbers 24-29 (pushing order bells 1 to 6) are determined during the advantageous section. The value of the instructed flag may be set to FFH based on the fact that any bonus combination of F is won and the bonus game is executed. In other words, when a bonus combination is won during the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the normal section without reporting the pressing order. For example, any one of 1BB-A to 1BB-F before the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are determined after the transition to Gase Kosei (game state number 1) Even if the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are won in the high-ranking after winning the bonus game corresponding to the selected bonus combination, It is possible to shift to the normal section without notifying

  In addition, although the case where Gase high probability was given was described as an example, the same applies to high probability (game state number 2), during ART (game state 5), etc., and winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bell 1 ~ 6) Even if the correct push order (advantageous push order) is not reported once, or the winning numbers 24-29 (push order bells 1-6) are never won It can be made possible to shift to a section.

  In the address F023, the state of the instruction state flag is stored as 1-byte data. The instruction state flag is a flag indicating in what manner of notification when the winning numbers 24 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) are determined during the advantageous section. Here, when the value of the instruction state flag is 00H, the notification of the pressing order is not performed even if any of the winning numbers 24 to 29 is determined. When the winning numbers 24 to 29 are determined, half navigation is performed when the value of the instruction state flag is 01H, and full navigation is performed when the value of the instruction state flag is 02H.

  In the addresses F024 and F025, the value of the advantageous section counter indicating the number of games executed during the advantageous section is stored as 2-byte data. Here, lower 1 byte data of the value of the advantageous section counter is stored in the address F024, and upper byte data of the value of the advantageous section counter is stored in the address F025. The value of this advantageous section counter is referred to when determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the ending state (game state number 10) shown in FIG. 28 is satisfied. This advantageous section counter is also referred to when determining whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit (1500 games in this embodiment). Specifically, if an ART game number counter, which will be described later, is a value other than “0”, in the case where the transition to the ending state is not performed, based on the value of the advantageous section counter, When it is determined that the number of games has reached 1500 games, even if an ART game number counter (to be described later) has a value other than “0” (even if there are remaining ART games), the advantageous section is ended. Control.

  Here, the subtraction process regarding the value of the advantageous section counter is performed using a predetermined register (F (flag) register). That is, every time a game is played, the advantage counter stored in the addresses F024 and F025 is decremented by “1”. As a result, when both the carry flag and the zero flag are “0”, it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is not “0”. That is, it can be determined that the current advantage is in the advantageous section, and the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit. Further, when “1” is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section counter and the zero flag is “1”, it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter has changed from “1” to “0”. That is, it can be determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit. On the other hand, if the carry flag is “1” as a result of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter, it is determined that the advantageous section counter before “1” is subtracted from “0”. That is, it can be determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has not been originally set (in other words, the current game is “normal section”).

  When the value of the advantageous section counter is “0”, the carry flag is set to “1” when “1” is subtracted, and in this case, “0” is stored in the advantageous section counter. ing. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute the process of subtracting “1” from the advantageous interval counter only during the advantageous interval. Even if a “1” subtraction process is performed from the advantageous section counter each time a game is played, the advantageous section counter can store a normal value. In this way, by configuring the advantageous section counter to be decremented by “1” in all the gaming sections, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is the advantageous section. 1 is subtracted, and if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, the capacity of the control program can be reduced as compared with a process in which the advantageous section counter is not subtracted by “1”.

  In the addresses F026 and F027, the value of the ART game number counter for managing the number of games executed during ART (game state number 5) is stored as 2-byte data. Here, in the present embodiment, the value of the ART game number counter indicates the number of remaining games that can stay in the ART (hereinafter, also referred to as “ART remaining number of games”). It is assumed that the value of the number counter is decremented by one. Further, lower 1 byte data of the value of the ART game number counter is stored in the address F026, and upper 1 byte data of the value of the ART game number counter is stored in the address F027. In the present embodiment, basically, when 50 games are played during ART, the ART is ended (hereinafter also referred to as “ART game”) and the normal section is started (see the arrow in FIG. 28). Since the value of the ART game number counter may be added when the zone is shifted to the specialization zone (game state number 6), the value of the ART game number counter is set to 2-byte data.

  The address F028 stores the value of the ART set number counter for managing the number of ART game sets as 1-byte data. The value of the ART set number counter indicates the number of times of transition to ART (gaming state number 5) between the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the return to the regular section. Therefore, when the value of the ART set number counter shifts from the high probability (gaming state number 2) or the chance zone (gaming state number 9) to the ART state (gaming state number 5), it is in the added special zone (gaming state). “1” is added when the transition from No. 6) to ART (game state number 5) and when the transition from ART return preparation (gaming state number 8) to ART (gaming state number 5) is made. The

  Next, in FIG. 38, the winning combination number (00-07H) corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery is stored in the address F033. The address F034 stores a winning / replay winning number (00 to 2FH) corresponding to the winning number determined by the lottery. Here, when any of the winning numbers 48 to 87 is determined, the value of the winning combination winning number (01 to 06H) stored in the address F033 is won until a bonus winning combination corresponding to the determined winning number is won. Maintained without being updated. However, when the winning number 88 (SB alone) is determined, the value of the winning item winning number (07H) stored in the address F033 when the game at that time is ended is cleared to 00H. On the other hand, the value of the winning / replay winning number stored in the address F034 is cleared every time one game is finished.

  The address F053 stores the value of medal payout number data referred to when paying out the number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination. As a result, when the main control means 100 wins a small role, every time a process of paying out one medal from the hopper 83 (one payout process) is executed once, 1 is calculated from the value of the medal payout number data. Subtract and repeat the one-sheet payout process until it becomes zero.

  The address F054 is a payout number buffer for storing a medal payout number value corresponding to the winning small combination. That is, the value of the medal payout number data stored in the address F053 is updated every time one payout process is performed, and eventually becomes 0. It holds the number of medals paid out for winning.

  Note that the value in the payout number buffer is referred to in order to calculate the medium period combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, and cumulative combination ratio displayed on the combination ratio monitor 103.

  In the addresses F26D to F26F, the value of the total game number D (total game number counter value) of 3 bytes shown in FIG. 8D is stored. Here, of the total game number counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F26D, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F26E, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F26F.

  The addresses F270 to F272 store the 3-byte advantageous section game number E value (advantageous section game number counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, among the advantageous section game number counter values, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F270, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F271, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F272.

  Addresses F273 to F275 store the 3-byte (total cumulative) total payout number A value (total payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, of the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F273, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F274, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F275.

  Addresses F276 to F278 store a 3-byte (total cumulative) total consecutive combination payout number C value (continuous combination payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F276, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F277, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F278. The

  Addresses F279 to F27B store a 3-byte (total cumulative) total feature payout number B value (combined item payout (cumulative) counter value) shown in FIG. 8D. Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F279, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F27A, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F27B. .

  It should be noted that the total game number counter value, the advantageous section game number counter value, the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the continuous character payout (cumulative) counter value, and the character payout (cumulative) counter value are FFFFFFH (decimal number 16777215). ) Until the value reaches FFFFFFH, the main control means 100 performs control so that the value is maintained and not updated. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to determine whether or not each count value is one round (a value counted from 000000H again after exceeding FFFFFFH).

  Next, in the addresses F27C to F27E, the value of the 6000 game cumulative value a (the payout (6000 times) counter value) of the total payout number of 3 bytes shown in FIG. 8D is stored. Here, of the payout (6000 times) counter value, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F27C, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F27D, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F27E.

  Stored in addresses F27F to F281 are the values of the 6000 game cumulative value c of the three-byte consecutive payout number shown in FIG. 8D (continuous combination payout (6000 times) counter value). Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F27F, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F280, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F281 among the counter value (6000 times) counter value Is done.

  Stored in addresses F282 to F284 are the values of the 6000 game cumulative value b of the 3-byte feature payout number shown in FIG. 8D (the feature payout (6000 times) counter value). Here, the value of the least significant byte is stored in the address F282, the value of the middle byte is stored in the address F283, and the value of the most significant byte is stored in the address F284. The

  Although not shown, a ring buffer for calculating a value in the most recent 6000 game corresponding to each of the total payout number, the accessory payout number, and the consecutive payout number (see FIG. 8D). Is set in the RWM. Here, each ring buffer is composed of 15 sets, and the payout number between 400 games per set is stored as data of 2 bytes, so two addresses are required per set. Therefore, 30 addresses are required to configure a ring buffer consisting of 15 sets (400 games × 15 sets).

  In addition, the total game number counter value, the advantageous section game number counter value, the total payout (cumulative) counter value, the accessory payout (cumulative) counter value, and the continuous feature payout (cumulative) counter value stored in each address described above. The payout (6000 times) counter value, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value are executed by clearing (initializing) the RWM executed when the set value is changed. Each count value is maintained (not cleared) even if it is performed. However, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RWM when the power is turned on (the presence or absence of abnormality can be determined by using a checksum or the like of the conventional RWM), the setting value is changed. Each count value is also cleared by clearing the RWM.

  Next, the value of the 1-byte advantageous section ratio E / D (advantageous section ratio data) shown in FIG. 8D is stored in the address F285, and the 1-byte medium period linkage ratio c is stored in the address F286. The value of / a (continuous character ratio (6000 times) data) is stored, and the value of medium byte ratio b / a of 1 byte (characteristic ratio (6000 times) data) is stored at address F287. . The address F288 stores a 1-byte cumulative combination ratio C / A value (continuous combination ratio (cumulative) data) shown in FIG. 8D, and the address F289 stores a 1-byte cumulative combination ratio. A value of the role ratio B / A (a character ratio (cumulative) data) is stored.

  Note that, based on each data stored in the addresses F285 to F289, an abbreviation (identifier) of contents displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 and a ratio thereof (see FIG. 8C) are displayed. In addition, the calculation of each data stored in the addresses F285 to F289 is performed after the end of one game for the advantageous section ratio, and the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative The role ratio is performed after the game is finished every 400 times (one set), and the data stored in the corresponding address is updated. In other words, the RWM “400 times-of-games counter (for example, address F208 (2))” for determining the game for calculating the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio. A storage area is also provided. This storage area is a cyclic increment counter that is incremented by 1 each time a game is executed and circulates from 0 to 399. The intermediate period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio Is controlled to be calculated when the counter reaches “0”.

  Next, in FIG. 39, the address F28E stores the state of the blink request flag as 1-byte data. The blinking request flag is set for each of the advantageous section ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio displayed on the identifier display portion ID and the ratio display portion RA of the combination ratio monitor 103. It is a flag that specifies whether or not to blink the display. Here, the bit D0 designates whether or not the value of the advantageous period ratio to be displayed on the ratio display portion RA is blinked. When the value of the advantageous period ratio is 70% or more, the value of the bit D0 is 1 (flashing). If it is less than 70%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D1 designates whether or not the value of the medium period linkage ratio displayed on the ratio display RA is blinked. When the value of the medium period linkage ratio is 60% or more, the value of bit D1 is 1 (flashing) If it is less than 60%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing). Bit D2 specifies whether or not to flash the medium period ratio value displayed on the ratio display RA. When the medium period ratio value is 70% or more, the value of bit D2 becomes 1 (flashes). If less than 70%, 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D3 designates whether or not the value of the cumulative linkage ratio displayed on the ratio display RA should be blinked. When the cumulative linkage ratio value is 60% or more, the value of bit D3 becomes 1 (flashing). If less than 60%, 0 (non-flashing). Bit D4 designates whether or not the cumulative role value displayed on the ratio display RA is to be blinked. When the cumulative role value is 70% or more, the value of bit D4 is 1 (flashing). If it is less than%, it becomes 0 (non-flashing).

  Bit D5 becomes 1 when the number of executed games is less than 6000 games after the slot machine 10 is started, and becomes 0 when the number of executed games is 6000 games or more. When the value of the bit D5 is 1, the display of the abbreviation (6y) of the intermediate period combination ratio and the abbreviation (7y) of the intermediate period combination ratio in the identifier display part ID is blinked. On the other hand, when the value of the bit D5 becomes 0, the display of the abbreviation (6y) of the intermediate period combination ratio and the abbreviation (7y) of the intermediate period combination ratio in the identifier display part ID is not blinked.

  Bit D6 becomes 1 when the number of executed games is less than 175000 games since the operation of the slot machine 10 is started, and becomes 0 when the executed games become 175000 games or more. When the value of the bit D6 is 1, the display of the abbreviation (7U) of the effective section ratio, the abbreviation (6A) of the cumulative combination ratio, and the abbreviation (7A) of the cumulative combination ratio in the identifier display portion ID is blinked. On the other hand, when the value of bit D6 becomes 0, the display of the abbreviation (7U) of the effective section ratio, the abbreviation (6A) of the cumulative combination ratio, and the abbreviation (7A) of the cumulative combination ratio in the identifier display portion ID is made non-flashing. .

  Bit D7 is unused. When the various ratios described above become 100%, the value displayed on the ratio display portion RA is set to “99”.

  The address F28F stores a ratio display number for designating a ratio to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103. The ratio display number is 1-byte data, 01H when displaying the advantageous section ratio on the ratio monitor 103, 02H when displaying the intermediate period combination ratio, 03H when displaying the intermediate period ratio, and the cumulative total. 04H is stored when the combined ratio is displayed, and 05H is stored when the cumulative ratio is displayed. In the slot machine 10, the content displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 is repeatedly switched in the order of advantageous section ratio → intermediate period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio.

  The address F290 stores the value of a blinking switching flag that designates when to turn on and when it should be turned off for what is designated to blink in the address F28E. That is, in the case of blinking display, the value of bit D0 is 0 during the lighting period, and the value of bit D0 is 1 during the extinguishing period. Bits D1 to D7 are unused. Here, when blinking the display of the role ratio monitor 103, the blinking cycle is set to 0.6 seconds ± 10%, and the ratio between the lighting period and the extinguishing period is set to 1: 1. Therefore, about 0.3 second lighting and about 0.3 second light extinction are repeated alternately.

Addresses F291 and F292 store display switching time values for determining the timing for switching the display contents of the role ratio monitor 103. The value of the display switching time is 2-byte data, the lower byte value is stored in the address F291, and the upper byte value is stored in the address F292. Further, the value of the display switching time is incremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is performed within a numerical range of 0 to 08 BDH (0 to 2237 in decimal). When the value becomes “0”, the ratio display number of the address F28F is switched. Thereby, for example, when the timer interrupt process is executed every 2.235 milliseconds, the display content of the role monitor 103 is switched every 2238 × 2.235 × 10 ⁻³ = 5.00193 seconds.

The address F293 stores the value of the blinking switching time for determining the timing for switching between lighting and extinguishing when the display content of the role ratio monitor 103 is blinked. The value of the blinking switching time is 1-byte data, and is incremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is performed within a numerical range of 0 to 86H (decimal number 0 to 134). When the value becomes “0”, the value of the bit D0 of the address F290 is switched. Thereby, for example, when the timer interrupt process is executed every 2.235 milliseconds, the display of the role monitor 103 is turned on → off → every 135 × 2.235 × 10 ⁻³ ≈0.3017 seconds → Turns on / off → …….

≪Description of sub-control means≫
<Sub-control means and peripheral hardware configuration>
The sub-control unit 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, an RWM, and the like, and is transmitted from the sub-control board 202 that controls an effect to be executed based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 and the sub-control board 202. On the basis of the sub-control command, the image display device 70, the speakers 64L and 64R, and the image control board 204 that drives effect means such as the effect lamp 72 are configured. The sub control board 202 may be responsible for driving the rendering means such as the ART lamps 29a and 29b.

<Functional block of sub control board>
The sub-control board 202 determines the content of the effect or notification based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100, and generates the sub-control command for executing the determined effect or notification, A control command receiving unit 220 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 and a sub control command transmission / reception unit 230 that transmits a sub control command generated by the effect control unit 210 to the image control board 204. Has been.

(Description of production control means)
The effect control means 210 is a means for controlling an effect according to the game, and includes an effect lottery means 212 and an effect state control means 214. Here, the effect according to the game is a set value, lottery state, game state number (type of game section and performance of advantageous section), role lottery and game state number (type of game section and performance of advantageous section). An effect according to the result of the transfer lottery.

  The effect control means 210 is based on the control command received from the main control means 100, the effect lottery means 212 for determining the effect according to the current effect state by lottery, and the control command transmitted from the main control means 100. There is production state control means 214 for performing production state transition control. Here, the effect states controlled by the effect state control means 214 are effect states corresponding to the game state numbers 0 to 10 in the main control means 100 (however, they do not necessarily correspond one-to-one). The same transition control as the game section control means 125 may be performed.

(Description of control command receiving means)
The control command receiving unit 220 receives the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 through serial communication, converts the received control command into parallel data, and stores the command buffer (for example, RWM) included in the sub-control unit 200 in the order received. In a part of the storage area). As a result, the effect control unit 210 sequentially performs processing based on the control command stored first among the control commands stored in the command buffer.

(Description of sub-control command transmission / reception means)
The sub-control command transmission / reception unit 230 transmits the sub-control command generated by the effect control unit 210 to the image control board 204 by serial communication every predetermined period (for example, 1 millisecond). Further, the sub control command transmission / reception means 230 receives a command transmitted from a sub control command transmission / reception means 240 described later.

<Functional block of image control board>
The image control board 204 includes a sub-control command transmission / reception means 240 and an image / sound output means 240. Based on the sub-control command transmitted from the sub-control board 202, the image display device 70, speakers 64L and 64R, and various lamps. (ART lamps 29a and 29b, side lamps 52L and 52R, effect lamp 72, decorative lamps 74L and 74R) are driven and controlled, and the effect determined by effect control means 210 is executed.

(Description of sub-control command transmission / reception means)
The sub control command transmission / reception means 240 receives the sub control command transmitted by serial communication from the sub control command transmission / reception means 230, converts the received sub control command into parallel data, and stores them in the sub command buffer in the order received. I will do it. Further, the sub control command transmission / reception means 240 is a command indicating whether or not the image control board 204 is operating normally, and a command indicating whether or not the command transmitted from the sub control command transmission / reception means 230 has been normally received. Is transmitted to the sub-control command transmission / reception means 230. As a result, the sub control board 202 can detect an abnormality occurring in the image control board 204, and when the image control board 204 fails to receive the sub control command, the sub control command can be retransmitted. .

(Description of image / sound output means)
The image / sound output means 250 outputs the effect image signal and sound signal generated by the image control board 204 to the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R. Thereby, the effect image is displayed on the image display device 70, and sound is generated from the speakers 64L and 64R. On the other hand, a normal operation signal indicating whether or not the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R are normally operable is output to the image control board 204 (or the sub-control board 202). If the normal operation signal cannot be received, the image / audio signal may be held without being sent, or may be discarded as the game progresses.

<Explanation of production lottery concerning the prelude production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 44, the sign effect lottery for determining the content of the sign effect performed by the effect lottery means 212 will be described. The sign effect is an effect that is executed over one game or a plurality of games when a predetermined winning number is determined in the role lottery in order to increase the player's expectation for bonus games or ART games. The effect lottery means 212 determines the contents of the sign effect by performing an effect lottery based on various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44. The numerical values in the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44 indicate numbers, and the value obtained by dividing each number by 65536 is the probability of obtaining the lottery result.

  FIG. 40A is a diagram showing the contents of the precursor type lottery table for determining the type of precursor effect. The sign type lottery is a lottery for selecting either the sign type 1 or the sign type 2, and is executed when the winning combination determining unit 110 determines that the winning number is 65, 66, or 35. (However, this lottery opportunity is an example, and it may be executed when another winning number is determined as long as it is a winning number that exhibits the same effect described later). The effect lottery means 212 determines the winning number from the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 and the effect group number, and if the received winning combination winning number is 2 and the effect group number is 24, It is determined that the winning number 65 has been determined. If the received winning combination number is 2 and the production group number is 25, the winning number 66 is determined. If the received winning combination winning number is 0 and the production group number is 25, the winning number 35 is determined. to decide.

  Here, the winning number 65 is a so-called “winning number with no setting difference” that has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value data (address F000) from 0 to 5, and the winning number 66 is set. The value data (address F000) is a so-called “winning number with a setting difference” in which the winning probabilities differ according to 0-5, and the winning number 35 is won according to the setting value data (address F000) being 0-5. This is a so-called “winning number with a setting difference” with different probabilities.

  In other words, the winning number 65 is a winning number that allows the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (transition lottery is possible), and it is possible to shift from any performance of the advantageous section to the advantageous section of other performances. It is also the winning number (where migration lottery can be executed). In this embodiment, when the winning number 65 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to the standby section, and when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB-B is stopped and displayed, the advantageous section lamp is turned on and the 1BB-B game is turned on. The advantageous section starts from the first game. Furthermore, during a 1BB-B game executed based on the winning number 65, when a winning number with no setting difference (winning number 47 in this embodiment) is won, a bonus such as an extra lottery is added. It is possible to grant.

  On the other hand, the winning number 66 is a winning number that cannot be changed from the normal section to the advantageous section (cannot make a transition lottery) because there is a setting difference, and from any performance of the advantageous section to the advantageous section of other performance. It is a winning number that cannot be transferred (cannot be transferred lottery). Furthermore, in the 1BB-B game executed based on the winning number 66, even if the winning number with no setting difference (winning number 47 in this embodiment) is won, the number of the ART games is added, etc. The privilege cannot be granted.

  The winning number 35 is a winning number that cannot be shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section because there is a setting difference (cannot make the transfer lottery), and the transition from any performance of the advantageous section to the advantageous section of other performance It is a winning number that cannot be transferred (cannot make a transfer lottery). The winning number does not include a bonus combination.

  That is, when the above-described winning numbers are compared, the winning numbers advantageous to the player are in the order of “65”, “66”, and “35”.

  However, in a game in which the winning number is determined as 65, 66, or 35, even if the player operates the stop switch corresponding to each reel, any symbol combination among winning 11 to winning 13 stops. However, since the missed points of the winning prizes 11 to 13 are stopped, it is difficult to determine which winning number is won from the reel stop mode. In addition, even if the winning number 65 is won, the advantageous section lamp is not lit (to shift to the standby section), so whether the winning number 65 has been won or not cannot be determined by lighting the advantageous section lamp.

  In the precursor type lottery table of FIG. 40A, when the winning number 66 or 35 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected regardless of whether it is in a non-favorable section (normal section or standby section) or advantageous section. (Numerical value is 65536). On the other hand, when the winning number 65 is determined, the selection probability of the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is different between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. That is, if it is in the non-advantageous section, the probability of selecting the precursor type 1 is high, and if it is in the advantageous section, the probability of selecting the precursor type 2 is high. Although the specific content of the effect will be described later, the content of the effect suggesting that the sign type 1 is more advantageous to the player (higher expectation) than the sign type 2 is easily selected.

  When the precursor type 1 or 2 is selected using the precursor type lottery table of FIG. 40 (a), the effect lottery means 212 executes the precursor effect using the precursor game number lottery table of FIG. 40 (b). A lottery game number lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be played (in other words, the length of the sign production). In the prelude game number lottery, one of 5 to 5 games is determined as the length of the prelude production, but the number of games to be determined differs depending on whether the bonus combination is won or not ing. When the bonus combination is not won, the probability of being determined as one game is higher than when the bonus combination is won. In addition, regardless of whether the bonus combination is won or not, when the precursor type 1 is selected, the probability that the number of games to be determined increases (determined to be 4 or 5 games) is high, and the precursor type 2 When is selected, the probability of being determined as three games is high.

  When the number of games for the precursor effect is determined using the precursor game number lottery table of FIG. 40 (b), the effect lottery means 212 determines the precursor scenario using the precursor scenario lottery table of FIG. 40 (c). A production scenario lottery is performed. The precursor scenario is configured according to the type of effect category to be executed for each game in which the precursor effect is produced, and different precursor scenario lottery tables are used when the precursor type 1 is selected and when the precursor type 2 is selected. The Here, there are five types of effect categories: “precursor”, “development”, “continuous effect”, “notification MID”, and “notification HI”.

  In the precursor scenario lottery table when the precursor type 1 is selected, one scenario is selected from ten scenarios, and two scenarios are prepared for each of the five games. Yes. For example, when the number of precursor games is determined to be five games, in the lottery table (precursor type 1) shown in FIG. 1 or No. A lottery for selecting the second scenario is performed. Similarly, when the number of precursor games is determined to be 4 games, 3 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario of 4 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 3 games, No. 4 is selected. 5 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario No. 6 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be two games, 7 or No. When a lottery for selecting a scenario of 8 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be one game, No. 8 is selected. 9 or No. A lottery for selecting 10 scenarios is performed. Also, in the precursor scenario lottery for each number of games, all of the odd No. Is likely to be selected.

  In the precursor scenario lottery table when precursor type 2 is selected, one scenario is selected from eight scenarios, and two scenarios are prepared for each of three to five games. One scenario is prepared for each of one game and two games. For example, when the number of precursor games is determined to be five games, in the lottery table (precursor type 2) shown in FIG. 1 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario 2 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 4 games, 3 or No. When the lottery for selecting the scenario of 4 is performed and the number of precursor games is determined to be 3 games, No. 4 is selected. 5 or No. A lottery for selecting six scenarios is performed.

  In addition, if the number of precursor games is determined to be two games, the No. No. 7 is selected and the number of precursor games is determined to be one game. Eight scenarios are selected. In addition, when the number of precursor games is determined to be any of 3 to 5 games, in the precursor scenario lottery for each number of games, all of the even number No. Is likely to be selected.

  When the precursor scenario is determined using the precursor scenario lottery table of FIG. 40 (c), it is designated in the selected scenario using each lottery table shown in FIG. The effect pattern lottery for selecting one effect pattern from the effect patterns belonging to the effect category is performed. Here, the sign production type lottery, the sign game number lottery, and the sign scenario lottery described above are performed only once when the winning numbers 66, 65, and 35 are determined in the role lottery. The effect content lottery to be performed is performed for each game during the sign effect.

  In addition, in each lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (d), the selection probability of the effect pattern does not differ depending on the type of the currently staying section, but the type of the combination determined in each game during the precursor effect (Replay (replay A1, replay A2, etc. among replays), common bell (common bell B, common 3 bells B, etc. among small roles), watermelon (such as watermelon B among small roles) or predetermined Depending on the role, the selection probability of the production pattern may be different.

  Each effect category described above is associated with a plurality of effect patterns except for “continuous effect”. First, the effect category “sign” is associated with four effect patterns of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigator effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)”, and “roulette effect announcement”. ing. The effect category “notification MID” is associated with three effect patterns of “roulette effect notification”, “normal bonus notification”, and “next notice”. The effect category “notification HI” is associated with two effect patterns of “next notice” and “premier effect”. The effect category “development” is associated with three effect patterns of “light-off effect (development)”, “small role navigator effect (development)”, and “character effect (development)”.

  The effect category “continuous effect” is an effect that is executed over two games, and is an effect that notifies whether or not a bonus combination has been won according to the determined winning number at the end of the effect. Therefore, there is no production pattern associated with the production category “continuous production”, and the production pattern lottery is not performed during the continuous production.

  In the game in which the predicate effect is being produced, when the effect of the effect category “predictor” is performed, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table in FIG. In the production pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-1), when the bonus combination is not won (bonus non-winning), and when the bonus combination is won but not transferred to the advantageous section (bonus winning (with setting difference)) ) And when winning a bonus combination and moving to an advantageous section (bonus winning (no setting difference)), the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

  For example, when the bonus is not won and the replay or common bell is won, “Character effect (HI)” and “Roulette effect announcement” are not selected, but “Lighting effect (LOW)” One of the “navigation effects (LOW)” is selected with a probability of 1/2. In addition, when a watermelon or a predetermined role is won, one of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is 1 / It is selected with a probability of four.

  In addition, when the bonus is won (with a setting difference), when the replay or common bell is won, the “lighting off effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is selected rather than the probability of being selected. LOW) "or" small role navigation effect (LOW) "has a higher probability of being selected. In addition, when a watermelon or a predetermined role is won, one of “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)” or “roulette effect announcement” is 1 / It is selected with a probability of four. On the other hand, in the case of winning a bonus (no difference in setting), regardless of the winning combination, the probability that either “lighting off effect (LOW)” or “small role navigating effect (LOW)” will be selected. The probability that either “character production (HI)” or “roulette production announcement” is selected is higher.

  Next, in the game in which the predicate effect is being performed, when the effect of the effect category “notification MID” is performed, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-2). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-2), the selection probability of each effect pattern differs between the bonus non-winning, the bonus winning (with setting difference), and the bonus winning (without setting difference). That is, the selection probability of each effect pattern has the same value in the bonus winning (with setting difference) and the bonus winning (without setting difference).

  Specifically, when the bonus is not won, “Roulette effect announcement” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. In addition, for the bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference), one of the “Roulette effect notification”, “Normal bonus notification”, or “Next notice” effect patterns is selected. The probability that “notification” or “normal bonus notification” is selected is the same probability, and is higher than the probability that “next notice” is selected. It should be noted that the selection probability of each effect pattern in bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference) may vary depending on the type of winning combination.

  Next, when performing an effect of the effect category “announcement HI” in the game in the presence of the sign effect, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. Note that the production of the production category “notification HI” is performed only when the winning number 65 is determined (see (precursor type 1) in FIGS. 40A and 40C), so that the bonus winning is always performed. (No setting difference). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-3), “next notice” or “premier effect” is selected with a probability of 1/2, regardless of the type of winning combination.

  Next, when performing an effect of the effect category “development” in the game in the presence of the sign effect, the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-4). In the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41 (d-4), the selection probability of each effect pattern differs between bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference). That is, in the bonus non-winning and the bonus winning (with a setting difference), the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same value.

  Specifically, when the bonus is not won and the bonus is won (with setting difference), regardless of the type of the winning combination, “lighting off (development)”, “small role navigating (development)” or “character production ( "Evolution" "is selected, but the probability of selecting" Lighting Off (Development) "or" Small Navi Production (Development) "is the same probability, and" Character Production ( Development) is higher than the probability of being selected. On the other hand, in the bonus winning (no setting difference), the probability of selecting “lighting off effect (development)” or “small role navigator effect (development)” is the same probability, but “character effect (development)” "Is lower than the probability of being selected.

  When the effect pattern is determined using the effect pattern lottery table of FIG. 41D in each game during the sign effect, it is determined using each effect content lottery table shown in FIGS. The specific production content in the production pattern is determined. Here, (e-1) to (e-5) in FIG. 42 are respectively “light-off effect (LOW)”, “small role navigator effect (LOW)”, “character effect (HI)”, and “roulette effect”. It is a lottery table for determining the production contents in each production pattern of “notification” and “next notice”. Here, the same lottery table is used in the effect content lottery table regarding the “light extinction effect (LOW)”, “small role navigation effect (LOW)”, and “character effect (HI)” regardless of the current staying section. . In addition, in the effect content lottery table regarding “roulette effect announcement” and “next notice”, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is an unfavorable section or an advantageous section.

  Also, (e-6) to (e-9) in FIG. 43 respectively represent “Premier effect”, “Light-off effect (development)”, “Small role navigation effect (development)”, and “Character effect (development)”. It is a lottery table for determining the production contents in each production pattern. Here, in the effect content lottery table regarding “light-off effect (development)” and “small role navigator effect (development)”, the same lottery table is used regardless of the current staying section. On the other hand, in the effect content lottery table regarding “Premier effect” and “Character effect (development)”, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section.

  Further, (e-10) in FIG. 44 is a lottery table for determining the production contents in the production pattern of “normal bonus notification”. In this effect content lottery table, different lottery tables are used depending on whether the currently staying section is a non-favorable section or an advantageous section.

  In the effect content lottery table in the effect pattern “light-off effect (LOW)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-1), the effect lamp 72 is turned off during the first stop operation (one stop-off), or turned off during the second stop operation. It is determined whether to turn off the light (2 lights off) or to turn off the lights at the time of the third stop operation (3 lights off). The selection probability of these effects does not change depending on the type of winning winning combination, but there is a high probability that “1 stop-off” will be selected in bonus non-winning cases, and “3 stop-off” in bonus winning (with setting difference). There is a high probability of being selected, and there is a high probability that “3 lights off” will be selected even in the bonus winning (no setting difference).

  In the effect content lottery table in the effect pattern “small role navigation effect (LOW)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-2), for example, the color of the character displayed on the image display device 70 is blue (blue navigation), or Whether it is yellow (yellow navigation), green (green navigation), or white (white navigation) is determined. Here, in any state of bonus non-winning, bonus winning (with setting difference) and bonus winning (without setting difference), if the winning combination is replayed, “Blue Navi” is selected and the winning combination is common “Yellow Navi” is selected when it becomes a bell, “Green Navi” is selected when the winning combination becomes watermelon, and “White Navi” is selected when the winning combination becomes a predetermined combination. For example, when winning a bonus (with setting difference), if the winning combination becomes a common bell, “blue navigation” may be selected with a very low probability. As a result, the correspondence between the character color and the winning combination does not match, so that it can be suggested to the player that the character is in an unusual state.

  In the lottery table of effect contents in the effect pattern “character effect (HI)” shown in FIG. 42 (e-3), for example, the character type displayed on the image display device 70 is “weak character”, “medium character”, or “ Which of “strong character” should be decided. In this lottery table, regardless of the type of winning combination, if the bonus is not selected, the probability of selecting “weak character”, “medium character”, and “strong character” in order is increased. . Further, when the bonus is won (with setting difference), the selection probabilities of the three types of characters are almost the same, but the selection probability of “strong character” is set to be the highest. Further, if the bonus is won (no difference in setting), the probability of selecting “strong character”, “medium character”, and “weak character” in that order is set higher.

  Next, for the effect pattern “roulette effect announcement”, for example, three icons of “chance icon”, “bonus icon”, and “premier icon” are displayed on the image display device 70, and any of these three icons is displayed. This is an effect that shows the process of selecting and shows which icon was selected last. In the icon selection process, for example, the display position of the cursor is sequentially moved on the three icons. Finally, the cursor is stopped and displayed on any one of the icons.

  The lottery table of the contents of the effect in the “roulette effect announcement” shown in FIG. 42 (e-4) is different between the non-favorable zone and the advantageous zone. In each lottery table in the non-favorable zone, the bonus non-winning state Then, regardless of the type of the winning combination, the effect of selecting the “chance icon” at the end is determined. In addition, when a bonus is won (with a setting difference), an effect for selecting the “bonus icon” is finally determined regardless of the type of the winning combination. If the bonus is won (no setting difference), either the effect of selecting the “bonus icon” or the effect of selecting the “premier icon” is selected, but the “premier icon” is selected. The selection probability of production is set higher. On the other hand, in each lottery table in the advantageous section, in the bonus non-winning state and the bonus winning (with setting difference), the lottery similar to the lottery table in the non-interesting section is performed, but the bonus winning (setting difference) None) In the case of odor, the selection probability of the effect of selecting the “premier icon” is set higher than the effect of selecting the “bonus icon” at the end.

  Next, the effect pattern “next notice” is an effect of displaying “next bonus” or “next premier” characters after displaying the “next notice” character on the image display device 70 for a predetermined time. The effect pattern “next announcement” is an effect pattern that is not selected in the bonus non-winning state, as is apparent from the effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. Therefore, the lottery table for the contents of the effect in the effect pattern “next notice” shown in FIG. 42 (e-5) does not show the lottery table in the bonus non-winning state.

  In addition, the lottery table of the content of the performance in the performance pattern “next notice” shown in FIG. If the bonus is won (with a setting difference), the “Next Bonus” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. If the bonus is won (no setting difference), the “Next Premier” is selected regardless of the type of the winning combination. Must be selected. On the other hand, in each lottery table in the advantageous section, when a bonus is won (with a setting difference), the “next bonus” is always selected regardless of the type of the winning combination, while a bonus winning (no setting difference) ), The probability of selecting “Next Bonus” is overwhelmingly higher regardless of the winning combination, but “Next Premier” may be selected.

  Next, in FIG. 43, in the production pattern “Premier Production”, the “Premier 1” production informing that the winning of the bonus combination has been confirmed, or the winning of the bonus combination is confirmed, and the execution of the ART game is confirmed. One of the “Premier 2” effects that informs the user of the event is executed. The production pattern “premier production” is an production pattern that can be selected only when the bonus is won (no setting difference), as is apparent from the production pattern lottery table shown in FIG. In the lottery table for the content of the performance in the performance pattern “Premier effect” shown in FIG. 43 (e-6), the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are different. Regardless of the type, “Premier 1” is always selected. In the lottery table in the advantageous section, “Premier 2” may be selected although the probability of selecting “Premier 1” is overwhelmingly higher regardless of the type of the winning combination.

  The lottery table for the content of the production in the production pattern “light-off production (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-7) uses the same lottery table during the non-advantageous section and during the advantageous section, In both the bonus winning (with setting difference) and the bonus winning (without setting difference), “3 stop-off & development” is always selected regardless of the type of winning combination. When “3 stop lights off & development” is selected, after the above “3 stop lights off” effect is performed, an extension effect that raises the expectation for winning the bonus combination is performed.

  The lottery table for the contents of the effect in the effect pattern “small role navigation effect (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-8) also uses the same lottery table in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. Regardless of the type of the winning combination, “Blue Navi → Development”, “Yellow Navi → Development”, “No Bonus Winning, Bonus Winning (with setting difference) and Bonus Winning (without setting difference) One of “green navigation → development” or “purple navigation → development” is selected with an equal probability (1/4). Here, the production contents of “blue navigation → development”, “yellow navigation → development”, “green navigation → development”, and “purple navigation → development” represent the character displayed on the image display device 70 in a corresponding color. (For example, blue for “blue navigator”) indicates that the development effect is to be performed to increase the expectation for winning the bonus combination.

  The lottery table for the content of the performance in the production pattern “character production (development)” shown in FIG. 43 (e-9) is different between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. In the lottery table when the bonus is not won, the selection probability of the production content “weak character → development” is the highest regardless of the type of the winning combination. In addition, the selection probability of “middle character → development” is high after “weak character → development”, and the production content “strong character → development” is selected with a small probability. In addition, in the lottery table when the bonus is won (with setting differences), the selection probabilities are in the order of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development”, regardless of the type of the winning combination. Although set to be lower, the selection probabilities of “medium character → development” and “strong character → development” are set higher than the lottery table when the bonus is not won. In the lottery table when bonus is won (no setting difference), unlike the other lottery tables, the selection probability decreases in the order of “strong character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “weak character → development”. Is set.

  In each lottery table in the advantageous section, the lottery table for bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) is the same as the lottery table in the non-favorable section described above, but the bonus winning (setting difference) In the lottery table at the time of “None”, the selection probability is set to decrease in the order of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development”. Here, the production contents of “weak character → development”, “medium character → development”, and “strong character → development” are “weak” if the character corresponds to the image display device 70 (for example, “weak character → development”). "Character") is displayed, and it is shown that the development effect that raises the expectation for winning the bonus role is performed.

  Next, the lottery tables for the production contents in the production pattern “normal bonus notification” shown in FIG. 44 (e-10) differ between the non-favorable sections and the advantageous sections. In the lottery table when the bonus is not won, the selection probability of the production content “weak character → bonus announcement” is the highest regardless of the type of the winning combination. Also, the selection probability of “middle character → bonus announcement” is high after “weak character → development”, and the production content of “strong character → bonus announcement” is selected with a slight probability. . Here, the “bonus notice” is a result presentation indicating whether or not a bonus combination has been won. In the case of a bonus non-winning, an indication that the bonus combination has not been won. This refers to the production that indicates that the role has been won. In addition, in the lottery table when a bonus is won (with setting difference), the selection probability is set to decrease in the order of “weak character → bonus announcement”, “medium character → bonus announcement”, and “strong character → bonus announcement”. However, the selection probabilities of “medium character → bonus announcement” and “strong character → bonus announcement” are set higher than the lottery table when the bonus is not won. Unlike other lottery tables, the selection probability in the order of “strong character → bonus announcement”, “medium character → bonus announcement”, and “weak character → bonus announcement” is lower in the lottery table when bonus is won (no setting difference). It is set to be.

  In each lottery table in the advantageous section, the lottery table at the time of bonus non-winning and bonus winning (with setting difference) has the same contents as the lottery table in the non-favorable section described above. In addition, the lottery table for bonus winning (no setting difference) has the same contents as the lottery table for bonus winning (with setting difference). Here, the production contents of “weak character → bonus notice”, “medium character → bonus notice”, and “strong character → bonus notice” are characters corresponding to the image display device 70 (for example, “weak character → bonus notice”). If there is a “weak character”), a result effect (notification effect) indicating whether or not the bonus combination has been won is shown.

Summarizing the contents of the precursor effects described above, the following effects are possible.
(1) In the winning numbers 65, 66, and 35, since the same effect mode may be selected up to the effect of executing whether or not the bonus combination is won, it is not known which winning number is won. Production can be performed.
(2) In the winning numbers 65 and 66, the same effect mode may be selected up to the effect indicating that the bonus has been won. Therefore, which winning number (one is the winning number to move to the advantageous section, the other is the winning number) A series of effects that do not know whether the bonus was won with the winning number that does not shift to the advantageous section) can be executed.
(3) When the winning numbers 65 and 66 are compared, there is a high probability that an effect with a high expectation given to the player by winning the winning number 65 is set, so the effects in each game are exhausted. It will not be.
(4) Depending on the result of the production lottery, the production that can be recognized that the winning number 65 has been won (the winning number to be transferred to the advantageous section) can be selected. It will be a thing.

[Description of processing by control means]
<< Description of control processing in main control means >>
Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 45 to 50, the processing contents of the game control executed by the main control means 100 will be described.

<Description of the game progress main process>
First, the contents of the game progress main process for controlling the game executed in the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 performs a game start process (step S10). In this game start process, the setting of the game standby display (so-called demo screen) start time, the current set value for the sub-control means 200, the game status (whether replaying or BB gaming is in progress), the current lottery status Information such as a game state number is transmitted. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a medal for playing a game has been inserted (step S12). If there is no inserted medal, the determination result is NO, and a game medal insertion standby display process is performed in which the current set value can be confirmed according to the on / off state of the key switch 82b (step S14). ). Incidentally, when the key switch 82b is in the ON state, the current set value (value corresponding to the set value data) is displayed on the set value display 87. When the set value display 87 is not provided, it may be displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28.

  If the determination result in step S12 is YES (medal has been inserted), or when the processing in step S14 is completed, the main control means 100 performs a process (game medal management process) associated with the insertion of the medal. (Step S16). This process includes, for example, a clearing process when the clearing switch 33 is operated, a process for detecting a medal inserted into the medal slot 32, and the like. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the operation of the start switch 36 can be accepted and whether or not the start switch 36 has been operated (step S18). Here, the operation of the start switch 36 can be accepted when a prescribed number of medals are inserted or when a re-gamer wins in the previous game. If the start switch 36 is not operated, the determination result in step S18 is NO, and the process returns to step S12.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S18 that the start switch 36 has been operated (YES), the blocker of the selector 80 is turned off to invalidate the insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 32 (step S20). Then, among the combination lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 26, the combination lottery process is performed based on the combination lottery table corresponding to the lottery state (step S22). Next, various lotteries (advantage zone transition lottery, promotion lottery, falling lottery, etc.) for performing the transition control of the gaming section shown in FIG. 28 in accordance with the winning number determined in the role lottery and the current game state number A game section lottery process for performing an ART lottery, an ART promotion lottery, a special zone transfer lottery, a special zone fall lottery, an extra lottery, etc.) is performed (step S24).

  Next, winning combinations with different symbol combinations that are subject to pull-in control depending on the order of pressing by combination lottery (a combination whose number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the pressing order, and whose advantageous state does not differ depending on whether it is maintained or not maintained. When “Excluded” is selected, an instruction display process for displaying an instruction number for notifying the pressing order in accordance with the current game state number on the acquired number display 28 is performed (step S26). 37, the game section flag (address F020), the main game state number (address F021), the advantageous section counter (address F024), the ART game number counter (address F026), the ART set number counter (address F028), etc. Is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S28).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a mask process for generating an effect group number for instructing an effect to be executed by the sub-control means 200 in accordance with the winning / replay winning number determined in the role lottery (step S30). ), The winning combination winning number and the effect group number corresponding to the result of the winning lottery are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S32). Then, after performing the reel rotation start preparation process performed before starting the rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, 40R (step S34), the reel stop management process is performed (step S36). In this reel stop management process, rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R is started, and when the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are operated, stop control is performed for the reels corresponding to the operated stop switches.

  Here, the reel stop control is performed based on the operation flag generated based on the winning / replay winning number and the winning combination winning number. This operation flag is associated with flag information indicating whether or not each symbol combination shown in FIGS. 10 to 15 is to be subject to the pull-in control, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM in the role lottery process. Is done. Further, every time the stop switch is operated, information indicating the operated stop switch and the fact that the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped are transmitted to the sub-control means 200.

  Next, when all the reels stop, the main control means 100 performs a display determination process for determining whether or not any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. Based on this, information on the displayed symbol combination is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S38). If the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line matches any of the small combinations, the medal payout number corresponding to the winning small combination is set to the RWM address F053 (medal payout number data) and Stored in address F054 (payout number buffer). Then, the hopper motor 46 is driven to perform a payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the matched small combination (step S40). Also, information indicating that is sent to the sub-control means 200 at the start of payout of medals and at the end of payout.

  Based on the current lottery status, the lottery status is determined based on the type of winning combination, whether the bonus combination is won, whether the bonus combination is won, whether the bonus game is over, etc. A migration process (see FIG. 27) is performed (step S42). Also, according to the current game state number, the game state number transition process (FIG. 28) based on whether or not a bonus combination has been won, whether or not the bonus game has ended, various lottery results related to the transition of the game state number, and the like. (Refer to step S44).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a ratio calculation process for calculating various ratios to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 103 (step S46), and then performs a game end check process (step S48). In the game end check process in step S48, on / off control of various signals output to the outside through the external concentrated terminal board 86, transmission control of information indicating that the game has ended to the sub-control means 200, and the like are performed. Do.

  When one game is completed by the above processing, the main control means 100 returns to the game start processing in step S10 again and performs processing for the next game.

<Description of ratio calculation process>
Next, the content of the ratio calculation process executed in step S46 of FIG. 45 (game progress main process) will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. As described above, the main control means 100 displays the five ratios of the advantageous section ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the medium period combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio as the ratios displayed on the ratio monitor 103. calculate. The flowchart of FIG. 46 shows a ratio calculation process for calculating the advantageous section ratio.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 46, first, the main control means 100 adds 1 to the value of the total game number counter stored in the RWM address F26D (step S100). Then, it is determined whether or not the current game section is in the advantageous section (the game state number is 1 or more) (step S102). If it is in the advantageous section, the determination result is YES and the result is stored in the RWM address F270. 1 is added to the value of the advantageous section game number counter being set (step S104).

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S102 that it is not in the advantageous section (step S102, NO), or when the process of step S104 is performed, the main control means 100 performs the advantageous section game count stored in the RWM address F270. The value of (dividend) is multiplied by 10, and the value and the total number of games (divisor) stored in the RWM address F26D are set in predetermined registers, respectively (step S106). Next, the main control means 100 determines whether the value of the divisor (here, the value of the total number of games) is 0 (step S108). If it is 0, the determination result is YES, The ratio calculation execution process in step S110 is avoided. This is to avoid dividing the dividend by 0, and more specifically, to prevent inconvenience in the ratio calculation execution process described below.

  If the value of the divisor is not 0 in the determination process of step S106, the determination result is NO, and an operation is performed to divide the advantageous section game count (dividend) by the total game count (divisor). Here, in the ratio calculation process shown in FIG. 46, the calculation result (the value of the advantageous section ratio) of the number of advantageous section games divided by the total number of games (the value of the advantageous section ratio) is calculated as a two-digit value. A ratio calculation execution process is performed to perform division for obtaining the value of the place (step S110). By this ratio calculation execution process, the calculated quotient value is set in the lower 4 bits of a predetermined register (1 byte). The value of this quotient is the tens value of the percentage.

  Next, the main control means 100 performs processing for obtaining a remainder of division by the ratio calculation execution processing in step S110 (step S112). Detailed description regarding this processing will be described later. Then, the quotient value set in the lower 4 bits of the predetermined register is transferred to the upper 4 bits (step S114). Next, the main control means 100 multiplies the remainder value (dividend) obtained by the process of step S112 by 10 times, and the value and the total number of games (divisor) stored in the RWM address F26D. Each is set in a predetermined register (step S116). Note that when the value of the total number of games set in the predetermined register in step S106 is held when performing the process of step S116, the value of the total number of games may be used.

  Then, the main control means 100 performs a ratio calculation execution process in order to calculate the first value of the advantageous section ratio (step S118). In this ratio calculation execution process, the same process as the ratio calculation execution process in step S110 is performed. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the ratio calculation execution process in step S118 is added to the predetermined register in which the process in step S114 has been performed, and is stored in the RWM address F282 as advantageous section ratio data (step S120). Further, when the process of step S120 is performed when the determination result of step S108 is YES, the value of a predetermined register (in this case, 0) is stored as it is in the RWM address F285.

  The ratio calculation process shown in FIG. 46 is for calculating the advantageous section ratio, but by performing the same process, the medium period combination ratio, medium period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, and cumulative combination ratio are calculated. It is also possible to do. For example, when calculating the medium period combination ratio and the medium period ratio, first, a payout (6000 times) counter stored in the RWM addresses F27C to F27E, and a continuous character payout (6000 times) stored in the F27F to F281. The counter and the value of the item payout (6000 times) counter stored in F282 to F284 are updated.

  Then, when calculating the intermediate period linkage ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is carried out with the value of the continuous character payout (6000 times) counter as the dividend and the value of the payout (6000 times) counter as the divisor. The result is stored in RWM address F286. Further, when calculating the medium period ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the item payout (6000 times) counter as the dividend and the value of the payout (6000 times) counter as the divisor. Store in the RWM address F287.

  When calculating the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio, first, a total payout (cumulative) counter stored in the RWM addresses F273 to F275, a continuous character payout (cumulative) counter stored in F276 to F278, In addition, the value of the accessory payout (cumulative) counter stored in F279 to F27B is updated. Then, when calculating the cumulative combination ratio, the processing of Steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the continuous payout (cumulative) counter as the dividend and the value of the total payout (cumulative) counter as the divisor. Store in the RWM address F288. Further, when calculating the cumulative winning ratio, the processing of steps S106 to S120 is performed with the value of the bonus paying (cumulative) counter as the dividend and the value of the total paying (cumulative) counter as the divisor, and the result is the RWM address. Store in F289.

<Description of ratio calculation execution processing>
Next, the contents of the ratio calculation execution process executed in steps S110 and S118 of FIG. 46 (ratio calculation process) will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 subtracts the value of the lower 2 bytes of the divisor from the value of the lower 2 bytes of the dividend (step S118). Here, when this process is performed in step S110 of FIG. 46, the dividend becomes the advantageous section game count, and the divisor becomes the total game count. When this process is performed in step S118 of FIG. 46, the dividend is a remainder obtained by the ratio calculation execution process executed in step S110, and the divisor is the total number of games.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a carry has occurred by the subtraction process in step S200 (step S202). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the carry flag of the flag register has become “1”. When a carry occurs in the subtraction process in step S200, the determination result is YES, and it is determined whether or not the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is 0 (step S204). If the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is 0, the determination result is YES, and the main control unit 100 ends the ratio calculation execution process of FIG. On the other hand, if the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend is not 0, the determination result is NO and 1 is subtracted from the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend (step S206).

  Next, the main control means 100 subtracts the value of the upper 2 bytes of the divisor from the value of the upper 2 bytes of the dividend (step S208). Here, if the determination result in step S202 is NO (no carryover has occurred), the process of step S208 is performed without performing steps S204 and S206. Then, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by the subtraction process in step S208 (step S210). If a carry has occurred, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the ratio calculation execution process in FIG. Exit. On the other hand, when the carry does not occur, the determination result is NO, and 1 is added to the value of the ratio that finally becomes the calculation result of the ratio calculation execution process (step S212). Then, the process returns to step S200, and thereafter, the processes of steps S200 to S212 are repeatedly executed until the determination result of step S204 or S210 is YES.

  Here, the subtraction processing in steps S200 and S208 is performed using a 2-byte register. The value of the register is less than 0 when the determination result in step S204 or S210 is YES. It is a value. For example, when 0019H is subtracted from 0015H, it becomes FFFCH. For this reason, when the remainder is obtained in the process of step S112 in FIG. 46, in the subtraction process in step S200 or S208 of FIG. 47, a process for returning to the value of the dividend immediately before the divisor is finally subtracted is performed.

<Explanation of timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the contents of the timer interruption process executed at predetermined intervals in the main control means 100 will be described. This timer interruption process is repeatedly executed at a period of about 2.235 milliseconds, and various 8-segment display devices and LED display control, detection of operations on each switch of the operation means 300 shown in FIG. 16, sub-control means 200, transmission of an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 86, generation and output of a control signal for driving control of the stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R, random number values and various counter values used as timers Processing such as updating.

  When the interrupt request signal (generation period: about 2.235 milliseconds) is output from the timer count means (timer circuit) provided in the microcomputer chip Z1, the main control means 100 outputs the timer allocation shown in FIG. Start processing. Here, when the timer interrupt process is executed, the return address of the process being executed in the game progress main process of FIG. 45 and the like is stored in the stack area. Thereby, after the timer interrupt process is completed, the process can be started from the continuation of the process executed in the game progress main process or the like based on the return address stored in the stack area.

  When the timer interrupt process of FIG. 48 is started, first, the main control means 100 performs an initial process of a timer interrupt process to be executed (step S500). For example, the data set in each register of the CPU is stored in the stack area of the RWM, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that a new timer interrupt process is not started during the timer interrupt process to be performed in the future. .

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a power-off (a power supply voltage has fallen below a predetermined value) is detected based on a power-off detection signal input to the input port 0 (step S502). . This power-off detection signal is output from a power supply monitoring circuit (not shown) provided on the main control board 101. When the main control unit 100 detects a power interruption, the determination result in step 502 is YES, and a power interruption process performed at the time of power interruption is performed (step S504). In this power-off process, the SP register is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM (for example, the stack pointer temporary storage area described above), the value of the power-off process completed flag indicating that the power-off process has been performed is set to 55H, and the RWM A checksum of the predetermined address range (F000 to F3FF) is calculated, and a value (2's complement) based on the result is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. Also, access to the RWM is prohibited, and a standby state for a reset signal input from the outside is entered.

  On the other hand, if the power cut-off is not detected in the determination process in step S502, the determination result is NO, and a blink request flag for designating whether or not each display content of the role ratio monitor 103 is blinked. A blinking request flag generation process for generating a value is performed (step S506). Next, the main control means 100 performs a blinking display process for blinking the display content designated to be blinked according to the value of the blinking request flag (step S508). Then, an LED display control process for performing display control of the credit amount display 27, the acquired number display 28, the set value display 87, and the role ratio monitor 103 is executed (step S510).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a timer measurement process for updating the count value of a timer that is generally used to count a predetermined time (step S512). In this timer measurement process, for example, the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) saved in a predetermined storage area of the RWM and the time detected by various sensors are subtracted. Specifically, the minimum game time is a time set after the start switch 36 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are betted, and “1835” is stored in the RWM as a time value. Then, until “0” is stored in the storage area of this RWM, even if there is an operation of the start switch 36 for starting the next game, the rotation start control for starting the rotation of the reel is not executed. It has become.

  In addition, as detection times of various sensors, a timer value or medal for measuring a medal passage time for determining whether or not a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 stays in the selector (medal clogging). There is a medal passage time for determining whether or not the hopper stays in the hopper. In addition, when a small role wins when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 cards), the payout amount corresponding to the small role is paid out from the hopper. At this time, whether or not the medal has been paid out. There is a medal unpaid time for determining whether or not.

  Next, the main control means 100 performs input port 0-2 reading processing for reading various external signals input to the input ports 0-2 and storing them in predetermined addresses of the RWM (step S514), and the reels 40L, 40L, In order to control the rotation of 40C and 40R, a reel drive management process is performed for each of the stepping motors 42L, 42C and 42R (step S516). When the reel drive management process is performed for all the stepping motors (step S518, YES), the main control unit 100 displays the display data of each display unit and each stepping motor based on the data stored in the RWM. Port output processing for outputting control signals, blocker drive signals, hopper motor drive signals, etc. for 42L, 42C, and 42R from the output port is executed (step S520).

  Next, the main control unit 100 transmits the control command stored first among the control commands stored in the ring buffer area set in the RWM to the sub-control unit 200 (step S522). Then, after performing an external signal output process for outputting various signals to be output to the outside via the external concentrated terminal board 86 (step S524), it is stored in a predetermined address (stack area) of the RWM by the initial process of step S500. Then, a return process for restoring the values of the various registers is performed (step S526), and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 48 is terminated.

<Description of blink request flag generation processing>
Next, the contents of the blink request flag generation process executed in step S506 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the main control means 100 sets the number of ratio data, the initial value for the blink request flag, the blink determination value table, and the value of the ratio data to be processed first in the corresponding predetermined registers (step S600). Here, the number of ratio data is the number of ratio data to be subjected to blinking display, and its value is 5 (advantageous section ratio, medium-period combination ratio, medium-period combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, cumulative Ratio). The initial value for the blink request flag is the initial value of the blink request flag stored in the RWM address F28E, and the value is 00000000B. The blink determination value table is a table showing a value (determination value) that is a criterion for determining whether or not to perform blink display when each ratio data is displayed. As shown in FIG. The determination value for the cumulative period combination ratio is 60, the determination value for the intermediate period combination ratio is 70, the determination value for the intermediate period combination ratio is 60, and the determination value for the advantageous section ratio is 70. The blink determination value table in FIG. 49B is stored in the ROM.

  Further, in the blink request flag generation processing shown in FIG. 49A, the blink request flag for each ratio data in the order of cumulative combination ratio → cumulative combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → medium period combination ratio → advantageous section ratio. Generate a value. Therefore, as the ratio data to be processed first, the cumulative ratio value stored in the RWM address F289 is set in a predetermined register.

  Next, the main control means 100 subtracts the corresponding determination value (here, 70) from the value of the ratio data (here, the cumulative winning ratio) set in step S600 (step S602). Then, the value of the carry flag when the subtraction is performed is set to the least significant bit of the initial value of the blink request flag, and the value of each bit is shifted by one bit to the upper bit side (left side) (step S604). Then, the value of the next ratio data (here, the cumulative linkage ratio) is set in a predetermined register (step S606), and it is determined whether or not the processing of steps S602 to S606 has been performed for the number of ratio data (step S606). S608). Specifically, when 1 is subtracted from the value of the ratio data number to become 0, the determination result in step S608 becomes YES.

  With the above processing, the corresponding judgment values are subtracted in the order of cumulative role ratio → cumulative linkage ratio → medium period role ratio → medium period linkage ratio → advantageous zone ratio, and the value of the carry flag by the subtraction result is Sequentially, the initial value of the blink request flag is set. When the determination result in step S608 is YES, the bit D4 of the initial value of the blink request flag is the carry flag value related to the cumulative role ratio, the bit D3 is the carry flag value and bit related to the cumulative role ratio The carry flag value related to the medium period combination ratio is set in D2, the carry flag value related to the medium period combination ratio is set in bit D1, and the carry flag value related to the advantageous section ratio is set in bit D0 (least significant bit). . That is, the values of the bits D0 to D4 in the initial value of the blink request flag are set to 1 when the value of each ratio data is equal to or less than the corresponding determination value, and the value of each ratio data exceeds the corresponding determination value. For those that are, it is 0.

  If the decision result in step S608 is YES, the main control means 100 refers to the value of the total game number counter stored in the RWM addresses F26D to F26F, and determines whether or not the value of the total game number is 6000 times or more. Is determined (step S610). If it is 6000 times or more, the determination result is YES, and the value of bit D5 in the initial value of the blink request flag is set to 1 (step S612). On the other hand, when the number is less than 6000, the process of step S612 is not performed, and the value of the bit D5 in the initial value of the blink request flag remains 0.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the total number of games is 175000 or more (step S614). If it is 175000 times or more, the determination result is YES, and the value of bit D6 in the initial value of the blink request flag is set to 1 (step S616). On the other hand, when the number is less than 175,000, the process of step S616 is not performed, and the value of the bit D6 in the initial value of the blink request flag remains 0.

  The main control means 100 stores the value of the blink request flag generated by performing the above process in the RWM address F28E (step S618), and ends the blink request flag generation process shown in FIG.

<Description of blinking display processing>
Next, the contents of the blinking display process executed in step S508 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. The blinking display process shown in FIG. 50A is executed when the lighting control of the role ratio monitor 103 is performed (LED display counter values are 0 to 2 and 4).

  First, the main control means 100 refers to the value of the LED display counter stored in the RWM address F012 and the value of the ratio display number stored in the RWM address F28F, and sets the number of acquisitions corresponding to each value in a predetermined register. (Step S600). Here, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the value of the LED display counter is 1 or 2 (identification display portion ID is lit), if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous section ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is the number of acquisition times 6 if the value of the ratio display number is 2 (medium period combination ratio), and the number of acquisitions 6 is the ratio display number if the value of the ratio display number is 3 (medium period role ratio). If the value is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 7 is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), when the value of the LED display counter is 4 or 0 (ratio indicator RA lighting), if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous zone ratio), the number of acquisitions is 1. However, if the value of the ratio display number is 2 (intermediate period combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 2 is the value, and if the value of the ratio display number is 3 (intermediate period combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 3 is the value of the ratio display number. Is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 4 is set, and if the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), the number of acquisitions 5 is set. At this time, if the value of the LED display counter is 0, it is corrected to 00001000B and set in a predetermined register (for example, D register). This process is a process for setting the value of D3 (LED digit signal 9) of the output port 4 shown in FIG. 34 to “1”. When the value of the LED display counter is other than 0, the value is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) as it is.

  Next, the main control means 100 sets segment data for displaying various ratio values corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the RWM address F28F in a predetermined register (step S632). For example, if the value of the ratio display number is 1 (advantageous area ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the advantageous area ratio data stored in the RWM address F285 is converted to the role ratio monitor shown in FIG. Get from the segment table for display and set. If the value of the ratio display number is 2 (medium period linkage ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the continuous combination ratio (6000 times) data stored in the RWM address F286 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 3 (medium period ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the accessory ratio (6000 times) data stored in the RWM address F287 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 4 (cumulative combination ratio), the segment data corresponding to the value of the continuous combination ratio (cumulative) data stored in the RWM address F288 is set. If the value of the ratio display number is 5 (cumulative combination ratio), segment data corresponding to the value of the combination ratio (cumulative) data stored in the RWM address F289 is set.

  Next, the main control means 100 acquires the value of the blink request flag stored in the RWM address F28E and sets it in a predetermined register (step S634). Then, the value of the blink request flag set in the predetermined register is set to the lower bit side by the number of acquisitions set in the predetermined register (a register different from the register in which the value of the blink request flag is set) in step S630. The data is shifted bit by bit in the (right) direction (step S636). In this shift process, the value of the least significant bit is shifted to the carry flag, and 0 is set to the most significant bit at that time.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the carry flag is 0 (step S638). Thereby, when displaying the identifier display part ID of the role ratio monitor 103 (the value of the LED display counter is 1 or 2), the ratio display number is 1, 4 or 5 (advantageous zone ratio, cumulative combined ratio or cumulative (Ratio), it is determined whether or not the value of bit D6 of the blink request flag is zero. On the other hand, when the ratio display number is 2 or 3 (intermediate period combination ratio or intermediate period combination ratio), it is determined whether or not the value of the bit D5 of the blink request flag is 0.

  Further, when the ratio display section RA of the role ratio monitor 103 is displayed (the value of the LED display counter is 4 or 0), if the ratio display number is 1, the value of the bit D0 of the blink request flag is the ratio display number. If the ratio display number is 3, the value of the blink request flag bit D2 is the value of the blink request flag bit D2, and if the ratio display number is 4, the value of the blink request flag bit D3 is If the ratio display number is 5, it is determined whether or not the value of the bit D4 of the blink request flag is 0.

  If it is determined in step S638 that the carry flag value is 0, the determination result is YES, and it is determined whether or not the blinking switching flag stored in the RWM address F290 is “1” (step 1). S640). If the blinking switching flag is “1”, the determination result is YES, and the predetermined register (a register different from the register in which the blinking request flag and the number of acquisition times are set) is set in step S632. The existing segment data is cleared to 0 (step S642). Then, the segment data set in a predetermined register (for example, E register) is output from the output port 3 (see FIG. 34). In other words, when the blinking switching flag is “1”, it indicates “turned off” at the time of blinking, and therefore, the segment data (LED segment signal) output from the output port 3 is data indicating “no light”. Also, digit data (LED digit signal) for turning on the digit set in the D register is output from the output port 4 (see FIG. 34) (step S644), and the blinking shown in FIG. The display process ends.

  If the determination result in step S638 is NO (carry flag value is 1) or the determination result in step S640 is NO (flashing switch flag value is 0), the process immediately proceeds to step S644. Then, the segment data set in the predetermined register is output from the output port 3, and the blinking display process shown in FIG.

  Here, in the past, it was impossible to know the proportion of the advantageous section in the whole game, and further, by checking the actual advantageous section ratio, whether it was far from the design value of the proportion of the advantageous section, etc. I couldn't judge. Therefore, as described above, first, identification information (abbreviation (see FIG. 8C)) indicating the contents to be displayed is used as the first digit (upper digit of the identifier display unit ID) and the second digit of the role monitor 103. The third digit (ratio) is displayed in the digit (the lower digit of the identifier display part ID) and the information indicating the ratio (advantageous period ratio, medium period linkage ratio, middle period role ratio, cumulative linkage ratio, cumulative role ratio) It can be displayed in the upper digit of the display unit RA) and the fourth digit (the lower digit of the ratio display unit RA). If the stay ratio of the advantageous section calculated by the calculation means such as the ratio calculation process of FIG. 46 and the ratio calculation execution process of FIG. 47 described above is equal to or greater than a specific value, the blinking display process shown in FIG. 50 is performed. By performing, the lighting control is performed on the third digit and the fourth digit in a blinking manner.

  In addition, there is a counting means for counting the number of games (for example, a running firewood number counter of the RWM address F26D in FIG. 38), and if this counting means does not exceed the first value (175000), the stay in the advantageous section When displaying the ratio, lighting control is performed on the first digit and the second digit in a blinking manner. In this way, it is possible to easily confirm the stay ratio of the actual advantageous section by calculating the stay ratio of the advantageous section and changing the lighting mode based on the calculation result.

  With the above configuration, it is easy to identify whether the value is abnormal or not when the staff of the game hall, on-site inspectors, etc. visually observe the ratio of the advantageous section output to the ratio monitor 103. be able to.

<Explanation of route from normal section to ART>
In the slot machine 10 that performs the above-described control, an example of a route (route) from the normal section (non-RT) to the advantageous section “ART in progress” (RT1) will be described with reference to FIG. First, when a game is started from a normal section which is an initial state and a non-RT state ((a) in FIG. 51), any of winning numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) is won, and an advantageous section When the winning lottery is selected for the transition lottery, the advantageous section “highly probable” is shifted to. However, the lottery state remains non-RT ((a) in the figure). In this state, if a bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won, the lottery state shifts to RT3. It shifts to “High accuracy middle bonus” ((c) in the figure).

  When the bonus game ends, the game section returns to the advantageous section “high probability” again, but the lottery state shifts to RT2 ((D) in the figure). Here, in RT2, since the winning lottery table of FIG. 22 is used, the winning number 19 (re-game-H) can be determined. When re-game-H is elected, it shifts to the advantageous section "During ART". When the symbol combinations corresponding to re-game 09 or 12 are prepared, the lottery state shifts to RT1 ((e) in the figure).

  Next, as a route different from the above-mentioned route, there is a route to win a bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) before winning a chance in the normal section. Specifically, in the normal section and the non-RT state ((a) in FIG. 51), when the bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won, the lottery state is changed to RT3. Transition. However, the game section remains the normal section ((f) in the figure). When the bonus game ends, the lottery state shifts to RT2 while maintaining the normal section ((ki) in the figure). At this time, if a symbol combination corresponding to any of SB, replay 03 or 04 or winning prizes 06 to 08 is prepared, the lottery state falls to non-RT ((a) in the figure), but it is won. If any of the numbers 20 to 22 (chances A to C) wins and the winning lot transition lottery wins the high-precision lottery, the lottery state remains at RT2 and shifts to the advantageous zone “high probability” (in FIG. D)). When the re-game-H is won and the symbol combinations corresponding to the re-game 09 or 12 are prepared, the advantageous section “ART is in progress” and the lottery state is shifted to RT 1 ((e) in the figure). .

  Here, the transition from (a) to (b) and the transition from (d) to (v) in FIG. 50 is conditional on the chances A to C and re-playing-H having no setting difference. Therefore, at first glance, even if the set value is changed, it seems that the probability of shifting to the advantageous section “During ART” cannot be adjusted. However, when considering the route from the normal section and non-RT state to the advantageous section “ART in progress” and RT1, first, in FIG. 50, (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e In the route of (), the winning of a bonus combination that can give a setting difference when transitioning from (b) to (c) is also a condition. In other words, the transition probability to RT2 can be made different depending on the winning probability of the bonus combination. As a result, by adjusting the winning probabilities of bonus combinations (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) according to the set value, the probability from (a) to (e) is adjusted. can do.

  Further, in FIG. 50, in the route of (A) → (F) → (G) → (D) → (E), a setting difference can be given when shifting from (A) to (F). Winning a bonus role is a condition. In other words, the transition probability to RT2 can be made different depending on the winning probability of the bonus combination. As a result, even if the bonus combination (for example, 1BB-C, 1BB-D, 1BB-E, 1BB-F) is won before changing to the advantageous section, by changing the set value, The probability of reaching (e) can be adjusted.

<< Description of control processing in sub-control means >>
Next, the contents of the sign effect lottery process executed by the effect lottery means 212 of the sub-control means 200 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sign effect lottery process is a process for determining the content of the sign effect using the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 44. Note that the winning feature winning numbers and production group numbers described in the explanations of FIGS. 52 to 54 and FIGS. 52 to 54 are only specific numbers for the sake of simplicity. Needless to say, it can be applied even with other prize winning numbers and production group numbers.

  First, the effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the precursor effect flag stored in the RWM of the sub-control means 200 is turned on (step Ss10). The sign effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not the sign effect is currently being executed. When the sign effect flag is on, it indicates that the sign effect is being performed, and the sign effect flag is off. When it is, it indicates that it is not a precursor. When the sign effect flag is off, the determination result in step Ss10 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the value of the feature winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 2 or not. (Step Ss12).

  If the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 2, the determination result in step Ss12 is NO, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning winning combination number is 0 ( Step Ss14). When the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 0, the determination result in step Ss14 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control unit 100 is 0, the determination result in step Ss14 is YES, and then the effect lottery unit 212 transmits from the main control unit 100. It is determined whether or not the value of the rendered effect group number is 25 (step Ss16). If the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is not 25, the determination result in step Ss16 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the production group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 25, the winning number is determined to be 35 in the role lottery in the main control means 100. In this case, the determination result in step Ss16 is YES, and the effect lottery means 212 performs a sign effect execution lottery that determines whether or not to execute the sign effect (step Ss18).

  In the determination process of step Ss12 described above, if the value of the winning combination winning number transmitted from the main control unit 100 is 2, the determination result is YES, and the effect lottery unit 212 then displays the main control unit. It is determined whether or not the value of the effect group number transmitted from 100 is 24 or 25 (step Ss20). If the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is neither 24 nor 25, the determination result in step Ss20 is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 performs the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. Exit. On the other hand, when the value of the effect group number transmitted from the main control means 100 is 24 or 25, the winning number is determined to be 65 or 66 in the role lottery in the main control means 100. In this case, the determination result in step Ss20 is YES, and the effect lottery means 212 performs the sign effect execution lottery in step Ss18. Here, the winning probabilities of the prelude effect execution lottery may be constant regardless of the values of the winning feature winning numbers and the effect group numbers, or may be different depending on these values.

  When the sign production execution lottery of step Ss20 is performed, the production lottery means 212 next determines whether or not the sign production execution lottery has been won (step Ss22). The precursor effect flag is turned on (step Ss24). On the other hand, if it is not won, the determination result is NO, and the effect lottery means 212 ends the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. When the sign effect flag is turned on in the process of step Ss24, the effect lottery means 212 next refers to the sign type lottery table shown in FIG. The sign type lottery corresponding to the value) is performed (step Ss26).

  Next, the production lottery means 212 refers to the precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 40B, and determines the length of the precursor production (the number of precursor games G) according to the precursor type determined by the precursor type lottery. (Step Ss28). Further, the effect lottery means 212 refers to the precursor scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 40C, and determines the content of the scenario according to the precursor type and the value of the determined precursor game number G (step Ss30). . Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the determined precursor game number G (step Ss32). In the determination process of step Ss10 described above, if the indication effect flag is on, the determination result is YES and step Ss32 is immediately performed.

  Next, the effect lottery means 212 generates an effect pattern lottery table corresponding to the effect category corresponding to the current number of remaining games in the scenario determined by the process of step Ss30 among the various effect pattern lottery tables shown in FIG. Referring to the effect pattern lottery (step Ss34). In this effect pattern lottery, one effect pattern is determined according to the winning state of the bonus combination, the type of winning combination, and the like. Here, if the number of precursor games G is 4, the number of remaining games is 5, if the number of precursor games G is 3, the number of remaining games is 4, and if the number of precursor games G is 2, the remaining games If the number is 3, and the value of the precursor game number G is 1, it means that the number of remaining games is 2, and if the value of the predictor game number G is 0, the number of remaining games is 1.

  Next, the effect lottery means 212 performs the effect content lottery with reference to the effect content lottery table corresponding to the effect pattern determined by the process of step Ss34 among the various effect content lottery tables shown in FIGS. (Step Ss36). In the effect content lottery, one effect content is determined according to the winning state of the bonus combination, the type of the winning combination, and the like. The effect lottery means 212 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number G has become 0 (step Ss38). If the value of the precursor game number G has become 0, the determination result is YES. Then, the sign effect flag is turned off (step Ss38), and the sign effect lottery process shown in FIG. 52 is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the precursor game number G does not become 0 in the determination process of step Ss38, the determination result is NO, and the precursor effect lottery process shown in FIG. 52 is performed without performing the process of step Ss38. finish. The sign effect is executed according to the effect content determined by the lottery process described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, description will be given of the contents of the effect that is executed when the above-mentioned precursor effect is performed after the bonus combination is won and then the bonus combination is won. Here, FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of effects executed when a bonus combination is won during the normal section and then the bonus combination is won. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of effects executed when a bonus combination is won in an advantageous section and the bonus combination is won thereafter.

  First, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined in the role lottery during the normal section, and the winning effect execution lottery in step Ss18 of FIG. 52 is won, referring to the various effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. The content is determined. Here, as is clear from the precursor type lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (a), when the winning number 65 is determined, either the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is selected. When the number 66 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected. Further, as described above, when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section, the “special route” that leads to the advantageous section through the standby section is followed.

  Based on the above, the flow of the production from when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined until the bonus combination is won will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section and the foreplay effect of the precursor type 1 is executed, it is determined that the transition to the advantageous section is made (substantially, the transition is made during ART). However, since the transition from the normal section to the standby section first, the advantageous section LED does not light up. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign production by the sign type 1 is finished, a special bonus prize production (hereinafter also referred to as “premier bonus production”. In FIG. 53, the characters “Special Epode” are displayed. ) Is executed. Further, the main control means 100 lights the advantageous section LED from when the bonus combination is won until the medal insertion for starting the next game becomes possible.

  Next, even when the winning number 65 is determined during the normal section and the precursor type 2 is produced, the advantageous section LED does not light until the bonus combination is won because the transition from the normal section to the standby section is made. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign production by the sign type 2 is finished, the special bonus winning effect is executed as in the case where the sign production of the sign type 1 is performed. Further, the main control means 100 lights the advantageous section LED from when the bonus combination is won until the medal insertion for starting the next game becomes possible. Thereby, for example, the staff of the game hall can quickly recognize that the next game will shift to the advantageous section, and can take measures such as replenishing medals before the advantageous section becomes “ART in progress”. .

  On the other hand, in the case where the winning number 66 is determined and the foreplay effect of the sign type 2 is executed, since the winning section 66 is not determined and the advantageous section LED is not determined, the advantageous section LED does not light up. Then, when the bonus combination is won after the sign type 2 by the sign type 2 is finished, an effect at the time of normal bonus winning (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal bonus effect. In FIG. 53, a character image is displayed) is executed. Is done. Moreover, even if the bonus combination is won, naturally, the advantageous section LED does not light up.

  As described above, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined in the normal section, if the precursor type 2 of the precursor effect is executed, the advantageous section LED is not lit until at least the bonus combination wins. . For this reason, the player cannot determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section while the sign type 2 precursor effect is being performed, so the player is not allowed to move to the advantageous section until the bonus combination is won. Can maintain a sense of expectation. Furthermore, the player who did not notice lighting of the advantageous section LED by executing different effects depending on whether the advantageous section LED is lit or not when the bonus combination is won as an effect at the time of winning a prize. In addition, it is possible to notify whether or not the bonus game shifts to the advantageous section by the effect by the effect image or the like.

  Next, when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined by the lottery during the advantageous section, if it is determined to execute the precursor effect, the winning number 65 is determined as in the normal section. Either the precursor type 1 or the precursor type 2 is selected, but if the winning number 66 is determined, the precursor type 2 is always selected. However, since it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section LED is already lit.

  Based on the above, the flow of the production from when the winning number 65 or 66 is determined until the bonus combination is won will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the winning number 65 is determined during the advantageous section (for example, during the high accuracy of the gasses) and the precursor effect of the precursor type 1 is executed, if the bonus combination wins after the end of the precursor effect, Run.

  On the other hand, when the winning number 65 is determined during the advantageous section (for example, during the high accuracy of the gasses) and the precursor type 2 is performed, and when the winning number 66 is determined and the precursor type 2 is detected When the effect is executed, if the bonus combination is won after the sign effect, the normal bonus effect described above is executed in any case. However, unlike the normal bonus effect shown in FIG. 53, the next notice effect is performed during the normal bonus effect, and then develops into a continuous effect. If the winning number 65 has been determined, the end of the continuous performance is a victory (the effect of enhancing the expectation for the transition to ART is performed), and if the winning number 66 has been determined, the continuous performance Will be defeated (the effect of denying the transition to ART will be performed).

<Description of production in the ending state>
Referring to FIG. 28, as described in the transition control of the game section in the present embodiment, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and during ART (game state number 5), the image display device 70 When the production shown in 55 (a) is started and one of the winning numbers 22 to 29 (push order bells 1 to 6) is determined, the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 01 or winning 02 are aligned is notified. (See (b) in the figure). Then, when the number of games executed during ART reaches 50 games, the routine again shifts to the normal section. However, if the game shifts from ART to the special zone (game state number 6) and wins the extra lottery in that state, the number of games that can stay during the ART is added ((c in the figure) )reference).

  In this way, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section continues to stay in the advantageous section and becomes 1470 games, the ending state (game state number 10) is entered and the ending effect is started (in the figure). (See (d)). When the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the ending screen is displayed (see (e) in the figure), and then the normal section is started and the normal production is started (in the figure). (Refer to (f)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the contents of the effect when the bonus combination is won during the ending effect will be described. When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1470 games and an ending effect is being performed (see (a) in FIG. 56), if the bonus combination is won, the ending effect continues and the image display device 70 continues. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning bonus combination is displayed in the lower right of the screen to notify the player of the type of the bonus combination that has been won (see (b) in the figure). On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won during the normal section, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the symbol combination corresponding to the selected bonus combination is conspicuous in the center of the screen of the image display device 70. May be displayed.

  As a result, when a bonus combination won by the player is won, a bonus game is started (see (c) in the figure). At this time, if the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 before the bonus game ends, the above-mentioned ending screen is displayed (see (d) in the figure), and the routine shifts to the normal section. However, the ending screen displayed on the image display device 70 continues to be displayed as it is, and when the bonus game ends, the normal effect starts from the next game (see (f) in the figure). In this way, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games during the bonus game, the ending effect is continued until the bonus game ends without ending the ending effect at that time. You can taste the finish. Further, during the bonus game, for example, the ending effect is not switched to the effect during the bonus game, so there is no possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the effect.

  In addition, when the bonus combination is won during the ending production and the bonus game is started (see (c) in the figure), and the bonus game ends before the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, The ending effect is continued even after the bonus game ends (see (e) in the figure). When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the ending screen is displayed (see (e) in the figure), then the normal section is started and the normal production starts ((f) in the figure). reference).

  Note that the ending effect described above may be a so-called movie effect. In this case, the time for the ending effect (movie effect) is such that even if the game is played in the shortest time (4.1 seconds), the movie can be viewed to the end before reaching 1500 games. Preferably it is. If the 1500-game is not reached even after the movie presentation is finished, the movie presentation may be repeatedly executed from the beginning or from a predetermined position, or may be stopped at the last scene of the movie presentation. Also good.

[Modification]
The following configuration may be employed for the slot machine 10 described above.
(1) When the lottery status is non-RT, there is a high probability of losing in the role lottery, and basically there will be no stay in the ART (however, if the player did not follow the notified push order) Therefore, the combined winning probability of all re-game players in non-RT may be increased as the set value increases. Moreover, you may make the winning probability of a specific small role high, so that a setting value becomes high. As this specific small role, for example, in this embodiment, a common bell B with a winning number 31 (winning / replay winning number 31) and a common three bell B with a winning number 33 (winning / replay winning number 33) And the watermelon B with the winning number 35 (winning / replay winning number 35) corresponds to this. Further, the combined winning probability of all the re-game players in a specific RT state may be set to be lower as the setting is higher. For example, in the RT1 role lottery table shown in FIG. 20 and the RT2 role lottery table shown in FIG. 22 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the replay B of the winning number 18 (winning / replay winning number 18) is the set value. The higher the value is, the lower it is, and the winning probabilities of other replaying actors do not vary according to the set value. Therefore, the combined winning probabilities (hereinafter also referred to as “replay winning probabilities”) of all replaying players are: The higher the set value is, the lower it is.

  In conventional slot machines, the probability of winning an AT lottery according to the setting value and the AT's initial number of games when winning are changed to change the play rate (ease of paying out medals) for each setting value. It was. However, if the probability of shifting during ART according to the set value as in this embodiment or the initial number of games of ART is not changed, the winning probability of small roles and bonus roles will be changed according to the set value, It is necessary to change the play rate for each set value only by changing the replay winning probability. That is, also in this embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability of the small role that can be won regardless of the skill of the player so that the number of payouts such as the common bell B is large so that the payout rate becomes higher. ing.

  Thereby, the payout rate for each set value can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved. Even if the initial number of games of ART is the same, the number of medals to be paid out increases as the setting is higher. If the replay winning probability during RT1 is set to be higher as the setting is higher, the payout rate during ART when the setting is higher will be excessively high. At least the replay winning probability during RT1 is set to be lower as the setting is higher.

  Incidentally, during the ART when the setting is high even if the replay win probability is not changed according to the setting value (constant), and the loss probability is changed according to the setting value (the higher the setting is, the higher the loss probability is). In this case, the set value is easily estimated (in this case, it is estimated by counting the symbol combinations that are aligned only when there is a loss). It is not optimal).

  In addition, the winning probability of the push order bell and push order replay is not changed according to the set value. This is because if the win probability is changed according to the set value for the push order bell or the push order replay, there is a problem that it is easy or difficult to shift to non-RT according to the set value.

(2) If any of the winning numbers 20 to 22 (chance points A to C) is determined in the role lottery during the normal section, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. In this advantageous section transition lottery, A result of lottery winning may be obtained. And when it becomes lost, it stays in a normal area continuously. Further, when the ART lottery is won, it may be possible to shift from the next game to the ART. However, in this case, in order to prevent medals from being excessively paid out to the player, in order to prevent transition to ART during the normal section and the lottery state is RT1, In other words, it is desirable that the ART lottery is won in the normal section and in the non-RT state, and that it is not during the ART and does not become RT1 except that the bonus combination is won. In other words, if the number of ART games is digested while in ART and RT1, the normal section and RT1 are reached, but in this state, the ART lottery is not won, or the normal section and non-priority are won before winning the ART lottery. It is desirable to move to RT.

  In order to do so, the probability of shifting to non-RT at the time of RT1 should be higher than the probability of shifting to ART. For example, when the transition is made to RT1 during the normal section, the combination winning probability of push order replays 1 to 6 in which the condition devices of replays 03 and 04 are activated at RT1 is 1 / 7.31, replay 03 or replay 04 1 / 8.77 for the probability of the combination of symbols, and 1 / 8.40 for the winning combination of push order bells 1 to 6 (the role of transition to non-RT) in which the condition devices for winning 06 to winning 08 operate. The probability that any symbol combination from 06 to winning prize 08 is set to 1 / 12.60. Further, the combined winning probability of the chance items A to C in RT1 is set to 1/60.

  In this way, when it is in the normal section and is RT1, the combined winning probability (probability of becoming an ART lottery winning) of the chance items A to C is made lower than the probability of shifting from RT1 to non-RT, so It becomes easier to fall to RT, and after winning the bonus combination, it can be set to RT1 and ART. For example, when determining the number of initial ART games (when always setting the same initial number of games), even when an irregular event such as a transition to ART is performed again in the normal section and the lottery state is RT1 Then, it is more likely that the player proceeds in a direction that is unfavorable for the player (for example, the initial number of ART games is set small). In the modified example, the initial number of ART games is not determined in consideration of irregular events, but irregular events are prevented from occurring frequently in the first place.

(3) To set the winning probability of the falling lottery to fall from the advantageous section to the normal section so that at least one “all navigation” is performed during the advantageous section, for example, staying in the normal section and non-RT The combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6 is 1 / 8.40, and the single winning probability of replay A1 is 1 /. 831. In addition, the winning probability of the falling lottery to the normal section in the advantageous section is 1 /. 831 × 1/2 = 1 / 16.62. In this way, by setting the probability of winning the falling lottery to the normal section lower than the combined winning probability of the push order bells 1 to 6, it is possible to perform “all navigation” at least once during the advantageous section Sexuality can be increased. It is more preferable that the single winning probability of Replay A1 is set to be lower than the combined winning probability of push order bells 1 to 6.

(4) When the upper limit of the number of games that can be executed in the advantageous section is determined to be 1500 games, the ending state (game state number 10) in FIG. 28 is changed to the normal section so as not to exceed this upper limit. May be made when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1200G. In this case, the condition for transitioning from any of the game state numbers 1 to 9 to the ending state (in the figure, arrow S) may be defined as when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes 1170G.

  In this way, even when the number of games in the advantageous section is not specified to exceed 1500 games, when determining whether or not to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section, first, in the advantageous section It is preferable to determine whether the number of games has reached 1500 games. Then, when it is determined that the game is not 1500 games, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the next advantageous section has reached 1200 games. To do.

(5) As an ending effect, for example, after the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1470 games, 8 games (40 seconds), 8 games (40 seconds), 7 games (40 seconds), 7 games (40 seconds) A movie effect consisting of four sections may be performed. In the last seven game sections, a movie effect shorter than 4.1 seconds × 7 games = 28.7 seconds may be performed.

  In this case, for example, if the first section (8 games) is played in the minimum game time (4.1 seconds), the game ends in 4.1 × 8 = 32.8 seconds. It will take about 7 seconds to move. At this time, a telop “The movie will be skipped by the next operation” is displayed on the screen of the image display device having 70, and if the next operation is performed during this time, the movie production of the next section is started. You may do it. If the next operation is not performed when the above-described telop is displayed, the movie effect in the first section is executed to the end.

  That is, when the ending effects are configured by four movie effects A, B, C, and D, the player will visually recognize the first effects of A, B, C, and D, respectively. As a result, even a player who skips one movie effect confirms the necessary points, and can output an important part of the ending effect that the player wants to show to the player. In addition, although the ending effect for notifying the end of the advantageous section has been described as an example, not only the ending effect for notifying the end of the advantageous section, but also a special effect over a plurality of games in a specific state such as during a bonus game It can also be applied if you want to execute.

  Furthermore, in the last game of the advantageous section (1500 games reached), the total number of games in the advantageous section (or part of the advantageous section (for example, during ART)), the total number of acquired games (total number of payouts), etc. It is preferable to display the result on the image display device and execute the freeze effect. However, when the last game (1500 games reached) is in the bonus game or inside, the game including the freeze effect and the display of the game result described above is not executed, and the game in which the bonus game has ended (in the normal section) It is preferable to display the result of the game including the total number of games in the advantageous section, the total number obtained (total number of payouts), etc. on the image display device and execute the freeze effect.

(6) Even in the normal section, when the winning combination whose profit does not change depending on the pressing order is won, the pressing order may be notified.
(7) The winning probability of the promotion lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section may be 100% or 0%, but the predetermined winning probability is constant. However, if the winning combination that triggers the promotion lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “lottery trigger”) is different, an individual winning probability may be set for each winning combination.

(8) In the case where the lottery state fluctuates during the normal section, it is desirable not to use a winning combination that is likely to be won only in a specific lottery state as a transition lottery trigger to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the lottery state fluctuates during the advantageous section, a winning combination that may be won only in a specific lottery state may be used as a lottery trigger in the game state number transition lottery.
(9) Depending on the type of bonus that is won at the same time as the lottery opportunity, the transition may be made directly to the advantageous zone and to the advantageous zone via the standby zone.

(10) The waiting section is ended by winning the bonus combination, but may be ended before that. As an end condition in this case, for example, the standby section may be ended with a predetermined number of games after the standby section starts.
(11) The number of ART games can be added up to the first 1000 games after the transition to the advantageous section, and it is determined whether to continue the ART game every 20 games until reaching 1500 games thereafter. A loop lottery may be performed.
(12) Based on the state of the instructed flag (see FIG. 37) stored in the RWM address F022, it may be determined whether or not the advantageous section can be ended. That is, as one of the determination of the end of the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section can be ended if the value of the instructed flag is FFH, and it is determined that the end is impossible if it is 00H.

(13) An error control process may be executed when an empty error occurs. Here, the error control process is a part of the game progress main process and indicates a state waiting for an operation (error canceling operation) of the setting / reset switch 82c and the like. However, even when the error control process is being executed, the timer interrupt process is controlled to be executed. As described above, the timer of 4.1 seconds, which is the minimum game time, is timed by the timer interrupt process. By performing the timer interrupt process during the execution of the error control process, error control can be performed by the occurrence of an empty error. Even when the process is executed, 4.1 seconds (timer subtraction) are continuously performed.

  Conventionally, when an empty error occurs and the error control process is executed, the timer interrupt process also waits. Therefore, if an empty error occurs, the 4.1-second timer subtraction is also temporarily suspended, and an empty error occurs. After being released, the timer subtraction was resumed. For this reason, in the game after the occurrence of the empty error, a time of + α is required for the time elapsed until the empty error is canceled. However, in this embodiment, even during the error control process in which an empty error has occurred, the timer subtraction process of 4.1 seconds is performed, so that the game can be executed immediately after the empty error is released. . Thereby, compared with the case where the conventional empty error generate | occur | produced, the time until a game can be performed can be shortened. Although an empty error has been described as an example, the present invention can also be applied to other errors such as a medal clogging error.

(14) As an advantageous section counter of the RWM address (F024), “1500” is set before the advantageous section is started, and “1” is subtracted every time a game in the advantageous section is executed. When the counter reaches “0”, the advantageous section may be controlled to end. Further, at this time, when the ending effect becomes “30”, the advantageous section may be controlled to start.

(15) The winning number including the winning of the bonus combination as the winning combination, the winning number A where the advantageous segment shift lottery for shifting to the advantageous segment is performed, and the winning number including the winning of the bonus combination as the winning combination In addition, there is a winning number B for which an advantageous section transition lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is not performed, and a bonus combination is given when the winning number A is determined and when the winning number B is determined. As a production process until the production of the result indicating that it has been won, a common production process can be output, and if the winning number A is determined in the role lottery and the winning lottery is selected, a bonus The advantageous section lamp may be lit after the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the winning number A is determined and the advantageous section shift lottery is won, after the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, the effect is output in the first effect mode, and the winning number B is determined, An effect may be output in the second effect form after the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the “first effect mode” may be, for example, the premier bonus effect shown in FIG. 53, and the “second effect mode” may be, for example, the normal bonus shown in FIG. It may be something like a production.

  This is to notify immediately which winning number has been determined when there is a case where an advantageous section shift lottery is executed or an advantageous section shift lottery is not executed according to the determined winning number. In other words, since the player knows whether or not the advantageous section shift lottery has been executed based on the notified winning number, it does not occur that the player cannot have a sense of expectation in the game after the game. It is to make it.

  When such a configuration is adopted, the same effect may be selected even if different winning numbers are determined until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, and the bonus After the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been prepared, the advantageous interval lamp or the like is informed whether or not the winning zone transition lottery has been won, so it is thrilled until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is prepared and the third stop button is released. A feeling can be given.

(16) After satisfying the start condition of the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section (hereinafter also referred to as “the number of advantageous section games”) is updated as the game progresses. When the end condition is satisfied, predetermined information is set to an initial value (clear). The predetermined information includes at least information indicating an advantageous section game (for example, data such as RWM address F020 (game section flag) and F021 (game state number)) and an advantageous section game number (for example, RWM address F024). (Advantageous section counter) data). Further, the advantageous section end condition includes that the number of advantageous section games has reached a specific value (0), and a special effect (ending effect) suggesting that the number of advantageous section games is approaching the specific value. ) May be executed. Here, the special effect (ending effect) refers to an effect executed over a plurality of games. Further, when the first bonus combination is won during the normal section, the symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination won is displayed in the first mode, whereas the special effect (ending effect) in the advantageous section is displayed. When the first bonus combination is won during execution, the symbol combination corresponding to the selected first bonus combination is displayed in the second mode while executing the special effect.

  The “first mode” is a mode in which, for example, a symbol combination (for example, “7-7-7”) corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed slightly larger in the center of the screen of the image display device. In addition, the “second mode” is a mode in which a symbol combination (for example, “7-7-7”) corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed slightly smaller at the right end of the screen of the image display device, for example.

  If a bonus combination is won when a special effect is being executed, and an effect indicating that the bonus combination is won is executed, it becomes impossible to enjoy the special effect being executed. For this reason, in a situation where a special performance is being output, the above configuration is used in order to perform an effect that allows the user to be notified of the bonus combination while being able to enjoy the special performance. It may be adopted.

  With the above configuration, when a bonus combination is won during an ending production that suggests that the player is nearing the end condition of the advantageous section, the bonus combination is played in a manner that does not interfere with the ending production. By notifying the winning combination or the symbol combination of the bonus combination, it is possible to effectively show the ending effect while prompting the player to arrange the symbol combination of the bonus combination.

(17) In the transition diagram of the lottery state shown in FIG. 27, after the bonus game (1BB-A game, 1BB-B game to 1BB-F game) is completed, the process proceeds to RT2, and from RT2 to RT1 (more specifically, Migrating from other RTs such as RT3). Here, when the bonus combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed in the situation of RT1 and being in ART (gaming state number 5), the bonus game is executed on the condition. After the bonus game is completed, the game proceeds to RT2. (In this case, the lottery state transitions from RT1 → RT3 → 1BB-A game (or 1BB-B to F game) → RT2). At this time, the winning condition satisfying the transition condition from RT2 to RT1 when transitioning from RT2 to RT1, or the transition condition from RTX to RT1 when transitioning from RT2 to RTX (RT state other than RT1 and RT2) → RT1 If the player wins the game, the game may be added with respect to the number of games in the ART.

  Conventionally, it has been possible to execute an ART game extra lottery or the like under any conditions. On the other hand, it is desirable that the difference in the appearance due to the setting difference is based on the winning of the winning combination, and it is not desirable that the performance related to the instruction such as AT is different depending on the setting difference. For this reason, in a bonus game in which a winning combination having a setting difference and a bonus combination having a setting difference are won, the gaming machine is such that an extra lottery cannot be executed.

  Therefore, when the bonus combination is won during ART, the above-described configuration may be adopted so that an extra lottery regarding the number of games during ART can be executed. If such a configuration is adopted, for example, in the game in which the RT transition combination (for example, the replay C (replay-H) of the winning number 19 (winning / replaying winning number 19)) has been won is not being set in the ART. It is possible to give a bonus such as an extra number related to the number of games of the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

(18) After satisfying the advantageous section start condition, the number of advantageous section games is updated according to the progress of the game. When the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, predetermined information is initialized (cleared). To. The predetermined information includes at least information indicating an advantageous section game (for example, data such as RWM address F020 (game section flag) and F021 (game state number)) and an advantageous section game number (for example, RWM address F024). (Advantageous section counter) data). On the other hand, the predetermined information includes at least setting value data (for example, data of RWM address F000 (setting value data)) and information that can identify the RT state (for example, RWM address F005 (RT state number)). Data) and storage number data (for example, data of RWM address F010 (storage number display data)) are not included.

  Conventionally, for example, specifications that may cause thousands of medals to be paid out in a so-called “one blow” due to continuous (or continued) advantageous situations such as during ART have become mainstream. There was a risk that the heart would be beaten remarkably. Therefore, in order to make the game after the end of the advantageous section an appropriate game by initializing specific information based on the end of the advantageous section and not initializing predetermined information. It may be adopted.

  In the above configuration, in order to prevent a large number of balls from being obtained in a series of consecutive games, information relating to advantageous sections is initialized, while data such as set value data and stored number data are not initialized. Thus, the normal game (the game in the normal section) that is executed after the advantageous section ends can be normally executed.

(19) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section A transition lottery means, and a game medium discharge means for discharging a bet and / or stored game media when a clearing operation is performed. You may make it alert | report that it transfers to an effective area before operation becomes possible.

  Here, “notification of operation mode” includes notification of the pressing order of the stop switch and notification of the operation timing of the stop switch by showing a so-called symbol to be pressed (the same applies hereinafter). The “game medium” is not limited to a medal, and may be a game ball (a so-called pachinko ball). Moreover, the information which shows the value recorded on recording media, such as a magnetic card, a non-contact-type IC card, or a coin incorporating an IC chip, may be sufficient. Further, the “clearing operation” is an operation performed for discharging the bet and / or the stored game media, and corresponds to, for example, an operation of a clearing switch provided in the slot machine.

  Even if a conventional slot machine wins a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery”) that determines whether or not to start an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch, In most cases, the fact that the player has won the AT lottery is triggered by the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played since the game that has won the AT lottery. This is because it was thought that the player's sense of expectation for the AT game cannot be given for a long period of time if the game was won in the AT lottery. For this reason, some players who have won the AT lottery have stopped playing the game without noticing that (before notifying that they have won the AT lottery). . In particular, the trend was seen by beginners. On the other hand, there are those who are not willing to win the AT lottery with their own power from the end, and find a slot machine that has already won the AT lottery by playing only a predetermined number of games and play a game. Under these circumstances, the person who played the game when winning the AT lottery (the person who won the AT lottery) did not play the AT game, and a third party who did not contribute to the AT lottery There was a voice that it might be absurd to play games.

  Therefore, there is less risk that the subsequent game will be stopped without noticing that the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section in which the order of pressing the stop switch (and / or operation timing) can be notified is determined. In order to achieve this, it is conceivable to employ the above-described configuration (19).

  According to the configuration of (19) described above, when it is determined to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the transition to the effective section is notified before the clearing operation becomes possible. It is possible to reduce the possibility of stopping the game without noticing the fact. This is because most of the players check whether or not the stored game media remain when the game is stopped, and perform the clearing operation when the game media remain. Therefore, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, when the liquidation operation is attempted to stop the game, the transition to the advantageous section is made by notifying the fact before the liquidation operation becomes possible. The possibility of noticing the game becomes high and the possibility of stopping the subsequent game can be reduced despite the fact that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

  Further, in the configuration of (19) described above, a storage number display means for displaying the number of storages of the game medium by a lighting mode of a plurality of light emitters is provided, and the storage number display of the light emitters of the storage number display means. It is informed that a transition to an advantageous section is made by turning on a light-emitting body that is not used for the first time.

  Here, as the “reserved number display means”, an 8-segment display (display configured with seven segments a to g for displaying alphanumeric characters and one segment DP for displaying dots (decimal points)), etc. In this case, the segment DP corresponds to “a luminous body that is not used for displaying the number of stored”.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is notified that the transition to the advantageous section is determined by the light emitter that is not used for displaying the number of storages in the storage number display means. Thereby, when the display of the storage number display means is checked to confirm whether or not the game medium stored by the player remains, it is also visually confirmed whether or not it is informed that the player will shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game is stopped without noticing that it shifts to the advantageous section. Further, since it is notified that the advantageous section is shifted using the already provided display means, it is not necessary to newly provide a dedicated notification means, so the cost does not increase.

(20) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be notified, and an amount of game media according to the game result from the stored game media A payout means for paying out, and a game section control means for controlling the transition between the normal section and the advantageous section, and by the game performed until the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section again. The expected amount of game media to be paid out may be set to be equal to or less than half of the allowable storage amount of game media in the payout means.

  Conventional slot machines are generally equipped with a so-called hopper (device for paying out stored medals) and store medals inserted from the outside. , Paying out the number of medals corresponding to the winning small role. Conventionally, when there are no medals stored in the hopper, the slot machine detects this and notifies that an empty error (hereinafter also referred to as “CA error”) has occurred. Thereby, when the staff of the game hall notices the occurrence of the CA error, the hopper is replenished with medals. However, in general, since the number of staff is small relative to the number of slot machines installed in the amusement hall, the replenishment work of medals every time a CA error occurs is harsh for the staff of the amusement hall. It was. Of course, if the number of medals that can be stored in the hopper's medal storage unit is large, the frequency of occurrence of CA errors can be reduced. However, since the hopper is installed inside the slot machine, the size of the medal storage unit is increased. There is also a limit to increasing the allowable amount of medals.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable that the hopper's medal storage part is filled at the start of the game hall business. For example, in a state where the so-called bonus game or the above-described AT game is not performed, the player plays the game. As a result, the number of medals in the medal storage unit increases, and there is a possibility that a medal full error indicating that the medal allowable amount of the medal storage unit has been greatly exceeded soon occurs. As a result, if a medal full error occurs at the same time after the game hall starts operating, the staff of the game hall will be busy with the medal collection work to reduce the medals in the medal storage section. Also, depending on the number of staff at the game hall, even if a CA error occurs, the medal replenishment operation may not be performed immediately. In such a case, the player can play the game again after the CA error occurs. Since it will wait for a long time until it becomes possible, if the CA error occurs frequently, the player's irritation will increase. Also, during AT games that can inform the order of pressing the stop switch (and / or the operation timing), it is an advantageous state that a small role is easy to win (that is, the frequency at which medals are paid out is high). It can be said that this is a situation in which the interest of the player is increasing. Therefore, if a CA error frequently occurs in such a situation, the player is frequently interrupted, and there is a possibility that the player's irritation is further increased.

  In view of this, it is conceivable to employ the above-described configuration (20) so as to reduce the work burden associated with the game media stored in the slot machine.

  According to the configuration of (20) described above, for example, if a half of the amount of game media allowed in the payout means is replenished to the payout means at the start of business at the game hall, Even if it shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game medium stored in the payout means is exhausted due to the game played in the advantageous section. As a result, it is less likely that game media need to be replenished even if the zone has shifted to an advantageous section immediately after the start of business, so the work load related to the game media stored in the slot machine is reduced. be able to. In addition, even if you have not shifted to an advantageous section for a while after starting business, the game media stored in the payout means can be recovered in a short time because there is a sufficient amount of game media stored in the payout means Therefore, it is possible to reduce the work burden related to the game media stored in the slot machine.

  In the configuration of (20) described above, the gaming section control means performs an advantageous section transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is determined as follows: It may be set so as not to exceed the rate of winning once when a game is played using all of the same amount of game medium as the allowable storage amount of the payout means.

  According to the configuration described above, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set so as not to exceed the ratio of winning once when a game is played using all the same amount of game medium as the allowable storage amount of the payout means. Therefore, even if the game medium stored in the payout means is exhausted when the advantageous section ends, the amount of game media stored in the payout means until the next transition to the advantageous section However, there is a high possibility that the allowable storage amount has been reached or is approaching the allowable storage amount. For this reason, the possibility that the game medium stored in the payout means will be exhausted during the next advantageous section can be reduced, so that the possibility of requiring replenishment of the game medium is reduced, and the slot machine stores the game medium. The burden of work related to the played game media can be reduced.

(21) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be notified, a lottery means for performing lottery, and a predetermined end condition in the advantageous section A game section control means for ending the advantageous section based on the operation of the stop switch that provides an advantageous game result when the lottery means achieves a predetermined lottery result in the advantageous section. If the mode has never been notified, the advantageous section may not be terminated even if the predetermined termination condition is satisfied.

  Here, the “predetermined lottery result” corresponds to, for example, a winning combination (such as “Bell group” in Patent Document 1) with different payout numbers depending on the pressing order.

  Some conventional slot machines end an AT game when a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of stop switches. In such a slot machine, if the player to be notified is not elected once after the AT game starts due to bad luck of the player and before a predetermined number of games are played, an advantageous push order is The AT game was terminated even when it was never notified. However, it can be said that it is too severe for the player to end the AT game without giving the player the benefit even though the AT game is started. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, it is conceivable that the number of games to be used as an AT game end condition is increased to increase the possibility that a notification target role is won during an AT game. However, if the number of games that are the end condition of AT games is increased too much considering the players who are unlucky, the number of winning of the role to be notified exceeds the appropriate category in most players, and AT Since there may be a case where the number of medals to be paid out becomes too large during the game, there is a risk that the player's gambling will be excessively beaten.

  Therefore, as an AT game end condition, for example, when the number of medals paid out during an AT game reaches a predetermined number (payout number management), the number of medals inserted during an AT game is paid out. Conditions such as when the difference from the number of medals has reached a predetermined value (difference number management), or when the number of times of notification of an advantageous pressing order has reached a predetermined number, can be considered. However, if any of these end conditions is adopted, if the situation where the subject to be notified is not won during AT game, the AT game may not end indefinitely. There is.

  Therefore, in order to avoid a situation in which no benefit is obtained during the advantageous section despite the transition to the advantageous section, it is conceivable to employ the configuration (21) described above.

  According to the configuration of (21) described above, the advantageous section does not end unless an advantageous push order is notified at least once during the advantageous section, so that the player cannot receive any benefit during the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to avoid denying the significance of the existence of an advantageous section.

  Further, in the configuration of (21) described above, the game section control means includes special game execution means for performing a special game when a special game result is obtained due to a specific lottery result in the lottery means, When the special game is performed in the advantageous section, the operation mode (push order and / or operation timing) of the stop switch that provides an advantageous game result when the lottery means achieves a predetermined lottery result in the advantageous section. ) May be terminated based on the fact that the predetermined termination condition is satisfied even if the notification is not reported once.

  Here, the “specific lottery result” corresponds to, for example, winning a so-called bonus combination in a combination lottery, and the “special game result” corresponds to winning a bonus combination. In addition, a so-called bonus game corresponds to the “special game”.

  According to the configuration described above, when a special game is played during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is determined based on the fact that the predetermined end condition is satisfied even if the advantageous pushing order is not notified in the advantageous section. finish. In this case, since the player is benefited by the special game during the advantageous section, it is possible to avoid a situation where no benefit is obtained during the advantageous section. In addition, since a large amount of medals are paid out during the bonus game, if the advantageous section is not terminated in order to perform one advantageous pushing order until such time, the player's interest is reduced. Such a situation can be avoided.

(22) A normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the push switch operation mode can be reported, a counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section, A game section control means for making a transition from the advantageous section to the normal section when the count value reaches a predetermined value during the section, wherein the gaming section control means is in the middle of a special game being performed in the advantageous section When the count value reaches a predetermined value, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed while continuing the special game. For example, a bonus game corresponds to the “special game”.

  In the conventional slot machine, there is no restriction on the continuation (for example, addition) of the AT game that can notify the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch. There was an opinion that an excessive number of medals may be paid out to AT games, and that the player's gambling feelings are being greatly revered.

  Therefore, the above-described configuration (22) is adopted so that the amount of game media given during the advantageous section in which the stop switch push order (and / or operation timing) can be notified can be moderately suppressed. It is possible.

  According to the configuration of (22) described above, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, so that it is given in one advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the amount of game media to an appropriate value, and it can be avoided that the player's gambling joy is significantly increased. Further, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value during the execution of the special game, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, but the special game is continuously performed. For this reason, the special game can be played to the end even after the transition to the normal section, so there is no possibility of giving the player a sense of unnecessary loss.

  In addition, in the configuration of (22) described above, when the count value reaches a predetermined value in the advantageous section, if the special game is not performed, the game is set in a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed. If the special game is being performed when the count value reaches a predetermined value, a configuration as shown in (22 ′) may be provided that includes freeze control means that does not set the freeze state.

  According to the above-described configuration (22 '), when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, a freeze state is established. For this reason, for example, the number of games played during the advantageous section and the amount of game media granted during the advantageous section (for example, the number of medals, etc.) during the freezing state Information relating to the game can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information. On the other hand, when the special game is being performed when the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, the frozen state is not entered. As a result, the special game is not interrupted in the middle due to the freeze state, and there is no possibility of deteriorating the refreshing feeling when the player is playing the special game.

  Furthermore, in the configuration of (22 ') described above, the freeze control means may be in the freeze state when the special game ends. In such a configuration, when the special game is finished, it is in a frozen state. For example, when it is in the frozen state, the number of games executed during the special game or given during the special game is given. Information relating to the game played during the special game, such as the amount of game media that has been played, can be presented to the player, and the player can be given a margin for reliably grasping the presented information.

  In the middle of a special game, if the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, information related to the game performed in the advantageous section described above in the freeze state when the special game ends. It may be presented to the player. In addition, as information presented at this time, a value obtained by adding the number of games executed in the special game in the normal section to the number of games played in the advantageous section, or the amount of game media provided in the advantageous section In addition, a value obtained by adding the amount of game media provided in the special game during the normal section may be presented to the player.

(23) A specifying means for specifying any one of a plurality of setting values, and a lottery means for performing a lottery for determining a winning combination with a winning probability corresponding to the setting value specified by the specifying means. In the lottery state, a lottery subject to the lottery is divided into a plurality of small roles to which a game medium is given when winning, and a plurality of replays that can be played again without inserting the game medium when winning The winning combination of a re-competitor when the winning probability of a specific small role is different by at least two set values and the winning probability of a specific small role is set to a low value. The probability is set high, and the winning probability of the re-gamer when the winning probability of a specific small role is set high may be set low.

  In a conventional slot machine, whether or not to execute an AT game capable of informing the pressing order (and / or operation timing) of the stop switch is determined by AT lottery. The number of games that can be performed (initial number of games) is determined by lottery or the like. In addition, there are cases where the winning rate (ease of paying out medals) can be adjusted by changing the winning probability of the AT lottery described above and the determined initial number of games depending on the set value. Under these circumstances, in recent years, most of the slot machines installed in the amusement hall have been set to a low setting value, and there has been a complaint that it is difficult to win the AT lottery. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, the winning probability of the AT lottery and the determined initial number of games are not changed depending on the setting value, and only the winning probability of the small role, the re-playing role or the bonus role is set as the setting value. It is desirable to be able to adjust the payout rate by making it different accordingly.

  However, if the winning probability of the small role or re-gamer is increased as the setting value is higher as in the conventional case, the initial number of games does not change depending on the setting value, so the higher the setting value, the more medals are paid out during the AT game There was a possibility. However, if the initial number of games is set to be small, the player's willingness to play may be reduced.

  Therefore, in order to be able to adjust the rate at which game media are given by changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the possibility of an excessive amount of game media being given even at a high set value. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration (23) described above.

  According to the configuration of (23) described above, the winning probability of a specific small role is different between at least two set values, so that the payout rate can be adjusted by changing the set value. In addition, when the winning probability of a re-playing role is set to a high value when the winning probability of a specific small role is set low, and the setting value is set to a high winning probability of a specific small role Since the winning probability of the re-game player is set to be low, the possibility that an excessive amount of game media will be given can be reduced.

  Further, in the configuration of (23) described above, the re-games include push-order re-games having different symbol combinations when winning according to the press order of the stop switches, and the predetermined transition condition The lottery state control means for changing the lottery state according to the lottery means, the lottery means determines the winning combination with the current lottery state and the winning probability corresponding to the set value specified by the designation means, the lottery state transition means, In a specific lottery state, if a specific push order re-gamer is determined to be a winning combination, and the symbol combination at the time of winning is a specific symbol combination, the lottery state is changed from the specific lottery state to another lottery state Then, the winning probability of the specific push order re-gamer in the specific lottery state may not be different for each set value.

  According to the above-described configuration, the winning probability of the specific push order re-gamer in the specific lottery state is not changed according to the set value. Since the ease of shifting to the lottery state is constant, the change in the lottery state can be prevented from affecting the payout rate according to the change in the set value.

(24) a normal section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which the operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a game section control means for controlling transition between the normal section and the advantageous section; A lottery means for performing a lottery to determine a winning combination from among a plurality of combinations, and when the special combination is determined to be a winning combination by the lottery means in an advantageous section, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state, The game section control means performs a transition lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the normal section when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination by the lottery means in the advantageous section, and the transition lottery is won May shift to a normal section, and the predetermined combination may be determined as a winning combination together with a special combination.

  Here, the “special role” is a bonus role (1BB-A), and the “favorable state” is RT2 that is more likely to win a re-playing role (re-playing-H (replay C)). It is.

  Among conventional slot machines, in a slot machine that determines whether or not to shift from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state by a transition lottery performed when a predetermined winning combination is won, an advantageous gaming state is achieved. When the player is aware that the player has won the above-mentioned predetermined winning combination, there is a risk that the interest and motivation of the player will be reduced.

  Therefore, in order to allow the player to play a game with a sense of expectation even when a winning combination that may shift from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state is determined, the above-described (24 ) May be adopted.

  According to the configuration of (24) described above, when a predetermined combination is won in the advantageous section, a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the normal section is performed, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to the normal section is performed. . Therefore, there is a possibility that if the predetermined combination is won, the advantageous section may be shifted to the normal section. If the predetermined combination is won only by itself, the predetermined combination will be won and the player will be notified about the transition of the game section. There is a risk of losing a sense of loss. However, if the predetermined role can be won at the same time as the special role, and if it is won at the same time, it will be possible to shift to an advantageous state, and the player will have an expectation for the advantageous state by winning the predetermined role. You can have a sense of superiority. Thereby, even if the predetermined combination is won, the player can play the game with expectation.

(25) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and an advantageous section notification means indicating whether or not the stop switch is an advantageous section And a lottery means for determining the lottery result relating to the winning combination, and an effect control means for controlling the production, and the lottery result by the lottery means includes a first lottery result including a special role and a first lottery result. And a second lottery result that includes the special role, and when the first lottery result is determined as an effect by the effect control means, and the second lottery result is determined. And when the first lottery result is determined in the normal section, there is a case where the same content is produced in the process up to the result production indicating that the special role has been won. Figure corresponding to role There is a case where the combination is shifted to the advantageous section after being stopped and displayed, and when the second lottery result is determined in the normal section, it is advantageous even after the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed. When the first lottery result is determined in the normal section and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed, and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the symbol corresponding to the special combination is not included. You may make it alert | report using the said advantageous area alerting | reporting means, after a combination is stopped and displayed.

  Here, the “advantageous operation mode” includes, for example, an operation mode in which a small role with the largest number of medal payouts is won when a plurality of small roles are won, and the winning probability of a predetermined winning role is high. An operation mode in which a symbol combination that can be shifted to a lottery state is stopped and displayed, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts to a lottery state in which the winning probability of a predetermined winning combination is reduced can be avoided, and the like (The same applies below). The “special combination” may be a so-called bonus combination.

  Recently, a player who played a game when AT gaming was allowed would stop the game before AT game started without noticing that, and other players would benefit from it. In order to prevent such a situation, it is required to notify the user using a lamp or the like when an AT game is permitted. However, if it is immediately notified whether or not an AT game is permitted in such a slot machine, it becomes clear whether or not the AT game is permitted by the notification, and a sense of expectation is expected in subsequent games. Could not have.

  Therefore, even if the lottery result does not shift to an advantageous gaming state, the above-described configuration is adopted so that the player can play a game with a sense of expectation even in a subsequent game. It is possible to do.

  According to the configuration of (25) described above, when the first lottery result is determined, there is a case of shifting to the advantageous section, and when the second lottery result is determined, there is no case of shifting to the advantageous section. However, there is a case where the same content is produced until the result production indicating that the special role is won. For this reason, the player can play a game with expectation for the transition to the advantageous section until the presence / absence of notification by the advantageous section notification means performed after the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is determined.

  Further, in the configuration of (25) described above, the effect control means is configured to shift to the advantageous section after the first lottery result is determined in the normal section and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed. , The symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, the first effect can be executed in the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, and the second lottery result is determined in the normal section, The second effect may be executable in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed.

  According to the configuration described above, after the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed, the first effect can be executed when the advantageous section is shifted to, and the second effect is executed when the advantageous combination is not shifted. Since it becomes possible, it can be recognized whether or not to shift to the advantageous section depending on the type of effect that can be executed.

(26) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and an advantageous section notification means indicating whether or not the stop switch is an advantageous section A lottery means for determining a lottery result relating to the winning combination, and the lottery result by the lottery means includes a lottery result different from the first lottery result including the predetermined role and the special role. And the second lottery result including the predetermined combination, and when the first lottery result is determined by the lottery means, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is determined regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. When the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined role can be displayed regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. When the first lottery result is determined by the selection means, it is possible to shift from the next game to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is shifted, before a predetermined operation for starting a game in the advantageous section is performed. When the advantageous section notifying means gives a notification and the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means in the normal section, it is possible to shift from the next game to the advantageous section. Before the predetermined operation for starting the game is performed, the advantageous section notification means notifies the third lottery result in the game in which the advantageous section starts by determining the second lottery result. If the third lottery result is determined in a game in which an advantageous section starts when the first lottery result is determined and the first lottery result is determined, the notification is performed. It may not be performed the lottery about the technique.

  Here, the “predetermined lottery regarding the notification game” includes, for example, a lottery regarding the start or end of an AT game (including a promotion lottery or a falling lottery of a gaming state), or a lottery regarding an execution period of an AT game (so-called extra lottery or loop) Including lottery).

  Conventionally, matters relating to AT games (for example, matters relating to the start or end of AT games, matters relating to the period of execution of AT games, matters relating to profits from AT games, etc.) (such a lottery is also referred to as “AT-related lottery”). )), Depending on the conditions under which AT-related lottery is performed, an unexpected profit may be given to the player by the player's intentional game operation. For example, if there is a slot machine that performs an AT-related lottery when a so-called bonus combination is won (inside the so-called bonus), the player intentionally after the bonus combination is won By performing the reel stop operation so that the bonus combination does not win, it becomes possible to continue the AT-related lottery state as long as the player desires.

  Therefore, the above-described configuration may be adopted in order to avoid giving an excessive profit to the player in a situation where a specific lottery result state can be maintained by a gaming operation. Conceivable.

  According to the configuration of (26) described above, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed both when the first lottery result is determined and when the second lottery result is determined. Can prevent the player from realizing that he has won. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a stop operation that does not intentionally win a special combination by the player. In addition, when the first lottery result is determined, even if the third lottery result is subsequently determined, since the lottery regarding the notification game is not performed, the lottery regarding the notification game is performed by the player's intentional game operation. There is no fear of continuing to give the opportunity.

  Further, in the configuration of (26) described above, the first lottery state and the second lottery state having different winning probabilities of the re-gamer are provided, and the second lottery state is more regenerated than the first lottery state. When the first winning result is determined in the first lottery state, the winning combination is set higher than the winning probability of the game player, and the next game after the game in which the first lottery result is determined is changed to the special combination. It is good also as a structure provided with the lottery state transfer means to which it transfers to a 2nd lottery state until the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the first lottery result is determined in the first lottery state, the winning probability of the re-gamer becomes high until the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed from the next game. Therefore, even if the lottery regarding the notification lottery is not performed after the first lottery result is determined, the player can play many games with a small investment.

(27) A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and a normal section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the advantageous section Section control means for transitioning to, gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state in the advantageous section in accordance with a predetermined transition condition, and advantageous section game count storage updated based on execution of the game performed during the advantageous section Means, a game section information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section, and information stored in at least the advantageous section game number storage means when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and An initialization unit that clears information stored in the game section information storage unit, and a specific information based on information stored in the advantageous section game number storage unit And the predetermined end condition includes that the information stored in the advantageous section game number storage means becomes a specific value, and the effect control means includes: When a predetermined special combination is won during the normal section, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is notified in the first mode, and the predetermined special combination is won during execution of the specific performance. May notify the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination in the second mode.

  Here, the “first mode” corresponds to, for example, when the symbol combination is notified by an image, the symbol combination to be notified is largely displayed at a conspicuous position such as the center of the screen. On the other hand, in the “second mode”, on the screen on which the specific effect being executed is displayed, for example, the symbol combination is reduced in the right corner of the screen (so that the display of the special effect is not hidden as much as possible). Applicable to display.

  In the conventional slot machine, various effects are performed in order to improve the interest of the game. Some of the slot machines that perform such effects include, for example, a state advantageous to the player (so-called bonus game or AT) in order to enhance the player's expectation, anxiety, achievement, satisfaction, superiority, etc. When there is a possibility of shifting to a game or the like, or when shifting to an advantageous state, there is also a special effect that is not normally performed. In a slot machine that performs such an effect, when a so-called bonus combination is won during a conventional performance, such as during an AT game, for example, the special combination being executed is interrupted and the bonus combination is Since an effect indicating that the player has been won is executed, the interest of the special effect is impaired, and there is a possibility that water may be poured into the exhilaration that the player is enjoying.

  Therefore, even if a special role is won during execution of a special performance, in order to be able to notify that the special role has been won while continuously executing the special performance, It is conceivable to adopt the configuration described above.

  According to the configuration of (27) described above, even if a special role is won during a special performance that suggests that the advantageous section is approaching, an aspect that does not interfere with the special performance being executed Since it is possible to notify that the special combination is won in the (second mode), it is possible to effectively continue the special performance while encouraging the player to win the special combination.

  In the above-described configuration (27), the advantageous section game number storage means stores a predetermined value different from “0” based on the fact that the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, and is stored in the advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which “1” is subtracted by “1” based on the execution of the received game (27 ′). With such a configuration, for example, when the specific value is set to “0” and the value stored in the advantageous section game number storage means is subtracted using the CPU register, the specific value is obtained by checking the zero flag. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU.

  In the configuration of (27) or (27 ′) described above, the notification mode of the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is such that the symbol combination is displayed smaller in the second mode than in the first mode. It may be. With such a configuration, when a predetermined special combination is won during a specific performance, the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined special combination is displayed smaller than in the normal section. The notification for notifying the player that the player has won can be prevented from interfering with a specific performance.

(28) Setting value information storage means for storing setting value information, lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery, and a notification game capable of notifying an operation mode of a stop switch that provides a game result advantageous to the player Notification game execution means for executing the state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, wherein the lottery means determines the lottery result, and the first lottery state and the second lottery state differ in the winning probability of the predetermined lottery result If the first lottery result including the special role is determined by the lottery means in the second lottery state, after the special game corresponding to the special role is finished, In the first lottery state, when it is in the first lottery state and in the informing game state, a privilege relating to the informing game state can be granted based on the fact that the second lottery means is determined by the lottery means. In addition, the probability that the second lottery state is determined based on the fact that the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the second lottery result is determined is set value information stored in the set value information storage means. It may be the same regardless.

  Some slot machines that perform conventional AT games end the AT game when a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of the AT game, and if a predetermined combination is won during the AT game, Some have increased the number of games that can be played (so-called addition). Here, since there has been no limitation on a predetermined role that triggers the addition (hereinafter also referred to as “additional role”), for example, a role having a different winning probability according to a so-called set value is added. It was also possible to. However, the reason why the winning winning probabilities differ depending on the set value is to adjust the number of benefits given to the player by winning the winning winning combination. Therefore, if the difference in the setting value affects the performance of the AT game, for example, although the winning probability of the role is generally lower than the other setting value, the game will be more than the other setting value by the AT game. It is possible to increase the benefits given to the user, and it is not preferable because it cannot play the original role of the set value.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the frequency of occurrence of a lottery regarding AT games (hereinafter also referred to as “AT lottery opportunity”) is not affected by the difference in the set value. Do not draw lots related to AT games during bonus games that start when a combination with a different winning probability is not used as an AT lottery opportunity or a bonus combination with a different winning probability depending on the set value wins. It is possible. However, if no lottery related to AT games is performed during bonus games, players will not be able to gain any AT benefits even after shifting to bonus games. It was.

  Therefore, even when a special role is won during the execution of a notification game in which an advantageous push order is notified, a privilege related to the notification game can be given, and the interest of the player can be enhanced as described above. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration (28).

  According to the configuration of (28) described above, when the special game is performed by determining the first lottery result including the special role in the second lottery state, the first lottery is performed after the special game is finished. If the second lottery result is determined in the first lottery state and the notification game state when the state is shifted to the state, it is possible to grant a privilege related to the notification game state. Thus, since the privilege regarding the notification game can be given after the special role is won, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, as a configuration different from the above (28), a set value information storage means for storing set value information, a lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery, and a stop that provides a game result advantageous to the player A notification game execution means for executing a notification game state capable of notifying an operation mode of the switch until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, wherein the winning probability of a predetermined winning combination is determined as a state in which the winning combination is determined by the lottery means The first lottery state, the second lottery state, and the third lottery state are different, and the third lottery state is a lottery state that can be transferred via at least the first lottery state, When the first lottery result including the special combination is determined by the lottery means when the lottery state is 2, the transition to the first lottery state is made after the special game corresponding to the special combination is completed. Transition conditions for It becomes possible to shift to the third lottery state by playing, and when it is the third lottery state and the notification game state, the notification game state is related to the fact that the second lottery result is determined by the lottery means. A privilege can be granted, and the probability that the second lottery result is determined based on the fact that the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed is stored in the setting value information storage means. It may be the same regardless of the set value information.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the special game is performed by determining the first lottery result including the special combination in the second lottery state, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the special game is finished. When the second lottery state is determined and the second lottery result is determined when the first lottery state is shifted to the third lottery state and the third lottery state and the notification game state are established, a privilege related to the notification game state can be granted. To do. Thus, since the privilege regarding the notification game can be given after the special role is won, the interest of the player can be improved.

(29) A normal section where notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not performed, an advantageous section where notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is possible, a credit number storage means for storing the number of credits, and set value information Set value information storage means capable of storing a lottery, lottery means for determining a lottery result related to the winning combination by lottery based on the set value information, and lottery state information storage means for storing lottery state information indicating a lottery state by the lottery means And a section control means for shifting to the normal section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, an advantageous section game number storage means updated based on the execution of the game performed during the advantageous section, and the advantageous section A game section information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not the game is completed, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section game number storage means The stored information, the information stored in the game section information storage means is at least initialized, the information stored in the credit number storage means, the information stored in the set value information storage means, the lottery The information stored in the state information storage means is not initialized, and the predetermined end condition includes that the information stored in the advantageous section game number storage means becomes a specific value. Good.

  Some conventional slot machines start AT games again based on the game results during the completed AT game even when the AT game is completed. In such a slot machine, an advantageous situation such as an AT game may continue beyond expectation, and in such a case, an excessive number of medals will be paid out due to one AT game. . For this reason, a player who has invested excessively in the game has the expectation that once the AT game is started, the investment may be regained, and the player's gambling will be greatly recognised. There was a risk of it.

  Therefore, it is possible not to become an excessively advantageous situation in a subsequent game by a game result performed in an advantageous situation, and to continue a game in an appropriate state after the advantageous situation is ended. In order to achieve this, it is conceivable to adopt the configuration (29).

  According to the above-described configuration, when the advantageous section is terminated, information on the advantageous section is initialized, so that there is no possibility that an excessive privilege is given to the player due to the game in the advantageous section once. be able to. On the other hand, since information related to games that are not related to the type of game section, such as the number of credits, setting value information, and lottery status information, is not initialized, the game in the normal section that is executed after the advantageous section ends normally is executed. it can.

(30) The normal section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not reported, the advantageous section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be reported, and the advantageous period of the total number of games executed A calculation means for calculating an advantageous section ratio indicating a ratio of the number of games and a display means including four indicators, and information indicating the ratio among the four indicators constituting the display means is first displayed. Display on the third display unit and the second display unit, and display the identification information indicating the type of ratio displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit on the third display unit and the fourth display unit. When the section ratio is displayed on the display means, if the value of the advantageous section ratio is equal to or greater than a specific value, the value of the advantageous section ratio displayed on the first display and the second display is blinked. May be.

  In conventional slot machines, various probabilities are set appropriately so that so-called bonus games and AT games are properly performed, and medals are not paid out excessively, so that the player's gambling is not remarkably reduced. Yes. In addition, slot machines are tested before they are put on the market, and it is confirmed that excessive medals are not paid out. However, conventionally, even if the result of the slot machine operation test is good, even after the slot machine is actually installed in the amusement hall and the operation is started, bonus games and AT games are properly performed. There was no way to check if it was.

  In view of this, it is conceivable to adopt the above-described configuration (30) in order to make it possible to confirm whether or not the slot machine after being installed in the amusement hall shows behavior deviating from the design value.

  According to the configuration of (30) described above, the identification information indicating the type of the ratio to be displayed is displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit, and the ratio value corresponding to the displayed identification information is set to the first value. Displayed on the first display and the second display. The ratio displayed on the first display and the second display displays the ratio of the number of games executed in the advantageous section (advantageous section ratio) of the total number of games, and the advantageous section. When the ratio is greater than or equal to a specific value, the displayed value flashes, so when the amusement hall staff, on-site inspectors, etc. visually observe the advantageous section ratio displayed on the display means, the value is It is possible to easily determine whether or not the design value deviates.

  Further, in the configuration of (30) described above, the counter means for counting the total number of games is provided, and when the count value by the counter means does not exceed a predetermined value, the advantageous section ratio is displayed on the display means. The identification information displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit may be displayed blinking.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the total number of games does not exceed the predetermined value, the identification information displayed on the third display unit and the fourth display unit flashes, so the first display unit and the second display unit It can be easily understood that the advantageous section ratio displayed on the display unit is not calculated after a sufficient number of trials.

10 Slot Machine 12 Body 14 Front Door 21 Display Window 22 Clearing Display LED
23 Replay indicator LED
24 Displayable LED
25 Game start indicator LED
26a, 26b, 26c Input indicator LED
27 Credit number display 28 Acquired number display 33 Checkout switch 34 1-bet switch 35 Maximum bet switch 36 Start switch 37L, 37C, 37R Stop switch 38 Selection switch 39 Determination switch 40L, 40C, 40R Reel 42L, 42C, 42R Stepping Motor 46 Hopper motor 52L, 52R Side lamp 64L, 64R Speaker 70 Image display device 72 Production lamp 74L, 74R Decoration lamp 82b Key switch 82c Setting / reset switch 83 Hopper 83a Medals storage section 87 Setting value display 100 Main control means 101 main control board 103 role monitor 110 winning combination determining means 115 reel control means 120 lottery state control means 125 game section control means 130 freeze control hand 140 notifying game control unit 145 roles ratio monitoring control unit 155 abnormality detecting means 160 LED display control unit 200 sub-control means 212 effect random means

Claims (3)

A normal section in which notification of the operation mode of the stop switch is not performed,
An advantageous section capable of informing the stop switch pressing operation mode;
A counter that counts the number of games played during the advantageous section;
A game section control means for making a transition from the advantageous section to the normal section when the count value reaches a predetermined value during the advantageous section,
The game section control means includes
A slot machine characterized in that when the count value reaches a predetermined value in the middle of a special game being performed in an advantageous section, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed while continuing the special game. When the special game has not been performed when the count value reaches a predetermined value in the advantageous section, the game enters a freeze state that delays the progress of the game, and the count value reaches the predetermined value in the advantageous section 2. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising: freeze control means that does not set the freeze state when the special game is being performed. The slot machine according to claim 2, wherein the freeze control means sets the freeze state when the special game is completed.

Images